THE ISIZULU. 
 
 A GRAMMAR 
 
 OP 
 
 THE ZULU LANGUAGE 
 
 ACCOMPANIED WITH 
 
 A HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION, 
 
 ALSO 
 
 i t b it n 3i H u ii i K . 
 
 BY 
 
 REV. LEWIS GROUT, 
 
 MISSIONARY OF THE AMERICAN BOARD ; AND CORRESPONDING .MEMBER OF 
 THE AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY. 
 
 PRINTED BY JAMES C. BUCHANAN, AT UMSUNDUSI 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 MAY & DAVIS, PIETERMARITZBURG; 
 J. CULLINGWORTH, DURBAN. 
 
 TRUBNER & CO., (JO, PATERNOSTER ROW. 
 1S59.
 
 In the hitherto unexplored crypts" and recesses of different languages, 
 lie entombed the memorials of the world's slow marches and solemn changes; 
 and, as the philologist has the high office of interpreting the voice of God, 
 in the Holy Scriptures, to the world, so is it his grand function to interpret 
 man to himself, and to unroll at his feet the scroll of the past as it has 
 actually been rolled up together in the gradual development of human 
 life and action. New Englander, Aug., 1858.
 
 Stacfc 
 
 G 
 
 - 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 ABOUT to leave .\r\v England tor Natal, in 1846, 1 tiled in various 
 ways and places to find something on the language of the people the 
 Amazulu- among whom I was hoping soon to labor. A few Kafir 
 words, from the writings of travelers, in defective orthography, and a 
 few remarks and examples in Kay 1 s Researches, comprised the result 
 of my efforts. Arriving here, I renewed my search, and found a brief 
 grammatical outline prepared by Dr. Adams, amounting to some three 
 or four dozen pages in manuscript; which, with Boyce's Grammar of 
 the Kafir Language, was all that could be found, at that time, in NataJ. 
 And yet, not all; for here were older missionaries, ready to answer 
 many practical questions; and here, too, were the natives themselves, 
 by hundreds and thousands, all expert in the use of their own tongue. 
 To these I at once applied myself; and, from that time to the present, 
 both as a source of pleasure, and from a sense of duty, I have made 
 the study of language, and especially the language of this people, a part 
 of my pursuit. 
 
 Nor was I disappointed in finding my way beset with many difficulties. 
 Without an interpreter ; without any thing that could be called a 
 grammar of the language; with only a small vocabulary, written in a 
 singular, insufficient, inappropriate alphabet; and among a people alike 
 ignorant and destitute, not only of a grammar, but also of all those 
 terms nouns and verbs, number and person, mode and tense, roots and 
 formatives, vowels and consonants of which the student and author of 
 grammar needs to make most frequent use; moreover, without a page, 
 without a single sentence, of genuine vernacular composition, with 
 which to commence the study of their own tongue in its purity, it was 
 evident, from the first, that an attempt to analyze their language, and 
 reduce its elements and forms to a complete system, would require much 
 time, and hard, patient study. Nor yet was it less evident that such an 
 attempt must be made. If the heathen tribes dwelling in the district of 
 Natal, Emainpondweni, Kwa Zulu, and in regions beyond, were to be 
 taught to read, and have the Scriptures in their own tongue, the first 
 of steps, as well towards a useful, worthy, enduring civilization, as 
 towards an intelligent. Jiving Christianity, then their teachers must 
 know their language, both how to speak it with ease and fluency, and 
 how to write it with readiness and accuracy. 
 
 A good grammar and dictionary of a language are among the things 
 of first importance to a Mission among heathen tribes. But Avars and 
 changes, and the generally unsettled state of the country, gave neither 
 encouragement nor opportunity to undertake the attainment of these 
 things, during the first ten years of missionary labor in this part of 
 Africa. At length, peace and order being enjoyed, our Mission also
 
 IV PREFACE 
 
 heniir enlarged and more established, at a meeting held by the same, 
 December, l::l'. it was resolved that the writer and Rev. .1. C. Bryant, 
 in connection with the Rev. Mr. Posselt of the Berlin Mission, be a 
 committee to |>i< pare a Zulu (inunmar for the press. I regret to say, 
 however, that I was not able to avail myself of the valuable assistance 
 which these devoted Zulu scholars were admirably qualified to reader. 
 Mr. Bryant was soon called away by death; and Mr. Posselt, who was 
 then laboring "at the Drakenberg," on the extreme border of the 
 Colony, wished the author to go on with the work without him. Writing 
 me irom tin I )rakenberg, October, 1852, he says: 
 
 "Your letter of the 23d of last month I have received; but it has 
 found me quite unprepared for that work to which you call rny attention. 
 Not, that I am not daily studying the Kafir [Zulu] language, and trying 
 to add a little more to at least my dictionary; but I say, for a grammar 
 as you propose. I am quite unprepared. 
 
 "According to my opinion, I am convinced that a grammar can be 
 the work of only one person. If more are at work, it will either lose 
 its necessary feature of having one cast, or it will never be finished. If 
 we were living so close to each other as to make consultation easy, then 
 I might be of so?"- assistance to you; but at such a distance, what can 
 I do to help you ? .Set to work, you alone, and show us all at once the 
 measure of your knowledge and of your ignorance, without "fear and 
 shame, and a grammar will soon make its appearance. But if you at 
 lii.M go round about and <jei our various opinions on the subject, then, 
 my brother, our great learning and wonderful wisdom will choke you. 
 This calling in the assistance of the brethren, in writing on and in the 
 Kaiir language, is calling in so many opponents; and for this reason it 
 is that we have nothing printed for our congregations, except a few little 
 sheets. Now, if I had a press, and paper, and a printer, I would drown 
 you aU with my publications, and would not be ashamed of their defects, 
 knowing well that first comes the rooter-and-digger-up, and then the 
 leveler. A man writing in Kafir can scarcely have any other object in 
 \iew than to be usct'ul in matters which are so very much needed. 
 Well, a grammar we want, and a spelling-book, and the Bible, and a 
 hymn-book. Now. commence at once, you have learning enough, 
 and knowledge enough of the language; but your skin is still too 
 tender, and you fear our stings. For these do not care ! 
 
 " I hope, dear brother, you understand my way of expressing my 
 opinions, and take all in the good brotherly humor with which I write; 
 for 1 know, however grave the face which the Yankees may have, they 
 ido not object to a little German pleasantry." 
 
 nlingly, about the middle of 1853, our Mission requested the 
 
 win. i alone "to prepare a grammar of the native language;" and not 
 
 ]<"i: after, a similar request was made by a Commission of the local 
 
 iinicnt, of which I had the honor to be a member. The Zulu 
 
 mar, m,u ntli-red to the |Hiblic, is i he result of these appointments 
 
 The work i., none the worse for having been long in hand; neither would 
 
 any particular interest to the public to enumerate the can- , 
 
 -which have delayed the completion till the present time. Havino- written 
 
 ..Is amid the labor of teaching, preaching, ami translating t 
 
 have naturally embodied the result of investigations which I felt oora-
 
 PREFACE, V 
 
 pelled to make for my own guidance. As a preparation, and a basis 
 for the work, not a little time and attention have been given to the col- 
 lecting of materials. Nothing could be done towards writing a genuine 
 Zulu Grammar without a genuine Zulu literature. ' What is wanted 
 and expected of a grammar,' as the writer has said in another place, 
 ' is, that it give a clear statement and correct illustration of the forms 
 and principles, the genius and idioms, of the language of which it treats. 
 Hence, most of my examples, especially those of any length and par- 
 ticular importance, as in Syntax, which makes a large part of the work. 
 have been taken, not from a foreigner's translation of other languages 
 into this, but, in some instances, from the correspondence and other 
 compositions of the natives, in their own tongue; though chiefly from 
 their conversation and discussions, narratives and speeches, on affairs of 
 their own and of deepest interest to themselves, their words and sen- 
 tences being caught at the time they were spoken, and written out verba- 
 tim et literatim from the lips of the speaker.' 
 
 As a means of enabling the Zulu scholar to prosecute his studies, and 
 make himself familiar with the laws, genius, and idioms of the language, 
 to a greater extent than would be possible from a perusal of isolated 
 examples, I have made a selection of pieces, of a diversified, continuous 
 character, from the manuscript literature on which the Grammar is 
 founded; and have had these pieces printed as an Appendix. Taken, 
 as they are, from sketches obtained from the more intelligent, though, 
 for the mosl part, utterly heathen natives, who spoke from their own 
 stand-point of feeling, belief, and observation; giving, as they do, an 
 account of the Zulu kings and some of their wars; narrating the arts 
 and performances of the izinyanga, a class of ^wm-priests, or so-called 
 doctors; exhibiting the views of the people respecting the abatakati, or 
 so-called witches; and comprising a collection of the songs, prayers, 
 and praises, which are wont to be said or sung, at home or abroad, to 
 the living and the dead, these selections help to give us some correct 
 notion of the religious opinions and moral character, the social life and 
 civil laws of the people, the forms and rules of whose language they 
 serve to illustrate. 
 
 In furnishing a translation of these extracts, I have not thought it 
 necessary to be so rigid as in the translation of examples in the body 
 of the Grammar. My aim has been to give, not so much the letter, 
 as the spirit of the original. Hence, in some places, where the text 
 contained an ambiguous word, or an abbreviated expression, as when 
 it says, he, il, or they did so and so, I have sometimes inserted the 
 noun in the translation, and said, Umpande, Umbulazi, the enemy, or the. 
 catlh did so and so; while, on the other hand, I have sometimes ne- 
 glected to render certain words, which would have a pleonastic or 
 tautological appearance in English. In respect to the songs, a good 
 translation is not easily made. The difficulty lies partly in the very 
 idiomatic, compressed, and highly figurative character of the language, 
 in which they are found; partly, in the sudden transitions of thought, 
 and most arbitrary change of subjects, in which they abound; and, 
 partly, in the fact that the language sometimes contains an allusion 
 to some circumstance, perhaps embodies some historical event, which 
 transpired ages ago, and of which there remains no account, no sign, 
 what the song contains. Some of these difficulties could b*
 
 Vi 
 
 .iv.mled or met, at le:M in n measure; hence, in some instances, I 
 ad.l.-d :i \\-\\- explanatory not. -s some in English, and some in 
 y,uln iu the verv words \ the |>:irty who inive me the song, or ot 
 others of wh..ni 1 made inquiry as to the import of the language in 
 question ; and sometimes the essence of an explanatory remark, ob- 
 tained from the native, has been embodied in the translation. 
 
 In i the typography of the work, it will be observed that 
 
 the printer has been obliged to make use of small Roman letters, in 
 some instances, where Italics or capitals should have been employed; 
 and to resort, at times, to other expedients. The reason offcthis was, 
 that we were disappointed in not finding a general assortment 
 Italics, capitals, J<.c., with the "lower-case" letters which we had 
 obtained to enable us to print in accordance with Dr. Lepsius's 
 "Standard Alphabet," which the Mission had resolved to "adopt;" 
 and also, because we failed to receive an entire fount of new type, 
 which we bad ordered to be made according to the " Standard," and 
 had supposed it would come to hand before the present work would 
 be ready for the press. Those who have had experience in a new 
 country, and in one far removed from the great centers of commerce 
 and manufactures, will know how to make allowance for exigencies of 
 this kind. 
 
 1 had hoped that while the body of the work should be going through 
 the press, time and strength would allow me to complete a paper for 
 the Introduction, in which an attempt would be made to exhibit some 
 points of correspondence in the grammatical structure of different 
 African languages, and notice some of the relations of the Hamitic to 
 other families. But a constant pressure of various other imperative 
 duties, has left no opportunity for this, a subject full of interest not 
 only as a philological pursuit, but also in its bearing upon the work of 
 Christian Missions. Unable to finish the above "paper" in season for 
 the Grammar, at least without postponing publication, which has been 
 unavoidably delayed already too long, I have inserted a chapter at the 
 close of Etymology, containing the substance of an article on a kindred 
 topic, Remarks and Observations on certain words, as found in the 
 Isizulu and its Cognates, a "paper " which was prepared, originally, 
 for the American Oriental Society, and of which a copy was sent to 
 that Society, something more than a year ago. 
 
 I cannot close these prefatory remarks without acknowledging my 
 obligations to all those ministers, merchants, editors, and other kind 
 friends, whether in Natal or at the Cape, who have encouraged me in 
 my work, and at different times, and in various ways, have shown a 
 readiness to forward the interests of this publication. Especially, to 
 several of Her Majesty's Representatives in this part of the world 
 to His Excellency SIR GEORGE GREY, K.C.B., Governor of the Cape 
 Colony, Ste., &.G.; to His Excellency SIR BENJAMIN PINE, formerly 
 Lieutenaat-Governor of Natal, now of St. Christopher's; and to His 
 Excellency JOHN SCOTT, Esq., Lieutenant-Governor of the Colony, 
 ice.; as also to the LEGISLATIVE COUNCIL of the Colony, for the 
 kind personal and official interest which they have shown, and for the 
 very substantial aid which they have granted, the writer begs to offer 
 his hearty thanks; and to avail himself of this opportuaity to give 
 them an assurance of his respect and sense of obligation.
 
 PREFACE. Vll 
 
 With most reverent and grateful acknowledgments to the God of 
 all grace, from whose ever-present aid I have derived strength and 
 resolution to finish these labors, and by the unfailing consolations of 
 whose Spirit I have been sustained in a time of peculiar need ; also 
 with a humble yet fervent prayer that He will cause these labors to 
 subserve the interests of His kingdom, the book is now respectfully 
 offered to those who have favored me with their subscriptions, and to 
 all who seek a thorough knowledge of the Zulu language. 
 
 LEWIS GROUT. 
 UMSUMOUZI MISSION STATION, 
 September, 1859.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Sect. 1 . Historical Notes concerning the Amazula . . xvii 
 
 Sect. 2. Philological Remarks respecting the Language of the 
 
 Amazulu and their Neighbors . . xix 
 
 Sect. 3. On the Origin and Character of the Orthographical 
 
 System employed in the present Work . . xxiii 
 
 Nature and Division of Grammar ... 1 
 
 PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. Letters and Sounds of the Language. 2 
 
 Sect. 1. Alphabet . . . . , . 
 
 Sect. 2. Division of the Letters 
 
 Sect. 3. Powers or Sounds of the Letters 
 
 A. Vowels .... 
 
 1. Their number, origin, and value 
 
 2. Quantity or length and strength of the Vowels 
 
 3. Double Vowels and Diphthongs 
 
 4. Euphonic Vowel-changes . 
 
 I. Contraction 
 
 II. Crasis .... 
 
 III. Apostrophe 
 
 IV. Commutation 
 
 V. Omission 
 
 B. Consonants .... 
 
 1 . Their number and value 
 
 2. Classification and Relationship of Consonants 
 Table of Alphabetic Gradations 
 
 Scheme of Cognates 
 
 Table of Compatible Letters 
 
 Consonantal Scheme 
 
 3. Combinations of Consonants 
 
 4. Euphony and Consonantal Changes . 
 
 5. Euphonic Letters 
 
 C. Clicks ..... 
 The dental click 
 
 The palatal click .... 
 The lateral click 
 Table of clicks 
 
 a 2
 
 X CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 CH AFTER II. Syllables and Words: or the Union of Sounds 
 and the Division of Discourse. 
 
 Sect. 1 . General Remarks 
 
 Sect. 2. Syllables 
 
 Sect. 3. Words 
 
 Sect. 4. Omission and Contraction of Syllables and Words 
 
 CHAPTER III. Zuluizing Foreign Words. 41 
 
 CHAPTER IV. Accentuation. 43 
 
 CHAPTER. V. Quantity of a Syllable. 46 
 
 CHAPTER VI. Punctuation, Italics, and Capitals. 47 
 
 PART II. ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. Definitions and Classifications. 49 
 
 Sect. 1 . Definitions and General Remarks . 49 
 
 Sect. 2. Classification of Words . 52 
 
 CHAPTER II. The Noun or Substantive. 53 
 
 Sect. 1. Kinds of Nouns . . . .53 
 
 I. Concrete Nouns ... 53 
 
 II. Abstract Nouns . . . .54 
 Sect. 2. Formation of Nouns . . 54 
 
 I. Primitive Nouns . . . .54 
 
 II. Derivative Nouns ... 54 
 
 A. Nouns derived from Nouns . . 54 
 
 B. Nouns derived from Adjectives . 57 
 
 C. Nouns derived from Verbs . .57 
 
 D. Nouns derived from other parts of Speech 60 
 
 III. Compound Nouns . . .60 
 Sect. 3. Nominal Incipients or Preformatives . . 62 
 Sect. 4. Classes and number of Nouns . . .63 
 
 I. First class .... 63 
 
 II. Second class . . . .64 
 
 III. Third class .... 65 
 
 IV. Fourth class . . . .65 
 
 V. Fifth class . ~ . . . / 65 
 
 VI. Sixth class . . . .66 
 
 VII. Seventh class ... 66 
 
 VIII. Eighth class . . . .66 
 Table of the classes of Nouns . . 67 
 
 Sect. 5. Irregular, Defective, and Redundant Nouns . 68 
 
 Sect. 6. Gender of Nouns . 69
 
 CONTENTS. Xi 
 
 Page. 
 
 Sect. 7. Cases of Nouns . . .71 
 
 I. The Nominative Case . .71 
 
 II. The Genitive Case . . .71 
 
 III. The Accusative Case . . 75 
 
 IV. The Locative Case . . .76 
 
 V. The Vocative Case ... 78 
 Scheme of the declension of Nouns . . .79 
 
 CHAPTER III. MjcrlirLS. 80 
 
 Sect. 1 . Derivation of Adjectives ... 80 
 
 A. From Nouns . . . .80 
 
 B. From Adjectives . .81 
 
 C. From Verbs . . . .81 
 Sect. 2. Classes of Adjectives ... 82 
 Sect. 3. Inflection of Adjectives . . . .82 
 
 A. As an Attributive ... 83 
 Table of Adjectives declined as Attributives . 84 
 
 B. As a Predicate .... 84 
 Table of Adjectives declined as Predicates . 86 
 
 Sect. 4. Numeral Adjectives ... 87 
 
 A. Cardinal Numbers . . . .88 
 Table of Cardinal Numbers . . 90 
 
 B. Ordinal Numbers . . .91 
 
 C. Collective Numerals . .91 
 Sect. 5. Indefinite Adjectives . . .92 
 
 CHAPTER IV. Pronouns. 94 
 
 Sect. 1 . Classification of Pronouns . . .95 
 
 Sect. 2. A. Personal Pronouns ... 96 
 
 A. The Preformative Pronoun . . .98 
 
 B. The Simple Pronoun . . 99 
 
 C. The Conjunctive Pronoun . . .100 
 
 D. The Definitive Pronoun 101 
 
 E. The Possessive Pronoun . .102 
 
 F. The Reflective Pronoun . 102 
 Table of Personal Pronouns . . .103 
 
 Sect. 3. B. Relative Pronouns . . . 104 
 
 Table of Relative Pronouns . . .107 
 
 Sect. 4. C. Demonstrative Pronouns . . 108 
 
 Table of Demonstrative Pronouns . .109 
 
 Sect. 5. D. Interrogative Pronouns . . . 110 
 
 CHAPTER V. Verbs. 112 
 
 Sect. 1. Classification of Verbs . . 113 
 A. Regular and Irregular, Primitive, Derivative, and 
 
 Compound Verbs . . . .113 
 
 I. Primitive Verbs 113
 
 XU CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 II. Derivative Verbs 
 
 A. Radical species 
 
 B. Relative species 
 
 C. Causative species 
 
 D. Reciprocal species 
 
 E. Reflective species 
 
 F. Subjective species 
 
 G. Deponent species 
 H. Diminutive species 
 
 Compound species 
 
 III. Compound Verbs 
 
 Sect. 2. Classification of Verbs (continued) . 120 
 B. Principal and Auxiliary; Transitive and Intransitive ; 
 
 Active and Passive; Defective and Idiomatic Verbs 120 
 
 A. Notional Verbs . . . 120 
 
 B. Relational Verbs 
 Idiomatic Verbs 
 
 Sect. 3. Properties of Verbs . . .130 
 
 A. On the Modes . . 130 
 
 I. The Infinitive Mode . .131 
 
 II. The Indicative Mode . 132 
 
 III. The Potential Mode . . 133 
 
 IV. The Optative Mode . 134 
 
 V. The Imperative Mode . 135 
 
 VI. The Subjunctive Mode . 137 
 
 B. On the Tenses . .138 
 
 A. General Remarks . . 138 
 
 B. The number of Tenses . .140 
 c. Tenses of the several modes . . 141 
 
 A. Tenses of the indicative mode . .141 
 
 I. Present tense . . 141 
 
 II. Past tense . . .146 
 
 III. Future tense . . 154 
 
 IV. Present perfect tense . 159 
 
 V. Past perfect tense . 161 
 
 VI. Future perfect tense . 163 
 
 B. Tenses of the potential mode 166 
 
 I. Present tense . . .167 
 
 II. Past tense . 168 
 
 III. Future tense . . .169 
 
 IV. Present perfect tense 169 
 
 V. Past perfect tense . 170 
 
 VI. Future perfect tense . 171 
 
 C. Tenses of the optative mode . .172 
 
 D. Tenses of the imperative mode 179 
 
 E . Tenses of the subjunctive mode . 180 
 Sect. 4. Number and person . 182 
 Sect. 5. Conjugation . . .182 
 
 Synoptic table of a Regular Verb . 183 
 
 Sect. 6. Irregular Verbs 208 
 
 Sect. 7. Defective Verbs 215
 
 CONTENTS. XIII 
 
 Page. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. Mverbs. Jlt> 
 
 I. Adverbs of Time . J13 
 
 II. Adverbs of Place . . . 219 
 
 III. Adverbs of Manner . . .219 
 
 IV. Interrogative Adverbs . . 220 
 
 V. Numeral Adverbs . . . 220 
 
 VI. Various kinds of Adverbs . . . 220 
 Table of Pronomino-Locative Adverbs . 222 
 
 CHAPTER VII. Prepositions. 223 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. Conjunctions. 225 
 
 CHAPTER IX. Interjections. 226 
 
 CHAPTER X. Remarks and Observations on Jldcerbs, Prepositions, 
 
 and Conjunctions in the Jsizulu and its Cognates. 227 
 
 PART III. SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. Propositions and Sentences. -41 
 
 Sect. 1. Definitions and Remarks . . . 244 
 
 Sect. 2. Simple Propositions . . . 246 
 
 Sect. 3. Modified Subject . . .251 
 
 Sect. 4. Modified Predicate . . . 253 
 
 Sect. 5. Variety of Combinations and Propositions . 255 
 
 I. The Predicative combination . . 255 
 
 II. The Attributive combination . . 255 
 
 III. The Objective combination . . 256 
 Sect. 6. Compound Sentences . . . 257 
 
 I. Co-ordinate Sentences . 257 
 
 II. Subordinate Sentences . . . 259 
 
 III. Incidental members . . 262 
 
 CHAPTER II. Syntax of the Noun, 263 
 
 Sect. 1. The Nominative . . .263 
 
 Sect. 2. The Genitive . . . 266 
 
 I. In respect to origin . . . 266 
 
 II. In respect to ownership . . 266 
 
 III. In respect to designation . . -67 
 Genitive subjective and objective . . 269 
 
 Sect. 3. The Accusative . . , . .272 
 
 Sect. 4, The Locative . . 277 
 
 Sect. 5. The Vocative . 278
 
 X IV CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 CHAPTER III. Syntax of the Adjective. 279 
 
 Sect. 1 . Agreement of Adjectives 
 
 Sect. 2. Of Degrees, and Particular Words 
 
 Sect. 3. Numerals . 
 
 CHAPTER IV. Syntax of the Pronoun. 301 
 
 Sect. 1. Agreement 
 
 Sect. 2. Personal Pronouns 
 
 A. The Pronoun used as a Substitute . 307 
 
 B. The Pronoun used as a Complement 312 
 Sect. 3. Relative Pronouns 
 
 Sect. 4. Demonstrative Pronouns . 326 
 
 Sect. 5. Interrogative Pronouns . 328 
 
 CHAPTER V. Syntax of the Verb. 331 
 
 Sect. 1. Agreement, Combination, and Expansion 331 
 
 Sect. 2. Government of Verbs . . . 335 
 
 Continuity of Verbs . . 339 
 
 Sect. 3. Syntax of the Modes and Tenses . 342 
 
 I. Infinitive Mode . . 344 
 
 II. Indicative Mode . . 345 
 
 III. Potential Mode . . .345 
 
 IV. Optative Mode . . 347 
 
 V. Imperative Mode . . . 347 
 
 VI. Subjunctive Mode . . 349 
 
 A. Present tense . . . 352 
 
 B. Past tense . . 354 
 
 C. Future tense . . 355 
 
 D. Present perfect tense . 356 
 
 E. Past perfect tense . . 356 
 
 F. Future perfect tense . . 357 
 Sect. 4. Idiomatic Verbs, Forms, and Uses . 358 
 
 CHAPTER VI. Syntax of tlie Particle. 365 
 
 A. The Adverb . . . . . 366 
 
 B. The Preposition . . . 366 
 
 C. The Conjunction .... 368 
 
 D. The Interjection . . . 368 
 
 CHAPTER VII. Syntax of Sentences. 369 
 
 I. .Co-ordinate Copulative Sentences . 369 
 
 [. Co-ordinate Adversative Sentences . 369 
 
 III. Co-ordinate Disjunctive Sentences 370 
 
 IV. Co-ordinate Causal Sentences . 370 
 
 V. Subordinate Substantive Sentences 371
 
 CON IF; xv 
 
 fgge. 
 
 VI. Subordinate Adjective Sentences 371 
 
 VII. Subordinate Adverbial Sentences . . 372 
 
 VIII. Incidental Sentences . . 373 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. Collocation of Words 374 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I. Historical Sketch of Chaka and Dingane . 377 
 Sketch of the same by another . . . 382 
 
 II. Autobiography ..... 383 
 
 III. The Princes Kechwayo and Umbulazi, and the Battle 
 
 between them . . . . 387 
 
 IV. Fleeing from the Foe aad swimming the Tugela . . 394 
 
 V. Another's account of the Princes' Battle at the Tugela . 396 
 
 VI. Umpande's Instructions to his People in respect to his Sons 399 
 
 VII. On going to inquire of the Inyanga, or Priest, in case of 
 
 sickness .... 401 
 
 VIII. Another's account of going to the Inyanga . . 409 
 
 IX. On the Matakati, or Wizards . . 412 
 Another's account of the Wizards . .414 
 
 X. Capturing and killing a Wizard . . 415 
 
 XI. On becoming an Inyanga, or Priest . .417 
 
 XII. Song in honor of Seazangakona . . . 418 
 
 XIII. 1. Song in honor of Chaka . . 420 
 2. Another Song in honor of Chaka . . 422 
 
 XIV. Song in honor of Dingane . . 422 
 
 XV. Song in honor of Umpande . . . 424 
 
 XVI. A collection of Prayers and Ditties . . . 426 
 
 1. A Song in honor of the Shades . . 426 
 
 2. Praise and Prayer to the Dead . . 427 
 
 3. Another Prayer to the Shades . . 427 
 
 4. Specimen of a War-Song . . 428 
 
 5. Another specimen of a War-Song 428 
 
 6. Another War-Song .... 428 
 
 7. Song of Triumph . . . 428 
 
 8. Harvest Song .... 429 
 
 9. Song for a lost Cow . . . 429 
 
 10. Song on the destruction of Porcupines . . 429 
 
 1 1 . A Lament .... 430 
 
 12. Song on a Buffalo-Hunt . . . 430 
 
 13. Parting Song after a Hunt . . 430 
 
 14. Domestic Song . . . .431 
 
 15. Another Domestic Song . . . 431
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page xxxv, line 5,/or plilological read philological. 
 Page 6, line 9, for betwen read between. 
 Page 79, line 19, for suplication read supplication. 
 Page 108, line 34, for demonstrative read demonstrative 
 
 (in a few copies only). 
 
 Page 296, line 21, after semasumini insert amabili. 
 Page 350, line 2, for bizwa read bizwe. 
 Page 407, line 5,/or um'laumbe read um'laumbi.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 SECT. 1. 
 HISTORICAL NOTES CONCERNING THE AMAZULU. 
 
 IN respect to the history of the Amazulu, or Zulu 
 nation, if we go no further hack than the memory of the 
 oldest inhabitant reaches, we find the real Amazulu a 
 comparatively small tribe, living on the Imfolosi and 
 neighboring rivers, mostly between the twenty-eighth and 
 twenty-ninth degrees, south latitude, and between the 
 thirty-first degree east longitude and the Indian Ocean. 
 They are reported to have come down, at some former 
 period, from a more inland region on the west and north- 
 west. The line of Zulu chiefs, so far as we can now 
 ascertain, is the present incumbent Umpande, who suc- 
 ceeded his brother Dingane, who succeeded his brother 
 Chaka, who succeeded his father Usenzangakona, who 
 was the son of Jama, who was the son of Urnakeba, 
 who was the son of Upunga. Some, however, give 
 Unihuzi, in place of Umakeba, as father of Jama. 
 
 Chaka was born about the year 1787. His father, 
 Usen/angakona, was rich in wives and children, having 
 some twenty-five or thirty of the former, and no one 
 knows how many of the latter. Between him and one of 
 his wives, Umnandi (the sweet one), the mother of 
 Chaka, there arose some cause of bitterness, which is 
 common, actually inevitable, in a social state where 
 polygamy is the basis. In consequence of this diffi- 
 culty ^between husband and wife, which increased with 
 the father's jealousy of the precocious and aspiring 
 youth, the mother took the boy Chaka, and fled, first to 
 the Amakwabe, and then to the Arnatetwa*or Umtetwa. 
 whose chief at that time was Udingiswayo. The Ama- 
 tetwa, reported to have come down along the coast from 
 
 3
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the N.K. at a former period, were now a powerful tribe, 
 living neighbors to the Amazulu ; and probably the same 
 which are spoken of in some books, of an ancient date, 
 under the name of Vatwa or Batwa. 
 
 Udingiswayo gave Chaka and his mother to the care of 
 Ungomana, an induna, or chief counselor of his tribe. 
 Here the young prince passed most of his youth, and 
 received all the training, which he had, for royalty. On 
 the death of his father, he was sent back by Udingiswayo, 
 at the age of about thirty, to take possession of the 
 kingdom. Arriving home, he found his father's place 
 already filled by another son Usigujana, said by some to 
 have been the rightful successor. Chaka, however, soon 
 succeeded in deposing and destroying his brother, and 
 in taking the power into his 'own hands. No sooner 
 had he ascended the throne of his father, and fairly 
 asserted his authority over the Amazulu, than a large 
 portion of the Amatetwa joined him, and asked his aid 
 against another tribe with whom they were at war. 
 
 At the head of a tribe whose very name (from izulu, 
 heaven) is equivalent to the celestials, now increased in 
 numbers, in strength, in courage, by a voluntary alliance 
 from another powerful tribe; himself an ambitious man, 
 of royal blood, in the prime of life, already adored as of 
 more than human origin, panting for forays, victory, and 
 plunder, Chaka sallied forth in person at the head of his 
 warriors, soon conquered the tribe against which his aid 
 was sought, took many of them captives, and added 
 them to his own nation. Cruel and bloody as this 
 mighty African conqueror is reputed to have been, or as 
 he really became in the progress of his triumphs, his 
 policy, especially at first, was not so much the utter 
 destruction of the neighboring tribes, as to subdue, and 
 incorporate them with his own. Pursuing this policy, 
 he conquered one tribe after another, located them here 
 and there among his own people, taking eare,so to 
 distribute, guard, and govern them, as to hold them in 
 the most complete awe and subordination to himself. 
 In this way be seems to have gone on, five or six years, 
 without much interruption, increasing the number of his 
 subjects and tributaries, the strength of hib army, and
 
 THE ISIZUf.U AND ITS COGNATES. XIX 
 
 the extent of his dominions ; so that, in 1822, his con- 
 quering power was felt from the Umzimvuhu, or St. 
 John's, on the south-west, to Inhambane on the north- 
 east, and from the sea coast inland across at least half 
 the continent of Africa. 
 
 It was while his army was away, on a distant expe- 
 ditiou to the north-east, that Ohaka, who remained at 
 home, was assassinated at his great kraal Tukusa, on the 
 Umvoti, about the 23d of September, 1828. Among the 
 conspirators was his own brother Dtngane. But of this 
 event, as also of Dingane and his brother Umpande, and 
 the more recent most prominent political movements of 
 the Zulu nation; to say nothing of their social state and 
 moral character, as much of an outline as can be given 
 iii the present work, may be found in the Appendix. 
 
 SECT. 2. 
 
 PHILOLOGICAL REMARKS RESPECTING THE LAN- 
 GUAGE OF THE AMAZULU AND THEIR NEIGHBORS. 
 
 The Zulu language is spoken not only by the native 
 inhabitants of Natal, who are supposed to amount to 
 a hundred and thirty or forty thousand, but also by the 
 entire nation of the Amazulu, and some of their tribu- 
 taries, to the North and East of the Tugela river, the 
 north-eastern boundary of the Colony. To be sure, there 
 are many slight dialectic and tribal modifications of 
 this language. Nor is this strange, when we consider 
 that the Zulu nation, as it now exists, and has existed 
 for the last thirty-five or forty years, is made up of several 
 smaller tribes, which were conquered and consolidated 
 in the days of Chaka. It is evident, however, that the 
 language of all these tribes, or clans, was substantially 
 one, even before the days of Chaka ; as it is also evident 
 that, since that time, there has been a steady refin- 
 ing elevating process, the language of the conquered
 
 \\ INTRODUCTION. 
 
 being ^dually fashioned to the higher standard and 
 more fixed character of their superiors. Nor can we 
 believe that any of the African languages or dialects 
 come to us, at the present time, in a state of greater 
 original purity than the Isizulu. 
 
 II we look at the history of nations and languages, 
 \ve shall find, generally, that those have been most 
 affected and modified in character, which have come 
 most into connection and collision with other nations 
 and languages ; and, so again, that those which have 
 retained their original character longest and least af- 
 fected, are such as have been most isolated from nations 
 and languages of a different character. 
 
 Again, nations and languages have generally gone in 
 waves one after another over the different parts of the 
 earth, the foremost wave being the last to feel the in- 
 fluence of those which follow. And we have examples of 
 nations and languages, retiring into some nook, or lodg- 
 ing under the lee, as it were, and there retaining their 
 original character to a wonderful extent, for ages ; while 
 their more exposed neighbors have, in the mean time, 
 undergone most rapid and wonderful changes. 
 
 Now, there is reason to believe that this general and 
 very natural law has held in respect to the nations and 
 languages of this continent ; and that there is no part of 
 South Africa, where foreign influence has come in later, 
 or been felt less, than in case of the language and tribes 
 of which we speak, particularly the Zulu. All these 
 nations have evidently come in, centuries since, wave 
 after wave, from the north, and passed along, from age to 
 age, to the south, each crowding and crowded on, until 
 the foremost reached the southern limits of the continent. 
 At the same time, also, the interior tribes have generally 
 turned outward, towards the sea, in their progress. Facts 
 might be given in detail, showing this to have been clearly 
 the case in this part of Africa, and also in some other 
 parts of the continent. 
 
 At the southern extremity, however, the foremost 
 wave, of the Zulu class, met others, of a different 
 character. Thus, the Kafirs or Amakosa came in 
 contact, with the Hottentots, and afterwards with the
 
 THE ISI7fTI.lI AND ITS rOGNATES. XXJ 
 
 Dutch and English, all using languages totally different 
 from that class to which the Zulu belongs ; while the 
 Arabic and other tongues have had their modifying in- 
 fluences upon the languages of the same class, further 
 to the north. In a word, all historical analogy and facts 
 go to indicate that, in this part of Africa, we may properly 
 suppose the original characteristics of that great family 
 of languages, to which the Zulu, Sechuana, Kafir, and 
 other sisters belong, have been preserved most perfect. 
 
 This view of the subject invests the study of the Isi- 
 zulu with peculiar interest, and makes a knowledge of 
 it highly subservient to a right understanding of some of 
 the apparently anomalous forms and principles of kindred 
 dialects. Nor is it less true that a careful study of these 
 kindred dialects will greatly facilitate the progress of 
 the scholar who aims at a perfect knowledge of the 
 Isi/ulu. " With such endless connections, does each 
 language run into arid out of others, before, around, and 
 
 O ' * * 
 
 behind it, that no one can be studied with any adequacy 
 by itself alone." 
 
 But upon this subject, the rank, relations, and cor- 
 respondences of the Isizulu and other African languages, 
 especially those which prevail in the southern half of 
 the continent, we cannot enter at present, much less in 
 this connection. A thorough, complete discussion would 
 require more time and room than we can now command; 
 and we are happy to believe that the able and learned 
 philologist Dr. VV. H. J. Bleek, with the best of means 
 within his reach, having free access to SIR GEORGE 
 GREY'S most extensive, admirable library of African 
 books, is prosecuting this branch of study with all that 
 enthusiasm which the subject is fitted to inspire in the 
 true lover of linguistic and ethnographical science. 
 What another has said of all languages of philology 
 in general is especially true of those tongues of which 
 we now speak : " There is no more inviting field of 
 research, now open before an earnest, deep-searching 
 mind. Here is a land abounding in mines of gold and 
 precious stones. Labor is sure of its reward, and glit- 
 tering prizes on every side await discovery." 
 
 Those who are not well supplied with the most recent
 
 xx jl INTRODUCTION. 
 
 philological works, and yet may be interested in knowing 
 the opinion of the ablest writers of the present day, in 
 respect to the place which the Isizulu and its nearest 
 cognates hold, in the great family of language, will be 
 glad to see a critical note " On the Original Lan- 
 guage," by Professor Gibbs; in which he says : 
 
 " Those who hold to the unity of the human race hold of course to an 
 original language. Those who hold to an original language naturally 
 wish to show how and in what order the different families of languages 
 have separated themselves from the main stock. 
 
 " Chevalier Bunsen and Max Muller have been laboring on this sub- 
 ject with great assiduity, and think to have arrived at important results. 
 
 " The interesting problem before them is this, to place the various 
 families of languages in the line of successive, development. 
 
 "The earliest type of language is supposed to have been mono- 
 syllabic. Many substantial reasons might be given in favor of this 
 supposition. 
 
 "The Chinese and other monosyllabic languages of Asia went off 
 from the main stock, while it was yet in a rude or inorganic state. 
 These languages have been called family languages. Some cause, to us 
 unknown, seems to have stereotyped these languages in this early stage 
 of their existence, and to have prevented their further development. 
 
 "At a subsequent period, WHEN THE MAIN STOCK HAD ASSUMED SOME- 
 WHAT OF AN ORGANIC CHARACTER, THE TARTAR OR TURANIAN LANGUAGES 
 
 DETACHED THEMSELVES ON ONE SIDE, and Hamitism, or the language 
 of Egypt, on the other; THE FORMER WITH A SLIGHT TINCTURE OF 
 IRANI ANISM, OR TENDENCY TO THE INDO-EUROPEAN CHARACTER, and the 
 latter with a tincture of Sheraitism. These languages are called nomad 
 languages as having advanced further than the family languages. 
 
 " At a still later period the Shemitic and Iranian or Indo-European 
 languages developed themselves in opposite directions. These are called 
 political or state languages, as exhibiting the highest degree of refine- 
 ment. But although thus contrasted, they exhibit, when viewed from a 
 more distant stand-point, many undoubted resemblances. 
 
 "To complete this view, the languages of America and Oceanica are 
 thought to be connected with the Turanian; and the African are united 
 conjecturally with the Hamitic or Coptic, AND PERHAPS, FAR SOUTHWARD, 
 WITH THE TURANIAN. 
 
 "This theory only settles the order of development. It determines 
 nothing as to the time which is requisite. 1 ' 
 
 As bearing upon the same subject, and in further 
 illustration of it, I will give a few jottings and extracts 
 which I made, a few years since, from a fresh and able 
 discussion of the subject, in the Edinburgh Philosophical 
 Journal. Not having the work now before me, I can 
 only give an abstract of what was said on this point, 
 the notes which I made, at the time, for my own
 
 THE IS1ZULU AND ITS COGNATES. XX111 
 
 pleasure ; according to which, the able writer very 
 justly says, in substance : 
 
 The recent researches of those who have made themselves best ac- 
 quainted with the languages of Southern Africa, have entirely destroyed 
 all previous unfounded notions respecting the prevalence of a vast num- 
 ber of rude and poor tongues among them. Excepting the Hottentots 
 and Bushmen, it appears that the nations peopling all that vast region 
 of Africa which lies south of the equator, may be glottologically con- 
 sidered as forming but a single family the Kafir tongue of the South 
 having close relations of affinity both with the Congo dialects which it 
 joins on the West, and with the Galla language, which stretches down 
 to meet it along the Eastern coast. Now, these languages are stated by 
 Chevalier Bunsen to retain vestiges of primitive relationship with the 
 great tripartite stock whence originated the Japetic, Semitic, and 
 ( 'hainitic (or Egyptian) tongues. But they evince a much higher de- 
 velopment than the last of these, AND THIS DEVELOPMENT is RATHER m 
 THE JAPETIC than in the Semitic direction. According to Bunsen again, 
 the ancient Egyptian language presents indications of a historical con- 
 nection with both the Semitic and Japetic groups, and must, therefore, 
 have been of Asiatic origin, its divergence having taken place before 
 the two groups were isolated from each other. The Egyptian is much 
 less flexible and full grown than either the Semitic or Sanscrit. It was 
 a form of speech only just emerging from the monosyllabic state and the 
 absolute isolation of words; and it expressed very clumsily and incom- 
 pletely, by mere agglomeration, that to which the Semitic and Japetic 
 tongues could give much more distinct utterance by the system of in- 
 flections. The Egyptian mind, mummified like the Chinese, was not 
 fitted to carry forward this development, and the original language gave 
 war, therefore, before the intrusion of foreign elements. Whether these 
 South African languages have passed through the form which has re- 
 mained stationary in the Egyptian, or whether they were derived from 
 that still earlier Asiatic formation in which the Egyptian itself originated, 
 is a question which, there is hope, that the combined study of the 
 languages of Egypt and of Southern and Central Africa, will soon 
 
 SECT. 3. 
 
 ON THE ORIGIN AND CHARACTER OF THE ORTHO- 
 GRAPHICAL SYSTEM EMPLOYED IN THE PRESENT 
 
 WORK. 
 
 The author had designed to dispose of this part of 
 the Grammar, with a single page or two of remarks on
 
 XXIV INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the origin and introduction of the alphabet and ortho- 
 graphical system, of which use is made in the Zulu 
 portion of the present work. But certain circumstances, 
 recent, peculiar, unexpected, of which, however, a 
 notice, much more a particular narration, may be 
 omitted, have induced me to go more thoroughly into 
 the subject. 
 
 Some of the more important initial steps, taken by 
 the American Zulu Mission, in respect to the ortho- 
 graphy of this language, were laid before the public, 
 some five or six years ago, in the Journal of the 
 American Oriental Society, third volume, second num- 
 ber, from which the following extract is made : 
 
 " The American Mission at Natal issued a circular address, more 
 than a year since, to the missionaries and friends of education in 
 Africa, urging the importance of an attempt to secure a uniform ortho- 
 graphy for all cognate African languages, and proposed a plan by 
 which it might be effected. * 
 
 " The Mission had felt for some time, that the orthography used for 
 the Zulu language was not fully adequate to its wants. Accordingly, 
 in May, 1849, a committee of three was appointed to consult, in respect 
 to it, with other Societies in this Colony, and report to the Mission such 
 suggestions and alterations as might seem to them important. In Sep- 
 tember, the committee reported, and recommended, among other things, 
 four new characters or signs. The report was adopted, and the com- 
 mittee were instructed to procure the proposed new characters. 
 
 " About this time, however, or a little after, several articles appeared 
 in different places and periodicals, going to show a clo?f relation be- 
 tween many of the languages of Southern Africa. And it also soon 
 appeared, that several of the Missionary Societies in different parts of 
 Africa, in reducing cognate dialects to writing, were introducing new 
 and peculiar characters or symbols, for the representation of certain 
 sounds which had no existence in languages already known and written; 
 and that some others, who had as yet made no such change by the 
 introduction of new characters, were feeling the necessity for something 
 of the kind. Among the Societies which have already made use of 
 several new characters in writing some of the African tongues, may be 
 named the Norwegian at Natal, the English Church Missionary Society 
 mi the East Coast, and the American Board at the Gabun on the West 
 Coast. And in a recently published Kafir Grammar by the Wesley ans 
 in Kafirland, it is said that 'the combinations tsh, hi, kl, and dhl would 
 have been better represented by single characters.' 'A separate 
 character, also, either for the guttural sounds, or for the foreign sound 
 (of r), would certeinly be an improvement, and to the natives especially, 
 a matter of convenience.' ' 
 
 In view of some of these facts, the subject of a general
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXV 
 
 uniformity in orthography was discussed at a meeting of 
 the American Mission in Natal, in December, 1849, 
 and a committee appointed to prepare and issue a cir- 
 cular address to friends of missions and of learning in 
 Africa, as above stated. 
 
 The object of this committee was "to confer" with 
 all the missionary societies in Southern Africa, and 
 also with a general committee in Christian lands, of 
 which Dr. Adamson and Professors Gibbs and Salisbury 
 were proposed to be members, (together " with others, 
 should it be thought expedient to enlarge the number" 
 of said committee,) " in respect to the orthography of 
 the African dialects." And the object of the circular 
 was " to recommend a uniform orthography for all the 
 cognate dialects of Africa, and to propose some plan by 
 which it might be secured." 
 
 " Not long after the issue of the circular (March 
 1850), a little tract of half a dozen pages, prepared by 
 Henry Venn, Church Missionary House (England), 
 October, 1848, and containing ' Rules for reducing un- 
 written languages to alphabetical writing in Roman 
 characters,' was named, and afterwards forwarded to 
 some of our number, by the kindness of Rev. J. J. 
 Freeman, Cor. Sec. of the Lond. Miss. Society." And 
 in due time, in accordance with a provision in the " cir- 
 cular" already noticed, "to enlarge the number" of 
 the general committee, and at the suggestion of some 
 of the members whom we had already named, as noticed 
 above, the Rev. Henry Venn of London, Dr. Grand- 
 pierre of Paris, Professor Holmboe of Christiania, and 
 Professor Pott of Halle were invited to act as members 
 of the general committee, with Dr. Adamson and Pro- 
 fessors Gibbs and Salisbury. 
 
 It is supposed that the invitation to Professor Pott 
 never reached him. All the other six took a most praise- 
 worthy interest and active part in trying to advance the 
 movement, and provide a standard alphabet especially 
 suited to all the languages of Africa. Dr. Adamson 
 procured a republication of our "circular" in one of 
 the Cape papers ; and in the same journal, the Observer, 
 he furnished, also, something more than four columns of 
 
 4
 
 XXVI INTRODUCTION. 
 
 valuable remarks and suggestions, all designed and ad- 
 mirably fitted to promote the enterprise. Professors 
 Gibbs and Salisbury, conductors of the American 
 Oriental Journal, were at the trouble and expense of 
 getting tvpe for many new characters to print an essay, 
 * 'lit by us, on the phonology and orthography of the 
 Zulu language ; and to this they' were kind enough to 
 append several pages of valuable criticism, remarks, and 
 suggestions. Dr. Grandpierre gave a ready response 
 to the request that he be placed on the general com- 
 mittee, professing to "take a great interest in the 
 object," and making a generous offer of his " services " 
 to promote it. Professor Ilolrnboe sent to the American 
 Oriental Society a very valuable paper, entitled "Ideas 
 respecting an Alphabet suited to the Languages of 
 Southern Africa," the substance of which was pub- 
 lished in the Journal of that Society, Vol. v., No. ii. 
 \\ < know not for how long a time the " comprehensive 
 mind " of the Rev. II. Venn may have been occupied 
 with the subject under consideration, previous to 1848 ; 
 but all who have seen the "Rules" which he issued 
 at that time, and who know anything of his subsequent 
 labors to provide an alphabet which should be suited to 
 the African languages, and worthy to be looked upon 
 as a general standard, will love to hold him in honor, 
 and give willing testimony to his assiduity and good 
 judgment. 
 
 We are now prepared for an introduction, both to the 
 Standard Alphabet for reducing unwritten languages 
 and foreign graphic systems to a uniform orthography 
 in European letters," and to its distinguished author, 
 4 Dr. R. Lepsius, Professor at the University, and 
 Member of the Royal Academy, Berlin." And how 
 can this be had in any way so well as in the language of 
 an extract from the notice which the Hon Sec H 
 Venn and other officers of the Church Missionary So- 
 ciety have prefixed to "this unpretending but admirable 
 Essay of a distinguished German scholar?" 
 
 "I't,,. 'UTfl of a fixed system of orthography," says the honorable 
 '"""v. ''indue* several of the rnisionary Societies of London 
 
 * ago, to agree upou ' rules of reducing unwritten language..
 
 THE JTANPARD ALPHABET. XXVII 
 
 to alphabetical writing in Roman characters.' Those rules, (hough im- 
 [t-i'ti-ct, liave been already applied with success to several African 
 languages. -The societies were assisted in this work by the late Pro- 
 Lee of Cambridge, by Mr. Norris of London, and by Professor 
 Lepsius of Berlin; but feeling it to be necessary for the establishment 
 of any stamlard system, that an alphabet, should be presented in a more 
 complete form, and that (he scientific principles should be explained 
 upon which it was constructed. Professor Lepsius. at their request, 
 kimllv undertook this work, and has furnished the following admirable 
 freati-e, which will prove, it is hoped, an invaluable help to mis- 
 sionaries." 
 
 The learned Professor, Dr. Lepsius, begins with 
 saying that "the endeavor to establish a uniform or- 
 thography for writing foreign languages in European 
 characters has both a scientific and a practical aim." 
 Passing his brief but interesting discussion of the former, 
 we would ask, Who, that has had any considerable ex- 
 perience and observation as a pioneer laborer on mission 
 ground, is not prepared to attest the truthfulness and 
 importance of the following remarks? which he makes 
 in treating of his practical aim : 
 
 " It was natural that the European system of writing should be used 
 for all those languages which had no system of their own. But here the 
 same question arose as in linguistic science. Which orthography ought 
 to be used ? Was it advisable to force upon those nations to which the 
 Bible was to be presented as their first reading-book, the English ortho- 
 graphy, which is complicated, irregular, and singular even in Europe ? 
 Was it suitable that those nations should be compelled to learn to read 
 and write for all future time after this fashion ? And according to what 
 principles should those sounds be expressed which are neither found in 
 the English alphabet nor in any other European svstem ? 
 
 " As, in these respects, there was no general law or authority, every 
 missionary who had such a translation to prepare struck out a way for 
 himself, and sought, according to his own fancy, or from a very confined 
 view of the case, to solve the difficulty. If we examine the long cata- 
 logue of Bibles printed in Latin characters we shall find the most multi- 
 farious systems of letters employed, often in cognate languages, and 
 even in one and the same language. Sometimes difficult and unintelli- 
 gible groupings of consonants are employed as representations of simple 
 sounds; at other times a multitude of new and unexplained diacritical 
 signs are employed; and often a refuge has been sought in the complete 
 rejection of all diacritical marks, and thus the correct expression of the 
 language has been sacrificed. The great and increasing confusion re- 
 sulting from this arbitrary mode of proceeding must be apparent." 
 
 But. we by no means propose to follow this discrimin- 
 ating and learned writer through the whole Essay. We
 
 \\\n\ INTRODUCTION. 
 
 must content ourselves with remarking that, after a hrief 
 historical sketch of what science and missions have done 
 to solve theqiiestion, Which European orthography is to 
 be adopted? Which alphabetic system best harmonizes 
 the different European orthographies, and allows most 
 riisily of the application of diacritical signs to represent 
 sounds not contained in the languages of Europe? we 
 an* made briefly acquainted with the manner in which 
 tin- Standard Alphabet was developed and propounded : 
 
 "In rliL- Autumn of lti-^2, the author of the present paper," says 
 I>i. I, -jiMiis, " being in London, had the opportunity of discussing tins 
 subject which had occupied his mind for several years) with some <>f 
 the most influential members of Missionary Committees : and he was 
 invited bv the Rev. H. Venn to furnish him with a development of his 
 alphabet, which appeared suitable for general adoption and conformable 
 on the whole to the "Rules." Mr. Venn proposed to transmit such 
 an explanation of the alphabet to the missionaries. Prevented, at that 
 time, from complying with this wish, he simply communicated a tableau 
 of the alphabet, which was inserted by Mr. Venn in a second edition 
 of the " Rules " in 18-53. 
 
 " Soon afterwards the author was again induced to direct his special 
 attention to this subject, by a visit of the Rev. S. IV. Kodle, in con- 
 sequence of which he determined to bring forward his own long pre- 
 pared project, after discussing it minutely with this gentleman, whose 
 valuable contributions to African philology have been already mentioned. 
 It was now judged proper to publish the proposed alphabet, which had 
 hitherto only been communicated privately to several of the most dis- 
 tinguished linguistic scholars. 
 
 " The author therefore resolved to explain the principles of his plan in 
 an essay to be read in a general sitting of the Academy of Berlin, and 
 to propose at the same time that the Academy should examine the 
 alphabet in question, and, if approved, have types cut and cast for 
 printing it. This proposal was laid before the historico-philological 
 class, and a committee 'appointed, composed of Professors Bopp, Jacob 
 Grimm, Pert:, Gerhard, Busckmann, with the assistance of Professor 
 J. Muller from the physical class. This committee approved the plan, 
 with the exception of one member, who denied in general the usefulness 
 of all such endeavors; and on the 23d of January the Class ordered 
 Hi, , -lilting and castitig of Ihe proposed types, which "have consequently 
 been used in the present pages. 
 
 " About the same time, the interest on the subject having greatly in- 
 creased, chiefly from the progress of missions, a new step was taken 
 in London for the furtherance of the object in view. Chevalier Bunsen, 
 whose reputation as a statesman, a scholar, and a friend of every im- 
 portant Christian movement is universally acknowledged, called a 
 meeting of distinguished men, more or less interested in the question 
 among whom we may name, Professors Wilson, Muller, Owen Dietrich 
 Sir C. Trevelyan, Sir John Herschel, Hon. Mr. Stanley, Messrs JYorris 
 Ptrtz, from Berlin, Messrs. Babbage, IVheatstom, and Cull; the Rev'
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXIX 
 
 Messrs. Venn, Chapman, and Koelle, and Mr. Graham, of the Church 
 Missionary Society, the Rev. Mr. Arthur, of the Wesleyan Missionary 
 Society, the Rev. Mr. Trestrail and Mr. Underhill of the Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Society. The author also had the honor of being invited to 
 this meeting, and was happy to be present at the three last conferences. 
 These were occupied principally with the physiological basis, which 
 was generally acknowledged to be necessary; and was adopted without 
 much dissent by the assembly." 
 
 With regard to the written expression or graphic 
 system to be employed, three different systems were 
 discussed. The first, having no physiological basis, and 
 being imperfect in its details, was rejected. The second, 
 which proposed to indicate variations from European 
 sounds by Italics, was found objectionable in several 
 respects, especially in its inapplicability to manuscript, 
 in consequence of which it could be of no use to mis- 
 sionaries, was also rejected. " The third system was 
 that of Dr. Lepsius ; and, so far as his modesty permits 
 us to judge," says the Bibliotheca Sacra, " it appears 
 to have met with almost universal favor. The result 
 was its definitive adoption by Mr. Venn, in behalf of 
 the Church Missionary Society, and the publication, at 
 his request, of the present work [the Standard, &,c.j 
 At the same time, duplicate sets of types were ordered 
 by that Society from Berlin. The concluding remarks 
 of this portion of the work," continues the same reviewer 
 in the Bibliotheca Sacra, "are so appropriate, and so 
 full of the modesty of true science, that we cannot forbear 
 quoting them " : 
 
 " It is hoped," as Professor Lepsius remarks, " that this determina- 
 tion (of the Church Missionary Society) may be favorably regarded 
 by all other missionary societies. We do not expect that everybody 
 should agree about all the details of this alphabet; but it is not un- 
 reasonable to hope that it will be considered as a standard, and as 
 affording a common basis by which other alphabets may be brought into 
 the greatest possible agreement. Different languages may require 
 different modifications. Few, -if any languages will require all the 
 diacritical signs which must appear in the complete alphabet; while 
 some languages may require marks of distinction peculiar to themselves. 
 It is therefore necessary that the system should be elastic enough to 
 admit of such reduction and enlargement without alteration in its essen- 
 tial principles. Cases may even arise in which material deviations 
 from the proposed alphabet may appear unavoidable, and be advocated, 
 on sufficient grounds, by scholars engaged in such researches. In all 
 such cases, it is hoped that the Committees of Societies will require the
 
 X\\ INTRODUCTION. 
 
 &s of such deviations to lie laid before them and discussed, before 
 fin- deviations arc introduced into books printed by their authority, 
 principle is most important lor the furtherance of the object in 
 uid was repeatedly insisted upon by Mr. Venn." 
 
 The able reviewer of Dr. Lepsius, from whom we 
 have already quoted, concludes his paper with a remark 
 .-UK! a hope well worth the consideration of every true 
 friend of education and of Christian missions, especially 
 among the heathen of Africa. He says : 
 
 "The writer of this article was present at a meeting of French 
 pastors and friends of missions, convoked last summer in Paris, at the 
 hosisi' of .\1. ( irandpierre (so well known and so highly respected among 
 us), for the purpose of bearing from Dr. Lepsius, in person, a general 
 account of his system. After an interesting exposition, followed by 
 some discussion, in which the distinguished pastor Monod took a pro- 
 minent part, it was unanimously resolved to bring the " universal alpha- 
 bet " under the immediate consideration of the French Evangelical 
 missionaries, with ;i view to its general adoption by them. We are 
 happy to learn that similar steps have been taken by missionary societies 
 in Germany, Switzerland, and, we believe, in other countries. The 
 adhesion of the London Church Missionary Society has already been 
 noticed. But until the other great societies of England and America 
 follow this example, the work is not half done. And we cannot doubt 
 that, in a question so important to the present and future generations of 
 a multitude of people, nations, and tongues, all petty jealousies, all 
 personal and national predilections, will be laid aside; and we venture 
 to hope that this alphabet, the fruit of such lengthened labors and such 
 extensive researches, may be enabled to effect all the benefit desired 
 and intended by its philanthropic author." Bib. Sa., Oct. 1856, p. (597. 
 
 The opinion of the above reviewer as to the intrinsic 
 merits of the Standard, is found in another part of his 
 paper, where he says : "This unpretending but ad- 
 mirable essay of a distinguished German scholar, is the 
 latest, and, we think, incomparably the most successful 
 attempt to construct a universal alphabet so long the 
 desideratum of linguistic science and a practical want 
 of civilized life. What student of language, geography, 
 or history ; nay, what intelligent traveler, or even reader 
 <>f newspapers, has not longed for some more accurate 
 and trustworthy medium of names and sounds than that 
 R oman alphabet on which the nations of Europe have 
 wrung such various and innumerable changes? 
 \ the world advances and nations approximate, the 
 confusion of our alphabets becomes worse confounded.
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXXI 
 
 And how long may some reader of future history 
 blunder in the dark before ascertaining that Owhyhee 
 and Hawaii are identical, and that the Otaheite of 
 Captain Cook is no other than the Taiti of the piratical 
 French invader! We need not multiply illustrations of 
 the obvious fact that such a state of things is a serious 
 inconvenience, not to say a disgrace to modern literature 
 and science. The great and increasing importance of 
 international intercourse, the consequent study of lan- 
 guages, of their etymology, their multiplied ramifications 
 and connections, the valuable results already obtained, 
 call for every possible aid that can be rendered. And 
 at the head of these may safely be placed the preparation 
 of an alphabet so comprehensive as to include the sounds 
 of every known language and dialect, sa simple as to be 
 easily applied to them all, and so elastic as to admit of 
 expansion in case of future need." Bibliotheca Sacra. 
 The Church Missionary Society, in its prefatory 
 notice of the Standard, from which we have already 
 made an extract, among all its valuable remarks, in the 
 estimation of the writer, has made none more truthful 
 and important than the following : 
 
 "The object of this treatise (the Standard] concerns not only mis- 
 sionaries, but also the interests of the nations whose language is to be 
 reduced to writing. It is most desirable that a nation should be furnished 
 with an alphabet combining simplicity and precision to the utmost de- 
 gree in which they are attainable. The art of reading will be thus 
 greatly facilitated, and the natives will themselves teach one another to 
 read and write without the perpetual aid of European teachers. * * * 
 
 " In respect of Africa it is especially important to take every step 
 which may facilitate the mutual instruction, and supersede the labors of 
 European teachers. In this way only can we hope for the evangeliza- 
 tion of this vast continent. 
 
 " It is a matter of much satisfaction, that in this, as in other instances, 
 science lends its aid to the Christian zeal of missionaries for communi- 
 cating to mankind the highest benefits; and the work is commended 
 under this aspect to the blessing of Almighty God for the furtherance of 
 the Kingdom of Christ among the nations of the earth." 
 
 (Signed) H. VEN.N, B.D., Hon. Sec. 
 
 J. CHAPMAN, M.A., Sec., Late Missionary in 
 
 South India, and Principal of the Syrian 
 College, Travancore. 
 
 H. STKAITH. Hon. Lay Sec. 
 
 ' (KAHAM, Lay Sec., Late Persian Inter- 
 preter to the Commander-in-Chief in India. } 
 
 Church 
 
 Missionary 
 
 (Society.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The respective opinions and recommendations of 
 several other of the largest missionary corporations in 
 the world, are hriefly expressed and presented in the 
 following extracts : 
 
 " Having been concerned in the preparation of the Rules, Sic., re- 
 ferred to above, which have been successfully employed in our West 
 African languages where the want of a uniform system was especially 
 felt, we express our cordial approval of this treatise, in which Pro- 
 fessor Lepsius clearly explains the scientific principles upon which a 
 standard alphabet must be constructed, and renders it, in its complete 
 form, capable of the most extensive application." 
 
 (Signed) JOHN BEECHAM, D.D., Sec. } Wesleyan 
 
 ELIJAH HOOLE, .Sec., > Missionary 
 
 Formerly Missionary in South India. ) Society. 
 
 The following is an " extract from a letter to the 
 author" of the Standard, dated Paris, June 7th, 
 1855: 
 
 " I have the pleasure of informing you that the committee of the 
 (Evangelical) Missionary Society, in its yesterday's session, decided 
 to send the " Standard Alphabet " to our missionaries in South Africa, 
 and to recommend to their most serious attention the system which is 
 proposed for arriving at a uniform mode of writing those foreign 
 languages which have not as yet a literature. 
 
 " It moreover earnestly desires that the missionaries of our Society, 
 having studied this system, may make an application of it to the 
 Sechuana language. 
 
 " For this purpose our Committee will need twenty copies of the 
 English translation of the Standard Mphabet, in order to scud them to 
 South Africa." 
 
 In the name of the Committee : 
 
 (Signed) GRANDPIERRE, Director. 
 
 From the London Missionary Society we have the 
 following : 
 
 "The importance of the object proposed by Dr. Lepsius will be 
 deeply felt by every individual conversant in any degree with the diffi- 
 culties to be encountered in the formation of a language previously 
 unwritten, and with the want of harmony which has hitherto been found 
 in such attempts. I cannot therefore but rejoice in the result of Dr. 
 L.'s close and profound attention to this subject, as exhibited in his 
 pamphlet, and I most earnestly hope that it may gi'eatly tend hereafter 
 to secure substantial agreement, and, if possible, uniformity in the prac- 
 tice of Christian missionaries who are laboring to give the Word of 
 God to tribrs and nations among whom the symbols of thought have 
 been previously unknown." 
 
 (Signed) ARTHUR TIDMAN. 
 
 Foreign Secretary L. M, S.
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXXI11 
 
 The Secretary in England to the Moravian Missions 
 says : 
 
 " I beg to give rny cordial assent to the general principles which Pro- 
 fessor Lepsius has so ably sketched in his Treatise. That the adoption 
 of his system, however modified in some of its details, will be of the 
 greatest service to missionaries in every part of the world, and espe- 
 cially to English missionaries, can hardly admit of a doubt. Had such 
 a system been originally applied to the languages of the Greenlanders 
 and Esquimaux, and to those of the Indian tribes of North and South 
 America, much uncertainty arid difficulty would have been avoided." 
 (Signed) P. LA TROBE, Sec., &c. 
 
 " The Committee of the Missionary Society of the Rhine declares 
 hereby its assent to the principles of orthography laid down by Profes- 
 sor Lepsius in his treatise on the Standard Alphabet, and will give 
 directions accordingly to its missionaries for their linguistic labors." 
 
 (Signed) For the Committee: INSPECTOR WALLMANN. 
 
 " The undersigned, besides acknowledging the care and completeness 
 of the views, upon which this Standard Alphabet is founded, cannot but 
 earnestly desire for the sake of harmonious co-operation, that uniformity 
 may be attained at least in this part of the missionary field, and there- 
 fore begs to give it his cordial assent." 
 
 (Signed) DR. CIIR. G. EARTH, 
 
 Director of the Calw. Publishing Union. 
 
 " The Committee of the Evangelical Missionary Society (at Basle), 
 acknowledging the great importance of uniform principles in fixing the 
 alphabet of previously unwritten languages, particularly among the 
 African races, has resolved to adopt the system of orthography proposed 
 by Professor Dr.' Lepsius of Berlin, and to recommend it to the mis- 
 sionaries employed by this Society for gradual introduction." 
 
 (Signed) For the Committee : JOSENHANS, Inspector. 
 
 " The Secretaries of the American Board of Commissioners for 
 Foreign Missions have examined Dr. Lepsius's ' Statidard Alphabet for 
 reducing unwritten languages and foreign graphic systems to a uniform 
 orthography in European letters,' and regard it as an advance upon the 
 practice of missionaries of this Board heretofore in reducing languages 
 to writing; and we will gladly do what we can to secure its general 
 adoption." 
 
 (Signed) R. ANDERSON, J 
 
 S. B. TREAT, > Secretaries. 
 
 S. L. POMROT, ) 
 
 The actual introduction of a measure like this to any 
 
 5
 
 XXXIV INTRODUCTION, 
 
 general extent, among the numerous and widely separated 
 missionary organizations which encircle the globe, m-ust 
 be, of course, gradual, as well as free, and without pre- 
 vious compact. Yet, considering all the circumstances 
 and difficulties in the case, the system has evidently re- 
 commended itself, and been already actually introduced", 
 to a much greater extent than its most sanguine friends 
 could have expected in so short a time. In this distant 
 part of the world, we do not get the news till long after 
 the events have transpired. And yet, it has already come 
 to our knowledge that a fair beginning has been made 
 towards a general adoption of the Standard* Indeed, 
 the work was half accomplished when the system gained 
 the approval and recommendation of the great leading 
 missionary bodies to which we have already referred. 
 Among the African languages, some half a dozen are 
 mentioned in the Appendix to the Standard as already 
 written in this way. 
 
 I have before me " Vocabularies of the Mozambique 
 Dialects," as drawn up by Dr. Bleek, who, in his In- 
 troduction, says, "The orthography employed in the 
 Vocabularies has been modified from the system of 
 Lepsius, to suit the exigencies of English typography." 
 Hence the vowels are often accompanied by the use of 
 some diacritical mark, of which there are five varieties, 
 to denote the exact character of the sound specified. 
 And among the consonants, the letter s with a dot under 
 it represents the sound of English sh and German sck, 
 which Lepsius denotes by the use of s. " Such com- 
 pound sounds as English ch in cheese, arid j in join, are 
 dissolved in their elements, and, therefore, expressed " 
 respectively by the use of t and d with dotted s, which 
 sounds are denoted by Lepsius, as in the present work, 
 by fs and dz. And the ng, of English ' { singing," i& 
 given by the tilde over n, which Lepsius denotes by n. 
 
 writing the above, I see it stated in the Missionary Herald 
 uiiiary. in ;i )'(<) from oire of the Missionaries of the American 
 Board, (hat : " In accordance with the vote of the Micronesia Mission, 
 we [tin- uii.->iMimriPs on '.lio&r islands! emnlov ' Lf/wits's Standard M- 
 kab'
 
 THE STANDARI* ALPHABET. XXXV 
 
 The writer has also before -him a " Grammar of the 
 Bornu Language," prepared by the Rev. S. W. Koelle, 
 author also of other African works, as Borwu Literature, 
 J Grammar of the Vei, and the Polyglotta Africana, 
 most able plilologicai productions, which, if I mistake 
 not, the public journals spoke -of, not long since, as 
 'having taken the annual prize founded by Volney in the 
 French Academy, in which Bornu Grammar the 
 author says of its orthography, that, it < follows the 
 system proposed by Professor Lepsius of Berlin, which 
 we found best adapted to the wants of missionaries and 
 linguists who have to reduce unwritten languages, be- 
 cause it is based on sound physiological and phonetic 
 principles, consistent in the selection of the signs it 
 contains, and easily admits of an addition of new signs 
 where occasion may require them." 
 
 In his correspondence with the Committee of the South 
 African Auxiliary Bible Society, some two years since, 
 the Rev. J. W. Appleyard, author of " Kafir Grammar," 
 &c.., speaks of Professor Lepsius's Essay as an " ad- 
 mirable pamphlet on a standard alphabet;" and goes on 
 to "propose" and "recommend" some eight or ten 
 " changes " in the orthography of the Kafir language, 
 most of which are based upon Lepsius's system, and 
 would serve to bring the orthography into general con- 
 formity with the Standard. Thus, " in the case of 
 consonants," he would recommend that " r be used for 
 its usual sound in the English;" that "the two guttural 
 sounds, hitherto represented by r, be denoted *by g- 
 and fe respectively, with a point over them," which 
 sounds are denoted by Lepsius, as in the present work, 
 by x and x ; that s " represent the simple sound of sh;" 
 that "the compound sound tsh be represented by t in 
 connection with the preceding character "=ts; " on the 
 same principle j (for dzh) should be denoted by d in 
 combination" with z=rfz; that the present hi be denoted 
 by '1 ; that kl and dhl be represented respectively by 
 k'l aod d c l ; and that m and n with a horizontal line over 
 them, be used wherever etymology requires them to be 
 doubled. 
 
 In another work now before the writer, "A Grammar
 
 XXXVI INTRODUCTION, 
 
 and Vocabulary of the Namaqua-IIottentot Language, 
 by Rev. Henry Tindall, Wesley an Missionary," the 
 author, after mentioning two different systems that have 
 been used heretofore in that field, says : 
 
 ' It would, however, be better that both systems of orthography 
 should give way to an approved universal Alphabet. The subject of a 
 uniform orthography has recently engaged the close attention of eminent 
 linguists and philologists in Europe : and among others, Professor 
 Lepsius, of the Berlin University, has proposed an Alphabet which has 
 been very generally adopted or recommended by the great Protestant 
 mary Societies of England, France, and Germany, and upon 
 which several works on African languages have already been based. 
 The Directors of the Rhenish Missionary Society, who are deeply in- 
 terested in Namaqua missions, have relinquished the system of Knudsen 
 and Wahlman, and have instructed their missionaries to adopt that of 
 Lepsius. The able Professor, in framing his Alphabet, has found it 
 necessary to invent new signs for the clicks, and by the aid of these all 
 the elementary sounds of the Namaqua stand clearly represented. For 
 the sake of uniformity, as well as on account of other advantages which 
 Lepsius' system affords, it will be best to wave all objections and adopt 
 it. In Che mean time, however, as considerable delay has already re- 
 tarded the publication of this small work, and as the requisite type to 
 carry out the system of Lepsius in its application to the Namaqua 
 language is not at hand, it has been thought better to proceed with the 
 undertaking at once, and, if it be deemed advisable, to issue another 
 edition in the orthography of the Standard Alphabet, as soon as circum- 
 stances will permit. The transposition will be merely a mechanical 
 pro< ' 
 
 At a meeting of our Mission in the early part of last 
 year, it was resolved " That we adopt the Alphabet 
 proposed by Lepsius so far as it is adapted to our wants 
 in printing the Zulu language;" and a committee of 
 three Svas appointed "to see the intention of the above 
 resolution realized ;" whose first business was to decide 
 upon the number of new signs required by the Isizulu, 
 and to take measures for obtaining the requisite type. 
 On account of the distance at which one of the com- 
 mittee resided from the other members, he requested 
 them to meet and " do the business of the committee" 
 without him ; which they did, and reported at the next 
 annual meeting. The report, including orders for the 
 type, was approved. The type, or rather a portion of 
 it, came to hand ; and the press was set to work in 
 February, of the present year, printing, first, a sheet of 
 elementary Lessons, then the Acts of the Apostles,
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXXVJ1 
 
 each according to the Standard Alphabet, in the Zulu 
 language ; after which, or towards the last of March, 
 the present work was commenced. 
 
 It was not to be expected that a new measure of this 
 kind would satisfy the particular preference or prejudice 
 of all parties, especially when it happens that some who 
 think themselves most competent to make an alphabet, 
 or to criticise one which has been made, are really ig- 
 norant of the first great principles on which an alphabet 
 should be constructed; and where, too, one person is 
 often inclined to look only at one point, another at 
 another, each with eyes so intent upon his own one point 
 as to exclude a dozen others of equal or greater impor- 
 tance. Nor is it any new thing for new things to be 
 opposed. Even the greatest of improvements have often 
 met, at first, with the greatest opposition, the fault being 
 not in the improvement or change, but in the opponent's 
 ignorance of its value, or in a lack of willingness to ac- 
 commodate himself to it. In devising and adopting an 
 alphabet, especially if anything like a general uniformity 
 is to be attained, it is impossible to make each and 
 every letter according to each and every man's notion 
 of what would be best. One may think there should be 
 a new basis for a given sound ; another, that an old 
 letter should be used with a diacritical mark ; one thinks 
 it better that a diacritical mark be separate from the body 
 of the letter, another would have it attached ; one prefers 
 that the mark be on this side, another prefers that it be 
 on that ; one, that it be above, another, that it be below ; 
 one, that it be crookefl, and another, that it be straight. 
 Who, that has ever had a little thought, or conversa- 
 tion, or correspondence, on the subject of alphabets, 
 needs to be told that differences of opinion, similar to 
 the above, are not rare ; and that, if considerations of 
 this kind can be urged as objections by one and another 
 against the new alphabet, so they may be urged, also, 
 against any and every alphabet that ever was, or ever 
 could be devised? 
 
 But, in respect to the Standard Alphabet of which 
 we are speaking, having been led by various circum- 
 stances to give the subject of alphabets and orthography
 
 \ \\vii I INTRODUCTION. 
 
 some attention, during the past ten or twelve years, and 
 having been constantly engaged, now some eight months, 
 in preparing manuscript, and correcting proofs, reading 
 and teaching, in the Zulu language as written and 
 printed according to Dr. Lepsius's Standard Alphabet, 
 \ do not hesitate to signify my hearty approval of 
 that alphabet ; and say that, so far as my study, ex- 
 perience, and observation extend, I find both its general 
 principles and its graphic system, its basis and expres- 
 sion, admirably suited io the Isizulu. Among my 
 reasons for liking this new alphabet, and for adhering to 
 it, (that is, so long, and so far, of course, as I may have 
 occasion to write the Isizulu,) are the following : 
 
 1 . It gives us a simple sign for every single simple sound. 
 This is one of the first conditions of a good alphabet. 
 The correctness and importance of this rule, or principle, 
 are too generally admitted, to require a word of support 
 or explanation in this connection. Such an alphabet 
 tends not only to simplify the labor of writing and print- 
 ing, and facilitate the efforts of both teacher and pupil 
 to instruct and learn ; but it also promotes clearness 
 and accuracy in the use of words, and in the pronuncia- 
 tion of the language. But, in our old system of Zulu 
 orthography, this first, best rule of a good alphabet was 
 neglected or violated in no less than six or seven in- 
 stances. It made use of the combination sh for the 
 single simple sound of s ; the combination ng for n ; 
 hi for T ; hi for c l ; used r for the English sound of that 
 letter in words adopted from the English, and also to 
 denote the Zulu guttural x; gave*us nothing for z; and 
 nothing for tf. Much writing, as well as teaching, in 
 this language, has only served to confirm the author 
 more and more in the truthfulness of the remarks which 
 he made on this point, some seven or eight years ago: 
 
 A complete orthographical system must be neither defective, nor 
 redundant. It should be absolutely invariable in its application; and so 
 comprehensive and flexible in its plan as to furnish a suitable repre- 
 sentative for every sound in the language for which it Is used. While 
 we would be slow to multiply new symbols, especially such as have 
 not been used in some manner, either in our own or other alphabets, 
 we would by no moans leave a single fundamental sound without 
 it* own speriijr and appropriate siga. It is an expensive economy
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. XXXIX 
 
 that would give two values to the same sign, to avoid the multiplication 
 of signs. 
 
 If the laudable desire for an alphabet of few letters leads us to refu.se 
 a distinctive symbol to every generic sound, we shall complicate instead 
 of simplifying the svstem, retard instead of aiding the progress of the 
 learner, and perplex the reader or writer instead of assisting him. Let 
 each character have one and invariably the same value. And if a new 
 sound is presented, for the certain and accurate representation of which 
 the scheme of characters has made no provision, let another character 
 be added to the scheme. Bat let not an old character be forced to suit 
 a new station, a place for which it was never intended and never fitted. 
 Let not the uniformity and integrity of the whole system be impaired by 
 once admitting the possibility of altering or deviating from the symboli- 
 cal signification alreadv assigned to each character in the scheme 
 Journal ilmi:,-i< an Oriental Society, Vol. iii., No. ii., p. 430. 
 
 12. The new alphabet never employs one and the same 
 sign for the expression of different sounds. This prin- 
 ciple, that no sign express more than one sound, is an- 
 other essential condition of a good orthographical system. 
 This principle may be violated, and, in our old system 
 of Zulu orthography, it really is violated, in two ways 
 by using one single sign to express two different sounds 
 either in combination, or two sounds separate and un- 
 combined. The errors and defects of this kind, in our 
 former svstem, amount to no less than four or five. 
 
 
 
 Thus the one sign or monograph j was used to represent 
 the compound sound represented in the new alphabet by 
 d and z ; one and the same sign y was used to repre- 
 sent the English sound of that letter, and also the sound 
 of sh=s, in combination with /, making ty for tsh or ts ; 
 the same sign or signs hi were used to represent two 
 different sounds denoted in the new alphabet by T and c l ; 
 and, ajiain, the same letter r was used not only in its 
 English value, but also to express the two different 
 Zulu gutturals x and X- And yet, the truthfulness and 
 value of the principle of which we speak, are too gen- 
 erally acknowledged, to require any labored proof in this 
 connection. Thus, as Dr. Lepsius says, Sir W. Jones 
 lays it down as a first principle, that " the orthography 
 of a language should never use the same letter for dif- 
 ferent sounds, nor different letters for the same sound." 
 So Mr. Halhed "the two greatest defects in the ortho- 
 graphy of any language are the application of the same
 
 Xl INTRODUCTION. 
 
 letter to several different sounds, and of different letters 
 to the same sound." So, on the other hand, or in respect 
 to the other mode of applying this rule, as Professor 
 Holmhoe says, " It appears that those who have 
 written on this subject are agreed that simple signs are 
 to be made use of to express simple sounds ; and that 
 accordingly the complex signs, which have been wont 
 to be used for this purpose, should be avoided." The 
 use of j, as above noticed, to denote the compound 
 sound of d and z, as Dr. Latham, Fowler, and others 
 have remarked, is not only " inconvenient," but both 
 "theoretically and historically incorrect." Practical 
 illustrations of the evil, the doubt and ambiguity, con- 
 sequent upon these defects, the use of hi for both T 
 and c l, and of r for both English r and Zulu x and x 
 might be multiplied from actual experience and obser- 
 vation. An educated native sent me a valuable piece 
 of Zulu composition, not long since, where, for the want 
 of a proper orthography a proper sign for every sound 
 in the language, it is impossible to say what is the 
 author's real meaning in several sentences. And in 
 taking notes of a native's speech or narrative, as well as 
 in translating the Scriptures, it is somewhat annoying, 
 to say the least, to be obliged, every now and then, to 
 reject a good word for the want of a letter with which 
 to denote a sound ; or to have a native ask why the 
 missionaries don't make the alphabet equal to the ne- 
 cessities of their language, and why we complain for the 
 want of words, when we cannot write what few there 
 are. Nor is it a V>ery easy or satisfactory way to try 
 and avoid a difficulty of this kind, by employing an addi- 
 tional letter, or an ugly combination, and so write dhl 
 for T, or tsch for s ; and then always have this awkward, 
 cumbersome form d-h-l, &,c., to go over with, instead 
 of the simple T, in teaching the people to spell, read, 
 and write. As the writer has said in another place : 
 
 That unseemly, and even erroneous, compounds are used for simple 
 sounds in the orthography of the English and other languages, long 
 since reduced to writing, whose orthography has been so much a matter 
 of chance, in its origin and progress of development, and for so long a 
 time stereotyped with all its anomalies, defects, and redundancies, seems 
 not a sufficient reason for introducing and perpetuating the same in the
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. x 
 
 orthography of languages newly reduced to order and writing, o-j" 
 cially if tlie orthography of the new language must of necessity differ, 
 in some respects, from that of any old system which may be borrowed 
 ;md made a basis. If the new language contains fundamental sounds 
 which do not exist in the old, from whence we borrow our orthography, 
 and the Zulu and its cognates do contain such sounds, then we must 
 use either new characters, or old characters in a new sense, to repre- 
 sent them; and in either case we alter the system to suit our purpose, 
 which alterations are often as great as are required in the substitution of 
 simple for compound characters. 
 
 The use of neat, significant, simple characters instead of inappropriate, 
 clumsy, if not ambiguous, compounds, is attended with a great practical 
 advantage. It makes the labor of teaching and learning to read more 
 simple and easy, and consequently saves the time and strength of the 
 teacher and pupil, and secures to the people a better education; for it 
 must be remembered that the symbols used in compound characters are 
 generally, to some extent at least, turned out of their proper place 
 their primary value is changed an interpretation is put upon them in 
 their combined state, somewhat different from what they have when 
 used separately and alone. But the simple-minded native, unaccustomed 
 to the more refined intellectual operations, is not prepared for such an 
 analysis or synthesis of sounds and letters, as would enable him to 
 gather the value of such compounds from any knowledge which he 
 might have of their component parts. He must learn the character by 
 rote as a compound, or rather as a simple, and yet without knowing that 
 it is a compound used for a simple, or that the parts are not to have the 
 same full independent values in these as in other cases. Hence the 
 symbols become ambiguous, having in some cases a truly modified, if 
 not really a two-fold value, and that without any sign of the modifica- 
 tion; and all, while we profess to give each character one and only one 
 sound. Such ambiguities, unsteadiness, and inconsistency in ortho- 
 graphy, are serious hindrances, among any people, to learning to read, 
 but especially so to those whose dark, undisciplined minds are yet to 
 receive almost the first ray of light, and the first rudiment of discipline. 
 Many examples in illustration of these remarks might be given from 
 our books, and our experience in teaching, but it is unnecessary. 
 
 The uncouth and ambiguous combinations, and other absurdities, 
 which have found a place in the orthography of the English, and some 
 other languages, and the great evils which result from them, may per- 
 haps be tolerated for years to come, but for reasons which can never be 
 urged for our introducing and perpetuating them in the languages of 
 Africa. These evils, and the complaints which are made with increasing 
 earnestness against them, and the great labor and difficulty of getting 
 rid of them, should afford us a sufficient warning never to incur thr- 
 same, or to give our sanction to them, in devising an orthographical 
 system for an unwritten language. Journal American Oriental Society, 
 Vol. iii., No. ii., pp. 434, 435. 
 
 3. This new alphabet enables us to dispense with 
 signs ivhich have diverse values among different nations. 
 As Dr. Lepsius says : " Those European characters 
 
 6
 
 xlii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 which have a different value in the principal European 
 alphabets, are not to be admitted into a general alpha- 
 bet." Hence c, ch, j, and x are excluded ; and as q is 
 superfluous, having an equivalent in kiv, that also is ex- 
 cluded. But most of these, and other variable, am- 
 biguous signs, form a part of our old Zulu system, as 
 also a part of the system or systems which neighboring 
 missionaries have adopted, the evils of which are neither 
 few nor small. It not only misleads and hinders the 
 linguistic student, and obstructs the progress of com- 
 parative philology in these and other languages ; but it 
 throws obstacles in the way of both the practical mis- 
 sionary and the native pupil. The remarks of Dr. 
 Latham, in speaking of the singularity of the English 
 alphabet, are equally true and applicable here, on the 
 point before us : 
 
 " The inconvenience of this is the necessity that it imposes upon us, 
 in stinking foreitrn languages [and so with the missionary and native, in 
 reading his neighbor's books], of unlearning the sound which we give it 
 in our own, and of learning the sound which it bears in the language 
 studied. So it is (amongst many others) with the letter j. In English, 
 this has the sound of dzh, in French of zh, and in German of y. From 
 singularity in the use of letters arises inconvenience in the study of 
 foreign tongues, [and in the reciprocal use and circulation of the good 
 books of different societies among the natives of the same tribe and 
 tongue]. In using j as dzh, there is a second objection. It is not 
 only inconvenient, but it is theoretically incorrect. The letter j was 
 originally a modification of the vowel i. The Germans, who used it as 
 the semi-vowel y, have perverted it from its original power less than the 
 English have done, who sound it dzh." 
 
 But though the Germans are nearer right than the 
 English in the use of j, yet in seeking to provide a 
 general standard, Dr. L. "magnanimously and wisely 
 sacrifices his patriotic predilections;" and, since, accord- 
 ing to the rule under consideration, he "could not retain 
 the sign j, he writes y, following here also the use gen- 
 erally adopted in linguistic books ;" and for the two 
 sounds of the English monograph j he gives us the two 
 appropriate signs d and z. 
 
 But the evils consequent upon a disregard of the 
 above rule are not to be measured merely by the fact 
 that books of one mission are comparatively sealed to 
 neighboring missions. These evils extend much further ;
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. 
 
 and, if they are not eradicated, they are destined to in- 
 crease in magnitude, as missions advance in age, and the 
 people in knowledge. The educated native is not to be 
 shut up always to the few books which may be printed 
 in his own tongue. He must have access to the stores 
 of knowledge laid up in other languages, particularly, 
 at least for the present, in the English. Hence, in the 
 singular use which has been made of such letters and 
 combinations as c, <?, r, x, ty, &c., just so many ob- 
 stacles are thrown in the way of his future progress, 
 putting him to the no easy task of first unlearning much 
 that he had been taught, and then learning it over again 
 in a new sense or value. Nor is the task done when he 
 has finished unlearning and relearning the singularity of 
 these letters ; but he must still retain their double use, 
 and change their value as he changes from a book in his 
 own tongue to one in English or some other tongue, 
 and again from the latter to the former. Upon this 
 whole subject as well the importance of uniformity 
 and of the use of an alphabet in itself correct, as the 
 importance of introducing these things at the earliest 
 possible stage, the following remarks, from the pen of 
 the Rev. Dr. Adamson, and published in the Cape of 
 Good Hope Observer, July, 1850, are to the point, and 
 worthy of a careful consideration : 
 
 " There are many circumstances which are favorable to the success 
 of this attempt, in respect to the southern languages of our continent. 
 Of these circumstances the most obvious are, the general agreement in 
 structure of the tongues themselves, and the very general identity as 
 to position, education, and object of those who are interested in it. 
 It is a matter of no small moment, that so little, compared with what 
 must ultimately be required, has hitherto been accomplished. For to 
 lay the foundation of a sacred and intellectual literature for a people 
 occupying such vast regions, is a very momentous concern indeed ; and 
 to introduce uniformity among their dialects, or to prevent the useless 
 diversities which the application of letters to a spoken tongue has often 
 introduced or perpetuated is of the highest importance. The peculiari- 
 ties of these languages have required some peculiarities of proceeding, 
 the selection of which by those who introduced them, has arisen, in a 
 great degree, from the nature of the instrumental means which were 
 available, so that they would not perhaps have been pitched upon, had 
 better means been at hand. These are the cases in which differences 
 of opinion are most likely to occur, in as much as these selections are 
 necessarily conventional, and the arrangements adopted will almost of 
 necessity be different. In such instances we must sacrifice somewhat
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of the little which has been done, to secure the great advantages of 
 uniformity and of common operation with combined interests and re- 
 
 * * 
 
 soun 
 
 Natives will seek access to European knowledge through European 
 tongues. It is probable, for example, that English authors will be the 
 sources of their mental improvement, over a very extensive district. 
 This may advisedly be kept in view in settling the mode of representing 
 their own forms of speech. To acquire English as it appears in books 
 will be a matter of difficulty to a native accustomed to his own phonetic 
 mode of writing, to a greater extent than is easily apprehended by those 
 who are accustomed to English reading. In fact, written English as at 
 :it dealt with, ought not to be considered as an alphabetic language, 
 but as a syllabic one. in as much as in general every different syllable 
 must be treated as almost by itself a distinct demotic character, having 
 its own peculiar sound; for the most distinct knowledge of the individual 
 compounds of a syllable, leads to no certain notion of their effect in 
 1-nmbination. This has a very disheartening and repulsive influence 
 against the introduction of reading English among the natives of this 
 rmmtrv. An additional difficulty is put in the way. by the adoption of 
 such characters as </, y, x, [c, h, r,~\ as representatives of sounds which 
 are not found in the English language at all." 
 
 4. In this new alphabet a due regard is paid to the 
 expression of analogous sounds by the use of analogous 
 signs. This, too, is one of the conditions which Latham 
 and others have specified as essential to " a full and 
 perfect alphabet and orthography ;" as in their own 
 words: " That sounds within a determined degree of 
 likeness be represented by signs within a determined 
 degree of likeness; whilst sounds beyond a certain de- 
 gree of likeness be represented by distinct and different 
 signs, and that uniformly." Hence, in the new alphabet 
 we have the signs T and c l ; x and x ; z and s ; and so the 
 corresponding combinations dz and ts ; also I and n. 
 
 5. The writer believes the new signs, especially those 
 which we have adopted, are as appropriate and signi- 
 Jicant, elegant and distinctive, as they can be, and at 
 the same time include other equally, or more essential 
 conditions. A very important and truthful remark is 
 that which the author of the Standard has made in this 
 connection, to the effect that, 'in respect to those sounds 
 which have not one and the same universally acknow- 
 ledged value in the European alphabets, if any one will 
 look for signs which can be so applied as not to violate 
 any of the foregoing most important principles, he will
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. xlv 
 
 find the choice of letters more circumscribed than it 
 would at first appear.' 
 
 All letters are more or less arbitrary ; but none are 
 less so than those of which we speak. Indeed, the 
 author of the Standard is often ingenious in selecting 
 signs which are equally congruous with the sounds for 
 which they stand, and with the signs which stand for 
 other sounds, both old and new, allied and diverse. 
 What could be more significant and appropriate than a 
 bar (i) for the dental click, or a double bar (n) for the 
 lateral, whether we consider the manner in which the 
 click is made, or the obstruction which it gives to the flow 
 of articulate sounds? And if the sign i for the dental 
 click is wanting in size or prominence, so is the sound 
 for which it stands. But, as to size and distinctness, it 
 is not only quite equal to some other letters, as in the 
 Greek and Hebrew, which have been used for ages ; 
 but it is at least twice as large and distinct as the 
 commas and dots ( , * : . ) which several Missions have 
 used heretofore for representing this and similar sounds. 
 If the signs x and ii are somewhat peculiar, especially 
 the latter, so are the sounds for which they stand, es- 
 pecially the latter. 
 
 In respect to the use of detached diacritical marks, 
 whether in lieu of attached, or in lieu of introducing an 
 entirely new letter, there will, doubtless, always be a 
 difference of opinion. The writer may be allowed to 
 remark that he prepared a paper on this subject several 
 years since, to which he has already referred, in which 
 he proposed a variety of new characters, three-fourths of 
 which were letters with detached diacritical signs. And 
 again, in respect to our own Mission, when I remember 
 that the four new characters agreed upon and ordered 
 by the Mission, long before the Standard was published, 
 were each and all accompanied by a separate diacritical 
 mark; and "that I with a rough breathing" precisely 
 the same ( c l) which is given in the Standard for the 
 same sound was to be used " to represent the sound 
 heretofore represented by hi, as in uku hlalauku c lala, 
 to sit;" and remember that / with another separate 
 diacritical mark was agreed upon to represent the sound
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 ofdhl=l', it would seem that such marks, and especially 
 these particular letters, should have at least the general 
 and most hearty approval of our Mission. But, whatever 
 might be the opinion and preference of this or that indi- 
 vidual in respect to the use and place of diacritical 
 signs, the many both practical missionaries and consi- 
 derate officers of missionary societies, and both learned 
 arid practical scientific men, who have been engaged 
 in devising and recommending the Standard Alphabet, 
 have doubtless given this, and every other point, a 
 careful and thorough consideration ; and what better 
 conclusion could be reached than that to which they 
 have arrived, as presented to us in the Standard ? 
 
 6. The author of the present work believes the new 
 alphabet to be as applicable to ivriting and printing, 
 and as easily learned, remembered, and read, as can 
 be expected from any like number of new signs, without 
 sacrificing other equally, or more important considera- 
 tions. This remark is closely allied to the preceding, 
 but goes further, and has respect more to a practical 
 application of the alphabet. After we had printed a 
 few pages according to the new alphabet, I introduced 
 them into my school ; and gave those who could already 
 read their own tongue some three or four lessons of 
 half an hour each, teaching them the new signs, and the 
 application of them ; after which, those who could read 
 at all, could read just about as well in the new alphabet 
 as they could in the old. And as to beginners, we 
 believe the new alphabet in every respect superior to the 
 old. The same is also true in respect to its applicability 
 to writing. And on this point also, I may be allowed 
 to speak from comparisons and continued experience. 
 During the past ten or twelve years, the writer has 
 taken some pains to collect books printed in the African 
 dialects, also books which treat of alphabets and ortho- 
 graphy ; and hence he has before him some variety of 
 alphabets and orthographies as used in print. He has 
 also some half a dozen new alphabets in manuscript, 
 sent in, at one time and another, by friends, fellow- 
 laborers, and others, with a view to their being con- 
 sidered as to their fitness for writing and printing the
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. xlvii 
 
 native language. As chairman, too, of committee for our 
 Mission, it once fell to the lot of the writer to prepare a 
 paper on this suhject, especially in its application to the 
 Isizulu. And since the necessary type has been in hand, 
 as hefore remarked, he has been daily occupied with it. 
 in all its relations to writing, printing, teaching, and 
 reading. Of course, it took a few days to get accus- 
 tomed to the forms of new letters, and to recent changes 
 in the orthographical system ; but, with a little attention, 
 this is soon effected. Looking, then, at this new alphabet 
 in a practical, every-day light, the writer finds it, in all 
 respects, sufficient, and most happily adapted to our 
 wants. Indeed, I know not how all the conditions of a 
 full and perfect alphabet and orthography, including 
 at once a proper basis and a well selected graphic 
 system, suited in general to all languages, and in parti- 
 cular to the Isizulu, could be secured so well in any 
 other way. 
 
 7. The writer is disposed to adhere to this new alpha- 
 bet (so far as he may have occasion to write Zulu), and to 
 recommend it to others, not only for the foregoing reasons, 
 but also because of the tendency of such a course to 
 abate the evil of propagating diverse and insulated al- 
 phabets and systems of orthography among the languages 
 of Africa, and indeed throughout the world. Who does 
 not feel that these evils have gone far enough? Or who 
 is ignorant that they are a subject of frequent, increasing, 
 most just complaint? What translator of the Scrip- 
 tures, what author of a grammar or indeed of any book 
 in an African language, what intelligent, considerate 
 laborer of any kind on missionary ground, to say nothing 
 of the general philologist, does not deprecate the incon- 
 sistency and erroneousness, the singularity and insuffi- 
 ciency, and other defects of our African orthographies 
 and alphabets ? I have already noticed remarks of 
 Messrs. Appleyard and Tindall on this subject ; and on 
 the same, Mr. Tutschek, the able writer of " A Gram- 
 mar of the Galla Language," says : 
 
 '' With regard to the choice of letters to express particular sounds, 1 
 have added another to the many modes already existing, and perhaps 
 have thus made the confusion still greater. But as long as no general
 
 x lviii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 rules capable of being adapted to all the different languages which are 
 still to be discovered, are established and universally acknowledged, it 
 will necessarily remain the privilege of the first inquirers into newly 
 discovered languages, to characterize their special observations accord- 
 ing to their own method." 
 
 In his "Elementary Grammar of the Zulu-Kafir 
 Language," Bishop Colenso says : " Of course the 
 letters c, </, x, r, are not proper representatives of the 
 corresponding sounds. But, for want of types to exhibit 
 new characters, we must be content to use them for the 
 present. Characters are also needed for the frequently 
 recurring sounds of ny, like that of ni in onion, sh and 
 tsh, ty or ch (as in chart), hi or till (like the Welsh II), 
 and dhl." 
 
 The writer has before him several letters addressed to 
 him, from four to eight years since, by missionaries of 
 different societies, from every part of Southern Africa ; 
 and from them he makes the following extracts. From 
 the Rev. R. Haddy, of the Wesleyan Missionary So- 
 ciety, among the Damaras, on the South-west coast, 
 who says : 
 
 " Allow me to say that your proposal for a general co-operation to 
 assimilate orthographically that class of South African languages which 
 includes the several alliterative symphonic divisions, has my decided 
 approval; and I think its accomplishment must be attended with mani- 
 fold important results, which it is not necessary to specify. Looking 
 over the system of orthography adopted in Kafirland, the Bechuana 
 country, and on the Western Coast amongst the cattle Damaras, I have 
 been struck with what appears to me the fact that similar sounds are, 
 the Roman alphabet.being used by all parties, very dissimilarly spelled. 
 This is easily accounted for. The orthography of the Kafir was fixed, 
 or formed by brethren from England and Scotland; the Sechuana by 
 MofFat; and the Damara language has fallen to the lot of fellowrlaborers 
 from Germany. Hence, in the Sechuana we have clia, in the Kafir 
 tshn, in the Damara ija; and yet the sounds are very nearly at least the 
 same, and probably were originally identical." 
 
 From the Rev. J. L. Wilson of the Gabun Mission, 
 now one of the secretaries of the Presbyterian Board 
 of Missions, who says : 
 
 " I would make a few statements on the subject of your circular, the 
 importance of which I fully appreciate." After speaking of their "sys- 
 tem of orthography" as being based upon that of Mr. Pickering, he pro- 
 ceeds " We find it necessary to introduce five new characters, or
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. xlix 
 
 rather to indicate the modifications of these by using the Roman 
 characters with a certain mark either above or below, to indicate the 
 variation from the ordinary sound. Mr. Walker is to attend to this in 
 the l : nited States, and ha probably done so before this." 
 
 From the Rev. W. Walker of the same Mission, 
 then in America, HS noticed above, who writes: 
 
 " But I wish to say something about your circular in reference to a 
 uniform alphabet. I was very glad that you have put the idea in motion, 
 and only regret that you did not put in an alphabet for a starting point. 
 And I regretted it the more, as 1 have just made four new characters (< 
 express compound consonant sounds. We find that the vowels as used 
 m the Grammar of the Mpongwe are sufficient, and we feel satisfied with 
 them, unless you more linguistic folks shall suggest better ones. We 
 shall be willing to compromise on almost anything which will produce 
 uniformity ; and you know that compromises are the order of the day; 
 and a man cannot be a patriot and good citizen unless he sustains 
 them without any mental reservation." 
 
 From the Rev. T. Arbousset, of the Paris Evangeli- 
 cal Mission among the Bechuana, who, under date of 
 July, 1849, says : 
 
 " I feel highly interested in hearing that your Society is gradually in- 
 creasing the number of her establishments in the Zulu country. No 
 doubt but the language of your people is spoken very high up along the 
 coast. The Sesuto, too, is extensively known in the interior, among 
 the Baperis. and other such like tribes, reported by all to be very nu- 
 merous and populous. So that with these two keys, the Zulu and the 
 Sesuto, one may reasonably expect to penetrate deep into the interior. 
 They are not so very different from each other; only our alphabets do 
 not agree. We follow nearly the Latin one; and this I notice, that 
 you may be the better able to understand our few publications." 
 
 Under date of July, 1855, he writes again. After 
 " deeply regretting the want of uniformity among mis- 
 sionaries in writing the Kafir and Sechuana languages," 
 and dwelling for a time upon that and kindred points, he 
 says : " Let us hope that in a few years more, the thick 
 mist will dissipate, after a few more attempts; when 
 presses on either side will have .settled on a uniform way 
 of writing." 
 
 Extracts like the foregoing, of which more might be 
 given were it necessary, all go to show that the use of 
 diverse and insulated alphabets and systems of ortho- 
 graphy among the African dialects, has long been a cause 
 
 7
 
 1 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of general and deep regret. Why, then, may we not 
 hope "that, in a question so important to the present and 
 future generations of a multitude of people, nations, and 
 tongues, all petty jealousies, all personal and national 
 predilections, will he laid aside; and that this alphabet, 
 the fruit of such lengthened labors and such extensive 
 researches, may be enabled to effect all the benefit de- 
 sired and intended by its philanthropic author?" And 
 to those who really care for uniformity, this reference 
 to the labor and research expended upon the Standard 
 suggests another reason for adopting it. Hence 
 
 8. The writer is disposed to adhere to this new alphn- 
 bet, and to recommend it to others, because he believes 
 it. impossible to engage an equal amount of care, deliber- 
 ation, and talent in another attempt to invent and es- 
 tablish a standard. Attempts to revise and improve 
 the English, and other European orthographies, may be 
 made ; indeed, we are well aware that such attempts are 
 making, and have been for many years past. But we 
 are not among those who look for any very extensive, 
 decided, practical results from those efforts. Neither 
 would the greatest of fullness and perfection, could it be 
 attained in those alphabets, ever meet all the wants of 
 the African and other foreign languages, to which, in a 
 special manner, the attention and labors of Lepsius and 
 his coadjutors were directed. If, then, the present at- 
 tempt to invent and establish a Standard, arid all the 
 recommendations which it has had from the highest, most 
 competent authorities, shall fail to correct the evils so 
 long deplored, or effect the changes so generally desired, 
 if these disinterested efforts and considerate recom- 
 mendations shall be set aside and forgotten, what Venn, 
 what Bunsen, what Lepsius shall ever again be en- 
 couraged to come forward and take up the subject with 
 equal talent, zeal, and perseverance? 
 
 9. The writer is disposed to adhere to this new alpha- 
 bet, and to recommend it to all who may care for uni- 
 formity or a standard, because it has already attained 
 an fwnorable precedence and a certain amount of 
 substantial pre-occupation, which are constantly in- 
 creasing ; and, even supposing another equally good, or,
 
 THE STANDARD ALPHABET. II 
 
 if possible, even a better standard could be devised and 
 proposed, there is no reason to believe it could be made 
 to supersede that now before us. Those who really care 
 for a highly approved standard or even for an ad- 
 mirable system, and are willing to be at any pains to 
 adopt one, will adopt this ; while those who take no in- 
 terest in the subject, do not care for a standard, nor for 
 uniformity, or lack resolution or a willingness to be at 
 some pains to secure these things, if such there can be, 
 would not adopt any other, whatever might be the 
 amount of talent, research, and care expended in de- 
 vising it. 
 
 10. The writer is disposed to adhere to the Standard 
 Alphabet^ and to recommend it to others, because of the 
 aid which it is fitted to afford to comparative, philology 
 and every linguistic pursuit, especially to such as 
 pertain to the languages of Africa; and then, again, 
 because of the aid which all these pursuits confer upon 
 the cause of religious education and Christian missions. 
 But I will not dw-ell upon this point. It has been ably, 
 happily treated by the author of the Standard in the be- 
 ginning of his work, and touched upon in a brief extr.-ict 
 already made (pp. xxx, xxxi,) from his able reviewer in 
 the Bibliotheca Sacra. 
 
 Another important reason the last which I will 
 name for adhering to the Standard, and recommend- 
 ing a general adoption, especially in Africa, is found 
 in a belief that this general orthographical uniformity 
 would help to enrich and consolidate the various cog- 
 nate dialects which prevail throughout at least the 
 southern portion of the continent. One dialect may be 
 wanting in certain important words, or be meager in 
 some of the most desirable qualities of style aside from 
 mere words, while another dialect may have some of 
 these, but be deficient in some excellence which the 
 former possesses. A common alphabet, in such a case, 
 would help to promote a general, affluent exchange, 
 would institute a kind of common currency, as favor- 
 able to commerce as commerce is to opulence and as- 
 similation. As in the "circular," to which we have 
 already referred :
 
 lii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 A uniform orthography would facilitate mutual import and export, 
 and furnish reciprocal aid. And by various natural and consequent 
 modifications and improvements, the grand result of a much more 
 copious, flexible, and in every respect complete language might be 
 obtained for all the tribes of .Southern Africa. And the advantage of 
 -.-uch a result for translating the Scriptures, and lor all religious as 
 well as other purposes, are too evident to require enumeration. Jt is 
 a kind of improvement which African languages greatly need, and to 
 which all the best languages have ever been much indebted for then 
 beauty and utility. 
 
 And in this way would a uniform orthography tend to make different 
 missions and missionary societies mutually more subservient to the 
 common cause of truth. The broader and more uniform the medium 
 of their instructions, the winder and more powerful will be their own 
 influence and the influence of all their native converts and assistants. 
 And by nothing, save the divine favor or displeasure, is any great en- 
 terprise more aided or embarrassed than by a oneness or a diversity 
 of language among those concerned in the enterprise. So thought 
 "the whole earth " when it "was of one language and of one speech," 
 and set about building a city and a tower whose top should reach unto 
 heaven. So though) Ciod when he saw their design and their work, 
 and "came down and confounded their language." So also thought 
 the Lord and his Apostles on the day of pentecost, when by a miracle 
 every man heard in his own tongue, and thousands were converted 
 in a da\ . <jlivc to the cognate dialects of Africa a common ortho- 
 graphy, and one step is taken towards giving her a common language, 
 and opening a wide highway for extensive and pcrmaaent good. If 
 the plan here proposed succeeds, as the different missions in different 
 parts of the field extend their operations, and approach each other, 
 and a knowledge of the Lord begins to cover the land as the waters 
 cover the sea, shall it not then appear that even so small a thing as a, 
 common orthography, adopted among all kindred dialects in years 
 long past, shall have done something towards hastening the grand 
 consummation; so that the different heralds of the cross on the mountain 
 tops, and the inhabitants of the valleys, shall lift up one common shout 
 of united intelligent^ praise to their common Lord ? At so little effort 
 and expense can anything so extensively and permanently useful be 
 done for Africa and all her sons, and for which future generations will 
 more gladly rise up and bless their benefactors :
 
 A GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ZULU LANGUAGE 
 
 Usus, 
 Quern penes arbitrium est, et jus, et norma loquendi. 
 
 HORACE. 
 
 Nature and Division of Grammar. 
 
 1. ZULU GRAMMAR treats of the principles and 
 rules of the Zulu Language. 
 
 2. The division and arrangement of the Grammar 
 are naturally suggested by the three elementary parts of 
 the langauge; viz., sounds, ivords, and sentences. 
 
 The first part, which treats of the sounds of the 
 langauge, together with the letters by which these are 
 expressed, and of their union into syllables and words, 
 is called Orthography. 
 
 The second part, which treats of the classification, 
 derivation, and inflection or forms of words, is called 
 Etymology. 
 
 The third part, which treats of the laws by which 
 words are arranged and combined in sentences, is called 
 Syntax.
 
 PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 LETTERS AND SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 
 
 SECT. 1. Alphabet. 
 
 3. The Alphabet here proposed to be employed in 
 writing the Zulu Langauge, with, perhaps, the exception 
 of n, (see n, 5, 18,) consists of thirty-two letters, 
 which have the following forms, names, and powers: 
 
 Form*. 
 
 JVawes. 
 
 Powers. 
 
 As in English. 
 
 A a 
 
 a 
 
 father 
 
 B b 
 
 be 
 
 but 
 
 D d 
 
 de 
 
 did 
 
 E e 
 F f 
 
 e 
 fe 
 
 they 
 fate 
 
 H I 
 
 he 
 
 game 
 hard 
 
 1 i 
 
 i 
 
 ravine 
 
 K k 
 
 X X 
 X X 
 
 L 1 
 
 T T 
 1 <1 
 M m 
 
 ke 
 
 Xe 
 
 / 
 
 le 
 
 Te . 
 le 
 me 
 
 king 
 
 
 love 
 
 
 man 
 
 N n 
 
 ne 
 
 name 
 
 n h 
 o 
 
 ne 
 o 
 
 sing 
 note 
 
 P 
 
 pe 
 
 pine 
 
 R r 
 
 re 
 
 rose 
 
 8 s 
 
 3 8 
 
 se 
 
 se 
 
 say 
 shine 
 
 T t 
 
 te 
 
 tide 
 
 U u 
 V v 
 
 u 
 ve 
 
 pool 
 vine 
 
 As in Zulu. 
 
 umame, bala. 
 bopa, ubisi. 
 decla, udade. 
 etu, wena. 
 fika, ukufa. 
 geza, igama. 
 hamba, ihasi. 
 iso, mina. 
 kodwa, inkuku. 
 
 , umxau. 
 
 , um^ezo. 
 lala, pola. 
 ukuTa, inTela. 
 c leka, isi c lalo. 
 mila, umame. 
 nika, kona. 
 ngena, isango. 
 bona, kona. 
 pata, upape. 
 Umaria, Ukeristu. 
 sala, usuku. 
 siya, isumi. 
 teta, umuti. 
 uti, umusa. 
 vala, imvula.
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 Forms. Names. Powers. 
 
 As in English. As in Zulu. 
 
 wetu, ukuwa. 
 yeka, isibaya. 
 zala, izono. 
 dzabula, indza. 
 lela, amaiala. 
 Jala, amalanda. 
 nopa, Utino. 
 
 W vv 
 
 we 
 
 way 
 
 Y y 
 
 ye 
 
 year 
 
 Z z 
 
 ze 
 
 zeal 
 
 V W 
 
 z z 
 
 ze 
 
 z in azure 
 
 1 1 
 
 IP 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 -1 
 
 1 C 
 
 IP 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 II 1*1 
 
 ItJ 
 
 
 
 IIP 
 
 
 4. Of these thirty-two characters, twenty-two are the 
 same in form, though not all of them the same in power, 
 as in the English alphabet ; while the ten remaining 
 X, H, T, '1, n, s, z, i, I, n are new additions. 
 
 REMARK. The power, value, or sound of these, and of all the 
 letters of the alphabet, and the change which the substitution or intro- 
 duction of the above new characters has upon the orthography of the 
 language, will be more fully shown in the following sections, parti- 
 cularly the 9th, 10th, and 18th paragraphs. 
 
 5. 1. A full and perfect alphabet of the Isizulu, as 
 of any language, would contain a number of letters pre- 
 cisely equal to the number of simple sounds belonging 
 to the language. Every such sound would have its own 
 distinct character, and that character never be used in 
 the same language to represent any other sound. 
 
 2. But since the use of n (instead of n, as heretofore,) 
 is not practically indispensable, and especially since our 
 supply of type for that letter, though large, is insufficient 
 for its frequent recurrence, particularly in nga, nge, ngi 
 (nga, iige, iigi), of the verbal paradigm, the substitution 
 will not be made in the present work. 
 
 SECT. 2. Division of the Letters. 
 
 6. The most general and r natural division of the Zulu 
 alphabet is into voivels, consonants, and clicks. 
 
 The vowels, or vocalic sounds, are those which are formed without 
 resisting or interrupting the stream of air from the lungs by bringing 
 any of the parts of the mouth into contact.
 
 4 DIVISION AND SOUND OF LETTERS. 
 
 The consonants, or consonantal sounds, are those which are formed 
 or articulated by the meeting together of some pair of the organs of 
 the mouth, to intercept and compress the ajr, as it issues from the 
 throat. The consonants, by themselves, are but obscurely heard, and 
 become distinctly audible only in conjunction with the vowels. And 
 hence they are called consonants, or joint sounds. 
 
 The clicks are those peculiar, sharp, abrupt sounds, which are 
 formed by a rush of air into a vacuum, produced by a sudden separa- 
 tion of some closely joined pair of the oral organs. 
 
 7. Of vowels there are five : viz., a, e, t, o, u*; of 
 consonants, including the gutturals and the English r, 
 there are twenty-four: viz., 6, d, /, g, h, fc, x, x", /, T, c l, 
 m, n, n, p, r, s, s, t, v, w, y, z, z ; and of the simple 
 clicks there are three, which are represented by i, j, n. 
 
 REM. The letter r is inserted in the Zulu alphabet with its English 
 power, as above, and reckoned among the consonants. But the English 
 sound of that letter (r) is not known in the Isizulu. It is introduced for 
 use in writing words transferred from the English and other languages, 
 particularly proper names, in which that letter may occur and be re- 
 garded as indispensable to the integrity of the transferred word or name. 
 
 SECT. 3. Powers or Sounds of the Letters. 
 
 S. The general principle on which the Zulu alphabet 
 is constructed, is to assign uniformly one sound, value, 
 or power, and only one, to each letter. (See 5.) 
 
 Where there are certain intermediate sounds, as there naturally are 
 in the Isizulu, as in most other languages, and especially in those which 
 have never, or but lately, been reduced to writing, for which no special 
 letter is provided in the alphabet, these intermediate grades are ar- 
 ranged under one or ,the other of the two contiguous extremes to which 
 a proper exponent is assigned. 
 
 This remark applies to all the different kinds of sounds in the Isizulu, 
 as well to the vowels, clicks, and gutturals, as to the consonants, of 
 which, illustrations will occur as the sounds or powers of the different 
 classes of letters are considered in their order. 
 
 A. VOWELS. 
 
 1. Their Number, Origin, and Value. 
 
 9. The number of vowel sounds which are marked, 
 and for the notation of which, special separate letters are 
 used in the Zulu alphabet, are the five following : -a, e, 
 t, o, and 11.
 
 THE VOWELS. 5 
 
 1. The vowel a is the purest, most easily produced, 
 and most original of all the vowels, and indeed of all the 
 sounds which enter into the composition of speech ; and 
 on this account it stands at the head of the alphabet. 
 
 It consists of a mere emission of the voice from the 
 throat through the unclosed lips, without the slightest 
 interference from any of the organs of the mouth. 
 
 Its value is that of the English letter a in father, ark; 
 as in ubaba, amasi, udade. 
 
 2. The vowel i is the closest of all the vowels, and is 
 produced by a compressed emission of the voice between 
 the tongue and roof of the mouth, while the oral aper- 
 ture is horizontally extended to the greatest length. 
 
 Its value is that of i in ravine, or of ee in meet; as in 
 mina, sila. 
 
 3. The vowel u, which is just the opposite of i, and 
 the most obscure of all the vowels, is produced by bring- 
 ing the opposite corners of the mouth into the closest 
 approximation to each other, while the voice is emitted 
 between the two lips. 
 
 Its value is that of the English oo in pool, boot ; as in 
 pula, imvula. 
 
 REM. 1. These three vowels constitute so many fixed points on the 
 extremes of the vowel region, the former, a, a pure, open, throat tone, 
 being the limit on the border of mere breathing ; and the two letters i 
 and u, which are called the close, consonantal vowels, and which easily 
 pass over into the semi-vowels or semi-consonants, y and w, being the 
 limit on the consonantal border. 
 
 REM. 2. The relation and position of these determinate vowels, a, i, 
 and u, may be mathematically represented as standing at the three ex- 
 tremes of a triangle ; thus, a 
 
 10. 1. The middle diphthongal vowel e is produced 
 by an emission of the voice from the mouth in a midway 
 position between that easy passive state in which a is 
 produced, and that extreme of horizontal dilatation in 
 which i is uttered.
 
 6 DIPHTHONGAL VOWELS. 
 
 The components of e are, therefore, a and i; or thus, 
 a-ie The sound is sometimes denoted in English 
 and French hy the two letters a and i conjoined as in 
 maid, fail, gait ; inaison, fraiche, palais, where the 
 sound is that of ey in they, or of a in late; as in Isizulu, 
 wena, etu, impela. 
 
 2. The middle diphthongal vowel o is produced by an 
 emission of the voice from the mouth in a midway posi- 
 tion betwen that natural passive state in which a is ut- 
 tered and that extreme of horizontal contraction in which 
 u is uttered. 
 
 The components of o are, therefore, a and u ; or thus, 
 a-u=o. The sound is represented in French by a 
 combination of its elements au in faux, au fait, &c., 
 which is the sound of English o in note, bone; as in 
 Isizulu, umoya, onyoko. 
 
 REM. 1. The formation of the one medial vowel e from a-i, and of 
 o from a-u, is common in some of the Indo-European, and some other 
 languages, particularly in the Sanscrit, where a at the end of one word 
 when followed by tin the beginning of the next, coalesces with it and 
 gives e : and a followed directly by coalesces and gives o ; thus, wala 
 with ishti becomes waleshli, and with ushtra, becomes waloshfra. 
 
 REM. 2. Of this change of a-i into e, and of a-w to o, the Isizulu 
 presents numberless examples, especially in the forming of the genitive 
 case of nouns, and in the case of words beginning with i or u, preceded 
 by prepositions terminating in a, as will be shown hereafter. 
 
 REM. 3. This series of five vowels may be mathematically repre- 
 sented by the following scheme : 
 
 o=au 
 
 The vowels e and i, on the left side of the diagram, are produced by 
 dilating the oral aperture horizontally ; and those on the right, o and u, 
 by contracting it; the vowel a, at the head, being the point of beginning 
 nearest the breath, and t and u, at the foot, the points of termination 
 nearest the consonants. 
 
 i 11. There is, in Zulu, another vowel sound between 
 a and e, and composed of them as e is composed of a 
 and i. This sound, which is somewhat like that of e,
 
 LENGTH OF THE VOWELS. 7 
 
 though shorter but hardly distinguishable from it by an 
 English ear, is common in German, where it is repre- 
 sented by two dots over the a. 
 
 REM. The same character might be employed in the Isizulu, 
 were it advisable to specify that sound in distinction from that of e to 
 which it is so nearly related. But it is thought to be sufficient in this lan- 
 guage to mark and symbolize its five principal vowels, a, e, i, o, and ; 
 and that all the nicer shades may be conveniently arranged under these. 
 
 1 J. Quantity or Length and S^rengtJi of the Voicels. 
 
 ^ 12. The vowel sounds of the Zulu language may be 
 divided into three classes : long, short, and obscure, or 
 medial. The difference between the long and the short 
 vowels lies, not so much in the quality of the sound, 
 (for in both cases it is radically the same,) as in 
 the strength or weakness, which corresponds to the 
 length or shortness as to time, with which they are 
 enunciated. The terms long and short, as applied to 
 vowels in the Isizulu, refer, therefore, to that degree of 
 loudness and distinctness of tone which is consequent upon 
 strength of muscular action, rather than to any difference 
 in quality or marked variety of sound depending upon 
 the length of the vocal tube, which confines the vibra- 
 tions, and upon the modification of which depends the 
 generic character of the vowel sounds. 
 
 J . The difference between a long and a short, in Isizulu, is the differ- 
 ence between these two letters, or the sounds of them, as heard in 
 English iu the one case, in father, where it is long, and in the other 
 case, in genera, dogma, where it is short. Thus, in udade, a is long ; 
 but in umfula, it is short. 
 
 2. The difference between o long and o short is as the difference be- 
 tween o long and a short. The long o in Zulu is the sound of o in 
 English bone, note ; the short o is of a weaker and quicker enunciation 
 like o in mellow, burrow. Thus in uku bona and inmost, o is long; but in 
 ubuso and intando, it is short. 
 
 3. The difference between long e and short e, long t and short t, and 
 between long u and short , is similar to that between long a and short 
 a, and between long and short o, as already illustrated. Thus the e in 
 dhl 6t'Hi and vena is long, but in udade and lungile it is short; the t 
 in uku mila and mina is long, but in inkosi and ubani it is short; and the 
 u in imvula and imbuzi is long, but short in insimu and abantu 
 
 4. As a general rule sufficiently correct for all practical purposes, it 
 may be said that the vowels of the accented syllables are long, while 
 those of the unaccented syllables are short.
 
 8 OBSCURE VOWELS. 
 
 13. 1. The long vowels are not all of the same uni- 
 form length, neither are the short vowels all of the same 
 uniform shortness. The difference in length between 
 what are termed long and short is scarcely greater than 
 that between what may be called the long and longest, 
 or greater than that also between what may be called 
 the short and shortest. 
 
 2. Between the long and the short, there is another 
 grade, a vowel sound of intermediate length, which is 
 found for the most part under the secondary accent of 
 long words, as the long vowels are found under the pri- 
 mary accent. 
 
 3. The very short or obscure vowel sounds are found 
 chiefly at the end of words, where they are often passed 
 over so lightly as to become almost, and in some cases 
 quite, imperceptible in ordinary speech. In such cases 
 the true sound is generally ascertained only by a parti- 
 cular effort, or by taking the word in combination or 
 inflection, where the sound may be known from analogy, 
 or it becomes distinct by coming under the accent. 
 Examples of this sort are found in such words as um- 
 ngani, inkosi, &c., where, by suffixing a particle, as ke, 
 which carries the accent forward from the penult to the 
 final syllable (ni or si, &c.) ; thus, umnganike, irikosike, 
 &c.; or by putting these nouns in the locative case ; thus, 
 enkosini, &c., the final vowel of the root is distinctly 
 heard by reason of the accent which is placed upon it. 
 
 4. The general difference between the long and short 
 vowels requires, ordinarily, no particular mark of dis- 
 tinction, except, perhaps, in the Dictionary; since those 
 vowels are uniformly long which come under the primary 
 accent, and that accent, in a correct system of dividing 
 Zulu discourse into words, falls uniformly upon the 
 penult. 
 
 5. Much less do the minor differences of medial and 
 obscure vowel sounds need to be marked as by diacritic 
 points or other means affecting the alphabet or orthogra- 
 phy of the language. As in naming the colors of the 
 rainbow, it is deemed sufficient to select and designate 
 the principal ; so in the series of vocalic and consonantal 
 sounds, we must content ourselves with denoting those
 
 DOUBLE VOWELS. 
 
 which are generic and fundamental, and leave the less 
 important, subordinate shades, to arrange themselves 
 under their respective principals. 
 
 3. Double Vowels or Diphthongs. 
 
 14. 1. It has been shown ( 10), that the two vowel 
 sounds, a-i, sometimes combine and form another dis- 
 tinct vowel sound, the medial e ; and so also that the 
 two vowels, a-, combine and form the distinct medial 
 vowel o. 
 
 2. But sometimes two vowels are found coming to- 
 gether in Isizulu, both of which are so distinctly sounded 
 that each is heard, and yet the two are so nicely 
 blended that they both together form hut one syllable, 
 and thus constitute what are called diphthongs. 
 
 3. Such are the compound or double vowels ai, as heard 
 in the negative Zulu adverbs ai and hai, and in the 
 nouns ugwai and Vpatai, where the compound, (ai), 
 sounds something like i in the English word pine, or 
 more like the English affirmative adverb aye. 
 
 4. Such also are the compound or double vowels au, 
 as heard in the Zulu exclamation au! and in the words 
 gaula, umxau, where the compound (au) sounds like 
 ow and on in the English words now, ounce. 
 
 5. The compound e i, as heard in the Zulu proper name 
 Ubebei, belongs to the same (diphthongal) class as ai 
 and au, though in a modified degree, since its initial 
 vowel, e, is a derivative (from a-i); and hence the blend- 
 ing, the diphthongal character of the compound, is less 
 perfect than in ai and au, as the difference, (on which 
 the blending depends,) between e and i, is less than be- 
 tween a and i, and between a and u. (See 10.) 
 
 REM. Here, in the examples at, au, and ei, it will be observed that 
 the union of sounds is between the pure throat vowel, (or else its near 
 derivative, e,) on the one extreme, and the consonantal vowels, i or u, 
 on the other extreme. 
 
 15. The union of two vowels in one unit of sound, 
 so as to allow both to be heard in the blending, can 
 occur only where the first of the two is either the pure 
 
 B
 
 10 EUPHONIC VOWEL-CHANGES. 
 
 open vowel a, or else one of its near derivatives (e or o), 
 and the second of the two is one of the consonantal 
 vowels, i or u; as it is only on these conditions that the 
 vocal organs can glide easily, and by a single operation, 
 from an open to a closed state, and carry, as it were, two 
 vocalic sounds on one route, as a proper diphthong re- 
 quires. Hence : 
 
 1. In such vocalic combinations as ao, in the Zulu 
 words mdao, unyao, &c., where the second vowel (o) is 
 closely related to the pure open vowel a, the difference 
 between the two (a and o), is not sufficient to allow of 
 an easy melting into a diphthong. In pronouncing them 
 a new position of the mouth and emission of the breath 
 are required, which produce a sort of hiatus, or soft 
 breathing, between the two. 
 
 2. So, in such vocalic combinations as eu, in imbeu, 
 where the components, e and w, are from the two opposite 
 series of vowels, as may be seen in the diagram ( 10., 
 Rem. 3.), each vowel retains its own separate sound, and 
 the combination never melts into a proper diphthong. 
 
 REM. 1. Of the five permanent pairs of compound vowels now dis- 
 cussed, the first two, ai and au, are regular original diphthongs. The 
 difference between the two vowels of each pair is of the widest and 
 purest kind ; and hence the blending is both easy and genuine. 
 
 REM. 2. In the compounds ei, ao, and eu, the difference between the 
 respective elements is not so great ; and, in an orthoepical and his- 
 torical view, only one of them, ei, can be regarded as a diphthong. 
 The other two pairs are mere combinations ; the one, ao, of a homo- 
 geneous, and the other, eu, of a mixed character. 
 
 4. Euphonic Vowel-changes. 
 
 16. 1. The concurrence of two vowels in two suc- 
 cessive syllables or words, often occasions a hardness in 
 pronunciation, generally called a hiatus ; to prevent or 
 remove which, with the Isizulu, is always an object. 
 
 2. The various methods or euphonic expedients to 
 which this language resorts, to prevent a hiatus, may be 
 reduced to two kinds; the first, and that which alone 
 comes properly under consideration in connection with 
 the vowels, is to diminish the effort in speaking, by redu- 
 cing the volume of sound, and lessening the number of
 
 CONTRACTION CRASIS. 11 
 
 syllables ; the second, the consideration of which comes 
 more properly in connection with consonants, is to insert 
 a letter or particle, and thus to prevent passing sharply 
 from one abrupt sound to another, by first constructing a 
 bridge between them. 
 
 3. The various changes to which Zulu vowels are 
 subject, for the sake of euphony, are generally called 
 contraction, crasis, apostrophe or elision, and commu- 
 tation, to which, perhaps, may be added omission. 
 
 I. Contraction, in its most limited sense, or the uni- 
 ting of two successive vowels, in the same word, into 
 one sound, often occurs in the Isizulu, as: 
 
 1. In forming the genitive case of nouns, the initial 
 vowel of which is a, e, or o, where the genitive particle, 
 a, is absorbed; as, ilizwe labantu, (l-a-abantu); umfula 
 welo 'lizwe, (w-a-elo); izinto zodade, (z-a-odade). 
 And so, again, in forming the genitive case of any noun 
 or pronoun, where the preformative (of the limited noun) 
 is a; as, amadoda enkosi, ( a-a-inkosi ) ; amazwi om- 
 lomo, (a-a-umlomo). 
 
 2. In forming the relative pronoun, of which one ele- 
 ment is always the relative particle a; as, o from a-u ; 
 e from a-i; eli from a-ili; aba from a-aba; &c. And 
 so, again, a personal pronoun is sometimes absorbed by 
 a relative, where the construction brings the two in juxta- 
 position, and each consists of a single vowel ; as, umuntu 
 o yaku m bona, (umuntu a-u (=o)-u ya, &c.) ; into 
 umuntu a yi bonayo, (into umuntu a-i (=e)- yi bo- 
 nayo); &c. 
 
 REM. This term contraction is often used in a general sense, to 
 include not only the kind of change above named and illustrated, but 
 also such as are named under the following heads, as effected by 
 crasis, apostrophe, commutation, Sac. 
 
 II. Crasis, or the coalescence of ihejinal and initial 
 vowel of two successive words, so as to form but one 
 sound, is another euphonic expedient of the Isizulu, to 
 promote ease in speaking. It is found only in such 
 words as are closely connected, and the first of which 
 is generally of a subordinate import. Hence it most 
 frequently occurs:
 
 12 APOSTROPHE. 
 
 1. In the preposition or conjunction with the following 
 noun; as, nomuntu for na umuntu ; nenkomo for na 
 in homo ; namazwi for na amazwi. 
 
 2. In the compound tenses of verbs, between the pro- 
 nouns and auxiliaries ; as, wa be tanda for wa be e 
 tanda ; i bi Jikile for i be i fikile ; u bu zwile for u be u 
 zwile ; i si file for i se i file ; &c. 
 
 III. Apostrophe, the simple dropping or eliding of 
 a vowel, generally from the end, but sometimes from the 
 beginning, and sometimes from the middle, of a word, 
 and indicating the elision generally by the mark of an 
 apostrophe, is another expedient of the Isizulu, to pre- 
 vent a hiatus. 
 
 1. a. The general rule is to elide the final vowel of 
 the preceding word ; thus, s' enza for si enza ; ba y' 
 enza for ba ya enza; n' oka for ni aka; zonk 1 izinto 
 for zonke izinto; tin' abantu for Una abantu. 
 
 b. So also the final vowel, a, of the prepositions, 
 before proper names ; as, n' Jimazulu for na Jlmazulu; 
 also, Obaba n' Omame for Obaba na Omame. 
 
 c. Before other words, however, requiring no capital 
 letter at the beginning, the final vowel of the preposition 
 is generally united, by crasis, with the initial vowel of 
 the following word (see 16., 3., II.); thus, nabantu 
 for na abantu. 
 
 d. The final vowel of the preposition ndzenga is some- 
 times elided ; as, ndzeng' izwi; but it is more frequently 
 united, by crasis, with the initial vowel of the next word; 
 as, ndzengomfana for ndzenga nmfana; ndzengokuba 
 for ndzenga ukuba. 
 
 2. (1) When an apostrophe is necessary, and the 
 elision of the final vowel of the preceding word would 
 cause ambiguity, the initial vowel of the word following 
 is cut off by apheresis; thus, leli 'gama for leli igama, 
 this letter; lelo 'gama, that letter; le 'nkomo, this cow; 
 leyo 'nkomo, that cow. 
 
 (2) There are other cases in which the initial vowel 
 of a word is cut off; as, 
 
 (a.) Jn forming the genitive of proper names of
 
 COMMUTATION OF VOWELS. 13 
 
 persons; thus, izinkomo zi ka 'Mpande ; tibuntubalca 
 'Fnkn. 
 
 (b.) In the vocative c;se ; as, 'Nkotsi; ' Kaba; 'Musi. 
 
 (c.) In some other instances; as, a be 'vikulu for a be 
 umkiilu ; i be 'nye for i be inye. 
 
 3. In the formation of compound words, the initial 
 vowel of the second is dropped, and the two words are 
 brought together and written as one, without any use ol 
 an apostrophe to mark the elision of the vowel ; thus, 
 umninimuzi, from umnini-umuzi, owner of a kraal ; 
 amanzimtoti, from amanzi-amtoti, name of a river= 
 sweet water. 
 
 4. Sometimes, in the formation of a word, two vowels 
 are brought together in such a relation, or of such a nature, 
 as to require one of them to be dropped, as from the 
 middle of a word, in which case the elision is not marked 
 by the use of the apostrophe ; thus, aboni for abaoni ; 
 isono for mono ; ubomi for ubuomi ; isebi for isiebi. 
 But in isiula, fool, both vowels are retained and dis- 
 tinctly sounded. The same holds in some other words ; 
 as, iula, antelope, pi. amaula. 
 
 IV. Commutation, or the changing of one vowel into 
 another, or into a cognate semi-consonant, is another 
 euphonic process for preventing hardness of pronuncia- 
 tion in the Isizulu. 
 
 1. When two vowels come in juxta-position, the first 
 of which is one of the close consonantal class, i or u, or 
 a derivative, e or o, and the second of the two is an open 
 vowel, a, or a derivative, the upward order as they 
 stand in the diagram, ( 10, Rem. 3) it is generally the 
 case that the first either thrusts in its cognate semi- 
 consonant, y or w, in order to facilitate the transition of 
 the vocal organs from a close to an open state, or to fur- 
 nish a support for the following vowels : or else, in rapid 
 pronunciation, the first, close vowel (i or u), passes quite 
 over into its cognate, y or w, ia, ie, io, <fec., becoming 
 iya or ya, iye or ye, iyo or t/o, <fcc; and ua, ue, uo, &c., 
 becoming uwa or wa, uwe or we, uwo or wo, &c. 
 
 Examples of this principle, and of these changes, abound in the Isi-
 
 14 OMISSION OF A VOWEL. 
 
 zulu, of which the following mav serve as a sufficient illustration ; thus, 
 uku-azi for uku azi ; ukii'enz^ for iiku enza , inkomo yami for inkomo i 
 
 ami ; uml'ana witmi for urn/ana it ami; umuzi u wakiwe or mntizi wakiwe 
 for umuzi u akhre ; imizi i yakiwe or imizi yakiirc for imizi i akiire ; 
 umfana o walusa for umfana o alma ; into e yapukilc for into e. ap-ukile ; 
 wnuli o wapukile or umuti wapukile for uinuti o apukile, Stc., &.e. 
 
 2. The vowel a sometimes passes over, in a similar 
 manner, into w before another vowel ; thus, ' amabele 
 a nga wako '*for ' a nga a ako ;' * amakosi a wodwa ' or 
 ' amakosi a odwa' for 'a aodwa.' 
 
 3. It is on this principle that the pronouns which con- 
 sist, radically, of a single vowel, as i, e, a, u, are often 
 strengthened, and sometimes a hiatus is prevented, by 
 their taking before them a cognate semi-consonant, y or w, 
 making yi, ye, wu, wu, when their position or import re- 
 quires strength of utterance, or they follow in close con- 
 nection with another word ending, as all words do, in a 
 vowel; thus, 'u yi bonile' instead of 'u i bonile;' 'si wa 
 bonile' instead of 'si a bonile ;' ' nga ye tanda ' instead 
 of 'nga e tanda;' ' wa ye tanda' for ' wa e tanda,' 
 contr. of ' wa be e tanda.' 
 
 RKM. But perspicuity and the genius of the language sometimes 
 forbid elision, commutation, and coalescence ; or the taste or vocal 
 organs of the people prefer some other method of avoiding a hard sound 
 in some instances ; and in such cases, resort is had to the insertion of 
 some euphonic particle of a consonantal character, a notice of which 
 comes under the head of consonants. (See 35.) 
 
 V. Omission of the vowel u. After the more flowing 
 semi-vocal consonant wi, the close vowel u is often omit- 
 ted, more especially when followed by other flowing con- 
 sonants, as J, n, s, z, and sometimes c l, fc, t, v; thus, 
 'kazimla' for 'kazimula;' 'umne' for 'umune;' 'umsa' 
 for 'umusa;' 'urnzi' for 'umuzi;' 'nanfla' for 'namu'la;' 
 'ernva' for 'emuva.' 
 
 Sometimes nothing is heard of the sound of w in these 
 and similar examples ; sometimes it is brought out very 
 full and distinct, especially where the accent comes 
 upon it ; but in most cases the enunciation of it is short 
 and suppressed, probably something like the Sheva in 
 Hebrew. 
 
 - I- Some tribes, as the Amazulu and their neighbors, make a
 
 CONSONANTS* 15 
 
 much more frequent and full use of , as above, than others. The rule 
 with the former seems to be, to retain it in full ; with the latter, to omit 
 or suppress it. 
 
 RE.M. 2. At a much earlier period this vowel was doubtless in general 
 use by all the tribes speaking cognate dialects, in all such examples as 
 are now referred to, and in many other instances where it is omitted 
 even by the Amazulu. Doubtless umu was originally the full arid distinct 
 form of the incipient in all those nouns where we now find only urn, making 
 uijiufana. uinubila, &.C.; where we now hear simply umfana, umbila, &.c. 
 
 REM. 3. In some of the cognates of the Isizulu, as the Sichuana, 
 Suali, and Rinika, the u, or its equivalent o, is still in general use in those 
 incipients which correspond to nm in Isizulu ; though the initial u has 
 been worn off, or dropped, in those dialects, while it is retained here ; 
 thus, in the Sichuana, we find molilo, (m/t/o), for the Zulu iimlilo ; and in 
 the Rinika, we find mulungu and mnzi, where, in Isizulu, we have um- 
 lungu or vmulungu, and umzi or uinuzi, &c. 
 
 B._ CONSONANTS. 
 1. Their Number and Value. 
 
 17. The number of consonants, including the two 
 semi-vowels w and ?/, the gutturals x and ^, and the 
 English ?-, is, in all, twenty-four. (See 7.) 
 
 REM. Between some of the cognate consonants, as 6 and p, g and 
 k, f and r, different grades of intermediate sounds are often heard, 
 which are arranged under their respective contiguous principals, where 
 they will become naturalized and absorbed as the sounds and forms 
 of the language become more fixed by writing. 
 
 IS. The value or sound of the several consonants 
 is as follows : 
 
 B is sounded as in English, ' but,' 'number;' thus, 
 ' ubaba,' c yebo.' Under it is ranked also a somewhat 
 modified sound of this letter, nearly intermediate between 
 the genuine 6 and p, as in ' koboza ' or * kopoza.' This 
 intermediate sound is heard also in other instances in 
 which it comes nearer to p than b; and hence it is 
 reckoned under that letter, as in Mapula' or * Jabula;' 
 'popoza' or 'boboza.' 
 
 D has a clear, distinct sound, as in ' did ;' ' udade/ 
 'kodwa.' It also represents a sound nearly interme- 
 diate between d and /, as in 'dunduzela' or 'tunduzela;' 
 'Udambuza' or 'Utambuza.' 
 
 F has a clear, sharp sound, as in 'fate,' 'if;* thus,
 
 16 CONSONANTS. 
 
 ' umi'ana,' ' fuiida,' 'isifo.' There is also a sound inter- 
 mediate between that of/ and v t as in ' Uzafugana' or 
 ('zuvukana ;' ' uku futa ' or ' uku vuta.' 
 
 6? is always hard, as in 'go/ 'game,' 'log;' thus, 
 ' igarna/ ' geza.' It is often preceded by the ringing 
 nasal sound of n, or rather n. (See 5; also 11, below.) 
 There is also a -sound intermediate between that of g 
 and k, as in ' Uzafugana ' or ' Uzafukana ;' ' uku ganda ' 
 or 'uku kanda ;' ' Utugela ' or ' Utukela.' 
 
 H is an aspirate, as in ' hat,' ' behave ;' thus, ' hamba,' 
 ' haya,' ' umhuma.' The pure proper sound of h is not 
 very common in the Isizulu. But heretofore this letter 
 has been often used, in Zulu orthography, in combination 
 with /, making hi. Some have tried to make this hi re- 
 present a sound which others have tried to represent by 
 dhl, as in ' uktihla ' or ' ukudhla ;' while in other cases, the 
 same hi has been used by some to represent a strongly 
 aspirated sound, which others have attempted to indicate 
 by thl, as in ' hlala ' or * thlala,' sit. Each of these 
 sounds, dhl and thl, has in the present work a distinct 
 appropriate character of its own T and c l. (See T and 
 c l below ; also the Alphabet, Sect. 1.) 
 
 K is sounded as in 'keep,' 'king;' thus ' kodwa,' 
 ' uku kala.' (See also g}. In words transferred from 
 other languages it is used to represent the sound of c hard, 
 thus ' ikamelo,' camel ; ' ikati,' cat; ' ikom,' or ' ikam,' 
 or ' ikama,' comb. 
 
 The letter x represents a soft guttural sound, some- 
 what broader than the German ch, in 'Macht;' and cor- 
 respond ing more to the guttural sound of ch and g in the 
 Dutch words 'christen,' ' God,' 'goed;' thus, ' Xola,' 
 
 The letter x represents a peculiar, hard, rough gut- 
 tural sound, which seems to be made by contracting the 
 throat, and giving the breath a forcible expulsion, at the 
 same time modifying the sound with a tremulous motion 
 of the epiglottis; as in ' uku ^eza,' 'uku ^eba,' *um- 
 
 L has the soft liquid sound of the same letter in 
 English, as in Move,' 'lute;' thus, ' londa,' ' bala,' 
 4 lapa.'
 
 CONSONANTS. 17 
 
 The letter T represents a slightly aspirated, flat, 
 dento-lingual sound, like the Welsh //; as in ' inTovu,' 
 4 amanTa,' * izinTu.' This sound has been represented 
 sometimes by dl, sometimes by hi, and sometimes by 
 dhl. (See H, above.) 
 
 The letter c l represents a strongly aspirated sound, 
 somewhat related to the above ; but there the aspiration 
 is lateral ; here it is palatal : there, slight ; here, sharp 
 and strong; as in ' isi'lanu,' ' u'Jamvu,' ' irfle.' This 
 sound has been represented heretofore in various ways 
 sometimes by //, sometimes by hi, sometimes by thl, and 
 again by khl. (See If, above.) 
 
 M is sounded as in 'man,' 'move;' thus, ' mina,' 
 ' puma,' ' igama.' This letter is combined with many 
 other consonants; thus, mb, mf, inn, as in c kambe,' &c. 
 
 JVhas, by itself, one pure simple sound, as in 'name,' 
 'nine,' 'not;' thus, ' kona,' ' unina,' ' umfana.' This 
 letter, like m, is often combined with other consonants, 
 where it has a half suppressed, ringing, nasal force (=n), 
 as in 'hand,' 'bank;' thus, 'linda,' 'konkota,' 'amanzi,' 
 'amanga,' &,c., as below. 
 
 There is, (as above,) a simple, elementary sound, 
 which is allied to the sound of n, and also to that of g, 
 though differing from both the sound of n in * conquer,' 
 and of ng as in 'song,' ' king.' The difference between 
 this half suppressed, ringing, nasal sound, and the sound 
 of ng-, as heard in ' finger,' ' angry,' &c., where we have 
 the sound of g, in addition to the above n, or ng, 
 (=< fing-ger,' ' ang-gry,' &c.,) may be more clearly 
 seen by comparing the noun 'longer' (=one who longs), 
 with the adjective ' longer' (=of greater length), the 
 sound of n- being simple (=n) in the first, and compound 
 (=ng) in the second. In Isizulu this nasal sound is not 
 found, as in English, alone; though its use in combination 
 with other consonants is very common, especially with g. 
 But for reasons already given ( 5), a special sign for 
 this sound, n, will not be employed in the present work ; 
 nor will this course be necessarily attended with doubt 
 or ambiguity , only let it be kept in mind that ng, in 
 Isizulu, is always sounded like the same letters in the
 
 18 CONSONANTS. 
 
 English words ' finger,' 'angry,' 'stronger;' tffus, 'ilanga/ 
 'amanga/ * lunga,' ' ngi,' ' nga,' (='ilaiiga/ 'amanga/ 
 4 lunga/) &c. 
 
 P has, in Zulu, the clear sound of the same letter in 
 English, as in 'pin,' 'past;' thus, ( ukupa,' ' pezu/ 
 
 * pila.' It is, however, used in some cases to represent 
 a sound between the proper b and p, as 'uku putuza' or 
 
 * uku butuza.' (See B.) 
 
 R is adopted, in Zulu, to represent the English sound 
 of that letter, in such words as are transferred with it ; 
 though the sound is not heard in this language ; and it 
 is with difficulty that the natives can learn to speak it. 
 They always incline to give the sound of / in place of r 
 when required to utter the latter. Formerly, this letter, 
 r, was used in Zulu orthography where x is now intro- 
 duced. (See x, above.) 
 
 REM. The very common vernacular use of this sound (of r) in the 
 Sichuana, cognate of the Isizulu, renders the introduction of it here the 
 more advisable, as it may help prepare the way for an importation of 
 words and an assimilation of the two dialects. 
 
 S has generally the sharp hissing sound of the same 
 letter in "English, as in 'us,' 'saint;' thus, ' inkosi,' 
 ' insika/ ' sonke.' In some cases it has a slight soft 
 flat variation, approaching to the sound of z in nasal, as 
 in ' uku sungeza ' or ' uku zungeza.' 
 
 The letter s has a single simple, elementary sound, like 
 that of the digraph sh in the English words ' shine/ 
 'show/ thus, ' isumi/ ihasi/ &c. Heretofore, this 
 sound has been represented in the Isizulu by the combi- 
 nation sh, as it is in English, making 'ishumi/ 'ihashi/ 
 &c., instead of the present, ' isumi/ { ihasi/ 'peseya/ 
 This sound is frequently compounded with that of t, 
 making ts, instead of the former combination tsh, or 
 /i/=the sound of ch in English ' church ;' thus, ' tsetsa ' 
 (instead of ' tshetsha ' or 'tyetya'); ' ukutso/ ' isitsa/ 
 ' tsona/ * tsena/ 
 
 T is sounded as in ' tide/ ' net / thus, ' tina/ ' tata/ 
 'tula.' There are intermediate sounds between this 
 sound and that of d. (See D.)
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. 19 
 
 REM. T has been employed, sometimes, before s, to give the sharp 
 hissing sound of that letter more prominence, thus ' nantsi,' ' intsika,' 
 &c. ; but there is no necessity for this, and the system of orthography 
 >vill be more simple and consistent by writing such examples without t, 
 thus ' nansi,' ' insika,' ' insimbi,' &.c. 
 
 V is sounded as in 'vine,' 'cave;' thus, ' vala,' * ukova.' 
 This letter is also used to represent a sound between 
 that of v and / (See F.) 
 
 W is always a consonant, or rather a semi-consonant, 
 in Zulu, and has the English sound of that letter in 
 'way,' 'wise;' thus, ( wena,' ' wisa,' ' ukuwa.' 
 
 Y is always a consonant, or rather, like w, a semi- 
 consonant, in Zulu, and has the English value of that 
 letter in our system of orthography, as in ' yes,' ' you ;' 
 thus, 'yena,' 'yonke,' ' umoya.' 
 
 Z is sounded as in 'zeal,' 'freeze;' thus, ' ilizwi,' 
 ' izinkomo.' 
 
 The letter z has the simple elementary sound of z in 
 ' azure,' s in ' pleasure ;' the sound of the French j in 
 'jour,' 'jamais;' and is used in Zulu in combination 
 with d, to denote the sound of the English j; thus, 
 'ndzalo,' 'dzabula,' 'indza.' 
 
 2. Classification and Relationship of the Consonants. 
 
 19. 1. Consonants may be divided according to two 
 methods of description according to the different organs 
 of speech by which they are formed ; and according to 
 the different degrees of influence which those organs 
 have in the formation. 
 
 2. Considering the organs by whose action they are 
 formed, the consonants, in Isizulu, may be divided into 
 four kinds : 
 
 (a.) The Gutturals, or throat sounds, x and H ; 
 (b.) The Palatals, k and g ; ng and y ; 
 (c.) The Linguals, t, d, I, n, r, s, s, z t and z ; 
 (d.) The Labials, p, b, f, v, m, and w. 
 
 H is an aspirate, or mere breathing, inclining, how- 
 ever, to the character of a guttural.
 
 - - F I A T 1 
 
 REM. Some of these letters stand under a doubJt 
 category, being modified by some other organ than those 
 from" which they are named in the above classification. 
 Thus, the letters t. d. I, r. . and z. are sometimes 
 
 called denials ; k and 2" are sometimes called gutturals ; 
 I and r, palatah : s and r, sibilants ; and m, , and tig- 
 (=n. ^-5. 1S>. nascds. 
 
 BO. 1. A more important classification is that which 
 is based, not upon the organs of speech, but upon the 
 extent of their influence in the formation of the conso- 
 nants upon the kind and degree of their compression, 
 according to which a more or less perfect articulation 
 is giTen to the consonantal sounds. 
 
 2. Tbe rnmprrninn of the organs may be in tun* either hard and 
 slender, as in p, 4, fcc.; or the occlusion of the organs may be toft and 
 broad, as in /. r. &c. 
 
 In the former, the action of the organs is always elastic and '"g*mit- 
 neonu a contact and a quick rebound. In the latter the action may be 
 quick, but also protracted a contact with a confused vanish, instead of 
 a qmck rebound. 
 
 3. Tbe kmrd slender elastic pressure of the organs gives that class of 
 consonants called mutt*, as p. b. i, a*, t. and g. which cannot be sounded 
 at all without the help of a vowel. 
 
 4. Tbe aft brand occlusion of the organs with a protracted vanish 
 regular in some cases, as in /. r ; and irregular in others, as in /. r ; 
 or with a closing of the mouth and an emission of the breath through 
 the nose, as in m, m. *g, gives that class of consonants sometimes called 
 semi-vowels, from their having, of themselves, an articulation which is ac- 
 companied with an imperfect sound ; as, /, . , Kg (in song 
 
 To this class belong also s and z ; and also, as im- 
 perfect varieties, the following. %iz.. h. x, X ; T, 1. 
 
 5. Five of these semi-vowels /, m. m, r, and ng are distinguished 
 by the name of ii^vvb. from their coalescing easily with other consonants ; 
 and the hater, ng, with the clicks forming, as it were, but one sound. 
 
 - 1 A general description and classification of the 
 kinds and modifications of both the Towels and conso- 
 nants of the Isizulu, with an exhibition of some of their 
 relations and contrasts, from the pure open throat tone a 
 to the most fixed, exterior, labial mutes, 6 and />, are 
 presented in the following
 
 A I.PH ABK T i< QBADATlOffg. Jl 
 
 7 6k t// .#//// 
 
 j r 
 
 
 Pure open 
 
 A throat tone. 
 
 
 Diphthongal or mixed 
 
 i E / palatal middle 
 \ o ^ tones. 
 
 
 
 Close consonantal 
 
 s i / labial or extreme 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 f u ^ tones. 
 
 
 
 
 r y 1 vocal consonants 
 
 
 Intermediate 
 and 
 
 \ cognates, or ech<. 
 w j of i and u. 
 
 
 
 transitional 
 
 i aspirate, or vowel 
 
 
 
 
 t mute. 
 
 
 LIQUID \ 
 
 flowing 
 rolling 
 
 ' f lingual. 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 suppressed ' 
 
 M , 
 
 N > nasal. 
 
 y. 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 NG) 
 
 S 
 
 Q 
 
 HISSING OR 
 
 ( smooth j 
 
 1 
 
 i' 
 
 z 
 
 "Z, 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 SIBILANT 
 
 f 
 
 crushed j 
 
 [ dental. 
 
 8 
 
 
 -2. 
 
 
 compound ! 
 
 DZ 
 
 TS J . 
 
 H 
 
 pfl 
 
 
 clogged \ 
 
 T / 
 c| . lingual. 
 
 
 ASPIRATED<( ortfi 
 
 i j { . 1 
 
 
 
 OV^l L 
 
 rough 
 
 * J guttural. 
 
 "" 
 
 
 
 blowing ! 
 
 v | labial. 
 
 
 
 
 
 { lingual. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 COMPRESSED { interior^ 
 
 T ) 
 
 | . 
 
 
 (with force 
 
 
 J palatal. 
 
 
 and a quick | } 
 
 K ) 
 
 
 rebound) 
 
 [ exterior \ 
 
 (labial. 
 
 
 22. 1. Both kinds of articulate sounds the mutes and 
 the semi-vowels differ as to the decree of compression 
 to which they are subject in articulation ; and according 
 to this difference they may be divided into two classes, 
 called weak, as 6, d, &c., and strong, as/>. /, &c.
 
 JJ ON SO .NANTA I. <(<; NATES. 
 
 "2. The former, or weak consonants, as 6, (/, when 
 isolated and pronounced separate from the vowels, give 
 a sound at the natural tone of the voice, and hence are 
 sometimes called, sonant or weal, and sometimes flat 
 or soft. Of this class are b, d, g, v, z, z (zh), dz (j), T, 
 
 and x- 
 
 3. The latter, or strong consonants, as p, t, &c., when 
 isolated and pronounced separate from the vowels, give 
 only the sound of a whisper ; and hence are sometimes 
 called surd or whispering, and sometimes sharp or hard. 
 Of this class are />, /, k, /, *, s, s, c l, x, and h. 
 
 4. These sounds, excepting h, have a reciprocal correspondence to 
 each other the weak to the strong, and vice versa, being respectively 
 formed by a similar disposition of the organs, the several pairs of 
 which are shown in the following 
 
 Scheme of cognates. 
 
 ( Weak or flat - - b d g v z z dz T X- 
 
 I I I I I i I I I 
 ( Strong or sharp - p t k f s s ts c l X- 
 
 5. The remaining sounds, m, n, ng, I, r, w, and y, though produced 
 by the voice, may also be distinctly uttered in a whisper ; and hence they 
 are called neutral or intermediate consonants. 
 
 23. 1. In some cases, one neutral consonant will 
 readily unite with another, or it will unite either with 
 a flat or with a sharp consonant, in pronunciation. 
 Hence the frequent recurrence of such combinations 
 as ml, ran, wi6, mny ; nw, ny, nd, ndw ; dw, gw, 
 kw, siv, &c. 
 
 2. In some cases a flat consonant will unite in pro- 
 nunciation with a flat, and a sharp with a sharp ; as dz 
 (=d-zh=j); ts. These two are the only combinations 
 of this class in the Isizulu. 
 
 3. But a flat and a sharp, or a sharp and a flat con- 
 sonant, cannot come together. Should any change or 
 combination occur to bring them together in the same 
 syllable, before they can be pronounced, either the flat 
 must be changed to its cognate sharp, or the sharp 
 must be changed to its cognate flat ; or the difficulty
 
 r.AVV OF ACCOMMODATION. Sif 
 
 must be removed in some other way, as by dropping 1 one 
 of the consonants, or introducing a vowel between them. 
 
 RKM. 1. The law here exhibited in respect to the consonants, is 
 called the Law of Accommodation. 
 
 RE.M. "2. This general law is fixed and necessary, and holds good 
 in all languages, the only difference being, that different languages 
 change different letters, to remove the difficulty, when it occurs, one 
 accommodating the first letter to the second, and another, the second to 
 the lii si. 
 
 24. 1. In most cases where combinations of conso- 
 nants occur in the Isizulu, one of the components, and 
 often both, or all, are semi-vowels, and generally of the 
 neutral, if riot also of the lingual class. 
 
 2. And the letters of this class, which are found com- 
 bining most frequently with others, are the nasals m and 
 n the labial liquid, m, being always preferred and 
 taken into combination by the labial mutes, 6, p, /, v; 
 while the lingual liquid, n, is generally preferred by the 
 lingual and palatal mutes, d, t, g, and k. Hence the 
 very common combinations mb, mp, nd, nt, &c. (See 
 23, I.) With t, however, either m or n may be found 
 in combination, as in ubumtoti, umuntu. 
 
 REM. 1. Strictly grammatically considered, these two nasal liquids, 
 m and , are only a single sound which takes form according to the organ 
 of the following mute, to soften down the mute's hard elastic nature the 
 form of m being taken before a labial, and of n before a lingual the m 
 being the more substantial of the two, and of the earlier origin. 
 
 REM. 2. Hence, when, by the inflection of a word, 
 the labial mute, 6, preceded by m, is changed to dz; the 
 lingual, d, requires a change of the m to n ; or, as we 
 say in a word, mb changes to wdz, as in Isidumbi, Esi- 
 dundzini; uku hamba, uku handzwa. 
 
 25. Letters which cannot be pronounced together in 
 the same syllable are called incompatible,' while those 
 which can be so pronounced are called compatible. 
 
 A condensed view of the consonants of this latter 
 class, where the letters in the central column which 
 are arranged alphabetically may be preceded by any 
 on a line before them, or followed by any on a line after 
 them, is given in the following
 
 24 COMPATIBLE LETTERS. 
 
 Table of Compatible Letters. 
 
 M may precede b which may precede rarely w 
 
 n d w 
 
 m f sometimes w 
 
 g w 
 
 m and n k I arid w 
 
 X vv 
 
 X* w 
 
 rn 1 w 
 
 n T w 
 
 m and n '1 w 
 
 m b, f, k, 1, '1, n, p, s, s, t, and v 
 m ii d, g, k, T, '1, s, t, w, y, and z 
 
 ng w 
 
 m p rarely w 
 
 in s w 
 
 m and t w 
 
 m and n t s, s, and w 
 
 m v sometimes w 
 d, g, k, x, , 1, n, } 
 ng, s, s, t, y, z, > w 
 z, i, {, and n 
 
 n y w 
 
 m and n z w 
 
 d z w 
 
 g, n, and ng i w 
 
 g, n, and ng I vv 
 
 g, n, and ng , n w 
 
 REM. The use of w after b, m, and p, is rare and not 
 very classical, being generally avoided by changing 6 
 into ts; m into ny; and p into ts. The combinations bw, 
 fw, and vw, are sometimes avoided by dropping w ; the 
 same holds in some cases with mw. 
 
 26. 1. Some of the consonants are called explosive, 
 and others continuous, according as the air or breath is 
 differently affected by the kind and degree of strength 
 used in articulation. 
 
 In the explosive class, to which belong/), 6, /, d, k, and g-, the
 
 RELATIONSHIP OF CONSONANTS. 25 
 
 * 
 
 sound, isolated from a vowel, can not be prolonged, but must be cut off 
 with a rebound of the organs, either sharply by the strong articulation, 
 as in k, I, p; or bluntly by the weak articulation, as in g, d, and 6. 
 
 3. In the continuous class, to which belong the rest of the conso- 
 nants, the breath is transmitted more by degrees, and the sound, though 
 isolated from the vowel, can be prolonged. 
 
 21. The mute, semi-mute, and semi-vocal consonants, 
 excepting the liquids, are divided again, according to Dr. 
 Latham, into the two classes called lene or simple, and 
 aspirate. The difference on which this division is made 
 is not owing to a difference in their sharpness or flatness. 
 Neither is it owing to a difference in their explosiveness 
 or continuity. 
 
 (a.) For example, both p and / are sharp, but p, 
 whose sound differs from the sound of / in a certain 
 degree, is called lene or simple, while / is called 
 aspirate. Again the sound of s is continuous ; yet in 
 respect to the difference under consideration, s is classed, 
 not with the continuous /, but with the explosive p. 
 And 
 
 As f is to p, so is v to b. 
 
 As v is to b, so is c l to t. 
 
 As c l is to t, so is T to d. 
 
 As T is to d, so is x to k. 
 
 As x is to k, so is x to g. 
 
 As x is to g, so is s to s. 
 
 As s is to s, so is z to z. 
 
 As z is to z, so is f to p. 
 
 (b.) Hence, p, 6, t, d, fc, g> s, and z, are lene or 
 simple ; and /, v, '1, T, x, X, s, and z, are aspirate. 
 Again, /?, /, t, k, s, s, c l, and x", are sharp ; whilst 
 6, v, d, g, z, z, T, and x, are flat. 
 
 (c.) All the aspirates are continuous, and all the lenes, 
 with the exception of s and z, are explosive. 
 
 28. An exhibition of the double series of relation- 
 ship which exists among many of the consonants, to- 
 gether with a general view of the character and class of 
 all, according to the arrangement and nomenclature of
 
 26 COMBINATIONS OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 
 
 Dr. Lepsius, whose valuable Treatise came to hand 
 since the preceding pages were written is given in the 
 
 following 
 
 Conson-antal Scheme, 
 
 | EXPLOSIVE OR FRICATIVE OR 
 
 AN C I PIT A 
 
 
 DIVISIBLE. 
 
 CONTINUOUS. 
 
 
 
 fort is. lenis. nasalis. 
 
 fortis. lenis. semi-voc. 
 
 
 1. Faucal 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 II. Guttural 
 
 k g n 
 
 X * 
 
 
 III. Palatal 
 
 
 y 
 
 T 
 
 IV. Dental 
 
 I d n 
 
 ( S Z 
 
 r, 1, 1 
 
 
 
 ( S Z 
 
 
 V. Labial 
 
 p b in 
 
 f V W 
 
 
 r3. Combinations of Consonants. 
 
 * 
 
 29. The present method of writing the Zulu language 
 includes a large number of consonantal combinations. 
 These may be divided into two classes the combination 
 of consonants with consonants, and the combination of 
 consonants with clicks. The former, and their values, 
 are chiefly as follows : 
 
 Dw, as in English 'dwarf;' thus, 'indwangu,' 'kodwa.' 
 
 Dz, as in * dzabula,' ' isidzingi.' 
 
 Fw, as in 'emafwini,' ' esifwini.' 
 
 Gw, as in * uku gwinya,' * isigwaniro' like gu in 
 'guava.' 
 
 Kw, as in ' uku kwela,' ' ukwanda.' 
 
 jLw?, as in ' uku Iwa,' ' isilwane.' 
 
 The letter T is sometimes combined with w,=l'w; as 
 in c umTwa, ' umTwazi.' 
 
 The letter c l is combined with w; as in*uku c lwa/ 
 c uku 'Iwenga,' * uku c lwita.' 
 
 Mb, as in 4 uku hamba,' ' Isidumbi/ 
 
 Mf, as in c abamfama,' uku mfonona.' 
 
 Mk, as in 'ukwamkela.' This compound may be 
 resolved by inserting u between m and k ; thus, ' ukwa- 
 mukela. (See 16., V.)
 
 COMBINATIONS OF CONSONANTS. 21 
 
 Ml, as in ' uku zamla,' * uinpefumlo.' This sound 
 may be resolved also like that of wife, above. 
 
 Ml, as in ' ubunYlope.' 
 
 Mn, as in ' ubumnandi.' 
 
 Mny, as in ' ubumnyama.' 
 
 Mp, as in ' insumpa,' ' inswernpe ;' sounded as mp, 
 in the English words ' lamp,' * hemp.' 
 
 Ms, as in ' ngornso,' * umsa.' This combination is 
 often resolved ; thus, ' ngomuso,' ' umusa.' (See 16., V.) 
 
 Ms, as in * uku kuinsa.' (See s, 18). 
 
 Mt, as in ' ubumtoti;' like mt in * tempt,' where the 
 p is silent. 
 
 Mv, as in 'inlamvu,' 'emva.' Sometimes this sound 
 is resolved like that of mk and ms. 
 
 JVd, as in 'tanda,' ' umsindisi ;' like nd in l hand/ 
 < brand.' 
 
 Ndw, as in * tandvva,' ' umdwendwe.' 
 
 Ngw, as in ' sengwa,' ' lingwa,' 'igwangwa;' like 
 ngu in 'language,' 'languor.' 
 
 JVfc, as in ' uku nkenketa ;' sounded like nfe in 'ink,' 
 ' bank,' ' sunk.' 
 
 Nkw, as in * isinkwa;' like nqu in English ' inquire.' 
 
 JVT, as in ' amanTa,' 'ibanTa.' 
 
 JV C 1, as in ' irflarfla,' (=good fortune). 
 
 JVs, as in * pansi,' ' donsa.' 
 
 Nt, as in ' kanti,' * umuntu;' like nt in want. 
 
 JVY0, as in ' umnwe' or ' umunwe,' ' unwele.' 
 
 JVi/, as in ' umnyaka,' f uku kanya;' like the same in 
 * Bu-nyan.' 
 
 Nyw, as in ' lunywa,' Minywa.' 
 r, as in 'ukwenza,' 'ubunzima.' 
 
 Sw, as in 'swela,' 'umsweswe.' 
 Also siv, as in ' swila/ 
 
 Tic, as in ' twala,' 4 twesa ;' like tw in ' twenty.' 
 Ts, as in 'tsetsa,' 'tsona,' 'itse;' like ch in 'church,' 
 1 march,' ' child.' 
 
 Tsw, as in * ubutswala.' 
 
 Vw, as in ' emvwini.' 
 
 Yw, as in ' uku siywa,' 'erfliziyweni.' 
 
 Zw, as in ' uku zwa,' ' ilizwe.' 
 
 Also zw, as in ' idzwabu,' ' uku dzwiba.'
 
 28 EUPHONIC PRINC1PLKS. 
 
 30. 1. There are, in Isizulu, a few instances, and 
 only a few, in which a consonant is found double, or re- 
 duplicated. Such is the case with m, in the words 
 ummango and iimmoya, where the incipient ends, and 
 the root begins with the same consonant, m. 
 
 2. One of the doubled vowels is generally dropped, however, in 
 pronunciation, even by the best speakers; so much so, that the fact of 
 a reduplication is learned, not from ever hearing a distinct repeti- 
 tion of the consonant, but from the laws of inflection, or of derivation. 
 (See 47., Rem. 2.) 
 
 4. Euphony and Consonantal Changes. 
 
 31. 1. Euphony, or a regard for easy and agreeable 
 sounds and the harmony of words, has no small influence 
 on the grammar of the Isizulu ; as it has, indeed, upon 
 most other languages in their youth, or where, for want 
 of books, or from some other cause, a language is ad- 
 dressed more to the ear than to the eye. 
 
 2. As with the Zulu vowels, so, perhaps, more with 
 the consonants ? certain euphonic principles are found 
 operating, in various ways, to produce euphonic changes. 
 
 32. 1. The great object, and general law of these 
 changes, is to produce facility of utterance by a proper 
 intermixture of vocalic and liquid sounds on the one 
 hand, and of mute consonants on the other. 
 
 2. The two faults opposed to euphony are a superabundance of 
 vowels and liquids, producing too great softness ; and a super- 
 abundance of consonants, producing too great harshness. Perhaps 
 few languages have a better claim than the Isizulu to the character of 
 a happy mean. 
 
 3. As something is always left to the taste, caprice, 
 or fashion of a people, in their regard for euphony, dif- 
 ferent nations are often found to have certain euphonic 
 codes, in some respects peculiar each to their own 
 language. 
 
 (a.) Euphonic changes may, therefore, be either 
 necessary, as occasioned by the general principles of 
 euphony ; or accidental, as occasioned by the sense of 
 euphony in a particular people. 
 
 (b.) Both kinds, again, are either external, being
 
 EUPHONIC CHAM;KS ILLUSTRATED. JD 
 
 perceived from a comparison with kindred dialects, or 
 with an original language ; or internal, appearing in the 
 very structure of a particular language, by itself con- 
 sidered. 
 
 REM. A careful study of the system of articulate sounds, and of 
 the euphonic changes required in the Isizulu, will show that many of 
 those changes are both internal and necessary ; and that all of them 
 are made, not by any arbitrary process, but in full harmony with the 
 physiological character of sound. 
 
 33. 1. It has been remarked already ( 25.), that 
 certain combinations are incompatible. Another fact 
 has been noticed also ( 24.), that, on the other hand, 
 there are certain combinations, the letters or sounds of 
 which have for each other a peculiar attraction or 
 affinity, such as m for the series 6, p, &,c., and n for 
 the series d, t, &c. ; hence, ubambo makes the plural in 
 izimbambo, while uti makes the plural in izinti. 
 
 2. Let it be further added here, that certain other combinations are 
 unstable, having a tendency, when they occur, to undergo a change. 
 As shown by Dr. Latham : The ew, in new, is a sample of an un- 
 stable combination in English; and the tendency in pronouncing is to 
 change the word into noo, or into nyoo, or else into nyew. So when y 
 is preceded by t, d, or s, there arises another unstable combination, 
 and the tendency is to pronounce sya as sha, and tya as cha (in 
 Charles), and asja, i.e., to change ty into tsh and dzh. This is seen 
 in the pronunciation, in English, of such words as sure, picture, 
 verdure, where the u is not sounded as oo, but as yoo. Hence the 
 above words are often pronounced shoor, pictshoor, verjoor or verdzhoor. 
 
 3. In the various modifications through which words 
 pass, in the Isizulu, as in the derivation of one word 
 from another, or in the formation of the locative case of 
 nouns or the passive voice of verbs, certain changes are 
 often made in the combination or juxtaposition of sounds, 
 which, in their turn, have a tendency to induce other 
 changes, and thus to cause one letter, or a combination 
 of letters, to give way entirely to another. 
 
 As an example of these changes, and a practical 
 illustration of these principles in the Isizulu, take the 
 verb bamba, catch, and its passive form, bandzwa, be 
 caught. Here the first change in the active, to form 
 the passive, is to insert u before the final a, which 
 changes at once (according to 16., IV.), into its cog-
 
 .'JO EUPHONIC rilANGKS SUPKK I NDUCEI.). 
 
 nate semi-consonant ;, making bambwa. But from the 
 table of compatible letters (see 25., and Rem.), it ap- 
 pears that the combination bw is incompatible ; hence 
 the b is changed into the compatible z ; and this is pre- 
 ceded by its constant antecedent d (=dz), making 
 dzw, which gives the word bamdziva. But here we are 
 met with another difficult combination mdz; and hence, 
 again, the m is changed to n t for which, (according 
 to 24.), the d has a strong affinity, thus making 
 bandzwa. Hence, in forming the passive of this verb, 
 we have really no less than four or five changes, of which 
 all but the first may be set down as euphonic thus, 
 bamba, bambua, bambwa, (bamzwa,) bamdzwa, ba- 
 ndzwa ; or the last two or three may be summed up in 
 saying that mb is changed to ndz. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes the inflection or modification of 
 a word brings a combination, or a single letter into an 
 unstable rather than a strictly incompatible relation with 
 another sound, in which case the euphonic change may 
 be made, or it may not be made. Thus the locative case 
 of Isidumbi, may be either Esidundzini, or Esidumbini, 
 though more properly the former. 
 
 REM. 2. Out of the real necessity of a permutation 
 of consonants in certain cases, as in that of bamba to 
 bandzwa, to secure compatibility or promote stability 
 and euphony, there seems to have arisen, as by attraction, 
 the general rule and practice of introducing a permu- 
 tation of the same consonants, whenever the word con- 
 taining them is inflected, though the inflection should 
 not affect them directly by bringing them into incompa- 
 tible or unstable relations. Thus, according to the most 
 common and classic use, in forming the passive voice 
 of kumbula, the mb is changed into ndz, as in bamba, 
 making kundzulwa; though the combination, mb, is not, 
 in this case, directly affected by the introduction of w 
 before final a. 
 
 REM. 3. It should be observed, however, that this 
 euphonic permutation of consonants, whether by attrac- 
 tion or otherwise, does not extend to the first syllable of 
 the root of a word; thus, uku mba makes the passive 
 voice uku mbiwa, and not nku ndziwa nor uku ndzwa.
 
 EUPHONIC LETTERS. 
 
 34. The euphonic consonantal changes now dis- 
 cussed, and of which a single example has heen given 
 in illustration, are as follows : 
 
 B into ts ; thus, ingubo, engutseni. 
 
 B into dz, as before i ; thus, bubisa, budziswa. 
 
 M into ny ; thus, luma, lunywa. 
 
 MB into ndz ; thus, intambo, entandzeni. 
 
 ND into ndz, sometimes ; thus, impande, impandzana, 
 
 P into ts ; thus, isibopo, esibotseni. 
 
 o. Euphonic fatten. 
 
 35. r rhere is a class of letters, as k, ng, s, w, and y, 
 which aro often used for no other purpose than to facili- 
 tate utterance by preventing a disagreeable harshness ; or 
 to prevent the coalescence of two vowels, or the loss of 
 a vowel, which perspicuity requires to be preserved and 
 kept separate. And to this class of letters the term 
 euphonic is particularly appropriate. 
 
 1. K is sometimes used to harden and preserve a 
 
 vowel, as : 
 
 * 
 
 (a.) Before the pronoun u, second person singular, accusative, 
 making kit; and sometimes the nominative is thus hardened, making 
 ku, when preceded by the negative particle a. 
 
 (6.) The pronoun a (in place of ) third person singular, first class, 
 and the pronoun a, third person plural, second class, are sometimes 
 hardened by k, especially in the nominative, when preceded by the 
 negative a, or by the imperative auxiliary ma. 
 
 (c.) The genitive particle, a, is hardened by k, when used before a 
 proper noun, with whose initial vowel it is not allowed to unite ; as, 
 abantu ba ka 'Mpande; inkomo ka 'Faku. 
 
 2. W is often used in the same manner as A;, and 
 sometimes instead of it, to give hardness and prominence 
 to a vowel, as : 
 
 (a.) Before the pronoun , second person singular, nominative; 
 thus, a wu tandi, instead of a ku tandi; and either, instead of the simpler 
 form, a u tandi. 
 
 (6.) Before the pronoun a, third person plural, second class ; and 
 the pronoun w, third person singular, sixth class, making u>a, wu, &c. 
 
 3. Y is often used before its cognate vowel , and
 
 32 EUPHONIC LETTERS. 
 
 sometimes before e, to give it hardness and prominence, 
 like k and w before a and u. (See also below, 4., c.) 
 
 4. a. JVg is often used to give hardness and promi- 
 nence to a vowel, and also to prevent the occurring 
 of a hiatus, in certain cases, between two contiguous 
 words, as : 
 
 (a.) To harden the negative a, making nga; thus, si nga tandi; a si 
 tandanga. 
 
 (b.) To prevent a hiatus between a pronominal subject and a nominal 
 or pronominal predicate ; thus, ku ngumuntu, instead of ku umuntu ; 
 ku ngabantu ; ba ngamadoda. 
 
 (c.) To give an easy, graceful transition from one word to another, 
 in some other cases, as from a verb in the passive voice to the efficient 
 agent which immediately follows; thus, kwenziwe ngabanlu. 
 
 b. The euphonic w is sometimes used instead of ng 
 before nouns predicate (see '(#),' above); and in some 
 other cases, where the noun is impersonal and its initial 
 vowel is it ; as ku wuto ; ku wulwarfl'e. 
 
 c. The euphonic y is used in the same manner and for 
 the same purpose as ng and w before nouns predicate, 
 and before the efficient agent, sometimes, after passive 
 verbs y being generally used before nouns whose initial 
 vowel is i, and the pronouns derived from such nouns ; 
 while ng is generally used, and sometimes iv, before 
 other nouns ; thus, ku yinkomo ; ku yihasi. 
 
 5. S is used in the negative formula a si ; as, a si nguye; 
 a si yo; and, other similar constructions ; and also 
 before nouns in the locative case, when that case is pre- 
 ceded by a pronoun or preposition, between the final 
 vowel of which and the initial of the locative, a hiatus 
 would occur, without the use of some euphonic expedient; 
 thus, ba sensimini ; u sezulwini na serrflabeni. 
 
 REM. 1 . The euphonies ng, s, w, and y, often occupy the place, and 
 perform the office, of the English substantive verb to be, and hence 
 might be called euphonic copulative letters or particles ; thus, ku ngu- 
 muntu, it (is) a person; ku yinkomo, it (is) a cow; ba semfuleni, they 
 (are) at the river. 
 
 REM. 2. Certain letters of a pronominal character, and used simply 
 to point out certain grammatical relations, as 6 in bake (abantu bake] ; 
 / in lake (tztot lake} ; Stc., have sometimes been called euphonic. But
 
 MCKS. 33 
 
 the application of this term to .such letters, or lo letters of such an 
 office, is of very doubtful propriety. The term, ^reformative, or frag- 
 mentary genitive pronoun, is a better designation of their office and 
 character. (Sec 15H.) 
 
 36. When the incipient of a noun terminates in m 
 or in n, and the root of an adjective, agreeing 1 with the 
 noun, does not begin in one of these letters, one of them 
 (either m or n) is generally introduced between the root 
 and the prefix of the adjective. This is evidently done, 
 partly for euphony ; partly by what may be called at- 
 traction ; and partly, perhaps, for greater precision and 
 perspicuity. 
 
 The particular letter to be thus inserted, whether in or //, is deter- 
 mined by the initial consonant of the (root of tin 1 ) adjective ; the 
 labials, as before stated (^ 21), having an affinity for in, and (he 
 linguals for n; thus, inl<> entot; ////.' > ink , ixiljopn isu/c, umluna oml:uli< , 
 ftikiilu; igama diltulu. 
 
 C. CLICK^ 
 
 37. The clicks (clucks, or clacks,) arc; a kind of 
 sound, unknown, as a part of human speech, except in 
 Southern Africa ; and of such a peculiar nature, that 
 a foreigner finds it somewhat difficult to make or 
 describe them. Indeed, they can be made correctly, 
 and with ease, and properly combined with other sounds, 
 by very few except the natives themselves, or those 
 who learn this language in early life. But they may 
 be described with sufficient accuracy for the purpose 
 before us. 
 
 38. The clicks, as found in Isizulu, may be divided 
 into three general classes, according to the organs chiefly 
 employed in making them the denial, the palatal, and 
 the lateral clicks. 
 
 1. The denial click is made by placing the tip of the 
 tongue firmly against the upper front teeth, slightly 
 touching the under teeth also, and then withdrawing it 
 suddenly with a strong suction The sound may be 
 made by a European to attract the attention of a pel 
 animal, or by the fondling mother to make her infant 
 
 E
 
 31 SOUNDS OF THE CLICKS. 
 
 srnilc, taking care to employ only the tongue and front 
 teeth, and not the lips. 
 
 The letter I (=c) is used to represent this click, as- 
 in Mela,' 'iniwadi,' 'amaiala.' 
 
 2. fine palatal click, which is represented by j (=q), 
 is so called from its being made by pressing the tongue, 
 in a flat or extended position, firmly against the roof of 
 the mouth, in the cavity of the palate, and then with- 
 drawing it suddenly, so as to produce a sharp smack, 
 clack, or click ; as in 'juma,' 'ulobo,' 'amalanda.' 
 
 3. The lateral click, represented by n (=x), is so 
 called from its being made by the tongue in conjunction 
 with the double teeth, keeping the jaws a little apart, 
 while a suction is effected by the tongue and teeth, such 
 as a rider sometimes makes to urge on his horse ; thus, 
 as in 'napa' ' Utino,' ' inuenyc,' 'amaiiolo.' 
 
 39. Each general class of clicks has at least three 
 slight modifications, which, according to the kind of 
 modification, may be called the nasal, the guttural, and 
 l he naso -guttural. 
 
 1. These modifications are represented, the nasal by 
 n; the guttural by g; and the naso-guttural by ng; 
 prefixed, respectively, to the character (i, j, or n,) which 
 represents the simple click. (Sec 40.) 
 
 2. The use of n is to give the simple click a sort of 
 nasal modification ; the use of g, to flatten it ; and the 
 use of ng to give the simple click a kind of nasal 
 flattened modification. 
 
 REM. What are hero called modified clicks are but varieties of the 
 respective classes of simple clicks ; and should be regarded, not so 
 much a combination of sounds by the addition of a new sound, as 
 another form of the same sound, or rather, as a new monosound, 
 moderately varying from the principal sound, called the simple click 
 the simple click being so called more from its being a common 
 head of the class, than from its being any more of a mono-sound than 
 whai nrc railed the modified clicks. 
 
 10. The three classes of clicks, and the three 
 :i:vi ral modifications of the same, with examples of 
 ':ach, -ire ^ivon in the following
 
 VARIETIES OF OLICKR. 
 
 of Clicks. 
 
 -l.MFI.E. 
 
 ^ fl (=c), ay in 
 
 NASAL. 
 
 in, as in 
 
 GUTTURAL. 
 
 gi, as in 
 
 NASO-GUTTURAI 
 
 ngi, as in 
 
 ia 
 
 a j 
 
 niela 
 
 giina 
 
 ngiwanga 
 
 lela 
 
 nicnga 
 
 umgiazo 
 
 ingicnge 
 
 ^ [ isiioio 
 
 umniamo 
 
 glob a 
 
 
 ^ n (=q), as in 
 
 nl, as in 
 
 gl, as in 
 
 ngj, as in 
 
 ' ! a 
 
 nluma 
 
 gjaduka 
 
 jcngla 
 
 ulobo 
 
 amanlc 
 
 amagjala 
 
 ungjojwan 
 
 CL, [ umlcle 
 
 isinjamu 
 
 gjuma 
 
 ingjulwani 
 
 ^ hi (=x), as in 
 
 mi, as in 
 
 gn, as in 
 
 ngli, as in 
 
 na 
 
 miamcla 
 
 gneka 
 
 umungiiiba 
 
 iuiba 
 
 amamieba 
 
 guila 
 
 inguangua 
 
 ^ (^ amanolo 
 
 nuapa 
 
 isigna 
 
 
 ^ 41. The only combination of consonants with clicks, 
 aside from those already given, is that in which the 
 different varieties are sometimes followed by w; thus, 
 'iwila,' 'ingiwele,' 'ungjojwane.' 
 
 42. There are some fluctuations in the use of the 
 clicks, especially in some words, and among different 
 tribes. Some say * binja,' others ' bima,' bind ; some 
 ' uuga,' others * [uga/ be loose ; at one lime ' la,' at 
 another ' Ja,' no; at one time we seem to hear 'ngjoka,' 
 at another ' gloka,' and at another only ' loka/ dress , 
 and so 'ngjiba,' ' gjiba/ or ' jiba,' close up. But the 
 fluctuation is not very great, and nothing different from 
 what is sometimes heard among the consonants and 
 vowels. 
 
 43. Many of the words in which the clicks are found 
 are evidently onomatopoetic in their origin. Such are 
 the words labula,' snap ; ' loioma,' hop; * linsa,' spirt; 
 'loboza,' crush; 'lokozela,' parley ; 'longozela,' hobble; 
 ' Jalamba,' ache, throb ; ' lajazela,' shiver, tremble ; 
 * ujojolo,' the trachea ; ' noiia,' converse together ; 
 4 napa,' lap as dogs ; * iiapazela,' bubble up or boil.
 
 ,j(j SYU.AI I ! ND U URDS. 
 
 HEM. I. In this connection it may be remarked, thai 
 many of the words in which the gutturals x and x* arc 
 found, arc also onomatopoctic. Such arc ' xuzula ' and 
 'Xebula,' tear; 'xcbcza,' drive away locusts by a rustling 
 noise; 'xaxa,' cat greedily; ' ixolo,' roughness; 'xonja,' 
 snore ; ' xoza,' gurgle ; ' tfeba,' tear ; < x>za,' to milk 
 into the mouth ; ' umx'ezo,' a switch. 
 
 J. -There are many other words in the Isiznln besid< ili<>-> 
 containing a click or a guttm-il v<l,i< li I'cai evident nirirl;> <>\ an ono- 
 matopocir ll1 ll(!U " sloe !' i ( buhula n 
 
 'diidii luii \m\Y; 'sonta,' twiat; 'denj -ttov, 
 
 fft ! 
 
 KK II 
 
 >jl> \\(>. 
 
 i-iif. 
 
 UNION OF SOUNDS AND THE DIVISION OF DISt.Ol i 
 
 SECT. 1. General JRcmarks. 
 
 4i. 1. The first part of Zulu Grammar, which is 
 designed to comprise an exhibition of the elementary 
 facts and principles of the language, must treat not only 
 of the sounds of the language seperately considered, but 
 also of the connecting of these sounds into syllables and 
 words. It must state the general principles on which 
 the language should be reduced to writing, and exhibit 
 and illustrate its laws for the forming of its syallables 
 and for the proper division of its discourse into words. 
 
 2. In a language already, perhaps ages ago, reduced to order and 
 committed to writing, and in which the limits of words, or the mode of 
 dividing discourse, as well as the mere writing of words, has been long 
 since fixed by either principle, or by accident and usage ; the sum of 
 this part of cianiinar orthography is merely and briefly to present 
 the common established nstom orthographical usajfc whatever it 
 may be.
 
 \ i.i v i i.i ,J7 
 
 Bui in a I n. ul\ i i-ilui i-tl. ilicn i> no loiijj established 
 
 usage, whether philosophical, or anomalous and absurd, to he followed. 
 In these circumstances, lle< ting sounds must he caught and symbolized; 
 and not only this, hut that law also, which hoth the genius of the 
 language and general philosophical grammar recommend, for con- 
 necting and dividing these sounds into syllables and words, must he 
 latrd and applied, together with the application of the chosen symbols 
 and all without either aid or embarrassment from well established 
 custom 
 
 SECT. 2. Syllables. 
 
 45. 1. A syllabic is a simple or a compound sound, 
 pronounced by a single impulse of the voice; as, a, ba, 
 ku, si. 
 
 2. Sometimes a syllable is, of itself, significant ; and 
 then it constitutes a word ; as, \a, no; sa, yet ; be, be; 
 si, we ; ku, it ; ngi, I, me. 
 
 3. In other cases a syllable is not, by itself, significant; 
 and hence it then forms but part of a word ; thus, ta, in 
 tanda, having no significance alone, forms but a part of 
 the word tanda. 
 
 46. 1. The division of words into syllables may be 
 considered in two aspects; viz., in respect to phonetics , 
 and in respect to etymology. 
 
 2. As a general rule, a word should, doubtless, be 
 divided into syllables, according to the divisions which 
 those good speakers to whom the language is verna- 
 cular generally make in pronouncing it. 
 
 3. Observing the application of this principle to the 
 Isizulu, and noticing the fact also that all words in 
 this language terminate in a vowel, we have the general 
 law, so to divide all words as to make open syllables, or 
 make all syllables end in a vowel ; thus, ta-nda, ha-mba, 
 a-ba-ntu, a-ma-nga, i-nko-si, i-zi-nko-mo,u-mfu-la, &c. 
 
 REM. 1. This rule of dividing putting in, n, &.C., with the 
 consonant following; thus, ta-nda, ha-mba, u-mj'u-la, &c., instead of 
 with the antecedent vowel, accords not only with the pronunciation of 
 the people, hut also with the principle before stated ( 24.), that the 
 nature and office of these liquids is to unite with, and soften down, the 
 hard mute by which they are followed the labial mutes (p and 6) 
 having an affinity for the labial semi-vowel JH; and the lingual mutes 
 (/ and d). for the lingual semi-vowel n.
 
 38 WORDS, 
 
 Ur.M 2. That even //? and >i final, in the incipient^ of nouns, belong 
 pliomtirally, though not etymologically, to the root of the word. >.< 
 to the following, and not to the antecedent syllable, is evident not only 
 from the above remarks, but also from the form of the vocative. For 
 in all those instances in which the noun's incipient consists of two 
 letters, the second being in or n, in forming the vocative, which is done 
 by dropping the initial vowel, the remaining letter, m or n, is thrown 
 by necessity into the following syllable ; thus, 'Mpande, 'Nkosi. 
 
 47. Etymologically considered, those nouns whose 
 incipients terminate in m orn (as, in, im, izin, izim, urn), 
 are divided so as to give those consonants to the pre- 
 ceding, rather than to the following syllable; thus, 
 in-ko-si, pi. a-ma-kosi; um-fu-la, pi. i-mi-fulft; u-ba- 
 mbo, pi. i-zim-ba-mbo ; in-ko-mo. 
 
 REM. 1. As the phonetic rule takes the precedence of the etymo- 
 logical in speaking, so it should in reading, and, doubtless, also in 
 spelling; thus, i-nko-si, u-mfu-la, i-zi-mbc-nge ; though for analytic and 
 grammatical purposes, the etymological rule must have its place. 
 
 REM. 2. In a few instances, where there is a reduplication of a 
 consonant, as in ummango, ummoya, (see 30.), the incipient termi- 
 nates in a consonant, and the root also commences in the same; 
 though in pronunciation, or phonetically considered, as before re- 
 marked ( 30.), only one of these letters is really heard ; thus, 
 ii-ma-ngo, u-mo-ya. 
 
 48. In every word, there are as many syllables as 
 there are separate vowel sounds and diphthongs ; thus, 
 i-ga-ma ; a-ba-fa-na ; gau-la ; u-givai. 
 
 REM. Although every Zulu word really and properly ends in a 
 vowel, yet in rapid or careless pronunciation, the final vowel is some- 
 times dropped, especially after m, n, and s; thus, intambam', Udingan\ 
 inkos\ &c. 
 
 SECT. 3. Words. 
 
 49. A word, in respect to orthography, is one or 
 more syllables written together, as the sign of some idea, 
 or of some relation of ideas ; as, tanda, love ; abantu, 
 people ; ngi, 1 ; ba, they ; \a, no ; yebo, yes. 
 
 REM. 1. As one or more sounds, pronounced together by a single 
 effort of the voice, constitute a syllable; so one or more syllables com- 
 bined, and having some significance, separate force, or meaning, con- 
 stitute a word. Words properly combined produce a sentence ; and 
 sentences, properly combined, make a speech or discourse.
 
 THE TWO CLASSES OF WORDS, 3f) 
 
 REM. 2. Discourse, then, is divided into sentences according to 
 periods, or such a number of words, as, taken together, make complete 
 sense ; and sentences are divided into words according to the signifi- 
 cance of their syllables, or the number of separate portions which have 
 some force or meaning of their own. 
 
 "Here, however, the power of dividing speech into significant por- 
 tions ends ; for though words are made up of 'syllables, and syllables of 
 tellers, yet these two last subdivisions relate wholly to the sound, and 
 not to the signification. A syllable or letter may possibly be signifi- 
 cant, as the English pronouns / and me; but then they become words, 
 and are so to be treated in the construction of a sentence." Ency. 
 Met., Arl. General Grammar. 
 
 50. a. Some words, as the substantives, verbs, and 
 adjectives, and the adverbs derived from these, express a 
 notion or an idea ; and hence are called notional, or 
 essential, and sometimes primary words. 
 
 b. Other words, as the pronouns, numerals, prepo- 
 sitions, conjunctions, and the adverbs derived from these, 
 together with the auxiliary verbs, are used to express 
 the different relations of ideas ; and hence are called 
 relational, or formal, and sometimes secondary words. 
 
 51. 1. The general orthographic rule for the writing 
 of the Isizulu, as for the writing of other languages, is 
 to give each word, whether essential or formal, a distinct 
 position of its own, separate from each other word in the 
 sentence. 
 
 2. When however, one word or particle has such in- 
 fluence upon another before it, as to carry its accent 
 forward from its ordinary position the penultimate to 
 the final syllable, the two words are joined in writing, 
 as they are in pronunciation ; thus, hambani (hamba-ni), 
 go ye ; u funani na? (u funa-ni na? ), you seek what? 
 hambake (hamba-ke), go then. 
 
 3. So also in compound words where the principal 
 accent is thrown upon the penultimate of the second of 
 the compound, they are written together as a simple 
 word; thus, Umzimkulu; Itafamasi; UmnikasiriYu. 
 
 REM. Other exceptions to the general rule are such as grow out 
 of the omission or contraction of syllables and words, the character 
 
 and fxf.cnt ut" which arc noticed in 'ho next section-
 
 40 OMISSIONS AND CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 SECT. 4. Omission and Contraction of Syllables 
 and Words. 
 
 52. GENERAL REMARK. Perhaps no language, ex- 
 cept among those which have never been reduced to 
 writing, abounds in the omission and contraction of syl- 
 lables arid words to such an extent as the Isizulu. The 
 diversity of its forms and phrases, according as all the 
 sounds are fully and distinctly uttered, or not, seems 
 almost endless. This characteristic has grown chiefly 
 out of two causes the absence of written characters 
 and standards to give a fixed uniformity to words and 
 modes of expression ; and the disposition of the people, 
 the lower classes in particular, to seek ease of utterance 
 by diminishing the volume of sound, and by neglecting 
 to give a distinct enunciation to all the sounds which 
 they pretend to utter. 
 
 53. Among the omissions and contractions of syl- 
 lables and words, in which the Isizulu abounds, the fol- 
 lowing are the most common : 
 
 1. In compound tenses, the auxiliary sometimes drops 
 its final vowel, and unites with the following pronoun ; 
 thus, ' u bu tanda ' for ' u be u tanda ;' ' i si file ' for 
 ' i se i file.' Sometimes the auxiliary simply absorbs 
 the following pronoun when it consists of a single vowel ; 
 thus, ' a be tanda' for ' a be e tanda.' 
 
 2. The personal pronoun is sometimes omitted before 
 the auxiliary, in compound tenses ; thus, ' be ngi tanda ' 
 for ' ngi be ngi tanda;' c kc ngi tanda ' for ' ngi ke ngi 
 tanda ;' ' so ngi tandile ' for ' ngi se ngi tandile.' 
 
 3. The pronoun a is generally absorbed when it comes 
 before verbs beginning with a vowel ; thus, c anda ' 
 lor a anda ; ' ' cnza ' for ' a enza ; ' osa ' for ( a osa. ' So 
 the pronoun c ; thus, * akile ' for ' e akile ;' c enzile ' for 
 1 e enzile ;' ' osile ' for ' p. osile.' 
 
 4. The relative pronoun or particle a generally ;! 
 sorbs a personal pronoun following it when the latter 
 consists of a single vowel ; thus, ' a ya tanda ' for c a 
 a ya tanda ;' c a be tandile ' for < a c? be tandile.' The
 
 ZULUIZING FOREIGN WORDS. 41 
 
 relative a is sometimes dropped ; thus, c ba tanda ' for 
 ' aha tanda.' 
 
 5. The negative is sometimes omitted ; thus, ' ngi nge 
 tande' for 'a ngi nge tande;' ' ku mdala' for 'aku mdala.' 
 
 6. The part or the whole of a word is sometimes 
 omitted, or part of several words in succession, and the 
 remainder contracted ; thus. ' u nge ko ' for ' u nga 
 bi ko ' (b being dropped, and a-i=e); ' ngo tanda' for 
 'ngi ya ku tanda' (i, y, and k, being dropped, and 
 a .u=o); ' umka 'Faku' for ' umfazi ka 'Faku.' 
 
 7. Sometimes a medial letter or syllable is dropped , 
 thus, ' bulawa ' for ' bulalwa ;' ' ngoba ' for ' ngokuba;' 
 ' pumla ' for ' pumula.' 
 
 8. Omission and contraction generally occur in forming 
 compound words ; thus, ' umnikazinTu ' for ' umninikazi 
 inTu.' 
 
 REM. Further illustration and examples of omission and cont na- 
 tion, especially where these are attended with a change of vowels. 
 are given in remarks on euphonic vowel change*, contraction, crasis. 
 apostrophe, Jtr. (Sec i> Ifi.) 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 ZULUIZING FOREIGN WORPs 
 
 54. In transferring foreign proper names into the 
 Zulu language, two things need to be kept in mind and 
 aimed at ; namely, to preserve, as far as possible, the 
 identity of the name, and also to conform it to the genius 
 of the language into which it is introduced. 
 
 a. As a matter of truthfulness to man and to history to the past 
 and the future and as a point of interest in philology, the form, the 
 substance', the general identity of the name, should be presn\ 
 
 far as possible. 
 
 b. At the same time, such changes must bt made in the nam< 
 
 the genius of the language decidedly requires, to give it a place arnonp 
 names in its new situation, and to prepare it for utterance among l'i n 
 people who are to speak it. 
 
 F
 
 42 ZULUIZING FOREIGN WORDS. 
 
 55. To accomplish these two objects, so far as they 
 are compatible, and to preserve a proper medium between 
 the two, the following rules may be of service: 
 
 1. In Zuluizing a foreign proper name, give it an in- 
 cipient, unless its initial letter or syllable will pass for 
 such, which is seldom the case ; supply it also with a 
 terminating vowel, unless it have one of its own. 
 
 The common incipient for persons is u or urn; for 
 tribes, ama; for places, the most common is i; and 
 for rivers, the most common is um. But the names 
 of places and rivers often have other incipients ; as, 
 it, in, ama. 
 
 This rule would make Udavida for David; Jlmayuda 
 for Jews ; Izione for Zion; Unite for Nile; &c. 
 
 REM. 1. The initial vowel or syllable of some proper names may 
 be made to pass, though not without some objections, for the Zulu 
 incipient. Such is the / initial in Italy, Itali ; and the first syllable, 
 In, in India ; also the Ama, in Amazon. 
 
 REM. 2. When the initial letter of a name is a vowel, and will not 
 pass well for the incipient, the semi-vowel w or y is sometimes inserted 
 between that vowel and the prefixed incipient, especially when the 
 incipient supplied consists of or terminates in a vowel, and a consider- 
 able hardness would occur without such an insertion ; thus, lyasia for 
 Asia ; Uyisake for Isaac. 
 
 2. a. In Zuluizing a foreign proper name, let the letters 
 of the name be followed, as far as possible, and not the 
 present or former, real or supposed, sounds. The letter 
 or character is permanent, and may be followed ; but 
 the assigned' value or sound often varies in different 
 languages, in different ages, and among different nations 
 and persons. 
 
 b. But in pronouncing the transferred name, in Zulu, 
 the letters should have the same sound which they uni- 
 formly have in all other cases in the Zulu language. 
 Otherwise the value of a given letter would often vary, 
 and the variations would produce doubt and confusion. 
 
 According to this rule, David is Zuluized (as above) thusj Udavida, 
 and not Udcvida ; and the medial a is pronounced, in Zulu, like a in 
 father, and not like a in name. So Nero is Zuluized Unero, and the 
 r is pronounced like ey in they. So likewise Geneva is Zuluized 
 Igeneva, and the g pronounced, in Zulu, like the hard English g, as in 
 go, and not like j.
 
 ACCENTUATION. icj 
 
 .3. When tlie Zulu alphabet has no letter nor combi- 
 nation corresponding at all in value to a certain letter or 
 combination in a foreign proper name, a convenient equi- 
 valent, if there be one, is used instead. By this rule 
 Cairo becomes, in Zulu, Ikairo ; Congo, Ukongo ; 
 Quebec, Ikwebeka; Philip, Ufilipi. 
 
 4. A difficult combination may be avoided : 
 
 (a.) Sometimes by dropping one of the letters that one, or more, 
 which will have the least effect upon the identity of the word ; as, 
 Utomasi for Thomas; Uandoniko for Andronicus ; Ugaye for Gains. 
 
 (6.) Sometimes by inserting another letter, vowel, semi-vowel, or 
 consonant, so as to aid pronunciation by resolving the compound ; 
 thus, Ingilande for England; Igipclc for Egypt; JlmagerUce for Greeks. 
 
 (c.) Sometimes the difficulty is relieved by a transposition of letters; 
 thus, Isareli for Israel ; Ilagiria for Algiers. 
 
 (d.) Sometimes by quite exchanging the difficult combination for 
 other letters ; as, Usitaki for Stachys ; Umasinkwito for Asyncritus ; 
 Utulifosa for Tryphosa. 
 
 REM. 1. Compatible consonants in combination require, of course, 
 no separation nor omission. 
 
 REM. 2. In most cases, to retain two vowels in juxtaposition is 
 doubtless better than to prolong and mar the word by inserting a letter 
 between them ; thus, lyudia, Unoa, Upaule. 
 
 56. In transferring common words into the Isizulu, 
 much more liberty may be taken, letters being omitted 
 or inserted, transposed or exchanged, for the sake ot 
 ease in pronunciation, in many cases; while, in proper 
 names, great liberty in making changes is precluded by 
 a proper regard for the integrity of such names. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 57. Accent is a particular stress of the voice, or an 
 ictus upon a certain syllable of a word, distinguishing 
 that syllable from the others, and giving to its vowel 
 great clearness of sound.
 
 -J4 DESIGN AND LAW OF ACCENT, 
 
 ;. word may > any number of syllablt ; 
 
 one to seven eight, or ten, it is a matter of convenience and precision 
 to have some easy means of distinguishing words from mere syll; 
 otherwise, discourse would be a monotonous unmeaning succession ot 
 mere sounds. For, as words are the divisions of discourse into sig- 
 nificant portions, any doubt or confusion as to the proper limits of 
 words must lead to confusion in respect to the ideas which words are 
 meant to convey. Hence, one great end of accent is to aid the mind 
 in ascertaining and observing the limits of words. 
 
 REM. o. Moreover, every sentence uttered is both easier to the 
 voice and more agreeable to the ear, when broken up into symme- 
 trical parts with convenient pauses between them. Hence, again, 
 another important end of accent in the Isizulu is euphony ; and a 
 kind of rhythmical beat is observed in a succession of monosyllabic 
 words, where the particular place of the accent is dictated solely by 
 euphonic considerations, without regard to the formation or the 
 meaning of the words. And it is on this principle, as we shall see, 
 that the accent is sometimes carried forward or backwards from its 
 usual place, and in some instances is transferred even from the more 
 important, essential word, to a word of a relational and secondary 
 character. 
 
 ^58. 1. As a general law of the language the accent 
 is laid upon the penultimate syllable; as, mina, pezu, 
 inkomo, ukubona. 
 
 2. If a word consists of many syllables, it generally 
 takes a secondary accent, and even a tertiary, if the 
 number of syllables is very many ; thus, umsebenzi; 
 inkosikazi; intombazana; ekufandazcni; \sizukulwana. 
 
 3. Occasionally a word takes a second primary accent, 
 if such it can be called one on the penult, and the other 
 on the final syllable; and sometimes the accent is carried 
 forward from the penultimate to the final syllable ; thus, 
 into enkulu; intando yabo; mina. 
 
 These deviations from the general rule are made, 
 apparently, in part, to draw attention to the particular 
 word thus accented ; and in part, sometimes, for the sake 
 of giving a playful variety to speech. 
 
 4. The elision of the final vowel of a word sometimes 
 throws the accent upon the final syllable; thus, inkos', 
 Udingari. 
 
 5. a. The accent is occasionally carried forward from 
 the penult to the final syllable, through the influence of 
 a following monosyllabic word or enclitic, as ke, ni, ze, 
 
 whose accent is, in turn, thrown back upon the
 
 I J I.AI i. <H i in \i r.NT. 43 
 
 principal word In consequence of this reciprocal in- 
 fluence and union of accents, the two words are written, 
 as they are pronounced, together, as one word (see 
 51., 2.); thus, tembake; sukani; iva hambaze; a si 
 bou'dnga. 
 
 b. Other monosyllable words, however, as bo, le, and 
 the interrogative na, neither affect the accent of the 
 former word, nor lose their own ; and hence they retain 
 a separate standing, as independent words ; thus, suka 
 bo; set vela le; wa vuma na? 
 
 6. In a few instances, the primary accent may be laid 
 upon the antepenult ; as, ngokuba, instead of ngoknba. 
 But this is rare. 
 
 59. 1. The monosyllabic relational words, as the 
 pronouns and auxiliary verbs, which precede the principal 
 verb, and aid in its conjugation, are of a semitonic and 
 proclitic character, being subject to a kind of rhyth- 
 mical, tripping accent, and inclining forward, in tenor 
 of pronunciation, to the essential orthotonic word which 
 follows ; thus, ni ya ku bona; be ngi tanda; a ngi sa yi 
 ku hamba. 
 
 2. When the essential word is itself a monosyllable, 
 the principal accent is thrown back upon the next pre- 
 ceding word, except when the essential word is followed 
 by an enclitic ; thus, si ya fa; ngi pe; ngi peni; wa ti; 
 ?ra like; wa t'mi na? 
 
 REM. The character and accentuation of both proclitics and en- 
 clitics, as well as the number of these words, is much the same as in 
 the English language. Thus, in the sentence, If John's in I lie house, 
 t/ow'/ Idl lii ni a word of this, the words, if, in, the, a, and of, are all 
 proclitics ; and the words, is, not, and him, enclitics. Moreover, the 
 English words which are used in translating the Zulu proclitics and 
 enclitics, are, themselves, for the most part, either enclitic or proclitic. 
 And in both languages alike, the smaller parts of speech, as the 
 pronouns, auxiliaries, conjunctions, and prepositions, have generally 
 an obscure and feeble pronunciation ; while the more significant, the 
 essential words, as nouns and verbs, are pronounced, as a whole, 
 more firmly, and with more distinctness. 
 
 60. In the case of compound words, the former of 
 the two loses its primary accent, the voice hurrying on 
 to the penult of the second the penult of the com-
 
 40 QUANTITY OF A SYLLABLE. 
 
 pound; as in Jtafamasi, from itafa and amasi; Jlma- 
 nzimtoti, from Amanzi and amtoti ; empumalanga. 
 
 (See 58., 2.) 
 
 REM. In one respect, this is just the opposite of what we have in 
 the English, where the first of the two words in composition takes the 
 principal accent, as in book-case, steam-boat. The principle, however, 
 is the same in both languages, the accent being generally attracted, 
 in composition, by that word which limits the other, and thus gives a 
 specific character to the compound. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 QUANTITY OF A SYLLABLE. 
 
 61. The quanity of a syllable is the space of time 
 occupied in pronouncing it. 
 
 1. If the quantity of a syllable, in the Isizulu, be de- 
 termined as in English, by the character of the vowel 
 which enters into it, then all syllables are long which 
 contain a long or accented vowel ; and all short, which 
 contain a short, or unaccented vowel. (See 12., 4>.) 
 Hence, if measured by the quantity of the vowel, the 
 final syllable wTa, ofamanTa, is short, because the vowel 
 in it, receiving no accent, is short ; while the syllable 
 ma, of the same word, is long, its vowel having the 
 accent. 
 
 2. But if the quantity of a syllable be determined, 
 not by the length of the vowel, but by the length of the 
 syllable taken altogether, according to the mode of 
 measuring in the classical languages, such syllables as 
 wTa in amawTa, nkwa in isinkwa, and mnya in ebu- 
 mnyameni, are long, though the vowels in them are un- 
 accented, and consequently short. 
 
 There are, in these syllables, wTa, &c., certain me- 
 chanical causes, which compel the voice to dwell upon 
 them quite as long as upon their contiguous accented 
 syllables, ma, si, we, which are long by virtue of their 
 long vowels.
 
 PUNCTUATION, ITALICS, AND CAPITALS. 47 
 
 RE.M. 1. If one person measures the quantity of a syllable in Isi- 
 xulu by the vowels only, and another by the whole length of the 
 syllable, including both vowels and consonants, what is long to the one 
 may be short to the other, and riYr rersa. 
 
 RE.M. L 2. The whole subject of Zulu Prosody requires a separate 
 and special consideration. 
 
 I' H AFTER VI 
 PUNCTUATION, ITALICS, AND CAPITALS 
 
 62. 1. The number and value of the points or marks 
 inserted in written Zulu composition, for the purpose of 
 showing more clearly the sense intended to be conveyed, 
 and the pauses required in reading, are the same as 
 those employed in the English language. 
 
 2. At the close of an interrogative sentence, the Zulu makes use 
 of an interrogative particle, na (with the falling slide), which corres- 
 ponds, in import, to the rising slide or intonation employed in English, 
 to mark an interrogative sentence. 
 
 3. The diaeresis is not used in Zulu, the general law being, without 
 it, to give each vowel, though written in connection with another, its 
 own separate and distinct sound in all cases, except at, aw, and ei, 
 which, when taken together, constitute a diphthong. 
 
 ^63. 1. In translating the Scriptures into Isizulu, 
 italic letters are employed to indicate those words which 
 are not found in the original ; as, " Amafa a wile kumi 
 ezindaweni ezin'le ; " "ngesono somunye kwe za iiala 
 pezu kwabo bonke." 
 
 2. Italics may be used also, as in other languages, to 
 distinguish any particular word or phrase for the sake of 
 emphasis, or for any other purpose. 
 
 3. When it is designed to make a word or phrase still 
 more conspicuous than it would be in italics, it is printed 
 in capitals, as the titles of books, captions, the first 
 word of a chapter, &c. 
 
 64. The following classes of words, according to
 
 CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 
 the usage of other languages, should commence, in Isi- 
 zuht, with a capital letter: 
 
 1. The first word of a sentence. 
 
 J. The first word of every line of poetn 
 
 >. The first word of a direct quotation. 
 
 k The appellations of the Deity. 
 
 5. All proper nouns, as names of persons, places, 
 rivers, tribes. 
 
 6. Some other words, as titles of honor and distinc- 
 tion ; common nouns personified ; the first word of an 
 example ; and all such words as generally commence 
 thus in other languages. 
 
 REM. 1. When a noun is inflected, as in forming the locative case, 
 and the first letter changed, as to e or o, this letter thus changed is 
 still made capital; thus, Enanda (Inanda) ; Emvoli (Umvoti) ; Enkosini 
 (Inkosi) ; Otugrla (Utugela). 
 
 REM. 2. Sometimes a euphonic particle, as s, ng, w, or y, is pre- 
 fixed to a proper noun; but these are written in small letters, like other 
 words, forming, as they do, no part of the noun ; thus, ngUsibckana; 
 a if Inkosi; ba sEnanda na sEmvoti. 
 
 REM. 3. a. When a proper noun is preceded by a word or particle, 
 as the preposition na, or nga, whose final vowel coalesces with the 
 initial vowel of the name, the first permanent unaffected letter in the 
 name becomes capital; thus, Umcnzi noMsindisi; Inanda neTctfamasi 
 noMvoli; izwi leNkosi. 
 
 b. But when the final vowel of the preceding word is elided or 
 absorbed, without affecting the initial letter of the proper name, that 
 initial letter is made capital, according to the general ru!r; thus. 
 .imalanga n' Amazulu; Obaba n' Omame. 
 
 REM. 4. Sometimes the initial vowel of a proper name is cut off, 
 as in the vocative, and some forms of the genitive, when the aphcresis 
 is marked by an apostrophe, and the first remaining letter becomes 
 capital; thus, WAxm ; 'Faku; izinkomo zi ka \Mpaitdt.
 
 PART II ETYMOLOGY 
 
 DEFINITION'S AND CLASSIFICATIONS. 
 
 SECT. 1. Definitions and' (Jain-a 
 
 : \ (>5. Etymology, which is the second part of grammar, 
 treats of the forms and changes of words. The term, 
 as often used, has a two-fold import, the one higher and 
 more extended, the other lower and more restricted. 
 
 1. In its highest sense, the office of etymology is to 
 examine the origin and changes of the mere roots of 
 words, and their connection with corresponding roots in 
 different languages. This is the etymology of the philo- 
 logist, and is sometimes called historical or comparative 
 etymology. 
 
 2. But in its more limited signification as used by the 
 grammarian, and as opposed to orthography and syntax- 
 etymology classifies words, and treats of the forms and 
 changes to which they are subject, in one and the same 
 language. 
 
 i. Both kinds of etymology agree in taking cognizance of (he 
 changes which lite forms of words undergo the one, of changes more 
 remote, as from the lapse of time, and the passing of words from one 
 language to another ; the other, of changes more immediate, for 
 grammatical significant purposes, as in the following p; 
 
 66. The changes to which the forms of words are 
 subject, and which properly come within the province 
 of a practical grammar of a particular language, are of 
 two kinds the one called Inflection, which includes 
 declension and conjugation : and the other, Formation, 
 which includes derivation and composition. 
 
 REM. The nature and end of inflection and of formation will he 
 better understood from observing that many of flic \vi-i in 1 -i/ulu. 
 as in most other languages, con,/i < f f'.v- 1 ; . ^lAi-.nl ; n"i < 
 
 fortnativi ,
 
 50 IJAPICAL.S AND FORMAT I x I. 
 
 67. 1. A. The radical part of a word, or the roof, 
 taken in its strictest sense, and as well defined by 
 another " is a significant element, from which words, 
 as forms of thought and parts of speech, arc derived. 
 It is not itself a word, but that which lies at the foun- 
 dation of a whole family of words. The root has signi- 
 fication, but not a definite signification, in the system of 
 our ideas or in the system of language. It does not 
 express an idea which . can form a component part of 
 language, hut only the intuition or appearance which is 
 common to the noun or idea, and the verb or judgment, 
 and wants the modification which makes it a noun or 
 verb." Thus, from the general, indefinite root, 6on, in 
 Isizulu, the verb bona, see, is derived by suffixing a; the 
 verb uku bona, to see, by the prefix uku; the noun 
 umboni, a seer, an observer, by the suffix i and the 
 prefix or incipient um. 
 
 REIM. The root, as thus described, is a -circumscribed nucleus 
 a mere germ which lies beneath the surface, as it were, and forms no 
 part of ordinary speech until brought to light, and fitted for use by 
 ihe aid of certain additional letters or syllables, which are called for- 
 vialires or sem'/rs, as illustrated in the examples given above. 
 
 B. Formative letters or syllables may be found, (as 
 in the above examples,) either at the beginning of the 
 radical element, and be called an incipient, preformative, 
 or prefix ; or at the end, and called afformative, suffix, or 
 inflection-ending ; or they may be found at both the 
 beginning and the end, and all for the purpose of giving 
 the mere root a rank, a relationship, or else a progeny, 
 as it were, in the body politic of words. 
 
 2. The term root or radical word often has, in common parlance, a 
 more extended signification. It sometimes refers to the entire word 
 formed directly from the pure root, including both the germ and the 
 inflection, increment, or formative, being, as it were, the trunk or first 
 section of the stem above ground. And, as denoting primitives (in 
 distinction from derivatives) those words from which others are de- 
 rived, but. which are themselves undcrived this use of the term is 
 not inappropriate; though the term primilirc would generally be better 
 in such cases. 
 
 >. The term root is used sometimes also to designate that part of a 
 word perhaps a derived word which expresses the simple idea, as 
 distinguished from the inflective or formative part which is used to 
 denote the relations; of thu idea. In this den,sc a word may be called
 
 FORMATION OF AVORl. 51 
 
 a rooL whi. h. in < illier nt the loniui ; rn.itiv.' Bui flu* 
 
 ;iiiii)lK>rled part of such a word may be railed a slcm. or else specified 
 d- the root of a derivative. 
 
 68. The office of inflection is to express the relations 
 which the essential parts of speech hold to eacli other. 
 Thus, the word umfula, river, (simple root, ful } ) changed 
 to imifula, signifies rivers; and changed to cmfulcni, it. 
 signifies, at or in the river; so tanda, love, changed to 
 tandile, signifies, have loved. 
 
 REM. 1. In many cases, however, the relations which UK- essential 
 parts of speech hold to each other, or to the person speaking, arc ex- 
 pressed, not by inflections, but by separate relational words, such as the 
 auxiliary verbs, pronouns and prepositions ; thus, si ya tundu, we do 
 love ; ku 'bantu, to the people. 
 
 REM. 2. The close resemblance which the pronouns bear to the 
 incipient elements of the nouns to which they relate, reflecting, as it 
 were, the very image of those incipients, and the extensive use which 
 is made of these reflecting relational words, have su^ircstrd the pro- 
 priety of denominating the Isizulu and its cogn;it< s the /{AO//7iY<- Vss 
 of languages, and thus distinguishing thorn, as by contrast, from those 
 languages which are more strongly marked by inflection, and hence 
 are called the IJVflecliw cl;i- 
 
 69. Formation, as the term is used in grammar, is a 
 linguistic process, which gives new words in two ways 
 either hy deriving one word from another, or by com- 
 posing one word from two others. 
 
 A. Derivation, in the widest sense of the term, includes 
 all those changes which are made in words to express 
 different cases, numbers, modes, and tenses. But in its 
 more limited and appropriate sense, and as used in the 
 following pages, it consists in forming one irord from 
 another by effecting some change or modification in the 
 primitive, other than what are ordinarily denominated 
 inflections. Thus, the verb tandisa, cause to love, is 
 formed from the verb tanda, love, by changing final a 
 of the primitive into isa; and the noun vmhambi, walker, 
 is formed from the verb hamba, walk, by changing final 
 a of the primitive to i, and prefixing the incipient um. 
 
 B. Composition, or the formation of compound words, 
 is the union of two words so as to form only one. In 
 Isizulu the limiting word, or that which denotes the 
 specific difference, usually follows that which denotes
 
 5:? MAI \ND RELATIONAL WOl 
 
 the genus or general idea, and takes the principal accent 
 of the compound; thus, tfYilifa, an inheritor, from Ti 
 (from uku l Ya, to eat), eater, and Hi fit (from ttfrw /<7, to 
 die), inheritance; umninnici, or umninimuzi, owner of 
 a kraal, town-proprietor, from untuini and uimizi ; 
 Inijtumalan^a, east, sun-rising, from iiku puma and 
 ilinigd ; Ttafamasi, name of a place, from ?'*/ and 
 timasi, literally, milk-plain. 
 
 SECT. 2. Classified lion of Words. 
 
 ). 1. The words of the Isizulu may he divided 
 into sorts or classes, in different ways, according to the 
 particular aspect in which they are viewed. 
 
 2. One very natural and summary division is that 
 which reduces all the parts of speech to the two cl; 
 called Essential and Relational Words. (See 50.) 
 
 71. Essential words are those which express the ideas 
 of being or of action, and on which other words depend, 
 to which others refer, or between which others show a 
 relation. To this class, which is called primary also, 
 and sometimes notional, belong nouns, verbs, and adjec- 
 tives, and some adverbs. This class of words is so 
 necessary to the communication of ideas, that no com- 
 plete sentence can be formed without the use of some of 
 them, except where a substitute is used, as a pronoun in 
 the place of a noun. 
 
 72. Relational words are those which are used to 
 express a connection, and the kind of connection, or 
 to show the different relations which exist between essen- 
 tial words. Essential words express ideas or notions 
 only in a general way ; relational words limit them, 
 distinguishing or connecting particular species or indivi- 
 duals, or showing the time, manner, agent, object, and 
 other particulars of action. To this class belong the 
 pronouns, auxiliary verbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, 
 and some of the adverbs. (See 50., 6.) 
 
 REM. The interjection is ;i peculiar organic sound expressive only
 
 KlNIis in NOUNS. 
 
 ut riiuilioii, ami ii"t ronlinril to Inn, KIII di Thminli H m;i\ 
 
 perhaps, !>c <-all'<l a part >!' speech, it is incupahle <>f logical t-onihi- 
 nation with other words, having nothing to do with the operations of 
 the intellect. 
 
 73. According to a more minute and common classi- 
 fication, Zulu words may he divided into the eight fol- 
 lowing sorts, or parts of speech; namely, Noun, Adjec- 
 tive, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, 
 and Interjection. There is no Article, either definite or 
 indefinite, belonging to the Isizulu. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 THE NOUN OR SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 74. The words in Isizulu which are included in the? 
 general term Noun, correspond to those of the same 
 class in other languages, being used to denote the nunu 
 of an object. 
 
 SECT. 1. Kinds of Nouns. 
 
 75. Nouns may be divided into the two kinds, called 
 concrete and abstract. 
 
 I. Concrete Nouns are the names of existences which 
 are subject to the observation of the senses. These 
 may be divided into : 
 
 a. Proper nouns, or names which refer only to indivi- 
 dual persons or objects ; as, Umpande, Umvoti, Inanda. 
 
 b. Common or appellative nouns, which are the names 
 of a class of persons or things, or of an individual belong- 
 ing to a class, whether found in nature ; as umuntu, 
 umuti, intaba; or in art, as umuzi, igcdza, ingubo. 
 
 c. Material nouns, or nouns in which there is no idea 
 of form, organization, or individuality, but only an ag- 
 gregate notion ; as, umansi, ubisi, isi'lnbuli.
 
 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 
 
 (I. Coll t'<t i rt nouns, or nouns which designate a 
 number of single persons or things taken as a whole ; 
 as, impi, isifdzana, isilungu. 
 
 II. Abstract Nouns are names of simple qualities, 
 actions, or modes of existence, considered independent 
 of a subject ; as, amanl'a, utando, ubwmflope, ubu'lungu. 
 
 SECT. 2. Formation of Nouns. 
 
 76. The formation of Zulu nouns gives rise to other 
 divisions, as into Primitives and Derivatives ; (Simple) 
 and Compound Nouns. 
 
 77. I. Primitive nouns are those which have their 
 origin in no other word, whether noun or other pztrt of 
 speech, being, in a manner, self-existent. Their number 
 is comparatively small. They comprise most material 
 nouns, the names of many animals and plants, some of 
 the great objects of the natural world, some of the 
 members of the body, and some other names; as, 
 amanzi, inyoni, imvu, umuti, imifino, ilifu, ilanga, 
 ubuso, umkono, ubaba, udade. 
 
 78. II. Derivative nouns, which are far the most 
 numerous class, comprise all those which are derived 
 cither from other nouns, or from adjectives, or from 
 verbs, or from some other part of speech, by means of 
 some change or addition of certain letters at the begin- 
 ning or the end, or both, of the primitive. 
 
 79. A. Nouns are derived FROM NOUNS, and called 
 nominal derivatives ; thus : 
 
 1. Abstract nouns are formed from concrete nouns, by 
 changing the incipient of the latter into ubu ; thus, 
 
 ;/</.&?', king, conies tibukosi, royalty; from isiula, fool, comes 
 , lolly; <iml from indoda, man, comes ulmdoda, manliness. 
 
 1'i'tipt-r nouns are formed from common, by changing 
 the initial vowel of the latter into u; thus, 
 
 From ixik,,ii<. MIMSS. .-OIIK'S Ihikolu. the name of a person : so from
 
 NOUNS DERIVED FROM NOUNS. .V) 
 
 money romi's f'niali.; from amasukn, days, Ciiiasiiki' ; and from 
 inlaba, inountuin, comes the proper name Uitlnba. 
 
 3. Collect ii'e nouns are sometimes formed from common 
 concrete nouns, by changing the incipient of the latter 
 into isi; thus, 
 
 From luiinnlti, person, comes isinlit, mankind; from tinilutt^u, \vhiU 
 man, comes isiltmgu, the white race; and from i'/ror, a banana (I 
 is&ova, a number of banana, trees taken together, a banana garden. 
 
 4. Augmentative nouns implying increase in number, 
 size, degree, beauty, or excellence, are formed in two 
 ways : 
 
 a. By reduplicating the radical portion of the primi- 
 tive ; thus, 
 
 , a very powerful wind; unkulunkulu, the great great 
 one, or the very great one the first man. 
 
 6. By suffixing kazi; thus, 
 
 Imili, trees, inrilikazi. very fine trees; ubaba, my father, ithabakazi, 
 my renowned or most excellent father, my father's brother. This 
 suffix often marks the feminine gender ; thus, umlungn, white man ; 
 nmliingukazi, white woman. (See 110.) 
 
 5. Diminutive nouns are formed from other nouns by 
 means of the suffix ana, together with such euphonic 
 changes as the language requires in the final vowel and 
 roots of the primitives. 
 
 a. Nouns ending in a, e, or i, generally change these 
 letters into ana to form the diminutive ; thus, 
 
 Umfula, river, wnfulana, little river; umsele, ditch, iimsclana, little- 
 ditch; imbuzi, goat, imbuzana, little goat. 
 
 b. Nouns ending in o or u change these letters into 
 wana, or rather change these letters into w and suffix 
 ana ; thus, 
 
 Into, thing, inticana. little thing ; umuntu, person, umunlwana, or 
 , child. 
 
 REM. Where the IP would be incompatible with the preceding 
 letter (see 25.), it is dropped ; thus, -11111)0, man, person, uinfana. 
 boy ; tmi'M; sheep, imvana, little sheep, lamb.
 
 .*(> NOl'.NS DERIVED FROM NOUNS 
 
 r. Nouns whoso final vowel \> >i. e, or /, preceded by 
 n, chango that vowel to yana; or rather change that 
 vowel to ana, as before (see , above), and insert i/ for 
 euphony and union; thus, 
 
 a. n (kind of) weed. is<iii<nt(t, a little weed; imfnu. baboon 
 . little baboon; imjoni, bird, tngonyana, little bird. 
 
 . \Ve have an example <>f the same thing, the use oi' i-.^.ij. fov 
 the sake of euphony and union, in the English compound handicraft. 
 
 d. Nouns whose final vowel is preceded by b, m, mb, 
 nd, or p, change that vowel to ana, and also generally 
 change b into ts, m into ny, -wife into nrfz, sometimes 
 nd into ndz, and p into s (according to 31); thus, 
 inkabi, ox, inkatsana, little ox; inkomo, cow, inkonyana, 
 calf; isivimbo, a stopper, isivindzana, a little stopper; 
 egg, tl?irfz?ia, little egg. 
 
 REM. These euphonic changes are sometimes neglected, espe- 
 cially in the case of nd; thus, impande, root, impandana, little root. 
 (See 33., Rein. 1.) 
 
 e. Diminutive nouns, denoting females, beauty, dis- 
 tinction, or excellence, generally affix to the primitive, 
 first, the particle azi (full form kazi), significant of this 
 gender, or of these qualities, and then change i of this 
 affix into ana, as in other cases ; thus, 
 
 (Inkosi, chief, inkosikazi, contracted,) inkosazi, chiefess, iiikosazana, 
 little chiefess, daughter of a chief, superior girl; (nmfo, man, person. 
 innjoaz'i. contracted,) umfuzi, woman, umfazana a little woman; inlombi. 
 ;i huge girl, (inlombikazi, tnfom6o2), iniombazana, a girl, a small girl; 
 iii/ift:i. a woman, inkazana, a girl, maid; inkuku, fowl (cock or hen) ; 
 inkukiikazi. a hen, inkukazana, a small hen. 
 
 /. Double or secondary diminutives are formed from 
 primary diminutives, by changing the final a of the first 
 diminutive into i/ana, i.e., by changing a into ana, arid 
 inserting the euphonic y, according to the rule given 
 above (see c.), since the final vowel is preceded by 
 n; thus, 
 
 , thing, inlwana, small thing, inliranijann, a very small firing; 
 n tun nl n. pei. -on. iiiiiiiln-tiiui. <-hild, nmlmnumini -mall child. 
 
 1 'i uh.u amuiints t> the same thing, these doubly dimimUn. 
 nouns may be formed directly from the radical noun hy aflixing
 
 NOUNS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. 57 
 
 with such changes in the final syllable of (he primitive as are 
 in affixing ana, to form 'a diminutive of the tirst. class, as already 
 described; thus, into, thing, intwanyana, a very small thing; 7*1/0, 
 animal (wild), ixiliramjana, very small animal, insect ; umfo, man, 
 /ana, >mall boy. 
 
 80. Nouns are also derived or ZULU i ZED from nouns 
 in other languages, by prefixing to the b.tter an incipient, 
 and making such other changes in them by inserting or 
 omitting letters, or affixing a final vowel, as the euphony 
 and genius of the Isizulu require, (see ^ 55 and 56) ; 
 thus, 
 
 , a knife, pi. orncse, from the Dutch wo , i/'nduku ur innfa 
 dish-cloth, from the Dutch veutdoek; ilomi, a bride, pi. rrmnlomi. from 
 the Dutch loom; so other nouns, as, isikelft, a sickle; isikcpc, a ship: 
 , a stove; ipvlanki, a plank; ttfakohoeni, half a crown. 
 
 81. B. Nouns are derived FROM ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Abstract nouns are derived from adjectives by pre- 
 fixing the incipient ubu to the root ; thus, 
 
 / 'huknln, greatness, from kulu, great ; itbubi, evil, from hi, bad , 
 ubumnandi, deliciousness, sweetness, from mnandi, delicious, sweet. 
 
 2. Some common nouns are derived from adjectives, 
 by prefixing some of the incipients which belong to 
 common nouns, as urn, i, or isi; thus, 
 
 Iningi and isiningi, multitude, majority, from ningi, many. 
 
 3. Proper nouns, names of persons, are also derived, 
 sometimes, from adjectives, by prefixing the incipient of 
 proper names ; thus, Umnandi, the name of Utsaka's 
 mother, from mnandi, sweet. 
 
 82. C. But the greater portion of derivative nouns 
 is formed FROM VERBS, and called verbals. 
 
 \. a. Personal nouns are derived from the roots or 
 stems of verbs, by changing final a to ?', and prefixing 
 the incipient um. These nouns generally denote the 
 doer the agent of the action expressed by the verb ; 
 thus, 
 
 Umhambi. a walker, from nki( haniba, to walk ; utnalusi. a herder, 
 from ukwalusa, to herd 
 
 H
 
 58 NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS. 
 
 RE.M. Occasionally a noun formed in this way is impersonal, de- 
 noting the object or the effect expressed by the verb; as, umsebenzi, 
 which means either work, or worker the thing done, or the doer, 
 from uku sebenza, to work. When umsebenzi signifies worker, the 
 plural is formed in aba; thus, abasebenzi, workers; but when it sig- 
 nifies work, it forms the plural in imi; thus, imisebenzi, works. 
 
 6. Some personal nouns, derived from verbs, have the 
 incipient in isi instead of urn, the termination being i, 
 the same as before ; thus, 
 
 hituli, a mute, from uku tula, to be silent; we&i, a thief, from ukiceba, 
 to steal; isazi, a person of intelligence, from ukwazi, to know; isikutali. 
 an industrious person, from uku kutala, to be industrious. 
 
 c. A few personal nouns are formed from verbs with 
 other incipients and endings ; thus, 
 
 Ikolifu, a believer, from uku kolwa, to believe ; isitunyica, one who is 
 sent, a messenger, from uku tum-a, to send ; igeza, a beauty, from uku 
 geza, to bathe. 
 
 2. Other nouns (impersonal) are formed from verbs 
 by means of various incipients and endings. The mean- 
 ing of these nouns is moulded to some extent by the 
 particular form of the incipient and ending some deno- 
 ting the simple idea expressed by the verb, and others the 
 place or instrument, the effect or the object, of the ac- 
 tion signified by the verb. 
 
 a. Nouns formed from verbs by means of the incipient 
 urn and the ending o, often denote the action or state of 
 the verb, abstractly considered ; thus, 
 
 Umhainbo, walk, 'life, from uku hamba, to walk, live; umtungo, a 
 seam, from uku tunga, to sew ; umbuzo, a question, from uku buza, to 
 inquire. Sometimes nouns thus formed denote the instmmcnt. 
 
 b. Nouns formed from verbs, with the incipient isi and 
 ending o, often denote the instrument or means, and 
 sometimes the place of the action of the verb ; thus, 
 
 hikukulo, a rake, from uku kukula, to rake; isibulo, a threshing 
 instrument or rod, from uku bula, to thresh; isibambo, vise, pinchers, 
 from uku bamba, to catch, hold; isikando, a shop or furnace of the 
 smith, from uku k,n,ilu. to beat, Some nouns, thus formed, denote the 
 effect or object of the verbal action; thus, isilimo, vegetable, cultivated 
 plant, from uku lima, to dig; isibalo, writing, from uku bala, to write; 
 rupture, from ukwapula, to break.
 
 NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS. 59 
 
 c. Nouns formed from verbs, with the incipient in or 
 im and the ending o. often denote the abstract idea of 
 the verb ; thus, indzabulo, joy, from uku dzabula, to re- 
 joice; inkcfliso, deception, from ukuktflisa, to deceive; 
 imftlo, a secret, from uku ftla, to hide. 
 
 Some nouns thus formed, however, denote the instrument of the 
 action denoted by the verb; thus, imbaso, an ax, from uku baza, to hew; 
 tnifulo, a bellows, from uku fula, to blow. 
 
 d. Of the same import denoting the abstract idea of 
 the verb are most nouns formed from verbs by means 
 of the incipient ulu (contracted, u] and the ending o ; 
 thus, 
 
 Udumo, fame, from uku duma, to be famous ; utando, love (also 
 mtando, love), from uku tand-a, to love. Nouns thus formed occasion- 
 ally denote the instru meni; as, udomlolo, a staff, from uku dondola, to 
 walk with a staff. 
 
 e. Nouns formed from verbs with the incipient Hi 
 (contracted, i] and the ending o, denote sometimes the 
 instrument and sometimes the abstract idea of the verb ; 
 thus, 
 
 Igaulo, an ax, from uku ^fiiila, to chop; ibizo, a name, from uku 
 biza, to call. 
 
 /. Nouns denoting the abstract idea are sometimes 
 formed from verbs, by prefixing to the root the incipient 
 ubu, and changing the final a to o; thus, 
 
 Ubulungo, or ubulungiso, goodness, from uku lunga, to be good. 
 
 g. The most common kind of verbal nouns is the in- 
 finitive mode, used: (a.) Generally as a noun in the 
 abstract; thus, ukulunga, goodness; ukudzabula, joy. 
 (b.) But sometimes as a noun in the concrete; thus, 
 uku'l'a, food. 
 
 83. 1. When the root of a verb, from which a noun 
 is derived, begins with a vowel, and the incipient ends 
 in one, the latter is elided ; thus, 
 
 Isazi, for isiazi, from ukwazi; isono, for isiono, from ukwona ; so the 
 plural of umoni, thus, aboni, for abaoni. (See 16., III., 4.)
 
 GO FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 2. Some nouns are formed from verbs without any 
 change in the final vowel of the latter; thus, 
 
 Itcmba, from uku temba; iliwa and isiwa, from uku wa. This is 
 generally the case with nouns formed from verbs in the passive voice ; 
 thus, umtunywa, a messenger, apostle, from uku lunywa, to be sent; 
 ikohca, a believer, from uku kolwa, to be satisfied. 
 
 3. A few nouns terminate in e, especially among those 
 derived from verbs in the reciprocal form ; as, intandane, 
 an orphan, from uku tandana, to love mutually ; uma- 
 kehvane, neighbor, from ukwakelana, to build together. 
 
 4. A few nouns are derived from verbs, by prefixing 
 an incipient, as in other cases, and dropping the final 
 syllable, instead of changing the final vowel ; thus, 
 
 hilima, a deformed person, from uku limala, to be injured, deformed; 
 upau, a mark or sign, from uku paula, to mark. Or the verb, perhaps, 
 in these and similar cases, may have been derived from the noun ; as, 
 uku paula, from upau. 
 
 8-i. D. A few nouns are derived FROM OTHER 
 PARTS OF SPEECH: 
 
 a. From adverbs; thus, ' Upakade,' a proper name, 
 from ' pakade,' long ago. 
 
 b. From prepositions ; thus, 'umpakati,' a councillor, 
 from ' pakati,' inside, within. 
 
 85. III. Compound nouns are formed by uniting two 
 words in one. This mode of forming words is of later 
 origin than derivation, and is employed to express certain 
 definite and nec'essary ideas, for which derivation makes 
 no provision. 
 
 The words united to form a compound noun may 
 be: 
 
 a. Two distinct nouns; as, ' umninimuzi ' (' umnini ' 
 and c umuzi'), owner of a kraal. 
 
 b. A noun and an adjective ; as, ' ubabakulu ' (' ubaba ' 
 and ' kulu'), my grandfather ; 'Amanzimtoti ' ('amanzi ' 
 and ' mtoti'), name of a river. 
 
 c. A verb (radically) and a noun ; as, ' intsisanTu ' 
 ('uku tsisa,' to burn, and ' inTu,' house), the house- 
 burning-wind=N. W. wind, which is often strong, hot, 
 and dry, making fires very dangerous ; ' Impumalanga '
 
 FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. j I 
 
 (' ukii puma/ to come out, and ' ilanga,' sun), east, sun- 
 rising ; 'Intsonalanga' ( c uku tsona' and 'ilanga'), west, 
 
 sun-setting. 
 
 d. A noun and a verb; as, ' Ulangalibalele ' (' ilanga- 
 li-balela,' ' uku halela,' to be hot=tlie sun it is hot), 
 a proper name. 
 
 e. A noun (or radically a verb) and an adverb ; as, 
 ' Uinfikisemva ' (' umfiki ' from * uku fika,' euphonies 
 and ' cmuva,' after), a proper name. 
 
 REM. J. In forming the compound, the initial vowel of the second 
 word is dropped, when there is one; thus, MMmmtauzi, from nuinini ;md 
 umuz'i ; lOMcbelanga, from umsebe and ilanga. 
 
 REM. 2. The modifying word follows that which expresses the 
 general idea, and takes the principal accent. (See 69., B., and 60.) 
 If, however, the second of the compound be a monosyllable, or become 
 one by the elision of its initial vowel according to the last remark, the 
 principal accent falls on the final syllable of the first of the compound, 
 the accent of the compound being the same as in a simple word. 
 
 86. The most common form of two words entering 
 into a compound, is the erect or uninflected, as ' umnini- 
 muzi,' &c. But to this general rule there are some excep- 
 tions, one or both of the elements of the compound being 
 taken sometimes in an oblique or inflected form ; thus, 
 ' Ulangalibalele.' Here the verb 'balele' is taken in an 
 inflected form, the present perfect tense, with its direct 
 nominative, the pronoun li, \vhic1i agrees with its noun 
 ' ilanga ;' the first form of the compound being 'ilanga- 
 libalele ' a common noun which changes to a proper 
 name by taking the incipient u in place of i. Of the 
 same class are ' UmanTakampisi,' strength of the wolf, 
 a proper name ; ' UkwazinTu,' to know the house, a 
 proper name ; ' UnongenenTwini,' entrance into a house. 
 Here, in the last example, thfe second part of the com- 
 pound is in the locative case ' enTwini,' from ' inTu,' a 
 house. 
 
 87. 1. When the compound consists of two nouns, 
 taken in the nominative, in some instances both parts 
 may be declined ; thus, ' umnikazinTu,' house-keeper, 
 mistress of a house; pi. ' abanikazizinTu,' house- 
 keep^ers, or mistresses of houses ; ' umninimuzi,' master
 
 62 INOIPIENTS OF NOUNS. 
 
 of a kraal; pi. ' abaninimizi ' masters of kraals. So 
 'uTilifa,' inheritor; pi. 'abaTilifa,' or 'abaTamafa,' 
 inheritors; also, ' inTilifa,' inheritor; pi. 'in'I'amafa,' or 
 * izin'l'amafa,' inheritors. 
 
 2. In other instances only one (the first) of the com- 
 ponents is declined, declension being thus restricted by 
 the nature of the case ; thus, ' umsebelanga,' a ray of 
 the sun ; pi. ' imisebelanga/ rays of the sun ; ' umni- 
 nimanTa,' master of strength ; pi. ' abaninimanTa,' 
 masters of strength. 
 
 3. Sometimes a nominal root is repeated in one and 
 the same word. This constitutes a gemination, or a 
 junction of nouns, but not of two different nouns ; hence 
 there is no composition. Of this class are such words 
 as ' u'lungu'lungu,' the cotton plant; * izunguzungu,' the 
 nape ; * unkulunkulu,' the great great one. 
 
 SECT. 3. Nominal Incipients or Preformatives. 
 
 88. 1. All nouns in Zulu consist of two parts first, 
 the incipient or preformative, by some called a "pre- 
 fix;" and secondly, the root or stem ; thus, ' umu-ntu,' 
 * u-baba,' ' isi-buko,' ' ubu-suku.' 
 
 2. The essential nature and important office of the 
 incipient is (a) to bring the nominal root to light, above 
 the surface, as it were, and give it a place among the 
 parts of speech; (b) to express the condition of the noun 
 as to number, and in a great measure as to case ; and 
 (c) to furnish also, in a sense, both the basis or the 
 material, and a model, as it were, for all pronouns, espe- 
 cially those of the third person, and for the prefixes of 
 the adjectives. 
 
 89. 1. The incipients, in all their different forms 
 and numbers, amount to eighteen; viz., u, um, umu, 
 ill, i, im, in, isi, ulu, ubu, uku, o, aba, ama, izim, 
 izin, izi, and imi. 
 
 2. But by rejecting those which mark the plural ; viz., 
 o, aba, ama, izim, izin, izi, and imi ; and rejecting 
 also the duplicate, contract forms of the singular, as um
 
 CLASS AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 63 
 
 of until, and i of Hi; and counting in a mere modification 
 of im (see 24., Rem. 1.), there remain but eight inci- 
 pients ; viz., it, umu, Hi, im, isi, ulu, ubu and uku. 
 
 3. Six of these, viz., it, umu, Hi, im, isi, and ulu, 
 mark the singular number ; while two of them, ubu 
 and uku, \vd\G no restricted number, being used indiscri- 
 minately as singular or plural. 
 
 REM. 1. The form umu, as just stated (see also 16., V.), is often 
 contracted to um, if not also sometimes to u; Hi to i; and ulu and ubu to 
 tt; thus, umzi for umiizi, izu-i for ilizici, &c. 
 
 REM. 2. All those dissyllabic forms which terminate in a vowel, as 
 Hi, ulu, aba, kc., undergo euphonic changes before nominal roots be- 
 ginning with a vowel, final i and a of the incipient being elided, and u 
 being generally changed to w, but sometimes dropped; thus, isando for 
 isiaiido; aboni for abaoni, &c. (See 16., III., 4.) 
 
 SECT. 4. Classes and Number of Nouns. 
 
 90. Most nouns have two numbers, the singular and 
 the plural, the latter being formed from the former by 
 some change, and generally an increase, in the incipient ; 
 thus, umfana, boy ; aba/ana, boys ; into, thing ; izinto, 
 things. 
 
 91. Nouns are divided, according to their different 
 incipients and the different modes in which they form 
 the plural, into eight classes. 
 
 92. I. Theirs/ class includes personal nouns whose 
 incipients in the singular are tt, um, or wnu, and which 
 form the plural by changing u into o, and um or umu 
 into aba ; as, udade, sister, odade, sisters ; umuntu, 
 person, abantu, persons. 
 
 93. Most of the nouns of this (first) class refer to 
 persons, though a few are included here, which refer 
 to animals or things ; as, umuntu, person ; umfana, boy ; 
 &c. ; also, unohemu, a kind of crane, pi. onohemu; 
 ukova, banana, pi. okova,' unohoho, monkey, pi. onohoho; 
 ugivai, tobacco, pi. ogwai; ufakolweni, half a crown, 
 pi. ofakolweni.
 
 CLASS ANP NUMBER OF NOUNS. 
 
 .. 1. Tlic kind of impersonal nouns most common in flu* 
 
 ;ire those which have been Zuluized from other languages, by giving 
 flu-Hi the incipient u in the singular, and o in the plural; as twnr.sv, 
 knife, pi. omese. 
 
 REM. 2. There are a few nouns, as, umkozt, kc., ot a personal 
 character, whk-h form the plural by changing i into imi, and hence 
 are reckoned with nouns of the sixth class. 
 
 REM. 3. The noun umoya or ummoya (see ^ 30. and 47., Rein, ii.), 
 in its primary, impersonal signification, ichid, belongs to the sixth 
 class, whose laws it follows in forming the plural, iminioya, and also in 
 regard to its pronouns, as wona, &c. But in its derived, personal 
 signification, spirit, as Holy Spirit, it may follow the laws of the first 
 rlass, making its plural ommoya (or omoya, like nouns in u, udade, Sec., 
 as from the singular, ii-moya), and use also the pronouns of the first 
 lass, as ycna, m, like. 
 
 94. 1. A proper noun, the name of a single person, 
 sometimes takes the plural form to specify both the 
 person and his company, his party, or people ; thus, 
 Ofaku instead of Ufdku; as, Ofaku ba hambile, Faku 
 and his company have gone. 
 
 2. a. The root of a tribal noun, sometimes takes the 
 incipient um, to signify one of the tribe ; thus, Um\adi 
 may sometimes be used to signify one of the dmaiadi 
 tribe. 
 
 b. But the most common and classical incipient in 
 such a case is i; thus, Iiadi, one of the Jlma\adi tribe; 
 Izulu, one of the Zulu tribe, or one of the Jimazulu. In 
 this case using the incipient i instead of um, to denote 
 one of a tribe the plural in ama presents no anomaly, 
 bejng formed regularly from i, as in nouns of the 
 second class. > 
 
 95. II. The second class of nouns includes all those 
 whose incipient, in the singular, is Hi or i, and which 
 form the plural by changing Hi or i into ama; as, 
 Uizwi or izioi, word, pi. amazwi; igama, name, pi. 
 amagama. 
 
 REM. Some nouns belong to this class, whose external appearance 
 would seem to put them in some other class; thus, inwenwe, pearl- 
 muscle ; inyeza, sweet potato ; and inyatclo, shoe, would seem to 
 belong to the third class, whose incipient is in or im; and itiiko, 
 custom ; isango, gate ; and isondo, hoof, might be thought, from their 
 outward form, to belong to the fourth class, whose incipient is isi, 
 But the forms of the pronouns for these words, as /, li, a/0, lona ui<'
 
 CLASS AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 65 
 
 the form of the plural, ama, &c., clearly show them to belong to this, 
 the second, class, having the incipient Hi or i, and not in or isi. 
 
 So the nouns izimjane, the young of an animal; izibuko, a ford; 
 izibulo, first born; and izimjo, tooth, seem, from their external form, 
 to be the plural of some other class, as of the third or fourth or fifth; 
 but their pronouns, as /, li, alo, lona, and their plurals; as, amazinyane, 
 ainazibuko, &c., show them to be of this, the second, class, with the 
 incipient Hi or t, and not izi or izin. 
 
 96. III. The third class of nouns includes all those 
 whose incipients, in the singular, are im or in. 
 
 a. The incipient im is used before such nominal roots 
 as begin with a vowel or with a labial, b, /, p, or v (see 
 24., 2., and Rem. 1.); thus, imome, imbali, imfe, 
 impande. 
 
 b. The incipient in is found before roots beginning 
 with any other letter than those above named, ex- 
 cepting also /i, /, and m, which take incipients of some 
 other class ; as, indaba, ingubo, tnTw, inkosi; also, 
 umhambo, isilimo, isimiso. 
 
 REM. The same law holds, of course, in respect to the plural 
 incipients, izim and izin. 
 
 97. a. The plural of nouns in im is made in izim; 
 thus, imbenge, basket, pi. izimbenge; imvula, rain, pi. 
 izimvula. 
 
 b. The plural of nouns in in is made, some in izin, 
 and others in ama; thus, inkomo, a cow, pi. izinkomo; 
 into, thing, pi. izinto ; indoda, man, pi. amadoda; in- 
 simu, garden, pi. amasimu. 
 
 REM. A few nouns have two forms of the plural ; as, inkosi, chief, 
 pi. amakosi and izinkosi; inkonyana, calf, pi. iztnkonyana, and sometimes 
 amankonyana. 
 
 98. IV. The fourth class comprises all those nouns 
 whose incipient, in the singular, is isi. They form the 
 plural by changing isi into izi; thus, isikati, time, pi. 
 izikati; isibuko, glass, pi. izibuko. 
 
 99. V. The fifth class of nouns embraces all those 
 whose incipient, in the singular, is ulu, or its contracted 
 form u.
 
 66 CLASS AND NUMBER OF NOUNS, 
 
 In forming the plural, nouns of this class change u 
 or ulu: 
 
 (a.) To izi, when the nominal root begins with /; 
 thus, ulembu, a spider, pi. izilembu; ulimi, tongue, pi. 
 izilimi; 
 
 (b.) To izim (rarely izi), when the root begins with 
 a labial ; thus, ubabe, a grass, pi. izibabe, or izimbabe; 
 ufudu, the turtle, pi. izimfudu; upape, feather, pi. 
 izimpape; and 
 
 (c.) To izin, in all other cases; thus, uti or uhiti, 
 a rod, pi. izinti; udivane, husk or chafT, pi. izindwane. 
 (See 24., 2., and Rem. 1.) 
 
 100. VI. The sixth class contains those impersonal 
 nouns whose incipient, in the singular, is um or umu, 
 and forms the plural by changing um or umu into imi; 
 thus, umfula, river, pi. imifula; umuti, tree, pi. imiti. 
 A few personal nouns belong to this class ; as, uni'lobo, 
 friend, pi. imflobo. (See 93., Rem. 2.) 
 
 101. VII. 1. The seventh class of nouns includes 
 all those whose incipient is ubu, or its contracted form 
 u; as, ubuso, face; ubut&aniof utsani, grass; ubukulu, 
 greatness. 
 
 2. Nouns of this class make no distinction in point of 
 number, but are used indiscriminately as singular and 
 plural ; thus, ubuso, face, or faces. 
 
 REM. When the nominal root begins with a vowel, the u final of 
 ubu is elided, and not changed into w, since w would be incongruous 
 with 6 (see 16., IN., 4., and 25.); thus, ubomi, and not ubwomi, for 
 ubuomi ; ubuya, and not ubwoya, for ubuoya. So, for the same reason, 
 the u is dropped, and not changed to w, in the fragmentary pronoun 
 belonging to this class ; as, ubuso bami, and not bwami ; while such 
 pronouns of the fifth and eighth classes, lu and ku, change u to w, 
 the w being compatible with / and k; thus, uluti Iwaini, ukubona kwatni. 
 
 ^ 102. VIII. 1. The eighth class includes all those 
 nouns whose incipient is uku; thus, uku'l'a, food; uku- 
 lakanipa, wisdom; ukusa, morning. 
 
 J. Nouns of this class, like those of the seventh, make 
 no distinction of number. They are all of a verbal 
 character, being the same as the infinitive mode ; thus, 
 food, which means also to eat.
 
 INCIPIENTS AND PRE FOM ATI VES. 
 
 67 
 
 REM. The pronouns of this class, ku, kona, &c., are often used in a 
 general, indefinite manner, referring to nouns of any and every class, 
 number, and person. 
 
 103. Each class of nouns has a fragmentary or geni- 
 tive pronoun of a preformative character, which some 
 have called a "euphonic letter," corresponding to the 
 noun's incipient, one for the singular, and another for 
 the plural. These pronouns or preformatives, which co- 
 operate with a to denote the genitive case (see 115), 
 are as follows : 
 
 For the first class, singular w, plural b. 
 
 ,, second ,, 
 
 ,, third ,, 
 
 ,, fourth ,, 
 
 ,, fifth 
 
 sixth 
 
 ,, seventh ,, 
 eighth 
 
 104. A general view of the several classes, and of 
 the two numbers of nouns, together with the incipients 
 by which they are marked, and the preformatives which 
 they supply, are given in the following 
 
 Table of the Classes of Nouns. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1, 
 
 a. 
 
 y, 
 
 z or a. 
 
 ^J 5> 
 
 z. 
 
 * " J J> 
 
 z. 
 
 w, 
 
 y- 
 
 b. 
 
 
 kw. 
 
 
 <j / 
 
 j 
 j 
 
 Incipient. 
 
 Preform. 
 
 Example. Incipient. 
 
 Preform 
 
 . Example. 
 
 i 
 
 { umu, or um 
 
 < w 
 
 ( udade > ( 
 \ umfana $ \ 
 
 aba $ 
 
 b 
 
 ^ odade. 
 / abafana. 
 
 
 
 ili, or i 
 
 1 
 
 ilizwi 
 
 ama 
 
 a 
 
 amazwi. 
 
 3 
 
 < im, or in 
 
 ? y 
 
 C imbuzi > ( 
 < inkomo $ ( 
 ( indoda 
 
 izim / 
 izin ^ 
 ama 
 
 z 
 
 a 
 
 ( izimbuzi. 
 I izinkomo. 
 amadoda. 
 
 4 
 
 isi 
 
 s 
 
 isibuko 
 
 izi 
 
 z 
 
 izibuko. 
 
 5 
 
 ulu, or u 
 
 Iw 
 
 C uluti 
 < ubambo 
 ( ulembu 
 
 izin ) 
 izim > 
 izi ) 
 
 z 
 
 ( izinti. 
 < izimbambo 
 f izilembu. 
 
 6 
 
 umu, or um 
 
 w 
 
 umfula 
 
 imi 
 
 y 
 
 imifula. 
 
 7 
 
 ubu 
 
 b 
 
 ubuso. 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 nku 
 
 kw 
 
 ukuma 
 
 

 
 68 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 REM. Some of the nouns of the third class have the same inci- 
 pient ama, in the plural, as nouns of the second class in that number, 
 and also the same preformative a; and such nouns may be regarded 
 as transferred, in the plural, from the third to the second class. In 
 the same manner, those nouns of the fifth class which make the plural 
 in izi, like the plural of nouns of the fourth class, may be considered 
 as transferred, in the plural, to the fourth class. These changes will 
 simplify the discussion of adjectives and the classification of pronouns, 
 and some other parts of the grammar. 
 
 SECT. 5. Irregular, Defective, and Redundant 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 105. 1. Some nouns are irregular in their mode of 
 forming the plural ; thus, umlungu, white man, makes 
 the plural abelungu, instead of abalungu; iva or iliva, 
 thorn, makes the plural ameva, instead of amava, 
 
 2. A few nouns seem irregular from their having 
 formed their plural, doubtless, from an obsolete inci- 
 pient ; thus, izingazi, blood, literally, bloods, would 
 seem to be the plural of ingazi or ugazi; but the sin- 
 gular, in actual use, is igazi, blood. 
 
 3. A few nouns seem irregular from the fact that 
 their plural is formed from a root which is obsolete in 
 Isizulu, though it may be in use in some of the cognate 
 dialects. Of this class is iso or iliso, eye, pi. amelo. 
 In the Sechuana, where the incipient le (li) corresponds 
 to the Zulu Hi, ma to the Zulu ama, and tl to the Zulu 
 c l, the same noun, in the singular, is letlo (=ili'lo in 
 Zulu), and, in the plural, matlo ( amalo in Zulu.) 
 The Fingoes use amaso, eyes, which is the regular plural 
 of iliso or iso, eye. 
 
 106, Some nouns are defective in number, being used 
 only in the singular, or only in the plural ; thus, ubisi, 
 sweet milk; umusa, mercy; and some other nouns have 
 no plural ; while the following, and some others, have no 
 singular; as, amanzi t water; amanl'a, strength; ama- 
 kaza, cold; amasi, sour or thick milk. 
 
 REM. Nouns of the seventh and eighth classes, where one form 
 answers for both the singular and plural, are of this defective character. 
 These are defective, however, not by any accident or exception, but 
 by a law, and in accordance with the genius of the language.
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 69 
 
 107. Some nouns are redundant in their incipients, 
 and hence in their forms for the singular, or for the 
 plural, or for both. 
 
 a. Some nouns have two forms for the singular ; as, 
 'inkemba' or ' isinkemha,' a sword, pi. 'izinkemba;' 
 * ugongolo ' and ' ingongolo,' pole, pi. ' izingongolo.' 
 
 b. Some nouns have two forms for the plural, and 
 one for the singular ; as, c inkosi,' chief, pi. ' amakosi ' 
 and 'izinkosi ;' 'inkonyana,' calf, pi. izinkonyana ' and 
 ' amankonyana.' 
 
 c. A lew nouns have two forms for both the singular and the plural ; 
 as, umnyaka, and inyaka, (also unyaka,*) year, pi. iminyaka and izin- 
 yaka ; nsuku and insuku, day, pi. izinsuku and amasuku. 
 
 REM. Sometimes, and indeed generally, a difference in the form 
 of the plural, or a difference between two forms, whether in the singular 
 or the plural, indicates more or less of difference in meaning ; thus, 
 umoya (or WMoyu), wind, spirit, pi. imimoya, winds; omoya (or om- 
 tnoya), spirits ; unyaka, the year (nonyaka, this year); umunyaka, the 
 space or period of a year. 
 
 SECT. 6. Gender of Abuns. 
 
 108. 1. Gender, as a difference in the form of nouns 
 to express the natural distinction of sex, is of very 
 limited extent in the Isizulu ; and as it rarely affects the 
 declension, even when it does exist, it becomes a matter 
 of little or no practical importance in the grammar of 
 the language. 
 
 2. The only approach to a distinction and an influence of gender, in 
 the declension of nouns, is to be found in those of the first and sixth 
 classes whose incipient is um; those of a personal character belonging, 
 as a general thing, to the first class, and making the plural in aba; while 
 those of an impersonal character belong, as a general thing, to the 
 sixth class, and make their plural in inn; thus, umfana, boy, pi. abafana; 
 umfula, river, pi. imifula. 
 
 109. 1. The gender of nouns, or their natural dis- 
 tinction of sex, is determined, in most cases, merely by the 
 meaning of the words, different words, which have no 
 etymological relation to each other, being used to express 
 males and females; thus, 'indoda,' man; ' umfazi,' 
 wife ; ' umfana,' boy ; ' intombi ,' or * intombazana,' girl ;
 
 70 UENDF.R OF NOUNS. 
 
 4 inkunzi,' or ' iduna,' the male of irrational animals , 
 and 'iuiazi,' or 'insikazi,' the female of such animals. 
 
 2. Another mode of expressing the natural distinction 
 of sex, or rather an extension of the above, for more 
 specific purposes, is to use two words one, to point out 
 the particular kind or class of animal, and the other, the 
 natural sex ; thus, 'inkunzi yenkomo/ or ' inkomo e 
 yinkunzi,' the male of cattle, bull ; ' inkunzi yehasi,' or 
 ' ihasi lenkunzi,' the male of horses, a stallion ; ' imazi 
 yenkomo,' or ' inkomo e yimazi,' the female of cattle, 
 a cow ; ' imazi yehasi,' or ' ihasi lensikazi/ the female of 
 horses, a mare. 
 
 So ' umuntu oyindoda,' a person who is a man, or a 
 male person ; ' umuntu o ngumfazi,' a person who is a 
 woman, or a female person. 
 
 110. The only instances in which the mere form of 
 the noun helps to indicate the distinction of natural 
 gender, are when the suffix kazi, sometimes contracted to 
 azi, is used; thus, 'inkosi,' chief, 'inkosikazi,' chiefess; 
 'umlungu,' white man, 'umlungukazi,' white woman; 
 ' ihasi,' horse, 'ihasikazi/ mare. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes the final letter or syllable of the noun is cut off, 
 before the suffix azi or kazi is added; thus, inkomazi, a cow, from inkomo- 
 kazi; itokazi, a young heifer, from itole, a calf; indodakazi, a daughter, 
 from indodana, a son. 
 
 REM. 2. The noun to which kazi may be suffixed, to denote the 
 feminine gender, does not always, of itself, and without that suffix, de- 
 note the masculine'; thus, inkomo may denote a cow or an ox ; but 
 inkomokazi denotes a cow, and not an ox ; so inkuku, denotes a fowl, a 
 hen, without regard to sex; but inkukukazi denotes a hen in particular, 
 or a fowl of the feminine gender. 
 
 REM. 3. The suffix kazi does not always denote the feminine 
 gender; it is sometimes used to signify beauty, excellence, or su- 
 periority, as in age, strength, or knowledge; thus, ubabakazi, my ex- 
 cellent or renowned father; umutikazi, a fine tree. 
 
 The peculiar use of different words to express 
 father and mother, according as they stand related to 
 the person speaking, the person spoken to, or the person 
 spoken of, should not be overlooked ; which is as 
 follows :
 
 CASES OF NOUNS. 71 
 
 1. Ubaba, my father. Umame, my mother. 
 
 2. Uyi'lo, your father. Unyoko, your mother. 
 
 3. Uyise, his or her father. Unina, his or her mother. 
 
 The particular import of each of these terms ought to 
 be carefully learned and observed. 
 
 SECT. 7. Cases of Nouns. 
 
 112. GENERAL REMARKS. 1. There is some ques- 
 tion as to how many cases should be admitted in the Isi- 
 zulu. If a change of form is essential to constitute a 
 case, there are, strictly, only three cases three varieties 
 of change or falling, except that sometimes produced 
 by a preposition. These might be called the genitive, 
 the locative, and the vocative. Or, if the simple ground 
 form, the upright or nominative be included and reckon- 
 ed as a case, this would make four cases. 
 
 2. But if, on the other hand, it should be claimed that 
 the use of a preposition constitutes a case, then there 
 must, of course, be as many cases at least as there are 
 prepositions, the admission of which would encumber 
 the language with many new terms, and with a heavy 
 and useless load of distinctions. 
 
 3. There is, however, a convenience, at least in a 
 practical grammar, in admitting an accusative case by 
 which to specify the object of an active verb or of a pre- 
 position ; and this makes, in all, for nouns, five cases, 
 viz., the Nominative, the Genitive, the Accusative, the 
 Locative, and the Vocative. 
 
 113. I. The NOMINATIVE CASE is the noun in its 
 simple form ; and it denotes the subject of a finite verb ; 
 thus, 'umfana,' boy; 'abantu,' people; 'ilizwe,' country. 
 
 REM. The relation of the noun to the verb finite is pointed out with 
 precision by means of a pronoun, which always bears more or less of 
 the image of the noun's incipient; thus, umfana u jikile, the boy he has 
 arrived; abnnhi ba ya hamba, the people they do go; ilizive h vundile, 
 the country it is fertile. 
 
 II, The GENITIVE CASE denotes the relation
 
 72 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 (a.) Of source, cause, or origin ; as, * umsindo vva- 
 hantu,' noise of the people ; ' ilizvvi lornuntu,' word of 
 a person ; ' umfundisi wa sEnanda,' the teacher of, at, 
 or from, Inanda. 
 
 (b.) Of ownership, or possession ; as, * izinkomo 
 zenkosi,' cattle of the king ; ' izinyao zomfana,' feet 
 of the boy. 
 
 (c.) Of designation, object, or fitness ; as, ' imvu 
 yoku'latswa,' a sheep for slaughter ; * indao yokwaka/ 
 place to build ; ' izwe labantu,' country for people ; 
 ' ingubo yomfana,' blanket for the boy. 
 
 REM. There are no very strict dividing lines between these several 
 relations, as some examples may fall with nearly equal propriety under 
 two, or even three, of the above heads, according to the signification of 
 the words or the view which the mind takes of the relations. 
 
 115.1. The first of two nouns in regimen always 
 denotes the property or thing possessed, or thing having 
 an origin, designation, or fitness ; and furnishes either a 
 fragmentary pronoun, or else, as before proper names, an 
 entire pronoun, from its incipient, to aid, as it were, the 
 genitive particle a, in showing the relation between that 
 first or governing noun, and the second, which denotes 
 the possessor, author, place of origin, <fec. 
 
 2. There are two ways of forming the genitive, the 
 one pertaining chiefly to common nouns, the names of 
 things, and the other to proper nouns, chiefly the names 
 of persons ; besides also a third mode which is connected 
 with the locative, and pertains chiefly to proper nouns 
 which are names of places. 
 
 A. When the second or limiting noun that which 
 denotes the owner, author, source, or end is a common 
 noun, the genitive is generally formed by prefixing to it 
 (in its nominative form), the preformative pronoun of the 
 first, the noun limited or possessed, together with the geni- 
 tive particle a this particle coalescing with the initial 
 vowel of the second noun, and making e of a-i, and o of 
 -M, but simply a of a-a, and only o of a-o, (see <& 10. 
 and 16., I.); thus, ' ilizwi lenkosi=ilizwi 1-a-inkosi,' 
 word of the king ; <isi!okosomfana=isiiokos-a-umfana,' 
 hat for the boy ; ubuso bflbantu=ubuso b-a-abantu,'
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 73 
 
 face of the people ; ' izingubo zodade izingubo z-a- 
 odade,' clothes of the sisters. 
 
 REM. Where the pre formative of the genitive, the fragmentary pro- 
 noun, is i or , lu orku, the one, i, changes to its cognate y, and the u of 
 the other changes to w (see 16., IV.) ; but the preformative a, of the 
 plural of the second and third class of nouns, is simply absorbed in the 
 genitive particle a (see 16., I.); thus, inkomo i/mkoxi- inkomo iamkosi, 
 cow of the chief; imikono yomfanaimikono i-aumfana, arms of the 
 boy; uyise wabantu=uyise u-a-bcmtu, father of the people; ukuina 
 kwomuntu=ukuma ku-aumv.nlu, standing of a person ; amadwala 
 ondula==amadwala a-a-umfula, rocks of the river. Sometimes, how- 
 ever, the initial vowel of the limiting noun is elided; thus, impi ya 'nyak' 
 enye ; umzi wa 'munlu 'munye ; a si 'bantu ba 'lulo. 
 
 B. When the second or limiting noun is proper, the 
 name of a person, in forming the genitive, the initial 
 vowel (of the nominative form) is dropped, and the geni- 
 tive particle a is hardened by fc, making ka, which is 
 sometimes preceded by the separable, simple pronoun, 
 instead of the inseparable, fragmentary, of the first or 
 limited noun ; thus, 'izinkomozi ka 'Mpande,' cattle of 
 Umpande; ' ilizwi li ka 'Tiuo,' or 'ilizwi ka 'Tino,' the 
 word of God; 'umfazi ka 'Faku,' wife of Ufaku. 
 
 REM. 1. The personal pronoun, of the limited noun, in the first, 
 third, and sixth classes, singular, and in the second and sixth, plural, 
 is generally omitted ; and in all other instances the pronoun is 
 generally, though not always, used; thus, umfana kc 'Nodwengv, the 
 boy or servant of Nodwengu; inkomo ka 'Sibekana, (but sometimes, 
 inkomo yi ka 'Sibekana,) Usibekana's cow; umkonto ka 'Mbopa, Umbopa's 
 spear; amazwi ka 'Mose, (sometimes, amazwi a ka Mose,) the words 
 of Moses. 
 
 REM. 2. Some common personal nouns' often form the genitive in 
 the same way as proper nouns, names of persons; particularly, ubaba, 
 umame, uyise, unyoko, unina; also pronouns of the definitive form; thus, 
 izinkomo zi ka 'baba, or izinkomo ka 'baba, and sometimes, izinkomo zo- 
 baba, cattle of my father; so izinkomo ka mina, or izinkomo zami, my cattle. 
 
 REM. 3. Proper nouns, the names of tribes and sects, form the 
 genitive in the same manner as common nouns; thus, inkosi yJlmazulu, 
 chief of the Amazulu, or of the Zulus ; izivelo zMafarisi, customs 
 of the Pharisees. 
 
 C. When the second or limiting noun is proper, the 
 name of a place, river, or mountain, and denotes the 
 place of origin, abode, or existence, it is generally put in 
 the locative case, and preceded directly by the euphonic 
 s, but indirectly by the genitive particle a, together with 
 the fragmentary pronoun of the first, the limited noun
 
 74 SCHEME OF THE GENITIVE. 
 
 whose origin, abode, or existence is specified ; thus, 
 ' umfana vva sEnanda,' a boy of or from Inanda; 
 ' abantu ba sEmlazi,' the people of or from Umlazi ; 
 ' inkomo ya sErini,' a cow from the Cape Colony. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes a common noun is used in the same manner 
 put in the locative under the geriitival regimen; thus, umtelo wa sesi- 
 lungwini, law of the white man; igicababa la semzini, the crow of the 
 kraal, that is, another's ainasi (thick milk), which a man refuses to 
 eat among strangers, lest he should return thither and be found guilty 
 of immorality. 
 
 REM. 2. This form of the genitive is used also with pronouns 
 governed by a preposition; thus, iliswe la Tcubo, their country, or a 
 country of theirs ; abantu ba kiti, our people ; izinkomo za kini, your cattle. 
 
 116. 1. From one of the foregoing paragraphs, (A,) 
 it appears that there may be as many different forms of 
 the genitive case in a common noun, as there are dif- 
 ferent fragmentary or genitive pronouns in the nouns 
 limited, which are nine in all ; viz., w, /, y, s, Iw, 6, 
 kw, a, and z. 
 
 These different forms may be illustrated in the word 
 ' inkosi,' chief, in the following 
 
 Scheme of the Genitive of a Common Noun. 
 
 CLASS. SINGULAR, (GENITIVE); PLURAL, (GENITIVE). 
 
 1. Umfana, vvenkosi ; abafana benkosi. 
 
 2. Jlizvvi lenkosi ; amazwi enkosi. 
 
 3. Inkomo yenkosi ; izinkomo zenkosi. 
 
 4. Isibuko senkosi ; izibuko zenkosi. 
 
 5. Uluti Iw enkosi ; izinti zenkosi. 
 
 6. Umuti wenkosi ; imiti yenkosi. 
 
 7. Ubuso benkosi. 
 
 8. Ukuma kwenkosi. 
 
 2. From another of the foregoing paragraphs, (B,) it 
 appears that the name of a person in the genitive case 
 is one for all classes, and that it is uniformly preceded 
 by the genitive particle fca, whatever may be the class 
 and number of the limited noun ; though the pronoun, 
 when one is used before fca, takes a variety of forms, 
 according to the incipient of the limited noun, as may 
 be seen in the following
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 75 
 
 Scheme of the Genitive of a Proper Noun the name of a person. 
 
 CLASS. SINGULAR, (GENITIVE); PLURAL, (GENITIVE). 
 
 Umfana ka 'Faku ; abafana (ba) ka 'Faku. 
 
 Ilizvvi (li) ,, amazwi (a) ,, 
 
 Inkomo (yi) ,, izinkomo (zi) ,, 
 
 Isibuko (si) ,, izibuko (zi) ,, 
 
 Uluti (Iu) ,, izinti (zi) ,, 
 
 Umuti ,, imiti (yi) ,, 
 
 I. 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 7. Jbuso (bu) ka 'Faku. 
 
 8. Ukuma (ku) ,, 
 
 3. From the other foregoing paragraph, (C,) it appears 
 that the form of the genitive used with the locative case 
 of proper nouns, the names of places, varies according 
 to the class and number of the limited noun from 
 whence the fragmentary genitive pronoun is derived ; 
 though the form of the limiting noun itself, in the loca- 
 tive, is one and the same, whatever may be the form of 
 the limited noun, as shown in the following 
 
 Scheme of the Genitive of a Proper Noun the name of a place in 
 
 the Locatirc. 
 
 CLASS. SINGULAR, (GENITIVO-LOC.) ; PLURAL, (GENITIVO-LOC.) 
 
 1. Umfana wa sEnanda ; abafana ba sEnanda. 
 
 2. Igama la ,, amagama a ,, 
 
 3. Inkomo ya ,, izinkomo za ,, 
 
 4. Isitelo sa ,, izitelo za ,, 
 
 5. Uluti Iwa ,, izinti za ,, 
 
 6. Umuti wa ,, imiti ya ,, 
 
 7. Ubukulu ba sEnanda. 
 
 8. Ukuma kwa ,, 
 
 117. III. The ACCUSATIVE, or objective CASE de- 
 notes the object of a transitive verb or of a preposition. 
 
 In form, it is the same as the nominative, save when 
 its initial vowel coalesces with the final vowel of the 
 preposition, or is elided to facilitate utterance; thus, 'si 
 ya bona umfana,' we do see a boy ; 'si bizile abantu,' we 
 have called the people ; c si hamba nobaba,' we go with 
 father ; 'si vele ku 'bantu,' we come from (he people.
 
 76 LOCATIVE CASE. 
 
 118. IV. 1. The LOCATIVE CASE denotes the place 
 at , in, or about which a thing is, or is done, or whence or 
 whither it proceeds. The more specific idea involved 
 in this case, as in fact in all the cases, must be deter- 
 mined, in a great measure, hy the connection ; thus, 
 'emutini,' from * umuti,' tree, may signify, in the tree, 
 on the tree, under the tree, to, from, or about the tree, 
 according to the nature of the subject, and the meaning 
 of the words used in connection with it. 
 
 2. a. The formation of this case, in nearly all com- 
 mon nouns, involves two inflections; one in the incipient, 
 changing the initial vowel into e, or sometimes into o; 
 and another in the termination; and, in some instances, 
 certain euphonic changes are made also in the heart of 
 the word, according to 33 and 34. 
 
 b. Final a changes to eni; thus, igula, eguleni. 
 Final e ,, eni; thus, ilizwe, elizweni. 
 Final i ,, ini; thus, umuti, emutini. 
 Final o ,, iveni; thus, unyao, onyaweni. 
 Final n ,, wini; thus, abantu, ebantwini. 
 
 c. When 6, m, w&, or /), occur after the first syllable 
 of the root, and especially in the last, they generally 
 undergo a change of a euphonic character, thus : 
 
 B changes to ts; as, indebe, endetseni. 
 M ,, ny; as, umlomo, emlonyeni. 
 
 MB ,, ndz; as, isibambo, esibandzeni. 
 
 P ,, ' ts; as, isibopo, esibotseni. 
 
 119. To these general rules (stated in the last para- 
 graph), for forming the locative case, there are many ex- 
 ceptions, some of which are the following : 
 
 (a.) Some nouns generally retain b unchanged in the 
 final syllable; as, ' ubabe,' 'elubabeni;' ' inkabi,' ( en- 
 kabini;' 'intaba,' * entabeni ;' 'igaba,' * egabeni,' or 
 'egatseni.' 
 
 (b.) Some nouns generally retain m unchanged in 
 the locative; as, 'igama,' 'egameni;' 'ijoma,' 'ejomeni,' 
 sometimes 'elonyeni;' * insimu,' 'ensimini;' 'izinkomo,' 
 'ezinkomeni.' In the last two words the w, which
 
 LOCATIVE CASE. 77 
 
 would be formed from u and o, is dropped, being incom- 
 patible with m except very rarely it is heard in the 
 last of the two; thus, ' ezinkomweni.' (See 25.) 
 
 (c.) Some nouns often retain p unchanged in the 
 locative; as, ' upape,' 'opapeni;' 'insipo,' 'ensipweni;' 
 'isi'lepu,' 'esi'lepwini.' Some nouns use both forms ; as, 
 'impupu,' 'empupwini' or 'emputsini,' and sometimes 
 'empupini.' 
 
 (d. ) Those nouns in which final o or u is preceded by 
 6, m6, orp, generally change o into em', and u into ini, 
 when the preceding consonant is changed into its corres- 
 ponding substitute ; but into weni or wini, when the 
 preceding consonant remains unchanged ; as, ' isi'lobo,' 
 ' esi'lotseni ; ' 'isigubu,' 'esigubwini,' 'esigubini,' ' esi- 
 gutsini,' and sometimes ' esigudzini ' (see 34., 6 
 changing to dz before i) ; * intambo,' * entambweni ' or 
 1 entandzeni;' * imihambo,' l emihambweni ' or ' emi- 
 handzeni;' ' isi'lepu,' * esi'lepwini;' * insipo,' 'ensipweni;' 
 
 * umiopo,' 'emiotseni;' * ubuiopo,' ' ebuiotseni;' 'im- 
 pupu,' ' emputsini ' or ' empupwini.' But where final o 
 or u is preceded by m, and that consonant remains un- 
 changed, o sometimes changes to em, and u to ini; as, 
 'izinkomo,' ' ezinkomeni,' rarely * ezinkomweni;' *in- 
 simu,' ' ensimini.' 
 
 REM. Though the euphonic consonantal changes are sometimes 
 neglected, and some of them, in some words, very generally, by most 
 tribes and persons; yet in most cases, and especially where more or 
 less of incompatibility is involved, as in bw, mw, a.ndpw, they are care- 
 fully observed by the best speakers, and must be regarded as decidedly 
 the best, most classic style. 
 
 120. 1. Some nouns, which, in other cases, usually 
 have the contracted form of the incipient, often replace 
 the full form in the locative case; as, 'utsani/ ' ebu- 
 tsanini;' * udaka,' * eludakeni ;' ' izwe,' * elizweni.' 
 
 2. When nouns of the fifth or seventh class form the 
 locative with a contracted incipient, the initial vowel u 
 is generally changed to o instead of e; as, f udaka,' 
 
 * odakeni ;' ' udonga,' ' odongeni ' or ' eludongeni ;' 
 'uzwani,' 'ozwanini;' 'ulwanga,' 'olwangeni;' 'unyao,' 
 ' onyaweni ;' * ubabe,' * elubabeni.'
 
 VOt A I i V t CASE. 
 
 N; 1^1. 1. A feu common nouns form the locative by 
 oli;mging only the initial vowel, the termination remain- 
 ing uninflected ; as, * ubusuku,' 'ebusuku;' ' imini,' 
 ' emini ;' ' i c lobo,' ' e c lobo ;' ' ubusika,' ' ebnsika ;' 
 4 ikaya,' 'ekaya;' so, ' em'lana.' * e'lane/ * erfla,' ' em- 
 pumalanga,' ' entsonalanga,' 'elwanTe' or ' olwanTe.' 
 
 2. Most proper nouns names of rivers and places- 
 form the locative in the same way, by simply changing 
 the initial vowel into e or o; thus, 'Inanda,' ' Enanda;' 
 * Isibubulungu,' ' Esibubulungu ;' ' Umlazi,' * Emlazi ;' 
 ' Utugela,' ' Otugela ' or Elutugela ;' * IJ'langa,' < O c la- 
 nga;' c Isangwana,' ' Osangwana.' 
 
 3. A few proper nouns, however, form the locative 
 like most common nouns, by inflecting both the beginning 
 and the end of the word ; as, f Umkambati,' ' Emkam- 
 batini ;' ' Umpongodwe,' ' Empongodweni,' and some- 
 times ' Empongodwe ;' ' Isidumbi,' ' Esidumbini ' or 
 ' Esidundzini ;' ' UmToti,' ' EmToti,' and occasionally 
 'EmTotini;' so, 'Ozwatini;' ' Obondzeni.' 
 
 122. The locative case of proper names of rivers 
 and places is often combined with the genitive, as already 
 stated, ( 115., C.,) to indicate the source, origin, or 
 residence of a person or thing ; thus, c umuntu wa 
 sEnanda,' a person of or from Inanda ; ' amatse a sEsi- 
 hiibiilungu,' the rocks of or on the Bluff. 
 
 REM. The s in these and similar examples, thus wa s Enanda, is a 
 mere euphonic, (see 35., 5.,) inserted to preserve the genitive particle 
 a, and prevent a disagreeable hardness in the flow of speech. It is also 
 used in the same manner where the locative is preceded by a pronoun, 
 as , ni, li, ba, or by a preposition, as na, nga, kiva, &.c. ; thus, u semfuleni, 
 he is at or in the river; ba sesibayeni, they are in the kraal ; ba se mi nga 
 aemutini, they are still standing by the tree; u sezulwini na sezindaweni 
 zonke, he is in heaven and every where. 
 
 123. V. The VOCATIVE CASE is that form of the noun 
 in which a person is addressed. It is derived from the 
 nominative by eliding the initial vowel ; thus, 'Nkosi, 
 king, Lord, from 'Inkosi;' 'baba, father, from 'ubaba;' 
 'madodana, sons, from 'amadodana;' 'makosi, kings, 
 from ' amakosi.' So proper names ; as, 'Faku, from 
 'Ufaku;' 'Dingani from ' Udingani ; 'Makobeni from 
 ' Umakobeni.'
 
 OF DECLENSIONS. 70 
 
 1. .\nims nf the tilth rhiss. contracted form of the incipient, 
 replace the full form of the incipient, and elide the initial vowel, in 
 the vocative; as, 'luti, from uti or uluii; 'lubisi, from ubisi or ulubiai. 
 But nouns of oilier classes often neglect to replace the full form of 
 the incipient in this case; as, 'zintjo, fromizimjo or ilizinyo ; ijizira '/ 
 (from i ///.. 
 
 REM. '2. Nouns of the first class making the plural in the incipient 
 o, from the singular u, never elide the initial o, but often prefix 6 in the 
 vocative; thus, odade or bodade, as yizwani odade, hear ye sisters; so 
 ijizwunini bobabft, hear ye fathers; yiziranini bomame, hear ye mothers. 
 
 REM. .3. The final vowel of some nouns, not only in the vocative, 
 but in all the cases, is sometimes passed over in silence, especially in 
 rapid articulation, and after n or s; as, 'Dingan 1 ; 'Nkos' ; 'Makoben'. 
 
 REM. 4. In familiar address, at the beginning of a remark or speech, 
 the vocative is often preceded by e ; as, E! 'JVA-osi. This is sometimes 
 heard also in solemn address, as in prayer. 
 
 REIM. 5. In calling at a distance, the vocative is generally preceded 
 by we; as, We! 'Faku. 
 
 REJI. 6. In solemn address and suplication, the vocative is some- 
 times preceded by au; as, Jlu! 'JVXvm/ O Lord ! 
 
 124. To the foregoing principles and remarks, a con- 
 densed illustration of the more common forms of the 
 cases may be added in the following 
 
 Scheme of the JJcctnision of JVbiw*. 
 I. DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 
 
 MNtiULAK. PLURAL. 
 
 Norn. Umtinfu, person ; abantu, persons. 
 
 Gen. ( W)omuntU) of a person ; (w)abantu, of persons. 
 Ace. Umuntu, person ; abantu, persons. 
 
 Loc. Emuntwini, in a person ; ebantwini, in persons. 
 Voc. 'Muntu, O person ; 'bantu, O persons. 
 
 II. DECLENSION OF A PROPER NAME OF A PERSON. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. Ufaku; Ofdku. 
 
 Gen. Ka 'Faku; (w)a wOfaku. 
 
 Ace. Ufaku; Ofaku. 
 
 Voc. 'Faku; Bofaku or Ofaku
 
 80 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 REM. When the name of a person is used in the genitive plural 
 it takes the euphonic w before it, in which case the genitive a is not 
 hardened by k, but combined with the fragmentary pronoun of the 
 governing noun ; as, umbila iva wOnodwengu, the maize of Uno- 
 dwengu and company. 
 
 III. DECLENSION OF A PROPER NAME OF A PLACE. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL wanting. 
 
 Nom. Inanda. 
 Gen. (W)a sEnanda. 
 Ace. Inanda. 
 Loc. Enanda. 
 Voc. 'Nanda. 
 
 REM. The preformative w is used in the genitive, as given in 
 the above tables, only when the noun limited is of the first or sixth 
 class singular, as umuzi womuntu. When the noun limited belongs to 
 some other class or number, some other preformative is used ; thus, 
 igama lomuntu; isifo somuntu, &c. (See $} 115., 116.) 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 125. The number of proper Adjectives in Isizulu is 
 small, but the deficiency is made up in part by the use 
 of nouns and verbs ; thus, the noun amanTa, strength, 
 often supplies the place of the adjective strong; so the 
 verb lungile, from uku lunga, to be straight or good, 
 supplies the place of an adjective of that import. 
 
 SECT. 1. Derivation of Adjectives. 
 
 h 126. Derivative adjectives, which are few, are formed 
 chiefly from nouns, other adjectives, and verbs. 
 
 A. 1. FROM NOUNS are formed adjectives, or more 
 properly, nouns are often used as adjectives, by rejecting
 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 81 
 
 the initial vowel of the noun ; as, nianzi, wet, from 
 umanzi, water ; thus, si manzi, we are wet : bukali, 
 sharp, from ubukali, sharpness ; thus, izembe li bukali, 
 the ax is sharp: butuntu, dull, from tt&uf unto j dullness; 
 thus, izembe li butuntu, the ax is dull. 
 
 2. Sometimes the noun, used as an adjective, retains 
 its full form, as ixolo, roughness; thus, insimbi i yixolo, 
 the iron is rough literally, is roughness ; so, iziriUziyo 
 zetu zi ngamafse, our hearts are hard literally, are 
 stones. 
 
 3. But more frequently the noun used as an adjective 
 is joined to the noun, or pronoun, qualified, by the pre- 
 position na; thus, u nolaka (u na-ulaka), he is angry 
 literally, he with anger, or he has anger ; inyoni i 
 nedzubanc, the bird is swift is with or has speed ; 
 si namakaza, or si 'makaza, we are cold. 
 
 127. B. FROM ADJECTIVES are formed diminutive 
 adjectives, by means of the suffix ana, and by such 
 euphonic changes as the language requires, in the same 
 manner as diminutive nouns are formed from other nouns, 
 (see 79., 5., a.,6.,&c.); thus, banzi, broad, banzana, 
 broadish ; mlope, white, mlotsana, whitish; kulu, large, 
 kulwana, largish ; n\inyane, small, nrinyanyana, very 
 small ; onke, all, onkana, a moderate whole, about 
 all ; ningi, many, ningana, a pretty good number, con- 
 siderable many. 
 
 REM. Onkana sometimes signifies, all together, one and all, 
 all alike, every one ; thus, izinkomo :i file zonkana, the cattle are 
 dead one and all; ba mukile botikana, they have gone every one of 
 them; s' onile sonkana, we are all alike guilty. 
 
 128. C. FROM VERBS are derived what may be 
 called verbal adjectives. Such adjectives are generally 
 derived from those verbs which express some quality or 
 property ; thus, 
 
 Lungile, straight, right, good, from uku lunga, to be straight, &c. ; 
 lambile, hungry, from w&w lamba. to be hungry ; sabekayo or sabekile, 
 from uku sabeka, to be fearful. The form of the verb thus used is 
 generally the present perfect, as given above ; thus, lambile, sabtkile. 
 Of this class are all verbs belonging to the subjective species; as, 
 tandeka, lovable : zcndeka. hateful ; bambtka appivheflsible ; tambeka, 
 aiopii
 
 82 CLASSES AND FORMS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 SECT. 2. Classes of Adjectives. 
 
 129. Adjectives may be divided into two classes 
 the one called proper, or genuine ; and the other facti- 
 tious, or substitutional. 
 
 1. The proper genuine adjectives are those which are 
 not obviously derived from any other part of speech, but 
 are used apparently first and only as adjectives in the 
 common acceptation of the term ; as, m'lope, white ; 
 mnandi, sweet ; kulu, great ; c le, nice. 
 
 2. Factitious, substitutional, or improper adjectives 
 are those words which are sometimes used adjectively ; 
 though primarily, and in their most appropriate use, they 
 belong to some other part of speech, as to nouns or 
 verbs ; such are the nouns, amarfYa, strength ; idzu- 
 bane, speed ; ubukali, sharpness ; and such the verbs, 
 lungile, good ; lambile, hungry ; sabekilc, fearful. 
 
 130. An adjective, whether proper or factitious, may 
 be used in two ways: 
 
 (a.) As a mere attributive, an accessory, or a modifier 
 of the noun to which it belongs; thus, umuntu omkulu, 
 a person who (is) great, or a great person ; abantu 
 abakulu, the people who (are) great, or the great people; 
 abantu aba namarfYa, the people who (are) with or have 
 strength, or the strong people ; or, 
 
 (b.) The adjective may be used as a direct predicate; 
 thus, umuntu umkulu, the person (is) great ; abantu 
 bakulu the people (are) great ; abantu ba namariYa, 
 the people are strong. 
 
 SECT. 3. Inflection of Adjectives. 
 
 131. All proper adjectives are inflected by taking 
 
 prefixes which conform to the incipients of the nouns 
 
 with which they agree in respect to both class and 
 number ; thus, 
 
 Umfana umkulu, the boy is great; abajana bakulu, the boys are 
 great ; ilizwe likulu, the country is great ; ilizwe elikulu, a great 
 Country; abajana abakulu, large hoy;..
 
 ADJECTIVES USED AS ATTRIBUTIVES. 83 
 
 ; 132. Aside from some euphonic variations in the 
 prefix, which depend partly upon the root of the adjective, 
 and partly upon the nominal incipient, there are two 
 general forms of the prefix, or two kinds of inflection, 
 according as the adjective is used, either as a mere attri- 
 butive, or as a direct predicate. 
 
 133. A. The prefix of the adjective, used as. an attri- 
 butive, consists of the relative particle a (the same as the 
 genitive a) combined, generally, with the full form of the 
 nominal incipient : and so corresponds to the class and 
 number of the noun with which the adjective agrees ; thus, 
 
 Umfana omkulu (=a-m A*U/M), a large boy ; inl.omo enkulu (=a- 
 in-kulu), a large cow, or a cow which is large ; izwe or ilizwe elikulu 
 (==a-ilikulu') , a large country, or a country which is large ; isibuk* 
 esimnyama, a black glass; abantu abnmmjarna, black people; izinto 
 ezinkulu, large things. 
 
 REM. 1 . When the root of the adjective begins with w, as in mtoti, 
 mnandi, mnyama. mpoju, the m and final of the nominal incipient are 
 omitted in the prefix of the adjective; thus, umlnla omtoti, (not om- 
 mtoti,) sweet corn ; izinto ezimiuindi. nice things ; imvu emnyamn, a 
 black sheep; amatole ampofu, buff colored calves; imifula emtoti, 
 sweet rivers. 
 
 REM. 2. Final m and n, also HIM, ma, and mi, of the nominal in- 
 cipient, are omitted in the prefix of the adjectives ftomtmand nsima; as, 
 imbuzi ehomrn, a red goat; into enzima, a heavy thing; umuntu obomvu, 
 a red person; amatole abomvu, red calves. 
 
 But before the adjectives, n\inyane, and ningi, the 
 final m, and the full forms ama and imi, of the nominal 
 incipient, are used in the prefix ; as, umfula omnitnuane, 
 a small river ; amatole aman\inyane, small calves ; 
 imiti eminingi, many trees. 
 
 REM. 3. When the root of the adjective begins with a labial, as b,f, 
 and the incipient of the noun, with which the adjective agrees, ends in 
 n, this n of the incipient is changed, in the prefix, into m, according to 
 principles already stated (^24.); thus, inkomo embi, a bad cow. But 
 the adjective bomvu, as already remarked, and to which banzi should 
 be added, rejects both m and n from its prefix. 
 
 REM. 4. The prefix of some adjectives, referring to nouns of the 
 first and sixth classes, singular, often takes the second or furtive u, 
 the full form of the nominal incipient, especially when the accent falls 
 on it; thus, umuntu omubi, instead of ambi, a bad person; umfana 
 omunye or omnye, another boy. In the same manner, sometimes the 
 full, and sometimes the abbreviated forms of some other incipients, are 
 used in the prefix of some adjectives; as, imisebenzi embi or emibi, bad 
 works; tmi^t cmide, tall trees.
 
 Si ATTRIBUTIVE INFLECTION. 
 
 S) 134. The inflection of the adjective as a mere attri- 
 butive the different forms of the prefix, according to the 
 class and number of the noun to which it relates, and 
 according to most of the variations required by euphony, 
 as given in the above rules and remarks may be pre- 
 sented in a more condensed manner in the following 
 
 Table of Adjectives declined as Attributives. 
 
 CLASS. NOUNS. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Umfana 
 
 2. Ilizwi 
 ."3. Into 
 
 4. Isibuko 
 
 5. Uluti 
 
 6. Umuti 
 
 7. Ubuso 
 
 8. UkuTa 
 
 1. Abafana 
 
 2. Amazwi 
 
 3. Izinto 
 
 4. Izibuko 
 
 5. Izinti 
 
 6. Imiti 
 
 KULT:. 
 
 BI. 
 
 i 
 
 MNANDI. 
 
 om-kulu 
 
 om-bi 
 
 o-mnandi 
 
 eli-kulu 
 
 eli-bi 
 
 eli-mnandi 
 
 en-kulu 
 
 em-bi 
 
 e-mnandi 
 
 esi-kulu 
 
 esi-bi 
 
 esi-mnandi 
 
 olu-kulu 
 
 olu-bi 
 
 olu-mnandi 
 
 om-kulu 
 
 om-bi 
 
 o-mnandi 
 
 obu-kulu 
 
 obu-bi 
 
 obu-mnandi 
 
 oku-kulu 
 
 oku-bi 
 
 oku-mnandi 
 
 aba-kulu 
 
 aba-bi 
 
 aba-mnandi 
 
 ama-kulu 
 
 ama-bi 
 
 a-mnandi 
 
 ezin-kulu 
 
 ezim-bi 
 
 ezi-mnandi 
 
 ezi-kulu 
 
 ezi-bi 
 
 ezi-mnandi 
 
 ezin-kulu 
 
 ezim-bi 
 
 ezi-mnandi 
 
 emi-kulu 
 
 emi-bi 
 
 e-mnandi 
 
 REM. Adjectives, (used as attributives,) whose root begins with m, 
 also, bomvu, banzi, and nzima, are declined like mnandi; those whose 
 roots begin with a labial, except bomvu and banzi, are declined like 
 bi; and others like 
 
 135. B. The adjective used as a predicate makes no 
 use of the relative particle a, like the adjective used as an 
 attributive; and, in the present tense, no use is made of a 
 copula or substantive verb, like the English is, are, &,c.; 
 but it takes for its prefix, either a full or an abbreviated 
 form of the incipient of the noun with which it agrees and 
 of which it is predicated ; thus, ' umfana umkulu,' the
 
 ADJECTIVES USKI) AS PREDICATES $5 
 
 boy is large; 'indoda inkulu,' the man is large; 'isibaya 
 sikulu,' the fold is large ; 'unuizi umkulu,' the kraal is 
 large ; ' uhuso bukulu,' the face is large ; ' abafana ba- 
 kulu,' the boys are large ; ' amadoda makulu,' the men 
 are large ; ' izibaya zikulu,' the folds are large ; ' imizi 
 mikulu,' the kraals are large. * Umfana ka 'mkulu,' the 
 boy is not large ; ' indoda ka inkulu,' or * a inkulu,' the 
 man is not large ; ' isibaya ka si sikulu,' the fold is not 
 large ; ' umuzi ka umkulu,' or ' a umkulu,' the kraal is 
 not large ; ' ubuso ka bu bukulu,' or 'a bu bukulu,' the 
 face is not large ; ' abafana ka ba bakulu,' or ' a ba ba- 
 kulu,' the boys are not large ; * amadoda a wa makulu,' 
 the men are not large. 
 
 REM. 1. When the incipient of the noun is a monosyllable, most 
 adjectives, used as predicates, take its fuller form as a prefix; thus, 
 umfana umkulu, the boy (is) great ; inkomo inkulu, the cow (is) 
 great; umfula umkulu, the river (is) great. 
 
 REM. 2. Those adjectives, however, whose root begins with 7, 
 and also bomvu, and nzima, take only the initial vowel of the mono- 
 syllabic incipient, and only the initial also of the incipients ama and imi 
 (second and sixth classes, plural) ; thus, umfana umnandi, the boy is 
 well; inkomo ibomvu, the cow is red; amatole amnyama, the calves are 
 black; imiti imtoti, the herbs (medicines) are sweet. 
 
 REM. 3. (a.) When the incipient of the noun is a dissyllable, most 
 adjectives, used as predicates, elide its initial vowel, and take the 
 second syllable as a prefix; thus, ilizwe libi, the country is bad; isi- 
 buko simnyama, the glass is black; uluti lukulu, the rod is large; izi- 
 nkomo zinkulu, the cattle are large ; abantu baningi, the people 
 are many. 
 
 (6.) But, as before remarked, the dissyllabic incipients, ama andt?nt, 
 give the initial vowel for a prefix before adjectives in m, and before 
 bomvu and nzima; as, amatole amnyama, the calves are black; though 
 they elide that vowel and give the second syllable before other adjec- 
 tives ; as, amatole makulu, the calves are large ; amanzi mabi, the 
 water is bad. 
 
 REM. 4. (a.) Sometimes the incipient of the first and sixth class 
 singular, inn or umu, gives the prefix mu instead of um, and sometimes 
 the full form may be heard ; thus, umuntu mude, or umude, the person 
 is tall. (See 133., Rem. 4.) 
 
 (6.) In the same manner, sometimes a full and sometimes an abbre- 
 viated form of some other incipients, particularly ama and imi, or ma 
 and mi, are used as a prefix of predicate adjectives ; thus, imiti imide 
 or mide, the trees are tall. 
 
 REM. 5. Adjectives whose root begins with a labial, except banzi and 
 bomvu, change the final n of the nominal incipient into m in the prefix, 
 as in case of adjectives used as attributives (see 133., Rem. 3.); 
 thus, into imbi, the thing is bad.
 
 
 F R E D 1 < A T I V R INFLECTION. 
 
 136. The inflection of the adjective as a predicate, 
 or the different forms of its prefix, when so used, may be 
 briefly illustrated by the following 
 
 Table of Adjectives declined as Predicates. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 
 f \. Uinfana 
 
 . 
 
 2. Tlizwi 
 
 2 
 
 3. Into 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 4. Isibuko 
 
 1 
 
 5. Uluti 
 
 
 . 6. Umfula 
 
 7. Ubuso 
 
 8 UkuTa 
 
 
 1. Abafana 
 
 
 2. Amazwi 
 
 05 < 
 
 D 
 J 
 
 3. Izinto 
 4. Izibuko 
 
 fc 
 
 5. Izinti 
 
 1 6. Imifula 
 
 KULU. 
 
 BI. 
 
 MNANDI. 
 
 uni-kulu 
 
 um-bi 
 
 u-mnandi 
 
 li-kulu 
 
 li-bi 
 
 li-mnandi 
 
 in-kulu 
 
 im-bi 
 
 i-mnandi 
 
 si-kulu 
 
 si-bi 
 
 si-mnandi 
 
 In kiilu 
 
 lu-bi 
 
 1 u-mnandi 
 
 um-kulu 
 
 um-bi 
 
 u-mnandi 
 
 bu-kulu 
 
 bu-bi 
 
 bu-mnandi 
 
 ku-kulu 
 
 ku-bi 
 
 ku-mnandi 
 
 ba-kulu 
 
 ba-bi 
 
 ba-mnandi 
 
 ma-kulu 
 
 ma-bi 
 
 a-mnandi 
 
 zin-kulu 
 
 zim-bi 
 
 zi-mnandi 
 
 zi-kulu 
 
 zi-bi 
 
 zi-mnandi 
 
 zin-kulu 
 
 zim-bi 
 
 zi-rnnandi 
 
 mi-kulu 
 
 mi-bi 
 
 i-mnandi 
 
 REM. Adjectives, (used as predicates,) whose root begins with m, 
 also ' bomvu,' ' banzi,' and ' nzima,' are declined like mnandi; those 
 whose roots begin with a labial, except ' bomvu ' and ' banzi,' are de- 
 clined like hi; and 1 others like kulu. 
 
 137. 1. The agreement of the adjective, both as an 
 attributive and as a predicate, with pronouns of the first 
 and second persons, singular and plural, so far as there 
 is any thing peculiar in it, will be more properly stated 
 and illustrated in Syntax, as belonging rather to the 
 construction of propositions. But a few examples may 
 be given in this connection ; thus, ' ngi mkulu,' I am 
 great ; ' ngi mnandi,' 1 am well ; ' ngi mubi,' I am bad ; 
 'ngi nzima/ I am heavy; 'ngi bomvu,' I am red ; ' ngi 
 mu c le,' I am pretty ; ' ngi mude,' I am tall ; ' ngi 
 mfutsane,' I am short ; 'ngi mdala,' I am old.
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 87 
 
 ' U rnkulu,' thoti art great ; ' u mnandi,' thoii art well ; 
 ' u mubi,' them art bad ; ' u nzima,' them art heavy ; 
 ' u bomvu,' thou art red. 
 
 ' Si bakulu,' we are large; 'si mnandi,' we are well ; 
 
 * si babi,' we are bad ; ' si nzirna,' we are heavy ; 
 ' si bafutsane,' we are short ; * si bomvu,' we are red ; 
 
 * si badala,' we are old ; ' si bade,' we are tall ; ' si 
 ba'le,' we are well ; 'simtoti,' we are sweet. 
 
 * Ni bakulu,' ye are large ; ' ni babi,' ye are bad ; 
 
 * ni mnandi,' ye are well; ' ni intoti,' ye are sweet; 
 ' ni ba c le,' ye are pretty ; ' ni bade,' ye are tall ; ' ni 
 badala,' ye are old ; 'ni bomvu,' ye are red ; ' ni bafu- 
 tsane,' ye are short ; ' ni nzima,' ye are heavy ; ' ni 
 baniinyane,' ye are small. 
 
 2. The agreement and construction of nouns and verbs, used as 
 adjectives, do not differ essentially from their use as nouns and verbs; 
 hence they require no particular notice in this connection, further 
 than what has been already given ( 126., 128., 129., and 130). 
 
 138. In respect to the comparison of adjectives, the 
 different degrees are expressed (a.) by inflection, as in 
 the formation of the diminutive, (see 127.); and (b.) by 
 the use of separate additional words, as fcw, to, in compari- 
 son with; pezu, over, above ; kakulu, greatly, very, truly; 
 impela, totally ; ukwctlula, to surpass. Hence the rules 
 and remarks on this part of adjectives will come more 
 properly in Syntax. But a few examples may be given 
 here; thus, ngi mkulu kmve, I am greater than thou, or 
 I am great in comparison with thee; literally, 1 am great 
 to thee : inkomo inkulii kakulu, or inkulu impela, the 
 cow is very large; umfana loumkulu pezu kwabanye, 
 that boy is larger than others. 
 
 SECT. 4. Numeral Adjectives. 
 
 139. 1. Numeral adjectives express the relation of 
 number and quantity. They may be divided into definite 
 numerals ; as, (i)nye t one ; (zi)mbili, two, &c. ; and 
 indefinite numerals; as, (b)odiva, alone; (b)onke, all ; 
 (aba)nye, some others.
 
 8S CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 1?. Definite numeral adjectives may he divided into the 
 three classes called Cardinal, Ordinal, and Collective. 
 
 140. A. Cardinal numbers are those which express 
 a definite number, and answer to the question, How 
 many? as, inye, one; zimbili, two; zintatu, three. 
 
 1. The radical portions of the numerals, from one to 
 five inclusive, are nye, one ; bill or bini, two ; latu, 
 three ; we, four ; c lame, five. These all take prefixes, 
 like proper adjectives, according to the class and number 
 of the noun to which they belong ; thus, 'inimntu oinunye,' 
 or 'omnye,' one person ; ' umuntu munye,' the person is 
 one; 'inkomo enye,' one cow ; ' inkomo inye,' the cow 
 is one ; ' abantu ababili,' two persons; ' abantu babili,' 
 the persons are two ; 'izinkomo ezintatu,' three cows; 
 ' amatole mane,' the calves are four; 'izinti zin'lanu,' 
 the rods are six. 
 
 2. The radical portions of the cardinal numbers, from 
 six to nine inclusive, are, originally, verbs, or verbs com- 
 bined with other words ; thus, tatisitupa, six ; kombisa 
 or kombile, seven ; siyangalombili, eight ; siyagalo- 
 lunye, nine. These, like other verbs, take, as their 
 direct nominative, either the simple or the relative pro- 
 noun of the noun with which they agree ; thus, ' abantu 
 aba tatisitupa,' six persons, or persons who are six ; 
 ' abantu ba tatisitupa,' the persons are six, or there are 
 six persons; ' izinkomo ezi kombisa,' six cattle, or cattle 
 which are six; * izinkomo zi kombisa,' the cattle they are 
 six, or there are six cattle. 
 
 REM. 1. (a.) The signification of these and other 
 terms, and the whole system of numbers will be better 
 understood, by remarking that the natives have little or 
 no idea of numbers in the abstract. They use the de- 
 cimal system ; and always count by pointing out the 
 things counted with their fingers, beginning generally 
 with the little finger of the left hand, and finishing a 
 decade with the little finger of the right hand. 
 
 (b.) Having counted five in this way, which the native 
 sometimes indicates by saying, leda isarfYa, finish the 
 hand, instead of saying, isflanu or zirilanu; he proceeds 
 with the second hand, and says, zi tatisitupa (tata-
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 89 
 
 tsitupa), six, i.e., take the thumb ; zi kombisa or zi 
 kombile (komba), seven, i.e., point (with the fore finger); 
 zi siyangalombili (siya-izingalo-ezimbili), eight, i.e., 
 leave two members (of the hand) ; zi siyagalolunyc 
 (siya-ugalo-chinye), nine, i.e., leave one member (of 
 the hand), at the same time shutting up one finger, as he 
 shuts two when he counts eight. 
 
 REM. 2. In place of these terms, others also are 
 sometimes used to represent numbers from six to nine ; 
 as, tandatu, six ; siyangalontatu, seven, i.e., leave 
 three members ; siyamnivembili (siya-iminwe-emibili) 
 eight, i.e., leave two fingers; \agatsisile, nine; also 
 siyanivemnye (siya-umnwe-omnye), nine, i.e., leave one 
 finger, at the same time closing one finger, as two are 
 closed when eight are designated. 
 
 141. 1. The noun isumi signifies ten, and the plural, 
 amasumi, tens ; ikulu, a hundred, and the plural, ama- 
 kulu, hundreds ; inkulungwane, a thousand, and izin- 
 kulungwane, thousands. 
 
 2. All other numbers are expressed by combining to- 
 gether two or more of those already given ; thus, isumi 
 li nanye, ten it with one, or istimi li va nganye, ten it 
 surpassed by one, or ten and one over, signifies eleven ; 
 isumi nambili, or isumi li nambili, ten and two, or 
 isumi li va ngambili, ten plus two, signifies twelve ; 
 isumi nantatu, or li nantatu, or li va ngantatu, signifies 
 thirteen, &c. 
 
 So amasumi amabili signifies two tens, i.e., twenty; 
 amasumi amatatu, three tens, i.e., thirty, &c.; ama- 
 sumi amabili nanye, or a nanye, or a va nganye, signi- 
 fies two tens and one, i.e., twenty-one ; amasumi amabili 
 nambili, or a nambili, or a va ngambili, twenty-two, &c. 
 
 REM. Rules and remarks on the general construction of cardinal 
 numbers belong rather to Syntax ; yet, in addition to what has been 
 already said, a few more examples may be given here ; thus, info enye, 
 one, or another thing; into inye, there is one thing, or the thing is one; 
 izinto ezimbili, two things ; izinto ziinbili, there are two things, or the 
 things are two ; imiti emibili, two trees ; imiti mibili, there are two 
 trees ; izinto ezi tati-situpa, six things ; izinlo zi. talisitupa, there are six 
 things, or the things are six; leta izinto zi be zine, bring four things, 
 or bring things let them be four ; biza abantu ba be batatu, call three 
 persons, or call persons let them be three. (See 130., 134., 136.) 
 
 L
 
 90 TABLE OF CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 142. 1. All the digital numeral adjectives and verbs 
 may become nouns by taking the incipient isi; thus, 
 isinye, one ; isibili, two ; isitatu, three ; &c. 
 
 2. A general scheme of Zulu counting, in some of 
 its simpler terms, is given in the following 
 
 Table of Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 1 Jsinye. 
 
 2 Isibili. 
 
 3 Isitatu. 
 
 4 Isinc. 
 
 5 Isi'Janu. 
 
 6 Isitatisitupa, or isitupa. 
 
 7 Isikombisa, or isikombile. 
 
 8 Isisiyangalornbili, or siyamnwembili. 
 
 9 Isisiyagalolunye, or siyanwemnye. 
 
 10 Isumi. 
 
 11 Isumi nanye, or isumi li nanye, or li va nganye, 
 
 12 Isumi nambili, or isumi li nambili, &c. 
 
 13 Isumi nantatu, or li nantatu, &c. 
 
 14 Isumi nane, &c. 
 
 15 Isumi narflanu, &c. 
 
 16 Isumi na tatisitupa, or nesitatisitupa. 
 
 17 Isumi na kombisa or nesikombile. 
 
 18 Isumi nesisiyangalombili. 
 
 19 Isumi nesisiyagalolunye. 
 
 20 Amasumi amabili. 
 
 21 Amasumi amabili nanye, or a nanye. 
 
 22 Amasumi amabili a nambili. 
 
 23 Amasumi amabili a nantatu. 
 
 24 Amasumi amabili a nane. 
 
 25 Amasumi amabili a narflanu, or a nesi c lanu. 
 
 26 Amasumi amabili a na tatisitupa, or a nesitupa. 
 
 27 Amasumi amabili a nesikombisa. 
 
 28 Amasumi amabili a nesisiyangalombili. 
 
 29 Amasumi amabili a nesisiyagalolunye. 
 50 Amasumi amatatu. 
 
 40 Amasumi amane. 
 50 Amasumi ama'lanu. 
 60 Amasumi a tatisitupa. 
 70 AmaSumi a kombisa.
 
 ORDINAL AND COLLECTIVE NUMBERS. 91 
 
 80 Amasumi a siyangalombili. 
 90 Amasumi a siyagalolunye. 
 
 100 Ikulu. 
 
 101 Ikulu nanye, or li nanye, or li va nganye. 
 
 102 Ikulu nambili, or li nambili, &c. 
 
 103 Ikulu nantatu, &c. 
 
 104 Ikulu nane, &c. 
 
 105 Ikulu nan'lanu, &c. 
 200 Amakulu amabili 
 300 Amakulu amatatu. 
 
 500 Amakulu ama'lanu, &c. 
 1000 Inkulungwane. 
 2000 Izinkulungwane ezimbili. 
 
 The term 'izigidi' has been used sometimes to signify 
 millions ; and ' amatse,' to signify billions. 
 
 143. B. Ordinal numbers are those which denote a 
 series, rank, or order, and answer the question, Which 
 one in the series ? 
 
 The ordinals consist of the numeral nouns, ' ukulala,' 
 'isibili,' 'isitatu,' 'isumi/' dmasumi amabili/ 'ikulu,'&c. 
 
 144. Ordinal numbers are put in the genitive, after 
 the nouns whose rank or order in a series they are used 
 to specify. Sometimes, for the greater emphasis and 
 precision, the relative pronoun of the specified noun is 
 used before the specifying numeral, especially where the 
 limiting ordinal noun is of the decadal character ; as, 
 ' umuntu wokulala,' the first person ; ' umfana wesibili,' 
 the second boy ; * iniwadi yesitatu,' the third book, 
 &c. ; ' umunlu o wamasumi amabili,' the twentieth 
 person ; ' umuntu o wekulu,' the hundredth person ; 
 'igama lesumi nambili,' the twelfth hymn. 
 
 145. C. Collective numeral adjectives are those forms 
 of the numerals which signify that several persons or 
 things are taken definitely and unitedly together, in the 
 sense of both, all three, all four. 
 
 Their very nature precludes their use in the singular, 
 though they are found in use with nouns of the seventh 
 and eighth classes.
 
 92 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES, 
 
 146. 1. The full form of these collective numerals is 
 that of the adjective used as a predicate preceded by o and 
 by the fragmentary pronoun of the noun defined ; thus, 
 
 Jtbantu bobabili, both persons; abantu bobatatu, all three persons; 
 imiti yomibili, both trees ; imiti yomitatv, all three trees ; amatole 
 omatalu, all three calves; izibuko zozine, all four glasses ; ubuso bo- 
 bitbili, both faces. 
 
 REM. Both the form and import would seem to denote that the 
 collective numeral is a contracted combination of the adjective onke 
 and the numeral; thus, bonke-babili, contracted=6ofea6t/i. 
 
 2. The prefix of these collective numerals is some- 
 times contracted ; as, ' izinkomo zombili ' (for * zozim- 
 bili'), both cows; 'zontatu' (for 'zozintatu'), all three; 
 ' zone' (for 'zozine'), all four. 
 
 3. Sometimes instead of this specific form of the col- 
 lective numeral, as in bo, zo, yo, &c., the numeral takes 
 the form of a noun, and is connected with the noun de- 
 fined, by means of a pronoun, relative or personal, 
 either with or without any intervening euphonic, just as 
 taste and euphony may require. This remark applies 
 more to numbers above five than to those below ; thus, 
 ' abantu ba yisikombisa,' all seven persons, or literally, the 
 persons are seven ; ' izinkomo ezi yisumi,' or 'izinkomo 
 zonke ezi yisumi;' ' izikati zi yisi'lanu,' or ' ezi 'si'lanu,' 
 or ' zozi'lanu;' ' abafana aba 'masumi amabili,' or ' aba- 
 fana bomasumi amabili.' 
 
 4. When these collective numerals are used with pronouns of the 
 first and second person (plural), they take the preformative s for the 
 first person, and n for the second, together with o, and the same pre- 
 dicative form as adjectives belonging to personal nouns in the plural; 
 thus, Una sobabili, we both ; sobatatu, all three (of us) ; nina nobabili, 
 you both; nobatalu, all three (of you). 
 
 NOTE. For Numeral Adverbs, see Adverbs, ^ 320., V. 
 
 SECT. 5. Indefinite Adjectives. 
 
 147. 1. There are a few radical words, as, onke, 
 all, the whole ; odwa or edwa, only, alone ; nye, one, 
 another, some others; tile, certain one, or ones; ndzalo, 
 such ; ngakfi, so much ; nansika, what do you call it ?
 
 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 93 
 
 .pi, how many ? and ndze, so many ; which may be 
 called indefinite adjectives, at least in some of their uses. 
 2. Some of these, as onke and nye, are of a pronominal 
 character ; while tile is properly a verb ; and the other 
 words, as ndzalo, ngaka, pi, and ndze, are used more 
 frequently as adverbs than as adjectives. 
 
 148. 1. a. Onke and odwa, or edwa, take, as a 
 prefix, the fragmentary pronoun, or preformative of the 
 noun with which they agree ; thus, 
 
 Jlbaniii bonke, all people; izinto zonke, all things; izwe lonke, the whole 
 country; tina sodwa, we alone; abafanabodwa, boys only ; ilizwi lodwa, 
 a word only; mina ngedwa, I only or alone. 
 
 6. But instead of the usual fragmentary pronoun w (u=w) of the 
 personal nouns, first class, singular, y is used with edwa, as more 
 precise and euphonic, and corresponding to the definitive pronoun of 
 that class; thus, yena yediva, he alone or only. (See ^ 164., 2.) 
 
 2. Nye is the root of the cardinal number for one, and 
 its inflection here, as an indefinite numeral, meaning 
 some, others, &c., is the same as when used as the 
 first of the cardinal series, its import depending upon its 
 connection and position ; thus, 
 
 Abanye ba tanda, abanye ba zonda, some love, some (or others) hate; 
 izinkomo ezinye zi fikile, ezinye a zi kafJa, some cows have come, and 
 some have not yet come. 
 
 3. Tile is from the verb uku ti, to say, to wit, to 
 specify, and follows the inflection of similar verbs in its 
 relation to nouns and pronouns. It is often used in the 
 sense of a certain one, any one, some one, referring 
 especially to some person or thing before specified ; as, 
 
 Umuntu o tile, a certain person, or the said person ; abantu aba tile, 
 certain persons. The verbal noun is sometimes used in the genitivo- 
 locative form; thus, wena wa sekutini, thou of a certain (place or 
 character), that is, thou shade of my ancestors, thou tutelar ghost. 
 
 4. Ndzalo, ngakfa, pi, and ndze, are properly adverbs, 
 though they are often used as predicates of pronouns, in 
 which case they have more the force of indefinite adjec- 
 tives ; thus, ku ndzalo, it is so, or it is such; ba ndzalo 
 laba 'bantu, such are this people ; amarfYa a ngaka,
 
 94 PRONOI 
 
 such power ; zi ngaka, they are so great ; ba pi na? 
 they are how many? also ba ngapi net ? literally, where 
 are they? primarily, as to place, and then, by implication, 
 as to number ; ba ndze, they are so many. 
 
 5. Nansika is a word of a general indefinite character, 
 used in the sense of What do you call it ? &c., when 
 one has forgotten a thing, or a person, and is trying to 
 recollect the name ; thus, 
 
 /_ i i nansika, it it it is such or what do you call it? ba ba 
 ba nansika ba n^abantn ba ka 'Fodo, they they who are they ? 
 strange I have forgotten oh, they are the people of Fodo. 
 
 CH.-ll'TKIi II'. 
 > K O N O II N S 
 
 ^ 149. There is a class of relational words in the Isi- 
 zulu, which may be used either instead of specific names 
 of objects alluded to, in order to prevent a needless re- 
 petition ; or they may be used in addition to those names, 
 in order to secure precision of reference, or point out 
 the relations of personality. Hence these words are 
 called pronouns (pronomina, for nouns). They may 
 be used either as substitutes or as complements. 
 
 1 . Some of them are substitutes, inasmuch as they may stand not 
 only for nouns, hut also for adjectives, for a sentence, or a part of a 
 sentence, or for a series of propositions. 
 
 2. They often serve also, at least some of them, in a complemental 
 character, inasmuch as, even when the noun is used, they are required 
 along with it, or in addition to it, to give limits and connection to its 
 meaning, and prevent ambiguity, by designating its person and its 
 relative position in regard to the discourse in which it appears. 
 
 150. All these pronouns these relational substitutes 
 and complements present, in themselves, an index to 
 the noun for which they stand, or to which they refer, 
 hy exhibiting in their very form a marked resemblance to
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF PRONOUNS. 95 
 
 the nominal incipient the more essential, fixed portion 
 of the pronoun being often a mere image of the noun's 
 incipient ; thus, 
 
 The personal pronouns si, sona,.the demonstratives esi or lesi, and 
 the relative csi, present a marked likeness to the incipient isi of the 
 fourth class, singular; as, isibuko, isifo, fot&oft, &c. ; and the pronouns 
 ba, bona, aba or laba, and aba, all bear the image of the incipient aba 
 for nouns of the first class plural number; as, abafana, Etc. 
 
 REM. In some instances, however, the image is rendered obscure, 
 at least to the superficial eye, on account of contractions and other 
 changes required by euphony ; thus, the relation of the pronouns li, 
 lona, eli, leli, &c., to the noun igama, is not so outwardly manifest as 
 it would be, should the full form of the incipient, Hi, be used in that 
 noun, making iligamu; and the relation of yi and yona, to inkosi, and 
 ofwu and icona, to umfula, is obscured in a measure by the addition of 
 the semi-vowels y and w to i and , or by the change of these vowels 
 (i and ) into their cognates y and iv. (See 16., IV., 35., 2., 3.) 
 
 SECT. 1. Classification of Pronouns. 
 
 151. Pronouns may be classified in several different 
 ways, one of which is as follows : 
 
 I. Substantive pronouns, or those which can stand 
 for nouns as substitutes, but cannot combine with them 
 as attributes ; as, 
 
 JVgt, mina, I ; ni, nina, ye; ba, bona, they; li, lona, si, sona, it, &tc. 
 
 II. Adjective pronouns, or those which can combine 
 with nouns attributively, like adjectives, to qualify or 
 limit them ; as, 
 
 Leli 'lizwe, this country; laba 'bantu, these persons; inkmno yami, my 
 cow; izinto zake, his things; abantu bonke, all people, or every body. 
 
 III. Adverbial pronouns, or those which can combine 
 with verbs to modify their meaning ; as, 
 
 Kona, then, here, &c.; pi or ngapi, where? ngani, why ? by what? 
 ini, what ? why ? 
 
 152. Pronouns may be conveniently divided also 
 into the four classes called, Personal, Relative, Demon- 
 strative, and Interrogative,
 
 96 GENDER AND NUMBER OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 SECT. 2. A. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 15;3. 1. As the persons or things mentioned in the 
 discourse are looked upon as playing different parts or 
 characters, according to their position as respects the act 
 of speaking, that class of words which is especially 
 intended to mark such position, has been denominated 
 personal (persona, a character, part), 
 
 2. Hence personal pronouns are not mere substitutes for the names 
 of the persons or things for which they stand. They involve personality 
 also. They serve to express the relation of an object to the speaker, 
 showing whether the object is the speaker himself, the first person ; or 
 the person or thing addressed, the second person ; or the person or 
 thing spoken of, the third person. 
 
 3. Personal pronouns have, therefore, three persons; as, ngi or 
 mina, I; u or wena, thou; w or yena, li or lona, ku or kona, ba or bona, 
 &c., he, she, it, they, &.c. 
 
 154. Gender, as a distinction of sex, does not pertain 
 to the pronoun, either in form or signification ; though the 
 difference between personal and impersonal is marked, 
 to some extent, in pronouns as in nouns those pro- 
 nouns which refer to nouns of the first class being, as 
 the nouns are, generally, personal ; while those which 
 refer to other classes, are, like the nouns, of course, for 
 the most part, impersonal. 
 
 155. 1. Personal pronouns have two numbers, sin- 
 gular and plural, and different forms to express the 
 same ; as, 
 
 Ngi and mina, I or me; si and Una, we or us; u and wena, thou or 
 thee; ni and nina, ye or you. 
 
 2. In the third person, the form of the pronoun follows 
 the form of the nominal incipient in respect to both 
 number and class ; thus, 
 
 The pronouns I, li, lo, lona, alo, &c., all exhibit a likeness to the 
 incipient Hi, as in ilizwi; the pronouns s, si, so, sona, &c., all resemble 
 the incipient isi, as inisifo; and the pronouns b, ba, bo, bona, &c., all 
 resemble the incipient aba, as in abantu. 
 
 156. 1. Zulu pronouns can hardly be said to have 
 any variety of form or inflection to distinguish cases,
 
 CASES AND FORMS OF PRONOUNS. 97 
 
 least of all, to make any general distinction in form 
 between the nominative and the accusative. Almost the 
 only instance of a variation, to mark the two, is in the 
 third person, first class, singular, simple form, where u 
 (sometimes a or e) is used as nominative, and m or mu 
 as accusative. 
 
 2. But, generally, the same form of the pronoun may 
 be either the subject or the object (nominative or accu- 
 sative) of the verb, according to its locality and con- 
 nection ; thus, 
 
 JVg-i ba ianda, I them love; ba ngi tanda, they me Jove; bona ba 
 si tanda, they, they us love; tina s\ ba tanda, we, we them love. 
 (162., Rein.) 
 
 REM. 1. The use of ica instead of a, in the accusative, third 
 person, second class, plural; of wu instead of u, sixth class, singular; 
 and of yi instead of i, third class, singular, and sixth class, plural; 
 and of ku or wu instead of u, second person, singular, is merely 
 a euphonic variation, which occurs as well in the nominative as accu- 
 sative, where similar (euphonic) circumstances require. 
 
 REM. ~. Some forms, as mina, tina, wena, Stc., may he not only 
 either nominative or accusative, but they may be put also in the geni- 
 tive, and be governed by ka, like the names of persons; as, inkomo ka 
 mina, a cow of me, i.e., my own cow. 
 
 157. 1. If the cases of pronouns in Isizulu be de- 
 termined according to the sense, and designated by a 
 very common class of terms, there are three the Nomi- 
 native, Genitive, and Accusative. 
 
 2. And if these be subdivided and designated accord- 
 ing to their forms, it will give what may be called : 
 
 a. The Simple nominative and accusative ; as, 
 
 -i, I, me; si, we, us; ni, ye, you; i (yi), li, ku, &c., it; ba, they, 
 them; :i, they, them, &c. 
 
 6. The Conjunctive accusative and genitive; as, 
 
 Kumi, to me; nami, with me; ngami, by or through or on account 
 of me; yami, lami, bami, zami, &c., of me; kuli or faviti, to us; nati, 
 with us; ngati, by or through us; yetu, zetu, &.C., of us; kubo, to them; 
 nabo, with them; yabo, labo, zabo, &.C., of them. 
 
 c. The Definitive nominative, accusative, and geni- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 Mina, I or me, or I myself, me myself ; ka mina, of myself ; tina, 
 
 M
 
 98 PREFORMATIVE PRONOUN'S. 
 
 we. us, or we ourselves, us ourselves; lea tina, of ourselves; bona, 
 they, them, &c.; ka bona, oi' them or of themselves, kc. 
 
 15S. 1. But pronouns may be divided and named, 
 perhaps more conveniently and properly, according to 
 their different forms and offices; and these divisions be 
 regarded rather as different kinds than as cases of 
 pronouns. 
 
 2. There are, then, six kinds of personal pronouns, 
 each kind having its own leading variety of form, and 
 each form bearing more or less of likeness to the inci- 
 pient of the noun for which it stands or to which 
 it refers. 
 
 3. These different kinds may be denominated, ac- 
 cording to their office, the Preformative, the Simple, 
 the Conjunctive, the Definitive, the Possessive, and 
 the Reflective. 
 
 % 159. i2. The PREFORMATIVE pronoun is of a frag- 
 mentary genitival character. 
 
 (a.) It consists, in most cases, of the consonant, or else 
 of a semi-consonant cognate to the vowel, of the simple 
 pronoun ; or, (what amounts to the same,) primarily, 
 and in the third person, it consists of the leading con- 
 sonant or semi- vowel, or both together, of the nominal 
 incipient to which it refers ; as, 
 
 JVg- from ngt: n from ni ; u- from u; y from i or im, in, or imi; I from 
 /i or Hi; b from ba or aba; z from zi or izi, izim. or izin. (See 103.) 
 
 (b.) But, for the plural of the second class ama, the 
 fragmentary preformative is a, which coalesces or is ab- 
 sorbed in the initial vowel of the noun with which it is 
 used ; and for the singular of the fifth class, and for the 
 eighth class, the fragmentary preformative consists of a 
 consonant and a semi-vowel, liv and kw. 
 
 REJM. 1. The in Iw and kic is sometimes heard but faintly, if not 
 quite elided, especially before o. The to is always dropped in the 
 fragmentary preformative of the seventh class, because of its incom- 
 patibility with b. (See 25., Rem.) 
 
 ilr.M. 2. What is here denominated a preformative., or fragmentary- 
 genitive pronoun, has been called, by some, the " euphonic letter." 
 But to this term there are objections. (See 35., Rem. 2.)
 
 SIMPLE PRONOUNS. 99 
 
 160. 1. The office of the preformative pronoun is to 
 serve with the genitive particle , in forming the geni- 
 tive case of nouns and pronouns, and to point out the re- 
 lation of source, origin, property, or possession, between 
 the limiting noun and the noun limited hetween the 
 possessor and the thing possessed ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zcnkosi, cattle of the chief; abantu bf.nkosi, people of the 
 chief; abantu baini, people of me, my people; abantu ba tEmona, 
 people of or from Umona; isi/b somfana, sickness of the boy; ilizu-e 
 lonuungUy country of the white man. Here the preformative z, in 
 zenkosi, shows the relation of this word to Izinkomo, from whose in- 
 cipient, izin, the preformative is obtained; so the 6, in benkosi, points to 
 abaniu, in whose incipient the 6 is found; so s, in somfana, lefers to 
 isifo, and /, in lomlungu, to ilizive, Sac. 
 
 2. The preformative pronoun is prefixed also to the 
 pronominal adjectives onke t odwa, or edwa, to show 
 their relation to the noun or pronoun with which they 
 agree ; thus, 
 
 Abantu bonke, all people; izice or iHzire lonke, the whole country; ni 
 nodwa, ye only; si sodica, we only. (See 148.) 
 
 161. B. The SIMPLE pronoun is of a complement al, 
 and also of a verbal character, being used in addition 
 to the noun, even when that is expressed, and constitu- 
 ting, always, the direct subject, and often the direct ob- 
 ject, (nominative or accusative,) of the verb ; thus, 
 
 Abantu ba ya hamba, people they do go; u JikiJe umfana, he has 
 arrived the boy; abaniu ba si tanda isinkica, the people they it love 
 bread; ba zi bonile izinkomo, they them have seen the cattle. 
 
 162. 1. The simple pronoun has also an elementary 
 or radical character, as its name implies. This character 
 is particularly manifest in the simple pronouns of the 
 first and second persons ; as, ngi, si, u, ni. In the 
 third person also, it comprises the principal, the more 
 essential element of the incipient of the noun for which 
 it stands ; thus, 
 
 From the incipient WHIM, um, or u, of the first class, singular, comes 
 the simple pronouns u, and m or mu; from the plural incipient aba or 
 o, comes the simple pronoun 60; from Hi, the pronoun li; from im or 
 in, the pronoun i or yi; from isi, si, Stc.
 
 100 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 2. This pronoun may be considered as elementary also 
 from the extent to which it is found to enter into the 
 formation of other pronouns, not only personal, but 
 also the relative and demonstrative classes ; thus, 
 
 The relative corresponding to the simple u, is o (the relative particle 
 -), and the demonstrative is lo or lowo; corresponding to ba is the 
 relative aba (a-ba), and the demonstrative laba or aba; corresponding 
 to li is the relative eli (a-i-li), and the demonstrative leli or eli; &.c. 
 
 REM. The same form of the simple pronoun is both nominative and 
 accusative, with some exceptions, mostly euphonic; thus, ngi, si, ni, ba, 
 li, c/, lu, bu, and ku, are the same in both cases, except sometimes in 
 the accusative they precede a vowel verb, which causes i or a to be 
 elided, and changes u into w. The second person singular u is 
 generally hardened by k,=ku, in the accusative; so a, third person 
 plural, second class, generally takes its cognate consonant w,=iva, in 
 the accusative; and i, third class, singular, and sixth class, plural, 
 takes its cognate y,=yi, in the accusative. In the first class, singular, 
 u (a or e) is used as nominative, and m or mu as accusative. 
 
 The same changes eliding i or a in si, ni, ba, &c., or hardening u 
 by k, and sometimes by w, and i by y,=t/i, a by w,=wa, &.C., are made 
 in these pronouns when used as nominatives, whenever the same cir- 
 cumstances occur to require them. 
 
 The principles, on which these changes are made, have been ex- 
 plained already, chiefly in !(?.; and examples of them occur in 
 every part of the verb, particularly in the imperative mode, in the 
 negative forms, and in vowel verbs. 
 
 ^ 163. C. The CONJUNCTIVE pronoun, as mi, ti, bo, 
 lo, &c., is always joined with some other word, being 
 used : 
 
 (a.) As a suffix to a preposition or a conjunction ; 
 thus, kumi, to me ; nnmi, with me, or and me ; kuti or 
 kwiti, to us ; nnti, with or and us ; so, kubo, nabo, 
 ndzengabo, ndzengalo. 
 
 (b.) As a suffix to the genitive particle a, and the 
 preformative of the governing noun ; thus, wami (um- 
 fana wami, boy of me); bami (abantu bami, people of 
 me); yami (inkomo yami, cow of me); so wabo, babo, 
 yabo, walo, balo, &,c. This makes the possessive pro- 
 noun, which see 166. 
 
 (c.) The conjunctive pronoun is compounded with the 
 relative pronoun, and a preposition, to both of which it is 
 suffixed in forming the reflective pronoun ; thus, iigo- 
 kwami, ngokwabo, &c. (See Reflective Pronouns, 167.) 
 
 (d.) It is also combined, as a prefix, with na, in
 
 DEFINITIVE PRONOUNS. 101 
 
 forming the definitive pronoun; thus, mina, Una, bona, 
 &c. (See Definitive Pronouns, 165.) 
 
 (e. ) Yo and ko are often suffixed to verbs in accessory 
 clauses ; thus, umfana o Inngileyo, a good boy ; into e 
 ngi tandileko, a thing which I love. 
 
 REM. As the object of a preposition, the conjunctive pronoun has 
 an accusative character; as entering into the formation of the posses- 
 sive, reflective, and definitive pronouns, it has a. compositive character; 
 as never used by itself, it is inseparable. It is often used in addition to 
 the noun to which it refers; as, kubo abantu, to them the people, which 
 gives it a complemental character. 
 
 161. 1. The conjunctive pronoun is formed from the 
 simple or elementary, in most cases, by a change in one 
 of the letters in the latter, generally the final vowel a, i, or 
 u, into o. This rule holds in all the classes and numbers 
 of the third person, save the singular of the first class. 
 Thus, from the simple ba comes the conjunctive bo ; 
 from li comes lo; from si, so; from a or wa, wo; from 
 i or yi, yo; from zi, zo; &c. 
 
 2. But in the first class, third person, singular, from 
 u (a or e) comes ye, the sharp, direct, positive form u 
 being softened to a or e in most derivative forms and 
 accessory clauses, and yet preserved, and ease of enun- 
 ciation promoted by the use of some euphonic, as k, 
 making ka; or ng, making nga; or y, as in the form 
 before us, making ye. In the first person singular, ng, 
 of the simple ngi, changes to m, making the conjunctive 
 mi; in the plural, s changes to t, making ti (or iti); in 
 the second person singular, u changes to we (a compound 
 of u-e=we). In the plural, both the simple and the 
 conjunctive are the same, m, except where the con- 
 junctive takes, as it does sometimes, the fuller form ini, 
 instead of the simple ni. 
 
 165. D. The DEFINITIVE pronoun, which, as just 
 remarked ( 163., d.), is made up of the conjunctive pro- 
 noun and the sufformative particle na, as mina, tina, 
 bona, &c., is used sometimes for emphasis or to give an 
 accurate and forcible specification of a person or thing. 
 It has also a euphonic and sometimes an idiomatic use. 
 It has sometimes the force of a noun, and may be used
 
 102 POSSESSIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 like nouns in the nominative, genitive, and accusative 
 cases ; and hence may be called the substantival pronoun. 
 
 The rules for the use of this pronoun, with suitable illustrations, 
 belong rather to Syntax; though a few examples may be introduced in 
 this connection ; thus, ngi if azi mina, I know, I (though you and 
 others do not) ; ivena u tini na ? what sayest thou, thou (and not 
 another)? si ya ba tanda bona, we love them, or we do them love, them; 
 yebo tina, yes we (are all of the same opinion); izinkomo zi ka mina, 
 my own cattle. 
 
 166. E. The POSSESSIVE pronouns consist, for the 
 most part, of the conjunctive form, to which is prefixed 
 the genitive particle a, and the fragmentary preformative 
 of the noun possessed or limited ; thus, abantu bami 
 (b-a-mi), the people of me, or my people ; ilizwi labo 
 (l-a-bo), their word ; isibaya sazo (s-a-zo), their fold. 
 
 REM. 1. The possessive forms du and enu, of the first and second 
 person, plural, are irregular, being derived possibly from obsolete 
 forms, as itu, inu, but more probably from iti and ini, whose initial 
 vowel, i, coalesces with the genitive particle a, and makes e, and whose 
 final vowel, i, has been changed to u, for the sake of greater full- 
 ness and ease of utterance, the two changes giving etu and enu. 
 
 REM. 2. The possessive forms ako of the second person, singular, 
 and ake of the third person, singular, first class, are also irregular, 
 being formed possibly from obsolete roots, but more probably from 
 the simple pronoun u, hardened by k, and changed, in the one 
 case to o, and in the other to e, to relieve the sharpness of the vowel u, 
 to make a clear distinction between these two persons, and at the 
 same time secure greater precision, fullness, and variety. (See 
 164., 2.) 
 
 167. F. The REFLECTIVE pronoun is of a compound, 
 relative, personal, accusative character, consisting of the 
 preposition nga, the general indefinite relative oku, and 
 the possessive personal pronoun ami, ako, enu, etu, ake, 
 or abo, &c., according to the number, person, and class, 
 of the noun referred to ; thus, 
 
 Ngokwami (nga-oku-ami) , in respect to me, or myself, or in respect 
 to that which pertains to me; ngokwetu, in respect to us; ngokwake, in 
 respect to him, &c. 
 
 168. The different forms of the preformative, simple, 
 conjunctive, definitive, possessive, and reflective pro- 
 nouns, in their several persons, classes, and numbers, 
 are compendiously given in the following
 
 TABLE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 103 
 
 
 u 
 
 'E 5 
 
 c r oo c g 
 
 
 '^, S 
 
 
 y. S 
 
 o o 
 
 = c 
 
 C C 
 
 
 H 
 
 CS ~ 
 
 > > 
 
 ci o cs cS cS cS 
 
 rt es 
 
 cS cS 
 
 es cs 
 
 cs cs 
 
 es "rt 
 
 
 H 
 
 * ** 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ Js ^ 
 
 -tfi Jd 
 
 C ^ 
 
 
 -^ JS 
 
 Z* ^ '~ 
 
 
 i-3 
 
 "S 
 feB SB 
 
 CO O O CO 
 SB tC fcfi tB bB SB 
 
 C O 
 SB fcB 
 
 C 
 SB tfi 
 
 c 
 SB sr 
 
 c o 
 
 SB SB 
 
 ~0 c~> 
 BO QO 
 
 
 5 
 
 S C 
 
 a a a a a a 
 
 a a 
 
 a a 
 
 a a 
 
 
 a a 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - W 
 
 '= 
 
 O 3 CD O -. O 
 
 
 >> N 
 
 o o 
 
 K N 
 
 _o 3 
 
 
 c r ? 
 
 
 y. ^ 
 
 jg o 
 
 cs cs a "3 cs 
 
 CS CS 
 
 CS CS 
 
 ~3 a 
 
 
 ^2 ^ ^^ 
 
 
 y. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 S w 
 
 'I > 
 
 W H 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 1'C 
 
 || ij |i 
 
 es cS 
 
 a c 
 
 
 >-> N 
 
 5 e 
 
 O) N 
 
 cO 
 
 11 
 
 ll 
 
 j cs 55 
 a a 
 ' ^ 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o . 
 
 . 
 
 ^c G a *^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s a 
 
 - 
 
 o'Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 eo 
 
 -S X 
 
 *^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 g 
 
 25 H 
 O 
 
 'S-r 
 
 |.- o j o 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 M N 
 
 _o g 
 
 1 >. 
 
 O O <5J 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 c E" 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,J 
 
 <n 
 
 - 
 
 
 3~ >" 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 w 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 ^ 1 " 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o^F 
 
 OH 
 
 >J < 
 - O 
 
 
 OJ ^ 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 >-> 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 3 ^^2 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 * 
 
 c"^ 
 
 t; 
 
 ( 
 
 .ijj CS . O 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 ^ *SL 
 
 c^ 
 
 2 
 
 ji ^ 
 
 a '35 
 
 -.- - cs" 
 
 .-'N 
 
 '33 N 
 
 2'3 
 
 S"T 
 
 33^ 
 J2 M *> 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 OS H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 > 
 b. 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 & 
 
 **" TH 
 
 
 a f- 
 
 M X 
 
 I? C ? j-^r ^ "w 
 
 X N 
 
 50 N 
 
 X N 
 
 ? ^S 
 
 ^ *^* s^ 
 
 
 cS ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 u 
 
 CS 
 
 rt cS cS 
 
 CS 
 
 5J 
 
 cS 
 
 c? 
 
 ~ ^ 
 
 
 D 
 
 SB i- 
 
 a ,s 
 
 3 cS 3 CS 3 es 
 SB ^" fcB ^ SB ^ 
 
 .&5 .a ^ _g .3 
 
 3 cS 
 
 3 a 
 
 SB - 
 
 Is 
 
 3 cs 
 
 a| 
 
 a a 
 a cs 
 
 
 z. 
 
 '33 o- 
 
 '3; C- 'D: C. '35 O- 
 
 30 
 
 93 
 
 
 M 
 
 00 W 
 
 
 
 ^zp. 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 _; 3 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri 
 
 " H 
 
 _a 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 %l!' 
 
 a"" 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 H 
 i 
 
 Q g^ ^ ._ jg 
 
 o C -1 a 
 
 ^ N^ ? C3 -H Co 
 
 .8 
 
 .!a 
 
 "35 N 
 
 fia 
 
 ll 
 
 3" 3 
 
 _i 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 W ^ ^ ^ - 
 
 \^-v^/ 
 
 \^-v^ 
 
 \^~v-^< 
 
 >^^-^/ 
 
 
 SSV1D
 
 104 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 169. Sometimes two different kinds or forms of per- 
 sonal pronouns are compounded : 
 
 a. For the greater emphasis ; thus, uwena, thou 
 thyself; uyena, he himself; itina, we ourselves ; tntna, 
 ye yourselves. 
 
 b. They may be used together, but not united, as 
 subject and predicate; thus, u yena, he is he, or it is he, 
 or he is the one ; i tina, it is we ; u wena, it is thou ; 
 so, ku nguye, it is he ; ku nguwe; i nguye; ku yiyo. 
 
 c. But a more common compound is that of the 
 simple with the conjunctive form to express the efficient 
 agent after passive verbs, sometimes with, and some- 
 times without, a euphonic; thus, 
 
 Ku biziwe iyo inkosi, it is demanded by him the chief; kwenziwe 
 ngimi, or uye or nguye, it was done by me, or by him. The definitive 
 form is sometimes used in this way ; thus, kwenziioe mina, imina, or 
 umina, yena, or uyena, or nguyena ; it was done by myself, or by him- 
 self, &LC. 
 
 d. The simple and conjunctive forms of the pronouns 
 are sometimes used after the negative formula a sri, (ne- 
 gative ft, pronoun i, with euphonic s to prevent hiatus, 
 
 35., 5.) ; thus, 
 
 A si ngimi, it is not I ; a si nguye, it is not he; a si yiyo, it is not 
 it. Or the conjunctive form may be used without the simple; as, 
 a si mi; a si ye; a si yo. 
 
 SECT. 3. B. Relative Pronouns. 
 
 170. The relative pronoun, for nouns of the third 
 person, consists of the relative particle a combined 
 with the initial vowel of the nominal incipient, together 
 with the personal pronoun, (generally the simple, but 
 sometimes the conjunctive or the definitive,) of the noun 
 referred to ; thus, 
 
 The ordinary relative for the first class, singular, is o (a-u) ; plural, 
 aba (a-a-ba): second class, singular, eli (a-i-li); plural, a (o-a): for 
 the third class, singular, e (a-i); plural, ezi (a-t-zi): fourth class, 
 singular, esi (o-i-si) ; plural, ezi, 8tc. So for the fifth class, singular, 
 olu, plural ezi; sixth class, singular, o, plural e; seventh class, obu; 
 eighth class, oku.
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 105 
 
 s 171. 1. The relative pronouns used for the first and 
 second persons are sometimes the same as those used 
 for the third person first class 
 
 (-) being used for the first and second persons singular ; thus, 
 ku n^imi u litnda, it is I who love; ku nguwe o tanda, it is thou who 
 lovest ; and aba (a-a-ba) being used for the plural ; thus, tina, or tin' 
 aba tanda, we who love ; nine, or ran' aba tanda, ye who love. 
 
 2. But the form of the relative pronoun often used for 
 these first and second persons, consists of the personal 
 pronouns, together with the relative o (a-u) for the first 
 and second person singular; and e (ci-i) for the first and 
 second person plural; thus, 
 
 Minaongi landa, \ who love ; u-ena o tanda, thou who Invest ; tina, 
 or tin' esi tanda; nina. or ?nV eni tanda. 
 
 1. When the relative pronoun is nominative, 
 the relative and the personal parts are generally joined 
 in one word, as in the two foregoing paragraphs. 
 
 2. But where the relative is the accusative the object 
 of a verb the personal part is separated from the re- 
 lative the relative being put before the direct nominative 
 of the verb, or made to coalesce with it; and the per- 
 sonal part being put, if of the simple form, immediately 
 before the principal verb, but if of the definitive form, 
 immediately after the verb ; thus, 
 
 Umuntu o ngi in biza; the person whom I call literally, whom I 
 him call ; umunlu o ngi biza ycna, the person whom I call him; umuntu 
 o ngi ya ku m biza, the person whom I shall him call ; umuntu o ngi ya 
 ku biza yena, the person whom I shall call him ; abantu o ba biza, 
 (o=o(-a)-?f,)--the people whom thou them callest; abantu o ya ku ba 
 biza, or o ya ku biza bona, the people whom thou wilt them call, or 
 v/hom thou wilt call them ; ilizwe e ba It tanda abantu, the country 
 which they it love the people, i.e., the country which the people love ; 
 ilizu-e e ba tanda lona, the country which (hey love it. 
 
 3. When the relative is the object of a preposition, 
 the personal part is of the conjunctive, or sometimes of 
 the definitive form, and put, in both instances, after the 
 principal verb ; thus, 
 
 Umuntu o ngizwile kuye, or ku yena, the person from whom 1 havr 
 heard, or as to whom I have heard from him : igawn r .*/' !>>:it<r ngalo 
 >r nga fana, the name o-= t which we are called by it. 
 
 R
 
 106 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 173. 1. Sometimes either the relative or the personal 
 portion of the pronoun is omitted, in which case the? 
 verh often terminates in the pronominal euphonic suffix 
 yo or ko, (see 163., e.); thus, 
 
 1,'tiinntu bam tandayo, the person whom they love ; abantusi ha boni- 
 Ifijo, the people whom we have seen ; le 'nlo e ni letilcyo, that thing 
 which ye have hrought. 
 
 2. Sometimes when the relative and its clause is of a 
 very parenthetic incidental character, the more usual 
 direct or positive form of the relative part of the pro- 
 noun, as a and o, are changed to e, the verb taking the 
 suffix yo or ko; and sometimes this oblique from e, (in- 
 stead of a or o,) with the above suffix yo or feo, is ap- 
 parently used merely for the greater euphony and variety; 
 thus, amahasi e (for a) ngi wa sulileyo; uku'Ya e (for o) 
 si nga ku pekanga ; abafana e si ba fundisayo ; yena e 
 (or 0) si m bonileyo. 
 
 174. 1. The relative pronoun of the possessive 
 character is placed occasionally before the noun limited 
 or possessed, the initial vowel of the noun being elided; 
 thus, 
 
 Jlbaniu aba 'nkosi, the people whose chief ; inkosi e 'bantu, the chief 
 whose people ; izinkomo ezi 'lizwe, the cattle whose country. Some- 
 times the greater part of the nominal incipient is elided ; thus, umu- 
 ntu o 'wfrowjo, the person whose cattle (plural). 
 
 2. Sometimes the personal pronoun, possessive, re- 
 ferring to the noun possessed or limited, is also used in 
 addition to the relative ; thus, 
 
 Umunfuo 'nkomo zake, the person whose cattle of him; ilizive ell 
 'bantu balo, the country whose people of it ; ilanga eli 'kukanya kwalo, 
 the sun whose light of it. 
 
 3. The relative pronoun is very often omitted in ex- 
 amples like the foregoing, and the personal only used ; 
 thus, 
 
 , inkosi yabo, the people whose king, literally, the people the 
 king of them ; umuntu izinkomo zake, the person the cattle of him, i.e., 
 whose cattle; umuntu ibizo lake, the person his name, i.e., whose name. 
 
 175. The different forms of the relative pronouns for 
 the different persons, numbers, and classes ; and the dif-
 
 TABLE OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 107 
 
 icrent varieties of form, as nominative and accusative ; 
 with the simple, definitive, or conjunctive of the personal 
 pronouns ; and the possessive with nouns, may all be 
 exhibited, in a compendious manner, in the following 
 
 a o 
 
 O 
 
 rt 
 
 7 c 
 
 
 o *Q 
 
 _G _ 
 
 rt 
 
 i ?|| 
 
 !/3 . rT* 
 
 O fcif) c3 
 
 .- 1 1 
 
 i- 21 rt-- =| g'l o| rt g 
 
 B *2 c rt ^- 55 3 3 a 5 3 n! 
 
 oS rt^<! gc rtrt c=_g&,o-* 
 
 >< > _5-"^K_OJ3 S C ~ ~ > fH 
 
 ^c rt " B $. ~_^ ;_. ^> s 3 .ts 
 
 fa C "c/3 rO 
 
 ^ 'S -0 
 
 -5 N w N j: 
 
 i N J2 -IsJ ^ 
 
 O O rt 
 
 o o rt 
 
 ort ort oo ajaj Ott> oc> o o 
 
 'IVJ 
 
 > "" 
 
 <uo P oo oo O o 9o c o ^.2 
 
 >->j3 --S!> >~>N O!Nr-HN P>~,^:!^ rt_*J 
 
 k " - 
 
 
 
 ' ^^3g 
 
 Q * 
 
 
 
 ^ c- 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 rt rt 
 
 C rt fi 
 
 S.S o 
 
 C *- Xi 
 H jj - " 
 
 a g fl 
 
 W.S 
 
 rtrt rt g rtrt aj rt rt rt rt rt ^ ^ "g 
 SgllSggglgoggg^" 
 
 f^J2 JS ^ >,N MS^S ^^^D^i cSO) 
 
 > " " 
 
 
 
 if 
 
 S ''"? JS 
 
 3 .-, rt 
 
 ^ C J2 
 
 rt ^ g _ 
 
 . ._ 3 ._< 3 3 *2 > 
 
 C^2? >^t^3 WN 
 
 
 3 U v^-v*^ 
 
 -^ ^^ 
 
 
 ^-C^ 
 
 Ci < . 
 
 
 
 <^J 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 I 1 1 1 1 i 1 I 
 
 1 I 1 1 1 
 
 BI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o s 
 
 4) 
 
 O 
 
 3) flj QJ { 
 
 ^ a) o ffi ;3 o 
 
 "e ^ 
 
 k 
 
 fc fc k *. ^5>.2^ 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 O O O O O O O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 *^ o 
 
 o 
 
 
 <- 
 
 <*^ o rt 
 
 o rt 
 
 Ort >rt OJ4J 4)O) OO) OOJ O O <UL 
 
 -2 W 
 
 
 
 ''S **" 
 
 *0 > bD 
 
 
 
 
 e r s . 
 
 
 
 
 fc 5 5 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 S O o rt 
 
 .-, rt 
 
 B X! 
 
 O o> rt 
 
 rt . ._._,._-._ 33 
 ^ .. NOJN^N ^2^*! 
 
 Ort o es oaj o v ow O43 o o 
 
 s-, 
 
 h 
 
 1- ~[ Z-i t* I 
 
 ' -' . 
 
 PS rt 
 
 rt 
 
 rt ^rt rt 
 
 S 3 rt 
 
 i^ tf) *-< 
 <*< C 3 
 !3 - -" 
 
 3 rt 
 fcC > 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 3rt 3rt Scg sctj 3eS 3rt'S'c 
 bD >H ojj M fen ^i bn i. fcn fn bf) ^ 
 
 .g 5 .S-H .g^ s g^ B^S rt . * 
 
 
 cc Cu 
 
 "tC OH CD O- *K Cw 'S P 'S O- 'w "CU 02 W 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 - 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 i-H 
 
 09 
 
 OB 
 
 
 
 tf 
 H 
 P- 
 
 i 
 
 h 
 
 *" B" a 
 
 H 3 'S 
 
 S 3 
 
 <-> V e* '" "j "7 iJ 
 .^ -.ft- R - 3 N., 
 
 oa 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 o 
 
 s 11 '!-! = -- =-- 1-s 1 ^ 
 
 2 3 rt S rt .S .2 .2 .2 "3 .2 3 . 3 3 
 
 
 in 
 
 VJ*^-V> S-^^-*^ V^-v-W V^-W V. 
 
 -v~W ^^-^ 
 
 'Si?V13 r-. ft* RO T* 
 
 UJ CO t" 00 
 
 'NOSTI34
 
 108 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 . The dash ( ), between the accusative forms of the relative, 
 represents the place of the personal pronoun nominative, and of tilt- 
 auxiliary to the verb; thus, ngiyafa tnina o BA ngi bulalo, I am dying 
 I whom they me kill; where ba takes the place of the blank in the 
 table, between o and ngi, first person singular. So again, lo 'inunlu c si 
 YA KU m biza godnkile, that person whom we shall call has gone 
 home; where si ya ku take the place of the blank in the table, 
 between e. and m. third person, first class, singular. 
 
 SECT. 4. C. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 176. The demonstrative pronoun, like the personal 
 and relative, varies in form according to the person, 
 class, and number of the noun to which it relates. 
 
 1. The simple form of the demonstrative, and that 
 which relates to the nearest person or thing, is com- 
 posed of the relative, and of the preformative /; thus, 
 
 Lo umfana, or lo 'mfana, this boy ; laba abantu, or laba 'bantu, these 
 people ; le inkomo, or h 'nkomo, this cow ; leli lizive, this country. 
 
 2. The dissyllabic relative sometimes neglects to take 
 the preformative I, in its use as a demonstrative ; thus, 
 
 Eli izwe, this country ; o/w '/irfi, this rod ; m 'sifo, this sickness. 
 
 177. The demonstrative pointing to the person or 
 thing more distant is formed from the simple demon- 
 strative, which points to the nearer person or thing, by 
 changing the final vowel, a, i, or u, of the latter, into o, 
 in all dissyllabic forms ; thus, lelo, that ; labo, those ; eso 
 or /eso, that ; oko or loko, that ; &c. But to monosyllabic 
 forms, there is an addition of a syllable; as, wa or wo, 
 to lo, making Iowa or lowo, that, for the first and sixth 
 classes singular ; and to la, making lawa or lawo, for the 
 second class plural ; and yo to le, making leyo, for the 
 third class singular ; thus, 
 
 Lowa or lowo 'muntu, that person ; lawa or lawo 'mazwe, those 
 countries ; leyo 'nkomo, that cow. 
 
 178. When the demonstrative pronoun refers to a 
 person or thing very far or most distant, it suffixes the 
 syllable ya, generally to the simple form which refers to 
 the nearer person or thing, but sometimes to the other
 
 TABLE OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 form which signifies the more remote ; and this suffix ya 
 takes the accent, the strength and prolongation of which 
 are made to correspond to the greatness of the distance; 
 thus, 
 
 Loicaya umuntu, that person yonder, or away in the distance ; leliya 
 izwe, that distant country ; labaya abantu, those people yonder. 
 
 REM. 1. The initial vowel of the noun is not often elided with this 
 kind of demonstrative. 
 
 REM. 2. The /, characteristic of the demonstrative pronoun, is al- 
 ways used when that pronoun and its noun are put in the genitive to 
 limit another noun, except in some cases when the demonstrative follows 
 the noun which it qualifies. The use of /, the full form of the de- 
 monstrative after the genitive particle a, prevents a hiatus, and gives 
 force and prominence to that particle and its accompanying fragmen- 
 tary preformative ; thus, inkomo ya lo 'muntu, the cow of this man ; 
 isizwe sa leyo 'nkosi, the tribe of that chief ; imizi ya leliya ilizwe, the 
 kraals or villages of that distant country. 
 
 RE3i. 3. The demonstratives lo, la, le, this, are sometimes made 
 more conspicuous and emphatic by suffixing na, making lona, lana, lena; 
 as, lona 'HIMH/M, this very person, or this person here; inkomo lena, this 
 same cow, or this cow here. 
 
 179. The principal forms of the demonstrative pro- 
 nouns, according to the class and number of the nouns 
 to which they belong, and according as they refer to the 
 nearer, more distant, or most distant person or thing, 
 are presented in the following 
 
 Table of Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 THIS. THAT. THAT YONDER. 
 
 lo, lona Iowa or lowo loya or lowaya 
 
 leli lelo leliya 
 
 le, lena leyo leya 
 
 lesi leso lesiya 
 
 lolu lolo loluya 
 
 lo, lona Iowa or lowo lowaya 
 
 lobu lobo lobuya 
 
 loku loko lokuya 
 
 CLASS. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 6 
 7 
 8 
 
 IXCIPIENTS. 
 
 umu, um, or u 
 ili or i 
 im or in 
 isi 
 ulu or u 
 umu or um, &.< 
 ubu or u 
 uku 
 
 1 aba or o 
 
 2 ama 
 
 3, 4 ( izim, izin, 
 and 5 ( izi, &.c. 
 6 imi 
 
 THESE. THOSE. THOSE YONDER. 
 
 laba labo labaya 
 
 la, lana lawa or lawo lawaya 
 
 lezi lezo 
 
 le, lena leyo 
 
 leziya 
 leva
 
 110 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 SECT. 5. D. Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 h ISO. 1. There is, radically and strictly, but one in- 
 terrogative pronoun, namely, ni, what? But this one 
 radical enters, as a constituent, into several different in- 
 terrogatives of a pronominal character ; as, ubani, ini, 
 ngakanani ; and into many others of an adverbial 
 character ; as, yini, ndzani, kangakanani. 
 
 2. There is, however, another interrogative, pi, where? 
 whence? whither? which, though properly an adverb, is 
 often used in a pronominal sense ; as, upi, or mupi, 
 who? ipi, lipi, kupi, &c., which? 
 
 REM. The interrogative ni, as well as pi, is always properly fol- 
 lowed, either directly or indirectly, by the complemental interrogative 
 particle na ; thus, igama Hni na 1 what name ? ubani na ! who ? kupi 
 na 1 where is it ? ku yipi inkomo na ! 
 
 181. 1. The interrogative ni always unites with the 
 verb, preposition, or other word by which it is preceded, 
 since it has an influence on these words to carry the 
 accent forward, in words of more than one syllable, 
 from the penultimate to the ultimate ( 51., 2., and 58., 
 5., a.} ; thus, 
 
 Bafunani na! they want what ? unani na! you are with what? i.e., 
 what is the matter with you? si hambelani na! we go for what? ba lima 
 ngani na! they dig with what? 
 
 2. The interrogative pronoun ni, when it relates to 
 nouns, takes a prefix, like adjectives, corresponding to 
 the class and number of the noun to which it relates, the 
 prefix also varying slightly, as in adjectives, according as 
 the pronoun, ni, is used as an attributive, or as a direct 
 predicate ; thus, 
 
 Nifuna umuti mnuni na ! what medicine do you want ? umuli muni 
 na! what medicine is it ? Wa bona isilwane esini na! What (kind of 
 an) animal did you see? Isilwane sinina! What (kind of an) animal 
 is it ? 
 
 ^ 3. Used in a general impersonal sense, without refer- 
 ence to any particular noun, the usual form of this in- 
 terrogative is ini na? what is it? the prefix being that of 
 the third class singular, as of into, a thing. A more full 
 and emphatic form of the question, of the same import,
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Ill 
 
 is ku yini na? it is what? the general pronoun ku, of 
 the eighth class, constituting the subject, and ni with the 
 prefix i, as before, constituting the predicate, before which 
 is used the euphonic copula y. 
 
 4. Sometimes this pronoun ni is used, without any 
 prefix, in direct connection with the noun referred to ; in 
 which case the accent of the noun is carried forward 
 from its usual place, the penult, to the final syllable ; 
 thus, 
 
 Intoni no? or ku yintoni na? or intoni lokunal what thing (is it)? or 
 it is what thing ? or what thing is this ? 
 
 182. 1. The interrogative pronoun ubani? or ubani 
 na? who? is composed of the incipient u, of the first class 
 of nouns ; the substantive verb ba (of uku ba, to be); and 
 the radical interrogative ni 1 literally, he is what? i.e., 
 who is it? 
 
 2. In its forms and inflections, ubani follows the laws 
 of nouns of the first class. 
 
 (a.) Ubani makes its plural in o, like udade, ubaba, 
 &c.; thus, ubani, plural obani; as, obani na? who are 
 they ? or ba ngobani na ? they are who ? 
 
 (6.) The personal pronouns corresponding to, or standing for ubani, 
 are the same as those which stand for other nouns of the first class, 
 singular and plural; as, u, in, ye, yena; ba, bo, bona. 
 
 (c.) In forming the genitive, ubani follows the laws of proper per- 
 sonal nouns, eliding the initial vowel, and being preceded by the geni- 
 tive particle a hardened by k; thus, wnfana ka bani no? whose boy ? 
 ku yinkomo iji ka 'bani na ? it is the cow of whom? or whose cow is it? 
 
 183. The interrogative pi is primarily an adverb of 
 place, signifying, where ? But it is often used with 
 nouns, taking a prefix, like adjectives, corresponding 
 to the class and number of the noun to which it refers, 
 in which case it sometimes has the force of an interro- 
 gative pronoun, equivalent to who ? which ? thus, 
 
 Inkomo yake ipi no? his cow where or which is it? abantu bapi no? 
 where or who are the people. (See 148., 4.) 
 
 REM. This interrogative often takes the preposition nga before it, 
 for force or euphony; as, abantu ba ngapi na? (See Adverbs, 
 319., Rein. 1.)
 
 111? VERBS. 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 VERBS. 
 
 184. 1. A verb is a word which designates a state 
 either of action or of being; as, si bona, we see; ba 
 hamba, they walk; ngi 'lezi, I sit, exist. 
 
 2. A verb expresses not only an assertion or an affir- 
 mation, as in the above examples ; but it may be used 
 also to command; as, tula, be silent ; suka, depart : or 
 be used to inquire ; as, ni bona na ? do you see ? and 
 also to express an action, or state, in a general, abstract 
 sense ; as, uku pila, to live ; uku tanda, to love. 
 
 185. The root of the verb is that which has no in- 
 flection, nor connection with person; and from which 
 the infinitive is formed by the use of uku (=to, in 
 English); as, 
 
 Tanda, azi, ya, &.c. ; from which, by the use of uku, we have uku 
 tanda, to love; ukwazi, to know; uku ya, to go. From this abstract 
 form, all others, in both regular and irregular verbs, are most 
 readily derived. 
 
 REM. 1. (a.) In the case of all regular verbs, this root or ground 
 form constitutes the ordinary imperative in addressing the second 
 person singular; as, tanda, love, or love thou; bona, see, or see thou. 
 
 (6.) But in all irregular (monosyllabic and vowel) verbs, the im- 
 perative differs from this simple root or stem form of the verb, since 
 in these verbs the ordinary imperative always takes a euphonic pre- 
 formative in mon6syllabic verbs, yi; as, yiya, (from ya,) go, or go 
 thou; yika, (from ka,) gather, or gather thou; yiba, (from ba,) be, or 
 be thou; and in vowel verbs y; as, yazi, (from azi,) know thou; 
 yenza, (from enza,) do thou. 
 
 REM. 2. Aside from the above remark, there is another want of 
 similarity and uniformity in the second person singular, imperative, of 
 verbs, which presents also an objection to its being taken as the 
 simplest root or basis of other forms. In regular verbs there are two 
 forms which have an imperative force; as, hamba, go thou; or wo 
 hamba, thou shalt go; and in irregular verbs there are three such 
 forms; thus, from za, we have yiza, wo za, and zana, come thou. 
 
 REM. 3. In view, then, of the numerous limitations and exceptions 
 required in regarding the imperative as the root or ground form, it is 
 thought to be more simple and easy to take the infinitive, as above 
 stated, without its characteristic nkn, as the starting point, from which 
 t derive all other forms.
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS. 113 
 
 SECT. 1. Classification of Verbs. 
 
 A. REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, PRIMITIVE, DERIVA- 
 TIVE, AND COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 186. Verbs may be divided into the two classes 
 called Regular and Irregular, according as they are in- 
 flected with unvarying uniformity, or not, throughout all 
 their modes and tenses, affirmative and negative forms. 
 
 (a.) The characteristics of a regular verb are, that 
 its root begins with a consonant, consists of two or more 
 syllables, and ends in the vowel a; as, tanda, sebenza, 
 bingelela. 
 
 (b.) Verbs whose roots begin with a vowel, or con- 
 sist of only one syllable, or terminate in some other 
 vowel than a, are irregular, deviating, in several 
 respects, from regular verbs, in the formation of their 
 modes and tenses, their negative forms, &c. (See Ir- 
 regular Verbs, Sect. 6., 311316.) 
 
 REM. The number of irregular verbs is not large. 
 The most common are the following: (a.) Vowel verbs 
 aka, a/a, azi, eba, ela, enza, oma, and osa. (b.) 
 Monosyllabic verbs, (some of which also, like the vowel 
 verb azi, end in some vowel besides a,) ba, fa, Ta, 
 ka, ma, na, pa, sa, tso, ti, ya, za. 
 
 187. Verbs may be divided again into the three 
 classes called Primitive, Derivative, and Compound. 
 
 I. Primitive verbs are those which have their origin 
 in no other word; and signify some simple state of 
 action or being, without any modification or accessory 
 idea ; as, bona, see ; tanda, love. 
 
 188. II. Derivative verbs are those which are formed 
 from other words, either nouns, adjectives, or other 
 verbs, by effecting in them some modification of form 
 and meaning. 
 
 YaJ Verbs derived from nouns or adjectives are called 
 denominatives. This class of verbs is very rare in Zulu. 
 As specimens we have the following perhaps, uku kula,
 
 114 RADICAL AND RELATIVE SPECIES". 
 
 to become large, from kulu, large; uku sonda, to 
 worship, from Sunday (Sabbath) ; uku /oso/, to spade, 
 from ifosola, a spade, shovel; perhaps, ukugedza, to dig, 
 pick, from igedza, a pick. 
 
 (b.) A few verbs are Zuluized from other languages ; 
 as, ukufoloma, from form (to form or mould bricks) ; 
 uku bapatiza, from baptize ; uku spela, from spell ; 
 uku kuka, from cook; uku wasa, from wash. 
 
 REM. Both of these classes of verbs, denominatives, and those 
 Zuluized from other languages, though derivatives in point of origin, 
 are, like the primitives, of a simple or radical character in point of 
 signification. 
 
 (c.) But verbal derivatives, or verbs derived from other 
 verbs by means of certain specific modifications in the 
 form and meaning of the primitive, are by far the most 
 common in Zulu, and require special attention. These 
 different forms, species, or modifications of a verb, by 
 which its simple, original meaning, has a causative, 
 relative, reflective, reciprocal, or some other significa- 
 tion superadded, are obtained with great regularity by 
 changing, adding, or inserting a letter or syllable in the 
 primitive or stem form, much like what we find in the 
 conjugations of the Hebrew verb. 
 
 189. A. The Radical species of the verb is the 
 simple primitive, which is generally expressed by the 
 fewest letters, and whose signification, as before remarked, 
 is the simple ide,a of the verb without any accessory or 
 contingent modification ; as, 
 
 Tanda, love; hamba, walk; kuluma, speak. 
 
 REM. Verbs of this species, as of all others, generally end in a; 
 as, uku ba, to be; uku ya, to go; uku tanda, to love. But to this rule 
 there are a few exceptions; as, ukwazi, to know; uku li, to say. (See 
 186., Rem.) 
 
 190. B. 1. The Relative species or modification of 
 the verb is formed from the radical by changing the fin^al 
 vowel into ela, except uku tso, which makes uku tsolo; 
 thus, tanda, tandela; bona, bonela; sebenza, sebenzela. 
 
 2. The signification of this species has the force of
 
 CAUSATIVE SPECIES. 115 
 
 for, to, in relation to, in behalf qj \ against, about, super- 
 added to the simple idea of the radical species ; as, 
 
 TandeJa, love for; bonela, see for; hambela, walk about; vukela, 
 rise up against. 
 
 REM. This species of the verb has considerable latitude and variety 
 of meaning, and supplies the place of several prepositions. It is often 
 used with other verbs in the infinitive, with nouns in the locative, 
 with adverbs of place; sometimes to give the verb greater force, and 
 sometimes with no apparent reason. 
 
 191. C.l. The Causative species is formed from 
 the radical in various ways : 
 
 (a.) Chiefly by changing the final vowel into isa; as, 
 
 Tanda, love; tandisa, cause to love; bona, see; bonisa, cause to see. 
 
 (b.) When final a is preceded by k in the radical, the 
 causative is often, not always, formed by changing k 
 into s; as, 
 
 Vuka, vusa ; suka, susa ; muka, musa, more frequently mukisa; 
 goduka, godusa, or godukisa. 
 
 (c.) Sometimes kor I before final a is changed into 
 z, to form the causative ; as, 
 
 Boboka, boboza; katala, kataza ; kumbula, knmbuza; limala, limaza; 
 palala, palaza; punuila, pumuza; sondela, sondeza; vela, veza; wela, 
 weza, or welisa. 
 
 (d.) Some verbs change k before final a into /, to 
 form the causative ; thus, 
 
 Apuka, apula ; dabuka, dabula ; penduka, pendula. 
 
 2. (a.) The most common signification of this species, 
 as the name implies, has a causative force superadded 
 to the simple idea of the radical. Hence, by changing 
 the radical to the causative form, the neuter or intransi- 
 tive verb becomes transitive ; and the transitive often 
 takes two accusatives instead of one ; thus, 
 
 Vuka, rise, vusa, raise; bona into, see a thing, si bonise into, show us 
 a thing ; funda amagama, learn letters ; si fundise amagama, teach 
 us letters. 
 
 (b.) This modification of the verb often implies in-
 
 RECIPROCAL, REFLECTIVE, SUBJECTIVE. 
 
 tensity, and sometimes aid, or co-operation, in some 
 action or state ; and occasionally imitation, rather than 
 causation ; as, 
 
 Bambisa, hold tight ; sebenzisa, help work ; lalisa, sleep with ; 
 hmnbisa kwabelungu, walk like white people. 
 
 REM. This species corresponds to the Hiphil conjugation in 
 Hebrew, and in some measure to Greek verbs in izo, azo, 
 
 192. D. 1. The Reciprocal species is formed from 
 the radical by changing the final vowel into ana, except 
 tso, which makes tsono; as, tanda, tandana; bona, 
 banana. 
 
 2. This modification of the verb properly denotes, as 
 its name implies, a mutual exchange, equality, difference, 
 likeness, or co-operation, between two or more persons 
 or things, as to the state of action or being expressed in 
 the radical form of the verb ; as, 
 
 Tandana, love one another ; bonana, see one another ; pambana, 
 meet one another, cross, contradict ; ukivazana, to know one another, 
 be intimate. 
 
 193. E. 1. The Reflective species is formed from 
 the radical by prefixing the particle zi to its root ; thus, 
 
 Zitanda, zibona. But in the case of vowel verbs, z only is prefixed 
 to the root, to form the reflective species ; thus, zazi, from azi; zenza, 
 from enza; zosa, from osa. 
 
 2. In this modification of the verb, subject and object 
 are identical, the action being represented as performed 
 by the subject upon himself; thus, 
 
 Uku sitanda, to love one's self; uku zazi, to know one's self; uku 
 zosa, to roast one's self. 
 
 REM. This species corresponds to the Hithpael conjugation in 
 Hebrew. 
 
 194. F. 1. The Subjective species is formed from 
 the radical by changing the final vowel into eka; as, 
 tandeka, from tanda; 'lupeka, from lupa. 
 
 2. This modification of the verb represents a passive 
 subjection, either real, deserved, or possible, to the state 
 of action or being expressed by the radical ; as,
 
 DEPONENT SPECIES. 117 
 
 Tandcka, be lovely: saheku, be tearful, frightful; zondcka. be hateful; 
 sweleka, be needed, wanting. 
 
 REM. Verbs of this species resemble Greek adjectives in tos or 
 ttos; the Latin participle in mlus, and adjective in bills; and, in some 
 measure, verbs of the Niphal conjugation in Hebrew. 
 
 195. G. 1. Another species, which mny be called 
 the Deponent, is formed from the radical by suffixing the 
 adjunct kala, lo the root; thus, 'bonakala,' from 'bona;' 
 4 fi'lakala,' from 'fi'la.' Trisyllabic verbs generally drop 
 the final syllable and suffix kala to the second syllable 
 of the root ; thus, 'mnkala,' from ' mnula.' 
 
 2. This modification, which applies only to verbs of 
 an active transitive character, lays aside that transitive 
 quality which the verb has in its radical form, and gives 
 the deponent species a subjective, neuter, or passive 
 force, much like the subjective species. It denotes that 
 the person, or thing, spoken of, is in the state or conditfon 
 described by the passive voice of the radical form ; but 
 involves no reference to any agency by which the person 
 or thing was put in such state or condition ; thus, 
 
 Bonakala, appear, come in sight, be seen, from bona. see; uku'ona- 
 kala, to be depraved, sinful, from ukwona, to abuse, sin against; ttku 
 zwakalu, be heard, felt, or sensible, from uku ziva, to hear, feel. 
 
 196. H. 1. Jl Diminutive species is formed by redu- 
 plicating the radical verb; thus, 'funafuna,' a redupli- 
 cation of ' funa ;' 'zamazama,' from 'zama;' ' uega- 
 nega,' from ' nega.' In reduplicating trisyllabic radicals, 
 the final syllable of the root is omitted in the first part 
 of the compound ; thus, ' bovubovula,' from 'bovula;' 
 'fonyofonyoza,' from 'fonyoza.' 
 
 2. This modification of the verb generally denotes, 
 as the name implies, a diminution of the idea expressed 
 by the simple radical a feeble action and hence, often, 
 a continuous repetition, which gives the reduplicated form 
 a frequentative character ; as, 
 
 Funafuna, seek a little, seek in a feeble, trifling manner, and hence 
 to continue, or repeat the search, seek again and again ; zamazama, 
 shake repeatedly, move to and fro ; hambahamba, walk about in a 
 slow and feeble manner, go on continually.
 
 118 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 197. Compound species may be produced by com 
 bining two or more of the above modifications in one 
 and the same word : 
 
 1. The relative and reflective may be combined; as in, 
 ' zikalela,' cry for one's self, from * kala,' cry ; * ziten- 
 gela,' buy for one's self, from * tenga,' buy. 
 
 2. The causative and. reflective may be combined ; as 
 in, ' zitandisa,' cause one's self to love ; 'zisindisa,' 
 save one's self. 
 
 3. The reciprocal and causative ; as, ' linganisa,' 
 make reciprocally equal, measure, compare, from 'linga;' 
 * tandanisa,' cause to love one another. 
 
 4. The subjective and relative; as, "lupekela,' suffer 
 for ; * dingekela,' be needed for ; ' bambekela,' be ap- 
 prehended, or apprehensible for. 
 
 5. The deponent and causative ; as, ' bonakalisa,' 
 cause to appear. 
 
 6. The reflective, deponent, and causative; as, 'zi 
 bonakalisa,' cause one's self to appear, or be seen. 
 
 7. The reflective, relative, and reciprocal ; as, ' zivu- 
 melana,' agree together for themselves. 
 
 8. The reciprocal, causative, and reflective; as, 'zili- 
 nganisela,' cause themselves to be reciprocally equal. 
 
 REM. Other compound species may be formed in a similar manner; 
 but the above examples afford sufficient illustration. 
 
 198. Another class of compound species may be 
 formed also by reduplicating some of the simple modi- 
 fications. Compounds of this kind, especially the re- 
 duplicated causative species, are often intensive in their 
 signification ; as, 
 
 Funisisa, seek diligently; tandisisa, love ardently; bambelela, hold on 
 to, catch and cling to; bonelela, look to for an example, conform to, 
 imitate. 
 
 199. GENERAL REMARKS UPON THE SPECIES. 
 1. Though, in theory, and so far as mere form is con- 
 cerned, any two species may be combined, yet in point of 
 signification some combinations would be incompatible, 
 and hence they do not occur. Such are the reflective 
 and reciprocal ; the reflective and subjective ; the re- 
 flective and deponent.
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 119 
 
 2. But few verbs can be found in the language, 
 naturally subject to each of the foregoing modifications, 
 whether simple or compound. The simple are, of 
 course, more common than the compound ; and among 
 the simple, the relative and causative are found more fre- 
 quent than the others ; while the subjective, the deponent, 
 and the diminutive species, are comparatively rare. 
 
 3. Though the significations of the species are gen- 
 erally quite regular and fixed, within certain limits, yet 
 these limits are so wide, and the exceptions to the general 
 rules are so numerous, that the exact force of any modi- 
 fication, and even the admission of it, whether simple or 
 compound, in any particular verb, must be learned, in 
 most cases, from vernacular use, and not be presumed 
 from its general import or analogy. Some verbs do 
 not admit of certain modifications ; in some verbs the 
 modification gives no particular additional force to the 
 derived species ; while in some instances the modifi- 
 cation is highly idiomatic. 
 
 4. Some verbs, of a simple, radical use and import, 
 have now only a derived form, the root having become 
 obsolete, or lost perhaps, and its import replaced by the 
 derived form now in use. Or, the apparently derived 
 form may have been really the original root, as its 
 import now indicates. 
 
 Such are the following baleku, baneka, zingela, fumana, fana, oyisa, 
 kwisa, zibekela, zibukula. 
 
 5. Sometimes an available modification is dispensed 
 with, and the force of it given by other words, as by a 
 preposition, noun, or by another verb, though the two 
 modes of expression are not often synonymous ; thus, 
 
 Ngi puzise amanzi, or ngi pe amanzi ukuba ngi puze, cause me to 
 drink water, or give me water that I may drink; lungisa into, or yenza 
 into ukuba i lunge, straighten a thing, or make a thing to be straight. 
 
 200. III. Compound verbs, or verbs composed of 
 a verb and some other part of speech, or of two verbs, 
 so combined as to form but a single word, are not 
 numerous in the Zulu language. Indeed, the number 
 of well-established, genuine compounds, is small; yet 
 specimens, more or less perfect, are not wanting.
 
 120 NOTIONAL VERBS. 
 
 1. A VERB AND A NOUN are occasionally found in 
 combination ; as, ' uku pumanyovane,' or ' uku puma- 
 nyovu,' to back out, or to go out backwards (as a wasp 
 
 ' inyovu ' from its hole in the wall) ; 'uku bambisa- 
 muku,' to stifle, smother; 'uku tatisitupa,' to number 
 six. (See 140., Rem. 1., 2.) 
 
 2. A VERB AND AN A DJECTi VE are somet imrs found 
 in combination ; as, ' ukvvenzam'Iope,' to white-wash ; 
 
 * uku hambaze,' to go naked. But the words in the first 
 example might be written separate, with as much pro- 
 priety, perhaps; thus, ' ukwenza nflope ;' and the ze, in 
 the second example, might be considered an adverb. 
 Similar remarks would hold also in respect to the com- 
 bination of a verb and noun, in the paragraph above. 
 
 3. A VERB AND AN ADVERB are rarely combined in 
 one word, except in a few instances where an adverb, as 
 ke or ze, is suffixed to the verb ; thus, ' hambake,' go 
 then ; ' lalaze,' sleep without a covering. 
 
 4. Two VERBS are rarely combined in one word; as, 
 
 * tandabuka,' love to look ; ' tandabuza,' love to ask. 
 
 5. The GEMINATION or reduplication of verbs, as, 
 ' funafuna,' ' hambaharnba,' has been noticed already as 
 forming one species of derivative verbs. (See 196.) 
 
 SECT. 2. Classification of Verbs (continued). 
 
 B. PRINCIPAL AND AUXILIARY; TRANSITIVE AND 
 INTRANSITIVE; ACTIVE AND PASSIVE; DEFEC- 
 TIVE AND IDIOMATIC VERBS. 
 
 201. Verbs may be classified according to their 
 import and office, and be divided into the two orders 
 called Principal or Notional, and Auxiliary or Re- 
 lational Verbs. (See 7072.) 
 
 A. Notional verbs are those which express a notion 
 or idea, either of action or of being. These are divided 
 into the two general classes called Transitive and 
 Intransitive.
 
 VOICES OF VERBS. 121 
 
 ^202. 1. Transitive verbs express such an action as 
 requires the addition of an object to complete the 
 sense ; as, 
 
 JVg-t bonile abantu, I have seen the people; si landa inkosi, we love 
 the king. 
 
 2. Intransitive verbs express such an action or state 
 as does not require the addition of an object to complete 
 the sense ; as, 
 
 Si hamba, we walk; ngi pila, I live. 
 
 REM. Some verbs may be used either transitively or intransitively, 
 the connection alone showing to which class they belong in a given 
 case; as, lima, konza, temba, baleka, sebenza. 
 
 203. Transitive verbs may express an action in two 
 ways ; and for this purpose they have two forms, which 
 are called the active and passive voices. The Isizulu 
 seeks the use of the latter more than the former. 
 
 1. The active voice represents the agent as acting 
 upon some person, or thing, called the object; as, 
 
 Jlbanlu ba zi bona izinkomo, the people see the cattle. 
 
 2. The passive voice represents the object as being 
 acted upon by the agent the object of the verb, the 
 accusative, in the former case, becoming the subject or 
 nominative in the latter as, 
 
 Izinkomo zi bonhce abantu, or ngabantu, the cattle are seen by the 
 people. 
 
 REM. From the. very nature of the reflective, reciprocal, sub- 
 jective, and deponent species, they can seldom or never take the 
 passive form, except in some few instances, where the radical has 
 given place to them. (See 199., 4.) 
 
 204. 1. The passive voice is generally formed by 
 inserting w (u changed to w) before the final vowel of 
 the active voice ; thus, 
 
 Tttnda, love, iandwa, be loved; bona, see, bonwa, be seen. 
 
 2. Most of the irregular (monosyllabic and vowel) 
 verbs form the passive by inserting iw before the final 
 vowel of the active ; thus, 
 
 p
 
 122 FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE. 
 
 Uku pa, to give, uku jnu-u, to be given; tdnbaka, to build, ukwtkiwa, 
 to be built; uku-enza, to do, ukwenziwa, to be done. Some regular 
 verbs form the passive in the same way; as, buka, bukiwu. or bvJewa; 
 yula, yaliwa, or yahea. 
 
 REM. 1. Verbs in the present perfect tense, (which terminate, n; 
 He,) drop I in forming the passive; thus, landile, tandiwe;bonile, boniwe. 
 
 REM. i. The verb bulala, kill, drops / (and inserts w) in the final 
 syllable, in forming the passive, in all the tenses; thus, bulala, kill, 
 bulawa, be killed, oulewe, has been killed. 
 
 205. When the consonants b, m, m6, or p, occur in 
 the medial or final syllables of a verb, they are generally 
 changed, in forming the passive, according to certain 
 euphonic laws, as already stated ( 33.) ; thus, 
 
 1. (a.) B changes to /s; thus, ' loba,' write, 'lotswa,' 
 be written ; ' tabata,' take, ' tatsatwa,' be taken ; ' ba- 
 baza,' praise, ( batsazwa,' be praised; <c labelela,' sing, 
 cc latselelwa,' be sung. 
 
 (b.) But B, in some cases, especially when followed 
 by z, changes to dz, cognate of s ; thus, ' bubisa,' 
 destroy, * budziswa,' be destroyed ; ' baba,' entrap, 
 4 badzvva ' or ' badziwa,' be entrapped. 
 
 2. M changes to ny; thus, 'tuma,' send, ' tuny wa,' 
 be sent; tc loma,' equip, ' c lonywa,' be equipped ; ' su- 
 mayela,' speak, ' sunyayelwa,' be spoken. 
 
 3. MB changes to ndz ; thus, ' bamba,' catch, 
 ' bandzvva,' be caught ; ' hamba,' walk, * handzwa,' 
 be walked; ' c lambulula,' cleanse, ' c landzululwa,' be 
 cleansed. 
 
 4. P changes to /s ; thus, ' c lupa,' persecute, <c lu- 
 tswa,' be persecuted; 'bopa,' bind, 'botswa,' be bound; 
 ' elapa,' cure, ' elatswa,' be cured. 
 
 1. The verbs ukwazi, to know, and uku ti, 
 to say, (which terminate in i,) suffix wa to form the 
 passive in the present, past, and future tenses ; thus, 
 aziwa, be known ; tiwa, be said. But in the in- 
 flected forms of these verbs, (azile and tile,) the 
 passive is formed, as in other verbs, by dropping I and 
 inserting w; thus, aziwe, has been known ; tiwe, has 
 been said. 
 
 2. But the verb uku tso, to say, retains the final o
 
 RELATIONAL VERBS. 
 
 in all the modes and tenses of the passive voice; thus, 
 uku tsiwo, to he said ; ku be ku tsiwo, it. had been 
 said ; ku nge tsiwo, it can not he said ; ma ku tsiwo, 
 let it he said. 
 
 3. The verbs uku zwa, to hear, and uku Iwa, to 
 fight, make the passive, like other monosyllabic verbs, 
 by inserting iw before final a; or, in the present perfect, 
 by dropping / and inserting iv; thus, uku zwiwa, to be 
 heard ; uku lioiica, to be fought. The latter is some- 
 times contracted, however, making liwa instead of 
 Iwiwa ; and, for the passive form of the former, 
 (zwiwa,) the deponent form, zwakakt, of passive im- 
 port, is generally used. 
 
 4. The verbs kolwa, believe, from kola, satisfy ; and 
 ktflwa, forget, from fco c l, escape memory, are generally 
 used in the passive form, as here given ; although 
 the signification assigned in our language, as above, is 
 of an active import ; but their active form is not wholly 
 obsolete ; thus, si ya kolwa, we believe, i.e., are satisfied ; 
 ku si kola, it satisfies us ; si ko'liwe, we have forgotten ; 
 or ku si ko'lile, it has escaped our memory. 
 
 REM. Intransitive verbs, which usually have, in other languages, 
 only the active form, often take the passive in Zulu; and, by thus 
 becoming less personal and definite, they help to gratify the native's 
 love of an indirect and general style. (See 504., 3., 4., ^ 549.) 
 
 207. B. Relational verbs, sometimes called auxiliary 
 or helping, are those which are used in connection with 
 notional verbs, to aid in expressing their relations of 
 mode and time. They are ba, ya, za, nga, ma, sa, 
 ka, and ti. 
 
 REM. 1. Doubtless, originally, all the verbs of this class were mere 
 notional verbs; and most of them yet retain that character, being 
 still used, except n;a, sometimes as principal, and sometimes as 
 auxiliary verbs. 
 
 REM. 2. The power of the verb as an auxiliary is a modification of 
 that which it has, or had, as a principal verb, as the following para- 
 graphs will show. 
 
 208. 1. The auxiliary ba (uku ba, to be,) is derived 
 from the idea of existence; and corresponds, in many
 
 124 RELATIONAL VERBS. 
 
 respects, to the auxiliaries be, am, was, in English, 
 except that it is not used in the present tense. 
 
 2. The pronoun nominative is used before this auxiliary, 
 and repeated again before the principal verb ; thus, 
 
 Si be si tanda. By contraction, however, the pronoun is often 
 omitted before the auxiliary; thus, be si tanda, we were loving; si be si 
 tandile, contracted, be si tandile, we had loved. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes this auxiliary drops its final vowel and unites 
 with the pronoun following when it consists of a single vowel ; thus, 
 u bu tanda, for u be u tanda, thou wast loving, literally, thou wast thou 
 loving; i bi tanda, for i be i tanda, it was loving. 
 
 REM. 2. Sometimes the auxiliary itself is dropped; thus, wa u 
 tanda, for wa be u tanda. 
 
 REM. 3. The pronouns n of the first class, singular, and a of the 
 second class, plural, often change to e; and ba of the. first class, 
 plural, to be, for greater euphony, precision, or variety, before this 
 auxiliary, especially in participial or accessory clauses; thus, e be 
 e tandile, he having loved. The pronoun u changes to a in the 
 potential mode when be is used with the auxiliary nga; thus, a be e 
 nga tanda, he might or could love. 
 
 209. 1. The auxiliary ya (uku ya, to go,) is derived 
 from the idea of action. In the present tense it marks 
 emphasis, and corresponds to the auxiliary do, in English; 
 thus, si ya tanda, we do love. 
 
 REM. Doubtless the pronoun nominative was originally used with 
 this auxiliary, and repeated again before the principal verb; thus, si 
 ya si tanda. (See 208., 2.) 
 
 2. In the past tense, the auxiliary ya, or rather ye, 
 often denotes emphasis, especially in the negative, like 
 the English auxiliary did. Sometimes it denotes, con- 
 tinued, and then incomplete, indefinite action, consti- 
 tuting a progressive form of the verb. In both cases 
 the pronoun may be either repeated or omitted before 
 the principal verb ; thus, 
 
 Ba yt (ba} nga bonanza, they did not see; sa ye tanda, or, sa ye si 
 tanda, we did love, literally, we went loving, or we were loving. 
 
 3. Sometimes this auxiliary ya, or ye, has no other 
 force than to mark the time of an action or state, differ- 
 ing not much from ba or be; thus, 
 
 Sa ye si tandile, we had loved; nga ye ngi ngumfana, I was a boy. 
 So in the future; thus, si ya A- tanda, we shall love.
 
 RELATIONAL VERBS. 125 
 
 1. The auxiliary za (uku za, to come,) is 
 derived, like ya, from the idea of action. Both za 
 and ya are used to aid in forming the future tense, 
 and thus denote future destination, either predictive or 
 imperative. In the ordinary, uncontracted form, with 
 the infinitive, they simply predict, or denote intention ; 
 and correspond to shall in the first person, and to will in 
 the second and third, in English ; thus, 
 
 JVg-i za ku tanda, I shall love, or I come, or am coming to love; 
 HI ya ku bona, you will see, or ye go, or are going to see. 
 
 2. In the shortest, contracted, or o form, they express 
 a determination, a command, like will in the first person, 
 and shall in the second and third, in English ; thus, 
 
 50 tanda, we will love; no hamba, ye shall walk. (See 53., 6.) 
 
 3. The verb uku za is often employed with another 
 in forming a kind of inceptive, periphrastic conjugation, 
 to denote the intention, or being on the point of doing 
 something ; thus, 
 
 JYg-i be ngi za ku bona, or be ngi za ku bona, I designed, or I was 
 about to see. 
 
 REM. Much of this idea of immediate, subsequence being about to 
 do, or to be enters into nearly all the varied forms and uses of this 
 verb in connection with others. 
 
 4. A frequent use of this word (za, or ze,) is to ex- 
 press a connection between a preceding and a subsequent 
 clause or proposition, pointing to an inference, explana- 
 tion, or succession, of some kind, and having the force 
 of and, then, till, or until, according to the circum- 
 stances. In this sense it is used in the present, past, 
 and future tense, but most frequently in the past ; and 
 the pronoun nominative is repeated before the principal 
 verb ; thus, 
 
 51 ze si Jike, until we arrive; sa za sa bona, and we saw, i.e., we 
 came we saw, or then we saw; siya ku linda ba ze ba muke, we will 
 watch till they depart. 
 
 REM. De is sometimes used in the sense of until; as, si de si tande, 
 until we love.
 
 IJG RELATIONAL VERBS. 
 
 5. The verb uku za is sometimes used with a nega- 
 tive, before another verb, in the sense of never, not in the 
 least; thus, 
 
 A ngi zanga ngi bone, I never saw; a si zanga si libale, we have not 
 delayed in the least. 
 
 211. 1. The auxiliary nga (uku nga, obsolete in 
 Isizulu, to be able, possible, or desirable,) is derived 
 from the idea of contingency. 
 
 (a.) When it follows the direct nominative to the verb, 
 it corresponds, in a measure, to may, and sometimes to 
 can, in the same situation in English, expressing possi- 
 bility or probability contingency or power dependent 
 upon circumstances external to the agent ; thus, 
 
 Si nga tanda, we may love; ngi nga hamba, I can go. 
 
 (b.) But when it precedes the direct subject of the 
 verb, it corresponds, in a measure, to may, in the same 
 situation in English, or more nearly sometimes to ought; 
 and thus expresses obligation, willingness, or power 
 dependent upon circumstances internal to the agent ; 
 thus, 
 
 -Si nga si tanda, or nga si tanda, may we love, or we ought to love. 
 
 2. (a.) A duplicate use of this auxiliary, in which case 
 there is also, generally, a duplicate use of the pronoun, 
 gives a somewhat modified combination of the two ideas 
 of possibility and obligation, amounting to earnest desire 
 or wish ; thus, 
 
 Si nga si nga bona, we wish we could see, or we desire to see. 
 
 (b.) A duplicate use of this auxiliary, and sometimes 
 a geminated reduplication, is found in combination with 
 sa or se and uku ti, in the sense of utinam, oh that ! 
 would that; may, &c., expressing strong desire, longing, 
 entreaty that a thing may or might be done ; thus, 
 
 Se ku nga ti si nga buya, or se nga ti si nga buya, oh that we might 
 return; se nga nga ti nga be ba penduka, oh that they would repent; 
 se nga nga ti nga be na sala kona, oh that ye had remained here; se 
 nga ti Inkosi i nga si pa, may the Lord grant us. 
 
 RF.M. Sometimes the se is omitted, as in the midst of a sentence,
 
 RELATIONAL VERBS. 127 
 
 or otherwise; thus, sa ruma uku ba nga ti si nga sebenza, we assented, 
 to wit, would that we could work; nga ti a nga buya a Jike, oh that he 
 would return and come. 
 
 3. This auxiliary nga is also used with uku ti, 
 (preceded by a pronoun,) in the sense of it seems, or 
 seems to be, literally, it can say, or it means; thus, 
 
 Kit nga ti inkomo, it seems to be a cow; ku nga ti umuntu, it seerns 
 to be a person; ngi nga ti indoda, I seem to be a man; kwo ba ku nga 
 ti umuti, it will seem to be a tree. 
 
 4. This auxiliary is used also with the substantive 
 verb, uku ba, taking sometimes the general pronoun ku 
 or i, and sometimes omitting it, in the sense of perhaps, 
 i.e., it may be; thus, 
 
 I nga ba u za ku Jika, perhaps he will arrive; ku nga ba ba hambile, 
 perhaps they have gone; ngabe u hambile, perhaps he has gone. 
 
 212. The auxiliary ma (uku ma, to stand,) derived 
 from the idea of sufferance, corresponds to let, in English ; 
 and expresses a command, an exhortation, or a request; 
 as, ma ngi bone, let me see ; ma si tande, let us love. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes this verb takes one of the imperative forms 
 common to a monosyllabic verb, as mana, manini, when it may be 
 counted either as the first of two principal verbs, or as an emphatic 
 auxiliary ; thus, man' u bone, do see, literally, stand thou (and) see ; 
 inaiihii In bane, do ye see, or stand ye and see ; mana si bone, stand 
 thou (and let) us see, or do let us see. 
 
 REIM. 1. This verb, especially in a contracted form of the infini- 
 tive, lima, is used as a conjunction, in the sense of if, when, since, 
 whether, (hat; as, uma si fikile, if, or when we have arrived. Ukuba is 
 often used in a similar manner. 
 
 The auxiliary sa (uku sa, to be clear, open, 
 light, plain,) is derived from the idea of actualization 
 complete, constant, or prospective, according to the tense, 
 with more or less of implied reference to the opposite 
 a liability to interruption and failure. 
 
 1. In the past tenses, and often in the present and 
 future, (in its inflected form se ,) it denotes completeness, 
 having the force of already, quite, entirely, just, just 
 now, even now, ivhen, then; as, 
 
 ' Se si bonile,' we have already seen ; ' se ngi buna,' 1 just \Jliis
 
 128 RELATIONAL VERBS. 
 
 moment) see, or I already see; ' ni nga pumula se rii fikile,' you can 
 rest when you have arrived. 
 
 2. But, by an easy deflection, in the present and 
 future, and in the past in its uninflected form sa, it 
 denotes continuation, having the force of still, yet, 
 &c. ; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi sa tanda,' I still love, or I am yet loving. 
 
 REM. 1. The inflected form se generally precedes the direct 
 pronominal nominative; often takes a reduplication of the same for 
 itself; and refers to completed actions or states, except when used 
 with an adjective, adverb, or preposition, without a verb; thus, 'se ngi 
 bonile,' I have already seen; 'ba se be hambile,' when they had gone; 
 ' i se i file,' contracted, ' i si file,' it is already dead; ' ba se mnandi,' 
 they (are) still well; c u se kona,' he (is) still present. 
 
 REM. 2. The inflected form is used, however, occasionally with 
 the present and future, to denote a state of readiness or incipiency in 
 respect to the idea signified by the verb ; thus, ' se ngi tanda,' now I 
 love; ' se si vuma,' we now consent; ' se ngi za ku hamba, ' already 
 am I on the point of going. 
 
 REM. 3. The uninflected form sa usually follows the direct nom- 
 inative pronoun; and refers to the present or future, but sometimes 
 to the past with an allusion to the present; thus, ' ni sa bona,' you 
 still see; ' ngi sa ya ku hamba,' I shall still go (notwithstanding I am 
 detained by the rain). 
 
 3. With a negative, this auxiliary (sa, uninflected, 
 and coming immediately after the direct pronoun nomina- 
 tive,) signifies no more, no longer, never, or never again; 
 thus, 
 
 ' A ngi sa yi ku bona,' I shall no more see; ' a ngi sa tandanga,' I 
 have never loved; ,' a i sa baleki.' it runs away no more; ' ngi be ngi 
 ya yi funa, a ngi sa bonanga,' I went in search of it, (but) I never 
 saw it. 
 
 REM. 1. One or more contractions are often made between this 
 and contiguous relational words; thus, in the past, ' u su ti,' for ' u 
 se u ti ; ' ' i si ti, ' for ' i se i ti ; ' ' e se fikile, ' for ' e se e fikile. ' 
 
 So in the future, ' a ni se ku hamba,' for ' a ni sa yi ku hamba,' 
 where y is dropped, and a-i give e; ' a ka so ze a bone,' for ' a ka 
 sa yi ku za a bone,' where yi and k are dropped, a-u give o, and a 
 in za changes to e. 
 
 REM. 2. Sometimes the pronoun preceding this auxiliary is 
 dropped; thus, ' ngi nga bi sa hamba,' for ' ngi nga bi ngi sa hamba;' 
 'a nga be sa hamba,' for ' a nga be e sa hamba.' 
 
 S< 214. 1. The auxiliary ka (uku ka, to reach, attain,
 
 RELATIONAL VERBS. 
 
 take, take up, out, off, as water from a well, or fruit 
 from a tree,) is derived from the idea of actualization 
 occasional or indefinite. In some of its uses, especially 
 as an auxiliary, it refers chiefly to time; in which case, 
 the occasional or indejinite being most prominent, it 
 signifies once, ever, at any time, sometimes, yet, hitherto. 
 In other of its uses, the mere actualization being more 
 prominent, it signifies in consequence, accordingly, so 
 then, just, simply; thus, 
 
 ' Na ke na bona na ?' did you ever see? ' ba funa ba funa, ba yi 
 tolake, 3 they hunted and hunted, and accordingly found it. 
 
 2. This auxiliary is often used with the negative, 
 especially in participial, or independent, explanatory 
 clauses, in the sense of not yet, previous to, before, thus 
 constituting a counterpart to sa, se, in the affirmative ; as, 
 
 ' A ngi ka boni,' I do not yet see ; ' si ya ku hamba, ilanga li nga 
 ka pumi,' we shall go before sun-rise the sun not yet having risen ; 
 ' tina s' ake kona lapa abelungu be nga ka fiki,' we built here previous 
 to the arrival of the white people. 
 
 3. This auxiliary is often used with the imperative, 
 and in other connections also, to excite attention, to 
 mollify a phrase, or as a mere expletive, something like 
 the Latin and the Greek age, or the English phrase, 
 come, come on, come now, well, well then, well now, so 
 then; thus, 
 
 1 Ma ke ngi hambe, ' come let me go ; ' ma ke u suke, ' well now get 
 away, just go off. 
 
 REM. 1. Contractions often occur in connection with this auxiliary; 
 thus, ' a ke ni beke,' or ' ka ni beke,' for 'ma ke ni beke,' now just 
 notice; 'u nga ku bone na?' for 'u nga ke u bone na?' would you 
 merely see? ' ni ya 'u ke ni bone na?' for ' ni ya ku ke ni bone na?' 
 shall you never see? 
 
 REM. 2. As an adverbial expletive, ke is often suffixed to other 
 words verbs, adverbs, nouns, &c., carrying the accent forward, in 
 such words, from the penult to the final syllable; thus, 'hambake,' 
 go then; 'yeboke,' oh yes; 'inkomoke,' just a cow of course. 
 
 The auxiliary ti (uku ti, to say, mean, or 
 signify,) is derived from the idea of designation. It is 
 used to introduce or specify some state or act, and to 
 give it prominence ; or else to serve as a medium of 
 
 Q
 
 130 PROPERTIES OF VERBS. 
 
 some modification, which the principal verb is to derive 
 either from other auxiliaries or from some inflection of 
 this one ; thus, 
 
 Sc kit n<ra ti ngi nga landa, oh that 1 may love, literally, already it 
 would say I may love. (See 5; 211.) 
 
 216. There are certain verbs in Isizulu which may be 
 called Idiomatic, as their use, or construction with other 
 words, is somewhat peculiar, and their force is generally 
 best denoted, in English, by the use of certain adverbs or 
 conjunctions. Of this class are the following: sandu, 
 (sa, clear, ready 213., and andula, precede, surpass, 
 effect,) just now, this moment; kandu, (ka, reach, attain, 
 take 214., and andula, surpass, effect,) then, so that, 
 in order that ; litsu, (\itsa, sharpen, bring to a point,) 
 at the point of, almost, well nigh ; ponsu, (ponsa, 
 throw at,) almost, like, well nigh; buya, again; pinda, 
 again ; funa, lest ; ngapana, (pa, grant,) must be ; musa, 
 must not ; \ede, (\eda, finish,) when, after ; ti, and. 
 
 NOTK. For Oeft't-llrc Verbs, see 317. 
 
 SECT. 3. Properties of Verbs. 
 
 217. The only properties belonging to the verb in 
 Zulu are voice, mode, and tense. For remarks on voice, 
 and the rules for forming the passive, see 203 206. 
 
 REM. The distinctions of number and person, which are attributed 
 to the verb in English and some other languages, are not marked at 
 all in the Zulu verb, the form of the verb in this language remaining 
 the same, whatever the number and person of the noun or pronoun 
 nominative, except, perhaps, the second person plural, imperative, 
 where the pronoun is suffixed to the verb, giving it the semblance of 
 an inflection; thus, hambani, go ye. (See 51., <2.) 
 
 A. ON THE MODES. 
 
 218. 1. Mode denotes the manner of the action or 
 state expressed by the verb. It shows the relation of 
 reality between that, action or state and the speaker, 
 whether existing, conceived of, or willed
 
 IN M MI 1 \ I. Mo I 1:31 
 
 2. This is effected in two, or rather in three, ways- 
 wither hy an inflection of the verb, or by the use of aux- 
 iliaries, or else by both of these means combined. 
 
 RKM. In its inflections and auxiliaries, and especially in the 
 numerous and extensive combinations to \vhich these auxiliaries are 
 subject, the Zulu has a wonderful store of means at command, for the 
 expression of both mode and tense, in almost every shade of variety. 
 The number of its lorms, with nice shades of difference, with some 
 also of seemingly synonymous import, has been greatly multiplied, 
 doubtless, through the absence of that restraint, and fixed uniformity, 
 which writing and printing give a language ; and doubtless, also, 
 through the adoption of various cognate dialectic forms. 
 
 219. The whole number of modes may be con- 
 veniently reduced, however, to six; the Infinitive, the 
 Indicative, the Potential, the Optative, the Imperutii't-, 
 and the Subjunctive. 
 
 20. I. 1. The Infinitive mode is formed from the 
 verbal root by means of the particle uku; thus, 
 
 Uku tanda, to love, from the root lamia, love; uku ya, to go, from 
 the root ya ; uku-nzi, to know, from the root uzi. 
 
 2. a. The infinitive mode expresses an action or state 
 indefinitely. It has the sense of the verb in a sub- 
 stantive form, and constitutes an abstract verbal noun; 
 thus, uku Ta, to eat ; wfcwTfl, food ; uku pila, to live; 
 ukupila, life. 
 
 b. The infinitive is used in forming some of the 
 tenses, especially the future ; in which case the initial u 
 is elided ; thus, 
 
 Ngi ya ku bona, I shall see. The same elision takes place after ya 
 and za, used as principal verbs, and in some other instances; but this 
 elision is generally marked by the use of an apostrophe; thus, sa ya 
 ''ku bona, we went to see; u ye 'ku tenga, he has gone to trade. 
 
 3. The negative of this mode is formed by using the 
 negative particle nga between the sign uku and the root 
 of the verb, and changing the final a of the verbal root, 
 in the active voice, to i; thus, 
 
 Uku nga tandi, not to love. Before vowel verbs the a of nga is 
 elided; thus, uku ng' ati, not to know; uku ' enzi, not to do
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 ^22}. II. 1. The Indicative mode is the root of the 
 verb with no other inflection or auxiliary than those re- 
 quired to express the time and condition of the verbal 
 action or being. 
 
 2. This mode is that form of the verb which is used 
 in making assertions, and sometimes inquiries, either 
 direct, or accessory, positive or negative. 
 
 a. In expressing a direct assertion, this mode does 
 not differ from the indicative in the English, and many 
 other languages ; as, 
 
 Si ya tanda, we do love; ni bonile, ye have seen. 
 
 b. In expressing a direct interrogation, the words in 
 this, as in all the other modes in this language, are 
 arranged as in the affirmative sentence, to which is 
 added, generally, at the end, but sometimes inserted, the 
 interrogative particle na; thus, 
 
 JVt ya tanda nal do ye love? u bonile nal hast thou seen? 
 
 3. The indirect or accessory use of this mode occurs 
 in those secondary clauses of a compound sentence, 
 which are sometimes prefixed or inserted, but generally 
 subjoined, to express the time, cause, motive, means, 
 way, manner, or condition of the verbs, with which 
 they are connected in the principal clauses. Hence, in 
 rendering such clauses into English, we often preface 
 them with such connectives as, ivhen, while, since, 
 before, after, as, for, because, that, so that, and, if, 
 although. Sometimes we render such clauses into 
 English by making use of a relative pronoun ; and often, 
 by a participle, with the noun or pronoun in what is 
 called the case absolute or independent ; thus, 
 
 Si ya ku buya ngomso abanye be si siza, we shall return to-morrow 
 (because) others help us; nga bona inyoka ngi hamba emfuleni, I saw a 
 snake (while) I was walking by the river; sa hamba si beka nga sezansi, 
 we went looking down country. 
 
 4. This explanatory indicative mode is generally the 
 same, in form, as the direct indicative. It differs from the 
 direct, in not using the auxiliary ya in the present tense ; 
 in the pronoun u, third person singular, first class, and a, 
 third person plural, second class, being changed to e;
 
 POTENTIAL MODE. 133 
 
 and ba, third person plural, first class, being changed to 
 be; and partly, or sometimes, in using the negative nga 
 after the pronoun nominative, and sometimes also after 
 the principal verb, instead of the negative a only before 
 that pronoun ; thus, 
 
 JVg-i ya bona umuntu e hamba, I see a person walking; safika, be nga 
 ka muki, we arrived, they not yet having departed. 
 
 REM. 1. This explanatory use of the indicative, in secondary 
 clauses, to express adverbial, subordinate relations, has been some- 
 times denominated a participle; and, so far as this name may aid in 
 teaching the use and force of this form, by any resemblance which it 
 may have to independent or incorporated participial clauses in English, 
 Latin, and Greek, it may be allowed and continued. But so far as the 
 name participle is used to imply a partaking of the nature of a noun or 
 of an adjective, it is not required in the Isizulu. The Zulu infinitive, or 
 verbal substantive, takes the place of the participial noun in English; 
 while the verbal adjective of the latter is properly included in the 
 accessory clause of the former. Besides which, it may be remarked 
 that it accords strictly with the genius of this language, which, like 
 most other uncultivated languages, is exceedingly barren of con- 
 nective and inferential particles, but prolific in short and separate 
 sentences, to consider and read many of these so-called participial 
 forms in the Zulu language, as distinct, independent affirmations, 
 having all the qualities of a verb, but none of a noun or of an adjec- 
 tive, or at least none of the former, and no more of the latter than some 
 other forms of the verb; thus, the sentence si ya ku hamba, abanye be si 
 siza, we shall go, others helping us, or because others help us, may 
 be read, as it is in Zulu, we shall go ; others help us. So, ngi bona 
 umuntu e hamba, I see a person walking, may be read and understood 
 as two independent absolute assertions, I see a person; he walks. 
 
 REM. 2. The different positive and negative forms of this, and of 
 the other modes, will be noticed in connection with the several tenses. 
 
 222. III. 1. a. The Potential mode is formed by 
 means of the auxiliary nga, which generally follows the 
 pronoun nominative, (see 211.) ; thus, 
 
 JVg-i nga tanda, I may or can love. 
 
 6. The pronoun u, third person singular, first class, 
 changes to a in this mode ; thus, 
 
 A nga tanda, he may love. 
 
 c. In the direct negative form of the present, and in 
 those past tenses which are formed from the present, a 
 in nga, and a final in the verb are changed to e; thus, 
 
 Si nge tande, we may not love; ku nge bonwe, it can not be seen.
 
 134 OPTATIVE MODE. 
 
 2. This mode is used to express pro ability, possibility, 
 liberty, and contingency, or power dependent upon cir- 
 cumstances ; and sometimes obligation. The auxiliary 
 nga corresponds generally to the English auxiliary may 
 more strictly than to can; though it is often rendered 
 indiscriminately by either may or can, might or could; 
 thus, 
 
 Ngi nga tanda, I may love ; si be si nga tanda, we might or could 
 love; ngi nga ngi tanda, I should love. 
 
 REM. 1. The line of distinction between the potential and optative 
 modes is not always clear; both the form and import of some ex- 
 pressions would give them a place in either class, with nearly equal 
 propriety; thus, the last example, ngi nga ngi tanda, might be regarded 
 as the full form of the optative nga ngi tanda. The difficulty, how- 
 ever, is neither incapable of a philosophical explanation, nor peculiar 
 to the Zulu language; though the discussion of it belongs rather to 
 philosophical and general grammar. (See 211., 1., 6.) 
 
 REM. 2. When the idea of mere power is to be 
 expressed and made prominent, the noun amanTa is 
 generally used, with the infinitive (verbal noun) in the 
 genitive ; thus, ngi namarfl'a okutanda, I can love I 
 have power to love. 
 
 REM. 3. When an imaginary assertion, contradicting reality, is to 
 be made, or a conditional future to be expressed, without particular 
 reference to time, whether present, past, or future, as, " I should love 
 him if he would give me food ;" "the cow would have run away if we 
 had not watched her," a contingent, inceptive, or predictive form 
 of the indicative mode is often used. (For examples see ^ 246.) 
 
 223. IV. 1. a. The Optative mode is formed by 
 means of the auxiliary nga before the pronoun nomina- 
 tive, or else by means of a reduplicate use of this 
 auxiliary and the pronoun nominative, either with or 
 without other auxiliaries (see 211., 2.) ; thus, 
 
 ngi tanda, may I love; ngi nga ngi nga tanda, I wish I might 
 love; se ku nga ti ngi nga landa, oh that I may love. 
 
 b. The pronoun u, third person singular, first class, 
 before the second nga, changes to a, and sometimes 
 drops out; thus, 
 
 U nga a nga tanda, or u nga nga tanda, may he love. 
 
 c. In some forms of the negative, the a in nga, and
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 a final in the verb, change to e, as in the potential; thus, 
 
 JVgi nga ngi nge taiule, may I not love, or I wish I might not love. 
 (See ^ 222., Rem. 1.) 
 
 2. This mode is used to express a desire, wish, or a 
 longing that something may be, or be done ; or a regret 
 that it has not been, or been done; and sometimes an 
 obligation, or a mild command to do or be something ; 
 thus, 
 
 JVgo si landa, may we love, or we would or should, or we ought to 
 love; se ku nga fi si nga tanda, contracted, se nga ti si nga tanda, oh 
 that we may love, let us love, or we ought to love. 
 
 V. I. a. The Imperative mode, in regular 
 verbs, second person singular, is the same as the root ; 
 thus, taiida, love (thou) ; hamba, go (thou). 
 
 b. The second person plural, imperative, is formed 
 by suffixing the pronoun m, to the root; thus, fondant, 
 love ye; hambani, go ye. 
 
 II EM. 1. This suffix, ni, carries the accent forward from the penult 
 to the final syllable of the verb; thus, tandani ; hamba.ni. 
 
 REM. 2. An accusative before the verb changes the final a of that 
 verb to e; thus, ngi size, help (thou) me; ba fundiseni, teach ye them. 
 
 c. The formation of the imperative for the first and 
 third persons, is marked by the use of the imperative 
 auxiliary ma, and changing the final vowel of the verb a 
 to e; thus, ma ngi tande, let me love; ma ba tande, let 
 them love. (See 212., Rem. 1.) 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes the second person forms the imperative in the 
 same manner, by the use of ma; thus, mo u tande, love thou ; HICE ni 
 tande, love ye. 
 
 REM. 2. This form of the imperative, using ma for the second 
 person, is generally used in the negative ; thus, ma u nga tandi, love 
 thou not ; ma ni nga tandi, love ye not. 
 
 REM. 3. Sometimes the m in ma is dropped, especially with the 
 auxiliary ka or ke; thus, a ni tande; a ke ni bone. Sometimes the 
 auxiliary ma is quite superseded by the use of ka; thus, abaniu ka b' 
 t'M/Ar bonke, let all the people remove; ka no ba yekani, let ye them alone. 
 
 REM. 4. The pronoun u, third person singular, first class, is 
 generally changed to a and hardened by k; thus, ma ka tande, let him 
 love. So the pronoun a, third person plural, second class, is generally 
 hardened by A;; thus, (amadoda) ma ka liambe, let them (the men) go. 
 (See ^35., 1., 2.)
 
 136 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 d. (I.) Irregular vowel verbs form the imperative for 
 the second person, singular and plural, by prefixing the 
 euphonic y to the root of the verb, suffixing also ni for 
 the plural ; thus, yaka, build (thou) ; yakani, build ye; 
 yenza, do (thou); yosani, roast ye. ( 
 
 (2.) Irregular monosyllabic verbs form the imperative, 
 second person, singular and plural, by prefixing yi to 
 the root, for euphony and emphasis, and by suffixing 
 also ni for the plural ; thus, 
 
 Yika, pluck thou ; yikani, pluck ye : yiza, come thou ; yizani, come 
 ye: yipa or pana, grant thou. 
 
 REM. 1. When an accusative pronoun precedes an irregular verb, 
 the euphonic y or yl, being unnecessary, is not used; thus, s' ose, 
 toast it, (utnihms); s' akeni, build ye it, (isi&at/a); ng' enzelewnuti, make 
 me some medicine; ngi pe, grant thou me. 
 
 REM. 2. These irregular verbs may form the imperative, in both 
 the second and other persons, by means of the imperative auxiliary 
 ma, making such vowel changes as the laws of euphony require; thus, 
 ma ng' enze, let me do; ma wake (=ma u ake), build thou; ma si pe, 
 let us give. 
 
 e. (1.) Monosyllabic verbs may form the imperative, 
 second person, singular and plural, by means of the 
 prefix wo, suffixing ni for the plural ; thus, woza, come 
 thou ; wozani, come ye. 
 
 (2.) These verbs may also form the imperative by 
 means of the suffix na for the second person singular; 
 and the suffix nini for the second person plural ; thus, 
 mana, stand thou ; manini, stand ye. 
 
 REM. 1. The pronoun ni, making nini, may be reduplicated for 
 emphasis, if not also for euphony, in other forms of the imperative; 
 thus, wozanini, come ye indeed; hambanini, go ye indeed, or go 
 yourselves. 
 
 REM. 2. The verbs ti, /so, and azi, retain i and o 
 final in forming the imperative with ma; thus, ma si ti, 
 let us signify ; ma ni tso, speak ye ; ma s' azi, let us 
 know. 
 
 2. The imperative mode is used, as in other languages, 
 to command, exhort, entreat, permit; as in the examples 
 already given. 
 
 REM. 1. The abbreviated form of the indicative future, in -o, may 
 be used imperatively; thus, ngo tanda, I will love, or let me love; no 
 hamba, ye shall go, or go ye.
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 137 
 
 REM. '2. The optative mode, in some of its forms, has also much 
 of the force of an imperative, and is sometimes used as such when the 
 speaker would soften his command; thus, nga si tanda, may we love, 
 or let us love. 
 
 225. VI. The Subjunctive mode is of two kinds, 
 the conditional, and the tclic or potential. 
 
 1 . The conditional subjunctive, which is used to ex- 
 press a condition or supposition, as its name denotes, is 
 formed from the indicative by prefacing its several forms 
 with the conjunction uma, if, and sometimes ukuma, or 
 ukuba; thus, uma u funda, if you learn ; ukuba ngi 
 tandilc, if I have loved. 
 
 REM. In this kind of subjunctive, the pronoun t/, third person 
 singular, first class, usually changes to t, but sometimes to a; and the. 
 pronoun ba, sometimes to be; thus, uma c tanda, if he love ; uma be 
 nga kafiki, if they have not yet arrived. 
 
 2. When an intention, end, or object is denoted, 
 which is the case where there are two verbs in succession, 
 the action of the first of which is done to give the power 
 or opportunity for the performance of the second, the 
 second verb, constituting the telic subjunctive, and used 
 generally in the present tense, with or without a con- 
 junction, changes the final vowel -to e, in the affirmative, 
 (and to i, in the negative,) the pronoun , third person 
 singular, first class, changing to a; thus, si ya liamba 
 ukuba si bone, we go that we may sec. 
 
 REM. 1. Verbs whose final vowel is I or o retain the same 
 unchanged; as, se ni fundisiwe ukuba w' azi, ye have been taught that 
 ye may know. 
 
 REM. 2. Sometimes the conjunction uma, or ukuba, is omitted ; 
 thus, vusa lo 'mfana a si zve, rouse that boy (that) he may listen to us. 
 
 REM. .). Sometimes, especially in interrogative sentences, the an- 
 tecedent verb is omitted, as well as the conjunction; thus, ngi hambc'? 
 or ngi hambe tial (do you say that) I may go? 
 
 REM. 4. This form of the verb, the telic, (inflected in e,) is but a 
 modified subjunctive. With uma or ukuba expressed or understood, 
 denoting intention, end, &.C., it has more or less of the character of 
 the potential, like corresponding examples in the English, such as, 
 " I eat that I may live.'' With the conjunction fuua, lest, it has the 
 same character the potential. With ngapana, of necessity, must, 
 then ought, &.c., the verb partakes of the optative or obligatory 
 character, and is not confined to the present tense. 
 
 B
 
 138 REMARKS ON THE TENSES. 
 
 REM. 5. The explanatory or accessory form of the indicative 
 mode is often used as the conditional subjunctive, without the con- 
 junction uma or ukuha; thus, ni ti, e nga yi bulalanga (inyoka), e be 
 nga yi ku hamba, I say, had he not, i.e., if he had not killed it (the 
 snake), he could not have walked (lived); a si yi ku sindiswa, si 
 fifnduki, we shall not be saved, (if) we do not repent. 
 
 B. ON THE TENSES. 
 A. General Remarks, 
 
 1. Few languages are so remarkable as the 
 Zulu, and some of its cognates, for its power to make 
 numerous divisions, and to express minute shades of 
 difference, in respect to the time and state or condition 
 of the action or being, which its verbs denote. 
 
 2. a. The tenses of the Zulu verb are expressed partly by means of 
 inflection, partly by auxiliary verbs or particles, and partly by the use 
 of -both of these means combined. 
 
 6. The number of genuine inflections, to which the verb is subject, 
 is small, amounting to no more than two or three; nor is the number 
 of its auxiliaries remarkably large. But the capacity of the language 
 to form various and extensive combinations of distinct relational verbs, 
 for the expression of the different tenses and shades of time, is 
 great beyond comparison with any other language with which we are 
 acquainted. 
 
 227. 1. a. Most of the auxiliary verbs, as before 
 remarked ( 207., Rem. 1.), are still used, oftentimes, 
 separately, as principal verbs ; and a part of this rank 
 and character of a principal verb, some of the auxiliaries 
 still retain and exhibit, even in their combination with 
 purely essential verbs to express the time or state of 
 the action or being signified by these verbs. This is 
 seen in their often taking a pronoun nominatiave of 
 their own, even when used as auxiliaries, a pronoun 
 in addition to that with which the principal verb is more 
 immediately connected; thus, 
 
 In the progressive form of the past tense we have ngi be ngi tanda, 
 literally, I was I love, that is, I was loving. So in the past perfect 
 pluperfect, we have two perfects; thus, ngi be ngi tandile, literally, 
 I was I have loved, that is, I had loved. 
 
 b. So in the future tense, as, ngi >ja ku tanda, 1 shall love, literally,
 
 REMARKS ON THE TENSES. 139 
 
 I go to love. what is called the principal verb might be considered as 
 the latter of two verbs, used in the infinitive, and dependent upon ya, 
 which, in that view, would pass for a principal verb also. But it is 
 doubtless better to regard the former verb, ya or za, in this tense, 
 merely as an auxiliary to the latter, which has laid aside a portion of 
 its sign of the infinitive, (u being elided from uku,} in order to facilitate 
 enunciation, and also in order to denote, as it were, the intimacy of 
 the relation which exists between these two verbs as mutual elements 
 of the tense formed by their combination. 
 
 c. In like manner, in the case of the verb be, as in ngi he ngi landilc. 
 and in all similar instances, where the office of one verb is to aid in 
 denoting the time, state, or mode of another, it is doubtless best to 
 regard such antecedent verb as relational, or auxiliary to the verb by 
 which it is succeeded. 
 
 2. a. By looking at the auxiliaries in this light, and 
 getting a distinct idea of their separate, respective value 
 and office, we shall be the better able to apprehend the 
 import of the many different combinations, which are 
 used in the Zulu language, for expressing the time, state, 
 or manner of the verbal action or being ; though it may 
 be difficult to express all their different nice shades of 
 meaning in our tongue. 
 
 6. In attempting to give an analysis and definition of the verb, in 
 most of its numerous forms and significations of forms, an approxima- 
 tion to completeness and accuracy, is all that can be expected, at least 
 in the present state of Zulu literature and philology. And while it is 
 believed that the terms chosen to designate the different forms and 
 uses of the verb, are among the best that can be had, it is not claimed 
 that they are all as definite and appropriate as could be desired. A 
 perfect knowledge of the force of the verb, in all its forms and com- 
 binations, can be gained only from a careful study of its use. 
 
 3. It has been well observed by an able writer on 
 general grammar, that, where the divisions of time are 
 very minute and complex, the expression of these divi- 
 sions makes rather a phrase or a sentence, than a single 
 word. 
 
 The long, complex expression is more than the mind can easily 
 grasp or communicate in the combined form of one word; and hence, 
 to be readily understood, as well as to be most properly and easily 
 uttered, the combination requires to be written in the analytic form, 
 the several relational words, which make up the compound tense, 
 having each a separate position of its own, except where two or more 
 are united by some euphonic change or contraction. (See Part I., 
 Chapter II.)
 
 ] 10 NUMBER AND VARIETY OF TENSES. 
 
 R. The Number of Tenses. 
 
 228. 1. Zulu verbs may be said to have six tenses; 
 namely, three primary, the Present, the Past, and the 
 Future; and three secondary, the Present Perfect, 
 the Past Perfect, and the Future Perfect. 
 
 2. a. In each of these tenses, especially in the indi- 
 cative and potential modes, there are several different 
 forms, and sometimes several varieties of form, used to 
 denote various nice, subordinate distinctions, in respect 
 to the time, state, or condition of the action or being ex- 
 pressed by the verb. 
 
 6. These varied nicer forms may be denominated, 
 Simple, Emphatic, Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, Inceptive, and Progressive. 
 
 REM. No attempt will be made to give every possible form and 
 variety, of time, mode, condition, or state, of which the Zulu verb, 
 with all its auxiliaries, numerous contractions, and power of varied 
 arrangement, is capable. Such a mere display of every possible 
 verbal form, written out in full, with every class, number, and person 
 of the pronouns, would doubtless be of less service, than a good 
 number of more common, well-selected specimens, under the principal 
 divisions, with such an exhibition of the principles, and of the manner 
 in which the different modes and tenses are formed, as will show what 
 must be the proper form and value of those which are omitted. 
 
 229. 1. Among so many diiferent forms and varieties 
 of form, the meaning of one, as might be expected, will 
 sometimes nearly or quite coincide with that of another; 
 so that one may sometimes seem to be used for another, 
 in some cases, without affecting the general sense of the 
 proposition. 
 
 2. Yet upon a closer examination, it will seldom be 
 found that one form of the verb agrees exactly with any 
 other, in its use and import, unless one is a contracted 
 form of the other, and not always even then ; thus, 
 
 The full form of the future, ngi ija ku landa, simply foretells, =1 shall 
 love; but the contracted form, ngo tunda, has an imperative force, 
 to which the brevity of its form is well suited, =1 will love, or let 
 me love. 
 
 KKM. As a general thing, then, there are nice, and often very 
 important, shades of difference, in meaning, among all the different 
 forms and varieties of mode and tense, in which this language is so
 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. HI 
 
 wonderfully prolific. And it is only by a careful study and ready 
 command of these differences, in both form and import, that the great 
 beauty, flexibility, and force of the Zulu verb, can be known, and 
 made most serviceable. The great power of the language lies in 
 the verb. 
 
 230. 1. The foregoing paragraphs, and other remarks 
 upon the verb, refer chiefly to its affirmative forms and 
 use. But, throughout all its modes and tenses, most of 
 its affirmative forms have corresponding negative forms. 
 Sometimes one affirmative form has two negative forms; 
 and in a few instances, one negative form answers to two 
 affirmative forms. 
 
 2. The negative forms are marked, partly, by the use 
 of the negative particles a, or nga (the vowel a hardened 
 by ng), and partly, by means of inflections in the verb. 
 
 REM. These two negative particles (a and nga) are primarily one, 
 a; but when the position of is such, in relation to another vowel, 
 that a hiatus would be produced, or the negative a would be lost by 
 coalescence, or otherwise, in the flow of speech, it takes before it 
 the euphonic ng, which prevents a hiatus and preserves the vowel. 
 Thus, when the negative particle commences a phrase, it requires no 
 euphonic; as, a si tandi, we do not love; but when it follows another 
 word to which it is closely related, two vowels are brought into a 
 position which calls for the euphonic ng, to preserve the negative and 
 give it prominence ; thus, si (ng)a tandi=si nga landi, we not loving, 
 or, if we love not. When the negative a follows the principal verb, 
 in which case it takes the euphonic ng,=nga, the accent is carried 
 forward from the penult to the final syllable of the verb; and hence 
 the negative nga is suffixed; thus, a ngi tanda(ng}a=a ngi tandanga, 
 I did not love. 
 
 c. Tenses of the several Modes. 
 
 A. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 231. The Indicative mode contains all the Tenses; 
 namely, the Present, the Past, the Future, the Present 
 Perfect, the Past Perfect, and the Future Perfect. 
 
 232. I. The Present tense denotes present time. Of 
 this there are six forms; the Simple, the Emphatic, 
 the Continuate, the Definite, the Indefinite, and the 
 Correlative.
 
 INDICATIVE. PRESENT; SIMPLE. 
 
 233. i. 1. a. The Simple form of the present, affirm- 
 ative, consists of the mere root of the verb with its pro- 
 noun nominative ; thus, 
 
 Ngi tanda, I love, or I am loving; or, in its explanatory or parti- 
 cipial, accessory use, I loving. , 
 
 b. The negative, direct, is formed by the use of the 
 negative particle a before the pronoun nominative, and 
 changing the final vowel of the verb a into i; thus, 
 
 A ngi tandi, I do not love. 
 
 The negative indirect, the accessory negative, is formed by the 
 use of the negative particle nga after the pronoun nominative, and 
 changing the final vowel a, as before, into i; thus, ngi nga. iandi, if I 
 love not, or I not loving. 
 
 2. a. This form of the present is used less frequently 
 than the emphatic. Its general characteristic seems to 
 be to affirm or deny action or being, without limiting the 
 same with exactness to a given point. Hence, it is 
 generally employed in connection with interrogative 
 pronouns and adverbs, and often with the relative or 
 e/-form of the verb ; as, 
 
 Ufunani nal you want what? ba hambapi nal they are going Avhere? 
 
 b. This simple form, and its indirect negative, (and 
 the continuate sometimes, but the emphatic never, with 
 propriety,) is used with the relative pronoun and in all 
 accessory clauses, where it often takes the suffix yo; 
 thus, 
 
 Umuntu o tanda, or o tandayo, the person who loves; umuntu o nga 
 tandi, or o nga tandiyo, the person who does not love ; si ya ku hamba, e 
 vuma ubaba, we shall go, father assenting; ba sa sina, si nga vumiyo, 
 they still dance, we not approving. 
 
 c. The simple form of the present is used also to ex- 
 press facts which exist generally, at all times ; customary 
 actions, general truths, habits, &c., which have no re- 
 ference to any specific time ; and, sometimes, to describe 
 past actions, in order to give animation to discourse; as, 
 
 Tin' abamnyama si tanda izinkomo, we black people are fond of 
 cattle; Jen linywa abafazi, the digging is done by the women.
 
 INDIC. PRESENT; EMPHATIC, CONTINUATE. 143 
 
 ^234 ii. 1. a. The Emphatic form of the present, 
 affirmative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary yu ; 
 thus, 
 
 JVgt ya tanda (doubtless, originally, ngi ya ngi tanda), I do love, or 
 I am loving, literally, I go love, or I go I love, or loving. 
 
 b. The negatives of this are the same as in the simple 
 form ; thus, 
 
 Jl ngi tandi, I do not love ; ngi nga tandi, I not loving. 
 
 2. This form of the present, and its direct negative 
 (as a ngi tandi), denotes emphasis ; and is generally 
 used in all direct, decided assertions which refer with 
 precision to the present time ; as, 
 
 Si ya tanda, we do love ; ngi ya bona, I do see. 
 
 in. 1. a. The Continuate form of the present, 
 affirmative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary sa 
 after the pronoun nominative; thus, 
 
 t sa tanda, I still love, or I yet love, or I am still loving. 
 
 b. To this, as to the simple form, there are two forms 
 of the negative: the one, direct; thus, 
 
 Jl ngi sa landi, I do not still love; and the other, indirect, explana- 
 tory; thus, ngi nga sa tandi, (if) I do not still love, or I not still loving. 
 
 2. This form denotes action or being continued from 
 the past to the present, and still existing ; though it 
 sometimes implies a doubt, or the supposition of a doubt, 
 as to its continuation in the future ; or rather, it is often 
 used to certify continued action or being, when circum- 
 stances give a doubt as to its permanence. It occurs 
 often in accessory clauses; and may be rendered fre- 
 quently by, while , when, since, because; as, 
 
 i nge hambe, ngi sa gida, I can not go, being still sick, or while, 
 since, or because I am sick. 
 
 REM. 1. When the predicate or attributive is a noun, adjective, or 
 adverb, without a verbal copula, se is used instead of sa; thus, ngi se 
 mnaiidi, I (am) still well, still in good health; si se kona, we (are) still 
 present; ba se sekaya, they (are) still at home; a ba se ko, or ba nga se 
 ko, they (are) nut still present, or they (being) no longer present.
 
 144 INDIC. PRESENT; DEFINITE, INDEFINITE. 
 
 REIM. ~. We sometimes meet with a kind of reduplication, a com- 
 pound of this form, especially in the negative; thus, direct, a ku sa hi 
 ku sa ba ko 'lulo, contracted, a ku, sa bi sa ba ko 'Info, there is no longer 
 any thing still present; indirect, ku nga sa bi (ku) sa ba ko 'lulo. (See 
 250., 1., Rem. 2.; 254., 1., c.) 
 
 REM. 3. We sometimes meet with what might be called a progressive 
 and continuate combination, especially in the negative, indirect; and 
 sometimes have e instead of t final, in the verb of negation (=be for bi) ; 
 thus, ngi nga be ngi sa tanda; that (or and) I am not still loving; 
 u ya bubisa umjjefumlo wake, a nga be e sa ba naye umsindisi ezuhvini, 
 a nga be e sa ba naye 'ndao, he destroys his soul, and has no longer a 
 Savior in heaven, nor any where else. 
 
 iv. 1. a. The Definite form of the present, 
 affirmative, is marked by the use of se (present perfect 
 of sa), before the pronoun nominative the pronominal 
 subject of the verb ; thus, 
 
 Se ngi tanda, full form, ngi se ngi tanda, just now, already I love; 
 se ngi ya tanda, already do I love, already am I loving. 
 
 b. There are two varieties of negative for this form. 
 The first is marked by the use of the negative nga after 
 the pronoun nominative, and the changing of the final 
 vowel of the verb a to i; thus, 
 
 Se ngi nga tandi, already I do not love. 
 
 The second variety of negative is marked by the use of the negative 
 a or nga, and the use of the auxiliary ka before the principal verb; thus, 
 direct, a ngi ka tandi, I do not yet love ; indirect, ngi nga ka tandi, I not 
 yet loving, before I love, or previous to my loving. 
 
 2. a. In the affirmative, this form denotes action or 
 being already ' clearly and decidedly commenced and 
 likely to continue, implying also a previous absence 
 of such action or being. 
 
 b. In the negative, it denotes that a state of action or 
 being is not already, not yet or quite, at this moment, 
 realized ; generally implying, however, that it may be 
 expected to be realized soon. Hence it is used where, 
 in English, we find a secondary clause introduced by 
 the words before, or previous to; thus, 
 
 Si ya ku hamba ni nga ka vuki, we shall go before you are up. 
 
 237. v. 1. a. The Indefinite, diminutive, or occa-
 
 INDICATIVE. PRESENT; CORRELATIVE. 145 
 
 sional form, affirmative, is marked by the use of ke 
 before the pronominal subject, with or without a du- 
 plicate use of the pronoun, before ke; and by a change 
 of the final vowel of the verb a to c; thus, 
 
 f\'i ngi landc, or ngi ke ngi landc, I sometimes love, or, I love 
 occasionally. 
 
 b. There are two varieties of the negative ; thus, 
 
 The direct, a ngi ke ngi tande, I do not sometimes love, or, rather, I 
 do not love at any time, or I never love; and the indirect, ke ngi nga 
 tandi, or ngi ke ngi nga tandi, I not loving at any lime. 
 
 2. a. This form of the present is used to denote some 
 indefinite point or period of time, without specifying 
 any in particular. To give it a good translation into 
 English is not always easy. In the past, we may render 
 it by once, on a time, as, I once loved ; and in the future, 
 by sometime, as, I shall love sometime, in familiar style, 
 1 shall love sometime or other. So in the present po- 
 tential, in English, we say, I may love sometime, I may 
 love sometime or other. And such is the general force 
 of ke in the present indicative, in Zulu ; and the phrase, 
 ngi ke ngi tande, may be rendered, at some one time 
 or another I love, or on some occasions I love. 
 
 b. The interrogative and negative forms of this variety 
 are much more easily and definitely rendered by ever 
 and never; thus, 
 
 .Vi k( ni tande na ' or kc ni tande iia? do you ever love? a si ke si 
 tandf, we never love. 
 
 c. This form of the verb has, in some cases, something of a diminutive 
 signification, which is easily derived from the character of its auxiliary 
 in denoting some indefinite, uncertain point or sphere of time ; since, from 
 the idea that one loves, walks, or works only on some particular occa- 
 sion, it is easily inferred that he does not love, walk, or work much. 
 
 238. vi. 1. a. The Correlative, complemental, or 
 conjunctive form is marked by the use of the auxiliary 
 za and its pronoun before the pronominal subject of the 
 principal verb ; thus, 
 
 JVgt za ngi tattda, until I see, literally, I come I see. 
 
 The auxiliary za takes before it, generally, the same pronoun which 
 
 S
 
 146 INDICATIVE. - PAST TENSE. 
 
 4 
 
 is nominative direct to the principal verb; though the general indefinite 
 pronoun ku is sometimes used instead ; thus, si za si Jika, or ku za si 
 jika, until we arrive. 
 
 The inflected form, the final a being changed, in the 
 auxiliary, to e, and in the principal verb, to ilc or e, 
 is generally used, either as the present perfect tense 
 instead of the present, or else as denoting the close 
 succession and connection of this verb (the correlative 
 form) to its antecedent ; thus, 
 
 JYgi ya ku hamba ngi ze ngi fikc, I will walk until I have arrived, 
 literally, I will walk and come and arrive; ma si sebenze si ze s' akile 
 umuzi, let us work till we have built the kraal. 
 
 b. The negative is marked by the use of the negative 
 particle nga after the direct pronominal subject, and by 
 changing the final a of the verb into t; thus, 
 
 JVg-i za ngi nga tandi, or ku ze ngi nga tandi, until I do not love. 
 
 2. a. As already intimated, and shown in the fore- 
 going examples, this form of the verb is used as the 
 complement or a correlative to some other verb which 
 goes before ; or it denotes a consequent and limit to 
 some antecedent action or state, either expressed or 
 implied ; thus, 
 
 L'mdani lapa ni ze ni m bone, wait here till ye see him, or in order 
 that ye may see him; na ke na ku zwa ukugula ukuba ni ze ni puze umuti 
 nal did you ever feel sick so as to take medicine. 
 
 6. This form might, perhaps, be regarded as consisting of two prin- 
 cipal verbs; yet, on the whole, the former, za, is thought to rank most 
 properly, in this situation, as an auxiliary or relational verb, the force 
 of which, according to its connection, may be expressed in English by 
 a conjunction, preposition, or adverb, as and, then, till, or until, or by 
 the subjunctive mode with the conjunction that. 
 
 II. The Past tense ("imperfect") represents 
 an action or state as going on at some past time. Of 
 this there are seven forms ; namely, the Simple, the 
 Progressive, the Continuate, the Definite, the Diminu- 
 tive, the Correlative, and the Inceptive. 
 
 RE>I. 1. Under most of these forms there may be found several 
 different varieties, as the following paragraphs will show. 
 
 RUM. 2. In some cases, the characteristic portions of two different
 
 INDICATIVE. PAST J SIMPLE. 147 
 
 forms may be combined in one, so as to constitute a kind of compound 
 form. This is particularly true in some of the negatives of what are 
 called the progressive and the inceptive forms; thus, a ngi banga ngi so 
 bona, I have never since seen, literally, I have not been still seeing. 
 
 240. i. 1. a. The Simple form of the past, affirmative, 
 is marked by the use of a in the pronominal subject, 
 with the simple root of the verb ; thus, nga tanda, I 
 loved. 
 
 REM. 1 . The characteristic of this tense a in the pronoun is pro- 
 bably derived from a contraction of the pronoun, (ngi, si, &c.,) and of the 
 auxiliary ya of the present (see ^ 249., 1., Rem.); thus, ngi yanga; 
 si ya=sa; u ya=iva; ku ya=ktca; ba ya=ba; i i/a=J/a. (See ^ 16.) 
 
 REM. 2. The final vowel of the verb a is sometimes changed to e 
 in this tense, especially in the idiomatic or expletive use of buya, 
 Jika, bonanga, zanga, &c. ; thus, kiva bui/e kira Hmjica, they planted 
 again ; a si bonange si ya kona, we never went there ; a ngi zange ngi 
 kulume ngi pike, I never spoke nor contradicted. But this use is not 
 common, though sometimes heard from good speakers. Neither is it to 
 be encouraged by imitation ; better, Artec buya, a si bonanga, a ngi 
 zanga, &.c. (See ^ 244.. 1., 6.) 
 
 b. The negative, first variety, is marked by the use of 
 the negative particle a before the pronoun nominative ; 
 thus, a nga tanda, I did not love. 
 
 A second variety of negative is formed from the simple 
 affirmative, present, by suffixing the negative nga to 
 to the verb, and using the negative a before the pronoun 
 nominative, for the direct, and by using the negative 
 nga after the pronoun, for the indirect ; thus, 
 
 A ngi tandanga, I did not love; ngi nga tandanga, (that) I did not love, 
 or, I not loving. 
 
 REM. 1. The pronoun a, third person plural, second class, and wa, 
 second person singular, are sometimes hardened by A-; thus, amadoda a 
 ka hamba, the men did not go; a wa landa, or a kiva ianda, thou didst 
 not love. The pronoun u, third person singular, is changed to a, and 
 hardened by k; thus, a ka tanda, he did not love. In the second variety, 
 the pronoun u, second person singular, is sometimes hardened by k or w; 
 thus, a ku tandanga or a wu tandanga, thou didst not love ; so i is some- 
 times hardened by y; thus, a yi tandanga. (See ^ 16.) 
 
 REM. 2. The irregular verbs, uku ti and ukwazi, 
 change z to , in suffixing the negative nga; and uku 
 t&o changes a of the suffix negative into o; thus, a ngi 
 tanga, I did not mean ; a ng' azanga, I did not know ; 
 a ngi tsongo, I did not say.
 
 148 INDICATIVE. PAST ; PROGRESSIVE. 
 
 2. a. The simple form of the past is used to represent 
 an action as taking place at some undefined, completely 
 past time ; as> 
 
 Nga bona umuntu, I saw a person; safuna umsebenzi, we sought \\ork. 
 
 b. The indefinite character of the past tense renders 
 it particularly appropriate in the narration of past 
 events; and hence it might be called the historic tense ; 
 thus, 
 
 Sa puma lapa, ,s /a/a Emngeni, sa vitka kona, safika Embilo, sa linda 
 ubanye; we left this place, slept, at the Umngeni, rose there, reached the 
 Umbilo, waited for others. 
 
 c. This tense is also used idiomatically, in cases of 
 impending danger or difficulty ; thus, 
 
 Wa fa! wafa! you are dead! dead! i.e., you are in danger of being 
 killed, as one said to another, over whom a wagon was about to pass; 
 yek' izembe, wa zilimaza, let the hatchet alone, you wounded yourself, 
 i.e., lest you wound yourself; sukani, na fa ! na fa ! na wela emgodini ! 
 get away, lest you die, die, lest you fall into a pit. 
 
 241. ii. 1. a. The Progressive form of the past, 
 affirmative, first variety, is marked by the use of the 
 auxiliary 6a, and its pronoun in the past or -a form, 
 before the simple form of the present ; thus, 
 
 Nga ba ngi tanda, contracted, nga ngi tanda, I was loving, literally, 
 I was I love, or I was I loving. 
 
 The second variety is marked by the use of 6e, the 
 inflected form of ba, and its pronoun, before the simple 
 form of the present ; thus, 
 
 Ngi be ngi tanda, contracted, be ngi tanda, I was loving, literally, I 
 was I love or loving. 
 
 The third variety is marked by the auxiliary be, with 
 its pronoun in the past or -a form, before the simple 
 present ; thus, 
 
 be ngi tanda, contracted, nga ngi tanda, I was loving, I used to 
 love, or I was accustomed to love. 
 
 REM. 1. The pronoun u, third person singular, before the principal 
 verb, in these forms, usually changes to e; ba, third person plural, to be; 
 and a to t; thus, wa be e tanda, he was loving; ba be be tanda, they were 
 loving.
 
 INDICATIVE. PAST; CONTINUATE. 149 
 
 REM. 2. Contractions often occur between some of the pronouns 
 and auxiliaries in these forms ; as, ' u bu tanda,' from ' u be u tanda,' 
 thou wast loving; ' wa be tanda,' from ' wa be e tanda,' he was loving; 
 ' i bi taiida,' from ' i be i tanda,' it was loving. 
 
 b. The negative, first variety, of these forms, is marked 
 by the use of the negative particle nga hefore the principal 
 verb, the final a of the verb changing to i, the indirect 
 negative of the simple present, with the auxiliaries of 
 the past ; thus, 
 
 1 Nga ba ngi nga tandi,' contracted, ' nga ngi nga tandi,' I was not 
 loving ; ' si be si nga tandi,' contracted, ' be si nga tandi,' we were 
 not loving ; ' sa be si nga tandi,' contracted, ' sa si nga tandi,' we 
 were not loving, or accustomed to love. 
 
 A second variety of the negative puts the negative particles with the 
 auxiliaries ; thus, 'a ngi banga ngi tanda;' 'ngi nga banga ngi tanda;' 
 'a nga be ngi tanda.' 
 
 REM. This second variety of the negative seldom occurs, except 
 in a combination of the progressive and continuate forms; thus, direct, 
 ' a ngi banga ngi sa tanda,' I never loved again; indirect, ' ngi nga 
 banga ngi sa tanda,' (that) I never loved again. 
 
 2. These various progressive forms represent the state 
 of action or being as unfinished at a certain specified 
 time past ; or they represent that state as present and 
 continuing in some indefinite period of past time. See 
 the foregoing examples. 
 
 REM. According to formation, the second variety of negative 
 belongs, as above, to the progressive form ; but according to its import, it 
 belongs rather under the fifth, the indefinite form. (See 244., 1., 6.) 
 
 242. iii. 1. . The Continuate form of the past, 
 affirmative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary sa 
 after the pronoun of the simple form ; thus, nga sa 
 tanda, I still loved. 
 
 A second variety of this form, or rather a combination 
 of this and the progressive form, is marked by the use of 
 sa after the direct pronominal subject in the several pro- 
 gressive forms of the past ( 141., 1.) ; thus, 
 
 ' Nga be ngi sa tanda;' 'ngi be ngi sa tanda,' contracted, 'be 
 ngi sa tanda,' or 'nga be sa tanda,' or 'ngi be sa tanda,' I was 
 still loving.
 
 150 INDIC. PAST; DEFINITE, INDEFINITE. 
 
 b. The negative of this form, first variety, is marked 
 by the use of the negative a before the affirmative form; 
 thus, 
 
 ' A nga sa tanda,' I did not still love. 
 
 The negatives of the second variety are the same as in the several 
 negative varieties of the progressive form, with the use of sa before 
 the principal verb; thus, 'nga be ngi nga sa tandi;' 'ngi be ngi nga sa 
 t andi ; ' ' be ngi nga sa tandi : ' ' a ngi banga ngi sa tanda ; ' ' ngi nga banga 
 ngi sa tanda;' 'a nga be ngi sa tanda; 5 'ka nga be ngi nga sa tandi.' 
 
 2. The use and import of this form of the past may be 
 easily gathered from remarks upon the continuate form 
 of the present tense, together with remarks upon the 
 simple and progressive forms of the past tense, and 
 from the examples given above, without any thing further 
 in this connection. (See 235., 240., 241.) 
 
 ^243. iv. 1. The Definite form of the past is marked 
 by the use of se, with or without its pronoun, after the 
 auxiliary ba or be of the progressive past ; thus, 
 
 Affirmative, ' nga be ngi se ngi tanda,' contracted, ' be ngi se ngi 
 tanda,' or ' nga be se ngi tanda,' I was evidently loving, or I was 
 already loving. 
 
 Negative, c nga be ngi se ngi nga tandi,' I was not evidently loving. 
 
 A second variety of negative for this form is marked by the use of 
 the negative nga, with the auxiliary ka and its pronoun, after the aux- 
 iliary ba or be of the progressive form, changing the final vowel of the 
 verb a to i; thus, 'ngi be ngi nga ka tandi,' contracted, ' be ngi nga 
 ka tandi,' I was not yet loving. 
 
 2. The import of this form is sufficiently indicated 
 by remarks on the definite present, and progressive 
 past, together with the examples above given. (See 
 <$236., 241.) 
 
 ^244. v. 1. a. The Indefinite or occasional form of 
 the past, affirmative, is marked by the use of the aux- 
 iliary fca, or fee, with its pronoun in the -a form, before 
 the simple form of the past ; thus, 
 
 ' Nga ka nga tanda,' or ' nga ke nga tanda,' I did once love; ' na 
 ke na tanda na?' did you ever love? 
 
 b. (I.) The negative is usually marked by the use of
 
 INDICATIVE. PAST; CORRELATIVE. 151 
 
 the auxiliary za in its several negative forms, direct and 
 indirect, with the principal verb in the inflected form, a 
 final being changed to e; thus, 
 
 Direct, ' a si zanga si tande,' we never loved; indirect, ' si nga 
 zanga si tande,' (that) we never loved. 
 
 '(2.) Sometimes the auxiliary ba is used instead of za, 
 especially in connection with the continuate form ; as, 
 
 ' A ngi banga ngi tanda, 1 or 'a ngi banga ngi sa tanda.' (See 
 241., 1., 6., also 2., Rem.) 
 
 (3.) Sometimes the auxiliary ka or ke may be heard 
 in this kind of negative; thus, 
 
 ' A sa kanga sa tanda,' once we did not love; indirect, 'si nga 
 kanga sa tanda;' or again, ' sa ka si nga tandanga;' so also, ' sa ke 
 si nga tandanga, 5 we never loved. 
 
 (4.) Sometimes a negative of this kind is formed by 
 the use of bona as an auxiliary; thus, 
 
 ' Ya ti a ba bonanga be bona umlungukazi,' he said they never saw 
 a white woman ; ' uma ku nga bonanga ku bonwa umuntu le 'mizi,' 
 now suppose nobody had ever seen these cities. 
 
 2. The import of this form has been stated, in sub 
 stance, in the remarks upon the indefinite of the present, 
 and on the simple form of the past, and sufficiently 
 illustrated in the foregoing examples. (See ^ 237., 240.) 
 
 245. vi. 1. a. The Correlative form of the past, affir- 
 mative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary za, or ze, 
 with its pronoun in the -a form, before the simple form 
 of the past ; thus, 
 
 'Nga za nga tanda,' and, then, until, or at last, 1 loved; ' sa ze sa 
 sondela,' then we drew near. 
 
 b. The negative is marked by the use of these same 
 auxiliary forms before the negatives of the simple, past; 
 thus, 
 
 Direct, ' sa za a sa tanda,' until we did not love; indirect, ' sa za 
 si nga tandanga,' until we not loving. 
 
 2. The import of this form of the past differs from 
 the correlative of the present only in point of time.
 
 152 INDICATIVE. PAST; INCEPTIVE. 
 
 3. There is a second variety of the correlative, past, 
 which is marked by the use of the auxiliary ye (inflected 
 form of ya) with its pronoun in the -a form, before the 
 simple form of the present; thus, 
 
 Affirmative. ' nga ye ngi tanda,' contracted, ' nga ngi tanda,' and, 
 or then I loved, or I did love; negative, ' nga ye ngi nga tandi,' con- 
 tracted, 'nga ngi nga tandi,' and, or then I loved not, or I did not 
 love ; ' sa ye si nga tandi,' contracted, ' sa si nga tandi,' then we did 
 not love. 
 
 4. This second variety of the correlative, like that 
 which is marked by the auxiliary za, has something of a 
 complemental force, and may be rendered sometimes by 
 till or until. Its more proper and usual import, however, 
 is rather that of mere sequence, which is best rendered 
 by and, then, and then; thus, 
 
 ' Sa vuka sa ye si hamba,' or ' sa si hamba,' we rose up and 
 went ; ' sa geza emfuleni sa si buya,' we bathed in the river and then 
 returned. 
 
 246. vii. 1. a. The Inceptive, contingent, or predic- 
 tive form of the past, affirmative, is marked by the use 
 of the auxiliary be with or without its pronoun, before 
 the simple form of the future tense (see 248., 1., a.); 
 thus, 
 
 ' Ngi be ngi ya ku tanda,' contracted, ' be ngi ya ku tanda,' I was 
 about to love, I would or might love or have loved, literally, I 
 was going to love. 
 
 REM. Sometimes the pronoun before the auxiliary be takes the a 
 form, the sign of the past; thus, ' nga be ngi ya ku tanda;' 'sa be si 
 ya ku tanda,' contracted, ' sa si ya ku tanda.' 
 
 The negative is marked by the same auxiliary before 
 the indirect negative of the future (see 248., 1., &.); 
 thus, 
 
 ' Ngi be ngi nga yi ku tanda,' contracted, ' be ngi nga yi ku tanda,' 
 I was not about to love, or I would or might not love, or have loved. 
 
 6. A second variety of the inceptive, past, is marked 
 by the use of the same auxiliary (be or ba) before the 
 simple form of the future, second variety, inceptive (see 
 
 248., 3., 4.); thus,
 
 INDICATIVE. PAST; INCEPTIVE. 153 
 
 Affirmative, ' ngi be ngi za ku tanda,' or ' nga be ngi za ku tanda,' 
 contracted, ' be ngi za ku tanda,' or 'nga ngi za ku tanda,' I was 
 about to love, or I was coming to love. 
 
 Negative, ' ngi be ngi nge za ku tanda,' ' ngi be ngi nge zi ku tanda,' 
 or ' nga be ngi nge zi ku tanda,' contracted, 'be ngi nge z' uku 
 tanda,' or ' nga ngi nge z' uku tanda,' I was not about to love. 
 
 c. A third variety of this form is marked by the use of 
 the auxiliary ye with its pronoun in the -a form, before 
 the simple form of the future ; thus, 
 
 ' Nga ye ngi ya ku tanda,' contracted, 'nga ngi ya ku tanda,' I 
 was going to love, I would have loved. 
 
 d. Still another variety of the past inceptive form is 
 derived from the use of the continuate future ( 250.) 
 instead of the simple, with the above named introductory 
 auxiliaries, ba, be, or ye; thus, 
 
 Affirmative, 'nga be ngi sa ya ku tanda,' I was about still to love; 
 negative, ' nga be ngi nga sa yi ku tanda.' 
 
 2. The several varieties of this form of the past are 
 used to express a past readiness or intention to do or he 
 something which was then future, had an opportunity 
 been given, or no obstacle been interposed. Hence, this 
 form often answers to the English potential and subjunc- 
 tive forms in might, could, would, should; and it is often 
 accompanied by another proposition of a subordinate 
 character, with a verb in the explanatory indicative, or 
 else in the subjunctive mode ; thus, 
 
 ' Be ngi nge zi ku tanda, uma nga be ngi za ku hamba ngedwa; se 
 ngi vuma, ngokuba si za ku hamba nomunye, si hambe si pumuzana 
 isizungu;' I should not be willing, if I were to go alone; however, I 
 consent, because we are to go with another, relieving each other of 
 loneliness as we go. 
 
 REM. 1. Though both its usual import and the leading auxiliaries 
 of this form, nga ye, nga be, ngi be, put it most properly in the past 
 tense, yet its general connection, particularly with the subordinate 
 proposition, gives it the signification, sometimes of the past perfect, 
 sometimes of the present, and sometimes of the future. Thus, the 
 verbs in the sentence, ' uma u bu nga yi bonanga inkomo, i be i ya 
 ku baleka i ye ekaya,' are both most properly rendered in the past 
 perfect; thus, if you had not seen the cow, she would have run a\vav 
 and gone home: while the verbs in the sentence, 'be ngi za ku hamba 
 ukuba ba fika ngi se kona,' may be rendered in the past or present, 
 according to its connection; and the verbs in the sentence, ' sa be si 
 za ku hamba uma ni za ku hamba,' might be rendered in the future. 
 
 T
 
 154 INDICATIVE. FUTURE ; SIMPLE. 
 
 REM. 2. The contingent import of this form of the past, embodying 
 a certain fact, generally upon some condition, with liberty of reference 
 to almost any time, present, past, or future, makes the use of its 
 several varieties very common and important. 
 
 24-7. III. The Future tense denotes future time; 
 and of this there are seven forms; namely, the Simple, 
 the Emphatic, the Continuate, the Definite, the Inde- 
 finite, the Correlative, and the Progressive. Of some 
 of these forms there are several varieties. 
 
 248. i. 1. a. The Simple form of the future, first 
 variety, affirmative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary 
 ya with the infinitive of the principal verb, the initial u 
 of the infinitive sign (uku) being elided ; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi ya ku tanda,' I shall love, literally, I go to love. 
 
 b. The negative is formed by changing the final vowel 
 of the auxiliary a to i, and using the negative a before 
 the pronoun nominative, for direct negation ; and the 
 negative nga after the pronoun nominative, for indirect 
 or accessory negation ; thus, 
 
 ' A ngi yi ku tanda,' I shall not love; ' ngi nga yi ku tanda,' (that) 
 I shall not love. 
 
 2. This variety of the future simply predicts, or 
 represents an action or state which is yet to come ; 
 as in the above examples. 
 
 3. a. A second variety of the simple future, affirma- 
 tive, is marked by the use of the auxiliary za with the 
 contracted infinitive of the principal verb ; thus, 
 
 1 Ngi za ku tanda,' I shall love, or I am going to love, or I am about 
 to love, literally, I come to love. 
 
 6. The negative, direct, of this variety, is formed by 
 the use of the negative a before the pronoun nominative ; 
 thus, 
 
 ' A ngi za ku tanda;' the indirect, by the use of nga after the pro- 
 noun nominative, a of nga usually changing to e before the auxiliary 
 za; thus, 'ngi nge za ku tanda.' 
 
 REM. The a of za, in the negative of this variety, often changes to 
 i (=zt), the same as a in ya, first variety, (=yi); thus, ' a ngi zi ku
 
 INDICATIVE. FUTURE ; EMPHATIC. 155 
 
 tanda,' 'ngi nge zi ku tanda;' or, what is more common, the a (or i), in 
 za (zi), may be elided, and the u restored in tlie ku ( uAni) giving the 
 principal verb the full infinitive form; thus, 'a ngi z' uku tanda,' or 
 4 a ngi zu ku tanda;' 'ngi nge z' uku tanda,' or 'ngi nge zu ku tanda.' 
 
 4. This second variety of the simple future is some- 
 times used in much the same m;mner as the first. It 
 has generally, however, more of an inceptive force, de- 
 noting the commencement of an action or state, or an 
 
 O 
 
 intention to commence without delay ; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi za ku hamba,' I am about to go, literally, I come to go,=I 
 shall go at once. 
 
 REM. While the true import of this variety, taking the whole 
 phrase or form together, gives it a future character, and limits the 
 verb za to the rank of an auxiliary, a rigid analysis (as in ^ 248., 6., 
 Rem.) might insist upon giving to za the rank of a notional verb, in 
 the present tense, and consider the second verb as an infinitive. (See 
 238., 2., 6.; 207., Rem. 1.; 227., 1.) 
 
 . ii. I. . The Emphatic form of the future, 
 affirmative, is marked by the use of o in the pronoun 
 nominative, with the simple root of the verb. This o 
 occupies the same place in the pronoun here, that a does 
 in the simple past (see 240., 1 .), taking the place of i or 
 of a in those pronouns which end in these letters ; being 
 suffixed to those which consist of i or u, or end in u 9 
 these vowels i or u passing over into their cognate con- 
 sonants ; and taking the place of the pronoun a, third 
 person, second class, plural ; thus, 
 
 'Ngo tanda,' I will love; 'no tanda,' ye shall love. 
 
 REM. This form of the future is evidently derived from the simple, 
 full form 'ngi ya ku tanda' by a repeated contraction, or an elision 
 and composition of its pronoun and auxiliaries. For example, taking 
 the second, or inceptive variety of the simple future, ' ngi za ku 
 tanda,' dropping k and uniting a u=o, we have 'ngi zo tanda' 
 a form still in frequent use; and from this, by dropping z, eliding i in 
 ngi, and uniting o with the pronoun, we have 'ngo tanda.' 
 
 In the same manner, by dropping y and k, and joining a-u (=o) 
 with the pronoun ngi (=?igo), from the full, simple form, 'ngi ya 
 ku tanda,' we have the contracted, emphatic form 'ngo tanda;' 
 just as we have the contracted form ' ngi so tanda,' from ' ngi sa ya 
 ku tanda.' A contraction of similar extent occurs in the word 
 ' umuntwana,' where, by dropping un and w, and eliding na, we have 
 umta; and in like manner, from 'umuntwana wake,' we have the 
 abridged form c umtan' ake.'
 
 156 INDICATIVE. FUTURE ; CONT1NUATE. 
 
 fe. The negative of this form is the same as that of the 
 
 O 
 
 simple, first variety ; thus, 
 
 Jl ngi yi kit tanda j indirect, ngi nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 REM. According to analogy, the negative of this form would \>c 
 obtained by using the negative a before the affirmative; thus, a ngo 
 tanda, &c. ; but these forms, a ngo tanda, a so tanda, Stc., are often 
 used as imperative affirmatives, the a being a. sign of the imperative 
 ma; thus, ma ngo tanda, contracted, a ngo tanda, let me in future love. 
 Hence, the use of this form a ngo tanda as a negative, is seldom or 
 never heard in Isizulu, except in the auxiliary za or zc ; as, a kico ze 
 ku be ngunapakade, it shall not be forever. 
 
 2. a. This form of the future is sometimes used, like 
 the simple, in a predictive sense. But its more frequent 
 use and import are, to denote a determination, a promise, 
 or a command; for which purpose it is well fitted by the 
 brevity of its form. 
 
 Hence it corresponds to the imperative or promissive use of mil in 
 the first person, and shall in the second and third, in the English 
 future; thus, ngo tanda, I will love; no tanda, ye shall love; bo tanda, 
 they shall love; while the full or simple form, as, ngi (ni or 6a) ya ku 
 tanda, corresponds to the predictive use of shall in the first person, 
 English, and to will in the second and third persons; thus, ngi ya ku 
 tanda, I shall love; ngo tanda, I will love; ni ya ku tanda, ye will love; 
 no tanda, ye shall love. 
 
 b. This form is also used in connection with the 
 simple, sometimes adversatively, and sometimes for the 
 sake of variety of expression ; as, 
 
 .# ngi yi ku muka, ngo sala, I shall not depart, I will remain; a ngi 
 yi kufa, ngo pi/a, I shall not die, but recover; ngi ya ku ya, ngo tenga, 
 I shall go and purchase. 
 
 250. iii. 1. The Continuate form of the future is 
 derived from the simple forms of the same, by the use 
 of set before the auxiliaries ya or za of the simple, the 
 a of sa changing to e before za; thus, 
 
 Affirmative, ngi sa ya ku tanda, I yet or still shall love, literally, I 
 am still going to love; ngi se za ku tanda, I am still about to love. 
 
 Negative, direct, a ngi sa yi ku tanda, I am not still going to love, 
 or I shall love no more; indirect, ngi nga sa yi ku tanda, (that) I am 
 not still going to love. 
 
 REM. 1. Sometimes thene forms are greatly abridged (see ^ 16.,
 
 INDIC. FUTURE; DEFINITE, INDEFINITE. 157 
 
 and ^249., 1., a., Rem.), ngi sa ya ku tanda being contracted into 
 ngi so tanda; and, a ngi sa yi ku tanda, into a ngi so tanda. These 
 short forms are not, however, very common, except in strong idiomatic, 
 negative expressions, such as, a ngi so ze ngi tande, I will never love; 
 a A'a so ze a bone ukupila, he shall never see life. 
 
 REM. 2. We sometimes meet with a kind of compound or redupli- 
 cated variety of this form, especially in the negative, as in the following 
 examples, a ngi so ze (or za) nga tanda, full form, a ngi sa yi ku za 
 ngi sa tanda, I will never love more, literally, I am not still going to 
 come and still love; uma si kutele a si so ze sa fa ymdingo, if we are 
 industrious we shall never again, or still, die of want. (See 235., 
 2., Rem. 2.) 
 
 2. The general import of the continuate future is 
 sufficiently indicated by the foregoing examples, and by 
 remarks upon the same form in the present tense, and 
 upon the simple form of the future. (See 235., 248.) 
 
 251. iv. 1. The Definite form of the future, affir- 
 mative, is marked by the use of the auxiliary se, with 
 or without its pronoun, before the simple form of the 
 future ; thus, 
 
 Se ngi ya ku tanda, full form, ngi se ngi ya ku tanda, evidently I 
 shall love, or I am just a going to love; se ngi za ku fa, I am just 
 ready to die, or I am at the point of death. 
 
 2. The negatives for this form are the same as those 
 of the last, the continuate; as, a ngi sa yi ku tanda; a 
 ngi so ze ngi tande; a ngi so ze nga tanda; indirect, 
 ngi nga so za nga tanda. 
 
 252. v. 1. The Indefinite or occasional form of 
 the future is marked by the use of the auxiliary ke 
 in the future, before the principal verb and its pro- 
 noun, the final vowel of the principal verb a being 
 changed to e; thus, 
 
 Affirmative, ngi ya ku ke ngi tande, I shall sometime love. 
 
 Negative, direct, a ngi yi ku ke ngi tande, I shall not sometime 
 love; indirect, ngi nga yi ku ke ngi tande, (that) I shall not some- 
 time love. 
 
 2. The remarks upon the indefinite of the present, 
 together with the above examples, are a sufficient illus- 
 tration of the import of this form in the future.
 
 158 INDIC. FUTURE; CORREL., PROGRES. 
 
 REM. The import of this form, and that of the continuate, renders 
 a combination of the two both easy and not uncommon; thus, ngi sa ya 
 ku ke. ngi lande, I shall yet love sometime; a ngi sa yi ku he ngi tande, 
 I shall not yet love at any time. 
 
 253. vi. 1. The Correlative form of the future is 
 marked by the use of ze, and its pronoun, hefore the 
 simple form of the future ; thus, 
 
 JVgi ze ngi ya ku tanda, until I shall love; negative, ngi ze ngi nga 
 yi ku tanda, until I shall not love. 
 
 REM. The verb za may be used in the simple future form, followed 
 by the principal verb inflected in e, and its pronoun; thus, affirmative, 
 ngi ya ku za ngi tande, or ngo za ngi tande, and or until I shall love; 
 negative, a ngi yi ku za ngi tande, and or until I shall not love. 
 
 2. The present form of the correlative, as, ngi za ngi 
 tanda, or, more frequently, the present perfect, ngi ze 
 ngi tande, is often used instead of the above proper 
 future forms, the mind being carried forward to the time 
 of the event to happen, so as to regard it as present; as 
 is often done in English, where the words till, when, as 
 soon as, are used. Hence, the import of the above 
 forms of the future does not differ essentially from that 
 of the present. 
 
 254 vii. 1. a. The Progressive form of the future is 
 marked Jby the use of the auxiliary ba in the simple 
 future, followed by the simple present of the principal 
 verb ; thus, 
 
 Affirmative, ngLya ku ba ngi tanda, I shall be loving. 
 
 Negative, direct, a ngi yi kn ba ngi tanda; indirect, ngi nga yi ku 
 ba ngi tanda. 
 
 b. A second variety of this form is marked by the use 
 of the auxiliary ba in the continuate future, together 
 with the principal verb in the simple present ; thus, 
 
 Ngi sa ya ku ba ngi tanda; negative, a ngi sa yi ku ba ngi tanda. 
 
 c. A third variety employs both the auxiliary ba and 
 the principal verb in the continuate form ; thus, 
 
 Si sa ya ku ba si sa tanda, we shall still be still loving; negative, 
 a si sa yi ku ba si sa tanda, we shall not still be still loving ; or si sa 
 ya ku ba si nga sa tandi, we shall still be not still loving.
 
 INDICATIVE. PRESENT PERFECT. 159 
 
 2. The import of this form is sufficiently indicated by 
 remarks upon the progressive of the past (<$241., 2.), and 
 upon the continuate of the present (235., 2.), together 
 with the examples given above. 
 
 255. IV. 1. The Present Perfect tense represents 
 an action or state as past and complete at the present 
 time. 
 
 REM. This tense, in the Zulu, unlike the same in English, may be 
 used with words which specify some particular past time, as well as 
 with those which specify the present. ; thus, ngi tandile izolo, I (have) 
 loved yesterday. In this respect, the Zulu language has a parallel in 
 the French and German, in both of which languages the auxiliaries 
 corresponding to the English have, in the present perfect, are sometimes 
 correctly used with specified past time; thus, Je V ai vu hier is good 
 French, just as ngi m bonile izolo is good Zulu; though, / have seen 
 him yesterday would not be good English. So, in German, we may have 
 Er hat ihn gestern gelobt, he (has) praised him yesterday; or, ich habe 
 ihn gestern gesehen,=ngi m bonile izolo, which we must render into 
 English by saying, (not, I have seen, but,) / SAW him yesterday. 
 
 2. Of this tense there are five forms, the Simple, the 
 Continuate, the Definite, the Indefinite, and the Cor- 
 relative. 
 
 256. i. 1. a. The Simple form of the present perfect 
 is marked by the inflection of the verb, the final a being 
 changed into 7e, and sometimes contracted into e; thus, 
 
 Ngi tandile, contracted, ngi tande, I have loved, or I loved. 
 
 REM. 1. Verbs ending in a/a generally change this 
 into ele in forming the present perfect; thus, ngi bulele, 
 I have killed, from bulala. So, \wele from iwala, lele 
 from /a/a, sele from sala, zele from zala, twele from 
 twala, bonakele from bonakala, nyukamele from nyu- 
 kamala. But <la/a, sit, generally makes 'lezi, rarely 
 l \alile; Ta/a, play, makes To/7e. 
 
 REM. 2. Verbs ending in ana generally change this 
 
 into ene in forming the present perfect; thus, si 'langene, 
 
 we have met together, from 'langana; so tandene from 
 
 tandana, pambene from pambana ; but fumene or 
 
 fumanile from fumana. 
 
 REM. 3. Many verbs in ata make the present perfect
 
 160 INDICATIVE. PRESENT PERFECT. 
 
 in ete; as, pete from pata, ambete from ambata, fu?n- 
 bete from fumbata; but tabete or tabatile from tabata, 
 tete or latile from to to. 
 
 REM. 4. Some verbs form the present perfect by 
 changing final a into i; or perhaps we should say, from 
 an abridgment of the full and regular form by cutting off 
 le from He; thus, ngi suti, I have satisfied my appetite, 
 or I am sated, from suta (or sutile), be full or sated. 
 So, mi from ma, miti from mita, 'luti from 'Iwto. 
 
 REM. 5. The verb /so makes the present perfect in 
 tsilo; 'lala, sit, makes 'lezi, rarely 'lalile. 
 
 b. The negative, direct, is marked by the use of the 
 negative a, before the pronoun nominative; thus, 
 
 ' A ngi tandile,' I have not loved; indirect, by the use of nga, after 
 the pronoun nominative; thus, 'ngi nga tandile,' (that) I have not 
 loved, or I not having loved. 
 
 REM. The second variety of the negative for the past tense, simple 
 form, constitutes a second variety also for the present perfect; thus, 
 direct, ' a ngi tandanga,' I loved not, or I have not loved; indirect, 
 ' ngi nga tandanga,' (that) I loved not, or have not loved. 
 
 2. This form of the verb represents the being, action, 
 or passion, as having taken place at a previous time, but 
 as connected also with the present. (See 255., 1., 
 Rem.) 
 
 REM. a. This form of the present perfect has the force of the simple 
 present, in some intransitive verbs, especially such as denote the state, 
 property or quality of a person or thing; as, ' ku lungile,' it is right; 
 ' u lele,' he is asleep; ' ngi mi,' lam standing; 'si lambile,' we are 
 hungry. 
 
 b. The subjective species of verbs (^ 194.) is often used in this way; 
 thus, ' i sabekile,' it is fearful; ' itandekile,' it is lovely. 
 
 257. 1. The other forms, as the Continuate, Definite, 
 &c., are marked by the same auxiliaries, as sa, se, &c., 
 which mark the corresponding forms in the other tenses, 
 the principal verb in the present perfect always taking 
 the inflected form He or e, as in the simple of the present 
 perfect. 
 
 2. The import of these other forms may be learned 
 from the corresponding forms in the other tenses, 
 the present, past, and future, as already given, and
 
 INDICATIVE. PAST PERFECT. 161 
 
 from the above remarks on the import of the present 
 perfect ; also from the examples of the several dif- 
 ferent forms of this tense, as given in the following 
 paragraphs : 
 
 J58. ii. The Continuate form of the present perfect; 
 
 Aff. Ngi sa tandile, I have still loved. 
 Neg. A ngi sa tandile, or tandanga. 
 Xeg. Ngi nga sa tandile, or tandanga. 
 
 259. iii. The Definite form of the present perfect ; 
 
 AfT. Se ngi tandile, or tande, I have just loved. 
 Neg. i'l$ in the Continuate form, above. 
 
 260. iv. The Indefinite form of the present perfect ; 
 
 Aff. Ngi ke ngi tandile, I have once loved. 
 Neg. A ngi ke ngi tandile, I have never loved. 
 
 261. v. The Correlative form of the present perfect ; 
 
 Aff. Ngi ze ngi tandile, and, or until I have loved. 
 Neg. Ngi ze ngi nga tandile, until I did not love. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga ye ngi tandile, and I have loved, or then I loved. 
 Neg. Nga ye ngi nga tandile, contracted, nga ngi nga tande. 
 
 262. V. The Past Perfect tense ("pluperfect") 
 denotes past time, that precedes some other past time, to 
 which it refers. Of this there are six forms ; namely, 
 the Simple, the Continuate, the Definite, the Indefinite, 
 the Correlative, and the Inceptive. 
 
 263. 1. The first variety of each of these forms, 
 except the correlative and inceptive, is derived from the 
 corresponding form of the present perfect, by using 
 before it the auxiliary be and its pronoun ; thus, 
 
 Present perfect, 'ngi tandile,' I have loved; past perfect, 'ngi be 
 ngi tandile,' I had loved, literally, I was I have loved. 
 
 2. The first variety of the correlative employs the 
 auxiliary be and its pronoun, after the auxiliary ze; 
 
 u
 
 162 INDICATIVE. PAST PERFECT. 
 
 though the second variety puts it before the other 
 auxiliaries, as in most of the other forms of this tense. 
 
 (See <$ 269.) 
 
 3. The inceptive is derived from the simple of the 
 future perfect, by using before it the auxiliary be, with 
 or without its pronoun. (See 270.) 
 
 264. The general import of the several forms of the 
 past perfect, may he learned from what has been said 
 upon the corresponding forms in the preceding tenses, 
 together with the definition of this tense as already given, 
 and from the examples which follow. (See 265 270.) 
 
 REM. 1. The past perfect forms have the signification of the present 
 perfect, in all those verbs whose present perfect forms have a present 
 signification; thus, ngi be ngi mi, contracted, be ngi mi, I was or have 
 been standing; ngi be ngi lambile, I was or have been hungry. 
 
 REM. 2. Other verbs, as well as those signifying some state or 
 attribute of an object, are sometimes used in a past perfect form with a 
 present perfcct import, this import, in such cases, being of a pro- 
 gressive character; thus, ngi be ngi bonile, contracted, be ngi bonile, I 
 had seen, literally, I was I have seen; and hence, according to the 
 connection, either, I had seen, or I have been seeing. 
 
 REM. 3. Where the past perfect form has the force of the present 
 perfect, the past perfect import may be given, by using before it the 
 auxiliary ye with its pronoun in the -a form, the auxiliaries of the 
 third variety of the correlative, past perfect; thus, nga ye ngi be ngi 
 mi, I had stood, or I had been standing; ng'a ye ngi be ngi lambile, I 
 had hungered, or I had been hungry. 
 
 The following are examples of the principal forms and 
 varieties of the Past Perfect Tense : 
 
 265. i. The Simple form, 
 
 AfF. (Ngi) be ngi tandile, I had loved. 
 Neg. (Ngi) be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 266. ii. The Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. (Ngi) be ngi sa tandile, I had still loved. 
 Neg. (Ngi) be ngi nga sa tandile. 
 
 267. iii. The Definite form, 
 
 Aff'. Ngi be se ngi tandile, I had evidently loved. 
 Neg. Ngi be ngi nga sa tandile.
 
 INDICATIVE. FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga be ngi se ngi tandile, I had already loved. 
 Neg. Se nga be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 AfF. Se ngi be ngi tandile. already had I loved. 
 Neg. Se ngi be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 268. iv. The Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. (Ngi) be ngi ke ngi tandile, I had once loved. 
 Neg. (Ngi) be ngi ke ngi nga tandile. 
 Neg. Nga be ngi nga zanga ngi tande. 
 
 269. v. The Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Ngi ze ngi be ngi tandile, until I had loved. 
 Neg. Ngi ze ngi be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Ngi be ngi ze ngi tandile, I had then loved. 
 Neg. Ngi be ngi ze ngi nga tandile. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga (ye) ngi be ngi tandile, and, or then I had loved. 
 Neg. Nga (ye) ngi be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 270. vi. The Inceptive form, 
 
 Aff. (Ngi) be ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, I was about to have loved, 
 or I would, should, or might have loved. 
 
 Neg. (Ngi) be ngi ya ku ba ngi nga tandile. 
 Neg. (Ngi) be ngi nga yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 REM. Parentheses ( ) in the above examples signify that the part 
 enclosed may be omitted. Using the part enclosed gives the full form; 
 omitting it, the contracted; thus, ngi be ngi tandile, contracted, be ngi 
 tandile. So in other places. 
 
 271. VI. The Future Perfect tense (''second 
 future") denotes future time, that precedes some other 
 future time, to which it refers. Of this there are 
 six forms ; namely, the Simple, the Emphatic, the 
 Continuate, the Definite, the Indefinite, and the Cor- 
 relative. 
 
 272. 1 . These forms are derived from the corres-
 
 164 INDICATIVE. FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 ponding forms of the future, by substituting the auxiliary 
 ba in place of the principal verb of the future, and sub- 
 joining the simple present perfect of the principal verb. 
 See examples given below. 
 
 2. The import of the several forms of the future 
 perfect, may be learned from the definition of this tense 
 as already given, and from corresponding forms in the 
 foregoing present, past, and future tenses, arid also 
 from the following- 
 Examples of the Future Perfect Tense : 
 
 273. i. The Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, I shall have loved. 
 Neg. A ngi yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 Neg. Ngi nga yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Ngi za ku ba ngi tandile, I am about to have loved. 
 Neg. A ngi z' uku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 274. ii. The Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Ngo ba ngi tandile, I will have loved. 
 Neg. As in the Simple form, above. 
 
 275. iii. The Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Ngi sa ya ku ba ngi tandile, I shall yet have loved. 
 Neg. A ngi sa yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Ngi se za ku ba ngi tandile, I am yet about to have loved. 
 
 Neg. A ngi se za ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 Neg. Ngi nga se za ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 Neg. A ngi so ze ngi be ngi tandile. 
 
 276. iv. The Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, already I shall have loved. 
 Neg. A ngi sa yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 
 277. v. The Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Ngi ya ku ke ngi be ngi tandile, I shall sometime have loved. 
 
 Neg. A ngi yi ku ke ngi be ngi tandile. 
 
 Neg. Ngi nga yi ku ke ngi be ngi tandile. 
 
 Neg. Ngi ya ku ke ngi be ngi nga tandile.
 
 REMARKS ON THE TENSES. 165 
 
 278. vi. The Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Ngi ze ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, until I shall have loved. 
 Neg. Ngi ze ngi nga yi ku ba ngi tandile. 
 Neg. Ngi ze ngi ya ku ba ngi nga tandile. 
 
 279. GENERAL REMARKS UPON THE FOREGOING 
 TENSES. 1. The foregoing are the principal forms 
 of the several tenses of the indicative mode. They 
 do not profess to include a specimen of every possible 
 form, whether full or contracted, with which we may 
 meet ; but they are deemed sufficient, together with the 
 remarks with which they are accompanied, to show 
 the proper structure and import, not only of those 
 which are given, but of any others which may be re- 
 quired or ever occur in the indicative mode. 
 
 2. a. As before remarked, sometimes the characteristic 
 parts of two, or more, of some of the foregoing forms, 
 in any given tense, may be combined, so as to form a 
 compound, the force of which may be a modification of 
 the two values combined ; thus, 
 
 In the last, the future perfect tense, the continuate, ngi sa ya ku ba 
 ngi tandile, I shall yet have loved, and the indefinite, ngi ya ku ke ngi 
 be ngi tandile, 1 shall at some time have loved, may be united so as to 
 form the compound, ngi sa ya ku ke ngi be ngi tandile, signifying, I 
 shall yet on some occasion have loved. 
 
 b. Another, a progressive form, might have been 
 added also in the last, the future perfect ; thus, 
 
 Ngi ya ku ba ngi be ngi tandile, I shall have been loving. 
 
 And in the correlative form, another variety might have been given; 
 thus, nga ye ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, and, or then I shall have loved. 
 
 c. So in the past perfect tense, a correlative inceptive 
 compound might be given ; thus, 
 
 Nga ye ngi be. ngi ya ku ba ngi iandile, and then I was about to have 
 loved, or I might, could, or should have loved. 
 
 And in the past tense, an inceptive progressive compound may be 
 used; thus, ngi be ngi ya ku ba ngi tanda, I was about to be loving, or 
 I should or would be loving. 
 
 3. The last two tenses, the past perfect and the future
 
 166 TENSES OF THE POTENTIAL MODE. 
 
 perfect, and many of the forms in the other tenses, in 
 fact all the forms in which two or more auxiliaries are 
 used, might he called compound or augmented forms ; 
 hut a classification and nomenclature of this kind have 
 not heen deemed expedient. 
 
 B. TENSES OF THE POTENTIAL MODE. 
 
 280. The Tenses in the Potential Mode are the same 
 in number and name as in the indicative, the Present, 
 the Past, the Future; the Present Perfect, the Past Per- 
 fect, and the Future Perfect. But the line of distinction 
 between the tenses of the potential is much more vague 
 and obscure than it is in the indicative. Thus, the 
 different forms of the present potential are often used 
 in reference to the past and future ; while those of the 
 past refer as often to the present perfect and past perfect, 
 as to the mere past. Hence, as the future perfect is 
 seldom required, we rarely meet with any but the 
 present and past forms of the potential mode ; though 
 those which are given in the future, the present perfect, 
 past perfect, and future perfect, are sometimes used. 
 
 281. To the tenses of the potential mode belong 
 nearly the same kinds and varieties of form, as to the 
 tenses of the indicative. The forms of the potential 
 differ from those of the indicative, chiefly in the use of 
 the potential auxiliary nga and its pronoun. This mark 
 of the potential generally precedes the several forms of 
 the indicative ; but not always. Sometimes the potential 
 is formed by introducing nga and its pronoun between, 
 or after, the auxiliaries of the indicative. 
 
 ^ 282. After the full description and illustration of the 
 several characteristics and values of the different forms 
 of the indicative mode, already given, and these few 
 general remarks upon the formation of the potential, 
 together with what has been said upon the import of the 
 potential mode (see 222.), and upon its characteristic 
 auxiliary nga (see 211.), it will be sufficient, here, to give
 
 POTENTIAL. PRESENT TENSE. 167 
 
 merely an outline specimen of most of the different forms, 
 and varieties of form, which occur under the several 
 tenses of this mode, together with as good a translation 
 of the same, as the genius and flexibility of the English 
 language will allow. 
 
 Examples of the principal forms in the several Tenses 
 of the Potential Mode. 
 
 283. I. Present Tense :- 
 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga tanda, we may love. 
 
 Neg. A si nge tande, contracted, si nge tande. 
 
 Second variety, or full, and probably original form, 
 
 Aff 1 . Si nga si tanda, we may or ought to love. 
 Neg. Si nga si nga tandi. 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga sa tanda, we may still love. 
 Neg. Si nge sa tande. 
 
 iii. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga tanda, now we may love. 
 Neg. Se si nge tande. 
 
 iv. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga ke si tande, we may sometimes love. 
 Neg. (A) si nge ke si tande. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Si nga ze si tande, we may as well love. 
 Neg. Si nge ze sa tanda, we can never love. 
 2d v. Si nge ye si tanda. 
 
 v. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si nga tanda, until we may love. 
 Neg. Si ze si nge tande. 
 
 vi. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga ba si tanda, we may be loving. 
 Neg. (A) si nge be si tanda. 
 2d v. Si nga ba si nga tandi.
 
 168 POTENTIAL. PAST TENSE. 
 
 Second variety progressive and cont innate, 
 
 Aff. Si nga ba si sa tanda, we may be still loving. 
 Neg. Si nge be si sa tanda, or, si nga be si sa tanda. 
 
 Third variety correlative progressive and continuate, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si nga ba si sa tanda, and, or then, we may be still loving. 
 Neg. Si ze si nge be si sa tanda. 
 
 <$284. II. Past Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. (Si) be si nga tanda(yo), we might, could, or would love, or 
 Neg. (Si) be si nge tande. [have loved. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Sa be (or ba) si nga tanda(yo). 
 Neg. Sa be (or ba) si nge tande. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Sa ye si nga tanda(yo). 
 Neg. Sa ye si nge tande. 
 
 ii. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Sa be si nga ba si tanda, we might be, or have been loving. 
 Neg. Sa be si nga ba si nge tande. 
 2d v. Sa be si nge be si tanda. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Sa be si nga ba si sa tanda, we might be still loving. 
 Neg. Sa be si nge> be si sa tanda. 
 
 iv. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si be si nga tanda, already might we love. 
 Neg. Se si be si nge tande. 
 
 v. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. (Si) be si nga ke si tande, we might sometimes love. 
 Neg. (Si) be si nge ke si tande. 
 
 vi. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si be si nga tanda, until wo might love. 
 Neg. Si ze si be si nge tande.
 
 POTEN. FUTURE J PRESENT PERFECT. 169 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 AfF. Sa (ye) si be si nga tanda, and, or then we might love. 
 Neg. Sa (ye) si be si nge tande. 
 
 vii. Inceptive form, 
 
 Aff. Sa nga si ya ku tanda, it seemed as if we might, should, or 
 2d v. Kwa nga si ya ku tanda. [weru about to love. 
 
 Neg. Kwa nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 285. III. Future Tense:- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ya ku tanda, it seems, or may he, we shall love, or it 
 seems as if we might or should love. 
 2d v. Ku nga si ya ku tanda. 
 Neg. Si nga (ng)a si yi ku tanda. 
 2d v. Si nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 3d v. Ku nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si sa ya ku tanda, it may be we still shall love. 
 Neg. Si nga a si sa yi ku tanda. 
 2d v. Si nga si nga sa yi ku tanda. 
 
 iii. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga si ya ku tanda, already it may be we shall love. 
 Neg. Se si nga a si yi ku tanda. 
 2d v. Se si nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 iv. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ya ku ke si tande, it may be we shall sometime love. 
 Neg. Si nga a si yi ku ke si tande. 
 
 v. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si nga si ya ku tanda, until it may be we shall love. 
 Neg. Si ze si nga a si yi ku tanda. 
 
 vi. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ya ku ba si tanda, it may be we shall be loving. 
 Neg. Si nga a si yi ku ba si tanda. 
 
 286. IV. Present Perfect Tense:- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si tandile, it seems, or seems as if, we have loved, or 
 2d v. Ku nga si tandile. [we may have loved. 
 
 V
 
 170 POTEN. PRESENT PERFECT; PAST PERFECT. 
 
 Xeg. Si nga a si tandilc. 
 2d v. Si nga si nga tandile. 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si sa tandile, it seems as if we still loved, or we may 
 Neg. Si nga a si tandile. [still have loved. 
 
 2d v. Si nga si nga sa tandile. 
 
 iii. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga si tandile, already we may have loved. 
 Neg. Se si nga a si tandiie. 
 
 iv. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ke si tandile, it seems as if we sometimes loved, it 
 may be we once loved, or we may have loved once. 
 2d v. Si nga sa ka sa tanda. 
 Neg. Si nga si nge ke si tandile. 
 2d v. Si nga a si zanga si tande. 
 
 v. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si nga si tandile, until we may have loved. 
 Neg. Si ze si nga a si tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Sa (ye) si nga si tandile, and, or then we may have loved. 
 Neg. Sa (ye) si nga a si tandile. 
 
 vi. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga ba (or be) si tandile, we may have been loving. 
 Neg. Si nga ba (or be) si nga tandile. 
 2d v. Si nge be si tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Si nga be si sa tandile, we may have been still loving. 
 Neg. Si nge be si sa tandile. 
 
 287. V. Past Perfect Tense: 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si be si tandile, we might have loved, or it seems as if 
 Neg. Si nga si be si nga tandile. [we could love or have loved. 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si be si sa tandile, we might have loved still. 
 Neg. Si nga si be si nga sa tandile.
 
 POTENTIAL. FUTURE PERFECT. 171 
 
 iii. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga se si be si tandile, we might already have loved. 
 Neg. Si nga se si be si nga tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si be se si tandile, we might have already loved. 
 Neg. Si nga si be (ng)a si ka tandi. 
 
 iv. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si be si ke si tande, we might have loved once. 
 Neg. Si nga si be si ke si nga tande. 
 
 v. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Si ze si nga si be si tandile, until we might have loved. 
 Neg. Si ze si nga si be si nga tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Sa ye si nga si be si tandile, and we might have loved. 
 Neg. Sa ye si nga si be si nga tandile. 
 
 vi. Correlative and progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Sa ye si nga ba si be si tandile, and we might have been 
 Neg. Sa ye si nga ba si be si nga tandile. [loving. 
 
 . VI. Future Perfect Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ya ku ba si tandile, it may be we shall have loved. 
 Neg. Si nga a si yi ku ba si tandile. 
 2d v. Si nga nga si yi ku ba si tandile. 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si sa ya ku ba si tandile, it may be we shall still have 
 Neg. Si nga a si sa yi ku ba si tandile. [loved. 
 
 iii. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga si ya ku ba si tandile, already it may be we shall 
 Neg. Se si nga a si yi ku ba si tandile. [have loved. 
 
 2d v. Aff. Si nga se si ya ku ba si tandile. 
 3d v. Aff. Si nga si ya ku ba se si tandile. 
 
 iv. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si ya ku ka si tande, it may be we shall have loved 
 Neg. Si nga si nga yi ku ka si tande. [sometime. 
 
 2d v. Aff. Si nga si ya ku ba si ke si tandile.
 
 172 REMARKS. TENSES OF THE OPTATIVE. 
 
 289. GENERAL REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING 
 EXAMPLES. 1. To prevent the danger of confounding 
 the pronoun ngi in its -a form (=ngyi, past tense), with 
 the auxiliary nga, or with the negative particle nga, as 
 in nga be ngi nga tanda, I might love ; nga nga ngi 
 nga yi ku tanda, it seemed I might not have loved, &c., 
 the specimen forms of the potential and of the optative 
 modes are generally given with the pronoun si and sa, 
 first person plural; thus, 
 
 Sa be si nga tanda; sa (or A-im) nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 2. A parenthesis is sometimes employed to denote 
 words which may be omitted, indicating at once both 
 the full and the contracted form ; thus, 
 
 (.#) si nge tande, contracted, si nge tande; (si) be si nga tanda, con- 
 tracted, be si nga tanda. 
 
 3. In relative and other accessory clauses, when two 
 forms, the one affirmative and the other negative, differ 
 only in the final vowel, the particle yo may be suffixed 
 (and sometimes ko), by which means the difference is 
 clearly marked by giving the accent to the distinctive 
 vowel ; thus, 
 
 So be si nga tandayo (instead of tanda}, in the past, potential, 
 simple, affirmative, second variety, to distinguish it from the indirect 
 negative of one variety of the progressive, indicative sa be si nga 
 tandiyo (instead of tandi}; so again, in the potential, present, definite, 
 affirmative, se si nga tanda may be distinguished more clearly from 
 the indicative, present, definite, negative, se si nga tandi, by suffixing 
 yo, or ko, and thus throwing the accent on the final vowels, a and i; 
 thus, se si nga tand&ko. 
 
 4. Sometimes the indefinite pronoun frit, instead of the 
 specific pronoun ngi, si, &c., is used before the aux- 
 iliary nga; thus, 
 
 Ku nga si ya ku tanda, instead of si nga si ya leu tanda; ku nga si 
 tandile, instead of si nga si tandile. 
 
 C. TENSES OF THE OPTATIVE MODE. 
 
 290. The Tenses of the Optative Mode are the same 
 as in the indicative and potential. But the number of
 
 TENSES OF THE OPTATIVE MODE. 173 
 
 forms, belonging to its several tenses, is generally less ; 
 though in some cases the varieties of a given form are 
 greater in the optative, than they are in the indicative 
 and potential. 
 
 1. In most cases, the potential form may be 
 considered as the basis of the optative, the latter being 
 derived from the former by a repetition or duplicate use 
 of the auxiliary ng-a, generally with its pronoun, and 
 sometimes with additional auxiliaries ; thus, 
 
 From ngi nga tanda, I may love, is formed the optative ngi nga ngi 
 nga tanda, may I love; or se n;a H ngi nga tanda, oh that I may love ! 
 (See 223.) 
 
 2. In some instances, the same form may be con- 
 sidered as belonging to both the potential and the op- 
 tative ; thus, 
 
 The optative nga si tanda, may we love, or we should, or ought to 
 love, is only a slight contraction of the full potential si nga si tanda, 
 we may love. 
 
 3. In some cases, the imperative form may be regarded 
 as the basis of the optative, its auxiliary sign ma being 
 contracted to a; thus, 
 
 Se ku nga ti a ngi tande, oh that I may love ! literally, already it 
 may signify, let me love. 
 
 And sometimes the auxiliary nga, either full, or con- 
 tracted to a, is used like the contracted imperative 
 particle a, in the optative ; thus, 
 
 Se ku nga ti nga se ngife, or, se nga ti a se ngife, would that I were 
 already dead. 
 
 RE3i. 1. The general, indefinite pronoun ku is often used, instead 
 of the more definite ngi, si, ba, &.C., before the antecedent nga; thus, 
 ku nga ngi nga tanda, instead of ngi nga ngi nga tanda. 
 
 REM. 2. The phrase se ku nga ti, already it may say, think, or 
 signify, which enters so largely into the formation of the optative, 
 is generally used in one or another contract form; thus, by dropping 
 k, we have se u nga ti; by uniting e and u (=0), we have so nga ti; 
 or by dropping ku, we have the most common form se nga ti. 
 
 The significations of the forms of this mode
 
 174 OPTATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 are more varied than in most of the other modes, in- 
 clining sometimes to an imperative character, and some- 
 times to a potential ; and having, in this respect, a 
 resemblance to the optative of the Greek language. 
 
 293. With the foregoing remarks upon the general 
 character of the optative mode, together with what was 
 said upon the form and import of the same ( 223.), in- 
 cluding remarks upon the auxiliary nga ( 211.), and 
 also upon ti ( 215.); as specimens and illustrations, it 
 will be sufficient to give the following 
 
 Examples of some of the principal forms in the 
 several Tenses of the Optative Mode. 
 
 ^294. I. Present Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si nga tanda, it seems as if we might love, may we love, 
 Neg. Si nga si nge tande. [or we ought to love. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga si tanda, we ought to love. 
 
 Aff. Indirect, Si nga tanda, that we must love. 
 
 Neg. Nga si nga tandi. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Nge si tanda, we would or should love. 
 Neg. Nge si nga tandi. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Se ku nga ti si nga tanda, contracted, se nga ti si nga tanda, it 
 seems as if we ought to love, or, oh that we may love. 
 
 Neg. Se ku nga ti si nge tande, contracted, se nga ti si nge tande. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga nga si sa tanda, we wish still to love. 
 Neg. Si nga nga si nga sa tandi. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti si nga sa tanda, oh that we may still love. 
 Neg. Se nga ti si nge sa tande.
 
 OPTATIVE. PAST TENSE. 175 
 
 iv. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga si nga tanda, already we wish to love. 
 
 Neg. Se'si nga si nge tande. 
 
 2d v. Si nga nga si nga ka tandi, we would not yet love. 
 
 v. Indefinite form, 
 
 AfF. Si nga si nga ke si tande, we wish to love sometime. 
 Neg. Si nga si nge ke si tande. 
 
 vi. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Nga si be (or ba) si tanda, we ought to be loving. 
 Neg. Nga si be (or ba) si nga tandi. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti si nga be si sa tanda, oh that we might be still loving. 
 Neg. Se nga ti si nga be si nga sa tandi. 
 
 <3295. II. Past Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Sa nga si nga tanda, we wished to love. 
 Neg. Sa nga nga si nga tandanga. 
 2d v. Sa nga si nge tande. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga si be si tanda, we ought to love, or to have loved. 
 Neg. Nga si be si nga tandanga. 
 2d v. Nga be si nga tandi. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga be sa tanda, we should love, or have loved. 
 Neg. Nga be si nga tandanga, or tandi. 
 
 Fourth variety, 
 
 Aff. (Si) be si nga si nga tanda, we would love. 
 Neg. (Si) be si nga si nge tande. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti nga sa tanda, oh that we had loved. 
 Neg. Se nga ti nga si nga tandanga. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se (si) nga nga ti nga be sa tanda, oh would that we had loved. 
 Neg. Se (si) nga nga ti nga be si nga tandanga.
 
 176 OPTATIVE. PAST TENSE ; FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Sa si nga ti si nga tanda, would that we might love. 
 Neg. Sa si nga ti si nge tande. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Sa nga nga si sa tanda, oh that we had still loved. 
 Neg. Sa nga nga si nga sa tandi. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Kwa nga nga si sa tanda. 
 Neg. Kwa nga nga si nga sa tandi. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti si be si sa tanda. 
 
 Neg. Se nga ti si be si nga sa tandanga. 
 
 iv. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se sa nga nga si tanda, plainly would we have loved. 
 Neg. Se sa nga nga si nga tandanga, or tandi. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se be si nga si nga tanda, now would we had loved. 
 Neg. Se be si nga si nge tande. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Se si nga nga sa tandayo, now we wish we had loved. 
 Neg. Se si nga nga si nga tandanga, or tandiyo. 
 
 v. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Be si nga si nga ke si tande, we would have loved sometime. 
 Neg. Be si nga si nge ke si tande. 
 
 vi. Correlative form, 
 
 Aff. Sa ye si nga si nga tanda, then we should have loved. 
 Neg. Sa ye si nga si nge tande. 
 
 vii. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Se u nga ti nga be sa (be) si tanda, oh that we were loving. 
 Neg. Se u nga ti nga be sa (be) si nga tandi. 
 
 296. III. Future Tense: 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga nga si ya ku tanda, we shall wish to love, we would or 
 should love, or it seems as if we ought to love. 
 Neg. Si nga nga si nga yi ku tanda.
 
 OPTATIVE. FUTURE ; PRESENT PERFECT. 177 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga si ya ku tanda, we ought to love, or we shall wish to love. 
 Neg. Nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 Third variety, 
 
 Aff. Si ya ku nga si nga tanda, we shall wish we loved. 
 Neg. Si ya ku nga si nge tande. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti nga si ya ku tanda, we must or should love. 
 Neg. Se nga ti nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti si nga ze si tanda, oh that we may love. 
 Neg. Se nga ti si nge ze si tanda. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga nga si sa ya ku tanda, we shall wish still to love, 
 Neg. Si nga nga si nga sa yi ku tanda. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga si sa ya ku tanda, we ought still to love. 
 Neg. Nga si nga sa yi ku tanda. 
 
 iv. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se si ya ku nga si nga tanda, now we shall wish to love. 
 Neg. Se si ya ku nga si nge tande. 
 
 297. IV. Present Perfect Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga (si) nga si tandile, may we have loved, or we wished to 
 Neg. Si nga (si) nga si nga tandile, tande, or tandanga. [love. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga si tandile, we ought to have loved. 
 
 2d v. Nge si tandile. 
 
 Neg. Nga si nga tandile, tande, or tandanga. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti nga si tandile, or tande, oh that we loved, had loved, 
 or may have loved. 
 Neg. Se nga ti nga si nga tandile, tande, or tandanga, 
 
 w
 
 178 OPT. PAST PERFECT ; FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Nga si sa tandile, we ought still to have loved. 
 Neg. Nga si nga sa tandile, tande, or tandanga. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti nga si sa tandile, oh that we still loved. 
 Neg. Se nga ti nga si nga sa tandile. 
 
 iv. Definite form, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti si nga se si tandile, oh that we already loved. 
 Neg. Se nga ti si nga se si nga tandile. 
 
 v. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Nga si be si tandile, we should be, or have been loving. 
 Neg. Nga si be si nga tandile. 
 
 298. V. Past Perfect Tense :- 
 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si nga si nga (si) be si tandiie, we would have loved. 
 Neg. Si nga si nga (si) be si nga tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Nga (si) be si tandile, we should have loved. 
 
 2d v. Nge (si) be si tandile. 
 
 Neg. Nga (si) be si nga tandile. 
 
 2d v. Nga (or nge) si be a si tandile. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Se nga ti nga (si) be si tandile, oh that we had loved. 
 Neg. Se nga ti nga (si) be si nga tandile. 
 
 Second variety, 
 
 Aff. Kwa (be) ku nga ti nga si tandile, or tande. 
 
 Neg. Kwa (be) ku nga ti nga si nga tandile, or tandanga. 
 
 iii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Nga (si) be si sa tandile, we should have loved still. 
 Neg. Nga (si) be si nga sa tandile. 
 
 299. VI. Future Perfect Tense :- 
 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Si ya ku nga nga si tandile, we shall wish we had loved. 
 Neg. Si ya ku nga nga si nga tandile.
 
 TENSES OF THE IMPERATIVE. 179 
 
 ii. Continuate form, 
 
 Aff. Si ya ku nga nga si sa tandile, we shall wish we had still loved. 
 Neg. Si ya ku nga nga si nga sa tandile. 
 
 300. Most of the remarks made on the Potential 
 Mode, 289, are equally true of the Optative. It should 
 be added, however, that there is a peculiar intonation, the 
 rising slide of the voice, on the penult of the principal 
 verb, to aid in marking the affirmative, and the falling 
 slide, to aid in marking the negative, which is much 
 more manifest and important in the optative, than it is in 
 the potential. 
 
 D. TENSES OF THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 There are three Tenses in the Imperative 
 Mode ; namely, the Present, the Present Perfect, and 
 the Future ; and in each tense there are several forms. 
 For the formation of this mode, and its several charac- 
 teristics, see ^ 212., 224>. 
 
 The following are examples of most of the different 
 forms in the several Tenses of the Imperative Mode. 
 
 302. I. Present Tense :- 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngi tande, let me love, or I must love. 
 Neg. Ma ngi nga tandi. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Mana ngi tande, do let me love. 
 Neg. Mana ngi nga tandi. 
 
 iii. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ke ngi tande, contracted, a ke ngi tande, or ke ngi tande, 
 or ka ngi tande, now just let me love. 
 
 Neg. Ma ke ngi nga tandi, contracted, a ke ngi nga tandi, or ke ngi 
 2d v. Ma ngi nge ke ngi tanda. [nga tandi. 
 
 iv. Progressive form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngi be ngi tanda, let me be loving.
 
 180 TENSES OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Neg. Ma ngi be ngi nga tandi. 
 2d v. Ma ngi nga bi ngi tanda. 
 
 303. II. Present Perfect Tense: 
 i. Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngi be ngi tandile, or tande, let me have loved. 
 Neg. Ma ngi be ngi nga tandile, or tande. 
 
 ii. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ke ngi be ngi tandile, just let me have loved. 
 Neg. Ma ke ngi be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 304. III. Future Tense:- 
 l Simple form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngi be ngi ya ku tanda, let it be that I shall love. 
 
 Neg. Ma ngi be ngi nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 2d v. Ma ngi nga bi ngi (sa) ya ku tanda. 
 
 ii. Emphatic form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngo tanda, contracted, a ngo tanda, do let me love. 
 Neg. Ma ngo be ngi nga tandi, contracted, a ngo be ngi nga tandi. 
 2d v. Ma ngo ba ngi nga tandi. 
 3d v. Ma ngo ba ngi nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 iii. Indefinite form, 
 
 Aff. Ma ngo ka ngi tande, contracted, ngo ka ngi tande, let me love 
 Neg. Ma ngo ka ngi nga tandi. [sometime hereafter. 
 
 iv. PromissiVe form, 
 
 Aff. Ngo tanda, I will love. 
 Neg. A ngi yi ku tanda. 
 
 E. TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 305. 1. The telic Subjunctive, though confined, in 
 form, chiefly to the present, except after ngapana, must 
 often be rendered by some other tense, to accord with its 
 connection ; thus, 
 
 Ukuba ngi tande, that I love, or that I may, might, or should love; 
 funa a nga bi no. 'sikati, lest he have not time ; ngapana ni hambe, then
 
 TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 181 
 
 you should go; ngapane e nga se sindile nal then ought he not to 
 have recovered ? or, why then is he not already well ? 
 
 2. In the conditional Subjunctive there is the same 
 number of tenses as in the indicative mode ; and the 
 forms of the subjunctive are derived from the indicative 
 by prefacing the latter with the conjunctions uma, 
 ukuma, or ukuba, each of which, in this situation, 
 may be rendered by if. 
 
 3. The number of forms, and varieties of form, are less, 
 however, in the subjunctive than in the indicative ; the 
 very nature of some of the forms of the latter not 
 admitting of their being used with the conjunctions 
 which mark the subjunctive mode. 
 
 4. For the negative of the subjunctive, the second or 
 indirect form of the indicative is often taken as the basis. 
 
 306. A few examples will serve as specimens of the 
 verb in the several Tenses of the conditional Subjunctive 
 Mode. 
 
 1. Present Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma ngi tanda, if I love. 
 
 Neg. Uma a ngi tandi; indirect, uma ngi nga tandi. 
 
 2. Past Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma nga tanda, if I did love. 
 
 Neg. Uma a ngi tandanga: indirect, uma ngi nga tandanga. 
 
 3. Future Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma ngi ya ku tanda, if I shall love. 
 
 Neg. Uma a ngi yi ku tanda; indirect, uma ngi nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 4. Present Perfect Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma ngi tandile, if I have loved. 
 
 Neg. Uma a ngi tandile; indirect, uma ngi nga tandile. 
 
 5. Past Perfect Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma ngi be ngi tandile, if I had loved. 
 Neg. Uma ngi be ngi nga tandile. 
 
 6. Future Perfect Tense, 
 
 Aff. Uma ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, if I shall have loved. 
 Neg. Uma ngi nga yi ku ba ngi tandile.
 
 182 NUMBER AND PERSON. CONJUGATION. 
 
 SECT. 4. Number and Person. 
 
 307. The Zulu verb, as already remarked ( 217., 
 Rem.), has no change of form to indicate either number 
 or person, unless the second person plural, where the 
 pronoun ni is subjoined to the verb, be considered an ex- 
 ception. These distinctions, so far as they exist at all 
 in connection with the verb, are confined to the pro- 
 nouns, which take the rank of separate relational words; 
 and between which and the verb, many of the auxiliaries, 
 as also the direct pronominal accusatives, where they 
 are used, always intervene. When, therefore, we speak 
 of the number and person of the verb in Zulu, the terms 
 apply, in strict propriety, only to the pronominal sub- 
 jects to which the verb belongs. 
 
 REM. 1. The pronouns of the third person have a great variety of 
 forms, according to the class and number of the nouns, for which they 
 stand. (See 168.) 
 
 REM. 2. The general, indefinite pronoun ku is often used, instead 
 of a pronoun of a more specific character, in both the singular and 
 the plural, and sometimes in place of pronouns of the first and second 
 person. The use of this pronoun is often convenient, where several 
 nouns of dtfferent classes and numbers, giving of course several pro- 
 nouns of different forms, constitute a common subject of one verb. 
 It is aiso common with the passive voice, when the verb is of an 
 impersonal character, or where the speaker wishes to give his remark 
 a general outward character, without individual specification. The 
 pronoun i, third class, singular, is also used sometimes in the same 
 manner. 
 
 'SECT. 5. Conjugation. 
 
 308. As the Zulu verb has but few genuine inflec- 
 tions, its conjugation consists chiefly in variations effected 
 by means of auxiliaries, and in the proper arrangement 
 of these and the few inflections, according to their mode, 
 tense, and voice, and according to the number and 
 person of their pronominal subjects. 
 
 309. A complete conjugation of a verb, in all its 
 numerous and varied forms of mode and tense, together 
 with each number and person, and all the different 
 classes of pronouns, written out in full, can not be
 
 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE ; PRESENT. 
 
 183 
 
 necessary. After the extended notice of the manner in 
 which the several modes and tenses are formed (see 
 217 307.), it will be sufficient to give a condensed 
 paradigm of some of the more important parts and 
 forms, as in the following 
 
 SYNOPTIC TABLE OF A REGULAR VERB. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 Aff. Uku tanda, to love. 
 
 Neg. Uku nga tandi, not to love. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 1. Simple form Affirmative, I love, &c. ( 233-) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi tanda, Si tanda, 
 Jd u tanda, ni tanda, 
 
 3d 1 u [e] tanda, ba [be] tanda, 
 
 
 2 Ii tanda, 
 
 a [e] tanda, 
 
 
 3 i tanda, 
 
 zi tanda, 
 
 
 4 si tanda, 
 
 zi tanda, 
 
 
 5 lu tanda, 
 
 zi tanda, 
 
 
 6 u tanda, 
 
 i tanda, 
 
 
 7 
 
 bu tanda, 
 
 
 8 
 
 ku tanda. 
 
 Negative, I love not, or I not loving, &c. 
 
 ers. Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 DIRECT, 
 
 INDIRECT; 
 
 DIRECT, 
 
 INDIRECT. 
 
 st A ngi tandi, 
 
 ngi nga tandi, 
 
 a si tandi, 
 
 si nga tandi, 
 
 !d a wu [ku] tandi, 
 
 u nga tandi, 
 
 a ni tandi, 
 
 ni nga tandi, 
 
 Id 1 a ka tandi, 
 
 e [a] nga tandi, 
 
 a ba tandi, 
 
 be nga tandi, 
 
 2 a li tandi, 
 
 li nga tandi, 
 
 aka[wa] tandi, 
 
 e [a] nga tandi 
 
 3 a i [yi] tandi, 
 
 i nga tandi, 
 
 a zi tandi, 
 
 zi nga tandi, 
 
 4 a si tandi, 
 
 si nga tandi, 
 
 a zi tandi, 
 
 zi nga tandi, 
 
 5 a lu tandi, 
 
 lu nga tandi, 
 
 a zi tandi, 
 
 zi nga tandi, 
 
 6 a u [wu] tandi, 
 
 u nga tandi, 
 
 a i tandi, 
 
 i nga tandi, 
 
 7 a bu tandi, 
 
 bu nga tandi, 
 
 a bu tandi, 
 
 bu nga tandi, 
 
 8 a ku tandi, 
 
 ku nga tandi, 
 
 a ku tandi, 
 
 ku nga tandi.
 
 184 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE; PRESENT. 
 
 REM. The pronominal form enclosed in brackets [ ], in the present 
 table, may be used, sometimes, in place of that which precedes the 
 brackets; e. g., in most explanatory clauses, e is used instead of u, be 
 instead of ba, and e instead of a; and again, in the negative, for 
 ^uphonic reasons, ?/i may be used in place of i, wa in place of a, ku 
 in place of u or n>, and also wu in place of . (See 221., 16.) 
 
 2. Emphatic form Affirmative, I do love, &c. ft 234.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi ya tanda, Si ya tanda, 
 
 2d u ya tanda, ni ya tanda, 
 
 3d 1 u ya tanda, ba ya tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 li ya tanda, a ya tanda, 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Negative, I do not love, &c. 
 
 Some as the negative of the Simple form. 
 
 3. Continuate form Affirmative, I still love, &c. 
 
 ft 235.) 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi sa tanda, P. Si sa tanda, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Negative, I do not still love, &c. 
 
 . ( Direct, A ngi sa tandi, p ( Direct, A si sa tandi, 
 
 ' ' \ Indirect, Ngi nga sa tandi, ' \ Indirect, Si nga sa tandi, 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 4. Definite form Affirmative, Now I love, &c. ft 236.) 
 
 1st person, S. Se ngi tanda, P. Se si tanda, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Negative, I do not yet love, &c. 
 
 j ( Direct, A ngi ka tandi, ( Direct, A si ka tandi, 
 
 8 ' ' ( Indirect, Ngi nga ka tandi, ' ^ Indirect, Si nga ka tandi, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 5. Indefinite form Affirmative, I sometimes love, &c. 
 
 ft 237.) 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi ke ngi tande, P. Si ke si tande, 
 &c-., &c.
 
 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE j PAST. 185 
 
 Negative, I do not sometimes love. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi ke ngi tande, p. A si ke si tande, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 6. Correlative form Affirmative, Until I love, &c. 
 
 ( 238.) 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi za ngi tanda, p. Si za si tanda, 
 
 Sec., &c. 
 
 Negative, Until I do not love, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi za ngi nga taudi, />. Si za si nga tandi, 
 
 &.C., &.C. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 1. Simple form Affirmative, I loved, &c. ( 240.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Nga tanda, Sa tanda, 
 
 2d wa tanda, na tanda, 
 
 3d 1 wa tanda, ba tanda, 
 
 2 la tanda, a tanda, 
 
 3 ya tanda, za tanda, 
 
 4 sa tanda, za tanda, 
 
 5 hva tanda, za tanda, 
 
 6 wa tanda, ya tanda, 
 
 7 ba tanda, 
 
 8 kwa tajida. 
 
 Negative, I did not love, &,c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st A nga tanda, A sa tanda, 
 
 2d a wa [kwa] tanda, a na tanda, 
 3d 1 a ka tanda, a ba tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 a la tanda, ' a wa [ka] tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 a ya tanda, a za tanda, 
 
 ,, 4 a sa tanda, a za tanda, 
 
 ,, 5 a Iwa tanda, a za tanda, 
 
 ,, 6 a wa tanda, a ya tanda, 
 
 7 a ba tanda, 
 
 8 a kwa tanda. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 1st S ^ ^' rect ? A ngi tandanga, ( Direct, A si tandanga, 
 
 I Indirect, Ngi nga tandanga, ' \ Indirect, Si nga tandanga. 
 
 X
 
 186 PARADIGM. - INDICATIVE ; PAST. 
 
 ,, ( Direct, A wu [ku] tandunga, p ( Direct, A ni tandanga, 
 ' \ Indirect, U nga tandanga, ' ^ Indirect, Ni nga tandangu. 
 
 .., , ( Direct, A ka tandanga, p ( Direct, A ba tandanga, 
 
 ( ' ' I Indirect, E nga tandanga, 
 
 ' ( Indirect, Be nga tandanga, 
 
 2. Progressive form Affirmative, I was loving, &c. 
 
 (241.) 
 
 1st person, s. Nga ba ngi tanda, p. Sa ba si tanda. 
 
 Second variety of Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi be ngi tanda, /?. Si be si tanda, 
 
 Contracted, Be ngi tanda, Be si tanda. 
 
 Third variety of Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Nga be ngi tanda, p. Sa be si tanda, 
 Contracted, Nga ngi tanda, Sa si tanda. 
 
 Negative, I was not loving, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. Nga ba ngi nga tandi, p. Sa ba si nga tandi, 
 Contracted, Nga ngi nga tandi, Sa si nga tandi. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi banga ngi tanda, p. A si banga si tanda. 
 
 3. Continuate form Affirmative, I still loved, &c. 
 
 ( 242.) 
 
 1st person, s. Nga sa tanda, p. Sa sa tanda. 
 
 Negative, I did not still love. 
 
 1st person, s. A nga sa tanda, p. A sa sa tanda. 
 
 4. Definite form Affirmative, I was evidently loving, 
 
 &c. ( 243.) 
 
 1st person, s. Nga be ngi se ngi tanda, p. Sa be si se si tanda.
 
 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE ; PART. 187 
 
 Negative, I was not evidently loving, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. Nga be ngi se iigi nga tandi, p. Sa be si se si nga tandi. 
 
 Second variety of Negative, I was not yet loving, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi be ngi nga ka tandi, p. Si be si nga ka tandi. 
 
 5. Indefinite form Affirmative, I once loved, &c. 
 
 (* 244.) 
 
 1st person, s. Nga ke nga tanda, p. Sa ke sa tanda. 
 
 Negative, I never loved, &c. 
 
 First variety, 1st person, S. A ngi zanga ngi tande, &c. 
 
 Second variety, ,, A ngi banga ngi tanda, &c. 
 
 Third variety, ,, A nga kanga nga tanda, &c. 
 
 Fourth variety, ,, ,, A ngi bonanga ngi tanda, &c. 
 
 6. Correlative form Affirmative, Then I loved, &c. 
 
 ( 245.) 
 
 1st person, s. Nga za nga tanda, p. Sa za sa tanda. 
 
 Negative, Then I did not love, &c. 
 
 1 st, S. Direct, Nga za a nga tanda ; Indirect, Nga za ngi nga tandanga. 
 
 Second variety of Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Nga ye ngi tanda, p. Sa ye si tanda. 
 
 Negative of second variety. 
 
 1st person, s. Nga ye ngi nga tandi, p. Sa ye si nga tandi. 
 
 7. Inceptive form Affirmative, I was about to love, 
 
 &c. ( 246.) 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi ya ku tanda, p. Be si ya ku tanda. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi nga yi ku tanda, p. Be si nga yi ku tanda.
 
 188 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE ; FUTURE. 
 
 Second variety, Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi za ku tanda, p. Be si za ku tanda. 
 
 Negative of second variety. 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi nge z' uku tanda, p. Be si nge z' uku tanda. 
 
 Third variety, I was still about to love, &c. 
 
 , , ( Affirmative, Nga he ngi sa ya ku tanda, &c. 
 
 ' ' I Negative, Nga be ngi nga sa yi ku tanda, &.c. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 1. Simple form Affirmative, I shall love, &c. ( 248.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi ya ku tanda, Si ya ku tanda, 
 2d u ya ku tanda, ni ya ku tanda, 
 
 3d 1 u ya ku tanda, ba ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 li ya ku tanda, a ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 i ya ku tanda, zi ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 4 si ya ku tanda, zi ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 5 lu ya ku tanda, zi ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 6 u ya ku tanda, i ya ku tanda, 
 
 7 bu ya ku tanda, 
 
 8 ku ya ku tanda. 
 
 Negative, direct, I shall not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st A ngi yi ku tanda, A si yi ku tanda, 
 
 2d a u [ku] yi ku tanda, a ni yi ku tanda, 
 
 3d 1 a ka yi ku tanda, a ba yi ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 a li yi ku tanda, a wa [ka] yi ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 a i [yi] yi ku tanda, a zi yi ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 4 a si yi ku tanda, a zi yi ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 5 a lu yi ku tanda, a zi yi ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 6 a u [wu] yi ku tanda, a i [yi] yi ku tanda, 
 
 7 a bu yi ku tanda, 
 
 8 a ku yi ku tanda. 
 
 Negative, indirect. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga yi ku tanda, Si nga yi ku tanda, 
 
 2d u nga yi ku tanda, ni nga yi ku tanda, 
 
 3d e nga yi ku tanda, be nga yi ku tanda, 
 &c., &c.
 
 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE; FUTURE. 189 
 
 Second variety Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi za ku tanda, p. Si za ku tanda. 
 
 Negative of second variety. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi z' uku tanda, p. A si z' uku tanda, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 2. Emphatic form Affirmative, I will love, &c. 
 
 ( 249.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngo tanda, So tanda, 
 
 2d wo tandu, no tanda, 
 
 3d 1 wo tanda, bo tanda, 
 
 2 lo tanda, o tanda, 
 
 3 yo tanda, zo tanda, 
 
 4 so tanda, zo tanda, 
 
 5 Iwo tanda, zo tanda, 
 
 6 wo tanda, yo tanda, 
 
 7 bo tanda, 
 
 8 kwo tanda. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 Same as in the Simple form. 
 
 3. Continuate form Affirmative, I shall still love, &c. 
 
 ( 250.) 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi sa ya ku tanda, p. Si sa ya ku tanda. 
 
 Negative, I shall not still love, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi sa yi ku tanda, p. A si sa yi ku tanda. 
 
 Second variety of Negative, I will never love more. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi so ze nga tanda, p. A si so ze sa tanda. 
 
 4. Definite form Affirmative, Now I shall love, &c 
 
 ( 251.) 
 
 1st person, s. Se ngi ya ku tanda, p. Se si ya ku tanda.
 
 190 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE ; FUTURE. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 The same us in the Continual t form. 
 
 5. Indefinite form Affirmative, I shall sometime love, 
 
 &c. ( 252.) 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi ya ku ke ngi tande, p. Si ya ku ke si tande. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi yi ku ke ngi tande. p. A si yi ku ke si tande. 
 
 6. Correlative form Affirmative, Until I shall love, fyc. 
 
 ( 253.) 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi ze ngi ya ku tanda, p. Size siya ku tanda. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi ze ngi nga yi ku tanda, p. Si ze si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 7. Progressive form Affirmative, I shall be loving, fyc. 
 
 ( 254.) 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi ya ku ba ngi tanda, p. Si ya ku ba si tanda. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi yi ku ba ngi tanda, p. A si yi ku ba si tanda. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative, I shall still be loving, <^c. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi sa ya ku ba ngi tanda, p. Si sa ya ku ba si tanda. 
 
 Negative of second variety. 
 
 1st person, s. A ngi sa yi ku ba ngi tanda, p. A si sa yi ku ba si tanda. 
 Third variety, I shall still be still loving, #c. 
 
 Affirmative, Ngi sa ya ku ba ngi sa tanda, &c. 
 1st person, S. < Negative, A ngi sa yi ku ba ngi sa tanda, &c. 
 f ,, Ngi sa ya ku ba ngi nga sa tandi, &c.
 
 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE; PRESENT PERFECT. 191 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, I loved, or I have loved, <$-c. 
 
 ( 256.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi tandile, or tande, Si tandile, or tande, 
 
 2d u tandile ,, ni tandile ,, 
 
 3d 1 u (or e) tandile ,, ba (or be) tandile ,, 
 
 ,, 2 li tandile ,, a (or e) tandile ,, 
 
 ,, 3 i tandile ,, zi tandile 
 
 &.C., &.C. 
 
 Negative, direct, I loved not, or have not loved, $c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st A ngi tandile, or tande, A si tandile, or tande, 
 
 Jil a u (wu, or ku) tandile, a ni tandile, 
 
 3d 1 a ka tandile, a ba tandile, 
 
 ,, L 2 a li tandile, a wa (or ka) tandile, 
 
 ,, 3 a i (or yi) tandile, a zi tandile, 
 
 &.C., &C. 
 
 Negative, indirect, I not having loved, fyc. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga tandile, Si nga tandile, 
 
 2d u nga tandile, ni nga tandile, 
 
 3d 1 e nga tandile, be nga tandile, 
 
 2 li nga tandile, e nga tandile, 
 
 &c., Sec. 
 
 . 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 .. ^ ( Direct, A ngi tandanga, &c. 
 
 . S ' ) Indirect, Ngi nga tandanga, Stc. 
 
 1st nor son \ 
 
 ' i p ( Direct, A si tandanga, &c. 
 
 ' I Indirect, Si nga tandanga, Sic. 
 
 , ( Direct, A u tandanga, &.c. 
 
 2d nerson ? ' < Indirect > U n S a tandanga, &c. 
 3n ' i p ( Direct, A ni tandanga, &c. 
 
 ' ( Indirect, Ni nga tandanga, &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 and Correlative forms of this tense, see 258 261.
 
 192 PARADIGM. INDICATIVE; PAST PERFECT. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I had loved, fyc. ( 265.) 
 
 Pers. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st Ngi be ngi tandile, 
 2d u be u tandile, 
 3d 1 u (or e) be e tandile, 
 ,, 2 li be li tandile, 
 ,, 3 i be i tandile, 
 &c., 
 
 Plwal. 
 
 Si be si tandile 
 ni be ni tandile, 
 ba (or be) be be tandile, 
 a (or e) be e tandile, 
 zi be zi tandile, 
 &c. 
 
 Contracted form. 
 
 Pers. Singular. 
 
 1st Be ngi tandile, 
 2d be u (or u bu) tandile, 
 3d 1 u (or e) be tandile, 
 ,, 2 be li tandile, 
 ,, 3 i bi tandile, 
 &c., 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Be si tandile, 
 be ni tandile, 
 ba be (or be be) tandile, 
 a be (or e be) tandile, 
 be zi tandile, 
 &c. 
 
 Pers. 
 
 Negative, I had not loved, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st Ngi be ngi nga tandile, 
 2d u be u nga tandile, 
 3d 1 u (or e) be e nga tandile, 
 ,, 2 li be li nga tandile, 
 &c., 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Si be si nga tandile, 
 
 ni be ni nga tandile, 
 
 ba (or be) be be nga tandile, 
 
 a (or e) be e nga tandile, 
 
 Contracted form of Negative. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Be ngi nga tandile, 
 2d be u nga tandile, 
 3d 1 e be nga tandile, 
 ., 2 be li nga tandile, 
 &c., 
 
 Be si nga tandile, 
 be ni nga tandile, 
 be be nga tandile, 
 e be nga tandile, 
 &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, and Inceptive forms of this tense, see ^ 266 270.
 
 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL; PRESENT. 193 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, I shall have loved, <$-c. 
 
 ( 273.) 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, Si ya ku ba si tandile, 
 
 2d u ya ku ba u tandile, ni ya ku ba ni tandile, 
 
 3d u [e] ya ku ba e tandile, ba [be] ya ku ba be tandile, 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st A ngi yi ku ba ngi tandile, A si yi ku ba si tandile, 
 2d a wu yi ku ba u tandile, a ni yi ku ba ni tandile, 
 
 3d a ka yi ku ba e tandile, a ba yi ku ba be tandile, 
 
 Second variety, I am about to have loved, #c. 
 
 ^ { Affirmative, Ngi za ku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 ' I Negative, A ngi z' uku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Emphatic, Continuate, Definite, 
 Indefinite, and Correlative forms of this tense, see ^ 274278. 
 
 POTENTIAL MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I may love, <c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga tanda, Si nga tanda, 
 
 2d u nga tanda, ni nga tanda, 
 
 3d 1 a nga tanda, ba nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 li nga tanda, a nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 i nga tanda, zi nga tanda, 
 
 , , 4 si nga tanda, zi nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 5 lu nga tanda, zi nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 6 u nga tanda, i nga tanda, 
 
 7 bu nga tanda, 
 
 8 ku nga tanda. 
 
 V
 
 194 
 
 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL ; PRESENT. 
 
 Negative, I may not love, 
 
 Pcrs. Singular. 
 
 1st 
 2d 
 3d 
 
 A ngi nge tande, 
 
 a wu [ku] nge tande, 
 
 1 a ka nge tande, 
 
 2 a li nge tande, 
 
 3 a i [yj] nge tande, 
 
 si nge tande, 
 lu nge tande, 
 u [wu] nge tande, 
 7 a bu 
 
 4 a 
 
 5 a 
 
 6 a 
 
 8 a ku 
 
 nge 
 nge 
 
 Plural. 
 
 A si nge tande, 
 a ni nge tande, 
 a ba nge tande, 
 a wa [ka] nge tande, 
 a zi nge tande, 
 a zi nge tande, 
 a zi nge tande, 
 a i [yi] nge tande, 
 tande, 
 tande. 
 
 Contracted form of Negative. 
 
 <:/* 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Bt 
 
 
 Ngi nge tande, 
 
 Si nge tande, 
 
 Id 
 
 
 u nge tande, 
 
 ni nge tande, 
 
 Jd 
 
 1 
 
 a nge tande, 
 
 ba nge tande, 
 
 
 2 
 
 li nge tande, 
 
 a nge tande, 
 
 
 3 
 
 i nge tande, 
 
 zi nge tande, 
 
 
 4 
 
 si nge tande, 
 
 zi nge tande, 
 
 
 5 
 
 lu nge tande, 
 
 zi nge tande, 
 
 
 6 
 
 u nge tande, 
 
 i nge tande, 
 
 
 
 7 bu nge 
 
 tande, 
 
 
 
 8 ku nge 
 
 tande. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative, I may or should love, fyc. 
 
 Pen. Singular. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi tanda, 
 2d u nga u tanda, 
 3d 1 a nga e tanda, 
 ,, 2 li nga li tanda, 
 j, 3 i nga i tanda, 
 &c., 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Si nga si tanda, 
 ni nga ni tanda, 
 ba nga be tanda, 
 a nga e tanda, 
 zi nga zi tanda, 
 &c. 
 
 Negative of second variety, I may or should not love, 
 
 Per*. Singular. 
 1st Ngi nga ngi nga taridi, 
 2d u nga u nga tandi, 
 3d a nga e nga tandi, 
 
 Si nga si nga tandi, 
 ni nga ni nga tandi, 
 ba nga be nga tandi, 
 &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, and Progressive forms of this tense, see 283., ii vi.
 
 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL; PAST. 195 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, I might or could love, &e. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi be ngi nga tanda, Si be si nga tanda, 
 
 2d u be u nga tanda, ni be ni nga tanda, 
 
 3d 1 a be e nga tanda, ba be be nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 li be li nga tanda, a be e nga tanda, 
 
 3 i be i nga tanda, zi be zi nga tanda, 
 &.C., kc. 
 
 Contracted form. 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi nga tanda. p. Be si nga tanda. 
 Negative, I might or could not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi be ngi rige tande, Si be si nge tande, 
 
 2d u be u nge tande, ni be ni nge tande, 
 
 3d 1 a be e nge tande, ba be be nge tande, 
 
 ,, 2 li be li nge tande, a be e nge tande, 
 
 ,, 3 i be i nge tande, zi be zi nge tande, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Contracted form. 
 
 1st person, s. Be ngi nge tande, p. Be si nge tande. 
 
 Second variety. 
 
 1st person S \ Affirmative, Nga be ngi nga tanda, &c. 
 ' I Negative, Nga be ngi nge tande, &c. 
 
 Third variety. 
 
 1st person 5 S Affirmative > N g a >' e n g> n a tanda > &c - 
 ' \ Negative, Nga ye ngi nge tande, &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Progressive, Continuate, Definite, 
 Indefinite, Correlative, and Inceptive forms of this tense, see 284.. 
 ii vii.
 
 196 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL ; FUTURE. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, It may be I shall love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi ya ku tanda, Si nga si ya ku tanda, 
 
 2d u nga u ya ku tanda, ni nga ni ya ku tanda, 
 
 3d 1 a nga e ya ku tanda, ba nga be ya ku tanda, 
 
 2 li nga li ya ku tanda, a nga e ya ku tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 i nga i ya ku tanda, zi nga zi ya ku tanda, 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 Negative, It may be I shall not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga a ngi yi ku tanda, Si nga a si yi ku tanda, 
 2d u nga a wu yi ku tanda, ni nga a ni yi ku tanda, 
 
 3d a nga a ka yi ku tanda, ba nga a ba yi ku tanda. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi nga yi ku tanda, Si nga si nga yi ku tanda, 
 
 2d u nga u nga yi ku tanda, ni nga ni nga yi ku tanda, 
 
 3d a nga e nga yi ku tanda, ba nga be nga yi ku tanda, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative. 
 
 1st person, s. Ku nga ngi ya ku tanda, p. Ku nga si ya ku tanda. 
 
 Negative of second variety. 
 
 1st person, s. Ku nga ngi nga yi ku tanda, p. Ku nga si nga yi ku tanda. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, and Progressive forms of this tense, see 285., ii vi. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I may have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi tandile, Si nga si tandile, 
 
 2d u nga u tandile, ni nga ni tandile, 
 
 3d 1 a nga c tandile, ba nga be tandile, 
 
 2 li nga li tandile, a nga e tandile, 
 
 ,, 3 i nga i tandile, zi nga zi tandile, 
 &c., &c.
 
 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL; PAST PERFECT. 197 
 Negative, I may not have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, s. Ngi nga a ngi tandile, p. Si nga a si tandile. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 1st person, . Ngi nga ngi nga tandile, p. Si nga si nga tandile, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative, It may be I have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ku nga ngi tandile, Ku nga si tandile, 
 
 3d ku nga u tandile, ku nga ni tandile, 
 
 3d ku nga e tandile, ku nga be tandile. 
 
 Negative of second variety, It may be I have not 
 
 loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ku nga a ngi tandile, Ku nga a si tandile, 
 
 2d ku nga a wu tandile, ku nga a ni tandile, 
 
 3d ku nga a ka tandile, ku nga a ba tandile. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 1st person, s. Ku nga ngi nga tandile, p. Ku nga si nga tandile, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, and Progressive forms of this tense, see 286., ii vi. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I might have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi be ngi tandile, Si nga si be si tandile, 
 
 2d u nga u be u tandile, ni nga ni be ni tandile, 
 
 3d 1 a nga e be e tandile, ba nga be be be tandile, 
 
 ,, 2 li nga li be li tandile, a nga e be e tandile, 
 
 Si nga i be i tandile, zi nga zi be zi tandile, 
 &c., &c.
 
 198 PARADIGM. POTENTIAL ; FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 Negative, I might not have loved, &c. 
 
 Ptrs. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi be ngi nga tandile, Si nga si be si nga tandile, 
 
 2d u nga u be u nga tandile, ni nga ni be ni nga tandile, 
 
 3d 1 a nga e be e nga tandile, ba nga be be be nga tandile, 
 
 ,, 2 li nga li be li nga tandile, a nga e be e nga tandile, 
 
 ,, 3 i nga i be i nga tandile, zi nga zi be zi nga tandile, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 Correlative, and Correlative-Progressive forms of this tense, see 
 287., ii vi. 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, It may be I shall have 
 
 loved, &/c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga ngi ya ku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 
 2d ,, ,, u nga u ya ku ba u tandile, &c. 
 
 3d 1 ,, ,, a nga e ya ku ba e tandile, &.c. 
 
 ,,2 ,, ,, li nga li ya ku ba li tandile, &.c. 
 
 ,,3 ., ,, i nga i ya ku ba i tandile, &,c. 
 
 &.C., &-C. 
 
 Negative, It may be I shall not have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga a ngi yi ku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 2d ,, ,, u nga a wu yi ku ba u tandile, &c. 
 3d ,, ,, a nga a ka yi ku ba e tandile, &c. 
 
 Second variety of Negative. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga nga ngi yi ku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 2d ,, u nga nga wu yi ku ba u tandile, &c. 
 3d ,, ,, a nga nga ye yi ku ba e tandile, &.c. 
 
 
 
 Third variety of Negative. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga ngi nga yi ku ba ngi tandile, &c. 
 2d ,, u nga u nga yi ku ba u tandile, &c. 
 3d ,, ,, a nga e nga yi ku ba e tandile, &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, and Indefinite 
 forms of this tense, see 288., ii iv.
 
 PARADIGM. OPTATIVE ; PRESENT. 199 
 
 OPTATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, May I love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga ngi nga tanda, Si nga si nga tanda, 
 
 2d u nga u nga tanda, ni nga ni nga tanda, 
 
 3d 1 u nga (a) nga tanda, ba nga ba nga tanda, 
 
 2 li nga li nga tanda, a nga a nga tanda, 
 
 :3 i nga i nga tanda, zi nga zi nga tanda, 
 
 4 si nga si nga tanda, zi nga zi nga tanda, 
 
 5 lu nga lu nga tanda, zi nga zi nga tanda, 
 
 6 u nga u nga tanda, i nga i nga tanda, 
 
 7 bu nga bu nga tanda, 
 
 8 ku nga ku nga tanda. 
 
 Negative, May I not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 Ngi nga ngi nge tande, Si nga si nge tande, 
 
 u nga u nge tande, ni nga ni nge tande, 
 
 L [a] nga a [e] nge tande, ba nga ba nge tande 
 
 nga li nge tande, a nga a nge tande, 
 
 nga i nge tande, zi nga zi nge tande, 
 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative, I ought to love, &c. 
 
 l\rs. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Nga ngi tanda, Nga si tanda, 
 
 2d nga u tanda, nga ni tanda, 
 
 "d 1 nga ye tanda, nga be tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 nga li tanda, nga ye tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 nga yi tanda, nga zi tanda, 
 
 &c., &.c. 
 
 Negative of second variety, I ought not to love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Nga ngi nga tandi, Nga si nga tandi, 
 
 2d nga u nga tandi, nga ni nga tandi, 
 
 3d 1 nga ye nga tandi, nga be nga tandi, 
 
 ,, 2 nga li nga tandi, nga ye nga tandi, 
 
 3 nga yi nga tandi, nga zi nga tandi, 
 
 Stc., &c.
 
 PARADIGM. OPTATIVE J PAST. 
 
 Emphatic form Affirmative, Oh that I may love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Se nga ti ngi nga tanda, Se nga ti si nga tanda, 
 
 2d se nga ti u nga tanda, se nga ti ni nga tanda, 
 
 3d 1 se nga ti a nga tanda, se nga ti ba nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 se nga ti li nga tanda, se nga ti a nga tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 se nga ti i nga tanda, se nga ti zi nga tanda, 
 
 Negative, Oh that I may not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Se nga ti ngi nge tande, Se nga ti si nge tande, 
 
 2d se nga ti u nge tande, se nga ti ni nge tande, 
 
 3d 1 se nga ti a nge tande, se nga ti ba nge tande, 
 
 ,, 2 se nga ti li nge tande, se nga ti a nge tande, 
 
 ,, 3 se nga ti i nge tande, se nga ti zi nge tande, 
 Sfc., 4-c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Continuate, Definite, Indefinite, 
 and Progressive forms of this tense, see 294., iii vi. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I would love, or have loved. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Kwa nga ngi nga tanda, ; Kwa nga si nga tanda, 
 
 2d kwa nga u nga tanda, kwa nga ni nga tanda, 
 
 3d kwa nga a nga tanda, kwa nga ba nga tanda, 
 
 Src., Sec. 
 
 Negative, I would not love, or have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st 
 2d 
 3d 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Kwa nga ngi nge tande, Kwa nga si nge tande, 
 
 kwa nga u nge tande, kwa nga ni nge tande, 
 
 kwa nga a nge tande, kwa nga ba nge tande, 
 
 occ. etc 
 
 For other varieties of this form; and for the Emphatic, Continuate, 
 Definite, Indefinite, Correlative, and Progressive forms of this tense, 
 see 295., i vii.
 
 PARADIGM. OPTATIVE ; FUTURE 201 
 
 Future Tense 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, I ought to love forthwith, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Kwa nga ngi nga ze ngi tande, &c. 
 2d ,, ,, kwa nga u nga ze u tande, &c. 
 3d ,, ,, kwa nga a nga ze a tande, &.c. 
 
 Negative, I ought not to love forthwith, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Kwa nga ngi nge ze ngi tande, &c. 
 2d ,, kwa nga u nge ze u tande, &.c. 
 
 3d ,, ,, kwa nga a nge ze a tande, &c. 
 
 Second variety Affirmative, I must love presently, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. 
 
 1st Nga ngi ya ku tanda, 
 2d nga u ya ku tanda, 
 3d 1 nga ye ya ku tanda, 
 ,, 2 nga li ya ku tanda, 
 ,, 3 nga yi ya ku tanda, 
 &c., 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nga si ya ku tanda, 
 nga ni ya ku tanda, 
 nga be ya ku tanda, 
 (.' ya ku tanda, 
 nga zi ya ku tanda, 
 
 Negative of second variety, I must not love presently. 
 
 Pers. Singular. 
 
 1st Nga ngi nga yi ku tanda, 
 2d nga u nga yi ku tanda, 
 3d nga ye nga yi ku tanda, 
 &c., 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nga si nga yi ku tanda, 
 nga ni nga yi ku tanda, 
 nga be nga yi ku taiida, 
 &c. 
 
 For other varieties of this form, and for synoptical specimens of 
 the Emphatic, Continuate, and Definite forms of this tense, see 
 296., i iv. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 
 Simple form Affirmative, May I have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga nga ngi tandile, or tande, 
 
 2d ,, ,, u nga nga \vu tandile, or tande, 
 
 3d ,, ,, u nga nga ye tandile, or tande; 
 
 1st -person, P. Si nga nga si tandile. or tande, 
 
 2d ,, ni nga nga ni tandile, or tar 
 
 3d 1 ,, ba nga nga be tandile, or tande, 
 
 ,,2 ,, ,, a nga nga ye tandile, or tande, 
 
 &c.
 
 202 PARADIGM. OPTATIVE ; PAST PERFECT. 
 
 V 
 
 Negative, May I not have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi nga nga ngi nga tandile, or tandanga, &c. 
 2d ,, u nga nga wu nga tandile, or tandanga, .c. 
 3d ,, ,, u [a] nga nga ye nga tandile, or tandanga, Stc 
 
 &c. 
 
 For other varieties of this form, and for synoptical specimens of the 
 Emphatic, Continuate, Definite, and Progressive forms of this tense, 
 see 297., i v. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense, 
 Simple form Affirmative, I would have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Kwa nga nga ngi be ngi tandile, 
 2d ,, ,, kwa nga nga wu be u tandile, 
 
 3d ., ,, kwa nga nga ye be e tandile; 
 1st person, P. Kwa nga nga si be si tandile, 
 2d ,, ,, kwa nga nga ni be ni tandile, 
 3d ,, ,, kwa nga nga be be be tandile, 
 &c. 
 
 Negative, I would not have loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Kwa nga nga ngi be ngi nga tandile, 
 2d ,, kwa nga nga wu be u nga tandile, 
 3d ,, ,, kwa nga nga ye be e nga tandile; 
 1st person, P. Kwa nga nga si be si nga tandile, 
 2d ,, ,, kwa nga nga ni be ni nga tandile, 
 3d ,, ,, kwa nga nga be be be nga tandile, 
 &c. 
 
 For other forms of this tense, see 298. 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, I shall wish I had loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ngi ya ku nga nga ngi tandile, 
 2d ,, u ya ku nga nga wu tandile, 
 3d ,, ,, u [e] ya ku nga nga ye tandile; 
 1st person, P. Si ya ku nga nga si tandile, 
 2d ,, ,, ni ya ku nga nga ni tandile, 
 3d ,, ,, ba ya ku nga nga be tandile, 
 SLC.
 
 PARADIGM. IMPERATIVE ; PRESENT. 203 
 
 Negative, I shall wish I had not loved, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ku ya ku nga nga ngi nga tandile, or taridanga, 
 2d ,, ,, ku ya ku nga nga wu nga tandile, or tandanga, 
 3d ,, ,, ku ya ku nga nga ye nga tandile, or tandanga; 
 1st person, P. Ku ya ku nga nga si nga tandile, or tandanga, 
 2d ,, ,, ku ya ku nga nga ni nga tandile, or tandanga, 
 3d ,, ,, ku ya ku nga nga be nga tandile, or tandanga, 
 
 &c. 
 
 For other forms of this tense, see 299. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, Let me love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ma ngi tande, Ma si tande, 
 
 2d ma u tande, ma ni tande, 
 
 3d 1 ma ka tande, ma ba tande, 
 
 ,, 2 ma li tande, ma wa tande, 
 
 ,, 3 ma i tande, ma zi tande, 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 Negative, Let me not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ma ngi nga tandi, Ma si nga tandi, 
 
 2d ma u nga tandi, ma ni nga tandi, 
 
 3d ma ka nga tandi, ma ba nga tandi, 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 Emphatic form Affirmative, Do let me love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Mana ngi tande, Mane si tande, 
 
 2d man' u tande, mane ni tande, 
 
 3d man' a tande, mane ba tande, 
 &.C., Stc.
 
 204 PARADIGM. IMPERATIVE : FUTURE. 
 
 Negative, Do not let me love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Mana ngi nga tandi, Mane si nga tandi, 
 
 2d man' u nga tandi, mane ni nga tandi, 
 
 3d man' a nga tandi, mane ba nga tandi, 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Indefinite and Progressive forms 
 of this tense, see 302., iii., iv. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, Let me have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ma ngi be ngi tandile, Ma si be si tandile, 
 
 2d ma u be u tandile, ma ni be ni tandile, 
 
 3d ma [ye] be e tandile, ma ba be be tandile, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Negative, Let me not have loved, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ma ngi be ngi nga tandile, Ma si be si nga tandile, 
 
 2d ma u be u nga tandile, ma ni be ni nga tandile, 
 
 3d ma be e nga tandile, ma ba be be nga tandile, 
 8tc., &c. 
 
 For the Indefinite form of this tense, see 303., ii. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 Simple form Affirmative, Let me be going to love, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ma ngi be ngi ya ku tanda, &c. 
 2d ,, ,, ma u be u ya ku tanda, &.c. 
 3d ,, ,, ma [e or ye] be e ya ku tanda, &c. 
 &c. 
 
 Negative, Let me be not going to love, &c. 
 
 1st person, S. Ma ngi be ngi nga yi ku tanda, &c. 
 
 2d ,, ,, ma u be u nga yi ku tanda, &c. 
 
 3d ,, ,, mabeengayiku tanda, &c., or ma be ka yi ku tanda, Sec. 
 
 &.C.
 
 PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE ; PRESENT 205 
 
 For synoptical specimens of the Emphatic, Indefinite, and Pro- 
 missive forms of this tense, see 304., ii iv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 TELIC SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Affirmative, That I may, might, would, or should 
 
 love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi tande, Si tande, 
 
 2d u tande, ni tande, 
 
 3d 1 a tande, ba tande, 
 
 ,, 2 li tande, a tande, 
 
 ,, 3 i tande, zi tande, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Negative, That I may not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Ngi nga tandi, Si nga tandi, 
 
 2d u nga tandi, ni nga tandi, 
 
 -*M 1 a nga tandi, ba nga tandi, 
 
 2 li nga tandi, a nga tandi, 
 
 3 i nga tandi, zi nga tandi, 
 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 3d 
 
 CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Affirmative, If I love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Uma ngi tanda, Uma si tanda r 
 
 2d uma u tanda, uma ni tanda, 
 
 3d 1 uma e tanda, uma be tanda, 
 
 ,, 2 uma li tanda, uma e tanda, 
 
 ,, 3 uma i tanda, uma zi tanda. 
 
 &.C., &.C.
 
 206 PARADIGM. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Negative, If I do not love, &c. 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Uma ngi nga tandi, Uma si nga tandi, 
 
 2d uma u nga tandi, uma ni nga tandi, 
 
 3d 1 uma e nga tandi, uma be nga tandi, 
 
 ,, 2 uma li nga tandi, uma e nga tandi, 
 
 ,, 3 uma i nga tandi, uma zi nga tandi, 
 &.C., &c. 
 
 For synoptical specimens of other tenses in this mode, see 306. 
 
 r 
 
 SYNOPTIC OUTLINE OF A REGULAR VERB 
 
 IN THE 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 310. GENERAL REMARKS. 1. The principal rules 
 for the formation of the passive voice have been already 
 given. (^ 204206.) 
 
 2. It should be observed that the negative forms 
 retain a final of the principal verb, and likewise e, not 
 changing it, like the active in some instances, into '; 
 thus, a ngi tandwa, I am not loved. 
 
 3. In other respects save the inserting of w before 
 the final vowel a of the principal verb, or in place of / 
 in the present perfect He, and the changing of the con- 
 sonants, b to is, in to ny, mb to ndz, and /; to s, (^ 205); 
 and save the use of a instead of i in some forms of the 
 negative the paradigm of the passive voice is so similar 
 to that of the active, that a single example in each mode 
 and tense, affirmative and negative, will be all that is 
 required in illustration of its forms. 
 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 Aff. Uku tandwa, to be loved. 
 
 Neg. Uku nga tandwa, not to be loved
 
 PARADIGM. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 C Aff. Ngi tandwa. 
 Present Tense \ Neg. A^ngi tandwa. 
 
 ( ,, Ngi nga tandwa. 
 
 C Aff. Nga tandwa. 
 Past Tense < Neg. A nga tandwa. 
 
 ( A ngi tandwanga. 
 
 C Aff. Ngi ya ku tandwa. 
 Future Tense < Neg. A ngi yi ku tandwa. 
 
 ( ,, Ngi nga yi ku tandwa. 
 
 C Aff. Ngi tandiwe. 
 Present Perfect Tense < Neg. A ngi tandiwe. 
 
 ( ,, Ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 _ f 4 , (Aff. Ngi be ngi tandiwe. 
 Past Perfect Tense J Neg A ngi be ngi tandiwe . 
 
 ( Aff Ngi ya ku ba ngi tandiwe. 
 Future Perfect Tense j N A ngi yi ku ba ngi tandiwe. 
 
 POTENTIAL MODE. 
 
 ( Aff. Ngi naa tandwa. 
 Present Tense J Neg Ngi nge tan d we . 
 
 ( Aff. Be ngi nga tandwa. 
 Past Tense J Neg Be ngi nge tan dwe. 
 
 ( Aff. Ku nga ngi ya ku tandwa. 
 Future Tense j Neg Ku nga ngi nga y j k u tandwa. 
 
 ( Aff. Ku nga ngi tandiwe. 
 Present Perfect Tense j Neg Ku nga ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 ( Aff. Ku nga ngi be ngi tandiwe. 
 Past Perfect Tense Neg Ku nga ngi be ng i nga tandiwe. 
 
 (Aff. Ku nga ngi ya ku ba ngi tandiwe. 
 Future Perfect Tense < ^ g(r j^ u nga ng j nga yi ku ba ngi tandiwe. 
 
 OPTATIVE MODE. 
 
 ( Aff. Nga ngi tandwa. 
 Present Tense j Neg Nga ng , nga tandwa.
 
 208 PARADIGM. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Past Tense ! ff> wa n S a "&! n ? a tand , wa - 
 I JNeg. Kwa nga ngi nge land we. 
 
 Future Tense 5 Aff> N = a n g j ? a ku 
 
 I Neg. Nga ngi nga yi ku tandwa. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense \ ff " u n a n a n & 
 
 I JNeg. Ku nga nga ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense j ff ' wa n ^ a ^ ngi be ngi tandiwe 
 
 ( JNeg. Kwa nga nga ngi be ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 Future Perfect Tense \ ^ U ^ ^ " . 
 
 ( Neg. Ku ya ku nga nga ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 T> * rn ( Aff. Ma ngi tandwe. 
 Present Tense { XT , /F , 
 
 ( JNeg. Ma ngi nga tandwe. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense \ *f' ^ ^ be ngi tandiwe^ 
 
 I Neg. Ma ngi be ngi nga tandiwe. 
 
 ^ m ( Aff. Ma ngi be ngi ya ku tandwa. 
 
 !e j Neg. Ma ngi be ngi nga yi ku tandwa. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 ,. ( Aff. Ngi tandwe. 
 ( IC l Neg. Ngi nga tandwe. 
 Present Tense ^ 
 
 ( , ( Aff. Uma ngi tandwa. 
 
 , ' I Neg. Uma ngi nga tandwa. 
 
 T, . m ( Aff. Uma nsa tandwa. 
 Past lense I XT TT , 
 
 ( Neg. Uma ngi nga tandwanga. 
 
 &.C., &.C. 
 
 SECT. 6. Irregular Verbs. 
 
 311. The conjugation of an irregular vowel verb 
 differs from that of a regular verb only so far as a dif- 
 ference is required by the laws of euphony in the elision 
 or crasis of contiguous vowels, and in some of the forms 
 of the imperative mode.
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. Jllf) 
 
 1. The final vowel a or i in the auxiliary, pronoun, 
 or negative, immediately preceding a vowel verb, is cut 
 off, and its place denoted by an apostrophe ; thus, 
 
 JVg-i y' aka for ngi ya aka; ngi y' enza for ngi ya enza; ngi ng' enzi 
 for ngi nga enzi; w' azi for wa azi; T/' oswa for ya osica. 
 
 2. When the vowel verb is preceded by a pronoun 
 whose final vowel is tt, excepting 2w, or preceded by a 
 pronoun consisting of u or i, these letters change to 
 their corresponding consonantal vowels, w and y; thus, 
 
 Kwaziwa for ku aziwa; wenzile for u enzile; yakiwe for i akiwc; 
 yomile for i omile. The pronoun bu before a vowel verb drops , not 
 changing it to w, which would be incompatible with b; thus, 6' aziwe 
 for bu aziwe. 
 
 3. The pronoun a before a vowel verb is generally 
 dropped ; thus, 
 
 Ukuba azi for ukuba a azi; a ze ome for a ze a ome; amanzi anda for 
 arnanzi a anda; amatole oma for a oma. 
 
 But sometimes the pronoun a is retained before a 
 vowel verb, especially when it involves the relative, the 
 hiatus being relieved by the use of the semi-vowel w, 
 and sometimes y; thus, 
 
 Jlmadoda a icazi; a womile ; a yona (for a ona). In the past tense, 
 however, the relative a and the personal a are preserved each 
 separate, the second taking the semi-vowel w, and then, before vowel 
 verbs, the w is retained while the a (personal) is elided; thus, amadoda 
 a ira fika for a a fika, who (they) arrived; a ica tanda for a a tanda, 
 who loved; a 7c' azi for a a azi, who knew; a M>' ona for a a ona, who 
 sinned. 
 
 4. The relative o, and o in the pronoun, emphatic 
 form of the future, are generally retained before vowel 
 verbs, the hiatus being relieved by the use of w, or 
 sometimes kw; thus, 
 
 fVena o ivaziyo; umuntu o wonayo; indoda e yo kwazi; inkomo e yo 
 kwoma. Sometimes, however, the relative o is used before a vowel 
 verb without w; and sometimes it is dropped; thus, yena o onayo; 
 umuntu omayo for o omayo or o womayo; yena alayo for o alayo. 
 
 REM. The pronoun accusative before irregular vowel verbs is 
 subject to the same laws of elision and contraction as the pronoun 
 nominative; thus, ngi ya 6' azi for ba azi; ngi kicenzile for ku enzile. 
 
 2 A
 
 210 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 312. 1. The imperative mode of vowel verbs differs 
 from that of regular verbs in prefixing the euphonic y 
 to the second person, singular and plural, and also in 
 the elision or crasis of vowels for the sake of euphony ; 
 thus, 
 
 Yaka, build (thou); yakani, build (ye); ma ng' enze, let me do ; ma 
 s' ose> let us roast. (See j 224.) 
 
 2. The imperative, second person, may be formed also 
 by the use of ma in these, as in other verbs, except so 
 far as elision or crasis produces a change ; thus, 
 
 Ma kwake for ma u ake, build thou; ma n' enze for ma ni enze, 
 do ye. (224., 1., d.) 
 
 313. The conjugation of an irregular monosyllabic 
 verb differs from that of a regular verb in the forming of 
 the imperative, second person, by prefixing yi to the 
 root ; thus, 
 
 Yiya, go (thou); yiyani, go ye, from uku ya; yiza, come (thou); 
 yizani, come ye, from uku za. 
 
 REM. These verbs may also form the imperative, second person, 
 by means of the auxiliary ma, as in the case of regular verbs; thus, 
 ma u ye; ma u ze. ( 224., 1., d.) 
 
 314. 1. Some monosyllabic verbs are irregular also, 
 in that the a of the auxiliary, pronoun, or negative, im- 
 mediately preceding, is changed to e. This may come 
 from the restoration and coalescence of an obsolete 
 initial i of the verb with final a of the preceding word. 
 Or it may come from the restoration of an obsolete 
 initial e, especially since verbs beginning with e are not 
 uncommon, while there is scarcely more than one or 
 two beginning with i in the whole language. On the 
 first supposition the more proper mode of writing such 
 words would be to unite the two ; thus, 
 
 Beza (r=6a iza); ba ngezi (=.nga izi); but on the second, to elide 
 the final vowel of the preceding word; thus, 6' eza (=fea eza); ba 
 ng' ezi (=nga ezi], like b' enza, ba ng' enzi. It is more convenient, 
 however, and, withal, attended with no difficulty, to write the e with 
 the preceding word; thus, be za; ba nge zi, just as it is more con- 
 venient to write ngi ponsu ku wa, than to write ngi pons' uku iva; and 
 a ngi zu ku tanda, instead of a ngi z' uku tanda; and ngi sandu ku fika, 
 instead of ngi sand' ukujika.
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 211 
 
 2. Of this class of irregular verbs are the following, 
 uku ma, to stand ; uku mba, to dig ; uku va, to come, 
 turn ; uku za, to come ; uku zwa, to hear ; thus, 
 
 ' Si ye ma,' we are standing; ' be mba,' they dig; ' ba ye za,' they 
 are coming; 'si ye zwa,' we hear; 'a be mi,' they do not stand; 
 ' a ke zi,' he is not coming. 
 
 REM. When uku za is used as an auxiliary to mark the correlative 
 form of verbs, where it has the force of then, until, and in certain 
 periphrastic negative forms, there is no change of a to e in the pro- 
 noun or other \rord before it; thus, ' nga za nga bona;' ' ba ze ba 
 bonile;' 'a ba zanga ba bone.' But when it is used as an auxiliary 
 of the future tense, the preceding a is generally changed to e in the 
 negative, though not in the affirmative; thus, ' a be zu ku hamba,' 
 they are not about to go; 'amadoda a' we zu ku h'ka,' the men are not 
 about to arrive; ' ba za ku hamba,' they are about to go; ' amadoda 
 a za ku fika, ' the men are about to arrive. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. Looking at these irregular verbs in the cognate 
 dialects, we find the following forms : 
 
 1. Uku ma: in the Sechuana, ' go ema,' to stand; ' ba erne,' they 
 stand; ' ba thla ema,' they shall stand. In the Kinika, ' ku ima,' to 
 stand; 'a imaya,' he standing. In the Momenya, 'mekema,' I stand; 
 Ngola, 'ngemanu,' I stand; Songo, ' ami nemana,' I stand; Kiriman, 
 ' de imela,' I stand; Nyamban, ' ne emile,' I stand. 
 
 2. Uku mba: in the Kisuaheli, ' ku timba,' to dig; in the Kinika, 
 'kuzimba;' in the Sena and Tette, ' ku kumba;' in the Mpongwe, 
 ' go tumba.' 
 
 3. Uku za: in the Kinika, ' ku za,' to come; ' na za ' or ' mimi 
 naza,' I come; 'yunda ku za,' he shall come; in the Kikamba, 'uka;' 
 Kipokomo, ' za;' Kihiau, ' issa;' Sena and Tette, ' ku dza;' Kabenda, 
 'me kuiza,' I come; Oloma, 'mi ezi,' I come; Mimboma, 'ngi zidi,' 
 I come; Kasands, ' ngo isa,' I come; so likewise in the Ngola, 
 'ngesa;' Lubalo, 'nesa;' Songo, ' ngi sam ' and 'aminesa.' 
 
 4. Uku zwa: in the Sechuana, 'gouthlua,' to hear; ' ba uthlua,' 
 they hear; in the Inhambane, ' ku pua,' to hear; Sofala, ' ko zwa;' 
 Kikamba, ' ku iwa,' to hear; e na iwe,' let him hear; Ebe, ' mi wo,' 
 I hear; Goali, 'ma wuo,' I hear; Basa, ' mu wo,' I hear; Opanda, 
 ' ma wo;' Pangela, ' nda yewa;' Kiriman, ' de iwa;' Niki, ' me dsuo;' 
 Kambali, 'muwua.' 
 
 315. 1. The irregular verb uku tso, to say, retains 
 o as a terminating vowel throughout all its forms, both 
 of derivation and inflection, of mode and tense, affirma- 
 tive and negative ; thus, uku tsono, to speak together, 
 with one another; uku tsolo, to speak for ; so in the 
 negative, a ngi tso, I speak not ; the present perfect, 
 ngi tsilo, I have spoken ; the passive, ku tsiwo, it is
 
 2\2 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 said ; potential, negative, a ngi nge /so, I can not say ; 
 so in the past tense, the negative suffix nga changes a 
 final to o, as by attraction ; thus, a ngi tsongo, I did 
 not say. 
 
 2. The irregular verbs ukwazi and uku ti change 
 final i to a in taking the negative suffix nga; thus, a 
 ng' azanga, I did not know ; a ngi tanga, I did not 
 say. The passive, present, past, and future, of these 
 verbs, is formed by suffixing wa; thus, kivaziwa, it is 
 known ; ku tiwa, it is said. Their other passive forms 
 follow the general rule, changing / into w; thus, ng' 
 aziwe from ng' azile; ku liwe from ku tile. The im- 
 perative and telic subjunctive modes retain the final i in 
 these verbs ; thus, 
 
 ' Ma ni ti,' say ye; ' ma s' azi,' let us know; ' u si fundise s' azi,' 
 teach us that we may know; ' ni m fundise ukuba azi,' teach him that 
 he may know. 
 
 316. The substantive verb, uku ba, to be, is con* 
 jugated regularly, except the imperative mode, which 
 follows the rule for other monosyllabic verbs ; thus, 
 yiba, be (thou) ; yibani, be ye. This verb, however, is 
 seldom used in the present, indicative, except in the 
 compound ubani (=u-ba-ni), he is what? who? The 
 mere presence of a person or thing is expressed by the 
 use of kona, contracted ko; thus, 
 
 'U kona,' he (is) present; ' ba kona,' they (are) present; ' zi 
 kona izinkomo,' there are cattle present. 
 
 REM. 1. This Omission of the verb of existence in the present 
 tense, and as a mere copula, is natural, and not uncommon in the 
 primitive or more uncultivated state of a language, the force of it 
 being found in the noun or pronoun. For as, on the one hand, the 
 idea of existence can not be conceived by the mind, except as it is 
 connected with some object, so, on the other, the conception of any 
 object must include or imply that of its existence. 
 
 REM. 2. a. But when more than ordinary stress is 
 to be given to the idea of existence, as in the imperative 
 mode, or in expressing a negative ; or when it is im- 
 portant to designate the relations of mode, as in the 
 potential, or of time, as past or future, this verb, uku 
 ba, to be, is required and used ; thus,
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. Jl.{ 
 
 * Yiba nomsa kumi,' be merciful to me; ' ku nga ba iyo,' it may be 
 it; ' wa ba ngumuntu,' he was a person; ' kwa ba ngabantu,' it was 
 people. 
 
 b. So in the use of adjectives as predicates, the verb 
 ba is omitted in the present, indicative, but used in the 
 other tenses and modes ; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi mkulu,' I (am) great; ' nga be [ngi] mkulu,' I (was) great; 
 ' ngo ba mkulu,' or ' ngo ba ngi mkulu,' I will be great; ' ma ngi be 
 mkulu, 1 let me be great; ' ngi nga ba mkulu,' I may be great. 
 
 c. Sometimes the verb uku ya, to go, is jused instead 
 of uku ba, to point out the relation of time in examples 
 like the foregoing ; thus, 
 
 ' Igama lake la ye li ngUfaku,' his name was Faku. 
 
 REM. 3. a. In place of uku ba, as a mere copula 
 in the present tense, where the predicate is a noun 
 specifying identity, one of the euphonic copulative par- 
 ticles, y, ng, or w, is often, though not always, used ; 
 thus, 
 
 ' Ku yinkomo,' it (is) a cow; ' ku ngumuntu,' it is a person; ' ku 
 wamadoda,' it is men; ' ku umuti ' or ' ku wumuti,' it is a tree; 
 'ku uboya,' it is wool. 
 
 6. When the predicate consists of a pronoun, in which 
 case the simple and conjunctive pronominal forms are 
 often united, the euphonic copula, ng, y, or w t is often 
 used in the same way as when the predicate is a noun ; 
 thus, 
 
 ' Ku nguye,' it is he (' umuntu,' &c.) ; ' ku yiyo,' it is it (' inkomo,' 
 &.C.); ' ku ngawo,' it is they (' amadoda,' &c.). 
 
 c. Sometimes the general pronoun i, simple form of 
 the third class, singular, is joined with the conjunctive 
 form of the pronoun of other classes according to the 
 noun referred to, the two pronouns together becoming a 
 predicate with, or without, the euphonic copula y, or 
 ng; thus, 
 
 'Ku yilo ' or ' ku ngilo,' it is it (' itole,' &c.); 'kuyibo,' it is it 
 ('uboya,' &c.); ' ku yiso,' it is it ('isitelo,' &.C.); ' ku izo,' it is they 
 (' izinto,' &c.); ' ku yiti,' it is we.
 
 214 IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 d. Sometimes the definitive form of the pronoun is used 
 instead of the conjunctive, especially where emphasis or 
 great precision is required ; thus, 
 
 ' I nguwona,' ' i wona,' or ' ku wona,' it is just it (' umuti,' Sic.); 
 ' ku yikona,' it is it (' uku ma,' &c.)j ' i bona,' it is they (' abantu,' 
 &.C.); ' ku itina,' it is we ourselves. 
 
 e. Sometimes the simple and conjunctive forms are 
 united and used as a predicate, without any euphonic 
 copula ; thus, 
 
 'Kuuye,' it is he ('umuntu,' &c.); ' ku lilo ' or 'i lilo,' it is it 
 ('hole,' &c.); 'ku lulo' or 'i lulo,' it is it ('uluti,' &c.); 'ku 
 ngimi,' it is I. 
 
 REM. 4. a. In negative propositions as, ngi nga 
 bi ko, the consonant 6 is often dropped, and the vowel i 
 coalescing with a in nga makes nge; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi nge ko,' I not being present; ' sa be si nga bi ko,' contracted, 
 ' sa be si nge ko,' or ' sa si nge ko,' we were not present. 
 
 b. In negative propositions, denying identity, the 
 negative is generally expressed by a si, without any use 
 being made of the substantive verb ; thus, 
 
 'A si ngumuntu,' or 'a si 'muntu,' it is not a person; ' a si nguye,' 
 or 'a si ye,' or 'a suye,' it is not he; 'a si yinkomo,' or ' a si 
 'nkomo,' or 'a sinkomo,' it is not a cow; 'asiyiyo,' or 'a siyo,' 
 or 'a siyo,' it is not it. This form of negative consists of the general 
 pronoun t, third person, third class, singular, the negative a, and the 
 euphonic * inserted to relieve the hiatus. The i (in si), the subject 
 of the proposition, is sometimes omitted; thus, 'a sumuntu;' 'a suye;' 
 ' a siyo.' Here, ti,ye and iyo (the simple and conjunctive forms of the 
 pronoun, united) constitute the predicate; but sometimes only the con- 
 junctive form of the pronoun is used as predicate; thus, 'a si ye;' 'a 
 si yo.' Sometimes the general pronoun ku constitutes the subject of 
 the proposition, instead of i; in which case, there being no hiatus 
 between the negative a and the pronoun, the s is not required; thus, 
 'aku'muntu;' ' a ku 'madoda;' 'akusotina,' it is not we; ' a ku 
 ngabo,' it is not they. 
 
 REM. 5. This verb, uku ba, is often used with the 
 preposition na, with, in the sense of to have, to be 
 with, i.e., to be in possession of; though here also, in 
 the present, indicative, the verb is generally omitted ; 
 thus,
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 ' Ba he nemali,' they had money; ' ngi nabantu,' I have people. 
 In the affirmative, the vowel a, of na, coalesces with the initial vowel 
 ot' the noun; thus, 'ngi nemali ' (=' na-imali '); 'si nomuti ' (=' na- 
 umuti ') ; 'si namakaza ' (=' na-amakaza '). 
 
 But in the negative the na generally remains un- 
 changed, the initial vowel of the noun being elided ; 
 thus, 
 
 'A ngi na 'mali,' I have no money; 'a si na 'luto,' we have nothing; 
 ' ba be be nga bi na 'lizwe,' contracted, ' ba be nge na 'lizwe,' they 
 had no country. 
 
 SECT. 7. Defective Verbs. 
 
 317. 1. There appears to be but one defective verb 
 in the Zulu language, viz., musa; and this, signifying 
 must not, may, perhaps, be the causative form of muka, 
 depart, since musa, cause to depart, put away, might 
 be thus derived by changing k into s, examples of which 
 occur in some other verbs, as in vusa, from vuka; susa, 
 from suka. 
 
 2. But in the sense of must not, this verb musa is 
 used only in the present tense, imperative, addressing 
 the second person ; and is generally followed by the in- 
 finitive ; thus, 
 
 'Musa uku hamba,' you must not go, that is, put away going; 
 1 musani uku vilapa,' ye must not be idle. 
 
 3. It is sometimes used where the command or wish 
 has reference to the third person ; though in this case 
 musa is addressed, or considered as addressed, to a 
 person, or persons, present, while the second verb takes 
 a personal form instead of the infinitive ; thus, 
 
 ' Musa ba nga hambi,' they must not go, or, you must not let them 
 go; ' musa zi nga hambi izinkomo,' the cattle must not go, or, let not 
 the cattle go. 
 
 4. This form is sometimes used in the second person ; 
 thus, 
 
 'Musa u nga hambi,' you must not go; 'musani ni nga hambi,' 
 ye must not go.
 
 JHi DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 318. In the Zulu language the necessity for some 
 adverbs is superseded by the use of certain verbs, which 
 involve the force of what is often expressed by the use 
 of an adverb in some other languages ; thus, lunga, 
 be right, good, do well ; andulela, go before, be first ; 
 sandu, sandu ku Jika, arrive recently ; ponsa or \itsa, 
 ngi ponsu ku fa, I am almost dead, I scarcely escape 
 dying ; nga \itsa ku wa, I nearly fell ; tsetsa u buye, 
 return quickly, i.e., make haste and return ; buya u 
 funde, read again, i.e., return and read. 
 
 319. Most of the adverbs in the Isizulu, like many 
 in other languages, are derived or compounded from 
 other words : 
 
 1. From a VERB ; as, kusasa, early, from uku sa, to 
 dawn, be light, clear ; kulala, first ; \ede, after, when ; 
 funa, lest. 
 
 2. From a NOUN ; as, mandulo, first, and endulo, 
 anciently, from indulo, antiquity, and this, from the 
 verb andula, be first ; eriYe, abroad, in the field ; 
 amanga, no, falsely ; imbala, indeed ; emini, in the 
 day time, open day, midday ; emuva, emva, or emveni, 
 from an obsolete noun, umuva, the rear, after, and 
 this noun from the verb uku va, to come, be formed, 
 appear, follow after, abound. 
 
 3. From an ADJECTIVE ; as, 
 
 Kakulu, greatly; kanye, once; kaningi, often, frequently. 
 
 4. From a PRONOUN ; as, 
 
 Kona, then, there; loku, whereas, since, when; kaloku, now. 
 
 5. From a PREPOSITION and a NOUN; as, ngemi'la 
 (nga-imfla), daily, i.e., by days; ngamarfl'a (nga- 
 amarfl'a), powerfully ; ngamabomu (nga-amabomu), 
 and ngesibomu (nga-isibomu), designedly ; nairila (na- 
 um'la), to-day.
 
 DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 217 
 
 6. From a NOUN and an ADJECTIVE ; as,endaivonye, 
 together, in one place, from indao-inye; 'nyakcnye, a 
 vear ago, last year, from inyuka-inye; um'laumbi, or, 
 plural, imi'laimbi, perhaps, from uirila, day, and umbi, 
 from mbili, two, secondary ; hence, another, some, 
 some day or other ; katisimbe, perhaps, probably, from 
 isikati, time, and simbe, and this, too, from mbili, a 
 secondary, i.e., some other time. 
 
 7. From a PREPOSITION and an ADJECTIVE ; as, 
 fctde (ku-le), well ; kuningi, plentifully ; kakula (gen. 
 ka,-kulu), greatly. 
 
 8. From a PREPOSITION and an ADVERB; as, na- 
 kanye, never ; ngapi? where? whither? 
 
 9. Some adverbs and a few prepositions are derived 
 from NOUNS, and likewise from ADJECTIVES, by pre- 
 fixing the particle pa, which corresponds nearly to the 
 English prefix be, in be-fore, be-neath; as in, paril'e 
 (pa-erfl'e), without, outside; pezulu (pa-izulu), above; 
 pakati (pa-kati, the root of umkati, space, isikati, time), 
 within ; pambili and pambi (pa-mbili), before, in front, 
 beyond ; pansi, beneath ; peseya, beyond (the river) ; 
 pakade, for a long time. 
 
 REM. 1. Any adjective may be used adverbially, by prefixing the 
 particle ka ; thus, de, long, kade, far; kulu, great, kakulu, greatly. 
 
 REM. 2. The nga which is often coupled with an adverb, or a 
 preposition, serves sometimes as a mere expletive, and sometimes for 
 emphasis to strengthen the force of the following word. 
 
 REM. 3. Umflaumbi, plural, imi'laimbi, belongs to 
 the Kafir or Xosa dialect, while its synonym katisimbe 
 belongs to the Isizulu. (See above, 6.) 
 
 REM. 4. a. The paragogic particle ke is an expletive suffix, carry- 
 ing the accent forward to the final syllable of the word to which it is 
 subjoined, and having the force of accordingly, then, thus, now, there- 
 fore ; as, hamltake; go then. (^ 214., Rem. 2.) 
 
 b. The particles ndze and bo are also often used as 
 expletives after other words, though rarely subjoined ; 
 the former, rw/ze, in the sense of thus, so, merely, now, 
 just, simply for the sake of it; thus, ngi ya hamba 
 
 2 B
 
 218 ADVERBS. 
 
 ndze, I just go, I am walking just for the sake of 
 walking ; the latter, bo, in the sense of indeed, of 
 course, then, there; thus, \abo, no indeed ; sukani bo, 
 get away there. 
 
 320. Adverbs may be divided into several classes, 
 of which the principal are the following : 
 
 I. Jldverbs of Time. 
 
 Emini, loc. c. of imini, day, At mid-day. 
 Endulo, loc. c. of indulo, antiquity, in ancient time. 
 
 Futi, again, often. 
 
 Intambama, noun, towards evening. 
 
 Izolo, noun, yesterday. 
 
 Kade, ka-de, long ago, just now. 
 
 Kaloku, ka-loku, now. 
 
 Kaloku ndze, just now. 
 
 Kamsinyane, ka-masinyane, immediately. 
 
 Kaningi, ka-ningi, much, often. 
 Kanye, kunye,okanye, ka-nye,&c.,once, together. 
 
 Ko, present, here, there. 
 
 Kona, ko-na, now, then, when. 
 
 Kondze, ko-ndze, just now, speedily. 
 
 Kupela, v. uku pela, to end, finally. 
 Kusasa, v. uku-sa-sa, yet dawning, early dawn. 
 Kusi'lwa, v. sa-i c lvva, yet declining, dusk of evening. 
 
 Kutangi, day before yesterday. 
 
 Kulala, v. uku Jala, to begin, first. 
 
 Loku, la-uku, then, when, since. 
 
 Mandulo, n. plural, amandulo, at first. 
 
 Mandze, ma, -ndze or -andze, this moment. 
 
 Masinyane, ma-sinyane, soon, speedily. 
 
 Nakanye, na-kanye, decidedly, never. 
 
 Nam'Ia, na-um'la, with day, to-day. 
 
 Napakade, ever. 
 
 Ngemi'la, nga-imi c la, by days, daily. 
 
 Ngomso, nga,-umso, dawning, to-morrow. 
 
 Nua, n. inna, side, sake, cause. when, if. 
 
 Pakade, pa-kade, long time, 
 
 lede, v. uku leda, to finish, after, when.
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 219 
 
 II. Adverbs of Place. 
 
 A pa, or lapa, a-, or la- pa, 
 
 Apo, or lapo, a-, or la- po, 
 
 Apaya, or lapaya, apa-, or lapa- ya, 
 
 Eduze, 
 
 Emva, loc. c. of obs. n. umva, rear, 
 
 Endawonye, n. and adj. indao-inye, 
 
 EnTe, loc. c. of n. inTe, field, 
 
 Ezansi, loc. c. of obs. n. izansi, sand, 
 
 Katsana, dim. of kati, umkati, space, 
 
 Ko, or kona, 
 
 Kona lapa, 
 
 Kona lapo, 
 
 Kude, ku-de, 
 
 Kunye, or kanye, 
 
 Kufupi, ku-fupi, short, 
 
 Malungana, ma,-lungana, v. 
 
 Neno, na-enu, 
 
 Nga lapa, 
 
 Nga lapo, 
 
 Nganeno, nga-neno, 
 
 Ngannanye, nga-inna inye, 
 
 Pakati, pa-kati, umkati, space, 
 
 Pambili, pa-mbili, 
 
 PanTe, pa-enTe, in the field, 
 
 Pansi, pa,-nsi, or -ansi, sand, 
 
 Pezulu, pa-izulu, heaven, 
 
 Here. 
 
 there. 
 
 yonder, 
 
 near. 
 
 behind, after. 
 
 together. 
 
 out, abroad. 
 
 below. 
 
 distant, far. 
 
 here, there. 
 
 just here. 
 
 just there. 
 
 far, far away. 
 
 together. 
 
 shortly, near. 
 
 opposite to, near. 
 
 this side (of). 
 
 here, this way. 
 
 there, that way. 
 
 on this side. 
 
 partially, aside. 
 
 in the midst, within. 
 
 before, beyond. 
 
 without, abroad. 
 
 down, below. 
 
 up, above. 
 
 III. Adverbs of Manner. 
 
 Imbala, n. from bala, make clear, 
 Impela, n. from uku pela, to end, 
 Kale, or ku c le, ka, or ku - c le, nice, 
 Kakulu, ka-kulu, great, 
 Kabi, or kubi, ka, or ku -bi, bad, 
 Kambe, ka-mbe, 
 Kandzalo, ka-ndzalo, 
 Kangaka, ka-ngaka, 
 Ke, uku ka, to reach, 
 Ndza, ndze, 
 
 Indeed, truly, 
 verily, utterly, 
 well, nicely, 
 greatly, very, 
 bad, poorly, 
 of course, naturally, 
 so, again, likewise, 
 so much, thus, so. 
 accordingly, therefore, 
 thus, so, just so.
 
 220 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Ndzalo, ndza-lo, 
 Ndzenga, ndze-nga, 
 Ndzengaloku, ndzenga-loku. 
 Ngaka, nga-ka, 
 Ngesibomu, or ngamabomu, 
 Ze, 
 I at a, 
 
 so, thus, and so on. 
 accordingly, like as. 
 like unto, just as. 
 such, so much, 
 on purpose, willfully, 
 empty, naked, vain, 
 quite, wholly. 
 
 IV. Interrogative Adverbs. 
 
 Ini na? i, it, -ni, what? 
 Kandzani na ? ka-ndzani 
 Kangakanani na ? 
 Na? 
 
 Ndzani na ? ndza-ni-na ? 
 Ngani na ? nga-ni-na ? 
 Ngakanani na ? nga-ka-na 
 Nini na ? ni-ni-na ? 
 Pi na ? or ngapi na ? 
 Po? poge? ini po? po ini 
 
 -na=? What? why? whether? 
 na ? how ? like what ? 
 
 how much ? 
 
 inter. particle=? 
 
 like what ? how ? 
 
 with what ? why ? 
 ni-na ? how much ? 
 
 when ? 
 
 where? whither? 
 na ? why ? why then ? 
 
 V. Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 Kanye, ka-nye, one, 
 
 Kahili, ka-bili, two, 
 
 Katatu, 
 
 Kane, 
 
 Kalanu, or kwa 'si'lanu, 
 
 Katatisitupa, or kwa 'situpa, 
 
 Kwa sikombisa, 
 
 Kwa siyangalombili, 
 
 Kwa siyagalolunye, 
 
 Kwa yisumi, 
 
 Kwa yikulu, 
 
 Kwa yinkulungwane, 
 
 Once. 
 
 twice. 
 
 thrice. 
 
 four times. 
 
 five times. 
 
 six times. 
 
 seven times. 
 
 eight times. 
 
 nine times. 
 
 ten times. 
 
 a hundred times. 
 
 a thousand times. 
 
 VI. Various kinds of Adverbs. 
 Ai, or hai, No.
 
 PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 
 
 Aitse, ai-tse, not so, no. 
 
 Amanga, n. pi. from uku unga, to . f . i|se 
 
 beguile, 
 
 Ehe, yes. 
 
 Ewe, yes. 
 
 Idzi, or idzile, i, he, and dzila, nod, yes, truly. 
 Imi'laimbi, imi c la-imbi, perhaps. 
 
 Isibili, truly, very. 
 
 Ingabe, i, it, -nga, may, -be, be, perhaps. 
 Kanti, ka,-nti, or -anti, the contrary, whereas, but. 
 Katisimbe, isikati-esimbe, perhaps, probably. 
 
 Kodwa, ka-udwa, only, but. 
 
 Kumbe, ku-mbe, probably. 
 
 Pela, v. uku pela, to conclude, then, of course. 
 Um'laumbi, unfla-umbi, perhaps. 
 
 Yebo, ye-bo, yes, indeed ! 
 
 la, or labo, no. 
 
 la, or labo, no. 
 
 321. There is a class of words in the Zulu language 
 which might be called Pronominal Adverbs, or Prono- 
 mino-Locative Adverbs, since they are composed in part 
 of pronouns, and are used to point out the locality of a 
 person or thing, as being here, or there, or there yonder; 
 thus, 
 
 Nangu, here he is; nango, there he is; nanguya, there he is in the 
 distance. 
 
 322. These pronominal adverbs consist of the pre- 
 position no, and a pronoun of the simple form, together, 
 in most cases, with some epenthetic euphonic medial, 
 as ng, m, n, ns, or nt; thus, 
 
 Nangu (=na-ng-u}, even he, here he is; namba (=namba), even 
 they, here they are. Here the office of ng and m is merely to soften 
 and facilitate the combination na-u, and na-ba, in accordance with 
 principles already stated. ( 24., 32., 35.) 
 
 REM. 1. Pronominal adverbs for nouns of the fourth class require 
 no euphonic medial, since the two essential elements are easily united 
 and enunciated without the intervention of any other sound ; thus, 
 nasi (isibuko), here it is (the glass); nazi (izibuko), here they are (the 
 glasses). Sometimes, but not always, the pronominal adverb of the 
 eighth class employs a medial n before the A: ; thus, nanku or naku
 
 222 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 
 
 here it is (rain). When the incipient of the noun contains 
 the n, this sound is generally introduced, as by attraction, into the 
 pronominal adverb ; thus, nanzi (izinkomo'), here they are (cattle). 
 
 ( 36.) 
 
 REM. 2. In the pronominal adverb for nouns of the second class, 
 plural, we have, sometimes, the euphonic medial ng; but more fre- 
 quently, in pure Zulu, we have the sharper corresponding equivalent 
 nk; thus, nanga or nunka (amadoda), here they are (the men). And 
 in the singular of the sixth class we sometimes hear nanku instead of 
 the softer and more usual nangu (umuti), here it is (the tree, or 
 medicine, &c.) 
 
 REM. 3. In the singular of the third class, and in the plural of 
 the sixth, we have the medial ns ; thus, nansi (inkomo), here it is (the 
 cow); nansi (imi/i), here they are (the trees). In the singular of the 
 second and fifth classes, we have the medial nt, and the pronouns i 
 and ; thus, nanti (itole), here it is ; nantu (uti), here it is; though in 
 the Xosa dialect, we find noli and nalu. 
 
 323. These pronominal adverbs put on different 
 forms not only to accord with the number and class of 
 the noun referred to, but to express, in some measure, 
 also the comparative nearness or distance of the person 
 or thing spoken of; thus, 
 
 Nangu, here he is; nango, there he is; nanguya, there he is in the 
 distance; so, namba, nambo, nambaya. 
 
 324. The common form of these words, with the 
 corresponding import, may be seen by a glance at the 
 following 
 
 Table of Pronomino-Locative Jidverbs. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Here he, 
 she, or 
 it is. 
 
 There he, 
 she, or 
 it is. 
 
 Yonder 
 he, she, or 
 it is. 
 
 Here 
 they are. 
 
 There 
 they are. 
 
 1 \ 
 
 Yonder , 
 they are. 
 
 1 Nangu, 
 
 nango, 
 
 nanguya; 
 
 namba, 
 
 nambo, 
 
 nambaya. 
 
 2 Nanti, 
 
 nanto, 
 
 nantiya; 
 
 nanka, 
 
 nanko, 
 
 nankaya. 
 
 3 Nansi, 
 
 nanso, 
 
 nansiya; 
 
 nanzi, 
 
 nanzo, 
 
 nanziya. 
 
 4 Nasi, 
 
 naso, 
 
 nasiya; 
 
 nazi, 
 
 nazo, 
 
 naziya. 
 
 5 Nantu, 
 
 nanto, 
 
 nantuya; 
 
 nazi, 
 
 nazo, 
 
 naziya. 
 
 6 Nangu, 
 
 nango, 
 
 nanguya; 
 
 nansi, 
 
 nanso, 
 
 nansiya. 
 
 7 Nambu, 
 
 nambo, 
 
 nambuya; 
 
 nambu, 
 
 nambo, 
 
 nambuya. 
 
 8 Naku, 
 
 nako, 
 
 nakuya; 
 
 naku, 
 
 nako, 
 
 nakuya. 
 
 325. 1. For the first and second person, singular,
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 223 
 
 use is sometimes made of the forms used for the third 
 person, singular, first class; thus, 
 
 -JV*art- (mimt), here I am; nangu (wena), here thou art. And for 
 the first and second person, plural, use is sometimes made of the forms 
 used for the third person, plural, first class; thus, namba (Una), here 
 we are; nambo (nina), there ye are. 
 
 2. But instead of these forms for the first and second 
 persons, the pronouns are often used with the adverbs 
 lapa, lapo, and lapaya; thus, 
 
 JVo-i lapa, here I arn; ni lapo, there ye are. Or, instead of the ad- 
 verb lapa, we may have the preposition na, with the conjunctive form 
 of the required pronoun; thus, u nami, thou (art here) with me; ngi 
 I (am here) with you. 
 
 REM. The pronouns of the third person are sometimes used like 
 those of the first and second, with the adverbs lapa, lapo, and lapaya; 
 thus, ba lapa, they are here; ba lapo, they are there. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 326. 1. In the Isizulu, as in many other languages, 
 especially among the African dialects, the same word 
 appears, according to its use and connection, sometimes 
 as an adverb, and sometimes as a preposition, or as a 
 conjunction. 
 
 2. Several words, which are used in the twofold 
 capacity of an adverb and a preposition, when they serve 
 as the latter, are always followed by another, as kwa, 
 na; thus, 
 
 Peru kwomuti (=kwa-umuti) , upon the tree; educe nentaba (=na- 
 intaba), near the mountain. 
 
 REM. 1 . The preposition kioa seems to be a compound of the pre- 
 position ku and the genitive particle a, the elements of which are still 
 retained in their original separate use in the case of proper nouns, the 
 names of persons; thus, pambi kit ka 'Faku (a hardened by fc), before 
 Faku.
 
 224 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 REM. L 2. This twofold use of prepositions is not peculiar to the 
 Isizulu; neither is the second so superfluous as some might at first 
 suppose. The same, in substance, may be seen in such English words 
 and phrases as up on, in-lo, iintk-in, near lo, near by, before (=by-fore^. 
 And the force of each preposition may generally be seen in such Zulu 
 phrases as, eduze nenta&a,--=near with, near by, or close to the moun- 
 tain; pezu kwomuli,\ip on, or up to the tree; pambi ku ka 'Faku,= 
 opposite to, or in the presence of Faku. 
 
 REM. 3. The principal preposition is often preceded by nga, which 
 may be used, as in case of the adverbs, not only for euphony, or as 
 an expletive, but also to modify or strengthen the preposition which it 
 precedes; thus, pezu, above; nga pezu, over above; pansi, below; nga 
 pansi, down below. 
 
 327. Most of the Zulu prepositions are contained in 
 the following list : 
 
 Eduze (na-), 
 
 Erava (kwa-), 
 
 En c la (na- or kwa-), 
 
 Ezansi (na- or kwa-), 
 
 Ka (also ba, &c., see 
 
 Ku, 
 
 Kwa, 
 
 Malungana (na-), 
 
 Na, 
 
 Nga, 
 
 Nganeno (kwa-), 
 
 Ngenna (ya- or nga-), 
 
 Pakati (kwa-), 
 
 Pambi (kwa-), 
 
 Pansi (kwa-), 
 
 PanTe (kwa-), 
 
 Peseya (kwa-), 
 
 Pezu (kwa-), 
 
 Near, 
 behind, 
 up, inland, 
 beneath. 
 115.), of. 
 
 to, from, with. 
 
 to, from, in, at. 
 
 opposite. 
 
 with. 
 
 about, for. 
 
 this side of. 
 
 on account of. 
 
 within. 
 
 before. 
 
 under. 
 
 without. 
 
 beyond. 
 
 upon. 
 
 328. The place of several prepositions which are 
 common in the English, and other languages, is sup- 
 plied in the Isizulu by the use of the locative case ; 
 thus, 
 
 U sezinkomeni, he is with or among the cattle ; ba ya emfuleni, they 
 went to the river; ba semfuleni, they are at the river. 
 
 329. In addition to those adverbs which are given
 
 CO.NJUNCTiONS. 
 
 225 
 
 as prepositions also, in the above list, we might, perhaps, 
 name other words with equal propriety, such as kude, 
 kufupi, and katsana; unless they are to be counted as 
 adjectives in such phrases as, 
 
 / kude naye, it is far from him ; ba kude kumi, they are far from me ; 
 a kufupi nabo, them art near to them. 
 
 CRJiPTKR Vlll. 
 
 CONJUNCTIO N s 
 
 330. The number of conjunctions in the Zulu 
 language is not large. The people, like all uneducated 
 tribes, incline to the use of short sentences, and to in- 
 dependent phrases. The relation of one proposition, or 
 of one phrase, to another, often depends more upon the 
 general construction, than upon any single word of a 
 conjunctive character. ( 221,, 3.) 
 
 $ 331. The words most frequently used as conjunc- 
 tions are the following : 
 
 Funa (uku funa, to want), 
 
 Kandu, 
 
 Kanti, 
 
 Kodwa, 
 
 Na, 
 
 Ngako (nga-oko, for that), 
 
 Ngokuba (nga-uku ba), 
 
 Ngokuma (nga-uku ma), 
 
 Ndzengokuba (ndze-nga-uku ba), 
 
 Noko (na-oko, with that), 
 
 Noma (na-uma, and if), 
 
 Ukuba (uku ba, to be), 
 
 Ukuma (uku ma, to stand), 
 
 Ukuze (uku za, to come), 
 
 Utna (uku ma, to stand), 
 
 Um'laumbi (umla-umbi, 319., 6.), 
 
 Lest. 
 
 in order that, then, 
 but, yet, whereas, 
 but, only, 
 and, also, both, 
 therefore, 
 for, because, 
 for, because, 
 as. 
 
 nevertheless, 
 even if, though, 
 that, if, for. 
 that, if, for. 
 that, till, 
 if, that, 
 or, perhaps. 
 2 c
 
 226 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 332. Precise, distinctive words, corresponding to 
 what are sometimes called disjunctive conjunctions, as, 
 or, nor, either, neither, do not exist in the language. 
 Their place is sometimes supplied by net, nokuba, or 
 umlaumbi; but more frequently the force of these words 
 is diffused, as it were, throughout the sentence ; thus, 
 
 He or I will assist you=yena u ya ku ku siza mna u nga sa sizwanga 
 imina, i.e., he will help you were you not still helped by myself; John 
 or James or Faku intends to go=w?na ku nge siye Uyohane, ku nge siye 
 Uyaine.se, Ufaku u ti u ya ku hamba; he might not read nor walk nor 
 work=a nge ze a funda a nge hambe a nge sebenze. But grammatical 
 points of this kind belong more properly to Syntax. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 INTERJECTIONS 
 
 333. 1. Like most of the African dialects, the Isi- 
 zulu abounds in exclamations. Some of these are of a 
 profane character, as, Tmka, Dingan' names of de- 
 ceased Zulu chiefs. Some are always construed with 
 the verb uku ti, as, tu, du, or di; twi; nya, the exact 
 meaning of which depends upon the connection in which 
 they are used, but the general design of which is to give 
 intensity to whatever word or sentence they are attached ; 
 thus, 
 
 Tulani ni ti du! be perfectly silent; umuti u lungile u te twi! the tree 
 is perfectly straight. 
 
 2. Many of the exclamations in Isizulu are onomato- 
 poetic, and generally accompanied with some significant 
 gesticulation of the hands or body, or expression of the 
 countenance. 
 
 3. Some of the greatest songs of praise, which the 
 natives sing in honor of the dead the " ama'lozi," or 
 departed heroes consist of nothing but exclamations ; 
 sometimes a single sound repeated over and over again,
 
 REMARKS ON PARTICLES. 221 
 
 as, Jst, Jsi, tsi, &c. One of the greatest songs which 
 Dingane and his men used to sing to the shades consisted 
 of nothing but a series of vowel sounds, as a, o, o, i, 
 e, e, a, o, &c., uttered or sung with diverse slides and 
 with variations upon the musical scale. 
 
 334. Most of the interjections which are in general 
 use are included in the following list : 
 
 An, Oh! alas! 
 
 E, o! eigh! 
 
 Ehe ; he, right ! just so ! 
 
 Halala, hail ! welcome ! 
 
 lya ; hiya, pshaw ! away ! 
 
 Mame ; mamo, alas ! dear me ' 
 
 Maye ; mai, alas ! awful ! 
 
 Mi, attention ! 
 
 Nii ; nui, how sad ! 
 
 We, ho! behold! 
 
 Yebo, indeed ! 
 
 Yeti, plural, bayeti, hail ! glory ! 
 
 ii ; iia ; ne, fie ! tush ! 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS 
 
 ON SOME OF THE 
 
 ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ISIZULU AND ITS COGNATES. 
 
 335. 1. JVa is both a conjunction and a preposition, 
 signifying and, even, also, with; it is also used as a sign
 
 22S REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 of interrogation=? The same word, na=and, with, 
 &c., prevails among all the cognates of the Isizulu 
 along the eastern coast of Africa, at Delagoa Bay, 
 Inhambane, Sofala, Tette and Sena, Quilirnane, Mo- 
 zambique, Cape Delgado ; also in the Suaheli, the 
 Nika, Kamba, Pokomo, and Hiau dialects. It is also 
 common in some of the interior and western dialects, 
 sometimes, however, with some modification of form 
 and import ; thus, 
 
 In the Mpongwe, na, m, n ! , and, uith, for; Benga, na, with; 
 Sechuana, na, with, and, (nabo, with them; nae, with him; nalu, 
 with you). 
 
 Corresponding to the use of na as an interrogative particle, which 
 always follows the interrogative phrase or sentence, and takes an 
 accent with the fulling slide of the voice, the Mandingo has di in many 
 cases; and the Bornu language has ba, originally ra; and this ra is 
 the same word which is used in that language as a conjunction=or. 
 As the asking of. a question implies the return the addition of an 
 answer, the indicating of a question by the use of a conjunction 
 is not unphilosophical ; nor does it differ in principle from the 
 English, which makes most questions to end in an elevated or rising 
 tone, thus indicating a state of suspense and the expectation of an 
 answer. 
 
 336. 2. Nga is a preposition signifying through, by, 
 by means of, on account of, in respect to, at, with, 
 toward, near, about, concerning. 
 
 The Sechuana has ga=at, with, concerning, of, from, respecting ; and 
 the Mpongwe, go=at, upon, to; gwi=at, in, from; and gore==for, to, 
 at. Some of the uses of ga in the Sechuana would seem to indicate 
 its correspondence to the Zulu ka; and some of the uses of go and 
 gwi in the Mpongwe are closely related to the use of ku in the 
 Isizulu. 
 
 337. 3. Ku, the preposition=o, from, in, with, is 
 used not only as a separate word, but enters as a prefix 
 into the composition of several adverbs, especially those 
 which are formed from adjectives. (^ 319., 7.) With 
 the initial uuku, it forms the infinitive ; thus, uku 
 tanda, to love. Ku is also found in many of the 
 cognate dialects, both as a mark of the infinitive, and 
 as an element in the formation of adverbs. 
 
 Thus, in the Suaheli, ' ku nena,' to speak; ' ku fania,' to make; 
 Maravi, 'ku lira,' to weep; Cape Delgado, Tette and Sena, 'kurira/
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 229 
 
 Inhambane, ' ku lila,' Delagoa, ' eko dzila,' to weep; Mpongwe, 
 'gokamba,' to speak; Sechuana, 'goboia,' to bind. 
 
 So in adverbs : Tette and Sena have ' kunsa,' Cape 
 Delgado and Sofala, * kundsa,' while the Inhambane 
 has ' papandse,' all in the sense of the Zulu ' panTe,' 
 without, outside. So again, Tette and Quilimane have 
 'kuzogoro;' Sena, 'padzugoro/ before; Tette and 
 Sena, ' kumbari ' or ' pambari,' by the side ; * kuzuru/ 
 above ; * kumbuio,' after ; ' kuno,' on this side. 
 
 338. 4. Kwa is evidently composed of kn=to, 
 from, -a, the' sign of source, possession, and designa- 
 tion (^ 114.) ; hence the general signification, to, from, 
 of, with, at, in, its more specific import being determined 
 by its connection ; thus, 
 
 1 Ngi ya kwa Zulu,' I go to the Zulu country; 'ngi vela kwa Zulu,' 
 I come from the Zulu country; ' abantu ba kwa 'Musi,' Musi's people, 
 or the people are with Umusi, are at his place, or they belong to him, 
 according to the connection in which the phrase is used. So in the 
 Suaheli, 'nime kuenda kua Wali,' I went to the Governor; Mpongwe, 
 ' agendaga gwi 'longa,' he went to (the) country. 
 
 339. 5. The use of a complemental preposition, as 
 kwa and na, (thus, * pambi kwa-,' * eduze ija-,' 326., 
 2.,) prevails in many of the Zulu cognates. Thus, in 
 Tette and Sena, ' pakati pa-,' in the midst of, as, 
 ' pakati pa-tsika,' in the midst of the night, mid-night ; 
 Inhambane, ' bakari nya-,' as, ' bakari nya-usigu,' in 
 the midst of the night, mid-night ; Delagoa, * tsikare 
 ka-diambo/ mid-day ; Mozambique, * nzua va-muru,' 
 mid-day ; Cape Delgado, ' wakati wa-mfula,' in the 
 midst of the rainy season, winter ; ' wakati wa-dsua,' 
 midst of the dry season, summer. So in the Suaheli, 
 'tini ya-,' under; ' dzu ya-,' over; Nika, ' zini ya-,' 
 under ; ' zulu ya-,' over ; Kamba, * deo ya-,' under ; 
 ' zulu ya-,' over ; Pokomo, ' nsi ya-,' under ; ' ulu 
 wa-,' over ; Hiau, ' pasi ya-,' under, like the Zulu, 
 1 pansi kwa-,' under; and ' pezu kwa-,' over; &c. 
 
 Or perhaps these examples from cognate dialects 
 should be considered as an illustration of prepositions
 
 230 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 followed by the genitive, and more like the use of 
 ' ngenna ya- ' in Isizulu ; thus, * ngemia yake,' on 
 account of him, for cause of him. In fact all ex- 
 amples of this kind serve to confirm the opinion that 
 many of the prepositions were, originally, nouns. It 
 should be remarked, however, in respect to 'ngenna,' 
 that it may be followed by the preposition nga as well 
 as by the usual genitive formula ya; thus, * ngenna nga 
 sendaweni,' in the region about the place, somewhere 
 about the place; * ngenna yendao,' because of the place, 
 on account of the place. 
 
 340. 6. Ka. The particle ka, as seen in many 
 adverbs, is originally a preposition, the genitive a 
 hardened by k; thus, 
 
 ' Kaloku,' of this, now; ' kakulu,' of size, greatly; 'kanye,' of 
 one, once. The same is found in the Sechuana as a preposition, 
 separable^/br, by, in, ivith; and sometimes inseparable, and in the 
 softer form, ga; thus, 'gangue,' once; 'gaberi,' twice; 'gantsi,' 
 frequently; and in some words, as 'hagulu,' the sound of g is re- 
 duced to a mere aspirate. The Sechuana has the preposition ka, as 
 separable, in some cases where the Isizulu has the inseparable pa; 
 thus, Sechuana, ' ka pele,' Isizulu, 'pambili,' before; ' ka gare '= 
 'pakati,' within. We find ka used in the Tette and Sena as in the 
 Isizulu; thus, ' kabozi,' ' kaposi,' once; ' kavire-konze,' ' kabiri- 
 konzi,' twice; 'kaviri-kaviri,' always. So in the Inhambanf., 'karinir' 
 how? 'karoro,' thus. 
 
 341. 7. Pa. The inseparable particle or preposition 
 pa=close, near, by, at, in, among, which enters into 
 so many of the adverbs and prepositions in Isizulu, 
 enters in like manner into the composition of the same 
 parts of speech in numerous African dialects, and is 
 closely allied, if not identical with a similar particle in 
 other families of language ; thus, 
 
 In the Tette and Sena, 'pazuru,' above; 'panze,' (' pandze,') 
 below; ' pangoro pangoro,' gradually; 'pambiri,' by the side; ' pa- 
 boze,' only; 'pafupi,' near; 'pakati,' in the midst. In the Sofala, 
 'padoko padoko,' gradually; in the Inhambane, 'padokuana,' slowly. 
 In the Q,uilimane and Mozambique, changing p into another letter of the 
 same organ, t>; thus, ' vazuru ' and 'vazulu,' above; ' vati ' (='pa- 
 nsi,' Zulu), beneath; Mozambique, *va,' here, on this side; ' vaku- 
 viri,' near; 'vamoza,' once. In Cape Delgado, 'wakati,' in the 
 midst; ' papiri,' sometimes. The Mpongwe has va (=i, tn the space 
 of), both separable, and in composition with other words, especially
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 231 
 
 those which denote time; thus, ' va,' among, at; 'vate.'soon; 'vate- 
 vena,' now; and the Benga has ' piele,' near. 
 
 Not only as a prefix, and in general signification, but 
 virtually in form also, this particle pa is found in the 
 English by or be; thus, bystander, before, beneath, be- 
 side,' also in the Dutch by, the German bei, and the 
 Gothic bi. And in signification, perhaps also in origin, 
 this Saxon and Gothic prefix, be, bi, or by, is allied to 
 the Swedish and Danish paa, and the Russian po; 
 " the Latin has it in possideo and a few other words ;" 
 and its prevailing sense and chief element are found 
 again in the Shemitic prefix b (beth), a relic, perhaps, 
 of an original language in common use before the dis- 
 persion on the plain of Shinar, and a living ligament 
 between the tripartite tongue since known as the Shem- 
 itic, Japhetic, and Hamitic. 
 
 The substance of this particle pa is seen also in the Zulu interro- 
 gative adverb pi, which is sometimes joined with the preposition nga= 
 'ngapina?' where? whither? whence? close upon what? about how 
 many? and joined, sometimes, with the personal pronoun, the subject 
 of inquiry=' upi na?' where is he? or where about is he? ' bapi na?' 
 ' zipi na?' where about are they? i.e., in respect to situation, number, or 
 quantity. ( 148., 4.) Nor is this use of the particle confined to the 
 Isizulu. The Inhambane has 'tingapi?' how much? Tette, ' ba- 
 ngapir' how many? Mozambique, 'gavi?' and Cape Delgado, ' vi- 
 ngapi?' how many? Inhambane, 'itipi?' where? whither? Sofala, 
 'api?' Tette and Sena, 'kuponi?' Q,uilimane, 'uvi?' Mozambique, 
 'vai?' Cape Delgado, 'depi?' where? whither? whence? Suaheli, 
 'wapi?' Nika, 'luapi?' Hiau, 'kwapi?' where? whence? whither? 
 Suaheli, ' wangapi?' which in number? In the Wakuafi we find the 
 interrogative pronoun nil (=what?) and pa combined in the word 
 'painio?' whv? whereby? wherefore? So in the Q,uilimane, 'parani,' 
 why? because of. The Benga has ' ove ?' which? where? See also 
 the Bornu language, 'yimpi?' at what time? when? 'ampi?' which 
 people? 'dandalpi?' which mosque? 'kirpi?' which slave? 'perpi?' 
 which horse ? 
 
 The root of the same adverb is seen again in the Zulu 
 interrogative po ? poge? why? po ini? then why ? ini 
 po 1 why then ? The classical scholar will readily 
 observe the likeness, both in form and import, which 
 this particle bears to the Greek pou, where? about, 
 nearly; pos, poi? &c. Many Hebrew scholars derive 
 the Hebrew preposition 6 from the noun beth, house.
 
 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 in the house, in, by, near. In some instances its Ham- 
 itic equivalent, pa, (po, va } vo,) carries with it the idea 
 of being at home; thus, 
 
 Sena, 'a ri po?' is he at home? Mozambique, ' ngi ya vo,' I am 
 at home; ' mukunga wa va,' the master is at home ; 'uhivo,' he is 
 absent. 
 
 342. 8. La is a demonstrative particle, entering 
 into the composition of the demonstrative pronouns, and 
 a few of the adverbs ; thus, 
 
 'Loku ' (la-uku), this, then, when; ' lapa ' (la-apa), here; ' lapo,' 
 there; 'lapaya,' yonder. 
 
 343. 9. Ya is an adverbial suffix, derived, perhaps, 
 from the verb uku ya, to go ; denoting distance in place ; 
 and generally accompanied by some gesticulation, as 
 pointing the finger or inclining the head,=yonder; thus, 
 
 'Ley a,' that, or there yonder; 'lapaya,' away yonder; Suaheli, 
 'ya kule,' far; Pokomo, 'kuye,' far, distant. The Sechuana and 
 Mpongwe make use of la in a similar manner ; thus, Sechuana, 
 'kakala,' far, distant; Mpongwe, 'la,' distant; so Hiau, 'kula,' 
 distant. 
 
 344. 10. Jlpa, apo, apaya. In the adverb apa, 
 we have the inseparable pa (=near, close, by), and the 
 genitive particle a, which is sometimes preceded and 
 strengthened by the demonstrative la,=apa, or lapa, 
 here, at this place, hither, at the time, when; apo, or 
 lapo, there, at that place, thither, where; apaya, or 
 lapaya, yonder, at a distance. 
 
 In some of the neighboring dialects this adverb has reference to 
 adjacent or contiguous time as well as place; .thus, Inhambane, 'apa,' 
 here, now; 'apa apa,' just now; Mpongwe, 'vena,' here; 'vate,' 
 soon; 'vate-vena,' now; 'vava,' there; 'vana' and 'mevana,' yonder; 
 Suaheli, 'hapa.'here; Nika, 'hiva;' Pokomo, 'hafa;' Hiau, 'hapano,' 
 here, hither; Suaheli, 'hapo,' there; ' mahali hapa,' 'hapano,' 
 thence; Nika, ' kua hiva,' hence (from there); Benga, ' okava,' here; 
 'okavani,' there; ' ovani,' there yonder; 'ove,' where; 'pani,' this 
 moment. 
 
 345. 11. Kufupi=short, near, not far distant. 
 The root of this word, fupi, may be traced in many 
 cognates of the Isizulu.
 
 CKN VARIOUS PARTICLES. 
 
 In the Inhambane, Tette and Sena, ' pafupi,' near ; Suaheli, 
 ' int'upi,' short; ' karubi,' near; Nika, 'mfuhi,' short; 'fefi,' near; 
 Kamba, ' muguwe,' short; ' waguwe,' near ; Pokomo, ' niiufi,' short; 
 ' lialurt,' near; Emboma, ' kufe,' short; Mpongwe, ' pe ' and ' epe,' 
 short; Scchuana, 'gaufi,' near; Kongo, ' kofi,' short. In both 
 the form and import of this word, there is much to suggest that 
 it may be, radically, a mere reduplication of pa, originally papa, 
 near, by. 
 
 346. 12. Ezansi, pansi. The root nsi, or ansi, 
 which occurs in ezansi (ezi-ansini, contracted, ezansi), 
 the locative, plural, of an obsolete Zulu noun izansi= 
 sand, sea-shore, bed of a river, and hence ezansi=sea- 
 ivard, down country, lower down, aground; which root 
 occurs also in pansi (pa-nsi, or -ansi,)=aground, on 
 the ground, down, beneath, below, under; and which 
 root is doubtless seen also in am anzi, the sharp aspirate 
 s having passed over into the weaker z, of the same 
 organ, is found, in substance, still in use with a similar 
 meaning in many Zulu cognates; viz., Nhalemoe, 'nsi,' 
 sand; Melon, 'use,' sand; Ngoten, 'nse;' Mbofon 
 and Udom, 'nsise;' Eafen, 'aseve;' Orungu, 'deseye,' 
 plural, 'maseye;' Babuma, 'ndsie;' Undaza, ' esei,' 
 plural, ' mansei ;' sand; Fanti, ' nsu,' water ; Q,uili- 
 mane, 'nuinsi,' river; Zulu, 'amanzi,' water; locative, 
 
 * emanzini,' in the water; Param, ' nzi ' and 'nze;' 
 Papiah, < nsi ' and 'ndsi;' Pati, 'ndsi;' Bayon, 'ndsib;' 
 Mbamba and Bumbete, ' andsa ' and 'mandsa;' Kiri- 
 man, ' mandse,' water. So also Cape Delgado, ' ma- 
 dsi/ water; 'pansi,' low place; Tette and Sena, 
 
 * madzi,' water ; ' pandzi,' low place ; ' panze ' or ' pa- 
 ndze,' beneath, on the ground; Sofala, 'madsi,' water; 
 'pasi,' low place ; Quilimane, 'mandse' or ' mainse,' 
 water; Maravi, ' madze' or ' matse,' water ; 'panze/ 
 beneath, on the ground; Cape Delgado, 'sini,' beneath; 
 Suaheli,' ' madsi ' or ' madyi,' water ; ' nti,' earth ; 
 'tini,' below; ' tini ya-,' under ; Nika, ' mazi,' water ; 
 'zi,' earth; ' zini,' below ; ' zini ya-,' under; Kamba, 
 'mansi,' water; ' ndi,' earth; 'deo,' below; ' deo ya-,' 
 under ; Pokorno, ' mazi,' water ; c nsi,' earth, below ; 
 ' nsi ya-,' under ; Hiau, ' rnessi,' water ; ' pasi ya-,' 
 under ; Sechuana, ' metse,' water ; ' tlase ' (' thlase '= 
 ' c lase'), below, beneath, under. 
 
 2 D
 
 234 REMARKS AND OBSKR V A TIONS, 
 
 The likeness or identity between ' ezansi ' and ' pansi,' in the Zulu 
 dialect, and many of the above words in its cognates, will be more 
 apparent by keeping in mind that the s in these Zulu words has a kind 
 of guttural aspiration, which some have attempted to represent by the 
 use of t, and writing the words, as they are generally written in the 
 Kafir (Xosa) dialect, thus, 'ezantsi,' 'pantsi.' 
 
 347. 13. Pezulu, pezu. The adverb, pezulu 
 preposition, pezu=over, above, on, upon, (pa, near, at, 
 -izulu, sky, heaven,) is found in many of the neighbor- 
 ing dialects. In some, it consists of the noun alone; 
 in others, of the noun and preposition pa or va, as in the 
 Isizulu ; thus, 
 
 Tette and Sena ' pazuru' or ' kuzuru,' over, above, up, upwards; 
 Mozambique, 'vazulu,' 'uzulu,' 'ozulu,' over, above, &.C.; Quili- 
 mane, ' vazuru,' above; Galla, ' gubba,' over, above; Nika, ' Zulu,' 
 above; ' zulu ya-,' over; Kamba, ' ulu,' above; ' zulu ya-,' over; 
 Pokomo, ' zu,' above; 'uluwa-,' over; so in the Isizulu, 'pezulu,' 
 above; ' pezu kwa-,' over. The noun itself may be traced much far- 
 ther, of which the following are a few specimens of its form in different 
 dialects: Fanti, ' esuru,' sky; Avekwom, ' ezuve,' sky; Kongo, 
 'ezulu;' Kinboma, 'zulu;' Basunde and Babuma, 'yulu;' Mbamba 
 and Bumbete, ' yolo;' Kabenda, ' yilu'and ' kuyilu;' Kambali, 'asulo' 
 and ' ozulo,' sky, heaven. 
 
 348. 14. EriYe, paril'e. The adverb eri\'e=in the 
 field, abroad, without, also paril'e (pa-erile), without, 
 outside, abroad, are derived from the noun ilirile, or 
 iriYe, an open field, waste, desert, wilderness, an un- 
 cultivated, desolate section of country ; and hence the 
 significations of the adverb and preposition abroad, 
 without, above. The Inhambane has ' papandse,' with- 
 out, outside; Sofala, 'kundsa;' Tette, Sena, and Cape 
 Delgado, ' kunsa ' and ' kundsa/ without, outside; 
 Suaheli, *nde;' Nika and Pokomo, 'nse;' Kamba, 
 ' nsa ;' and the Sechuana, ' ka intle ' (' inTe ?'), with- 
 out, abroad. 
 
 349. 15. Pakati (pa,-kati, root of umkati, space, 
 isjkati, time),=m the midst, between, within, inside. 
 Among kindred dialects we have the following : Dela- 
 goa, 'tsikarre ka-,' in the midst of; Tette and Sena, 
 'mukati,' within; pakati pa-/ in the midst of ; Cape 
 Delgado, 'wakati wa-,' in the midst of; Suaheli, 'kati,'
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 
 
 middle; ' katikati,' between; Nika, 'kahi,' middle; 
 * kahi kahi,' between ; Kamba, ' kati,' middle ; ' kati 
 va-,' between ; Pokomo, * kahi,' middle ; ' kahi hahi,' 
 between; Hiau, ' dzirikati,' middle ; ' padzirikati,' be- 
 tween ; Mpongwe, ' gare,' 'gogare,' middle, centre, 
 between ; Sechuana, * ka gare,' between. 
 
 350. 16. Kambe, kumbe, pambi, pambili, kabili. 
 In the words kambe, of course; kumbe, perhaps; pambi 
 orpambili, in front, before; and kabili, second (isibini, 
 zimbili, &c., two), we find radically the same element, 
 or elements, and the same generic idea, both in the Isi- 
 zulu and many of its kindred dialects -, viz., bi, mbi or 
 mbe, bili, mbUi, mbele,=else, other, opposite; and hence, 
 second, two, in front, before, of course; perchance, 
 perhaps. The root mbe is still heard occasionally, 
 especially from the older men, as an adjective in the 
 sense of other, another; thus, 
 
 4 A ngi 1' azi ilizwi elimbe,' I do not know another saying, proverb; 
 so 'izindaba ezimbe,' other matters=' izindaba ezinye.' This root, 
 having i final instead of e=mbi, is not uncommon in the Kafir (Xosa) 
 dialect, where it also signifies another, other, a different one. In some 
 cognates of the Isizulu, we find one element of the full form (mbili or 
 mbele); and in some, another element ; and in other cognates, the two 
 combined, thus : Pokomo, ' mbi,' two ; Ndob, ' be' and ' mbe;' Kum, 
 'mbe ' and 'mba;' Bagba, Bamom, and Momenya, s mbe;' Nhalemoe, 
 Pararn, Papia, Pati, Musu, and Puka, 'mba,' two; Kamba, ' ili,' 
 two ; Kambali, 'ile,'two; Suaheli, 'mbili;' Nika, ' mbiri;' Kiriman, 
 'beli;' Meto and Matatan, ' peli,' two; Kamba, 'mbe,' before; 
 Suaheli, 'mbele;' Nika, Pokomo, Hiau, and CapeDelgado, 'inhere,' 
 before; Sena, ' kumbare,' opposite; Tette, ' pambare,' by the side; 
 ' mbare,' along beside; Orungu, ' mbani,' two ; Mpongwe, ' mbani,' 
 ' vani,' ' ambani,' two; ' mbe,' or; ' kambe' and ' kambenle,' where- 
 fore; Benga, ' tombeti,' either, or; ' ibali,' two; Wakuafi, ' arre,' 
 ' warre,' two; Sechuana, ' gaberi,' twice; 'kapele,' before; ' kampo,' 
 perhaps. So the verb in Isizulu, '" pamba,' cross, oppose; Mpongwe, 
 'simbia,' oppose. We may notice, also, the resemblance, at least 
 external, between some of these Hamitic words, as 'pambili,' ' kapele,' 
 before, in front, and the Hebrew ; kulx !,' the front, over against, 
 before. 
 
 351. 17. Kade, kude. Corresponding to the root 
 de (kade, kude, long, far), the Kamba has ' udi,' far ; 
 Suaheli, ' nde,' abroad ; the Mpongwe, ' da,' ' nda,' 
 long; the Sechuana, 'gute,' far; ' guteni,' far off;
 
 236 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 Galla, 'dera/ high; Nika, < kure,' far; Tette and 
 Sena, ' kutari,' far, distant. 
 
 352. 18. Katsana. According to the form of this 
 word, we must regard it as a diminutive ofkati (umkati, 
 space)=a short space, a little distant, not far away. 
 But the use of the word by the natives always indicates 
 rather a long distance, remote, far away. Hence they 
 sometimes define it by giving kade as a synonym ; and 
 they have recommended it as a proper rendering of such 
 phrases as the prayer be not far from me, O Lord= 
 " u nga bi katsana kumi, 'Nkos'." It would be more in 
 accordance with the signification which the natives give 
 the word to suppose it a diminutive of de, far, long, 
 distant a formation not much unlike ' impandzana,' 
 from ' impande ;' thus * kade/ ' kadzana.' The Efik has 
 'anyan,' long; the Kongo, 'tsela,' long; Sofala, 
 c tambo,' far; Mandingo, ' dzang,' long. 
 
 353. 19. Eduze=near, close, not far away; Galla, 
 ' deo,' near ; Mozambique, ' uduli,' after ; English, 
 ' close.' 
 
 354. 20. Emva (emuva, ngemva, nga semva, kam- 
 va,)=after, behind, in the rear. The Tette and Sena 
 dialects have ' buio,' ' mumbuio,' ' kumbuio,' after; 
 'ngarnbuire,' beyond; Benga, ' ombuwha,' behind; In- 
 hambane, ' muawe,' behind. . 
 
 This word emva'is a noun originally, umva, rear, from the verb va, 
 (ukuva, to come)=come, follow after ($} 319., 2.); from which verb we 
 have also the noun wnvo, a remainder, or excess over and above ten, 
 twenty, thirty, or any exact number of tcns=what comes after ten, or 
 tens. And, as the native counts with his fingers, when he has gone 
 through with both hands and made up ten, he turns back ' a buya' 
 and goes over the same again. Further knowledge of kindred dialects 
 may show a still closer relation than we now see, between the two verbs 
 ukuva, to come, follow after, and uku buya, to return. Already we 
 find: in the Batanga, 'via,' come; Mpongwe, ' bia,' come; Sofala, 
 'via;' Mozambique, 'pia;' Delagoa, ' buia,' come; Nika, 'tua,' 
 follow; Suaheli, ' fuata,' follow; Nika, ' uya,' return. In the Mpongwe 
 we find the adverbs^, and ro,- again. 
 
 355. 21. JVeno, nganeno. The radical substance
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 237 
 
 and general import of the adverb and preposition neno 
 and nganeno=on this side, prevail extensively in the 
 cognates of the Isizulu. In some dialects, their use cor- 
 responds to that of the Zulu apa; and in some instances 
 we find the two, apa and neno, or parts of the two, 
 combined in one word ; and in some dialects we find va 
 where others use either apa or neno; thus, 
 
 Hiau, ' hapano,' here, hither; Suaheli, ' hapano,' thence; Quilimane, 
 c uno;' Tette and Sena, 'kuno,' here, on this side; Tette, ' zani kuno;' 
 Moravi, ' dzani kuno,' come ye here; Mpongwe, 'gunu,'here; Sechu- 
 ana, c monu,' 'kuanu,' here; ' kayenu,' now, to-day; Quilimane, 
 'uvanene,' now; Mozambique, ' nananu,' 'nanano,' now, soon, just 
 now; Tette, 'zapanupanu,' now. In Isizulu and Inhambane we have 
 ' apa;' in Tette and Sena, ' kuno;' and in Mozambique, ' va,'=here. 
 
 This adverb and preposition (neno) is evidently compounded of a 
 preposition (in the Isizulu no), and the pronoun, plural, second person, 
 (in the Isizulu, the conjunctive, genitive form, inu or enu, the sharp 
 final u being softened to o; thus, ' na-inu' or ' eno,'=' neno,')=within 
 from you, between the person speaking and those addressed, this side 
 of ' nganeno kwako,' this side of thee; hither, here. Hence, 'si lapa, ' 
 we are here present (' apa' close by),=' si nenu,' we are with you, 
 on this side of (from which we address) you. ( 325., 2.) So in Tette 
 and Sena, ' kuno,'=fcu, to, by,-no, softened form of the suffix pronoun 
 nu (as in anu, wctnu, zanu, &c.,=yours=of you,)=by you; Suaheli, 
 ' hapano' (pa, or apa, by, -the pronoun ni); Hiau, ' hapano,' thence, 
 hither, here ; Sechuana, ' monu ' (mo, in among, -enu, suffix pronoun, 
 second person plural), =here; so ' kuanu' (kua, at, -enu), here; Mpongwe, 
 'gunu' (go, at, to, -anuwe, ye, contracted n),=here. See also Tette, 
 'zapanupanu;' Quilimane, 'uvanene;' and Mozambique, 'nananu,' 
 ' nanano,' now, soon. 
 
 356. 22. Jnalungana, adverbial prefix ma, and 
 lungana, be straight with, (reciprocal form of the verb 
 
 * lunga,' be straight, right, ) straight with, in a straight 
 line with, over against, opposite to, side by side, near. 
 
 357. 23. Kodiua. The Isizulu has 'kodwa' (' ka 
 -udwa' or ' odwa '=.only, singly, simply; and its various 
 pronominal forms, as, ' ngedwa,' ' sodwa,' ' yedwa/ 
 ' bodwa,' ' zodwa,' &C., I, we, he, or they alone. The 
 Inhambane has ' moido,' ' muedo/ one ; Quilimane, 
 
 * moda,' ' modze,' one; Mozambique, 'moza;' Maravi, 
 *modze;' Kasands, Songo, and Kisama, ' mosi ' and 
 { mosi ;' Meto, ' modsi ;' Matatan, ' motsa,' and 4 moza,' 
 one; the Gallu and Pokomo, ' koda,' a part* portion;
 
 238 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 the Galla, ' dua ' or ' duwa,' empty, void, merely ; thus, 
 the Galla, ' ini harka duwa dufe,' he comes with empty 
 hands (=hands alone, hands only,) Isizulu, ' izanTa 
 zodwa.' 
 
 358. 24. Kanti (ka -nti or anti, the contrary, but) 
 =whereas, but, on the contrary, yet, nevertheless. 
 Sechuana, ' kanti,' whilst ; Kamba, ' ndi,' but, yet ; 
 Mpongwe, ' ndo,' but ; ' kande,' because ; Mandingo, 
 ' warante/ or, or else. Has the word any connection 
 with the Latin and Greek ' anti '? 
 
 359. 25. Ze, vain, empty, naked; noun, izeorilize, 
 also uluze, vanity, emptiness, nakedness, nothing. Sena, 
 c peze ' (pa-ize), false ; ' pezi,' in vain ; ' rapezi,' empty ; 
 Mpongwe, ' zyele,' not, nothing. 
 
 360. 26. Kakulu (ka, of, -kulu, great, verb, uku 
 kula, to grow large,)=greatly. The root of this word 
 is very common in the kindred dialects ; thus, 
 
 In the Delagoa, the adjective ' kulu,' great; Inhambane, 'kongolo;' 
 Sofala, 'guru;' Tette and Sena, 'kuru;' Cape Delgado, 'kulu,' 
 great. So in the Nika, 'mkulu;' Pokomo, 'mku;' Kiriman, 'ula;' 
 Kisamo, Lubalo, and Songo, 'kolu;' Kasands, 'gola;' Orungu, 
 ' mpolo;' Mpongwe, ' polu' and ' mpolu,' great; Sechuana, 'hagolu,' 
 or ' hagulu,' greatly. 
 
 361. 21. Kutangi, day before yesterday ; Suaheli, 
 'tangu,' since ; ' tangu miaka miwili,' since two years ; 
 Nika and Pokomo, 'hangu,' since; ' hangu miaka miiri,' 
 since two years ; Pulo, ' hanki/ yesterday. 
 
 362. 28. Izolo, yesterday; Delagoa, 'atolo;' So- 
 fala, Tette and Sena, 'zuru;' Quilimane, f nzura/ 
 'nzilo;' Maravi, 'dzulo;' Nika and Pokorno, 'zana;' 
 Kongo and Basunde, ' zono ;' Kiriman, ( nzilo ;' Nyom- 
 be, ' dzono ;' Mimborna, ' ozono ;' Musentandu, ' zonu ;' 
 Ngoala, ' ezo,' yesterday. 
 
 363. 29. Kusasa (ku, it, -sa, yet, -sa, dawns ; 
 ' ekuseni,' locative case of ' uku sa,' to dawn)=eew% (to- 
 morrow morning) ; Mozambique, ' utana,' early; 'utsa,' 
 ' utsaka, in the twilight ; Kamba, ' katene,' early.
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 239 
 
 364. 30. Emini, at mid-day, in the daytime ; Ave- 
 kwom, ' emini,' to-day ; Efik, ' imfin.' to-day. 
 
 365. 31. Intambama, 'matambama, afternoon, to- 
 wards evening. Cape Delgado, 'ruremba,' evening; 
 Delagoa, ' adiamba va-pela,' sunset ; Inhambane, ' da- 
 mbo ya gubele,' sunset. 
 
 366. 32. Ngomso (nga-umso, in the morning)=/o- 
 morroiv, from the verb uku sa, to dawn ; Cape Delgado, 
 ' matsesu ;' Pokomo, ' keso ;' Suaheli, ' keso ;' Sechuana, 
 ' usasane,' to-morrow. 
 
 367. 33. Aam'la (na-um'la, with the day, this very 
 day)=to-day ; Delagoa, 'namasa ; ' Sofala, 'nyamasi;' 
 Inhambane, ' nyanse,' to-day. 
 
 368. 34. Ngemi'la (nga-imi'la, plural, by days)= 
 daily; Sena, ' tsiko-zonze ; ' Mpongwe, ' ntsug wedu,' 
 (every day,) daily. 
 
 369. 35. Endulo, anciently ; 'mandulo,' at first (from 
 ' ukwandula,' ' andulela,' to precede, be first. 319. 5 
 2.); Mozambique, ' nyululu,' old ; Hiau, ' longola,' pre- 
 cede; Nika, ' longola mbere ;' Suaheli, ' tangulia mbele,' 
 precede. 
 
 370. 36. Kanye, kunye (ka, ku, -nye, one)=once, 
 at once, together; Tette, 'kabosi;' Sena, 'kabozi;' 
 Nika, ' vamenga ;' Kamba, ' wamue ;' Pokomo and Mo- 
 zambique, 'vamoza;' Sechuana, ' gangue,' once, to- 
 gether. 
 
 371. 37. Kaningi, kuningi (ka, ku, -ningi, much, 
 m&ny)=often, much, enough, plentifully; Delagoa, ' nyi. 
 nge ;' Inhambane, 'singi,' ' tingi ;' Tette and Sena, ' zi. 
 nse ;' Mozambique, ' indse ;' Cape Delgado, ' nyingi,' 
 much ; Suaheli, Nika, and Pokomo, 'nendzi ;' Mpon- 
 gwe, ' nyenge ,' Sechuana, c gantsi,' much, often. 
 
 * ."172. 38 Kti\e, ku*]? (ka. ku, -1e, nice) nicely.
 
 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 well, prettily; Nika, 'wizo ; ' Kamba, 'neza ; ' Sechuana, 
 'singtle,' ('sin'le,') well. 
 
 373. 39. Futi, again, often ; Sena, ' futi,' since ; 
 Mpongwe, 'fa,' again ; English and Saxon, oft, often ; 
 Swedish, 'ofta ; ' Danish, ' ofte;' Gothic, ' ufta.' 
 
 374. 40. JViia (in\\a, noun,=side, sake, portion, in- 
 terest)=?0/iere, if, when. 
 
 375. 41. Ko, a word, or part of a word, probably 
 from the verb ka, usually classed as an adverb ; and 
 used sometimes by itself, especially in a negative con- 
 nection, but more frequently in composition, to signify 
 present, in being, here, there. 
 
 The Tette and Sena dialects have 'uko,' there; Suaheli and Po- 
 komo, 'huko;' Nika, ' hiko;' Hiau, 'akoko;' there; Sechuana, 
 'mo,' 'kua;' and the Mpongwe, 'gogo,' there. 
 
 376. 42. Kondze, mandze, presently, speedily, 
 now, are generally supposed to be compounded of the 
 adverbial preformative ko, or ma, and ndze=thus, so t 
 simply, merely. But the ordinary use of 'ndze,' 'ndza,' 
 does not readily suggest the idea generally expressed by 
 these words ' kondze,' ' mandze,' immediately, &/c., 
 .unless we are to suppose the notion of similarity, which 
 ' ndza ' is used to express, bears hard upon the notion of 
 sameness, =same time, at once, a suggestion which 
 has some color- of support from the use of the probable 
 synonym ga, in the Mpongwe dialect, which is there 
 defined as signifying both like and same. For further 
 remarks on these words, ' kondze ' and ' mandze,' see 
 the next, ' masinyane. 1 
 
 377. 43. Masinyane (masinya, kamsinyane, kam- 
 sinya)=soon, immediately, speedily, quick, now, was 
 probably derived from some noun or verb, (now obsolete 
 in the Isizulu,) signifying speed, to hasten, be quick. 
 And, keeping in mind the laws of mutation among con- 
 sonants in the Isizulu and its cognates, that s sometimes 
 changes to ts; b to ts> and sometimes to dz; m to ny;
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 241 
 
 mb to ndz; bearing in mind also that the nasal m or n 
 is not really radical in some words, but introduced to 
 soften down the hard elastic nature of a mute, m being 
 taken by a labial, and n by a lingual, it is not impro- 
 bable that further researches may prove both ' mandze' 
 and ' masinyane,' and possibly the verb ' tsetsa,' to have 
 a common origin, and be, perhaps, radically the same 
 as some of the following words in cognate dialects : 
 Sofala, Nika, and Pokomo, ' sambi,' now; Cape Del- 
 gado, ' sambe,' (changing mb to it?z=' sandze,' mean- 
 ing the same as the Zulu ' mandze,')=now ; Hiau, 
 'sambano;' Tette and Sena, ' ku tsimbetsa,' quick; 
 ' tsimbitsa,' 'simbisa,' * simbisisn,' 'tsimbiza,' fast, 
 quickly ; ' ku tsimbi-tsimbi,' ' tsambizino,' immediately, 
 soon. 
 
 Now take one of these words, the verb c simbisa,' 
 change the causative into the reciprocal form ' simbana,' 
 restore the radical consonants to their original strength 
 and simplicity, s to s, and mb to b, and we have ' si- 
 bana ;' by supposing the locative to be ' sinyaneni,' 
 contracted l sinyane,' and prefixing the adverbial in- 
 cipient ma, we have 'masinyane;' and from this, by 
 prefixing ka, we have ' kamasinyane,' contracted * kam- 
 sinyane;' contracted again, ' kamsinya.' 
 
 378. 44. Ngesibomu, ngamabomu (nga, -isibomu 
 or amabomu, purpose, design, }=by design, on pur- 
 pose, willfully ; Nika, ' mbomu,' great ; ' ubornu,' 
 greatness. 
 
 379. 45. JVdza, ndze. An adverbial particle, sig- 
 nifying like, as, so, thus; and used, for the most part, 
 in composition ; thus, ndzalo, ndzctni, ndzenga, (ko- 
 ndze?). Kamba, 'dzau?' how? Hiau, ' kua dzidzi T 
 how? Mandingo, ' nya,' a manner, a method; 'nyadi?' 
 how? in what way? M pong we, 'ga,' like, same; * ega- 
 lani,' like, similar ; Benga, 'ndza?' who? what? Se- 
 chuana, 'yaka/ 'yualeka,' as, like; 'yuana' or 'yana;' 
 'yualo' or ( yalo,' thus. 
 
 380. 46. Ndzalo (ndza, like, -/o, dem. adv., this,) 
 
 2 E
 
 242 REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 =like this, so, thus, likewise. Kandzalo (ka-ndzulo,) 
 thus, so, likewise. 
 
 Inhamhane, ' kararo,' thus; Galla, ' akana,' thus; Mpongwe, 'ga,' 
 'egalani,' 'yena,' 'nana,' and ' ka,' so, thus, after this fashion; 
 Sechuana, ' yuana,' 'yualo,' 'yalo,' thus. 
 
 381. 47. Ini (i, it, -ni? what? yini, euphonic y, 
 -ini; yinina?) why? whether? 
 
 Inhamhane, c para kinani ?' why? Q,uilimane, 'parani?' why? Cape 
 Delgado, 'nini ?' why ? Suaheli, Nika, and Pokomo, 'kuani?' why? 
 
 . 48. Agam na ? (nga, with, or by, -ni? 
 what ?) how ? why ? wherefore ? 
 
 Inhamhane, ' para kinani ?' why ? Sofala, ' ngenye r ; why ? Q,ui- 
 limane, ' parani ?' why? Suaheli, ' kuani ?' ' kua nini ?' ' gani ?' Nika 
 and Pokomo, ' kuani ?' ' nina ?' why ? wherefore ? 
 
 383. 49. Nd%anina? kandzanina? (ka-ndza-ni? ) 
 how? like what? Inhambane, ' knrini ?' how? Sena, 
 ' kutani ?' Suaheli, Nika, Pokomo, ' kuani ?' ' nini T 
 how ? 
 
 384. 50. Ninina? (ni? what?-?w? what?)=>/ien? 
 Sofala, Tette and Sena, Nika, and Hiau, 'rini?' Q,uii- 
 imane and Mozambique, ' lini ?' when? 
 
 385. 51. Ai the negative a prolonged and strength- 
 ened by the aid of the vowel i, and sometimes also by 
 the semi-vowel y,=ayi; or it may take also an initial 
 breathing h,=hai or hayi no; Mozambique, 'vai;' 
 Moravi, 'iai;' Tette, 'ai-ai;' Mandingo, 'a-a;' Se- 
 chuana, ' ga,' no. 
 
 386. 52. ditse (at, no; -tse, no, obsolete in Zulu, 
 but still in use among the Bechuana,)=no, not so, not 
 that, not that but; Suaheli, 'sifio;' Nika, ' sefio,' no. 
 
 387. 53. Amanga, a noun, plural, signifying de- 
 ception, falsehood, pretence; hence the adverbial mean- 
 ing, no, not .so, it is false from the verb uku unga, to 
 feign, deceive, entice.
 
 ON VARIOUS PARTICLES. 243 
 
 This root unga is still found along the eastern coast of Africa, 
 in both nouns and verbs, all of the same import as the Zulu ' amanga,' 
 and 'ukuunga;' thus, Cape Delgado, 'ulongo,' it is false, a false- 
 hood, a lie ; 'si ulongo,' it is not a lie; Suaheli, ' urongo,' a lie; 
 ' nena urongo,' to tell a lie; Nika, ' ulongo,' a lie, to tell a lie; Kam- 
 ba, 'uwungu,' a lie; Pokomo, ' muongo,' a lie; Hiau, ' anga,' a lie; 
 Mpongwe, ' noka,' to lie; Sechuana, 'aka,'tolie. 
 
 388. 54. Ehe, an expression of assent=i/es, it is so. 
 Mpongwe, ' ih ;' Mandingo; ' aha ;' Benga and Sechu- 
 ana, c e/ or 'eh,' yes. 
 
 389. 55. Ewe, a simple form of assent=i/es; Sua- 
 heli, *eiwa;' Kamba, ' uo,' ' wiu,' yes. 
 
 390. 56. Idzi, idzile the first form a contraction of 
 the second, the pronoun i referring to c inkosi,' the chief, 
 and * dzile,' the present perfect tense of * dzila/ nod, 
 assent,=he has assented, affirmed ; hence, yes, truly, it 
 must be so. 
 
 391. 57. Yebo (ye-bo)=yes; indeed! Sechuana, 
 *ebo;' Mandingo, { yei,' yes.
 
 PART IILSYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 PROPOSITIONS AND SENTENCES. 
 
 SECT. 1. Definitions and Remarks. 
 
 392. Syntax is that part of grammar which treats 
 of the arrangement and combination of words in pro- 
 positions and sentences, discussing and exhibiting the 
 rules, and pointing out the manner in which the several 
 parts of speech are connected for the purpose of ex- 
 pressing all the different varieties of thought and feeling 
 of which the mind is capable. 
 
 REM. In discussing the doctrine of syntax, the only proper method 
 is to develop the laws of the language in accordance with the opera- 
 tions of that mind which has imposed them. At the same time it is 
 doubtless true, that any essential deviation from the method and ter- 
 minology in general use, and any considerable attention to the theo- 
 retical part of the subject, would be inconvenient, if not discouraging, 
 to those who are not familiar with the truly scientific and philosophical 
 works of Becker and others of that class. 
 
 393. The plan proposed for the following pages is 
 to notice, first, the different parts and kinds of the simple 
 proposition, together with the methods by which each 
 member may be expanded ; also the character of the 
 compound sentence, or the manner in which one propo- 
 sition or sentence may be related and joined to another; 
 then exhibit the minuter points of construction, the re- 
 lations and offices of words as arranged in a sentence, 
 taking up each part of speech in the order most usually 
 followed; and, finally, to close this part of the grammar 
 with a few remarks on the collocation of words. 
 
 394. The design of language is to represent the 
 operations of the human mind, its thoughts and feelings; 
 and since these are highly diversified, and often com-
 
 DEFINITIONS AND REMARKS. 245 
 
 plicated, the expression of them must give rise to a great 
 variety in the forms of propositions and sentences. And 
 yet they may all he reduced to the simple fact that 
 something is affirmed of something. Hence the essential 
 parts of every proposition, and of every sentence, are 
 two, the subject and its predicate. The subject is that 
 of which something is affirmed ; and the predicate that 
 which contains the affirmation ; thus, 
 
 In the proposition ngi fanda, the word ngi, I, is the subject, and the 
 verb, tanda, love, is the predicate. A combination of this kind is one 
 of the most original and simple of which we can have a conception. 
 It is often termed a proposition, and " serves as a nucleus around 
 which the most complicated sentence may crystallize." Other words, 
 or parts of a sentence, are termed adjuncts. 
 
 REM. 1. The relation between subject and predicate, or the union 
 of the latter to the former, is denoted, sometimes by a modification of 
 the predicate, as, intaba inkulu, a mountain is large; sometimes by a 
 kind of euphonic copula, as, ku yinto, it is a thing; and sometimes by 
 a separate relational or form word, as, abantu ba ya hamba, the people 
 they do go, or they are going. 
 
 REM. 2. The relational or form word often acts as principal, or 
 attains to the rank of substitute, being used, sometimes as subject, and 
 sometimes as predicate. Thus, in the proposition ngowami, thou art 
 mine, oicami is predicated of the subject u, while Tig- serves as euphonic 
 copula between the two. So in the proposition ba ya hamba, they are 
 going, the pronoun ba represents the noun abantu, and forms the sub- 
 ject of the predicate ya hamba. 
 
 395. Two or more thoughts may be so combined as 
 to make but one ; and each member of a sentence may 
 be modified and expanded into a thought, the original 
 nucleus remaining the same. Hence we have two kinds 
 of sentences, the simple and the compound. 
 
 1. A simple sentence consists of one proposition ; as, 
 
 Ma si hambe, let us go; ngi ya ku jika ngomso, I shall arrive to- 
 morrow. 
 
 2. A compound sentence consists of two or more 
 propositions connected together; and the propositions of 
 which it is composed are called members or clauses ; 
 thus, 
 
 Si nga z' enza lezi 'zinto tlna ngokwetu, uma si zainazama, we can do 
 these things ourselves, if we try; abantu aba nge na 'sineke a ba sizeki, 
 people who have no thought do not prosper.
 
 246 SYNTAX. - SIMPLE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 SECT. 2. Simple Propositions. 
 
 396. One of the simplest kind of propositions is that 
 which merely affirms the existence of something. A pro- 
 position of this kind must also be one of the first in the 
 order of nature, since the human mind must be cogni- 
 zant of the existence of a thing before it can note the 
 manner in which that existence is manifested, or perceive 
 what other attributes aside from mere existence may 
 pertain to it. Existence, either absolute or relative, is 
 generally denoted, in the Zulu language, by one of the 
 following methods : 
 
 1. a. Simple absolute existence is affirmed by the use 
 of the particle ko, or kona; thus, 
 
 i kona, I (am) present; bakona, they (are) present. 
 
 b. The negative of existence is denoted by the use of 
 the negative a, nga or nge, and the above word ko or 
 kona; thus, 
 
 Jl ba ko, they are not present; a i ko into, there is not anything; a 
 wa ko amanzi, there is no water. 
 
 2. The predication of existence with some reference to 
 nearness in place, is generally made by the use of na, 
 or na and ya, with a pronoun, either radical or oblique, 
 in the sense of here it is, there it is, &c. (see 324.) ; 
 thus, 
 
 JYong-M, here he is; nango, there he is; nanguya, there he is yonder. 
 
 3. a. When the mode or time of existence requires to 
 be particularly specified, the substantive verb uku ba, 
 to be, is used, and inflected like other similar (irregular) 
 verbs ; thus, 
 
 In the imperative, yiba noinusa, be with mercy, i.e., he merciful; wo 
 ba kona, he was present; ku nge fee, it could not be. 
 
 b. The verb uku ba is sometimes used also in the 
 present indicative, more especially in the negative form, 
 with ko, to indicate simple existence or non-existence ; 
 thus,
 
 SIMPLE PROPOSITIONS. 247 
 
 Ukuhako ku ka Yesu Umsindisi, the existence of Jesus tfie Savior ; 
 a ka bi ko, for a ka ko, he is not present; ku nga hi ko, it does not exist, 
 or it not existing. 
 
 397. Another of the simplest kind of propositions 
 in the Isizulu is that which merely affirms or denies 
 identity. 
 
 1. a. The most emphatic affirmation of identity is 
 made by using the simple form of the pronoun as sub- 
 ject, and the definitive as predicate (see 168.) ; thus, 
 
 U yena, he (is) he, or it is he himself; uwena, thou (art) thyself, or 
 it is you yourself. 
 i 
 
 b. The subject may consist of the indefinite pronoun 
 i, or fcjt, and the predicate consist of the simple and 
 definitive together, use being made of some euphonic 
 copula where ease of enunciation requires it; thus, 
 
 1 nguyena, or ku nguyena, it is he himself ; i nyuwena, it is thou 
 thyself.' 
 
 c. Instead of the definitive, the conjunctive form of the 
 pronoun may be used, either with or without the simple, 
 as a predicate, in the affirmation of identity ; thus, 
 
 U ye, u nguye, or t nguye, he is he, or it is he; ku ngimi, or t ngimi, 
 it is I ; i yo, or t yiyo, it is it; t so, i yiso, or ku yiso, it is it. 
 
 d. Sometimes the conjunctive form is used, not with 
 the simple of its own class, but with the indefinite 
 simple i, it, which generally takes its cognate euphonic 
 y; thus, 
 
 Ku yibo, ku >ii:r>. ku y'ui"), or i yibo. it is they; ku ngilo, ku yilo, ku 
 yiso, or iyilo, it is it. (} 169.) 
 
 2. a. The negative of identity is expressed by the 
 negative a before the subject nominative, generally i, 
 the full distinct form of the pronoun being preserved, 
 and the hiatus prevented, by inserting the euphonic s; 
 thus, 
 
 A si yena, a si ye, or a si nguye, it is not he; a si wona (amadoda), a 
 si wo, or a si ngawo, it is not they; a si lona (itole), a si lo, or a si yilo, 
 it is not it. <'4 16!)., d.) 
 
 b. When there would be no hiatus between the nega-
 
 248 SYNTAX. SIMPLE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 live a and the pronoun, as when the general pronoun ku 
 is used instead of i (=a ku), the euphonic s is not re- 
 quired ; as in, 
 
 A ku nguye, it is not he; a ku ngimi, it is not I. But the euphonic 
 s may be used as a copula (i.e., between the subject nominative and 
 predicate nominative), instead of or y; thus, o ku siko, a ku siyo, a 
 ku silo, it is not it; a ba sibo, a zi sizo, they are not they, or these are 
 not the same. 
 
 c. When the euphonic s is used as a euphonic copula, 
 it is sometimes omitted between the negative a and the 
 predicate i; thus, 
 
 A i siyo, a i silo, it is not it. Or the euphonic s may be used, making 
 a si siyo, a si silo, it is not it. And forms of this kind may be contracted 
 by either dropping the subject, making, a siyo, a silo; or, what is more 
 frequent, by using %ily the conjunctive part of the predicate pronoun 
 (=a si T/o, a si /o), in which case it is not uncommon to add the defini- 
 tive pronoun (=a si yo yona, a si lo lona, or); thus, a siyo yona, a silo 
 lona, it is not it itself, or it is not the very same. 
 
 rf. When the pronoun ku is used as the suhject, and s 
 serves as a euphonic copula, in such examples as a ku 
 siyo yona, a ku silo lona, a ku siko kona, the first part 
 of the predicate, as, siyo, silo, siko, is contracted into 
 so, making, 
 
 A ku so yona, a ku so lona, a ku so kona, it is not the same. So other 
 examples, as, a ku siko wena, contracted a ku so wena, it is not thou; 
 a ku siko tina, contracted a ku so tina, it is not we. 
 
 REM. From the foregoing remarks and illustrations respecting the 
 direct forms of denying identity, it is easy to see what must be the in- 
 direct, as in accessory clauses; thus, ku ngc nguye, it not being he; i 
 nge siyo, ku nge silo, it not being it; i nge yibo, i nge yizo, it not being 
 they; ku nge so wena, ku nge so tina, it not being thou, it not 
 being we. 
 
 398. Another kind of simple proposition is that in 
 which some inherent attribute of the suhject is specified 
 by the predicate. This specification may be made by 
 a noun, by an adjective, or by a neuter verb. 
 
 399. I. A noun or pronoun is sometimes specified 
 or described by the use of another noun as predicate. 
 When a noun is thus described its mere existence is 
 affirmed, or at least necessarily involved, in the des-
 
 SIMPLE PROPOSITIONS. 249 
 
 cription ; hence use is made neither of the substantive 
 v<;rl> as copula, nor of any particle significant of exist- 
 ence. Hence, 
 
 1. The predicate noun is simply put in juxtaposition 
 with the subject, some euphonic, in harmony with the 
 noun's initial vowel, being generally employed (^ 35., 
 4., and Rem. 1.) ; thus, 
 
 U yingane, you are a child ; u yinkosi, you are a king; u wumbila, 
 it is maize; i ipumscbenzi, it is work ; ba yisifuzana, they are a com- 
 pany of women (i.e., cowards) ; ba ngamadoda, they are men (i.e., 
 heroes) ; ukukutala kit ngiinina icenzuzo, industry is the mother of 
 gain; isineke si yinsika ycmisebenzi, thought is the staple of work. 
 
 2. Sometimes the predicate noun is merely placed in 
 juxtaposition with the nominal subject, without the use 
 of any relational word (direct pronominal subject), and 
 without any euphonic copula ; thus, 
 
 Iiikosi igama layo Uotu, the name of the king is Otu ; izwe letu Ipole 
 JYatal ibizo layo, Port Natal is the name of our country ; izilwan? za 
 kiti izilo jiezimvubit, our wild animals are tigers and sea-cows. 
 
 3. The predicate noun is sometimes placed in juxta- 
 position with the pronominal subject without any eupho- 
 nic copula. This use prevails most with nouns of the 
 seventh and eighth classes, and also with the singular of 
 the fifth and sixth classes ; thus, 
 
 Ku ubuti, it is poison ; ku uktuna, it is a characteristic; ku uhili, or 
 ku uti, it is a rod. 
 
 REM. The same is seen at times in other nouns; as, ba nbantu (for 
 ba ngabantu) , they are people; ku inkomo (for ku yinkomo), it is a cow; 
 ku umuntu (for ku ngumuntu), it is a person. 
 
 4. Sometimes we find the predicate and its euphonic 
 copula without any expressed nominative, either direct 
 or indirect ; thus, 
 
 na ? (for u ngubani, or ku ngubani na ?) who is it ? irumda- 
 buko u'u koiut, it is the custom of that place; wumsebenzi tcabo, it is their 
 work; yinto abefunda ngayo, it is a thing about which they learn. 
 
 v; 400. The usual form of the negative for propositions 
 in which one noun is predicated of another, as in the 
 foregoing paragraph, consists in placing the negative a 
 or ka before the affirmative form ; thus, 
 
 2 F
 
 250 SYNTAX. SIMPLE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 Jl ku ngumuntu, it is not a person ; a h*u ngabantu, or a kit 'bantu, it 
 is not people ; a ku yinkomo, a i yinkomo, or a yi yinkomo, it is not a 
 cow. 
 
 REM. i. When the subject consists of the indefinite pronoun i, the 
 hardness occurring between the negative a, and this pronoun, is some- 
 times relieved by the use of the euphonic s instead of y ; thus, a si 
 yinkomo, or a si 'nkomo, it is not a cow ; a si ngumuntu, or a si 'muntu, 
 it is not a person; a si 'luto, it is nothing. 
 
 REM. 2. In accessory clauses the negative particle follows the 
 pronominal subject ; thus, ku nge nguye umuntu, ku nge so 'muntu, or 
 ku nge 'muntu, it not being a person. ( 397., 2., Rem.) 
 
 401. II. There is a large class of simple proposi- 
 tions in which a noun or pronoun is specified by the use 
 of an adjective as predicate. And as before remarked 
 in respect to the use of a noun as predicate; so here 
 also, since the existence of the subject is affirmed when 
 it becomes specified by an adjective, no use is made of 
 any verb or particle significant of existence. The pre- 
 dicate adjective is generally put in juxtaposition with 
 the subject, and always takes an inflection which 
 accords both with the incipient of the noun which it 
 specifies, and also with all those euphonic laws of the 
 language which are applicable to the adjective ; thus, 
 
 Inkomo inkulu, the cow (is) large ; umuti umkulu, the tree (is) large ; 
 isibopo sikulu, the band is large; izinkomo zinkulu, the cattle are large; 
 imiti mikulu, the trees are large; inkomo ibomvu, the cow is red ; 
 umuti ubomvu, the tree is red. ( 24., 36., 130132., 135., 136. ; 
 see also syntax of the adjective. 
 
 REM. An adjective taking the incipient of a noun, thus, umkulu, a 
 great one; abakulu, great ones, may be employed as a predicate in 
 the same manner as a noun ( 399.); thus, ngi ngumkulu, I am great, 
 or I am a great one; si ngabakulu, we are great, or we are great 
 ones; zi yizinkulu, they are great ones. Negative; thus, a si ngaba- 
 kulu, we are not great ones ; si nge ngabakuhi, we not being great. 
 
 402. III. It is often the case that some inherent 
 attribute or quality is ascribed to a noun or pronoun by 
 means of an attributive verb, which conveys the idea of 
 existence under some kind of modification, and thus 
 contains in itself both predicate and copula. The verbs 
 thus employed belong chiefly, not wholly, to the sub- 
 jective and deponent species ( 194., 195.) ; thus, 
 umlwana wami u tandekile, my child is beloved, or
 
 MODIFIED SUBJECT. 251 
 
 lovable ; inkosi i sabekile, the king is terrible ; ba 
 \unukehy they are offended ; ngi ya lupeka* I am suffer- 
 ing ; si litakele, we are ruined. 
 
 REM. A few other verbs are used in a similar manner (to specify 
 a person or thing subjectively ) ; thus, ku lungile, it is right ; ngi lam- 
 bile, I am hungry ; ingubo yami 1 gugile, my blanket is old. 
 
 403. Still another kind, and one of the most 
 common, of simple propositions, is that in which the 
 subject is specified objectively, or in respect to an attri- 
 bute contained in its mode of action. In propositions 
 of this kind, the predicate is, for the most part, an 
 active verb, either transitive or intransitive, the general 
 sense of which is brought down, and limited to some 
 particular, qualified by some mode, or directed to some 
 object; thus, ba hamba ngamaiffa, they went fast ; wa 
 tsona e^latini, he hid in the bush ; ngi funa imali, I 
 want money ; ngi mkulu kuwe, I am large to you (or 
 larger than you). 
 
 404. The principal members (the subject and pre- 
 dicate) of a proposition may be restricted, explained, 
 described, enlarged, or otherwise qualified, in a variety 
 of ways, which give rise to the formation of compound 
 sentences. Some of the principal of these ways will 
 now be noticed under the heads of modified subject, and 
 modified predicate. 
 
 SECT. 3. Modified Subject. 
 
 405. The subject of a proposition may be modified 
 in some manner, as by a noun, an adjective, or a pro- 
 noun, before any declaration is made concerning it. 
 This modification may be made : 
 
 I. By a noun 
 
 1. In the same case; as when one noun is annexed to 
 another for the sake of explanation or description ; thus, 
 
 / kona imiziki, inyaniazana enkulu, here are antelopes, a large (kind 
 of) game ; kwajika abantu isifazana, there came people women. 
 
 2. In the genitive case ; thus,
 
 25:2 SYNTAX. MODIFIED SUBJECT. 
 
 Isitumi somuntu si ya suka, the shade (ghost) of a man depaits ; in- 
 kosi yesizwe sa kill i ngUmusi, the chief of our tribe is Umusi. 
 
 REM. The verbal noun or infinitive mode not only admits of the 
 above construction, but it may also take a noun in the accusative, or 
 an adverb, as complement ; thus, nansi imiti yokicaka umuzi, here are 
 trees for building a kraal ; a i ko indtio yokulima kukulu, there is no 
 place for ploughing much. Other words, as an adjective or a noun, 
 used to modify the subject (or the predicate), may also take a comple- 
 ment, or be themselves modified in various ways. 
 
 406. II. The subject may be modified by an adjec- 
 tive; thus, abantu abaningi ba vusiwe, many people 
 are concerned ; amasimu onke a tsiswa, all the gardens 
 are dried up. 
 
 REM. The adjective itself may be modified : (a.) By an adverb ; 
 thus, ' into embi kakulu i za ku fika ku lo 'muntu,' a very bad thing 
 will come upon that man. (6.) By a noun or otherwise ; as, ' um- 
 bila u su mkulu ku nenkomo,' maize is now more valuable than a cow. 
 
 407. III. The subject may be modified by a pro- 
 noun : 
 
 (a.) Possessive ; thus, inkomo yami i Itflekile, my 
 cow is lost. 
 
 (b.) Demonstrative ; thus, izizwe lezi zi si c ltt/a, 
 these tribes surpass us. 
 
 (c.) A relative and its complement ; thus, abantu a 
 ba nga fundiyo a ba sebenzi kakulu, people who do not 
 learn do not work much ; Una esi nokwazi ma si m 
 dumise Uyehova, we who have knowledge let us praise 
 the Lord. 
 
 408. REMARKS. 1. When the subject of a pro- 
 position is modified by one or more words, as in the 
 foregoing paragraphs, it is called a complex subject ; 
 while the subject which consists of a single word, or 
 denotes a thing the nature of which is determined by a 
 single idea only, is called incomplex or simple. The 
 complex subject constitutes the logical; while the noun 
 itself, the leading word in the combination, is termed 
 the grammatical subject. The grammatical subject is 
 the same as the logical when the latter is a single word 
 ar simple term. In speaking of the subject of a pro- 
 position, whether in the foregoing or following pages,
 
 MODIFIED PREDICATE. J ">. '. 
 
 the grammatical is always intended where the term is 
 used alone. 
 
 2. (a.) Where two or more nouns (or pronouns), 
 simple subjects, are connected together, so that one pre- 
 dicate applies to each, they form a compound suhject ; 
 thus, abafundisi nenduna ba puma emkundzini, the 
 teachers and captain came out of the ship ; nembala 
 ba 'langana Umanemane nenduna, verily Umanemane 
 and the captain met. 
 
 (6.) These compound subjects admit of modifications in the same 
 manner as the simple suhject ; thus, ' izizwe ezinye nahantu abanye 
 a ba kataleli imipefumlo yabo,' some tribes and some people care not 
 for their souls. 
 
 SECT. 4. Modified Predicate. 
 
 409. REMARKS. 1. The predicate, like the subject 
 ( 408.), may be either grammatical or logical. The 
 grammatical predicate is incomplex, simple, the quality 
 or attribute which it expresses being determined by a 
 single idea. The logical predicate consists of the 
 grammatical, the leading word in the combination, 
 together with its various modifications ; and hence it 
 is generally complex. When the grammatical predicate 
 is not modified, it is the same as the logical. 
 
 2. (a.) The predicate is also spoken of as simple or 
 single when there is only one in a single proposition, 
 since it expresses but a single quality or attribute of 
 the subject. The remaining paragraphs of this section 
 ( 410 413.) will afford numerous examples of the 
 simple predicate. But there may be two or more simple 
 predicates in a single proposition, each of which may be 
 either grammatical or logical ; and these form what is 
 termed a compound predicate, since it expresses several 
 different qualities of the same subject. Specimens of 
 the compound predicate are given in the following ex- 
 amples ; thus, 
 
 ' Abantu ba kona bakulu, bade,' the people there (of that place) are 
 large and tall ; 'izinwele zabo zimnyama, zi ya kazimula,' their hair 
 is black and glossy; ' ma li hambe izwi lako, li fundise abantu bonke/ 
 let thy word go, and teach all people.
 
 4?, 1 )!- SYNTAX. MODIFIED PREDICATE. 
 
 (6.) Compound predicates admit of modifications in the same manner 
 as the simple predicate. 
 
 3. In the foregoing and following pages, the grammatical predicate 
 is always meant when the term predicate is used alone. It may con- 
 sist of a noun, adjective, pronoun, or verb. 
 
 410. When the predicate consists of a noun, it may 
 be modified in the same manner as the subject (nomina- 
 tive) ; i.e., by a noun in the same case, or by a noun in 
 the genitive ; by an adjective ; or by a pronoun, pos- 
 sessive, demonstrative, or relative. ( 405 407.) 
 
 411. When the predicate is an adjective it may be 
 modified : 
 
 1. By an adverb; thus, izikumbana zazo ziminyane 
 kakulu, their little hides are very small. 
 
 2. By a noun; (a.) Without a preposition ; thus, 
 umuntu lo mtfle ubuso bake, that man is beautiful (as 
 to) his face, (b.) With a preposition ; thus, umbila u 
 su mkulu ku nenkomo, maize is greater (i.e., more valu- 
 able) than cattle. 
 
 412. When the predicate is a pronoun it may be 
 modified or defined : 
 
 1. By a noun; (a.) In apposition ; thus, i yona 
 inkomo, it is it a cow. (b.) In the genitive ; thus, 
 i lona lenkosi, it is that of the chief. 
 
 2. By an adjective; thus, u yena lo omkulu, he is 
 that great one. 
 
 3. By a pronoun; (a.) In the genitive ; thus, i yona 
 eyako, it is that of thine, or that which belongs to thee. 
 (b.) The relative and its complement ; thus, u yena 
 owa muka, it is he who departed. 
 
 413. When the predicate is a verb it may be modi- 
 fied or limited : 
 
 1. By a noun; (a.) In the accusative ; thus, ngi ya 
 bona abantu, I see people ; izinsimba zi ya tandeka 
 ku 'bantu, wild cats are liked by the people; wa hamba 
 ngehasi, he went on horseback, (b.) In the locative ; 
 thus, ba yile emfuleni, they have gone to the river ; ngi 
 vela ekaya, I come from home.
 
 VARIETIES OF COMBINATION. 
 
 2. By an adverb; thus, unwabu hva fika ngasemva, 
 the chameleon arrived afterwards ; ba sebenza lapa, 
 they work here. 
 
 REM. The infinitive may be modified like the verb of a predicate ; 
 and all those words which are used to modify a verb may themselves 
 be modified in various ways. 
 
 SECT. 5. Variety of Combinations and Propositions. 
 
 414. The constituent combinations of a simple sen- 
 tence may he reduced to three varieties, the Predicative, 
 the Attributive, and the Objective. The first of these, 
 the predicative, is the germ of the rest, being that from 
 which the other two are evolved, or upon which they 
 are conditioned. 
 
 415. I. The Predicative combination consists of a 
 subject, of its predicate, and of the relation or union by 
 which they are brought and held together. The predi- 
 cate, however, is the prominent notion before the mind. 
 To combinations of this class pertain all remarks upon 
 the noun or other words used as a subject nominative, 
 upon verbs or other words used as a predicate, and upon 
 the different relations of number and person, mode and 
 tense. 
 
 416. II. The Attributive combination presupposes 
 the predicative, and is founded upon it. Its essence 
 consists in reducing a genus to a species, adding some 
 notion to a noun or pronoun for the purpose of describing 
 it. The most common form of it is an adjective used as 
 an attributive ; though other forms of it occur, as when 
 the attributive relation is expressed by the use of a geni- 
 tive, a noun in apposition. 
 
 The predicative combination may be converted into the attributive 
 by changing the predicate to an attributive; thus, ' umfana u lungile,' 
 the boy is good; ' umfana o lungile,' or ' o lungileyo,' the good boy, 
 or the boy who is good. All remarks upon adjectives, pronouns, 
 and nouns used to limit the meaning of other nouns or the meaning 
 of other words used as nouns, have respect to the attributive com- 
 bination
 
 256 SYNTAX. KINDS OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 117. III. 1. The Objective combination is best 
 known and understood by the use of the accusative after 
 a verb. Its essence consists in making some addition 
 to the predicate for the purpose of individualizing its 
 general notion, or to bring it down to some particular. 
 And every word, or combination of words, which is 
 added to a verb or an adjective, in order to limit or 
 qualify its generic idea, is termed an object or an ob- 
 jective factor. 
 
 2. These objects are of two kinds, the completing and 
 the adverbial. 
 
 a. Sometimes the predicate is of such a nature that an object must 
 be added to make the sense complete, in which case the object is called 
 the completing object. Of this class there are several varieties, as; 
 (a.) the suffering, or that which stands with a transitive verb ; (6.) the 
 conditioned, or that which is generally spoken of as governed by a pre- 
 position expressed or understood ; and (c.) the factitive object, or that 
 which denotes an effect produced by the action of the verb either upon 
 the suffering object, or upon the subject itself, as when one thing is 
 made into another, or serves for another. 
 
 6. When an object is added, not as necessary to complete the sense 
 of the predicate, but to express some particular circumstance respect- 
 ing it, such as the time, place, or manner of the action, it is termed 
 the adverbial object, or the object of time, of place, or of manner. 
 
 418. Propositions may be divided into different 
 kinds, and named according to the different states of 
 the mind which they express and represent, or from 
 some other inherent characteristic, such as : 
 
 1. The Declarative; thus, ngi ya tanda, I do love. 
 
 2. The Interrogative, the construction of which differs 
 from the declarative by the addition of the interrogative 
 particle na=l generally at the end of the proposition ; 
 thus, ngi ya tanda na ? do I love ? 
 
 3. The Imperative; thus, ma ngi tande, let me love. 
 
 4. The Optative; thus, se nga ti ngi nga tanda, oh 
 that I may love. 
 
 5. The Exclamatory; thus, halala 'bantu betu, nako 
 oku l \e ! well done our people, that is good ! awu ! 
 'bazahvana aba tandekayo, kifle ku be kona aba ncsi- 
 neke emisebenzini yabo, oh ! beloved brethren, well 
 would it be, were there those who attend to their 
 duties.
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 257 
 
 REM. Thrre are other divisions and names which have respect to 
 propositions in their correlative and compound character. 
 
 SECT. 6. Compound Sentences. 
 
 * 119. Two or more propositions connected together 
 are called a compound sentence. These propositions, 
 members or clauses, considered in respect to their rela- 
 tion to each other, may be divided into three general 
 classes the Co-ordinate, the Subordinate, and the 
 Incidental. 
 
 420. I. When two propositions are each in a 
 measure independent of the other, and yet so related 
 and united as to form only one thought, they are said to 
 be connected by way of Co-ordination. Of this class 
 there are several kinds; as, the Copulative, the Adversa- 
 tive, the Disjunctive, and the Causal. 
 
 421. I. Two propositions, each of which has an 
 independent meaning, are sometimes connected by a 
 copulative conjunction, or by some equivalent, in which 
 case the co-ordination is copulative; thus, 
 
 ' Ba hamba abanye, nati sa hamba,' others went, we also went. 
 
 REM. 1. Sentences of this sort, having either the same subject or 
 the same predicate common to both, are frequently contracted into 
 one by having the common member expressed but once ; thus, 
 
 Inkosi nenkosikazi ba twalwa ema'lombe abantu, na- 
 bafundisi nenduna ; 
 
 The king and queen were carried on the shoulders of the people, 
 also the teachers and captain. 
 
 REM. 2. The copulative conjunction connects the propositions by 
 connecting the subjects (as above), and not the predicates ; and even 
 here, with subjects, it is often wanting; thus, ' abantu ba kona bakulu, 
 bade/ the people there are large (and) tall ; ' izinwele zabo zi- 
 mnyama, zi ya kazimula,' their hair is black (and) glossy. 
 
 REM. 3. Sometimes the co-ordinate proposition is reduced to a 
 preposition and a noun ; thus, ' ba hamba abanye nati, 5 others went 
 and we, or with u?. 
 
 422. 2. Sometimes the two clauses, which are united
 
 258 SYNTAX. COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 to form one thought, are contrasted with each other, 
 forming an adversative co-ordinate sentence. 
 
 (a.) When the contrast or opposition is of such a 
 nature that the thought in the co-ordinate clause merely 
 limits or restrains the thought of the other, it is often 
 introduced by the conjunction kodwa, kanti, noko, or 
 noma; thus, si sa pila noko si lubukile, we are still 
 alive notwithstanding we have revolted. 
 
 (b.) When the contrast is such that the thought in 
 the co-ordinate clause wholly denies the thought in the 
 other, the structure of one clause is affirmative, the other 
 negative ; thus, inkomo ka imnandi, imbi, the cow is not 
 well (but) ill ; umlotiga wa kona u fana nezinti zesi- 
 swebu, a wu fani nowa lapa, the reed of that place re- 
 sembles whip-sticks, it does not resemble that of this 
 place. 
 
 423. 3. When two clauses are united in one whole 
 sentence, yet one of them excludes the other, the co- 
 ordination is disjunctive, as in the following examples: 
 
 Ufaku u ya ku ku siza uma u nga sa sizwanga imina ; 
 
 Faku or I will help you, literally, Faku will help you if you are 
 not already helped by rue. 
 
 Uma ku nge siye Ufaku, ku nge siye Umakobeni, 
 Urnbopa u ya ku hamba ; 
 
 Faku or Makobeni or Umbopa will go. 
 
 Yilowo umuntu ku tina a nga hamba ngenye inTela, 
 uma e nga sa hambanga ngenye ; 
 
 Either man of us can go either the one way or the other. 
 Ubisi lu nyelezela okwamanzi, or ubisi lu gidzimisa 
 kwarnanzi ; 
 
 Milk flows (or runs) like water. 
 
 U hambisa okwehasi ; 
 
 He goes like a horse. 
 
 424. 4. Two sentences may be so arranged and 
 connected that the one shall denote a cause or reason of 
 what is expressed in the other, giving a causal co- 
 ordinate sentence ; thus, 
 
 Abantu bonke ba kala ngokuba imvula i bi nge ko ; 
 
 Everybody was in distress because there was no rain.
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 259 
 
 Ba ti, noyi'lo wa ha yinkosi ndze, ngokuba wa wela 
 nomuzi wonke, wa patela kona nga peseya kwo- 
 Tugela ; 
 
 They said, your father also became king in this way, because he 
 crossed over with (his) entire estate, and treated there beyond 
 the Tugela. 
 
 425. II. When two sentences are so related that 
 one is dependent upon the other, as when one defines 
 and explains the other, or as when one rnemher of a 
 sentence is modified and expanded into an additional 
 sentence, they are connected by way of Subordination. 
 Here the accessory or dependent sentence its subject 
 and predicate taken together makes part of the other, 
 (the principal sentence,) forming its subject, its attribute, 
 or its object. Hence these subordinate sentences are of 
 three kinds Substantive, Adjective, arid Adverbial, ac- 
 cording as they stand in the place of a noun, adjective, 
 or adverb. 
 
 i 
 
 426. 1. A Substantive subordinate sentence is one 
 in which a noun (or an infinitive) is expanded into a 
 sentence, and used as a subject, an attribute, or an 
 object. 
 
 (a.) As the subject of a sentence ; thus, uma si ya 
 ku peta a kivazeki nakanye, that we shall succeed is by 
 no means certain ; loku kwa be ku wuto olukulu ukuba 
 be twalwe ndzengenkosi, this was a great thing that they 
 should be carried like a king. 
 
 (b.) As a predicate or as a noun in apposition to a 
 substantive in the principal sentence ; thus, a si 'mteto 
 wa sesilungwini ukuba ku sizwe abantu ba kwaZulu 
 uma be muka, it is not a law of the white man's country 
 that people from Zululand be helped when they depart ; 
 ku tiwe izikati ezi dtakele a zi buyi zi fumaneke, it is 
 said, opportunities wasted do not come to hand again. 
 
 (c.) As the object of a verb ; thus, 
 
 JV*i ya bona ukuba si nga funda, you see that we can learn ; si ya 
 kumbula ukuba abanye a ba z* azi kakulu hzi 'zindaba, we remember 
 that some are not well acquainted with these subjects.
 
 260 SYNTAX. COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 REM. 1. The entire compound sentence, that is, both the ordinary 
 principal, and the subordinate members are often found in a kind of 
 idiomatic subordination, being the object of the verb uku ti; thus, 
 
 Kwa ti abafundisi ba funa ukuba ba gaule izinTu 
 zabo ; 
 
 And (or, and it was so, literally, it said) the teachers wished 
 
 them to fell (trees) for their houses. 
 Kwa ti kvvenye indao ya funyana abanye be luba 
 
 izinkomo, ba ti aba sesilungvvini ba baleka ba zi 
 
 siya izinkomo ; 
 
 It said (or, it was so that) at another place it (the commando) fell 
 in with others driving cattle, and (literally, they said) those of 
 the white man's country fled, leaving the cattle. 
 
 REM. 2. This verb uku tl serves also to introduce direct quotations, 
 a sentence in which the language of another is given in his own 
 words; thus, wa ti, " ni nga si limazi, si ngaba sesilungimni." Ya ti 
 impi uku pendula kwayo, " si ya ku bona ngokuba ni nga baleki pela." 
 Said he, " you must not hurt us, we belong to the white man's pro- 
 vince." The commando said in its reply, " we will see, for of 
 course then, you will not run away." 
 
 427. 2. An Adjective sentence is one in which an 
 adjective, or so-called participle, is expanded into a sen- 
 tence, and, like an adjective, employed to give a more 
 exact definition of a noun or pronoun. It is generally 
 connected with the principal sentence by means of a 
 relative pronoun ; thus, 
 
 Abantu aba nga fundiyo a ba sebenzi kakulu, people who do not learn 
 (=ignorant people) do not work much ; yena o zondayo u ya zizonda, 
 he who hates hates himself. 
 
 REM. A subordinate adjective sentence may be used to qualify a 
 noun expressed in the principal sentence, as above ; or be itself used 
 as a substantive, the general notion of a person or thing being under- 
 stood; thus, 
 
 I ya ku batswa e tsotsayo ; 
 
 The skulking shall be caught, i.e., the thief which skulks in a gar- 
 den, or the wolf which lurks about the fold, or the bird that goes 
 hopping round the snare, shall be caught. 
 
 428. 3. An Adverbial sentence is one which is used 
 like an adverb, to express the place, time, manner, or 
 cause of an action. It consists of an adverb, participle, 
 or noun, expanded into a sentence to denote some object 
 which does not complete, but merely defines the idea, of
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. ()l 
 
 the predicate the different kinds of which are illustrated 
 by the following examples : 
 
 (a.) Adverbial sentences of place; as, ba zihambisa 
 lapa be tanda kona, they transport themselves wherever 
 they like. 
 
 (b.) Adverbial sentences of time; as, impi i puma 
 ebusika lapo imifula i si tsile, the commando goes out 
 in the winter when the rivers are already low. 
 
 (c.) Adverbial sentences of manner; as, 
 
 Wa ngi pata ndzengokuba nga pata wena ; 
 
 He treated me just as I did you. 
 
 Ngi be ngi sa m zwile ku be ikona ngi m tandayo ; 
 
 The more I heard him the better I liked him. 
 
 Uma nga be ngi konza Utino wami na ngennenye 
 yokujina e ngi konzile ngako inkosi yami, nga be 
 ngi ya ku busiswa ; 
 
 Had I but served my God with half the zeal I served my king, I 
 should have been blessed. 
 
 Ba ti abantu a ba fi kakulu ndzenga selobo ; 
 
 They think the people do not die so much (in the winter) as in the 
 summer. 
 
 U ya ku ba nokuTa kwokuba u tenge nokwokuba 
 u Te ; 
 
 You shall have food so as to both sell and eat. 
 
 (d.) Adverbial sentences of cause or reason; as, 
 
 Ngi ya bonga ngamanTa ukuba u ngi tumele le 
 'niwadi ; 
 
 I am very thankful that you sent me that letter. 
 
 Ngi ya 'lupeka ngokuba a ngi kvvazi uku loba ; 
 
 I am troubled because I do not know how to write. 
 
 Tina a si nako ukwazi, ngako ma si nga yekisisi uku 
 funda ; % 
 
 We ourselves have no knowledge, therefore let us not neglect to 
 learn. 
 
 HEM. Adverbial sentences of this latter (causal) class 
 often express a condition or make a concession. 
 
 (a.) The conditional sentence is generally introduced 
 by the hypothetical conjunction uma or its equivalent ; as, 
 
 Uma a si na 'kwazi ma si yeke si tule ; 
 
 If (or since) we don't know let u* stop and be still.
 
 SYNTAX. COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 O ! uma se ku tso abaninizo ndzalo, po niina ngi se 
 nokutini na ? 
 
 Oh! if indeed the owners say so, why, what indeed have I to say 
 (about it) ? 
 
 Ukuba be si nokwazi nga be zi nga si 'luli ; 
 
 If we were intelligent perhaps they would not surpass us. 
 
 (b.) The concessive sentence is generally introduced 
 by noma or its equivalent ; as, 
 
 Noraa ku kude kakulu, u tsetsa ndzengokuba ku 
 
 seduze ; 
 Though it is very far, it (the telegram) speeds as though it were 
 
 near. 
 Nokuba a ku nemfuyo, nokuba a ku nonflobo o siye 
 
 ifa nawe, ukukutala ku ngunina wenzuzo ; 
 
 Even if (or though) you have no wealth, even if you have no friend 
 who leaves his estate with you, diligence is the mother of gain. 
 
 429. III. Incidental members of a sentence are 
 those secondary clauses which accompany either leading 
 or subordinate members, and usually require to be ren- 
 dered participially, or by the introduction of an adverb 
 or conjunction ; but stand, as it were, too much aloof to 
 be reckoned as either co-ordinate or dependent members 
 of which the following may be given as examples : 
 
 Ya ti impi uku pendula kwayo, si ya ku bona, ngo- 
 kuba ni nga baleki pela, ya yi tso i sondela ; 
 
 The commando said, in its reply, we will see, for of course then, 
 
 you will not run away, drawing near as it spoke. 
 A ku ko ukusizeka, isineke si nge ko ; 
 There is no profit (where) there is no care. 
 
 A buye a kiilumc nabanye abantu, ukuti, kumi ka- 
 ndzani ukuba* ngi c labe inkomo yami, ku tiwa i 
 bizwe ngobaba, ngi nga ze nga sinda na ? 
 
 Again he talks with other people, saying, how is it with me that I 
 offer my animal, it is said it was required by the shades of my 
 ancestors, and yet I do not recover at all ? 
 
 Ba y' esaba uku veza amasi izulu li duma ; 
 
 They are afraid to bring out the amasi (when) heaven thunders. 
 (See 221.) 
 
 $ 430. Having noticed the different kinds and parts 
 of simple propositions, and the different kinds of relation
 
 NOUNS. THE NOMINATIVE. 263 
 
 which the several members of a compound sentence 
 bear to each other, we proceed to discuss the agreement 
 and government, the relation, arrangement, and position 
 of each part, more in detail. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN 
 
 431. REMARK. The leading rules under the noun 
 apply also to the pronoun. Any thing peculiar to the 
 pronoun will be given under rules for that part of 
 speech. 
 
 SECT. 1. The Nominative. 
 
 432. A noun used either as the subject or as the 
 predicate of a sentence is put in the nominative; as, 
 umkumbu wet pindela, the ship returned ; ulwai^Ye lu 
 yinto enkulu, the sea is a great thing ; Udingane iva ba 
 yinkosi, Dingane was chief. 
 
 433. From its high office as denoting the subject of 
 discourse, the nominative becomes the leading case and 
 a representative of the word in all its forms. Hence, 
 whenever there is occasion to use a noun where it can be 
 free from the fetters of grammatical construction, it ap- 
 pears in the nominative, which is accordingly charac- 
 terized as the nominative independent or absolute. To 
 this general rule may be referred the following variety 
 of examples : 
 
 434. I. The use of the nominative in the inscription 
 of names, titles, headings, chapters, and divisions ; as, 
 mina in\eku yako Umdekazi, I thy servant Umdekazi ;
 
 264 SYNTAX. NOUNS; NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Untaba inieku yako, Untaba thy servant ; izindaba za 
 Le 'nyanga, the news of this month. 
 
 435. II. 1. Nouns used in address are sometimes 
 put in this case the nominative independent instead 
 of the vocative ; thus, uirflobo wami, my friend ; um~ 
 ngani wami, my lord. 
 
 2. So, often, in exclamatory address ; as, O tnai 
 nina abazenzisi ! O ye hypocrites ! 
 
 3. So in salutations ; as, E, umngani, izindaba ezirfle ! 
 hail, friend, good news ! 
 
 REM. Sometimes, however, the vocative is used in exclamation ; 
 thus, at/ marne. ! 'babakazi, umuniu wehine, inkosi kupelaf verily! sur- 
 prising! great father, European, chief indeed; O 'baba ! angina 'ndao, 
 O father! I am not able. ( 461.) 
 
 436. III. A noun used for specification by way of 
 introducing some remark or topic, or as an adjunct to 
 apply a word or expression to a particular part, property, 
 thought, action, person, or thing, is put in the nominative 
 independent. A noun thus used is generally rendered 
 into English by means of a preposition or some other 
 introductory term, such as, in, in respect to, as to, &c. ; 
 thus, 
 
 Kodwa into e ngi yenzayo, ngi tengisa ngezinkomo 
 zami ; 
 
 But the thing which I am doing, I am offering my cattle for sale. 
 Ya ti impi uku pendula kwayo ; 
 
 Said the commando (in) its reply. 
 
 Kodwa ukufa kwabantu ba fa ngendao yokwesaba 
 amanzi ; 
 
 But as to the perishing of the people they perished through fear of 
 the water. 
 
 Kodwa ukuvama kwabantu be muka namanzi ; 
 
 But as to the majority of the people they went down stream. 
 Umtwana a nga nlunywa ulimi Iwake ; 
 A child might have his' tongue cut off literally, might be cut off 
 (as to) his tongue. 
 
 (Umoya) u ndzani wona isiju sawo na ? 
 
 What is it (the wind) as to its substance? 
 
 (Inkomo) i lele umuntu pakati ; 
 
 It (the cow) lies a man in the middle. spoken of an animal whose 
 flanks differ in color from the rest of the body.
 
 NOMINATIVE INDEPENDENT. 265 
 
 ^ 437. IV. A noun placed after another signifying the 
 same thing, to explain, describe, or specify it, gives 
 another variety of the nominative independent, though 
 usually denominated "apposition in the same case." 
 In the Isizulu, when the leading noun is in the nomina- 
 tive case, the noun annexed, to explain it, is in the same, 
 both logically and grammatically ; but when the leading 
 noun is in the genitive, locative, or vocative, the case of 
 the noun annexed for explanation, though logically the 
 same, is often grammatically different, having the form 
 of the nominative ; thus, 
 
 W ala UnTela induna enkulu ; 
 
 Unhlela the ^reat captain dissented. 
 
 Wa bulawa Um'langana umne wake ; 
 
 Umhlangana his brother was killed. 
 
 Sa fika Emalonjo, izintaba ezimbili ; 
 We arrived at the Araakonko, two mountains. 
 Udingane wa puma Embebeni, umzi omkulu ; 
 
 Dingane leR the great kraal Umbebe. 
 
 REM. 1. In examples like the above, there seems to be an ellipsis 
 of the relative pronoun, the use of which in still common; thus, 
 
 Kwa be kona umfo, Umanemane ibizo lake, o yinduna 
 yotiuo babo ; 
 
 There was a person present, Umanernane by name, who was minis- 
 ter of their deities. 
 
 Nga c lala kwomunye umuntu o yisi'lobo ndze ; 
 
 I lived with another person who was merely a friend. 
 
 REM. 2. So far as respects mere form, a noun in apposition with 
 another in the accusative might be said to be in the nominative, since 
 the form of both nominative and accusative is the same. Yet, as 
 already remarked (^ 112., 3.), there is a convenience at least in 
 allowing an accusative. 
 
 438. V. 1. A noun, the agent of a verb in the 
 passive voice, might be regarded as the nominative in- 
 dependent, since it is not marked by any inflection, 
 nor connected with the verb by a preposition or other 
 relational word. It is thought, however, that a proper 
 idea of the office of nouns thus used may be more 
 readily given to most minds by speaking of such nouns as 
 in the accusative without a governing word. (See ^ 452.) 
 
 2. Incidental clauses, often giving a noun used with 
 
 2 H
 
 566 SYNTAX. NOUNS; GENITIVE. 
 
 a verb, like a noun with a participle in English, inde- 
 pendent of the grammatical construction into \yhich it 
 logically enters, may be regarded as affording another 
 variety of the nominative independent ; thus, 
 
 Ya si iiotsake, iz\ve li lungile, ya si pa'la pakati ; 
 It (the commando) routed us, the country favored (or favoring), 
 it surrounded us. 
 
 1 zisa emanzini, umfula u zele ; ya fika ya si tela 
 kona emanzini ; 
 
 It brought (us) to the water, the river was full (or being full); it 
 
 came and poured us at once into the water. 
 Abatakati ba hamba ebusuku, abantu be lele ; 
 
 Wizards go about in the night, the people being asleep. 
 
 SECT. 2. The Genitive. 
 
 439. A noun used to limit another noun by denoting 
 origin, ownership, or designation, is generally put in the 
 genitive, when the latter signifies a different thing from 
 the former. 
 
 440. I. In respect to origin, source, or cause ; 
 thus, izwi lenkosi, word of the chief; i\ala lomfana, 
 the boy's fault ; isikumba senkabi, the hide of an ox ; 
 tflamvu Iwesibamu, a ball from the gun. 
 
 REM. 1. To this head may be referred those examples in which the 
 second noun limits the first by indicating the material of which it is 
 composed ; as, inguboyoboya, a garment of wool ; intonga yetusi, a rod 
 of brass. 
 
 REM. 2. When the limiting noun denotes place, it generally, but 
 not always, takes the locative form together with the genitive ; thus, 
 umteto wa sesilungwinl, law of the white man ; abantu ba sEnanda, 
 people of Inanda ; etafeni k Tengntenga, the plain of Tengatenga. 
 
 441. II. In respect to ownership^ or possession; 
 thus, izinkomo zi ka 'Mpande, Umpande's cattle ; 
 ingubo yomuntu, a person's garment ; nembala wa lu 
 \eda ugange Iwomuzi wenkosi y and verily he finished the 
 wall of the king's city. 
 
 REM. 1. When the limiting noun takes an adjective or a pronoun 
 before it, the sign of the genitive is given to the adjective or pronoun; 
 thus, izinkomo zamanye amadoda, other men's cattle ; amabuto esinye 
 isizuie, soldiers of another tribe ; izindaba za le 'nyanga, the news of 
 this month; vmuzi u-o Imro 'munht, the kraal of that man.
 
 GENITIVE OF DESIGNATION. 267 
 
 HEM. -2. Sometimes the genitive takes a preposition between the 
 noun and the sign of possession which precedes ; thus, umnimzana tea 
 ku loico 'muzi, the master of to that kraal ; inkosi ya krca Zulu, chief 
 of the Zulu country; abantu ba kiciii, our people. 
 
 RF.M. 3. Sometimes the sign of possession is omitted, the relation 
 which we denote by of in English, being expressed by ku alone; thus, 
 yl lowo umuntu ku Una, each person of us; a ku se ko noyedira ku 'baku- 
 bako, there is not one of thine elder brothers alive. 
 
 442. III. In respect to designation, object, or 
 fitness ; thus, 
 
 Ba funa uktiba ba gaule izinTu zabo zokulala, neze- 
 
 zinto, nezezimwadi ; 
 They wished them to build houses for them for lodging, and for 
 
 goods, and for books. 
 
 Ma si tsele abantu ngomsindisi wezono ; 
 
 Let us tell the people of a Savior for sins. 
 
 Sa si nge na 'sizungu somsindisi, si nge na 'sizungu 
 
 sabatunywa ; 
 
 We had no desire for a Savior, no desire for missionaries. 
 Be ngi nge nayo ingubo yokwambata ; 
 
 I had no blanket to put on. 
 
 A ngi na 'bantu bokuzisa umbila ; 
 I have no people to bring the maize. 
 
 REM. 1. The limiting noun, particularly that which denotes desig- 
 nation, may be separated by a word or clause from the noun limited ; 
 thus, 
 
 Induna enkulu ya sEravoti ; 
 
 The great chief for the Umvoti. 
 
 Kodvya indao nati a si yi boni yokwe c la iniwele ; 
 
 But a place we also do not see it for descending a wagon, i.e., for 
 wagon to descend. 
 
 REM. 2. Limitation is sometimes expressed by a clause introduced 
 by a conjunction in the genitive ; thus, 
 
 Se be nga tenga ngesikati sokuma se ku twasile i'lobo ; 
 
 They may sell at the time of that the summer has fairly come. 
 
 Kodwa ngi ti e ya kwetu, indao a si yi boni yokuma 
 i ng* e c la lapa ; 
 
 But I think ours (our wagon), we do not see a place of that it can 
 descend here, i.e., I think we see no place where ours can 
 descend here. 
 
 443. The limited or governing noun is frequently
 
 268 SYNTAX. NOUNS; GENITIVE. 
 
 omitted ; in some instances because it is understood 
 or implied in the connection ; in other instances because 
 the abridged form has passed into invariable established 
 usage, or become idiomatic. 
 
 444. I. (a.) The limited noun is often understood ; 
 thus, 
 
 Kodwa ngi ti e ya kwetu ; 
 
 But I think ours (i.e., our wagon), &c., the word for wagon being 
 understood from the connection. 
 
 Utsaka \va giina Emampondweni, \va buya \va ya 
 kwelo la 'Sosengane; 
 
 Chaka went as far as the Amampondo, and returned and went to 
 Soshengan's (country). 
 
 A hambe, umzi wa 'mtu 'munye ; a hambe, \va 'mtu 
 'munye ; a hambe, wa 'mtu 'munye ; 
 
 He goes on (and comes to) a kraal of one person; goes on (and 
 comes to a kraal) of one person; goes on (and comes to a kraal) 
 of one person. 
 
 Se si bambile elentulo ; 
 
 We have already received the lizard's (message). 
 
 (b.) The limited noun is often implied, or faintly 
 imaged by the use of the incipient alone ; thus, 
 
 Abelu />' ake imizi, ours (i.e., our people) build kraals; ngingoicako, 
 I am thine ; se nga ti nga ku ngokwami, oh that it were mine ; umkami 
 =WR/hzt ka mina, or umfazi wami, my wife. 
 
 REM. To this head must be referred certain forms and uses which 
 may be denominated the inflective genitive (to distinguish it from the 
 usual form and use, which may be called the analytic, the latter cor- 
 responding to the Norman use which we denote by of, the former to 
 the Saxon use denqted by '* in the English language) ; thus, inkomo i 
 ngcyomuntu, the cow is the man's, where the ng is euphonic copula ; 
 e is relational (=a-t), referring to inkomo; and y is preformative, re- 
 ferring also to inkomo; and the full form of which would be, inkomo i 
 yinkomo yomunlu, the cow is a cow of the man, or the cow is the man's 
 cow. Negative form, inkomo a i siyo eyomuntu, the cow is not the 
 man's. So other examples : itole li ngelenkosi, the calf is the king's; 
 itole a silo ele.nkosi, the calf is not the king's; abantu ba ngabenkosi, the 
 people are the king's; a sibo abenkosi, they are not the king's; izin- 
 komo zi ngezabantu, the cattle are the people's; a sizo ezabantu, they 
 are not the people's. 
 
 445. II. (a.) In certain instances the use of a 
 limiting noun without the noun limited, has passed into 
 common use or an idiom ; thus,
 
 GENITIVE. SUBJECTIVE ; OBJECTIVE. 
 
 Abant u-etu (not often betn), our brothers; odade u-etu not often betu), 
 our sisters, in both which cases there is evidently an ellipsis of some 
 word, probably umuzi, which would give the full form thus, abant 
 bomuzi u-ttu; odadf bomuzi u-etu, brothers, or sisters of our kraal, vil- 
 lage, or family, like omame bomuzi wetu or wami, mothers of our or my 
 kraal. 
 
 RF.M. Examples like the above are not to be confounded with such 
 as the following : Izinkomo sa wobaba betu, our fathers' cattle; inkosi 
 ya icomame betu, our mothers' chief, where w is euphonic, and em- 
 ployed to preserve the initial o, the sign of the plural in obaba, fathers, 
 and omame, mothers. 
 
 (b.) Other elliptic forms may be seen in such ex- 
 pressions as, u hambisa okwehasi, he goes like a horse, 
 which is doubtless elliptical for, u hambisa ku noku- 
 hamba kwehasi, he goes like the going of a horse ; se 
 be hambisa okiva kona, already were they living ac- 
 cording to the customs of the place. So, yebo wetu, 
 yes my friend (or lord), umngani or other similar term 
 being omitted ; a ngi yi ku balekela owetu or uwetu, 
 I will not flee from our (foe or brother) ; owerfl'u, one 
 of the house; plural, aberiYu, some of the house=do- 
 mestics. So in the forms, u serfYunni kwake, he is in 
 his house ; also, u lapa kivake ensimini, he is here in 
 his garden, where there is probably an ellipsis of some 
 word, as, uku'lala or ukusebenza; thus, u serfYwini 
 yoktflala kwake; u lapa ekusetsenzeni kivake ensimini. 
 
 446. The Isizulu makes a nice distinction between 
 the genitive subjective and the genitive objective, which 
 requires to be carefully observed. 
 
 1. The genitive is termed subjective when it denotes 
 that which does or has something ; thus, 
 
 In the phrases, ukubona kii'abantu, the seeing of the people; uku- 
 tanda kwabantu, the love of people, the people do something, viz., see, 
 love, Stc. And in the phrases, izinkomo zabantu, cattle of the people; 
 imisebenzi yabantu, work of the people, the people have something, 
 viz., cattle, work, &.c. Hence in these and similar examples, kwabantu, 
 zabantu, Stc., are in the genitive subjective. 
 
 2. The genitive is termed objective when it denotes 
 that which suffers something, or that which is the object 
 of what is expressed by the noun limited ; thus, 
 
 Ukubonwa kwabantu, the being seen of people, or the people's being
 
 270 SYNTAX. NOUNS J GENITIVE. 
 
 seen; ukutandwa ku:ab<nvtu, the being loved of people, i.e., the people's 
 being loved. Here the genitive is objective, since abaniu, the people, 
 tuffer, or denote the object of what is expressed in the limited (verbal) 
 nouns, ukubonwa, ukutandwa, &c. Hence, ukutanda ku ka Yesu de- 
 notes that love of Jesus which he exercises, or bestows on us; and 
 ukutandwa ku ka Yesu denotes that love of Jesus which he suffers, or 
 receives from us, that of which he is the object. 
 So in the following examples : 
 
 I ti imbuzi lapa i kalayo, i zwa ubu'lungu bokubulawa, 
 a ti, Yebo, pela, nanso inkomo yenu ; ma i kale, ni 
 zwe nina abakiti cni ngi sindisileyo ; 
 
 And when the goat cries out, feeling the pain of being killed, he 
 says, Yes, then, there is your animal ; let it cry, and hear ye 
 even ye our (gods) who have saved me. 
 
 Imhala a si ko ini ukulungiselvva kwabantu bonke 
 ukuha ku be kona ukubusvva kvvelizwe oku ndzalo 
 na ? 
 
 la it not really every man's interest that there should be such a 
 government of the world ? 
 
 REM. (a.) The difference between the objective and the subjective 
 lies not in the form of the genitive, but in the signification of the 
 .governing or limited word. Hence passive verbals always give an 
 objective genitive, as in the foregoing examples. In like manner verbs 
 of the deponent and subjective species, and nouns derived from them, 
 generally give an objective genitive. 
 
 (b. ) In English, the phrase devastation of the people 
 might mean what they wrought, or what they suffered; 
 but ukuiita kwabantu would express the former, the 
 subjective; and ukuiitakala kwabantu, the latter, ob- 
 jective, without ambiguity. So, isi l lupo senkosi, the 
 oppression of the chief (which he inflicts upon others), 
 subjective ; but isi'lupeko senkosi, the oppression of the 
 chief (which he suffers from others), objective. 
 
 So, in English, we talk and read of the "temptations of Satan," and 
 the " temptation of Christ;" " our minister," and the "minister of 
 Christ," and have other like forms, in which, for accuracy and pre- 
 cision, the Zulu language is superior to our own. 
 
 447. 1. Where two or more nouns limit another, 
 the first of the two (or more) may take the sign of the 
 genitive, and the rest be connected to it by the use of 
 na without the genitive sign ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zi ka 'Faku noSibekana, Faku's and Usibekana's cattle ; 
 zamabete nombila, ear? of amabele and maize.
 
 NOUNS IN THE GENITIVE. 271 
 
 2. (a.) When the thing possessed is the common 
 property of two or more persons, the name of the first 
 in the series is put in the plural, and the rest connected 
 with it by the use of na; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo za woSibekana noMb&pa noFaku, the cattle of Usibekana, 
 Ucnbopa, and Faku, or the cattle of the Usibekanas, Umbopa, and 
 Faku. 
 
 (b.) So when several things are taken together, one 
 belonging to one and another to another, the same mode 
 of expression may be employed ; thus, 
 
 Imizi ya woFaku noBuba noMbopa, the kraals of Faku, Buba, and 
 Umbppa, literally, the kraals of the Fakus, Buba, and Umbopa. 
 
 REM. For the use of w in woSibekana and woFaku, see 445., a., 
 Rem. ; and for the use of a person's name in the plural, as Osibekana 
 and Ofaku, see 94., 1. 
 
 3. (a.) But where there are several nouns in the 
 genitive, and it is deemed important to specify the rela- 
 tion of each to the one governing noun, the sign of the 
 genitive is given to each one ; thus, 
 
 ' Izinkomo zi ka 'Faku nezi ka 'Buba,' the cattle of Faku and of 
 Buba. 
 
 (b.) In this way the individual and separate origin, 
 property, or designation of two or more persons or 
 things may be specified ; thus, 
 
 ' Izwi lendoda nelomfana,' word of the man and of the boy, or the 
 man's word and the boy's word ; ' izwi nelendoda nelomfana,' word of 
 both the man and the boy ; ' imizi yabo omunye ngo ka *Mnyaiza, 
 nomunye ngo ka 'Faku, nomunye ngo ka 'Sibekana,' their kraals, one 
 is Mnyaiza's, one Faku's, and one Usibekana's ; ' indao yokufunda 
 neyokusonda,' a place to learn and to worship. 
 
 REM. The idiom and flexibility of the Isizulu sometimes give us a 
 noun governing two others, where the English would make the first 
 govern the second, and the second the third ; thus, ' kwa ba usuku lu 
 ka 'Dingane lokububa,' it was the day for Dingane to die, or it was the 
 day of Dingan's death. But where the second is really limited by the 
 third the Isizulu shows that relation ; thus, ' sa fika emzini wenduna 
 enkulu ya sEmbelebele,' we reached the kraal of the great captain of 
 Mbelebele. 
 
 44>8 When several nouns are all limited by one : 
 1. The limiting or "governed" noun often takes its
 
 SYNTAX. NOUNS ; ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 sign of the genitive relation from that which stands 
 nearest ; thus, 
 
 ' Izizwe nabantu beli/.we,' the tribes and men of the earth; 'owenkosi 
 umzi nezinkomo,' the chief's kraal and cattle. 
 
 2. Where the several limited neuns are of different 
 classes and numbers : (a.) If they denote persons, the 
 limiting noun occasionally takes the sign of the first 
 class, plural, b, as if summing them all up in the term 
 abantu; thus, amadoda nezinduna ba kiviti, our men 
 and captains, (b.) But if they denote things, the limit- 
 ing noun may take the preformative z, as if summing 
 them .ill up in the term izinto; thus, esomlnngu isi- 
 bamu nehasi nendza, the white man's gun and horse 
 and dog. 
 
 3. Or the limiting noun may take the general inde- 
 finite sign ku of the eighth class ; thus, umlomo nezi- 
 n'Yebe name'lo kwomfana, the mouth and ears and eyes 
 of the boy. 
 
 4. Or the limiting noun may he put after the first of 
 the nouns to be limited, taking preformative accordingly, 
 and the rest be subjoined by the use of the conjunction 
 na; thus, umuzi womuntu namasimu nabantwana futi, 
 a person's kraal and gardens and children also. 
 
 SECT. 3. The Accusative. 
 
 449. A noun depending upon an active transitive 
 verb is put in the accusative ; thus, 
 
 ' Ngi bonile umuntu,' I have seen a person; ' wa tuma unwabu,' he 
 sent the chameleon. 
 
 REM. Occasionally a noun, like indao, is found in the accusative 
 after an intransitive verb and without a preposition; thus, 'a ngi yanga 
 indao,' I have not been anywhere, literally, I have not been (to any) 
 place; ' a ngi sebenzi 'ndao,' I do not work anywhere. 
 
 450. A noun depending on a preposition is put in 
 the accusative ; thus, 
 
 V yile ku 'rabusi ; 
 
 He has gone to the magistrate.
 
 NOUNS IN THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Wa tuma unwabu ku 'bantu ; 
 
 He seat the chameleon to men. 
 
 Kvva tengwa amasimu arnabili ngenkorno ; 
 
 Two gardens were bought for a cow.- 
 
 Umkumbu u ka c lelekile nga pezu kwamatse ; 
 
 The ship was dashed upon the rocks. 
 
 Abelungu ba nezibindi ezikulu kakulu ngokuhamba 
 elvvanTe ; 
 
 White men have very great courage for traveling by sea. 
 
 Ba be ng' azi ngomenzi na ngomsindisi ; 
 
 They did not know about a Maker and about a Savior. 
 
 Ngezilirno za kiti ku kona upoko nezin'lubu ; 
 
 In respect to our vegetables there is the millet and the bean. 
 
 REM. The final vowel of the preposition and the initial of the noun 
 generally coalesce according to principles already stated ( 16.); 
 thus, ngenkomo (=mgttr^iiutomo)i ngomenzi (~nga-umtnzi}. But when 
 the sentiment is one of a negative character, also where the noun is 
 qualified by nye, expressed or understood, in the sense of a, one, single, 
 the final vowel of the preposition is retained, and the initial of the 
 noun elided ( 497., 1.); thus, a si sebcnzi nga 'Into, we do not work 
 with any thing; o si na 'ndao, we have no place; ba memeza nga 'liziri 
 'linyc, they shouted with one voice; nga 'sikatiba be babili, there were 
 two at a time. 
 
 S 451. A noun is often put in the accusative without 
 a preposition, where the English and some other lan- 
 guages would use one: 
 
 452. I. The efficient agent of an active verb in the 
 passive voice is put in the accusative without a preposi- 
 tion : thus, 
 
 Ba ti, ku ya ku Tiwa ama'lozi ; 
 
 They say, it will be eaten by the ghosts. 
 
 U ti, ngi sindisivve i'lozi la kwetu ; 
 
 He says, I was restored to health by a ghost of ours. 
 
 Inyamazana i bandzwa indza ; 
 
 The game is caught by a dog. 
 
 REM. 1. The efficient agent after a passive verb often takes some 
 euphonic letter corresponding to its initial vowel { 33.); thus, 
 
 Lowo umkumbu u xolwa yihasi ; 
 
 This boat is drawn by a horse. 
 
 Kwa kulunywa imiteto ngumrundisi ; 
 
 The commandments were declared by the teacher. 
 
 o r 
 
 i
 
 274 SYNTAX. NOUNS; ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 REM. 2. A noun denoting the instrument, or that in respect to 
 which a thing is done, takes a preposition after the passive voice in 
 the same manner as after the active; thus, 
 
 Zi tengwa ngesitole ; 
 
 They are bought with (or for) a heifer. 
 
 Nabantu abaningi ba vusivve ngemipefumlo yabo, b' 
 azisivve Umsindisi wabo ngayo irflan'la ; 
 
 And many people have been aroused in respect to their souls, and 
 made acquainted with their Savior through grace. 
 
 UlwanTe lu yinto enkulu e nge welwe ngumuntu nge- 
 zinyao zake ngokwake ; 
 
 The sea is a great thing which can not be crossed by a man on foot 
 by himself. 
 
 Si ya fundiswa ngokuma kwom'laba, na ngezizwe, na 
 ngoku'lala kwazo ; 
 
 We are taught concerning the character of the world, and the 
 nations, and their mode of living. 
 
 453. II. Some neuter verbs take the accusative, in 
 a manner similar to the passive, without a preposition ; 
 thus, 
 
 Umkumbu u iwele abantu ; 
 
 The ship is full of people. 
 
 U ya vama uku sebenza ; 
 
 He excels in working. 
 
 lima si kutele a si so ze sa fa yinTala ; 
 
 If we are industrious we shall never die of famine. 
 
 Okunye kwa fika abalumbi ; 
 
 Other (kinds of food) came by civilized men. 
 
 REM. Zala and inita (miti) are generally used in this same way. 
 
 454. III. A few active verbs, both transitive and 
 intransitive, are sometimes accompanied by an accusative 
 without a preposition, where the English would use one; 
 thus, 
 
 Abafana ba ngi c lubula ingubo yami ; 
 
 The boys stripped me of my blanket (or garment). 
 
 Abantu ba 'lubukile Utiuo ; 
 
 People have rebelled against (or revolted from) God. 
 
 Ba si pangile impa'la yetu ; 
 
 They have robbed us of our goods. 
 
 455. IV. The force of a preposition is often supplied 
 by some specific modification of the verb ; as,
 
 NOUNS IN THE ACCUSATIVE. 275 
 
 1. The relative (or el) form, which often supplies the 
 place of/or, to, about, against, &c. (see 190.) ; thus, 
 
 Ku C lat5elwe bona ; 
 
 It was slaughtered for them. 
 
 Ngi size ngezikumha zami, u ngi patele zona emwe- 
 leni yako ; 
 
 Help me about my hides, and take them for me in your wagon. 
 
 U ya tengela uinlungu na ? 
 
 Do you buy for a white man ? 
 
 Ukuma ngi be ngi nawo umbiia ngi be ngi ya ku m 
 tengela lo 'mlungu ; 
 
 If I had maize I would sell to that white man. 
 
 (Ma) si ba kalele izinyembezi Enkosini yomusa ; 
 
 (Let) us weep tears for them unto the Lord of mercy. 
 
 2. The causative form, which sometimes signifies to 
 do a thing with; thus, wa m lalisa, he slept with him ; u 
 ngifuyisile amaril'a, thou hast girded me with strength. 
 
 REM. 1. The preposition na, with, is generally required by the 
 noun which depends on a verb in the reciprocal form ; thus, nga ham- 
 bana nomuniu, I went with a person ; wa kuhunana nami, he conversed 
 with me. 
 
 REM. 2. The Isizulu often dispenses with the use of a preposition 
 by putting a noun in the locative case. (See ^ 458 460.) 
 
 456. Nouns denoting duration of time are generally, 
 not always, put in the accusative without a preposition ; 
 thus, 
 
 Wa Jala kona amasonda amatatu ; 
 He remained there three Sabbaths. 
 Esibayeni ba kulume isikati eside ; 
 
 In the cattle-fold they talked a long time. 
 
 Ba ti, Yebo, isikati eside u ngi giinile ekuhambeni 
 kwami ; 
 
 They say, Yes, a long time hast thou preserved me alive. 
 
 Ngi tanda ukuba ngi hanibe ngesikati eside lapa em- 
 'labeni ; 
 
 I desire that I may live for a long time here on the earth. 
 
 Nga c lala kona iminyaka emibili ; 
 
 I lived there two years. 
 
 457. A noun denoting the time at or in which a 
 thing is said to be, or be done :
 
 276 SYNTAX. NOUNS; ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. May depend upon a preposition ; thus, 
 Ba tuna uku tenga na ngesonda ; 
 
 They ivanted to trade even on the Sabbath. 
 
 Ku te ngolunye usuku nga ya Elovu ; 
 
 It came to pass on a certain day I went to the Ilovu. 
 
 Kvva ti ngomsumbuluko induna umkumhu ya \vu 
 sondeza osebeni ; 
 
 And on Monday the captain brought the ship near to shore. 
 
 Se be za ku ganana ngomsumbuluko vvokulala we- 
 nyanga entsa ; 
 
 They are going to marry on the first Monday of (he new month. 
 
 REM. The initial vowel of the noun is generally elided, instead of 
 being united by crasis with the final vowel of the preposition (as 
 already remarked in part under 5 450.) : 
 
 (a.) In negative propositions; thus, a ngi na 'sikali, 1 have not time. 
 
 (b.) Where a thing is said to be or to be done at one and the same 
 time, or at a time (^ 497., 1.) ; thus, nga 'sikati 'sinye si y' azi ukuba 
 yenzeka eminye (imuebenzi) ezindaiveni ezinye, at one (and the same) 
 time we know that several (things) are done in different places. 
 
 2. May be put in the accusative without a preposi- 
 tion ; thus, 
 
 Kwa ti intambama ba 'langana ; 
 
 And in the afternoon they met together. 
 
 Ba ti, za tengwa 'nyak' enye ; 
 
 They said, they were bought last year. 
 
 Umfana a ng' ona ku 'yise na ku 'Tino 'sikati 'sinye ; 
 
 A boy may sin against his father and against God at the same time. 
 
 REM. Since the preposition na has lost its specific 
 import, and been incorporated as part of a compound 
 word in nam'la and nonyaka, (where it has the force of 
 an adjective pronoun=this,) the use of these words 
 affords a further illustration of the above rule ; thus, 
 ba Jika narrfla, they arrived to-day ; so ba neriYala 
 nonyaka, we shall have a famine this year ; izilo zi- 
 ningi nonyaka, wild beasts abound this year. 
 
 3. May be put in the locative case ; thus, 
 Impi i puma ebusika ; 
 
 The commando goes out in the winter season. 
 Sa fika ebusuku ; 
 We arrived in the night.
 
 NOUNS IN THE LOCATIVE. 
 
 REM. This making use of the lucalire in a temporal sense, trans- 
 ferring the relations of place to those of time, is not peculiar to the 
 Isizulu. The same phenomenon is witnessed in other African dialects; 
 nor is it more Hamitic than human or philosophical. 
 
 SECT. 4. The Locative. 
 
 458. A noun used to denote the place at, in, or 
 about which a thing is said to be, or to be done, or to 
 or from which it proceeds, is put in the locative case. 
 
 1. The place at, in, among, or about which ; thus, 
 Na lapa na sezizweni zonke ; 
 
 Both here and among all tribes. 
 
 Ihasi li hambe osebeni Iwamanzi, umkumbu u hambe 
 emanzini ; 
 
 The horse goes along the edge of the water, the boat goes in the 
 water. 
 
 Ba wu sakaza esibayeni sonke ; 
 
 They scatter it about the whole kraal. 
 Ba siya iniozana embizeni ; 
 They leave a little in the pot. 
 
 Ku te enTeleni unwabu Iwa libala ; 
 
 And on the way the chameleon delayed. 
 
 Ya fikake inkosi, ya buza eziniekwini ; 
 
 50 the chief came, and inquired among the servants. 
 
 2. The place to which ; thus. 
 
 
 
 Nga ya Elovu, ngi hambela esi'lotseni sami ; 
 
 I went to the Ilovu, and visited among my friends. 
 
 U ya tabata into a ye enyangeni ; 
 
 He takes a thing and goes to the doctor. 
 
 EnTwini yesikutali inTala i ya lunguza, i Tule i ye 
 kwe yevila ; 
 
 At the house of the industrious famine casts a wistful look, passes 
 on and goes to that of the sluggard. 
 
 Induna umkumbu ya wu sondeza osebeni ; 
 
 The captain brought the ship into port. 
 
 3. The place from which ; thus, 
 
 51 vela ekaya ; 
 We come from home. 
 
 Ba puma emkundzini : 
 
 They came out of the ship.
 
 278 SYNTAX. NOUNS ; VOCATIVE. 
 
 Ukuba kade e hambe e in sindiie ekufeni ; 
 
 That long ago he went and saved him from death. 
 
 Loku si m giinileyo ebuminyaneni bake ; 
 
 Though we have preserved him ever since (from) his infancy. 
 
 459. Proper nouns, the names of places, rivers, 
 mountains, and tribes, and some common nouns, used 
 to denote the place of origin, abode, or existence, take 
 the sign of the genitive before the locative ; thus, 
 
 Ba be kona bonke abantu ba sEmanzimtoti ; 
 
 There were present all the people of Amanzimtoti. 
 
 Ba nga ka tiki aba sEnanda ; 
 
 They of Inanda had not yet arrived. 
 A si 'mteto wa sesilungwini ; 
 
 Tt is not a law of the white race. 
 
 Igwababa lelo la semzini si nge li Te tina ; 
 
 That crow of a kraal we ourselves can not eat; i.e., it is a shame 
 for a man to eat amari at another's kraal. 
 
 U kona yena owa ba jedayo abantu ba sekutini ; nan- 
 guya ow' ake endaweni enye; ka siye owa sekaya la 
 lo 'muntu ; 
 
 There is one who put an end to the people of said (village) ; he lives 
 yonder in another place ; he does not belong to the home of this 
 man. 
 
 460. The locative case sometimes takes the prepo- 
 sition nga before it ; thus, 
 
 Sa fika Emlalazi ezarlsi nga selwanTe ; 
 
 We arrived at the Umlalazi down by the sea. 
 
 Ku te kusasa kwa se ku vela nezinkomo se zi baleka 
 nga sElutugela; ngokuba ba hambile ebusuku impi 
 ka 'letswayo ba hamba, abantu ba ka 'Mbulazi be 
 ba funyanisa be lelo. Ku te kusasa kwa tiwa, 
 Abantu ka 'Mbulazi i ba jedile nga sElutugela 
 ebusuku ; 
 
 It came to pass in the morning that the cattle came fleeing from 
 the Tugela; for Kechwayo's men went and found Umbulazi's 
 men asleep. And in the morning it was said, The enemy killed 
 Umbulazi's men by night on the Tugela. 
 
 SECT. 5. The Vocative. 
 461. The vocative case is used in addressing
 
 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 279 
 
 persons, sometimes with an interjection, but generally 
 without : 
 
 1. With an interjection ; thus, halala 'bantu betu ! 
 hail, our people! halala, 'balisa ba kwctu ! hail, 
 comrades of ours ! O 'baba ! a ngi namanTa, oh 
 father ! I am not able ; yeti, 'inngani ! hail, lord ! 
 yetini, 'bangani! hail, ye lords! 
 
 2. Without an interjection ; thus, 'baba ngi beke, 
 father regard me ; ma si ye kufunda, '6anTa, let us go 
 to learn, comrades ; 'mngani, izindaba 'zin'le, good 
 news, sir; 'nkosi! ivena umnyama; ivena wa kula, be 
 libele; wena u nga ngeNanda! king! thou art black; 
 thou hast grown while others were delaying ; thou art as 
 Inanda ! a ke ni tso si zwe, 'bangani bami, come ye 
 now speak that we may hear, my friends. 
 
 REM. The nominative is sometimes used in address, see 435. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 SECT. 1. Agreement of Adjectives. 
 
 462. An adjective agrees with its subject in class, 
 number, and person ; thus, 
 
 Uinfana omktilu, a large hoy; indoda enkulu, a large man; abafana 
 abakulu, large boys ; umfana umkulu, the hoy is large ; ngi mkulu, I am 
 large ; nt bakulu, ye are large. 
 
 REM. 1. Adjectives are used, as already stated 130., in two 
 ways, as an attributive, and as a predicate ; thus, in the above ex- 
 amples omkulii, enkulu, and abakulu are attributives; but umkulu, mkulu, 
 and bakulu are predicates. For the difference in the prefix of the 
 adjective as used in these two ways, and for an exhibition of the 
 euphonic principles by which the prefix is affected, see 133., 135.; 
 also the tables 134., 136. 
 
 REM. <J. Sometimes the adjective is compounded with the noun, so 
 that both noun and adjective make but one word, in which case the
 
 280 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES J AGREEMENT. 
 
 adjective neglects to take the prelix; thus, ubabakulu, my grandfather; 
 umamekulu, my grandmother; impondombili namabunu namabuto a ka 
 'Mpandc, (there being) a league (literally, two horns) both Boers and 
 the forces of Umpande. 
 
 REM. 3. The attributive almost always follows the noun to which it 
 belongs, except nye and onke, which may be placed as well before as 
 after. The predicate is occasionally placed before the noun, but more 
 commonly after it. When a noun takes after it both a possessive pro- 
 noun and an adjective, the possessive usually takes the precedence of 
 the adjective in position ; thus, nemfuyo yctu yonke i vela kuye ezulwini, 
 and all our wealth comes from him in heaven. 
 
 463. The use of the adjective as a predicate in 
 affirmative propositions, was stated in 401. In ex- 
 pressing the negative of propositions of this kind : 
 
 1. The adjectives bomvu, banzi, and nzima, and those 
 whose root begins with m, as, mnandi, mtoti, take the 
 negative a or ka before their affirmative form (see table 
 136.) ; thus, 
 
 Inffomo a ibomvu, the cow is not red; isango a libanzi, the gate is not 
 wide; isikumba a simnandi, the skin is not good. 
 
 2. Other adjectives, having as subject a noun of the 
 first, third, or sixth class, singular, express the negative 
 in the same way, taking the negative a or ka before 
 their affirmative form ; thus, 
 
 Umfana ka umkulu, or ka 'mkulu, the boy is not large ; inkomo ka 
 inkulu, the cow is not large. 
 
 3. In all other cases, i.e., excepting the adjectives 
 banzi, bomvu, and nzima, and those in m; and except- 
 ing others when their subject is of the first, third, or 
 sixth class, singular, the negative is expressed by taking 
 before it the negative a or ka, and also the simple pro- 
 noun in addition to the ordinary prefix ; thus, 
 
 Itoleka li likulu, the calf is not large; ' ka li libi, it is not bad; uluti 
 ka lu lukulu, the rod is not large; ka lu lude, it is not long; abantu ka ba 
 bakulu, the people are not large; ka ba bade, they are not tall; amadoda 
 ka wa made, the men are not tall; ka wa madala, they are not old. 
 
 464. A table of adjectives declined as predicates in 
 the affirmative was given 136. In addition to what 
 has been said in the last paragraph, and in 135., 136., 
 it may be of service to give a specimen table of
 
 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 281 
 
 Idjcctives used as Predicates in the Jfegatire. 
 
 1 Urn fan a 
 
 i2 llizwi 
 
 3 Into 
 
 4 Isitelo 
 a Uluti 
 6 Umuti 
 
 7 Ubuso 
 
 8 Uku ma 
 
 ka 'inkulu 
 ka li likulu 
 ka inkulu 
 ka si sikulu 
 ka lu lukulu 
 ka umkulu 
 
 ka bu bukulu 
 ka ku kukulu 
 
 ka mubi 
 ka li libi 
 ka imbi 
 ka si sibi 
 ka lu lubi 
 ka umubi 
 
 ka bu bubi 
 ka ku kubi 
 
 ka 'mnandi 
 ka limnandi 
 ka imnandi 
 ka .si inn an di 
 ka lunmandi 
 ka umnandi 
 
 ka bumiiandi 
 ka kumnandi 
 
 
 ' 1 Abafana 
 
 ka ba bakulu 
 
 ka ba babi 
 
 ka bainnandi 
 
 u 
 
 2 Amadoda 
 
 ka wa makulu 
 
 ka wa mabi 
 
 ka wamnundi 
 
 < 
 K 
 
 3 Izinto 
 
 ka zi zinkulu 
 
 ka zi ziinbi 
 
 ka zimnandi 
 
 a * 
 _: 
 
 4 Izitulo 
 
 ka zi zikulu 
 
 ka zi zibi 
 
 ka zimnandi 
 
 A. 
 
 5 Izinti 
 
 ka zi zinkulu 
 
 ka zi zimbi 
 
 ka zimnandi 
 
 
 6 Imiti 
 
 ka iinkulu 
 
 ka iuiibi 
 
 ka imnandi. 
 
 REM. From the foregoing examples and table, it will be easy to see 
 what are the corresponding forms in accessory clauses, where the 
 negative a, following the pronoun, takes the euphonic ngnga, which 
 also changes again to nge, by virtue of a coalescence between a and 
 the vowel i from the substantive verb bi; thus, abantuaba nga bibadala, 
 contracted, aba nge badala, people who are not old, or the people being 
 not old; so, ba nge bade, not tall ; izinkomo ezi nge zinkulu, cattle not 
 large, or which are not large; ezi nge zinde, which are not tall ; ba 
 nge mnandi, they being not well; zi nge bomvu, they being not red; li 
 nge banzi, it being not broad ; li nge likulu, it being not large. 
 
 465. When the subject is of the first or second 
 person, the predicate adjective is put in juxtaposition 
 the simple form of the pronoun ; and, to promote 
 
 with 
 
 perspicuity, or ease and fullness of utterance, in ac- 
 cordance with principles already stated, the predicate 
 adjective often takes also the same euphonic and prefix, 
 which it takes in connection with personal nouns (umu- 
 ntiiy abantu, &c.,) of the first class, singular and plural 
 respectively ; thus, 
 
 The adjective kidu, used as predicate of ngi, takes the euphonic i 
 =ngi mkulu, I am great ; used as predicate of si, it takes the prefix 
 6a si bakulu, we are great. But banzi, bomvu, and nzima, and those 
 adjectives whose root begins with m, take no prefix in addition to the 
 pronoun, and require no euphonic ; hence, ni banzi, ye are broad ; 
 ngi bomvu, I am red ; ngi mnandi, I am well ; si mnandi, we are well. 
 
 ^ 44>6. In illustration of remarks already made in the 
 foregoing paragraphs; and for the aid of the learner, we
 
 282 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES; AGREEMENT. 
 
 give various examples of the different kinds of adjectives, 
 used as predicates with the first and second persons, in 
 the following table : 
 
 FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Ngi mkulu si bakulu u mkulu ni bakulu 
 Ngi mdala si badala u mdala ni badala 
 Ngi mfutsane si bafutsane u mfutsane ni bafutSane 
 Ngi mniinyane si baminyane u mniinyane ni baniinyane 
 
 Ngi mubi 
 
 si babi 
 
 u mubi 
 
 ni babi 
 
 Ngi mude 
 
 si bade 
 
 u mude 
 
 ni bade 
 
 Ngi niu'le 
 
 si ba'le 
 
 u mu c le 
 
 ni bale 
 
 Ngi bomvu 
 
 si bomvu 
 
 u bomvu 
 
 ni bomvu 
 
 Ngi nzima 
 
 si nzima 
 
 u nzima 
 
 ni nzima 
 
 Ngi ninandi 
 
 si mnandi 
 
 u mnandi 
 
 ni mnandi 
 
 Ngi mtoti 
 
 si mtoti 
 
 u mtoti 
 
 ni mtoti. 
 
 REM. Some of the foregoing examples, with the corresponding 
 English, were given in 137 ; thus, ngi mdala, I am old ; u mdala, 
 thou art old ; ni badala, ye are old. 
 
 467. This kind of simple proposition ( 466., where 
 the adjective is employed as predicate of the first or 
 second person,) makes the negative by using a or ka 
 before the pronominal subject ; thus, 
 
 A ngi mkulu, I am not large ; a si bakulu, we are not large ; ka si 
 mnandi, we are not well ; ka ni badala, ye are not old. 
 
 REM. (o.) The second person singular often gives the semi-vowel 
 w to the pronoun u; or it elides the negative a of ka, leaving only k' 
 as a sign of the negative ; thus, a wu mkulu, or k' u mkulu, thou art 
 not great ; a wu mnandi, or k' u mnandi, thou art not well. So, a wu 
 mude, or k' u mude ; a wu mdala, or &' u mdala. 
 
 (6.) Or the pronoun u may be hardened, and preserved by the use 
 of k instead of w; thus, a ku mdala, a ku mnandi, &c.; and then, by 
 dropping the negative a, and depending upon A; as a sign of the nega- 
 tive, we have (as above, only with a different pointing,) ku mdala, thou 
 art not old; ku mnandi, thou art not well. 
 
 468. A noun used as an adjective, where there is no 
 adjective of the required signification, is connected with 
 its subject in one of three ways :
 
 CONNECTION OF ADJECTIVES. 283 
 
 1. Its initial vowel being elided, it is put, like bomvu 
 and nzima, in juxtaposition with its subject ; thus, 
 
 'manci, I am wet ; izcmbe eli 'butuntu, a dull ax ; isembe li 
 the ax is dull ; iimkonto u 'bukali, tho spear is sharp ; se be 
 'lusizi labo abelungu, those white people are in a sad condition. 
 
 2. It may be connected to its subject by the use of 
 no,, with, or have,' thus, izembe li nobutuntu, the ax 
 is dull ; si namarfYa, we are strong ; ukuba a be ne- 
 nkwatsu a godole, so that he was numb and cold. 
 
 3. It may stand as a predicate nominative, and take 
 a euphonic copula, if required, between itself and its 
 subject ; thus, into i yixolo, the thing is rough ; iTa/a 
 la be li yindilinga ncn\wadi i yisi\aba, an orange was 
 round and a book flat ; ilanga la be li kazimula li yi- 
 ndilinga, the sun was bright and round. 
 
 469. Where two or more adjectives belong to one 
 noun they are put in juxtaposition one after the other, 
 without a conjunction to connect them; thus, 
 
 Abantu ba kona bakulu bade ; 
 
 The people of that place are large (and) tall. 
 
 Izinwele zabo zimnyama zi ya kazimula ; 
 
 Their hair is black (and) glossy. 
 
 Izwe li c le, li nemiti emikulu, emide ; 
 
 The country is beautiful, (and) it has large, tall trees. 
 
 Sa fika pansi kwentaba enkulu kakulu, ende kakulu ; 
 
 We arrived beneath a very large (and) very tall mountain. 
 
 Ba puma be 'manzi be 'maTikiTiki ; 
 
 They came out wet (and) wasted. 
 
 Ilanga la be li kazimula li yindilinga ; 
 
 The sun was bright (and) round. 
 
 Ba Jala imikuba emibi eminingi ; 
 
 They are beginning many bad practices. 
 
 470. The second of two adjectives in succession 
 takes the conjunction na, and, when the noun, to which 
 that (second) adjective properly belongs, has been omit- 
 ted ; thus, 
 
 Wa tenga izitsa eziminyane nezikulu ; 
 
 He bought small and large dishes, i.e., some small and others 
 large.
 
 284 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES; AGREEMENT. 
 IT nezingubo ezimnyama nezim'lope ; 
 
 Hje has black and white blankets, i.e., some black and others white. 
 
 471. In compound construction, where an adjective 
 belongs to two or more subjects : 
 
 1 . It may agree with the nearest ; thus, 
 
 E sa labanga ukuba ukuTa nezin'lamvu za zimnandi ; 
 
 Still thinking how food and fruit were sweet. 
 
 2. It may agree with neither in particular, but with 
 the two taken together and considered as a plural ; thus, 
 
 Zimnandi inyama nesinkwa ; 
 
 Meat and bread are sweet, or sweet is meat and bread. 
 
 Nga bulala impofu na 'mpofu, za ba mbili ; 
 
 I killed an eland and an eland, they were two. 
 
 REM. When two or more compound nouns signifying grandfather, 
 grandmother, &c., as ubabakulu, umamekulu, uyisekulu, &.C., are used in 
 connection, the second element is sometimes separated, and put by 
 itself either before or after both nouns (asu&aiaand umame}, yet with- 
 out taking the usual prefix for the noun; thus, wa bonga uyise nonina 
 kulu, he worshiped his grand father and (grand) mother, i.e., his paternal 
 shades ; ng' etemba nina abakiti okulu nobaba nomame, I trust you our 
 great both father and mother. 
 
 3. When the several subjects, to which an adjective 
 belongs, are of different persons, the adjective commonly 
 takes the plural form, and prefers the first person to the 
 second, and the second to the third ; thus, 
 
 Wena nami si batsa, or mina nawe si batsa, or si 
 batsa tina wena nami ; 
 
 You and I are young. 
 
 Ni nflope wena naye nobabili ; 
 
 Ye are white, thou and he both of you. 
 
 4. The adjective may agree with the more remote of 
 two nouns, if that be the more prominent ; and, for 
 courteous or other reasons, it may prefer the third 
 person to the first and second ; thus, 
 
 Ilanga nenyanga li kazimula li yindilinga ; 
 
 The sun and moon are bright and round. 
 Baminyane bona nawe; 
 
 They and you are small.
 
 ADJECTIVES USED ALONE. 285 
 
 472. The Isizulu has several ways of avoiding, as 
 it were, certain difficult forms of compound construction 
 (iike some in the above paragraph ( 471.), which, though 
 correct and convenient, are neither so common nor easy 
 in this language as in the English). This is done : 
 
 1. By putting the adjective in juxtaposition and 
 agreement with the first subject, and subjoining the 
 others ; thus, 
 
 Li'le izwe lake, nomuzi wake, nezinkomo zake futi ; 
 
 Beautiful is his country, and his kraal, and his cattle also. 
 
 2. By giving the adjective the general prefix few, or 
 ofcw, as referring to subjects of all classes, numbers, and 
 persons ; thus, 
 
 Ba bona isikwebu samabele nombila, ba Ta, be zwa 
 kumnandi ; 
 
 They saw an ear of amabele and maize, ate, and found them sweet. 
 
 3. By repeating the adjective and making it agree 
 with each subject ; thus, 
 
 Umzi wake umkulu, nezinTu zake zinkulu futi ; 
 
 His kraal is large, and his houses are large also. 
 
 REM. Rules and examples given in 448., where one noun is 
 " governed " by several others, as also rules and remarks respecting 
 the agreement of the pronoun 502 506., may all be referred to, as 
 being of the same class as those here given, and, hence, as affording 
 each an illustration of the other. 
 
 473. The adjective is often used alone, the noun 
 with which it agrees being understood ; thus, 
 
 Tina abamnyama be si ng' azi ; 
 
 We black (people) did not know. 
 
 REM. 1. The noun to be supplied is sometimes known from the 
 form of the adjective, or from general usage. Thus, when a native 
 uses the adjective abamnyama, or abadala, &c., alone, it is easily seen 
 that it belongs to abantu understood. 
 
 REM. 2. The noun to be supplied is often contained in a preceding 
 clause; thus, 
 
 Imisebenzi yabo mikuhi. Eminye si ya yazi, eminye 
 si yi zwa ngendaba ; 
 
 Their works are great. Some we know, of others we har by report.
 
 286 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES; DEGREES. 
 
 Izinlobo ezimbili zemali zi nga fana ; lapa olunye lu 
 lungile, olunye lu nga lungile ; 
 
 Two kinds of money may look alike; while one is good, and the 
 other is not good. 
 
 Ndzalo izin'lobo zokupenduka zimbili ; okunye ku 
 lungile, okunye a ku lungile ; 
 
 50 there are two kinds of repentance ; one is good, the other is not 
 good. 
 
 U nga hamba u finyele kwe nga pambili imizi ; nga 
 fika kwe nga pambili emitatu ; 
 
 You may go and reach villages on ahead; I arrived at three on 
 ahead. 
 
 REM. 3. Adjectives taking the neuter or general prefix ku, or oku, 
 are often used alone, referring not to any particular noun understood, 
 but to some clause or general sentiment ; thus, 
 
 Umpande u ya ku tukutela uma e zwa oku ndzalo ; 
 
 Umpande will be angry if he hears such. 
 
 51 nesikati neziniwadi nabafundisi ; okukulu pezu 
 kwako kwonke, Umsindisi ; 
 
 We have time and books and teachers; what is greater than all, a 
 Savior. 
 
 SECT. 2. Of Degrees, and Particular Words. 
 
 474. a. In the Isizulu, as in other languages, a quality 
 may be attributed to an object, with different degrees of 
 intensity. When no intimation is made in respect to 
 this particular, or where the quality is understood to be 
 of the general average standard, it is said to be in the 
 positive degree,; thus, 
 
 Into erikulu, a large thing; ngi mnandi, I am well. 
 
 6. We may either compare a quality as existing in any given object, 
 with the same quality as existing in other objects; or we may compare 
 it with some assumed notion of the quality in general. When a given 
 quality is represented as existing in one object with greater or less 
 intensity than in another, or in the same object with greater or less 
 intensity than usual, or with too great or too little intensity for a given 
 purpose, it is said to be in the comparative degree; and when it is 
 represented as existing in one object with the greatest or least intensity 
 as compared with the same in other objects, or as compared with the 
 average standard, it is said to be in the superlative degree. 
 
 REM. 1 . Many of the following rules and observations apply to 
 the expression of degrees by verbs, and adverbs, and by nouns, as well 
 as by adjectives.
 
 THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 287 
 
 REM. 2. The degrees of comparison are more freely interchanged 
 and mixed, and often used with less precision, in the Isizulu than in 
 
 the English. 
 
 475. The comparative degree is of two kinds. The 
 one denotes the intension or remission, the more or the 
 Jess, of the quality in view ; and generally compares 
 one object with another. This may be called the 
 definite comparative. The other denotes a remission or 
 modification of the quality considered, and has reference 
 to the general average standard, without comparing one 
 noun or subject with another. This may be called the 
 indefinite comparative. 
 
 476. I. The definite comparative degree is expressed 
 in several ways : 
 
 1. By placing the nouns in contrast, the noun com- 
 pared taking the adjective in the positive degree ; and 
 the noun, with which the comparison is made, taking one 
 or more prepositions, to show that the latter differs from 
 the former in the intensity of the quality denoted by the 
 adjective. These prepositions are 
 
 (a.) The preposition ku, to, from; thus, 
 Le 'nkomo inkulu kwezinye ; 
 
 This cow is large to the rest, i.e, is larger than the rest. 
 
 (b.) The prepositions ku na-, 4o with, i.e., in com- 
 parison with; thus, 
 
 Abantu se be tsaya umbila ; e wona u su mkulu ku 
 nenkomo ; 
 
 The people now prize corn, which same is now more valuable than 
 cattle. 
 
 U mi kubi ku nokuba a la c le ingalo neso ; 
 
 He is worse off than if he were to lose an arm or an eye. 
 
 Loku ku ya ngokuba abaningi ba ya tanda kakulu 
 olunye uto ku nokupenduka ; 
 
 This is because most (men) love anything better than repentance. 
 
 Umtwana a nge be mminyane ku nokulalela unina ; 
 
 The child can not be too small to obey its mother. 
 
 (c.) By means of the preposition pezu and its com- 
 plement Kwa, above unto, i.e., more than; thus,
 
 288 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES ; DEGREES. 
 
 Okukulu pezu kvva loku ; 
 
 What is greater than this. 
 
 Izono zetu zi yizin'loni kakulu pezu kwesono esi yizi- 
 n'loni sa lo 'mfana ; 
 
 Our sins are much more shameful than' the shameful sin- of that 
 boy. 
 
 Izingelosi zi tanda Utiuo pezu kwokutamlana, na pezu 
 kvvokutanda uluto olunye ; 
 
 The angels love God more than they love one another, and more 
 than they love anything else. 
 
 2. By the use of a verb ; as, ukwtflula, to surpass ; 
 uku kula, to grow ; uku g\\ila f to be deep; uku pa- 
 ngisa, to speed ; thus, 
 
 Si ya b' a c lula ; 
 
 We are stronger than they. 
 
 Isifo sake sa kula ; 
 
 He was wurse, literally, his disease increased. 
 
 Se be lungela uku ya ekubudzisweni oku giiilifeyo ; 
 
 They only prepare for a deeper perdition. 
 
 3. By having both nouns before the mind and attri- 
 buting the quality in its simple or positive degree to one, 
 without any direct reference to the other ; thus, 
 
 Ku yipi inkorno enkulu na ? 
 
 Which, or where is the large cow ? i.e., the larger ? 
 
 I kona imiziki, inyamazana enkulu, kodwa a i nga- 
 ngayo inkomo, iminyane ; 
 
 Here are imiziki, a large (kind of) game, but it is not equal to the 
 cow; it is small, i.e., smaller than the cow. 
 
 Wa ti, indzuba ku 'Dingane i y' esabeka, iningi ; 
 ba ti, indzuba nawe u sa yi bangile, u nendzuba 
 enkulu ; 
 
 He said, the courage in Dingane is fearful; it is more than mine: 
 they said, thou didst measure thy courage with his, and thine 
 is the greater. 
 
 Ngokuba u ya la c la umpefurnlo wake, a nga be e sa 
 ba na 'si'lobo ezulwini, a nga be e sa ba na 'si'lobo 
 'ndao; okukulu ukuba enga sayi ku ba na 'si'lobo; 
 
 For he loses his soul, and has not a friend in heaven, nor any 
 where else; and what his more, he never will have a friend. 
 
 477. II. The indefinite comparative degree is de- 
 noted also in several wavs :
 
 THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 289 
 
 1. By the diminutive form of the adjective; thus, 
 isilwane esimpungana, a greyish animal ; into itrflo- 
 tsazana, the thing is a little whitish. 
 
 2. By the use of the noun imozana as an adverb=a 
 little, rather, somewhat, moderately; thus, ngi mnandi 
 imozana, I am a little well, i.e., (sometimes) I am 
 better, (sometimes) I am not very well. 
 
 3. By the use of the adverb kodwa, only, somewhat, 
 rather; thus, i naman ( Ya kodwa, it is rather strong. 
 
 478. The superlative degree sometimes makes a 
 comparison between several objects, and signifies that 
 the object to which the quality is attributed is distin- 
 guished by it above all the others, and hence that we 
 have here the most or the least of such quality ; in 
 which case it may be called the definite superlative. 
 Or it may signify that a quality exists in an extremely 
 high degree, without instituting a direct comparison 
 between one or more objects and several others ; in 
 which case it may be called the indefinite superlative. 
 
 479. I. The definite superlative is denoted : 
 
 1. By placing in contrast the nouns compared, as in 
 the definite comparative, by means of ku, ku na-, pezu 
 kwa-, or a verb, and applying the adjective onke, all, 
 or nye, the rest, to that with which the comparison is 
 made ; thus, 
 
 Wa be mkulu ku nabo bonke abafana ; 
 
 He was larger than all (or the largest of all) the boys. 
 
 Ba nga labanga kakulu ngomtwana wabo o gulayo, 
 ba pape kakulu ngawe ku nabanye bonke benTu ; 
 
 They would think more about their sick child, and feel more anxious 
 about you than about all the rest of the family. 
 
 2. By having several nouns before the mind, and 
 attributing the quality either simply or in a heightened 
 degree to one, without any direct reference to others ; 
 thus, 
 
 LFle leli 'hasi ; 
 
 This horse is the most beautiful (of all).
 
 290 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES ; DEGREES. 
 
 Ukulunga okukulu Utiuo vva si nika kona ; 
 The greatest good that God gave us. 
 
 3. By the use of some noun or verb denoting ex- 
 tremity ; thus, 
 
 Mina nga ngi ngo wamagiino abantwaria ; 
 
 I was the youngest of the children. 
 
 Noto e nga giina uku lu tso kuye ; 
 
 And the last thing which I said to him. 
 
 480. II. The indefinite superlative, which might 
 also he called the superlative by eminence, may be 
 denoted : 
 
 1. By the neuter or general form of the adjective 
 onke=kwonke, ivholly, altogether; thus, Utiuo o pezulu 
 kwonke, the most high God. 
 
 2. By using the adverb kakulu after the adjective ; 
 thus, u nesineke esikulu kakulu, he is very careful, 
 literally, he has very great care. 
 
 3. By means of the verb uku nlaba, to excel, be 
 supreme 
 
 a. The adjective taking the form of an abstract noun 
 in the locative case ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo za lo 'muntu zi nlabile ebu'leni ; 
 
 This man's cattle are out of reach in beauty. 
 
 b. The adjective may take the form of the noun to 
 which the quality is attributed ; thus, 
 
 Zinle zi nja'bile izinkomo za lo 'muntu ; 
 
 Beautiful to the extreme are the cattle of this man. 
 
 4. By a kind of irony, making use of the negative 
 formula a si 
 
 a. The root of the adjective being used with the verb 
 uku ba, to be ; thus, 
 
 A si ko nokuban'le lezi 'zinkomo ; 
 
 These cattle are not beautiful, i.e., they are exceedingly beau- 
 tifbl. 
 
 b. The adjective may agree with the noun ; thus,
 
 SIMILITUDE. EQUALITY. 291 
 
 A si nokuba zirfle lezi 'zinkomo ; 
 
 These cattle are not beautiful, i.e., they are, Etc. 
 
 c. The noun only may be used with the negative a si; 
 thus, 
 
 A si 'nTala nonyaka ndze ; 
 
 There is no famine this year, i.e., the famine is very great, Stc. 
 
 Au ! a si ko nokulibala ; 
 
 Oh ! there is even no delay, i.e., there is very great delay. 
 
 481. The quality or relation of similitude, which we 
 denote in English by the adjective like, may be ex- 
 pressed, in the Zulu, in several ways : 
 
 1. By ndzenga; thus, 
 
 Lo 'mfana a be nekaya eli lungileyo ndzeng' elako ; 
 
 (That) this boy should have a good home like thine. 
 
 Ma si nga bi ndzeng' abadala betu ; 
 
 Let us not be like our ancestors. 
 
 2. By the causative form of the verb and the prepo- 
 sition ku; thus, 
 
 Uma Utino si m tandisa kwabazali betu em'labeni ; 
 
 If we loved God as much as we do our parents on earth. 
 
 3. By the use of the verb ukufana, to resemble ; thus, 
 A mu ko urauntu o fana nezingelosi ngomzimba ; 
 
 Nobody resembles the angels in respect to the body. 
 
 Um'langa wa kona u fana nezinti zesiswebu, a wu fani 
 nowa lapa ; 
 
 The reed of that place is like whip-sticks, it is not like (the reed) 
 of this place. 
 
 4. By the use of the verb uku ti, or uku ba t in the 
 potential mode ; thus, 
 
 Ku nga ti inyoni, it resembles a bird ; ku nga ba uyena, it seems to 
 be the very same (person) ; u ya bona upondo ku nga ti upondo Iwen- 
 komo, you see the horn is like a cow's horn. 
 
 482. The relation of equality is generally denoted 
 by a verb ; sometimes by a preposition : 
 
 1. By the verb uku lingana; thus,
 
 292 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Imiti i lingerie, the trees are equal ; intambo i ya lingana noluti, the 
 cord is equal to the rod. 
 
 2. By the verb uku lungelana, or some other form of 
 the same verb ; thus, 
 
 Zi lungelene, they are equal to each other; obani nobani ba lungekne, 
 so and so agree together. 
 
 3. By the preposition ndzenga, see 481., 1. ; also 
 by nganga, see 483., 2. 
 
 483. The quality or relation of nearness is expressed 
 in several different ways, according to the kind of ap- 
 proximation to be signified : 
 
 1. By litsa, or ponsa, in the sense of nearly, almost, 
 or " had like," with the infinitive; thus, ba tits' uku 
 fa, they almost died ; ngi pons' uku wa, I almost fell. 
 
 2. By the preposition nga, generally in its redupli- 
 cated form=nganga, in the sense of like, as, about; 
 thus, 
 
 Na ke na bona ifu iotuli na ? izono zetu zi zingalo ; 
 
 Did you ever see a cloud of dust ? our sins are quite like it. 
 
 Ngi ngangaye ; 
 
 I am like him, i.e., I am about his age, size, or strength, according 
 to the connection. 
 
 I kona imiziki, inyamazana enkulu, kodwa a i nga- 
 ngayo inkomo ; 
 
 Here are the imiziki, a large (kind of) game, but not equal to the 
 
 cow. 
 
 Ba nga ba ngamakulu amatatu ; 
 They might be about three hundred. 
 
 REM. 1. A supposed or contingent number, marked in English by 
 the use of about, is sometimes put in the predicate nominative after 
 uku ba in the potential mode ; but more frequently in the locative 
 either with or without the potential nga ba ; thus, 
 
 Ukubalwa kwazo kwa ku nga ba ikulu ; 
 
 Their number might be about a hundred. 
 
 Izitungu zi nga ba sezinkulungwaneni czimbili or, 
 zi nga ba izinkulungwane ezimbili ; 
 
 There may be about two thousand bundles. 
 
 REM. 2. The preposition eduze, near, is sometimes used like nga, 
 or nganga, and occasionally in the sense of ponia.
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. 293 
 
 SECT. 3. Numerals. 
 
 484. The cardinal numbers from one to four are 
 denoted by the numeral used as an adjective, the nu- 
 meral taking a prefix, like other adjectives, according 
 to the noun to which it belongs ; thus, 
 
 Wa hamba namanye amadoda amatatu ; 
 
 He went with three other men. 
 
 Nga 'sikati ba be babili ndzena ; 
 
 There were two or so at a time. 
 
 Ba ya nika izinkomo ezintatu ; 
 
 They give three cows. 
 
 InTela yen'liziyo a yi yinye ; 
 
 The way of the heart is not one. 
 
 REM. When the numeral is used as a factitive object ( 491., 4.), 
 its prefix is often omitted; thus, 
 
 Wa 'lain izinsuku za ba mbili ; 
 
 He remained two days. 
 
 Nga hila izinyanga za ba ne ; 
 
 I remained four months. 
 
 Nga 'lala umnyaka wa ba munye or, wa ba 'nye ; 
 
 I remained one year. 
 
 Nga bulala inyati za ba mbili ; 
 
 I killed two buffaloes. 
 
 Si tanda uku hamba ngenTela i be 'nye ; 
 
 We wish to go by one way. 
 
 485. The numeral Jive (lanu, nominal form isi- 
 1anu t ) may be used either as a proper adjective, or as a 
 noun for an adjective : 
 
 1. As an adjective; thus, 
 Se be fikile abantu aba'lanu ; 
 
 Five persons have arrived. 
 
 2. As a noun for an adjective ; thus, 
 Wa fumana amadoda a yisi'lanu ; 
 
 He met with five men. 
 
 Ngi ya ku zuza imali isi'lanu ngenyanga ; 
 
 I shall get five shillings per month. 
 
 486. From six to nine the numeral may retain its 
 verbal character ( 140., 2.), and agree with its noun
 
 294 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES; NUMERALS. 
 
 like other verbs ; or it may take the form of a noun 
 ( 142.), and as such be connected to its subject, like 
 isi'lanu, by means of the relative pronoun and the eu- 
 phonic y: 
 
 1. In Us verbal character; thus, 
 
 . 
 Amasiline a kombisa a lingene nenkomazi na ? 
 
 Are seven shillings equal to a milch cow ? 
 
 2. As a noun; thus, 
 
 Wa tenga izinkomo ezi yisikombisa ; 
 
 He bought seven cattle. 
 
 Sa fumana abantu aba yisitupa ; 
 
 We found six persons. 
 
 487. The numerals from ten and upwards are nouns ; 
 and in many instances their construction (as also that of 
 numerals under ten, when they take the form of a sub- 
 stantive,) does not differ from the construction of other 
 nouns used as adjectives. Indeed, any numeral having 
 the form of a substantive may be used in most of the 
 ways in which other nouns are used. 
 
 488. I. A numeral noun may be used as the nom- 
 inative, whether as subject or predicate of a proposition: 
 
 1. As a subject nominative ; thus, 
 
 A kona amasumi amatatu ; 
 
 There are thirty, literally, three tens. 
 
 2. As a predicate nominative ; thus, 
 
 Ekupumeni kwabo ba ti ba ba amasumi amane nesi- 
 lanu ; ngasemva wa ba kona omunye wa bala ngo- 
 mjibeio wokutatisitupa ; ngako ba ba 'rnasumi 
 amane nesitatisitupa ; 
 
 When they came out they said they were forty-five; afterwards 
 there was another who signed at the close of the sixth (day), 
 hence they were forty-six. 
 
 Tina, abe si ti e be si ka Keristu, si 'maisumi amane 
 nane ; 
 
 We, who have professed to be Christians, are forty-four. 
 
 
 
 489. II. A numeral, as a noun in apposition ; thus,
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. 295 
 
 U za ku biza izinkomo amasumi ama'lanu ; 
 
 He will demand fifty head of cattle. 
 
 Kvva ti ukuba ba c langaniswe eril'wini yokusonda, 
 beka, amasumi ama'lanu nantatu, isifazana ; 
 
 It came to pass when they were assembled in the house of worship, 
 see, fifty-three women, or a company of women fifty-three in 
 number. 
 
 490. III. A numeral, as a noun in the genitive; thus, 
 
 Ng' amukele inkomo yamasumi amatatu ; 
 
 I received a cow of thirty, i.e., a cow worth thirty shillings. 
 
 Be za nemikundzana yamasumi a kombile na mine ; 
 
 They came with boats of seventy-four, i.e., with seventy-four 
 boats. 
 
 REM. A cardinal number used in this way generally denotes a 
 series, rank, or order, and hence forms an ordinal (see ^ 144.) ; thus, 
 indao yesibili, the second place ; umei icesikombisa, the seventh kraal ; 
 so, Jika ngosuku hcesibili ; ngohoesitatu ba fika bonke, we arrived on the 
 second day (Tuesday) ; on the third they all arrived. 
 
 491. IV. As a noun in the accusative, with either a 
 verb or a preposition, and both as a suffering and as 
 a factitive object : 
 
 1. With a verb ; thus, 
 
 IzinTovu za ba 'masumi, kodwa a ngi landelanga 
 ka c le amasumi ezinTovu ; 
 
 The elephants were tens, but I did not count carefully the tens of 
 elephants. 
 
 2. With a preposition ; thus, 
 Ba ya fika na kwamatatu ; 
 
 They reach even to thirty (head of cattle). 
 
 Lo 'msebenzi u lingene namasumi amabili ; 
 
 That job is equal to (or worth) twenty (shillings). 
 
 3. As a suffering object ; thus, 
 Kodwa a ngi landelanga ka c le amasumi ; 
 
 But I did not count the tens carefully. 
 
 4. As a factitive object ; thus, 
 
 Izinsuku zi be 'masumi 'mabili zi ve nga 'n'lanu, si 
 
 fike isikati sokiflangana ; 
 (Let) the days be twenty-five, and the time comes for meeting.
 
 296 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES ; NUMERALS. 
 
 Tata izinkabi zi be isumi ; 
 
 Take oxen let them be ten, i.e., take ten oxen. 
 
 REM. There are many examples somewhat similar to the above, 
 where a rigid adherence to the form of grammatical construction would 
 lead us to put the numeral under the head of predicate nominative, 
 the subject nominative being found in a pronoun, either simple or 
 relative, in agreement with the noun enumerated ; while a regard to 
 the logical construction would rather dispose of such numerals by 
 referring them to the class of factitive objects, as above, and as further 
 illustrated in the examples which follow; thus, 
 
 Wa piwa izinkomo inkosi zi 'masumi amabili ; 
 
 He was given cattle by the chief two tens, i.e., the chief gave him 
 twenty head of cattle. 
 
 U fun a amapaunde a yisumi ; 
 
 He wants pounds which are ten. 
 
 U lupile izinyoni ezi yisikombisa ; 
 
 He has caught seven birds in a snare. 
 
 Sa funyanisa abantu be batatu ; 
 We found persons being three. 
 
 492. V. As a noun in the locative case ; thus, 
 
 Ba ya lobolisa kakulu ndzalo, na semasumini ; ba ya 
 fika na kwamatatu futi ; 
 
 So dear do they sell (a woman for cattle), even to twenty (head) ; 
 
 moreover they go even to thirty. 
 Ekulwini ku bizwa osiline abatatu ; 
 It costs three shillings a hundred. 
 
 RBM. Many of the examples before us show that a given number 
 is often expressed by a noun and an adjective ; thus, amakulu amabili, 
 two hundred ; iztfcombisa ezitatu, three sevens, i.e.., twenty-one. 
 
 493. The ordinal numbers are denoted by the car- 
 dinal, put, generally, in the genitive ; but sometimes in 
 juxtaposition with the relative of the noun specified : 
 
 1. By the cardinal in the genitive ; thus, 
 
 Be za ku ganana ngomsumbuluko wokulala wenyanga 
 entsa, Umatsi, ngalolu 6 usuku ; 
 
 They are to be married on the first Monday of the new month, 
 March, on the sixth day. 
 
 Kwa vela itole lenkabi, si batatu, ku yinsizwa yesi- 
 tatu, e ya memeza ya ti, Nansi inkomo yarni ; 
 
 There came a yearling ox, we being three, (of whom) the third 
 was a young man, who shouted out, Here is my animal.
 
 DISTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. 297 
 
 Kwa 'lalwa izinyanga ezirnbili nennenye yenyanga 
 yesitatu. Kwa pela inyanga leyo yesitatu, ku 
 
 te ekutwaseni kvvenyanga yesine, i se 'niinyane, ya 
 lika im pi ; 
 
 There was resting two months and part of the third month. * That 
 third month ended, and at the beginning of the fourth month, it 
 being still small (i.e., the moon), the commando arrived. 
 
 2. By a cardinal number in juxtaposition with the 
 relative of the noun specified ; thus, 
 
 Sa funyanisa abantu be batatu, ku ngumfana o 'bune; 
 
 We fell in with three persons, a boy making the fourth. 
 
 Ku yitole eli 'butatu ; 
 
 It is the third calf. 
 
 Sa 'lala izinsuku za ba 'mbili, sa liamba ngalo 'butatu ; 
 
 We rested two days, we went on the third. 
 
 494. To denote the force of the distributive adjective 
 each, signifying two or more taken separately, use is 
 made of the demonstrative pronoun ; thus, 
 
 Yilowo umuntu u nokwa c luka en'liziy weni yake ndzenga 
 sebusweni ; 
 
 Each man has (some) peculiarity in his mind as well as in his face. 
 
 Kwa se ku ngulowo 'muntu e se hambe efuna abantu 
 
 bake ; 
 Then each man went in search of his own people. 
 
 495. As to the distributive adjective every; 
 
 1. When not so much the single persons or things, as 
 generality, or one aggregate, is to be signified, the 
 force of every is expressed by onfee, with the noun in 
 the plural ; thus, 
 
 U ya z' act izinto zonke nal Do you know every thing, literally, 
 all things? 
 
 2. When every is used not only to include the whole 
 number of persons or things, but also to signify each 
 one of them taken separately, the aggregate is denoted 
 by the use of onke; and the distribution or individuality, 
 by the use of nye, eliding the initial vowel of its prefix, 
 and placing before it the preposition nga without con- 
 traction or coalescence ( 499.) ; thus, 
 
 2 L
 
 298 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Izirikomo \va zi nika ku 'zinieku zake zonke nga 'zinye ; 
 
 He gave cattle to every one of his servants. 
 Yebo, ba suka bonke nga 'banye, ba vumelana ka'le 
 ngabo ubutswala ; 
 
 Yes, they every one arose, and agreed perfectly concerning beer. 
 
 496'. 1. The force of the adjective either is expressed 
 in the same manner as each ( 494.), that is, by the use 
 of the demonstrative pronoun ; thus, 
 
 Yilowo umuntu ku tina a nga hamba ngenye inTela 
 uma e nga sa hambanga ngenye ; 
 
 Either man of us can go either the one way or the other. 
 
 2. The adjective neither is denoted by the use of na and the adjective 
 nye, the initial vowel of the prefix of nye being elided ; thus, a ba 
 yanga na 'munye, neither of them have gone. 
 
 497. The adjectives one, another; some, others; 
 any, no, none, are generally expressed by the use of nye. 
 
 1. When nye denotes a single person or thing (in dis- 
 tinction from two, three, or more), the initial vowel of 
 the usual attributive prefix fa, e, oro,) is elided, making 
 the attributive prefix the same as the predicative, even 
 when the adjective is used as an attributive; and, again, 
 generally, if the noun with which it agrees be in the 
 genitive, or be governed by a preposition, its initial 
 vowel is elided ; and the genitive a, or the final vowel of 
 the preposition is left, in its integrity, without elision or 
 coalescence (^ 450., Rem. ; 457., Rem.) ; thus, 
 
 A hambe, urazi wa 'mtu 'munye ; a hambe, (umuzi) 
 wa 'mtu 'munye ; 
 
 (They say) he goes on (and finds) a kraal of a single person; goes 
 on (and finds) a kraal of a single person. 
 
 Ba memeza nga 'lizwi 'linye ; 
 
 They shouted with one voice. 
 
 Kwa funyanwa isumi 'linye; 
 
 There was found a single ten. 
 
 Wa 'lala kona inyanga ya ba 'nye ; kwa ti ngenyanga 
 
 yesibili a lika amabuto ; 
 He remained there one month ; and on the second month soldiers 
 
 arrived. 
 
 Ba sebenza usuku la ba 'lunye ; 
 
 They worked one day.
 
 THE USE OF nyr. 299 
 
 2. But when nye is used indefinitely to signify some 
 or any; or used to denote persons or things which are 
 diverse or opposed, where one is contrasted with another, 
 and some with others; and also where it is used to de- 
 note reciprocation or mutuality, it takes the full attri- 
 butive prefix : 
 
 (a.) Used indefinitely =some or any; thus, 
 Ku te ngolunye usuku nga ya Elovu ; 
 
 It came to pass one day I went to the Ilovu. 
 
 Zi kona izintaba emazweni amanye, ezi vut' umlilo 
 omkulu ; ngesikati esinye u bulala abantu nernizi 
 yabo ; 
 
 There are mountains in some countries, which emit much fire ; 
 sometimes it destroys people and their villages. 
 
 (b.) Denoting diversity, opposition, or contrast,= 
 one, another; some, others; various, different, several; 
 thus, 
 
 Wa tuma amabuto ake elizweni elinye ; 
 
 He sent his soldiers to another country. 
 
 Amabuto ake a be c lasela ezizweni ezinye ; 
 
 His soldiers were making war upon other tribes. 
 
 Amabuto a ku zwa, amanye a nanela ; amanye a da- 
 buka ; amanye a dzabula, ngokuba ngosuku olunye 
 wa be bulala amasumi abantu ngensuku inye ; 
 
 The soldiers hearing it (the death of Chaka), some were thankful; 
 some were sorry; others rejoiced, because occasionally (literally, 
 on some day) he would kill tens of people at a time (literally, in 
 one day). 
 
 Izirilobo ezimbili zemali zi nga iana, lapa olunye lu 
 lungile, olunye lu nga lungile ; 
 
 Two kinds of money may look alike, while one is good, the other 
 not good. 
 
 Sa suka sa luba izimbuzi, omunye wa luba eza kwabo, 
 nomunye eza kwabo, sonke sa hamba ; 
 
 We started and drove the goats, one drove theirs, another theirs, 
 and we all went. 
 
 Kwa ze kwa sa ngelinye ilanga ; 
 
 Until it dawned the next day. 
 
 (c.) Denoting reciprocation or mutuality, =each other, 
 one another, nye is repeated and coupled by na, and 
 usually employed with a verb in the reciprocal form ; 
 thus,
 
 300 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Ba Iwa ba bulalana omunye notnunye ; 
 
 They fought and killed each other. 
 
 498. 1. The Isizulu expresses somebody and any- 
 body : 
 
 (a.) By umuntu; thus, 
 
 V ye za umuntu, somebody is coming; a ngi boni 'muntu, I do not see 
 anybody. 
 
 (b.) By ubani; thus, 
 
 Wa zitso yena nokuti u ngubani ; 
 
 He thought himself to be somebody. 
 Ma ku tunywe ubani nobani ; 
 Let somebody or other be sent. 
 
 2. To denote something or anything, into is generally 
 used in the affirmative, and uluto in the negative ; thus, 
 
 t funa into emnandi, I want something sweet; a ngi boni y luto, I 
 do not see anything. 
 
 3. -Some, in the sense of a portion, is denoted by 
 in\\enye; thus, inuenye yezinkomo ba yi tabata, they 
 took some of the cattle. 
 
 499. The distributive numbers, singly, by twos, by 
 threes, or one by one, two by two, &c., are denoted by 
 the preposition nga in full simple form, with the numeral 
 in either its radical or its predicative form ( 495., 2. ; 
 497., 1.): 
 
 1. In its radical form ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zi hamba nga 'nye, the cattle go one by one, or singly ; zi 
 hamba nga 'mbili, they go by twos, or two by two; zi hamba nga 'ntatu, 
 they go by threes. 
 
 2. The numeral may take the predicative prefix, that 
 is, have the initial vowel of the attributive form elided ; 
 thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zi hamba nga 'zimbili, the cattle go by twos; zi hamba nga 
 'zintatu, they go by threes. 
 
 500. 1. Adjectives or pronouns used in a partitive 
 sense often dispense with the use of a word to signify
 
 pRo.vor> i. 
 
 the whole ; and when a word signifying the whole is 
 used, it is put sometimes in the genitive, and sometimes 
 in the accusative, unless, perhaps, what is here called 
 the accusative may be regarded as a peculiar abridged 
 form of the genitive (see 441., Remarks 2 and 3); 
 thus, 
 
 i nga buza kicomunye wenu, I would ask one of you; a mu ko no 
 yedu-a kuzo (izingelosi) oica ke u-' ona, no one of them (the angels) ever 
 did wrong. 
 
 2. The remarks upon the usual form and probable 
 derivation of the collective numerals, bobabili, bobatatu, 
 bobane, &c., signifying, both, all three, all four, &c., 
 (see 146.,) show also the manner in which they are 
 used ; in addition to which, however, we give here a 
 few examples ; thus, 
 
 JVt za kit zi kumbula zontatu na 1 will you remember them all three ? 
 kwa ku bikwa ku bona izindaba bobabili, affairs were reported to them 
 both; yeboke, laba ba icela bobane, ba hamba, yes, these crossed over all 
 four, and went. 
 
 CHAPTER U'. 
 SYXTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 501. REMARKS. 1. Many of the rules for the con- 
 struction and use of the noun are equally applicable to 
 the pronoun. ($ 431.) 
 
 2. Between the adjective and the pronoun there is 
 often a sameness in the laws of agreement ; nor is this 
 strange, since they are all based upon the one reflective 
 principle which runs through the whole language, and 
 gives harmony, strength, and precision, to all its parts. 
 (W 472., Rem. ; 507.) 
 
 3. The Zulu pronoun is not always rendered into 
 English, since this would sometimes sound harsh and
 
 ,"302 SYNTAX. PRONOUN*; AGREEMENT. 
 
 pleonastic ; it would be wrong, however, to infer that 
 there is any real pleonasm in its use as found in the Isi- 
 zulu. (See 307., 507. ; also Verbs 309.) 
 
 SECT. 1. Agreement. 
 
 502. A pronoun agrees with its subject, the noun 
 or pronoun which it represents, in class, number, and 
 person ; thus, 
 
 Umfana u hambile, the boy he has gone ; abafana ba hambile, the 
 boys they have gone; inkosi i hambile, the chief he has gone ; umkonto 
 wami, my spear ; izingiibo zabo, their blankets; leli ilizu-e, this coun- 
 try; lezoizinto, those things; izinkomo ezi tengiwe, cattle which were 
 bought. See also 155., 159., 161., 170., 176., and other parts of 
 Chapter IV., Part II. 
 
 503. The pronoun sometimes agrees virtually or 
 logically, but not grammatically, with its subject ; thus, 
 
 Si zwile ngesinye esikulu (isizwe), Amangisi, ukuba 
 ba be semnyameni ; 
 
 We have heard of one large (tribe), the English, that they were in 
 darkness. 
 
 Kwa ti ngensuku eza Tulayo, s' amkela iniwadi ; 
 
 It came to pass on a day which (with other days) have passed by, 
 we received a paper. 
 
 REM. 1. We sometimes meet with a kind of mixed construction, 
 where the agreement of the pronoun is partly logical and partly gram- 
 matical, or partly both together; thus, 
 
 Inkosi nenkosikazi ya funa ukuba ba bone umlungu- 
 kazi nengane ; ya ti a ba bonanga be m bona um- 
 lungukazi nengane. Nembala w' aziswa umlungu- 
 kazi nengane ; 
 
 The king and queen wished that they might see the white woman 
 and child; they said they never had seen a white woman and 
 child. And indeed the white woman and child were made 
 known. 
 
 Amakolwa a Jalile uku tenga iziniwele. Ba sebenza 
 ngezinkabi zabo ; zi ti izinsizwa ba zi kwele ; 
 
 The believers have begun to buy wagons. They work with their 
 oxen; and the young men ride them. 
 
 REM. 2. The speaker's idea sometimes undergoes a change, or he 
 varies the construction of a sentence either designedly or otherwise; 
 by reason of whir.h tho. pronoun may fail to agree with the noun : thus.
 
 AGREEMENT OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 U ti, ma i c latselwe lezi 'zinkomo ezi ka 'bani ; 
 
 He says, let these cattle of so and so be slaughtered. Here the 
 inyanga (doctor) makes the ghost begin his demand by asking 
 for it (one cow) to be slaughtered ; but before completing the 
 request he puts the noun in the plural and calls for several. 
 
 Ku ngokuba (izizwe) a z' azi ngemipefumlo. A b' 
 azi ukuba ba tengwa ngegazi na ngobu'lungu ; 
 
 It is because the tribes are ignorant of souls. They (people) do 
 not know that they were redeemed with blood and suffering. 
 
 504. 1. The general or neuter pronoun ku (kona, 
 oku, loku, &/c.,) may be used in reference to a noun of 
 any class, number, or person ; thus, 
 
 Likomo se ku ngeyenu, the cow since it is yours ; ma ku pume yena o 
 gulayo, let him who is sick come forth. 
 
 2. Ku, at the beginning of a sentence or clause, is 
 often used in a manner called expletive, and answers to 
 the English use of there in the like situation ; thus, 
 
 Kwa be kona abantu abatatu ; 
 
 There were present three persons. 
 
 Kwa fika izigidzimi ku 'bantu bonke ; 
 
 There came messengers to all the people. 
 
 3. Ku is often used out of politeness, or to avoid 
 the appearance of impertinence, individuality, or offensive 
 precision ; thus, 
 
 Ku handzwapi na ? 
 
 \\~here is it walked, i.e., where are you going ? 
 
 Se u buyele enTwini, se ku tatwa umkonto, se ku 
 punywa nawo ; 
 
 Then he went into the house, then there was taking the spear, then 
 there was going out with it, i.e., he took the spear and went out 
 with it. 
 
 4. Ku is often used like it in English : 
 (a.) To represent a phrase or sentence ; thus, 
 Ku tiwe, izikati ezi litakele a zi buyi ; 
 
 It is said, time wasted does not return. 
 
 Nokuba be lekisa ku yena, a ku ngenanga loko erfli- 
 ziyvveni yake ; 
 
 And when they laughed at him, that (their laughing at him) did not 
 enter his heart, i.e., did not affect him.
 
 304? SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; AGREEMENT. 
 
 Kwa tiwa, ma ba goduke ; 
 It was said, let them go home. 
 
 (b. ) To represent the subject of a proposition when 
 the nominal subject is placed after the predicate ; thus, 
 
 Ma ku Te oyise, ba si pe imfuyo eningi, ukuze ku 
 sinde izingane zetu nati ; 
 
 Let the paternal shades eat, and grant us much wealth, so that our 
 children may be saved with us, i.e., that we and our children 
 may escape death. 
 
 Uma se ku tso abaninizo ndzalo ; 
 
 If the owners say so. 
 
 Se kwetwasile i'lobo ; 
 
 When the summer has set in. 
 
 (c.) To express a general condition or state ; thus, 
 
 Ku nani lokunal what of this? ku makaza, it is cold; sekumnyama, 
 it is dark. 
 
 505. In compound construction where the pronoun 
 stands for two or more nouns : 
 
 1 . The pronoun may agree with the nearest ; thus, 
 
 Izizwe ezinye nabantu abanye a ba kataleli imipefumlo 
 yabo ; 
 
 Some tribes and some people (they) do not care for their souls. 
 
 REM. Where there are two or more nouns, one of which (the 
 second or last) is put in apposition with the others, the pronoun 
 generally agrees with the first, but sometimes with the second or last; 
 thus, 
 
 Nga'langana nabantu, indoda nezinsizwa ezimbili; ba 
 lika ba ngi bingelela ; 
 
 I met people, a man and two young men; they came up and saluted 
 me. 
 
 Nabantu abakulu bonke, izinduna ezinkulu za m c luka 
 (Udingane) za m tanda Umpande ; 
 
 And all the great men, the great captains (they) deserted him 
 (Dingane) and joined Umpande. 
 
 Ma si bonge Inkosi yetu Uyehova o sezulwini ; 
 
 Let us praise our King the Lord who is in heaven. 
 
 2. The pronoun may agree with neither noun in par- 
 ticular, but with the two taken together and considered 
 as a plural, either as persons or things ; thus,
 
 AGREEMENT OF PRONOUNS. 305 
 
 Inkosi nenkosikazi ba twalvva erna'lornbe abantu ; 
 
 The king and queen (they) were carried on the backs of the people. 
 
 Nembala ba 'langana Umanemane nenduna ; 
 
 And indeed Umanemane and the captain (they) became associates. 
 
 Kwe zwakala ku tiwa, amabuto, noMpande, namnbunu 
 ba ye za ; 
 
 It was reported saying, the soldiers, Umpandr, and thi> Bor-r* (they) 
 are coming. 
 
 3. When the several subjects are of different persons 
 the pronoun generally takes the plural form, and prefers 
 the first person to the second, and the second to the 
 third ; thus, 
 
 Vena naini si ya ku bala ; 
 
 He and I (we) will write. 
 
 Mina nabo si balile ; 
 
 I and they (we) have written. 
 
 Nina riabo ngi ya ni tanda ; 
 
 You and them I love (you). 
 
 Ku ndzani si misa isikati tina nabafundisi betu na ? 
 
 How would it be, should we fix a time we and our teachers ? 
 
 4. The pronoun may agree with the more remote of 
 two nouns, if that be the more important ; or, again, if 
 it be in the plural, and such that its pronoun may 
 properly include the other (succeeding) nouns ; and, for 
 euphonic or other reasons, it may prefer (the form of) 
 the third person to the first and second ; thus, 
 
 Abafundisi nenduna ba puma emkundzini ; 
 
 The teachers and captain (they) came out of the ship. 
 Bona nawe ba be 'lutsiwe ; 
 
 They and you (they) had been punished. 
 
 Wena naye no ba ni hambile ; 
 
 You and he (ye) will have gone. 
 
 506. Difficult varieties of compound construction, 
 like some of the examples in the foregoing paragraph, 
 are often avoided, as in adjectives ( 472.) : 
 
 1. By introducing one noun and a pronoun agreeing 
 with it, and subjoining the others ; thus, 
 
 Abelungu ba fika nezimwele namahasi ; 
 
 The white men (they) came, and wagons and horses. 
 
 2 M
 
 306 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS ', PERSONAL. 
 
 Si te si lika a be se e mukile amahasi nezinkomo ; 
 
 When we arrived (they) the horses and cattle had already gone. 
 
 Kvva ti Udingane vva puma kwoku'lwa \va hamba 
 ebusuku, namabuto ake, nezinkomo, nabantu bonke ; 
 
 And Dingane went out in the evening and traveled all night, and 
 his soldiers, and cattle, and all the people. 
 
 Amagedza si ya vva dinga nembeu futi ; 
 
 We are in need of (them) picks and seed also. 
 
 Sa yi tenga ingubo nobu'lalu ; 
 
 We bought (it) a blanket and beads. 
 
 2. By making use of the general pronoun ku, which 
 may stand for a noun of any class, number, or person, 
 and for any number of nouns ; thus, 
 
 Abantu nezinkomo ku ya ku gu'lulwa inkosi kwonke ; 
 
 The people and cattle will all be removed by the chief. 
 
 Amatole nezimbuzi kwa bulawa izimpisi kwonke ; 
 
 The calves and goats were all killed by the wolves. 
 
 Ku ya ku buba abantu nezinkomo; 
 
 People and cattle must perish. 
 
 Amasi nesinkwa ngi ya ku tanda kwokubili ; 
 
 I like both amusi and bread. 
 
 Ku ngokwako umbuso namanTa nobukosi ; 
 
 It is thine the kingdom and power and glory. 
 
 3. By repeating the pronoun and varying its form ac- 
 cording to the class, number, and person, of the noun to 
 which it refers ; thus, 
 
 Umbuso u ngowako, namanTa a ngawako, nobukosi 
 bu ngobako ; 
 
 The kingdom it is thine, and the power it is thine, and the glory it 
 is thine. 
 
 SECT. 2. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 507. 1. The personal pronoun of the Isizulu is 
 used not only as a substitute for a noun, but also as a 
 complement to it ( 149). Its office as substitute is 
 really required only when the noun itself is omitted : 
 but as a complement, its office is equally important, 
 whether the noun be omitted or not ; for in the latter 
 capacity it serves to define the noun, to show its rela-
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS SUESTITUTIONAL. 307 
 
 tion to some other word, or else to show the relation of 
 some notional word, as the verb, to the speaker. 
 
 2. In its own form, the pronoun gives us, if not the 
 body, at least an image or a reflection of the incipient 
 of the noun for which it stands; and, in the simple form 
 used as the nominative, this pronominal reflection this 
 image of the noun amounts, in many respects, to the 
 same in the Isizulu, as verbal inflection in the English 
 and some other languages. (^ 501., 307.) 
 
 A. THE PRONOUN USED AS A SUBSTITUTE. 
 
 508. The Zulu pronoun used as a substitute for a 
 noun, or to denote personality, does not differ essentially 
 from the same class of words in the English and other 
 kindred tongues. 
 
 509. I. The pronoun may be used in its simple form 
 as the subject of a proposition ; and in either its simple 
 or its definitive form as a predicate. ( 397.) 
 
 1. As a subject, or nominative ; thus, ngi ya tanda, I 
 do love ; ba sebenza, they work ; si fikile, we have 
 arrived. 
 
 2. As a predicate: (1.) In the affirmative ( 31G., 
 Rem. 3.) 
 
 a. Singular ; thus, 
 
 Ku ngimi, it is I ; or i inina, it i I. 
 
 Ku nguwe, or u wena, it is thou. 
 
 Ku nguye, or u yena, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 Ku yilo, ku ngilo, or i lona, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 Ku yiyo, or i yona, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 Ku yiso, or i sona, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 Ku yiwo, or i wona, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 Ku yibo, or i bona, it is he, she, or it. 
 
 b. Plural ; thus, 
 
 Ku yiti, or i tina, it is we. 
 
 Ku yini, or i nina, it is ye. 
 
 Ku ngabo, or i bona, it is they. 
 
 Ku ngawo, ku yiwo, or i wona, it is they. 
 
 Ku yizo, or i zona, it is they. 
 
 Ku yiyo, or i yona, it is they.
 
 rM.)S SYNTAX. -PRONOUNS ; PERSONAL. 
 
 (2.) In the negative (^ 316., Rem. 4.)- 
 
 a. Singular; thus, 
 
 A ku ngimi, it is not I. 
 
 A ku nguye, a si nguye, a si ye, or a si yena, it is not he, she, 
 
 or it. 
 
 Ku nge ngimi, it not being I. 
 Ku nge siye, it not being he, she, or it. 
 
 b. Plural ; thus, 
 
 A ku so tina, it is not we. 
 
 Ku nge so tina, it not being we, &c. 
 
 ^ 510. II. The personal pronoun, as a substitute for 
 a noun, may be used as the object of either a verb, or of 
 a preposition. 
 
 1. In either its simple or the definitive form, as the 
 object of a verb ; thus, 
 
 ./Vg-t ba tanda, or ngi tanda bona, I love them; ba ngi tanda, or ba 
 tanda mina, they love me. 
 
 2. In either its conjunctive or its definitive form, as 
 the object of a preposition ; thus, 
 
 Ba buza kuye, or ku yena, they asked of him ; wa beka kubo, or ku 
 bona, he looked at them ; ngi ya sebenza ngayo, or nga yona, I work 
 with it. 
 
 511. III. 1. The personal pronoun may be used in 
 either its possessive or its definitive form as a substitute 
 for a noun in the genitive; thus, 
 
 Inkomo yami, or inkomo ka mina, my cow ; izwi labo, la bona, or li 
 ka bona, their word. 
 
 2. (a.) The possessive pronoun usually follows the 
 noun which it limits. But when prominence or em- 
 phasis is required, it is placed generally before, but 
 sometimes after the noun ; in which case, and also when 
 the limited noun is omitted, the inversion or omission is 
 indicated by introducing the initial element of the noun's 
 relative, a, e, or o; thus, 
 
 Owami umfana, my boy ; owami, mine ; owetu, or owa kiti umfana, our 
 boy ; owetu, or owa kiti, ours. 
 
 Elakn itole, thy calf; elako^ thine; elenu, or da kini, yurs.
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS SU BST1 TUTI ON A L. 309 
 
 Eyake inkoino, his cow ; eyake, his; eyabo, or eyakubo, theirs. 
 
 Abami ahantu, my people; abako, thine; abetu, or aba kiti, ours; 
 abenu, or aba kini, yours. 
 
 Jlicami amiiiole, my calves; a tea mi, mine; au-a kiti, ours. 
 
 (Indoda) chnjo ikmida, his (the man's) head; (amadoda] atrau-o ama- 
 kanda, their (the men's) heads. 
 
 Umuntu a nge zilonde ngokwake ukwenza ; 
 
 A man cannot keep himself by his own act. 
 
 EnTwini yesikutali inTala i ya lunguza, i Tule, i ye 
 kweyevila ; 
 
 Famine casts a wistful look at the home of the diligent, passes on, 
 and goes to the sluggard's. 
 
 Li ti (i'lozi), loku izinkemo ezami u zi piwe itnina ; 
 
 Says he (the ghost), since my own cows were given to you by myself. 
 
 Si ya funa uku zwa irflalo yenu ; na ti si ya vuma 
 uku ni tsela eyetu ; 
 
 We want to know your mode of life ; and we also are willing to 
 tell you ours. 
 
 E ni yi zwile in'lalo yetu, ma si zwe eyenu ; 
 
 Since ye have heard our manner of life, let us hear yours. 
 (Umpande) wa in nika elake Umbuiazi ; 
 
 He (Umpande) gave Umbuiazi his (ieice, country). 
 
 (b.) When this form of the possessive pronoun is 
 made the predicate of a proposition, the affirmative 
 usually takes the euphonic copula ng ( 444., Rem.) ; 
 thus, 
 
 Affirmative, ku ngokwami, it is mine; negative, a ku si ko okicaini, it 
 is not mine. 
 
 Affirmative, ku ngokwako, it is thine; negative, a ku si ko okicako, it 
 is not thine. 
 
 (Jnfcomo) i ngeyake (umuntu), it (the cow) is his (the person's); a t 
 siyo eyake, it is not his. 
 
 (Ilizwe) li ngelayo (iiikosi), it (the country) is his (the chief's); a silo 
 elayo, it is not his. 
 
 (Jlbanlu} ba ngabayo (inkosi), they are his; a 60 sibo abayo, they are 
 not his. 
 
 (Izinkomo) zi ngezabo (abantu), they are theirs; a sizo ezabo, they 
 are not theirs. 
 
 .Yi ngabami, ye are mine; o ni sibo abami, ye are not mine. 
 
 Ba ngabetu, they are ours ; a&a *i&o abetu, they are not ours. 
 
 Ba nomteto wokuba, inkosi i nga yi pati into ezweni 
 layo ; ku tiwa i nga yi pata i ba eyayo ndzalo nge- 
 zikati zonke ; 
 
 They have a law to the effect that, the chief must not use anything 
 in his own country; it is said if he uses it, it is his thus forever .
 
 310 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; PERSONAL. 
 
 Ngokuba i nga lu pata uto se ku ngolwayo ndzalo ; 
 
 For should he use a thing it would thus be his. 
 
 Nomuzi e ngi wakileyo ka siwo wami, ngo ka 'baba ; 
 
 The kraal which I have built is not mine, (but) it belongs to my 
 lather. 
 
 REM. The use of the possessive pronoun in its usual form, after 
 the noun, may be called the analytic genitive, and conveniently con- 
 sidered as equivalent to the Latin forms, met, tui ejus, nostrum, vestrum, 
 eorum, English, my, thy, his, its, your, their; while the use of it in the 
 form which it assumes before the noun, or without the noun, may be 
 called the inflective, and be considered as corresponding to the Latin 
 forms, meus, mea, meum; tuus, tua, tuum; suus, sua, suum; noster, nos- 
 tra, nostrum; vester, vcstra, vestrum, English, mine, thine, his, hers, 
 ours, yours, theirs. 
 
 512. IV. 1. The definitive form of the personal pro- 
 noun is used chiefly for contrast, emphasis, or precision ; 
 but sometimes as a kind of expletive, or for variety. 
 Like the noun, as subject of a verb, it always takes the 
 simple form of the pronoun as direct nominative ; but 
 as object of either a verb or a preposition, it may be 
 used either with or without the simple form ; thus, 
 
 Ma si ye 'ku funda, 'banTa, si be nokwazi tina, si nga 
 bi ndzenga abadala betu ; 
 
 Let us go and learn, fellows, let us know something, and not be like 
 our ancestors. 
 
 Wa ti, ngi bona amadala amanye a luletne, mina se 
 ngi kokoba ; 
 
 He said, I see other old men are strong, while I am weak. 
 
 Amanye amadala a luleme, mina ngi ya ngapi pansi 
 lapa na ? 
 
 Other old men are well off, but what am I coming to down here ? 
 
 Ni nen'lanzo nina aba Ta igwababa la semzini ; tina 
 si nge li Te ; 
 
 Ye are polluted (or have need of cleansing) ye who eat the crow of 
 other kraals (i.e., eat amasi away from home) ; we ourselves 
 cannot eat it. 
 
 O nina aba pansi, ama'lozi, nina obaba betu, nanso 
 pela inkomo yenu, si ni nikile yona ; 
 
 O ye who are below, ghosts, ye our ancestors, there, then, is your 
 cow, we have given it to you. 
 
 Inyanga i ti, ngi ya m pikela mina lowo ; inyanga 
 enye i tso yena, kodwa mina a ngi vumi ; 
 
 The doctor says, I myself stand up for this one ; another doctor 
 says it is he (who did the mischief), but I do not assent.
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS SUBST1 TUTION A L. 31 I 
 
 Uma se ku tso abaninizo ndzalo, po mina ngi se noku- 
 tini ua ? 
 
 Since then their owners say so, why what have I to sav r 
 
 Ma i kale pela inkomo yenu, i purnese okubi oku ki- 
 mina, ku zwakale pela ukuba inkomo yenu, e biziwe 
 inina, i si latswake ; 
 
 Let your cow bellow on, and bring out the evil which is in me; and so 
 let it be known that your cow, which has been demanded by you, 
 is now slaughtered accordingly. 
 
 Uma se ku bizwe ibona ndzalo loku aba ku bizayo, 
 ku nga be ku se nlaba nobani na ? 
 
 Since that which they demand was thus clearly demanded by them- 
 selves, how could any one still refuse ? 
 
 Sa fika Otugela ; amanzi ngi vv' esaba mina ; leyo 
 indoda ya yakile nga kona Otugela e'lanzeni, ya bi 
 w' azi yona amanzi ; 
 
 We arrived at the Tugela; I myself was afraid of the water; but 
 that man had built there at the Tugela in the bushy section, and 
 he himself knew the water. 
 
 Mile kakulu imisebenzi Yenkosi, i ngabafundisi yona ; 
 
 Beautiful indeed are the works of the Lord, they, they are teachers. 
 
 Ba ti, se si bambile elentulo tina ; 
 
 They said, we have already received the lizard's (message). 
 
 2. The definitive pronoun is sometimes used with the 
 reflective form of the verb to make out the reflective idea 
 with force and precision ; thus, wa zihambela yena, he 
 went for himself; ngi zitengela mina, I buy for myself. 
 
 3. The definitive is used also where two pronouns 
 occur under the regimen of one verb, that which denotes 
 a person being placed before the verb, while that which 
 denotes a thing follows the verb, the former in the simple 
 form, the latter in the definitive ; thus, wa ngi nika 
 yona, he gave it to me ; ngi m tselile loko, I have told 
 him that ; ba si fundisa zona, they teach us them. 
 
 REM. 1. Few if any good examples are to be found in the English 
 language, corresponding exactly to the use of the definitive pronoun in 
 the Isizulu; but such examples abound in the French, where mot, tot, 
 &c., are frequently used with je, tu, or with me, te, &c., like mina with 
 7igt, &c., in the foregoing examples; thus, 
 
 Moi seul j' eus le courage, I alone had the courage. 
 
 Jls I' appdleiit tin Iwnncte Iiomme, moi, je V appelle unfripon, they call 
 him an honest man, I call him a rogue. 
 
 Pourquni ne traraillericz tons pas? je trnvaille bien, moi, I work, why 
 should vou not ?
 
 3\2 SFNTAX. PRONOUNS; PERSONAL. 
 
 Me perdre, moi qui suis votre parent, ruin rne, who am your relation. 
 
 Moi, le parent du vaillant roi, je n' ai encore sacrifie que des traitres, I, 
 the relative of the valiant king, have hitherto sacrificed none but 
 traitors. 
 
 // ne pouvait le croire, lui qui se piquait d'une probite severe, he who 
 piqued himself on strict probity, could not believe it. 
 
 Moi Jean, * * * j* etuis, &c. Rev. i., 9. 
 
 Moi, Jesus, j' ai envoye, &.c. Rev. xxii., 16. 
 
 REM. 2. There are other points of analogy between the French 
 and Zulu languages in the use of pronouns : 
 
 (a.) When the pronoun accusative is placed before the verb the 
 simple forms ngi, ku, 8tc., are used in Zulu like me and te, &c., in 
 French; but when placed after the verb the definitive forms mina, 
 wena, &.c. , are used in Zulu like moi, toi, &.C., in French; thus, 
 
 // me connait, he knows me= ng' azi. 
 
 Je. te donnerai, I will give thee=ngv> ku pa. 
 
 Conduis moi par ta justice. Ps. v., 8. 
 
 Delivre moi de tons ceux qui mepoursuivent, et garantis moi. Ps. vii., 1. 
 
 (b.) The pronoun mina, trena, &c., are used instead of ngi, u, or ku, 
 &.C., like the French pronouns mot, toi, &c., instead of je, tu, Sec., 
 where they are employed by themselves, or without a verb, as in 
 answer to a question; thus, 
 
 Ku toliwe ngubani na 1 Mina. Who found it ? I. 
 
 Qui est arrive ce matin ? Moi. Who arrived this morning ? I. 
 
 513. V. The reflective, or compound personal pro- 
 noun is used to signify by, of, or through one's self; 
 thus, 
 
 UlwanTe lu yinto enkulu, e nge wehve ngumuntu nge- 
 zinyao zake ngokvvake ; 
 
 The ocean is a great thing, which cannot be crossed by a person on 
 foot by himself. 
 
 Si nga z' enza lezi 'zinto tina ngokwetu, uma si za- 
 mazama ; 
 
 We can do these things we of ourselves, if we try. 
 
 REM. For the simple reflective, signifying self as the object of a 
 verb, see Reflective form of the verb 193. 
 
 B. THE PRONOtN USED AS A COMPLEMENT. 
 
 514. REMARK. To introduce both the pronoun 
 and the word which it represents, as subject (or object) 
 of the same verb, in English, except in aposiopesis, is 
 not common ; hence, there is said to be a pleonasm in 
 the syntax of the pronoun, in such examples as the fol- 
 lowing : my trees they are planted; the king he is just;
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS COMPLEMENTAL. 
 
 the men they were there, &c. ; for, in English, the in- 
 flection of the verb fare, ts, were, &c.,) together with 
 the laws of collocation render the use of the pronouns 
 (they, he, &c.,) superfluous, as complemental, or rela- 
 tional words. Such, however, is not the case in Isizuiu. 
 Here, all the relations of the verb to the noun, and to 
 the speaker, are denoted by these substitutional words, 
 the pronouns in some of their simplest forms. Hence, 
 there is philosophy and importance, and nothing really 
 pleonastic, in the rule given in the following paragraph, 
 and in other similar rules and usage where similar prin- 
 ciples are involved. (^ 501., 507.) 
 
 515. I. The simple form of the personal pronoun, 
 or some modification of it, is always necessary as a 
 direct nominative to the ver6, even where the noun also 
 appears as subject in the same proposition ; thus, 
 
 Abafazi ba lima ; 
 
 The women they dig. 
 
 Iminyaka i ya Tula ; 
 
 The years they pass. 
 
 Umoya uma u bandzwa lapa, si nga fa rnasinyane ; 
 
 The air if it be withdrawn here, we must die at once. 
 
 Unwabu Iwa fika nga semva ; 
 
 The chameleon it arrived afterwards. 
 
 REM. In rendering such examples as the above, and all others of 
 a similar character, into English, we, of course, in accordance with 
 English idiom, give only the noun a distinct rendering as nominative, 
 the essential part of the pronoun being expressed by the inflection of 
 the English verb. On the other hand, when we have only the pro- 
 noun in Isizuiu, the noun being omitted, in rendering this pronoun into 
 English, we are obliged to make it supply material, as it were, for 
 both pronoun and verbal inflection. 
 
 516. II. The simple form of the personal pronoun 
 is often used as the direct object of the verb, even where 
 the noun is introduced as object of the same. The place 
 of the simple pronoun, as object, is directly before the 
 principal verb ; its place as subject, or nominative, is 
 before both the object and the anxiliary ; thus, 
 
 Abantu ba ya li tanda ilizwe la kubo ; 
 
 The people they do it love the country of th^ir friend?.
 
 314 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; PERSONAL. 
 
 Abantu ba 1* amkela izwi; 
 
 The people they it received the word, 
 
 517. The use of this, the simple form of the per- 
 sonal pronoun, in addition to its noun, as object of the 
 same verb, obtains : 
 
 1. Where the arrangement of words in a proposition 
 deviates from what is called the natural order of the 
 leading parts, separating the object from the verb on 
 which it depends; and especially, where the object is 
 introduced first ; thus, 
 
 Wa honeni, abantu nonke, amanTa ka'Tino o pezulu; 
 
 It behold ye, all people, the strength of God. 
 
 Kwa ti ngomsurnbuluko induna umkumbu ya wu son- 
 
 deza osebeni ; 
 It came to pass on Monday the captain the ship he it brought near 
 
 to shore. 
 
 Inyama ba yi ngenise enTwini ; 
 
 The meat they it carried into the house. 
 
 Ycbo, nati ubnni a si m azi, ukuti u ya takata ndze ; 
 
 Yes, we too who (he is) we know him not, that he is practicing evil, 
 i.e., we know not who it is that does the mischief. 
 
 Udaba ba lu kuluma ba lu lede ngalo leli 'langa; 
 
 The news they discuss it and finish it the same day. 
 Wa ti, umbila si wu limapi na ? 
 He said, maize where do we grow it ? 
 
 2. Where it is required to specify and define the noun, 
 by pointing it out as one before mentioned, or already 
 known from the circumstances, or as one that is to be 
 further specified by a relative or otherwise, corres- 
 ponding, in a great measure, to the definite article (the) 
 in English, German, Greek, and Hebrew : 
 
 (a.) Specifying the noun as one before mentioned; 
 thus, 
 
 Ba tenga umkumbu. * Ndzalo ba wu lungisa um- 
 kumbu ; 
 
 They bought a ship. *' And so they put the ship in order. 
 
 Ba wu panyeka indvyangu yawo. * Wa ti lapo u 
 
 suse elwanTe ba yi kumula indwangu ; 
 They hung its cloth (sails) upon it. * And when it had put to 
 
 sea, they unfurled the cloth.
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS COMPLEMENTAL. 315 
 
 Ya bema ugwai ; i si m ledile ugwai ; 
 
 He snuffed snuff f and when he had finished the snuff. 
 
 (b.) As already known by the connection, by mutual 
 understanding, or by general notoriety ; thus, 
 
 Kwa tunyvva intulo uku ti, abantu ma ba fe. Abantn 
 ba P amkela izwi ; 
 
 There was sent a lizard to say, let the people die. The people 
 received the message. 
 
 I m nukake umuntu pakati kwabo ; 
 
 He thus smells out the man among them. 
 
 (c.) As one to be further defined, as by a relative and 
 its clause, by a genitive, or otherwise ; thus, 
 
 Tina esi nokwazi, ma si m dumise Uyehova o pezulu 
 ezulwini ; 
 
 We who have knowledge, let us worship the Lord who is above in 
 heaven. 
 
 Ba yi mbe inTela i lunge ; 
 
 They dig the road so that it may be straight. 
 
 Abanye abantu, ba kweminye irnizi, ka ba vva Ti amasi 
 
 emizi ; 
 Some people, at other kraals (i.e., at the kraals of other people), do 
 
 not eat the amasi of the kraals. 
 Ba ya s' azi isikati soku yi pumesa (impi) ; 
 They know the time for sending out an army. 
 
 REM. The noun which is thus defined (as in a., &., and c., abore), 
 is often more emphatically marked, by its taking also the demonstrative 
 pronoun ; thus, ukuba ba zi zu-e lezo 'zindaba, and when they heard 
 that news; abanye a ba z' azi kakidu lezi 'sine/after, some are not well 
 acquainted with these subjects ; si nga z* enza lezi 'zinto, we can do 
 these things. 
 
 3. Where the name of a class is used collectively to 
 denote all the individuals under it ; thus, 
 
 Ba yi dumisa inyoka; 
 
 They worship the snake. 
 
 Kodwa na kaloku iimenye yabantu ba yi zonda intulo ; 
 
 But even now some of the people hate the lizard. 
 
 4. With vowel verbs, especially the verb ctzi, in order 
 to give prominence to the preceding word, and greater 
 fullness to the phrase ; thus,
 
 31G SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; PERSONAL. 
 
 Leyo inyanga i bi Jamba amanga, a i kwazi uku bula ; 
 
 That doctor has been fahrioating lies, he does not know how to 
 consult the oracle. 
 
 A ku z' azi izitiyo za ngomso ; 
 
 You know not the obstacles of the morrow. 
 
 II nga z' esabi izitukutuku ; 
 
 Don't be afraid of perspiration. 
 
 518. III. The conjunctive form of the personal 
 pronoun is sometimes used as the direct object of a 
 preposition, even when the noun is introduced, imme- 
 diately after, as object of the same. The conjunctive 
 pronoun is thus used with the noun : 
 
 1. Where it is required to specify and define the noun 
 as one before mentioned, or as already known, or as 
 one that is to be further specified, in which cases the 
 pronoun may be rendered by the, (like the simple form 
 mentioned above, 517., 2.) ; thus, 
 
 Ba ya Jala uku bona ngalo ilizwi li ka 'Tino, eli ba 
 kanyisayo ; 
 
 They are beginning to see by means of the word of God, which en- 
 lightens them. 
 
 Uma u nawo umbila wako o funisa ngawo, u nga wu 
 twala u zise kuwo lo 'muzi, esi 'lezi kuwo ; 
 
 If you have that maize of yours which you wish to sell, you may 
 
 bring and place it at this kraal, at which we are staying. 
 Wa ti, a ngi nabo abantu bokuzisa umbila lapa ; 
 He said, I have not the people for bringing maize here. 
 
 2. Where there is a deviation from the natural order 
 of construction ; < and also where the adjective onke 
 comes under the force of the preposition, either alone as 
 a noun, or with a noun following ; thus, 
 
 Ba ti, wo ! umbila si nawo na ] 
 
 They said, oh ! maize have we it ? 
 
 Umsebenzi ka 'Tiuo u ya bonakala kubo bonke aba 
 in tandayo ; 
 
 The work of God is manifest to all who love him. 
 
 3. When the noun is introduced as a kind of ex- 
 pletive, or an after-thought, as though the speaker had 
 at first designed to use only the pronoun, but concluded 
 to add the noun ; thus,
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS COMPLEME NT A L. -U7 
 
 In'lanla yinto enkulu. * Nabantu b' azisiwe Umsin- 
 disi wabo ngayo in'lan'la ; 
 
 Grace is a great thing. * And people are made acquainted with 
 thoir Savior by it grace. 
 
 
 
 4. When it is required to give prominence to the 
 noun, or to bring it formally and deliberately before the 
 mind ; thus, 
 
 Ngi baliie ngaso isineke ; 
 
 I have written respecting enterprise. 
 
 519. IV. The possessive form of the personal pro- 
 noun is sometimes used along with the noun for which 
 it stands, both being governed, the pronoun directly, the 
 noun indirectly, by the same word. This obtains 
 
 1. Where the adjective onke precedes the noun, or is 
 used itself as a noun ; thus, 
 
 Emizini yabo bonke abantu, at the kraals of all the people. 
 
 2. Where the noun is added as a kind of expletive, or 
 by an after-thought ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zayo inkosi, his the chief's cattle. 
 
 REM. The use of both (possessive) pronoun and noun, except with 
 onke, is not common among ready earnest speakers; neither is it to be 
 recommended. The same remark holds, only with less force, in respect 
 to the conjunctive ^ 518., 3. 
 
 520. V. The definitive form of the personal pro- 
 noun is occasionally used with the noun, sometimes 
 after the same manner as other forms already noticed in 
 the foregoing paragraphs, sometimes for emphasis, and 
 sometimes in a manner that would seem to us pleonastic ; 
 thus, 
 
 Ba butana abantu ku yona inyanga ; 
 
 The people assembled (and went) to that doctor (i.e., to him the 
 doctor). 
 
 I bulile ndze yona inyanga ; 
 
 That doctor (or he the doctor) merely tried to consult the oracle. 
 
 Na ku yena Utiuo ; 
 
 And against God himself. 
 
 U se kuleka ku wona ama'lozi ; 
 
 He now prays to them the shades
 
 318 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS ; RELATIVE. 
 
 Uma se ku bizwa ibona ndzalo abaniniko ; 
 
 Since it is thus clearly demanded by them the owners of it. 
 
 SECT. 3. Relative Pronouns. 
 
 521. REMARK. The etymology and syntax of the 
 relative pronoun are so interwoven, that many of the 
 principles, pertaining to the latter, have been noticed in 
 the previous discussion upon its etymological forms. 
 (^ 170 175.) But the peculiar, complicated character 
 of this part of the language requires, in this place, a 
 further development and illustration of those principles, 
 together with a notice of others, of a more purely syntac- 
 tical character. 
 
 522. 1. The relative, referring to a noun in one 
 clause of a sentence, connects it with another, in which 
 something further is stated concerning it. The relative 
 is consequently employed, not only as an equivalent to 
 the noun or pronoun which it represents, but also to con- 
 nect propositions. The clause, or sentence, containing 
 the antecedent, is called the primary, or principal ; while 
 that in which the relative is found, is called the secondary, 
 attributive, or accessory. 
 
 2. A relative and its clause may sometimes be reckoned 
 together as constituting either the subject or the object 
 of a (leading) proposition. Hence, by a kind of con- 
 densed construction, the two clauses are often brought 
 well nigh into one, the relative being both subject or 
 object of the primary clause, and subject or object of 
 the secondary ; in which c.ise the relative answers nearly 
 to the English what, that which, he who, &,c., supplying 
 the place of both antecedent and relative ; thus, 
 
 I ya ku batswa e tsotsayo ; 
 
 The lurking shall be caught. 
 
 Si ya ba siza aha zisizayo ; 
 
 We help (those) who help themselves. 
 
 Eza fika kulala zi kulupele zonke ; 
 
 What (cattle) arrived first are all fat. 
 
 O wa ba tengayo u ya ku b' azisa lezi Vinto ; 
 
 Who bought them will make them know these things.
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE. 319 
 
 O zingelayo UsipariTe ; 
 
 Who hunts is Usipanhle. 
 
 Kodwa o gulayo Usibekana ; 
 
 Who is sick is Usibekana. 
 
 be harnba nemwele owa sEnanda ; 
 
 Who went with a wagon is he of Inunda. 
 
 Ma si londoloze o si nako ; 
 
 Let us preserve what we have. 
 
 A ku si sizi uku sebeiiZM, tuna si ya lita e si ku zuzayo; 
 
 Working does not help us, if we waste what we obtain. 
 
 Ini ukubci a nga be e sa s' azi na ? a si pe e si ku 
 bizayo na ? 
 
 Why (is it) that he does not still recognize us, and give us what we 
 
 demand ? 
 
 Se si nikile pela e nu ku funayo ; 
 Now then we have already granted what ye require. 
 
 REM. When the relative offers to the mind a vague indefinite idea, 
 and has no antecedent, as in examples like the foregoing, it may be 
 said to be used absolutely. Nor is this use of the relative peculiar to 
 the Isizulu, but common in French, Latin, and other tongues ; thus, 
 
 Qni rent purler sur tout, sonvent parle an husard, who wishes to speak 
 on every subject, speaks often at random. 
 
 Qui transtulit sustiiiet, (he) who transplanted (still) sustains. 
 
 523. The relative agrees with its antecedent in 
 respect to class, and number ; and, to some extent, in 
 respect to person. 
 
 I. In respect to class, and number; thus, 
 
 Si zwe uku ti, zi kona izintaba emazweni amanye, 
 ezi vut' umlilo omkulu, o mibilikisa amatse, a pu- 
 purnele nga pnnTe, a goboze ndzeng* arnanzi ; 
 
 We hear it said, there are mountains in some countries, which burn 
 with a great fire, which melts rocks, which run over outside, and 
 run down like water. 
 
 Si nga yazi inTela e ya ezulwini ; 
 
 We may know the way which goes to heaven. 
 
 II. In respect to person, first, second, and third, both 
 singular and plural. Most of these have their own spe- 
 cific forms ; but sometimes the first and second persons 
 take the form of the third person, first class : 
 
 1. Singular (a. ) First person ; thus, 
 
 Mina ongi hambayo, or o hambayo ; 
 
 1 who go.
 
 320 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; RELATIVE. 
 
 Kodwa imi ngedwa, engi za ku wela ngi ye lapo ; 
 
 But it is I alone, who am to pass over and go there. 
 
 Wa ngi nika miria iniwadi o ngumniniyo wesibili ; 
 
 He gave the book to me who am the second owner. 
 
 I ya ku biza ku mina min* e ngi c lezi kona ; 
 
 He will look to me who am living on the spot. 
 
 (b.) Second person ; thus, 
 
 Wena o hambayo ; 
 
 Thou who goest. 
 
 Wena ovva fika izolo ; 
 
 Thou who didst arrive yesterday. 
 
 (c.) Third person ; thus, 
 Yena o zondayo u ya zizonda ; 
 
 He who hates hates himself. 
 
 Usatani o ndzengebubesi eli boTayo, e hamba ndzalo, 
 e funa a nga m bubisayo ; 
 
 Satan, who, like a roaring lion, goeth about, seeking whom he may 
 devour. 
 
 I ya ku biza ku yena o 'lezi ezweni layo ; 
 
 He will demand (money) of him who lives on his farm. 
 
 Ku ngumoya o pepeta imiti ; 
 
 It is the wind which blows the trees. 
 
 2. Plural (a.) First person; thus, 
 Tina esi hambayo, or tina aba hambayo ; 
 
 We who go. 
 
 Tina esi nokvvazi, ma si m dumise Uyehova o pezulu 
 ezulwini ; 
 
 We who have knowledge, let us worship the Lord who is above in 
 heaven. 
 
 Wo ! lukulu utando lu ka 'Tiuo, olu pezu kwetu tina 
 aba m c labayo ; 
 
 Oh, how great is the love of God, which is over us who offend him ! 
 Inkosi ya si notsa tina aba be 'lezi kona (or tina esa 
 
 be si c lezi kona) ; 
 The chief removed us who were living there. 
 
 I ya ku biza na ku tina tin' esi c lezi ezweni layo ; 
 
 He will demand (money) also of us who live on his land. 
 
 (b.) Second person ; thus, 
 
 Nina eni hambayo, or nina aba hambayo ; 
 
 Ye who go.
 
 ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 321 
 
 Ni zwe nina aba kiti eni ngi sindisileyo ; 
 Hear ye our (gods) who have saved me. 
 
 Nina ab' onileyo kunye ni nga be ni s' enze ndzalo ; 
 
 Ye who have done wrong once do so no more. 
 
 Si ya ku funda kinina nin' eni c lezi kona kwiti ; 
 
 We will learn from you who live here with us. 
 
 (c.) Third person; thus, 
 
 Ba kona abafana aba ya ku funda ; 
 
 Here are boys who are going to learn. 
 
 Umsebenzi ka 'Tino u ya bonakala kubo bonke aba m 
 tandayo, nabo aba m zondayo ba ya wu bona nabo ; 
 
 The work of God is manifest to all those who love him, and those 
 who hate him see it also. 
 
 524. Often the basis of the relative, and sometimes 
 its complement, is attracted or turned aside from its 
 natural and most exact agreement with the noun to 
 which it refers. This occurs occasionally in all forms, 
 but most frequently in the relative for the third person, 
 singular and plural, first class, o and aba; and may, for 
 the most part, and in some measure, be referred to one 
 or the other of the following causes : 
 
 1. The very incidental or independent character of the 
 relative clause, when e takes the place of o or a; thus, 
 
 Bonke e ngi ba tandayo ; 
 
 All whom I love. 
 
 Ya ngi biza mina e nga be ngi c lezi kona ; 
 
 He called me who was (or while I was) sitting there. 
 
 Umfana e ngi mu fundisileyo ; 
 
 The boy whom I have taught. 
 
 Umuntu e nga m bizayo ; 
 
 The person whom I called. 
 
 2. The potential or subjunctive character of the clause, 
 when a often takes the place of o or e; thus, 
 
 Usatani, e funa a nga m bubisayo ; 
 
 Satan, seeking whom he may devour. ( 523., II., 1., c.) 
 
 Yena u ngumsindisi umuntu a nga zuza ukupila kuye; 
 
 He is the Savior from whom a man may receive life. 
 
 3. The influence of the subsequent or some other 
 word ; thus, 
 
 2 o
 
 322 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS ; RELATIVE. 
 
 Umuntu e ngi bonile induna yake ; 
 
 The person whose captain I saw. 
 Indaba o be u ngi tsela yona ; 
 The story thou wast telling me. 
 Into o ya ku sizwa ngayo ; 
 
 A thing by which thou wilt be aided. 
 
 Se si nikile pela e nu ku funayo (e nu ku=o ni uku); 
 
 So then we have given what you want. 
 
 Oku c le pela e nu ku bizileyo ; 
 
 What you have required is good of course. 
 
 Umuti wenu e nu funayo (e nu=o ni u) ; 
 
 Your medicine which you want. 
 
 Nanku umbila e su funayo (e su^br o si u, or o si wu) ; 
 
 Here is the maize which we require. 
 
 Kwa be ku yimwadi ka 'Tilio, o lona 'luto Iwa sinda 
 naye emkundzini ; 
 
 It was the book of God, which was the only thing that escaped with 
 him from the ship, i.e., which was the only thing, except his own 
 life, which was saved from the wreck. 
 
 525. It has been remarked ( 170., 171.), that the 
 relative pronoun consists of two parts, the relative par- 
 ticle a, e, or o, and the personal pronoun, or the basis 
 and its complement. The complemental, or pronominal 
 part is subject to all the varieties of form, and kinds of 
 usage, which pertain to the personal pronoun. In the 
 nominative, the basis and its complement are usually 
 joined in one word ; but in all the oblique cases they 
 are separated, the relative portion always standing, as in 
 the nominative, at the head or beginning of the accessory 
 clause, while the pronominal portion comes in afterwards, 
 according to its form, as simple, conjunctive, possessive, 
 or definitive, and according to its use, as the object of a 
 verb, or of a preposition. 
 
 REM. /The Isizulu is not the only language in which the relative 
 takes the personal pronoun as a complement to make out a complete 
 relative pronoun ; thus, in the Arabic, they say : " Man who he is 
 weak, has need of help from God;" " the man whom I see him, is one 
 of my friends;" " the man whom I labor for him does not generously 
 requite my pains." 
 
 526. I. As the subject of the accessory clause, the rela- 
 tive pronoun, both basis and complement, stands together 
 in its integrity at the head of the accessory clause ; thus,
 
 RELATIVES IN THE ACCUSATIVE. 323 
 
 Umdabuko vvabantu aba c lezi kona ; 
 
 The custom of the people who live there. 
 
 Si zwile uku c lala kwezizvve ezi nge nayo iniwadi ka 
 'Tiuo; 
 
 We have heard the condition of tribes which have not the word of 
 God. 
 
 527. II. As an object, the basis of the relative pro- 
 noun stands at the head of the accessory clause, while 
 the complement takes its place before or after the verb, 
 or after a preposition, in the same manner as the personal 
 pronoun used as an accusative. ( 510.) 
 
 1. (a.) When the relative is an object of an active 
 transitive verb, and the complement consists of the simple 
 form of the personal pronoun, that complement stands 
 just before the principal verb ; thus, 
 
 Nemali yabo, e ba be be yi pete, ya salela emanzini ; 
 
 And their money, which they had brought, remained in the water. 
 Kodwa uto e ngi Ivvaziyo, ng' azi izingubo netole ; 
 
 But the thing which I know, I know blankets and a calf. 
 
 Sa ti lapo si balekayo, sa teleka pezu kwenye impi, e 
 be si nga yi boni ; 
 
 And as we were fleeing, we stumbled upon another commando, of 
 which we were ignorant, literally, which we had not it seen. 
 
 Zi kona izinto ezweni, e si nga zanga si zi bone ; 
 
 There are things in the world, which we have never (them) seen. 
 
 2. (b.) The relative, being the object of a verb, often 
 takes the definitive form of the personal pronoun as 
 complement, either for emphasis and precision, or else 
 because the place of the simple form is pre-occupied by 
 another pronoun, as when the verb takes two accusa- 
 tives ; in which cases the definitive, of course, follows 
 the verb ; thus, 
 
 Ngi ya bonga kakulu ngawo umiako o wa ngi pa wona; 
 
 I thank you much for the clay which you gave me (it). 
 
 Indaba o be ngi tsela yona ; 
 
 The story which you were telling (it to) me. 
 
 3. The relative used as the object of a preposition 
 takes either the conjunctive or the definitive form of the 
 personal pronoun as complement :
 
 NTAX. PRONOUNS; RELATIVE. 
 
 (a.) The conjunctive as complement ; thus, 
 Ubaba wa be kona, lo e ngi naye kaloku ndzena 
 
 My father was there, the same with whom I am still living. 
 
 Umkumbu e la 11 kuwo, wa gujulwa irflambi ; 
 
 The boat in which he was, was capsized by a wave. 
 
 A ke ni beke lapa uburnnyama e si vela kubo, obi. 
 barnba abetu, o be bu si bambile nati ; 
 
 Come ye see here the darkness out of which we come, which still 
 holds our kindred, which (formerly) held us also. 
 
 Umbila wako o funisa ngawo ; 
 
 Your maize with which you wish to trade, or for which you want 
 pay. 
 
 Nga m bamba e ngi hamba naye ; 
 
 I caught hold of him with whom I went. 
 
 Labo o ku nga tsiwongo 'luto ngabo kuye ba ya ku 
 
 bona ; 
 
 Those of whom nothing was said to him shall see. 
 Labo e wa be e nge zwanga 'luto ngabo ; 
 Those of whom he bad heard nothing. 
 
 Umuntu o kwa sumayela indodana yake ngaye ; 
 
 The person of whom his son spoke. 
 
 Ngesikati e ba ya ku fika ngaso abantu ; 
 
 By the time at which the people will come. 
 
 (b.) The definitive as complement ; thus, 
 Lowo urnuzi e be ngi ku wona ; 
 
 That kraal at which I was. 
 
 U tandiwe ngabo 'azeka ku bona ; 
 
 He i beloved by those to whom he is known. 
 
 528. III. The relative denoting possession is ex- 
 pressed, sometimes by the use of the relative, both basis 
 and complement, before the noun possessed ; sometimes 
 by the relative (basis) before the noun, and the possessive 
 (complement) after it ; and sometimes by the use of the 
 possessive pronoun alone : 
 
 1. Possession denoted by the relative before the noun, 
 or at the head of the clause ; thus, 
 
 Urnuntu o 'nkomo ni ya ku zi bona ; 
 
 The person whose cattle you will see. 
 
 Sa Tula ku 'rnlungu o 'nkomo ziningi ; 
 
 We passed by the white man whose cattle are many. 
 
 2. Possession denoted by the relative before the noun,
 
 RELATIVES IN THE GENITIVE. 
 
 or at the head of the clause, and the possessive after the 
 noun ; thus, 
 
 Umuntu o 'nkomo zake zi sEnanda a mu ko yena ekaya, 
 u kwa Zulu ; 
 
 The person whose cattle are at Inanda is not at home himself, he is 
 
 in Zululand. 
 Inkosi e ngi 'lezi ebusvveni bayo i ya ngi pata ka'le ; 
 
 The chief in whose presence I live is treating me well. 
 
 Umuntu e ngi funa inkabi yake ; 
 
 The person whose ox I want. 
 Inkosi o wazi abantu bayo ; 
 
 The chief whose people thou knowest. 
 
 Umlungu e ni yizinieku zake ; 
 
 The white man whose servants ye are. 
 
 Na ku yena Utino, o 'zimemezelo zake si z' apula ; 
 And against God himself, whose commands we break. 
 Uyehova o ngi ngowake, o ngi m konzayo ; 
 The Lord whose I am, and whom I serve. 
 
 3. Possession denoted by the use of the possessive 
 pronoun alone (the relative being omitted) ; thus, 
 
 Indoda igama layo li ngUmbopa ; 
 
 A man whose name is Umbopa. 
 
 529. The basis, or incipient portion of the relative 
 pronoun is sometimes omitted, the relative being under- 
 stood, or denoted by the personal pronoun alone ; thus, 
 
 Ngi saba ngaye, ngokuba umuntu ka si 'langani naye ; 
 
 I am afraid of him, because (he is) a person with whom we are not 
 on good terms, literally, a person we are not on good terms 
 with him. 
 
 RF.M. 1. Instead of supposing an omission of the relative, in some 
 cases it may be more exact and proper to speak of the clause as in- 
 cidental, or absolute. Thus, in the closing example, in the last para- 
 graph (^528., 3.), instead of saying <c a man whose name isUmbopa," 
 it may be more proper to say " a man his name (being) Umbopa ;" 
 such emphatic brevity of expression and encasement of an incidental 
 clause being in accordance with the genius of the language. (See 
 ^429., 221., 4., Rem. 1.) 
 
 REM. 2. Where the relative is in the oblique case, its basis stand- 
 ing at the head of the clause, is often absorbed and lost in the subject 
 of the verb ; and sometimes the subject is absorbed and lost in the 
 relative ; thus, 
 
 Yena u ngUmsindisi umuntu a nga zuza ukupila kuye; 
 He is the Savior from whom a man may obtain life.
 
 326 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS ; DEMONSTRATIVE. 
 
 I 
 
 A ku ng' azisanga yena o za ku m tuma nami ; 
 
 Thou hast not let me know him whom thou wilt send with me. 
 
 Utnuntu o m bonileyo ; 
 
 The person whom thou hast seen. 
 Umuti o wa wu gaulayo ; 
 The tree which thou didst cut down. 
 
 Into o ya ku sizwa ngayo ; 
 
 A thing by which thou wilt be aided. 
 
 530. The verbal predicate of a relative clause often 
 takes the suffix yo or fco, especially where it is used as 
 an adjective ; or as a noun ; or in any way independent 
 of grammatical construction, as in address, in titles or 
 headings, and signatures ; or to distinguish the affirma- 
 tive and negative forms of the verb ; and sometimes as 
 an expletive ; thus, 
 
 Umkumbu wa wu nenduna e lungileyo ; 
 
 The ship had a good captain. 
 
 Abalungileyo ba ya ku sindiswa ; 
 
 The good shall be saved. 
 
 Abantu aba nga fundiyo aba sebenzi kakulu ; 
 
 People who do not learn do not work much. 
 
 U'lobo Iwenu olu tandayo ; 
 
 Your affectionate kindred. 
 
 Inyanga i m tsela amazwi a wa labangayo ; 
 
 The doctor tells him words which he has in his mind. 
 
 SECT. 4. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 531. The .demonstrative pronoun combines, in a 
 great measure, the properties of a personal pronoun and 
 a definite article. It is used to direct attention to the 
 noun to which it belongs, and thereby render it definite. 
 Like other pronouns, it agrees with the noun in respect 
 to class and number ; but is used to represent nouns 
 of the third person only, since it is always employed by 
 the first person to point out some object to the second ; 
 thus, 
 
 Lo 'muntu, this person; leso 'sizwe, that tribe; lowaya umuti, that 
 tree yonder; izizwe lezi, these tribes. 
 
 532. The demonstratives denoting this and these,
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 327 
 
 that and those, that and those yonder, according to the 
 class and number of their noun, are given in the table 
 of demonstrative pronouns ( 179.), the use of which 
 may be further illustrated by the following examples : 
 
 1. This and these; thus, 
 
 Se u sakazwa umswani ezinTwini za lo 'muntu ; 
 Already are the contents of the cow's stomach strewn upon the 
 houses of this man. 
 
 Ndzalo nami ngi ya tanda izindaba za le 'niwadi ya le 
 'nyanga ; 
 
 So I also like the news of this paper of this month. 
 
 Ekulaleni, lapa, izinto zabantu zi be zi zi'lalela zona, 
 
 na semaiekeni, umninizo a nga bi na 'valo 'luto ; 
 
 kodvva nga lolu 'suku se ku ngokunye ; 
 
 At first, here, people's things were accustomed to stop by them- 
 selves, even in the yards, the owner thereof having no fear of 
 anything ; but at this day it is otherwise. 
 
 2. That and those; thus, 
 
 Kwa ti ngensuku eza landela lezo ; 
 
 It came to pass on a day which succeeded those. 
 
 Kwa ba isikumbuzo esinye si ka 'Yehova leso ; 
 
 That was another memorial of the Lord. 
 
 (Inyanga) i tize, uyise i'lozi li biza inkomo leyo e tize, 
 e seme'lweni na ku wena ; 
 
 He (the doctor) says, the paternal shade requires that particular 
 cow, which is also highly esteemed by you. 
 
 Kwa ti nga semva kwa linywake, a ze a c Hwa lawo 
 'mabele ; 
 
 It came to pass afterwards they planted again, and then that corn 
 was consumed. 
 
 3. That and those yonder; thus, 
 
 (Inyanga) i si ti, unyoko (ilozi) u ti, u kwenzelani 
 lokuya na kuye na ? 
 
 He (the doctor) says, thy maternal shade inquires, why do you do 
 that yonder even to her ? 
 
 REM. In respect to the place of the demonstrative pronoun, great 
 latitude is allowed, as may be seen in the foregoing examples. 
 
 533. The demonstrative is sometimes used to signify 
 each; sometimes, the same; and sometimes, he, she, they, 
 &c., as an antecedent to a relative.
 
 328 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 1. Each; thus, 
 
 Se ngi za kti ni nika izwe lenu, ku be ngulowo a za- 
 kele ka'le ; 
 
 I am now about to give you your own district, that each may set up 
 happily for himself. 
 
 Kwa be ku kona abafundisi etuneni ; kwa ba wulowo 
 wa kuluma ka'le kumi ; 
 
 There were (several) ministers at the grave; and each spoke kindly 
 to me. 
 
 2. Same; thus, 
 
 Udaba ba lu kuluma ba lu jede ngalo leli 'langa ; 
 
 They discuss a subject and finish it by the same sun on the same 
 day. 
 
 3. He, she, they, &c., when followed by a relative 
 pronoun ; thus, 
 
 U tike lo o gulayo, thus saith he who is sick. 
 
 SECT. 5. Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 534. The interrogative ubani? who? is applied to 
 persons; ni? what? mostly to things, but sometimes to 
 persons ; and pi ? who ? or which ? to both persons and 
 things. 
 
 535. The construction of the interrogative ubani 
 is, for the most part, the same as that of a proper noun, 
 the name of a person, (see 182.) ; thus, 
 
 Ngubani o sibukule umpongolo na ? 
 
 Who has uncovered the box ? 
 
 Ngi ya ku kokelwa ngubani na ? 
 
 By whom shall I be paid ? 
 
 Se be ti abantu, u bu tselwe obani na ? 
 
 Then the people say, by whom were you told ? 
 
 Izinkomo zi ka 'bani na ? 
 
 Whose cattle are they ? 
 
 REM. This pronoun is sometimes used in an indefinite manner, 
 signifying, some one, any one, whosoever; thus, pendula futi wena 'bani, 
 reply thou also Mr. So-and-so; ba sifundisaukuba Unhulvnhulu wubani, 
 they teach us who Unkulunkulu is.
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 329 
 
 536. When the interrogatives ni and pi are applied 
 to nouns, they generally take a prefix in the same manner 
 as adjectives (see ISO., 181., 183.) ; thus, 
 
 Urnuntu muni lowo o hambayo na ? 
 
 What person is that passing along ? 
 Ni ya funa umuntu omupi na ? 
 Which person do you want ? 
 
 Umupi wa laba 'bantvvana wa ke vva bu bena ubu- 
 c lungu na ? 
 
 Which of these children ever saw pain ? 
 
 REM. The interrogatives ni and pi are sometimes used in an indi- 
 rect, indefinite manner; thus, 
 
 A ke ni tso si zvveke amazwi enyanga, ukuba i tizeni 
 na ? i bule enze ndzani na ? 
 
 Come tell us, let us hear the doctor's words, what he said, and how 
 he performed. 
 
 A s' azi o sa ku funayo, ukuba u se u funa okupi na ? 
 
 We do not know what you still want, whether you still want any 
 thing. 
 
 Ma si zvve eyenu (in'lalo), ukuba ni Tani na? ni funda 
 'ntoni na ? nokuba amakolwa a nga kanani na ? 
 
 Let us know your (estate), what you eat ? what you read ? and 
 how many believers there are ? 
 
 A s' azi uma w' apuka nga sipi isikati ; 
 
 We know not at what time it broke. 
 
 537. Used as the object of a verb, the general in- 
 terrogative ni? what? requires no prefix, being, itself 
 suffixed to the verb, upon which it has the effect to 
 carry the accent forward to the verb's final syllable 
 that which immediately precedes the pronoun ; thus, 
 
 I tizeni inyanga na ? 
 
 What says the doctor ? 
 
 (Inyanga) i ti, u ne'lozi, u bizwa uyise, u ti, u m tu- 
 keleni ngokwenza oku ndzeyana na ? 
 
 He (the doctor) says, he is possessed of a ghost, he is called by his 
 paternal shade, saying, why does he curse him by behaving 
 there in such a manner ? 
 
 Umuzi lo wakivve uwena, baba ; se ni vumelani pela 
 ukuba nu litse umuzi wenu na ? 
 
 This town was built by thee, father ; why, then, do you consent to 
 consume your own town ? 
 
 Po mina ngi se nokutini na ? 
 
 Why, now, what have I to say ? 
 
 2 P
 
 330 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS; INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 REM. This pronoun is sometimes suffixed to the noun which it 
 qualifies, in the same way as to the verb by which it is governed ; 
 thus, ni pete 'ntoni na 1 what thing do you bring ? 
 
 538. Used with the prefix i (=ini), or governed by 
 the preposition nga (=ngani), this pronoun is often 
 employed as an adverb, signifying ivhy ? whether 1 
 whether or not ? how ? thus, 
 
 Nina ka ni zwa ini ukuba i gidzime (inyanga) ngo- 
 nYlola na 1 
 
 Do ye not see that he (the doctor) ran according to the omen (i.e., 
 spoke the truth) ? 
 
 Ma si bone ngako, uma ku funwe ini na ukuba a sinde; 
 
 Let us see then, whether or not it is sought that he may recover. 
 
 Zi ti izituta za kubo, ini ukuba a nga si nakekeli na ? 
 Ka sa s j azi ngani na ? loku si m giinileyo ebu- 
 niinyaneni bake na ? 
 
 His ancestral shades say, why is it that he does not care for us ? 
 For what reason does he not still acknowledge us ? since we 
 have taken care of him from his infancy. 
 
 REM. This pronoun, with or without its prefix i (ini or ni), is some- 
 times used in a similar manner with other prepositions; thus, 
 
 Se ni ngi biza ndzengoneni na, loku ngi ti ngi ya 
 lungisa ndze mina ku nina na ? 
 
 Now, according to what (=why, or for what reason) do you call me 
 to account, since I think I am right (just) in my relation to you? 
 
 Ni ya ngi bizisa okwani na ? 
 
 Like to what do you call on me, i.e., why do you call me to 
 account ? 
 
 A ngi sa c lat$elelwa ndzengani na ? 
 
 I am still not slaughtered for like what, i.e., why is it that cattle are 
 not still offered to me as usual ? 
 
 539. The interrogative pi and ni are found in the 
 genitive, the former with, and the latter either with or 
 without, a prefix, under the regimen of the genitive a 
 and the preformative of the limited noun ; thus, 
 
 this 
 
 ge ya mupi wnuntu le 'ngubo na 1 whose blanket is this, or, t 
 blanket belongs to which person ? Umuti wani na 1 wood of what ? 
 what kind of wood is it what is it good for ? Induku ya muni yena 
 umuntu na ? a club of what (kind of) person (is this) ? 
 
 NOTE. For other remarks on the forms and uses of the interro- 
 gative pronouns, see ^ 180 183.
 
 VERBAL FORMS. 3.3 1 
 
 CHAPTER T. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 SECT. 1. Agreement, Combination, and Expansion. 
 
 540. 1. The Zulu verb has no particular form, or 
 inflection, of its own, to denote number and person. As 
 Sir John Stoddart says, in his Universal Grammar : 
 
 " The form of the verb may or may not be altered on this account. 
 We may say in Latin amo, amamus, amaiis, a man/, or in English " I 
 love," " we love," " ye love," " they love ;" but it is manifest that 
 though in the examples cited from the latter language the form remains 
 unchanged, the signification is alike varied in both languages. The 
 difference of person, therefore, in point of form, is merely accidental 
 to the verb; it peculiarly belongs to the pronoun, and has been suffi- 
 ciently explained in treating of that part of speech." 
 
 The attributing of these properties or distinctions 
 number and person to the verb in any language, as 
 Brande remarks, is " logically anomalous." 
 
 "Most languages," as he further remarks, " fall into this error, which 
 is, however, susceptible of a very easy historical solution. It arose, 
 doubtless, from the original custom of annexing the pronoun to the 
 termination of the verb, and continuing the use of the inflection after 
 its import had been forgotten, and when the pronoun had been formed 
 into an independent part of speech." 
 
 2. The Isizulu, however, has never fallen into " this 
 error." Its pronominal subject has ever preserved a 
 separable, distinct position of its own, between which 
 and the verbal predicate the essential verb it often 
 introduces some two or three other secondary or rela- 
 tional words ; thus, 
 
 "Si ya nt tanda," we do you love; "ngi za ku ni tuma," I am going 
 to send you ; " abantu ba ya si tanda'," the people they do us love ; 
 " ni za ku, m tuma," ye are about to send him; " umfana u ya yi 
 tanda inkosi," the boy he loves the chief ; " inkosi i ya ku m biza um- 
 fana," the chief will call the boy." 
 
 3. These examples are sufficient to show that the form of the verb, 
 both auxiliary, as ya, za, and principal, as tanda, tuma, biza, is one 
 and the same, whatever may be the number and person of its subject.
 
 332 SYNTAX. VERBS; PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 They are sufficient to show, also, that the particular relation, as that 
 of class, number, and person, which a verb sustains to a noun, or to a 
 person speaking, is pointed out by the direct pronominal subject. 
 
 4. By taking a specific form to represent the class and 
 number of the noun, and distinguish the person ; and by 
 taking a uniform position before the verb, or at the head 
 of the predicative combination; and being sometimes re- 
 peated (with an auxiliary) in the several members of 
 this combination ; these relational words, the pronouns, 
 happily indicate every important connection between the 
 noun, or person speaking, and the predicate, without any 
 change in the form of the verb; as shown in the above 
 examples, and as may be seen also in every part of the 
 synopsis of a verb 309., and, indeed, throughout the 
 Grammar. 
 
 NOTE. For the agreement of pronouns with the nouns which they 
 represent, see 502 506. 
 
 541. The genius of the Isizulu requires a fullness 
 of expression an expansion in the construction of com- 
 pound predicates, and in many double propositions, 
 beyond what is common in the English and some other 
 languages. 
 
 I. When there are two or more predicates in a pro- 
 position, the pronominal subject must be used with each, 
 the auxiliaries, if any, being often omitted in the 
 second and following predicates, and the final vowel a, 
 of the principal verb, being changed to e in the present 
 and future tenses ; thus, 
 
 EnTwini yesikutali inTala i ya lunguza, i Tule, i ye 
 kweyevila ; 
 
 At the house of the diligent famine it does gaze (cast a wistful 
 
 look), it passes on, it goes to that of the slothful. 
 Si ya ku sebenza si jede ; 
 
 We will work we finish. 
 
 U nga hamba u finyelele emizini ya kwiti ; 
 
 You can go you arrive at the kraals of our people. 
 
 Ngi fike nga hamba nga c langana nabantu ; 
 
 (When) I arrived I went I met with people. 
 
 REM. No use is made of the copulative na to connect predicates, 
 as may be seen from the foregoing examples, and further in the fol- 
 lowing ; thus,
 
 EXPANSION OF PROPOSITIONS. 333 
 
 Ba ya suka ba gaule izibaya neziuTu, ba sebenze 
 umuzi vvabo, ba wu lede ; 
 
 They go they get out timber for folds and houses, they build their 
 kraal, they finish it. 
 
 Sa puma lapa, sa lala nga peseya kwoMngeni, sa 
 vtika kona, sa fika Embilo, sa c lalela abanye kona 
 ukuba si be endawonye ; 
 
 We left here, we slept beyond the Umngeni, we rose there, we ar- 
 rived at the Umbilo, we waited for others there that we might be 
 together. 
 
 542. II. Several kinds of double propositions, which, 
 by the use of such words as or, except, as, &c., are so 
 compendiously expressed in English as to look like one, 
 require an expanded form in Isizulu. 
 
 1. The force of or and nor requires an expanded form ; 
 thus, 
 
 Uma ku nge sizo izinkomo, uma ku nge siwo amahasi, 
 ku ngabantu aba ya ku hamba ; 
 
 The cattle, or the horses, or the people will go, literally, if it be 
 not the cattle, if it be not the horses, it is the people who will go. 
 
 Usibekana u ya ku ni siza, uma ni nga sa sizwanga 
 itina ; 
 
 Usibekana or we will help you, literally, Usibekana will help you, 
 if ye were not already helped by us. 
 
 A ngi ku tandi, futi a ngi kwesabi ; 
 
 I neither love nor fear thee, literally, I do not leve thee, again I 
 do not fear thee. 
 
 2. The force of except, and not, but, but not, &c., 
 requires an expanded form ; thus, 
 
 Ngi ya zi tabata zonke izinkomo ku sale zi be mbili 
 kodwa ; 
 
 I take all the cattle but two, literally, I take all the cattle, there 
 remain two only. 
 
 Si nga ziko'lisa tina kodwa si nge m ko c lise Utino ; 
 
 We may deceive ourselves but not God. 
 
 Bonke abantu ba bulawa, kodwa yena io 'mfana wa 
 sinda ; 
 
 All the people but this boy were killed, i.e., all the people were 
 killed, but this same boy escaped. 
 
 3. The force of as, so as, just as, &c., often requires 
 an expanded form ; thus,
 
 334 SYNTAX. VERBS ; EXPANSION. 
 
 Inkosi ya ba pa bona ndzenga loku i pe tina ; 
 
 The chief gave them as (he gave) us. 
 
 Ya m nika Ufaku ndzenga loku ya m nikayo Uno- 
 dwengu, or ndzengokuba ya m nikayo Unodwengu; 
 
 He gave Faku just as he did (give) Unodwengu. 
 
 Umuti wa wa pezu kwabo ndzenga loku u we kiti ; 
 
 The tree fell upon them as upon us, literally, the tree fell upon 
 
 them like as it fell to us. 
 Wa ngi pata ndzengokuba nga pata yena ; 
 
 He treated me as I did him. 
 
 Ngi ya c lala ndzenga kujala, ngi ya tabanga ndzenga 
 kujala, ngi ya ni tanda ndzenga loku nga be ngi ni 
 tanda, kodvva kwonke loku a ku sizi nga 'luto ; 
 abantu a ba yi ku c lala, ba labange, ba tande 
 
 ndzengami ; 
 
 I live as I did, I think as I did, I love you as I did, but all these to 
 no purpose ; the world will not live, think, nor love as I do. 
 
 543. III. The Isizulu requires the use of the prin- 
 cipal verb in many (other) instances, where the English 
 would use only the auxiliary, the principal verb being 
 understood ; thus, 
 
 A ku ko owa ke wa ya ezulwini e nge nako uku- 
 penduka ; Uyobe wa be e nge ye ; Udavida wa be 
 e nge ye ; 
 
 No man ever went to heaven without repentance ; Job could not 
 (go) ; David could not (go). 
 
 Uma lo 'mfana wa be e nga penduka ku lesi isono esi 
 sodwa, a nga penduka kwezinye ; 
 
 If this boy could repent of this one sin, he could (repent) of more. 
 
 U kona owa- ke wa yi bona ingelosi na ? Yebo, 
 baningi ba ke ba yi bona ; Uabehama wa yi bona, 
 noDavida wa yi bona ; 
 
 Did any body ever see an angel ? Yes, a great many have (seen 
 one) ; Abraham did (see one) ; and David did (see one). 
 
 544. IV. The higher, better style of Isizulu, re- 
 quires the verb to be repeated in the reply to direct 
 simple questions ; and the whole answer is generally 
 given, mutatis mutandis, in the same words as the 
 question ; thus, 
 
 V bonile na! hast thou seen ? Answer, ngi bonile; I have seen. 
 
 REM. 1. In loose, familiar style, a direct simple
 
 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 335 
 
 question is often answered by ehe, or yebo, for the affir- 
 mative ; and by ai, ia, l, or \abo, in the negative; and 
 sometimes, when the reply is 'to be direct and earnest, 
 the verb is repeated in addition to the adverb ; thus, 
 
 Izinkomo zi fikile na ? have the cattle come ? Answer, ehe, zi fikilc ; 
 yes, they have come. 
 
 RE>I. 2. In Isizulu a question containing a negative is often 
 answered with direct reference to the negative ; and an admission, or 
 an affirmative reply, as expressed by die, or yebo, must be taken as an 
 admission of the negation contained in the question ; thus, 
 
 A ba hambanga na 1 have they not gone ? Answer, ehe, yes, i.e., 
 they have not gone. 
 
 A ni bonile izinkomo zami na ? have you not seen my cattle ? ehe, 
 yes, i.e., I have not seen them. 
 
 A ka tandanga kambe ukuba omunye a vukele omunye, a m bulale na 1 
 Of course he did not wish one to rise up against the other, and kill 
 him ? Answer, ehe, yes, i.e., he did not. 
 
 SECT. 2. Government of Verbs. 
 
 545. Transitive verbs govern the accusative case ; 
 thus, 
 
 Tabata izinto zokusebenza ; 
 
 Take things for working. 
 
 Ba c laba inkomo ba yi Te ; 
 
 They slaughter an animal and eat it. 
 
 Si ya Jala uku bona ; 
 
 We begin to see. 
 
 Ngi ya tanda izindaba za le 'niwadi ; 
 
 I like the contents of this book. 
 
 'Baba, ngi beke ; 
 
 Father, behold me. 
 Ba si c lupa ; 
 
 They persecute us. 
 
 REM. When the action denoted by the verb affects an object 
 directly, or without the aid of any intermediate word, as in the fore- 
 going examples, the relation of the noun to the verb is spoken of as 
 objective ; and is thus distinguished from another kind of relation, the 
 modal, where a noun or pronoun is used to explain the manner in which 
 the action of the verb takes place. 
 
 (a.) The objective construction occurs, of course, only in connection 
 with active transitive verbs, as above; and since the noun is conceived 
 of as affected by, or suffering the action of the verb, it is sometimes 
 designated the suffering object.
 
 336 SYNTAX. VERBS; GOVERNMENT. 
 
 (6.) The modal construction occurs in connection with either transi- 
 tive or intransitive verbs ; and, being generally used to denote some 
 particular circumstance, as the place, time, manner, instrument, of 
 the verbal action, it has the force of an adverb ; and hence is some- 
 times called the adverbial construction. The noun's particular relation 
 to the verb, in such cases, is denoted, sometimes by an intermediate 
 word, as a preposition, when we generally speak of a noun as gov- 
 erned by a preposition (see 450.) ; sometimes it is denoted by an 
 inflection of the noun, as in the locative case (see 458.) ; and occa- 
 sionally by a combination of both methods a separate word and an 
 inflection (see 459., 460.) ; and, again, in some instances, there is 
 nothing but the position of the noun to denote its relation to the verb 
 (see 452., 453). 
 
 546. Many verbs in the causative, some in the rela- 
 tive, and some in the simple and other forms, take two 
 accusatives, generally the one of a person, and the other 
 of a thing ; thus, 
 
 Wa ngi patisa izinkomo ; 
 
 He charged me the cattle, i.e., put the cattle under my care. 
 
 Wa ba kalela izinyembezi ; 
 
 He wept tears for them. 
 
 Inkosi ya si nika izinkomo ; 
 
 The chief gave us cattle. 
 
 Utino izinto u zi pa izikutali ; 
 
 God gives things to the industrious. 
 
 Kodwa yena o pangelayo mina abantu bami, no m 
 bulala nokumbulala ; 
 
 But whosoever robbeth me of my people, him shall ye utterly destroy. 
 
 REM. 1 . The suffering object is generally inactive, being that which 
 suffers the action of the verb, or is affected by it ; while the personal 
 object, denoting, of course, a person, may be conceived of as active, 
 and as shaping its action to that of the subject. 
 
 REM. 2. Instead of two accusatives under the regimen of one verb, 
 one of them the personal object is sometimes governed by a prepo- 
 sition; thus, 
 
 Wa kuleka inkomo ku 'mlungu ; 
 
 He asked a cow of the white man. 
 
 Ngi ya kuleka kuwe ukuba u ngi size ; 
 
 I beseech (of) thee to help me. 
 
 Izinkomo eziningi wa zi nika ku 'zimeku zake zonke ; 
 
 He gave many cattle to all his servants. 
 
 REM. 3. When there are two objects of one verb, the pronoun of 
 the personal object is generally found (in the simple form) before the 
 verb; thus,
 
 DOUBLE 'ACCUSATIVES. IDIOMS. 337 
 
 irikosi abantu ya be i ba nikile izinkomo ; 
 
 The chief had given the people cattle. 
 
 U si pe oku c le ; 
 
 Grant thou us a blessing. 
 
 Se si ku nikile pela inkomo yetu ; 
 
 Now then we have given thee our cow. 
 
 (Umpande) wa m nika elake Umbulazi ; 
 
 He (Umpande) gave Umbulazi his (country). 
 
 547. Those verbs which are referred to, in the last 
 paragraph, as governing two accusatives in the active 
 voice, are often accompanied by one of them the im- 
 personal in the passive ; thus, 
 
 Nga patiswa izinkomo ; 
 
 I was charged the cattle, i.e., I was put in charge of the cattle. 
 
 Leli 'lizwe ngi li nikwe ngubaba ; 
 
 I was given this country by my father. 
 Ba ti, umbila si wu nikwa ini na? 
 
 They said, are we given maize ? that is, have we been blessed 
 with a crop of corn ? 
 
 REM. Forms of expression like the above are generally considered 
 anomalous in English ; and some grammarians even condemn them as 
 inaccurate, calling in a preposition to aid in disposing of them. Yet 
 the best of writers make use of them. But whatever may be said of 
 them in English, it must be admitted that they abound in the Isizulu, 
 and require to be carefully studied and observed. The idiom is also 
 accompanied with some peculiarities in this language ; or, perhaps it 
 should be said, the idiom is better established, and more arbitrary in 
 its sway, in the Zulu, than in our own tongue ; especially where the 
 noun, or pronoun, denoting the person, refuses to come under the 
 control of a preposition, or an equivalent inflection, and persists, as it 
 were, in becoming the subject of the verb in its passive form ; thus, 
 
 Ilizwe lenu li busisiwe ngUtino, owa n' enzela lezo 
 'zinto ; kodwa tina ka si nazo lezo 'zinto e n' enze- 
 Iwayo zona (or e ni z' enzelwayo) ngUtino ; 
 
 Your country is blessed by the Lord, who did those things for you; 
 
 but we have not those things which ye are done for them (i.e. , 
 
 which are done for you) by the Lord. 
 Umuzi lona nga wu miselwa ngabelungu ; 
 This kraal I was set apart for it (was allotted it, i.e., it was assigned 
 
 to me) by the white people. 
 
 Abafana bami umzi lo ba wu miselwe ; 
 
 My boys this kraal they were set apart for it, that is, this kraal 
 was assigned to my boys. 
 
 Leyo itnizi ba yi miselwa nguyise ; 
 
 They were allotted those kraals by their father. 

 
 338 SYNTAX. VERBS; FACTITIVE OBJECTS. 
 
 548. When verbs signifying to name, to call, to 
 choose, render, make or constitute, esteem or reckon, 
 are followed by a factitive object, an object which ex- 
 presses what the subject or a suffering object becomes 
 or is thought to be : 
 
 1. (a.) The factitive object is sometimes placed im- 
 mediately after the suffering object, without any copula 
 or sign of the relation ; thus, 
 
 Nga pambeka nga ti ihasi inkorno ; 
 I mistook and thought the horse a cow. 
 
 (b.) If the factitive object expresses what the subject 
 becomes, or is thought to be, as when the predicate is an 
 intransitive or a passive verb, the factitive object some- 
 times follows the predicate without any specifying verb 
 or particle ; thus, 
 
 Abantu ba fa ba penduka izinyoka ; 
 
 People die and become snakes. 
 
 Isiioto si pendukile amanzi ; 
 
 The hailstone has turned to water. 
 
 2. (a.) The factitive object is often construed with 
 uku ba or uku ti t to be, to wit ; thus, 
 
 Inkosi ya bizwa uku ti Upakade ; 
 
 The chief was called Upakade. 
 
 Ba bizwa ngokuti abantwana ; 
 
 They were called children. 
 
 U ya ku bizw,a 'ku tiwa Umakobeni ; 
 
 He shall be called Umakobeni. 
 
 Sa fika emuzini o bizwa uku ti Isi^ebe ; 
 
 We reached the kraal which is called Isikhlebe. 
 
 Wa ketwa uku ba inkosi ; 
 
 He was chosen (to be) king. 
 
 Abanye ba ti, ku ya telelwa umuntu ukuba a be 
 iiwane, a be isinga, a be ibuda, a be isiula; omunye 
 a be isitutwane, omunye a be isifumbu ; 
 
 Some say, it (poison) is poured out for a person that he may become 
 crazy, or that he may become a rogue, or that he may be de- 
 ranged, or that he may become a fool ; that one may become 
 an epileptic, another a hump-back. 
 
 W enza udaka olu tsiswa ngomlilo lu be rigamatse ; 
 
 He made clay which is burned by lire into bricks.
 
 PREFERENCE FOR THE PASSIVE. 339 
 
 (b.) The factitive object may be found sometimes in 
 the form of a finite verb in an accessory clause ; thus, 
 
 Wa si yaleza ukuba si hambe, he commanded us that we should go. 
 
 (c.) The factitive object is often expressed by a verb 
 in the infinitive ; thus, 
 
 Wa si yaleza itku hamba, he commanded us to go. 
 
 (d.) The factitive object may be denoted by an adjec- 
 tive ; thus, 
 
 Ma u si pe amabele ukuba a be maningi, grant thou us grain that it 
 may be abundant. See 484., Rem.; 491., 4. 
 
 549. The Isizulu abounds in the use of the passive 
 voice, adopting it in many cases where the English would 
 employ the active (see 206., Rem.) ; thus, 
 
 Ku linywa abafazi ; 
 
 It is dug by the women, that is, the women do the digging, or the 
 digging is done by the women. 
 
 Kwa be ku 'laliwa ngabo ; 
 
 It was being dwelt by them, that is, they were dwelling. 
 
 Wona 'enziwe yini ukuba enze ndzalo na ? 
 
 By what are they made that they do so ? that is, what makes them 
 do so ? 
 
 Nenkomo yokusengwa ubisi ; 
 
 And the cow to be milked milk, that is, to give milk. 
 
 NezanTa uku ba izimeku zokwenza oku tandvva ngu- 
 mpefumlo ; 
 
 And hands to be servants for doing what is desired by the soul, 
 that is, what the soul desires. 
 
 Sa felwa nguye; 
 
 We were died for by him, that is, he died for us. 
 
 550. The copulative conjunctions are not employed 
 in the Isizulu to connect two or more verbal predicates; 
 but when the relation between such predicates is co- 
 ordinate and intimate, as when there are two or more 
 in a single proposition forming a kind of compound pre- 
 dicate, the second and following verbs usually omit the 
 use of auxiliaries, and, in the present and future, change 
 the final vowel a to e. $ 541., I.) But sometimes 
 each predicate may be considered as forming, with its 
 pronominal subject, a new, simple proposition; in which
 
 340 SYNTAX. VERBS ; CONTINUITY. 
 
 case the final vowel of the succeeding verb, or verbs, is 
 unchanged, though the auxiliary may be dropped. 
 
 To illustrate each of these rules, and exhibit also 
 some variations; to illustrate them as ivell in the nega- 
 tive as in the affirmative; and also to illustrate the 
 manner in which the Isizulu, in the progress of a 
 sentence , passes from the affirmative to the negative, 
 and also from the negative to the affirmative, is the 
 object of the following examples : 
 
 Nokuba sa be si Iwa, sa bubisana iminyaka yonke ; 
 
 On the contrary, we were fighting, (and) we killed each other 
 every year. 
 
 Si ya loba, si lobelana; 
 
 We do write, we write each other. 
 
 Bekani nokulima kwabo ; ba ya sebenza, ba labe ama- 
 'lati, ba lime iminyakana e yimozana ; ba be be se 
 ti, insimu se yi gugile, be be se be yeka, se be Jala 
 omunye umsebenzi ; 
 
 Behold ye their digging also ; they work, and cut away the trees, 
 and dig a very few years; and then they say, the garden is worn 
 out, then they leave, and begin some other work. 
 
 Ni nga tini, uma ni bona umuntu o nokwazi ndzeng' 
 abelungu ndze na ? Uma e funa abantu ba be ba- 
 ningi, nezinkabi, negedza futi; abantu bake ba kipe 
 izipunzi, a lime insimu enkulu ; a ti uku yi leda, a 
 be se ti, se ngi katele, yekani ; a yeke e nga ka tsali 
 nokutsala, a lime enye futi, a yi tsale, i mile, a nga 
 be e sa yi 'lakula, a yi yeke, ni nga tini ngaye lo 
 'muntu na ? Ni nga ti, a ka na 'sineke nakanye; 
 Ni nga ti u'nokusizeka na ? Jabo, a ku ko ukusi- 
 zeka, isineke si ngeko ; isineke si nokusiza okukulu ; 
 
 What would you say, if you should see a man of intelligence like 
 the white people in general ? If he should look up many people, 
 and oxen, and also a plough ; and his people should dig out 
 stumps, and plant a large garden; and when he had finished it, 
 he should then say, now I am tired, leave (it) ; and he should 
 leave it before he had really planted, and should plough another 
 likewise, and should plant it, and it should grow, but he should 
 never weed it, but leave it, what would you say of this man ? 
 You would say, he hks not the least thought. Would you say 
 that he derives any profit ? No, there is no profit, where there 
 is no thought ; there is great profit in thought. 
 
 Ngi sindise, u nga ngi bubisi ; 
 Save thou me, and not destroy me.
 
 CONTINUITY OF PROPOSITIONS. .HI 
 
 Uma aba be m landa ba be m bambile, vva be e ya ku 
 ze a buye ; 
 
 If those who followed him (=his pursuers) had caught him, he 
 
 would have been obliged to return. 
 Sa fikake kona kvva Tukusa ; si te si sa fika, kwa se 
 
 ku fika izinsizwa za sEsanlwini, zi za 'ku si tabata; 
 
 se zi yake nati kona enkosini ; 
 
 So we arrived there at Tukusa ; and just as we arrived, there ar- 
 rived the young men from Isanku, coming to take us; so, then 
 they go there with us to the king's. 
 
 A si bekanga Umenzi, a si bekanga Umsindisi, a si 
 bekanga abatuny wa, a si bekanga ku 'banye ; sa 
 beka ezinyokeni kupela ; 
 
 We did not look to the Creator, nor to the Savior, nor to the apos- 
 tles; nor to others; but only to the snakes. (^541 544.) 
 Ma ngi tandwe, ngi nga zondwa ng' aliwe ; 
 Let me be loved, and not hated nor rejected. 
 
 Ngi sindise, u nga ngi notsi, u ngi bubise; 
 
 Save thou me, and not chase and kill me. 
 
 Ma ngi sindiswe, ngi nga uotswa ngi budziswe, ngi 
 
 iiotswe ngi bulawe, ngi nga be ngi sa bako em- 
 
 'labeni ; 
 
 Let me be saved, and not driven away nor destroyed, expelled 
 nor killed, till (or so that) I shall never be here any more on 
 the earth. 
 
 Ngi sindise, u nga ngi bubisi, u file ikanda lami ; 
 
 Save me, and not kill me, and hide my head. 
 
 A nge ze a kala, a nge c leke, a nge Tale ; 
 
 He might not weep, nor laugh, nor play. 
 
 A ngi nako ukukuluma, nokuzwa, nokuiabanga ; 
 
 I cannot speak, nor hear, nor think. 
 
 Ma u ng' e'li, u ye emapanTeni, u siye itunga lenkosi; 
 
 or a ku fanele u bu ng' euka, u ye emapanTeni, u 
 
 siye itunga lenkosi ; 
 You must not go down (from the capital), repair to the distant 
 
 country kraals, and leave the king's milk-pail; or it is not proper 
 
 that you should descend, and go, &.c. 
 A ku fanele ukuba u ng' e c la, u ye emapanTeni ; 
 It is not proper that you should descend, and go to the distant 
 
 country kraals. 
 
 Inkomo ka inkulu, iniinyane ; 
 
 The cow is not large, but small. 
 Ku mu c le wena, u mubi ; 
 
 Thou art not beautiful, but ugly. 
 
 Abantu babi, ka ba ba c le ; v 
 
 The people are ugly, they are not beautiful.
 
 342 SYNTAX. VERES; CONTINUITY. 
 
 Nga fika kambe kona, nga ti, ngi funa umbila. Wa 
 ti Umakananandele wa ti, Wo ! umfundisi wenze 
 kandzani na ? Bekake, nangu wumbila : se ngi 
 wonile. Loku umfundisi si c lezi naye endawonye, 
 a nga be u ya si tsena, ukuti, umbila ni nga vvoni, 
 nami ngi ya ku tenga. Loku si hamba ndze ku leli 
 izwe, si ngabantu bake, a ku tso kiti, a nga ku tso 
 okokuti, ni nga k' oni, nami ngi ya ku za 'ku tenga 
 nonyaka ndze. Se si ze si ya 'ku tenga ngawo 
 kwezinye izindao, si be si ng' azi okoma u ya ku 
 tanda, si ze sa ya ku tenga ngawo navve. Nanka 
 amasaka, u ya wa bona. Omunye umbila kimi 
 lapa u nge be u sa wu bona ; nombilana o kona u 
 su lingene ukuTiwa ngabantu bami. Kodwa ukuba 
 wa be umfundisi e tsilo (or wa be e tsilo umfundisi), 
 ngi ti wa ye e nge yi ku jeda. Nawe u ya bona 
 inlolobela yamasaka, ngokubane wa wu tenga ndze 
 nomlungu amasumi emali yake e siyangalombili. 
 Kodwa mina ngi dabukile, nga be ngi ng' azi ukuti 
 umfundisi u ya wu funa umbila ; nga ngi nge ye 
 uku ya 'ku tenga kwenye indao, ukuba nga be ng' 
 azi ukuti u ya wu funa umbila ; 
 
 I arrived of course there, and said, I am in search of maize. Then 
 said Umakananandele, Oh! what has the missionary been about? 
 Behold, here is the maize : I have already disposed of it. In- 
 asmuch as we are living together with the missionary, he ought 
 to have told us, saying, ye must not dispose of the maize, for 
 I also shall purchase. Since we live thus in this district (sec- 
 tion of country), and are his people, he ought to say to us, he 
 ought to command, saying, ye must not yet sell, for I am coming 
 to buy this ye*ar likewise. We have just been and sold it in 
 other places, not knowing that you would require, (else) we 
 would have sold it to you. Here are the sacks, as you see. 
 Other maize here with me you cannot see any more ; the little 
 maize which is here, is just sufficient to be eaten by my people. 
 But if the missionary had spoken, I think he would not have 
 finished (the lot). You also see the pile of sacks, for so indeed 
 the white man bought it (with) eighty shillings of his money. 
 But I myself am sorry I did not know that the missionary is in 
 want of the maize; I should not have gone to sell at another 
 place, had I known that he is in want of the maize. 
 
 SECT. 3. Syntax of the Modes and Tenses. 
 551. In respect to the syntax of the modes and
 
 USE OF MODES AND TENSES. 313 
 
 tenses of verbs, in their relation to one another, and 
 especially in reference to the relation of one tense to 
 another, and that in a language rich above all others in 
 material and forms for making the nicest of distinctions 
 in these things, it is not easy to give particular rules. 
 Nor is this necessary. Referring to the somewhat par- 
 ticular account of the use and import of each auxiliary, 
 and to the extended definitions and illustrations of the 
 forms and uses of each mode and tense, as given in 
 Etymology ( 207306.) ; and also to the definitions 
 and illustrations of the different kinds of sentences, both 
 simple and compound, as already presented in the first 
 chapter of Syntax (^ 394 429.), a variety of well 
 selected examples, under each mode and tense, is all 
 that can be required here, except, perhaps, the following 
 very general statement : 
 
 While the hizulu finds no difficulty in allowing an 
 interchange of some of its modes, particularly the im- 
 perative, potential, and optative, and displays great 
 freedom in the interchange of tenses, sometimes repre- 
 senting the past or future as present, and even the 
 present and future as already past; it is also able, and 
 particular, to employ those modes and tenses which give 
 a correct expression of the sense intended. 
 
 REM. On many of these points, the Zulu language bears a close 
 analogy to the Greek. So true is this remark, that we may say, almost 
 in the language of another concerning the Greek, that the Isizulu ' has 
 the power of giving to narration a wonderful variety, life, and energy, 
 from the freedom with which it can employ and interchange its tenses. 
 Without circumlocution, it can represent an action as continued or 
 momentary ; as attempted or accomplished ; as introductory or con- 
 clusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken the progress of the 
 narrative. It can give to it dramatic life and reality by exhibiting an 
 action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy by dismissing it as done. 
 It can bring a scene forward into the strong light of the present, and 
 instantly send it back into the shade of the past. The variety, vivacity, 
 and dramatic character of Zulu narrative can be preserved but very 
 imperfectly in translation, from the fact that the English has, compara- 
 tively, so small a variety of tenses and so little freedom in uniting the 
 past and present.' 
 
 The truth of these remarks, and of the above statement, or rule, 
 may be seen in the paragraphs which are now subjoined to exemplify 
 the use of the modes and tenses, and especially the manner in which 
 these are combined and employed in continuous discourse.
 
 344 SYNTAX. VERBS; INFINITIVE. 
 
 552. I. The following examples are a specimen of 
 the use of the Infinitive Mode : 
 
 1. As a noun in the nominative ; thus, 
 Ukvveduka ukuma kwabantu ; 
 
 To err is the character of man. 
 
 Loku ukungazi kwa m papisa kakulu ; 
 
 This uncertainty made him feel very anxious. 
 
 2. As a noun in the accusative 
 a. The object of a verb ; thus, 
 
 Si ya funa uku zwa in'lalo yenu ; 
 
 We want to hear of your estate. 
 
 6. The object of a preposition ; thus, 
 
 W enza imwadi en'Ie ngokujonda kwake ; 
 
 He made a nice book by his right thinking. 
 
 S' onile ku 'bazali betu ngoku nga ba laleli ; 
 
 We have sinned against our parents by not obeying them, 
 
 3. As qualified by an adjective ; thus, 
 Kubi ukuhamba kvvabo ; 
 
 Evil is their mode of life. 
 
 4. As entering into construction in dependence upon 
 another word 
 
 a. Depending upon a noun ; thus, 
 
 Inkosi i tumile isigidzimi sokuza 'ku buza ; 
 The chief has sent a messenger to come to inquire. 
 Zi nesineke sbkuzakela izinTu zazo ; 
 
 They have sense to build for themselves their houses. 
 
 Ba s' azisa indao yokubusa ; 
 
 They make us to know the place of blessedness. 
 
 6. Depending upon an adjective ; thus, 
 Inkabi indala uku donsa ; 
 
 The ox is too old to draw. 
 
 c. Depending upon another verb 
 (a.) Objectively ; thus, 
 
 Amakolwa a lalile uku tenga izmiwele ; 
 
 The believers have begun to buy wagons.
 
 USE OF MODES. INDICATIVE J POTENTIAL. 34-5 
 
 (b.) Modally ; thus, 
 
 Butani abafana, be ze 'ku lirna ; 
 
 Assemble the boys, that they may come to dig. 
 
 (Abantu) be za 'ku ngi tabata ; 
 
 They (the people) came to take me. 
 
 d. Depending upon a conjunction ; thus, 
 
 A ngi nako ukukuluma nokuzwa nokuiabanga ; 
 I cannot speak, nor hear, nor think. 
 
 5. As absolute, having no dependence upon another 
 word ; thus, 
 
 Ya ti impi, uku pendula kwayo, si ya ku bona ; 
 
 The commando said, (in) replying, we will see. 
 
 553. II. Some of the forms and uses of the Indica- 
 tive Mode, as already specified 221., are further illus- 
 trated in the following examples ; thus, 
 
 Si ye zwa kaloku ndze, u kona umsebenzi omukulu, 
 o mangalisayo. Ku tiwa, peseya izindaba zi ya 
 handziswa ngonyazi ; 
 
 We hear just now, there is a great, and wonderful work. It is said, 
 beyond (the sea) news is made to travel by lightning. 
 
 Nga fika kwiti lapa ku linywayo ; la Tiwa i c lobo ; kwa 
 fika uku ti, inkosi i ya wela ; 
 
 I reached home while they are digging ; the jsurnmer was spent ; 
 then came word, the king is crossing over. 
 
 554. III. Some of the forms and uses of the Po- 
 tential Mode, as already specified 222., are further 
 illustrated in the following examples ; thus, 
 
 Si ya ku tokoza si nga z' amkela izimwadi zenu ; 
 
 We shall rejoice should we receive your letters. 
 
 Kodwa iningi labantu ku leli 'lizwe ba nge ke b' azi 
 'luto ngako ; 
 
 But the greater part of the people in this country would know 
 nothing about it. 
 
 Ngi nge be ngi sa tanda izono zami ; 
 
 I may not be still loving my sins or, 1 ought not, SLC. 
 
 2 R
 
 SYNTAX. VERBS ; MODES. 
 
 (Irfliziyo) a ngi nge yi fanise na 'nto ; i ya guluka 
 ndzalo ; i tana nesondo eli pendulwa atnanzi ; lona 
 H nge mi uma ku vulelwe amanzi ; 
 
 I cannot compare it (the heart) to anything; it is forever changing; 
 it is like a wheel which is turned by water; that cannot stand 
 still if it be opened upon by the water. 
 
 Ngi be ngi ti ku nga ba ku c le ; 
 
 I was thinking it would be well. 
 
 Wa ti, uma u ya puza (ubutswala), e sa bu bala, a 
 nga m giba ebanTeni ; kodwa uma ka bu balanga, 
 ku nge be neiala ; ngi nge m gibe ; 
 
 He said, if he drinks (beer), being still pledged (against) it, he 
 would expel him from the church ; but if he had not signed 
 (against) it, it would not be a sin ; I would riot expel him. 
 
 Wa be e nga fenyisa ukuyahva ; 
 
 He may have despised reproof. 
 
 A ku fanele ukuba u nga ya emapanTeni ; 
 
 It is not proper that you should go to the distant country villages. 
 
 Wenzile izulu, lapo ni nga pila, na lapo ni nga so za 
 
 na fa, uma ni lungile ; 
 He has made heaven, where you may live, and never die, if you 
 
 are good. 
 
 Ni nge ze n' amba nokuba ku nga penduka bapi ; 
 
 You cannot doubt who must repent. 
 
 Utnkumbu u nga se mi kuso ; 
 
 TJie ship could ndt stand against it any longer. 
 
 Bonke b' onfle ; ngi nge ze nga tso ukuba b' one ka- 
 ngapi ; ngi nga ze ngi linge uku bala izinwele ze- 
 kanda la lo 'mfana ; 
 
 All have sinned ; I need not try to tell how many times ; I might 
 as well try to count the hairs on that boy's head. 
 
 Uma si za ku tata umuti, ku nga ti, uma u s' alula, 
 ku nga ze ku c laluke omunye o veza iiebo, a ti, rna 
 si tate izintambo si wu xole ngazo, kandu ukuma si 
 wa'iule (umuti) ; 
 
 If we were going to take a log, perhaps, should it be too heavy for 
 us, there might start up some one who would devise a plan, and 
 say, let us take thongs and drag it with them, in order that we 
 may overcome it (the log).
 
 USE OF MODES. OPTATIVE; IMPERATIVE. .H7 
 
 ^ 555. IV. Some of the forms and uses of the Optative 
 Mode, as already specified $ 223., are further illustrated 
 in the following examples ; thus, 
 
 Se nga nga ti nga he na c lala kona, ka na buya ; 
 Oh that ye had stayed there, and not returned. 
 
 Se nga nga ti nga be ni nga lalanga ni seben/e kona, 
 nga ti nge na buya ne za 'ku c lala ekaya ; 
 
 Would that ye had not remained and worked there, but that ye had 
 returned and come to reside at home. 
 
 Nga si nga tandi Usatani, isita esi si bubisayo ; 
 
 Let us not love Satan, the enemy who destroys us. 
 
 Nga be ni nga m siyanga ; nga be ni linga ukuba ni 
 in c lenge ; 
 
 You ought not to have left him ; you ought to have tried to rescue 
 him or, tried if ye might render him assistance. 
 
 Ba ti, Wo ! sa bala ngobuula ; nga ti nge si nga bu 
 balanga ; 
 
 They said, Oh ! we signed foolishly ; would that we had not signed 
 off from it (beer). 
 
 Loku umfundisi si 'lezi naye endawonye, a nga be u ya 
 si tsena, ukuti, umbila ni nga woni, nami ngi ya ku 
 tenga ; 
 
 Since we are living together with the missionary, he ought to have 
 told us, saying, ye must not sell the maize, for I am coming to 
 buy it myself. 
 
 Nga be laba 'bantwana be labanga ngoTiuo na ? 
 
 Ought not these children to think of God ? 
 
 Nga be ni labanga ngaye ; 
 
 Ye ought to think of him. 
 
 Kwa nga ti ngi nga tsona ; 
 
 It seemed as if I should sink. 
 
 Nga kala se nga ti in'liziyo yami i nga jabuka , 
 
 I sobbed as if my heart would burst. 
 
 556. V. Some of the forms and uses of the Impera- 
 tive Mode, as already specified 224., are further illus- 
 trated in the following examples ; thus,
 
 'JJ48 SYNTAX. VERBS ; MODES. 
 
 Ma ni busiswe, ni namatele ndzalo kuye ; 
 
 May ye be blessed, and ever adhere to him. 
 
 U ya tso, ukuti, uma u su ledile lo 'insebenzi, u ze u 
 hambe u ye lapaya, wenze okunye e ngi funa ukuba 
 u kwenze ; 
 
 He says that, when you have finished this work, you must come 
 and go there yonder, and do whatever else 1 may require you 
 to do. 
 
 Ma ngi sindiswe, ngi nga iiotswa ngi budziswe, ngi 
 notswe ngi bulawe, ngi nga be ngi sa ba ko em- 
 'laberii ; 
 
 Let me be saved, and not expelled nor destroyed, driven away nor 
 killed, till I shall be here no more upon the earth. 
 
 Ma bo linga ba m 'lenge ; 
 
 Let them try and deliver him. 
 
 Ya ti ku inina inkosikazi, a ku we c le uku ya 'ku bona 
 unyoko ; 
 
 The queen said to me, come thou, go down to see thy mother. 
 
 Pindelani kona ezweni lenu, ni yo kwaka kona ; 
 
 Return ye hither again to your country, ye shall build here. 
 
 Abantu ba ti, ukulala ngokuvela kwabo, kwa tunywa 
 unwabu ku tiwa, ma lu hambe, lu ye, lu tsele abantu 
 bonke, lu memeze, lu ti, abantu ma ba nga fi. Na 
 nga semva kwonvvabu kwa tunywa intulo ukuba i 
 memeze futi, i ti, abantu ma ba fe. Ku te enTeleni, 
 unwabu Iwa libala uku za 'ku ti, ma ba nga fi. 
 Kodwa intuio ya gidzima ngarnanTa, ya funyanisa 
 unwabu lu libele ukuTa ubukwebezane, lu hamba in- 
 lozana ndze, lu nga gidzimanga ngamanTa. Kodwa 
 intulo ya gidzima ngamanTa, ya fika,ya ti, ku tiwa, 
 abantu ma ba fe. Na nga semva Iwa fika unwabu, 
 intulo i se i fikile, Iwa memeza unwabu, lu ti, ku 
 tiwa, abantu ma ba nga fi. Ku te lu sa tso ndzalo, 
 Iwa mbetsezwa intulo, ukuti, eya (eiya, iya, or yiya) ! 
 ku tiwa, abantu ma ba fe. Kodwa abantu ba lu 
 buza, be ti, ukona u velapi na ? Intulo i si tselile 
 kulala, i ti, ku tiwa, abantu ma ba fe. Wena u 
 libele ubukwebezane ndze. Ba ti, se si bambile 
 elentulo tina.
 
 USE OF MODES. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 The people say, to begin with their origin, there was sent a chame- 
 leon, the command being, let him proceed, go, and tell all people, 
 and proclaim saying, let not the people die. And after the 
 chameleon, there was sent a lizard (or salamander) that he 
 might proclaim, again, saying, let the people die. It came to 
 pass on the way, the chameleon delayed to come to say, let them 
 not die. But the lizard ran hard, and overtook the chameleon 
 lingering to eat mulberries, walking just a little, not running 
 hard. But the lizard ran hard, arrived, and said, the command 
 is, let the people die. And afterwards the chameleon arrived, the 
 lizard having already arrived, and the chameleon proclaimed, 
 saying, the command is, let the people not die. And as he was 
 speaking thus, he received a slap in the face from the lizard, 
 saying, get thee gone ! the command is, let the people die. But 
 the people asked him, saying, whence comest thou ? The lizard 
 told us first, saying, it is said, the people must die. As for you, 
 you lingered for mulberries. As for ourselves, said they, we 
 have already received the lizard's (message). 
 
 Ya ti inkosikazi, ye'lanini, ke ni ye emakaya enu ; 
 
 The queen said, go ye down, come, goto your homes. 
 
 557. VI. Some of the forms and uses of the Sub- 
 junctive Mode, as already specified 225., are further 
 illustrated in the following examples ; thus, 
 
 So tuma umfana ukuba a ku tsele ; 
 
 We will send a boy that he may tell thee. 
 
 Ngi ya bona ukuba isikati sami si seduze ukuba ngi 
 tsone ekufeni ; 
 
 I see that my time is near when I must sink in death. 
 
 A ku fanele ukuba u ye emapanTeni u siye itunga 
 lenkosi ; 
 
 It is not allowed that you go to the country kraals and leave the 
 king's milking. 
 
 Kona se ni kulile, ngi ya ku tanda ukuba ngi ni tele 
 
 kona lapa ; 
 When you have grown (to be men), I shall be glad to locate you 
 
 just here or, glad if I may locate, &c. 
 
 Nga be ngi nga nika kwonke e ngi nako, ukuba ngi 
 ngene, ngi m tsele ukuba nga Jamba amanga ; 
 
 I would have given all that I had, if I could have gone in, and have 
 told him that I had told a lie. 
 
 Ku tiwa (inkomo) i bizwa uyise ; kanti a i bizwanga
 
 350 SYNTAX. VERBS; MODES. 
 
 leyo inkorno ; ku jandzvva ngomlomo ndze. Uma 
 i be i bizwa oyise, ngapane e nga se sindile (yena) 
 na? 
 
 It is said, it (the cow) was demanded by his (deceased) father ; 
 whereas that cow was not demanded; it was just an oral device. 
 If it had been required by his ancestral shades, then ought he 
 not to have been already restored to health ? 
 
 Uma ngi be ngi ku tso loku ngi nga lali ngi ku fu- 
 mane Emwadini ka 'Tiiio, ni be ni nge kolwe ; 
 
 Now if I had told you this without first finding it in the Book of 
 God, you could not have believed me. 
 
 Ku ndzalo nezilwane zesiduli ; uma iniwele i nyatele 
 inTu yazo, zi ya tsetsa uku yi sebenza masinyane, 
 zi yi vimbe leyo 'ndao e nyatelweyo iniwele ; 
 
 So it is with the little animals of the ant-hill ; if a wagon runs over 
 their house, they hasten to repair it immediately, and build up 
 that place which was trodden down by the wagon. 
 
 Uma abafundisi ba fika lapa, ba bona abantu be nga 
 kolwanga, ba be se be muka, ngapane e nge ko 
 amakohva ; ngesineke sabo a koria amakolwa ; 
 
 When the missionaries came here, and saw the people unbelieving, 
 had they gone away at once, then there must have been no be- 
 lievers ; through their perseverance there are believers. 
 
 Ngokubane nami nga be ngi ngumuntu ndze ; ngi 
 balekile okwabane ngi bone ukuti ngi za ku bulawa. 
 Mina umzi ngi ye nga wu tata ku 'belungu ; knndu 
 ukuma nami ngi be inkosi ; 
 
 For I also was just a common man ; I fled because I saw that I 
 was about to be killed. As for myself I then obtained a kraal 
 (standing, power, authority) from the white people ; so it was 
 that I also became king. 
 
 Wa ti, ngapane (inkomo) i ya ku buya i zale ; 
 
 He said, she (the cow) ought to have another calf. 
 
 Ngi ti, be ku dela in'liziyo yami, i bi labanga ukuba i 
 bi yinTu yesonda ; ngi ya vuma ; kodwa i bi yinTu 
 yabelungu, ngi be ngi nga yi ku vuma, be ngi ya ku 
 biza oku nga pambili ; 
 
 I say, it has satisfied my heart, considering that it was a house 
 of worship; but if it had been a house for white people, I 
 should not have consented, I should have asked more (for 
 thatching it).
 
 i 
 
 USE OF MODES. SUBJUNCTIVE. 351 
 
 Noma u kona umsebenzi wokuzuza okukulu, unia u 
 nga Itingile, aba ka Keristu ma ba tsetse ba yeke 
 loko ; noma into i si siza ngokupila, uma i nga vu- 
 nyelwe, ma s' a'lukane nayo ; ma si nga bi nesineke 
 esonvveni nakanye ; 
 
 Though there be a work of great profit, if it be not right, Christians 
 must be ready to give up that (profit) ; though a thing may help 
 us to a living, if it be not allowed, let us separate from it ; let 
 us not persist in sin at all. 
 
 Ku ndzengokuba u ya tso 'ku ti, uma u nga tsongo, 
 u turne umuntu okokuti, harnba u yo ku funa into e 
 tile ; ku tike labo 'bantu aba be nayo, ba ti, be se 
 bona lo 'muntu o vela kuwe, ba ti, nga ku be i se 
 kona, ukuba wa be si tsenile, ukuti, no londoloza 
 leyo, nami ngi ze ngi yi fumane. Nawe u fika 
 ndze, nga ku be u sa yi bona i se kona, se ba ze ba 
 y' ona ; 
 
 It is a.s if you do thus, if you have not spoken (for a thing before- 
 hand), you send a person, saying, go and seek a certain thing ; 
 and so those people, who had it, say, when they see this person 
 who comes from you, they say, it would have been here if he 
 had told us, saying, you must preserve that, for I am coming to 
 get it. And you, arriving thus, should still see it yet there, 
 though they had already been and disposed of it. 
 
 Kodwa uma abantu ba si tsela ku lesi 'sikati ndze, 
 ba ti, abantu nga be be nga fanga, uma unwabu lu 
 tike kujala, lu memeze, abantu ma ba nga fi ; 
 ukuba kwa fika intulo kujala, ya ti, abantu ma ba fe. 
 Kodwa na kaloku, innenye yabantu ba yi zonda in- 
 tulo, be ti, ku ngani ukuba yona ya gidzima kulala, 
 ya ti, abantu ma ba fe na ? Ba yi bona abanye, ba 
 tande uku yi tsaya, ba yi bulale, be ti, ya tsoloni 
 na ? Na futi, innenye yabantu, laba abe zwayo nge- 
 zinTebe, be tselwa abadala abaminyane, se be zwile 
 loku, ba ya zonda unwabu be tanda uku lu liliza, 
 be ti, le 'ntvvana eya libala ukuba i tsele abantu 
 ukuba be nga fi ; nga be si nga fanga nati ; nga be 
 be sa c lezi nabadala betu ; nga be zi nga ba ko izifo 
 lapa em'labeni. Ku ngokulibala kwonwabu. 
 
 But if the people tell us (about it), at just this present time, they 
 say, people would not have died, if the chameleon had arrived 
 first, and shouted, let not the people die ; whereas the lizard 
 came first, and said, let the people die. But, even now, a portion
 
 * 
 352 SYNTAX. VERBS; TENSES. 
 
 of the people hate the lizard, saying, why is it that he ran first, 
 and said, let the people die? Some see it, and love to heat it, and 
 kill it, saying, why did it speak ? And again, a portion of the 
 people, those who hear by the ears, being told by a few old 
 people, having heard this, they hate the chameleon, and love to 
 push it aside, saying, that is the little thing which delayed to 
 tell the people that they should not die ; (had he told them), 
 we too should not have died ; our ancestors also would 
 have been still living ; there would have been no diseases 
 here on the earth. It all comes from the delay of the 
 chameleon. 
 
 558. VII. The isolated forms and uses of the 
 several tenses of the verb have been already given, at 
 some length, in the discussion of those topics under 
 Etymology ^ 231306. 
 
 REM. It is not, however, from mere isolated forms that a true and 
 full idea of the tenses of the Zulu verb can be gathered. Neither can 
 the nicer shades of these tenses be translated into the English 
 language. After getting a clear view of the elements, the use and 
 import of the several auxiliaries, and of the leading forms, one of the 
 best exercises, for gaining a command of the language, is to study 
 the verb in the various and numerous relations of its modes and 
 tenses. 
 
 559. VIII. An illustration of some of those forms 
 and uses, and of some of the ways, in which different 
 tenses are connected, or in which one tense succeeds 
 another, may be found not only in the foregoing para- 
 graphs ( 552 557.), but especially in the following 
 examples. 
 
 REM. Many of the quotations contain other tenses than that which 
 is named at the head oT the paragraph in which the example is given; 
 and this of necessity, where the relation and succession of (lie tenses are 
 to be presented together ivith their forms and uses, as in the paragraphs 
 (A F) which follow. 
 
 560. IX. A. Some of the forms, uses, and relations 
 of the Present Tense : 
 
 (Izingelosi) zi ya c lala ezulwini. Ni ti, z* enzani kona 
 na ? Ni ti, zi ya vilapa na ? la; a zi ze zi nga 
 vilapa 'sikati ; 
 
 They (the angels) live in heaven. And what do you think they are 
 doing there ? Idle, do you think ? No; they are never idle a 
 moment.
 
 USE OF TENSES. PRESENT. 353 
 
 Nezmtutane zi yizintwana ; noko zi ya bonisa isineke 
 sazo ; li ze li tsone zi sebenza indao yazo yoku'lala. 
 Uma u zi lapela, a zi Tali zona ; 
 
 And the ants are little things ; yet they show their wisdom ; until 
 the sun goes down they are busy on their place of residence. If 
 you consider them, they do not play. 
 
 Abanye abafundisi, iloku ba likayo, a ku ka kolwa 
 
 'niuntu ; 
 As to other teachers, ever since their arrival, no one yet believes. 
 
 A ku fanele ukuba ngi nga ya emapanTeni, ngi siya 
 itunga lenkosi, li nga sa patwa 'niuntu ; 
 
 It is not proper for me to go to the country kraals, and leave the 
 king's milk-pail to be no longer cared for by any one. 
 
 Ukukolwa ku dinga isineke, ngokuba umuntu o ko- 
 Iwayo u hamba ndzengomuntu e hamba endaweni 
 e nameva ; ngokuba umuntu e hamba erneveni u ya 
 bekisisa a beke izinyao ; a ka lalazeli nclze ndze- 
 ngomuntu e hamba ebaleni ; 
 
 Faith has need of care, for a man who believes walks like a man 
 walking in a thorny place; for a man walking among thorns 
 looks sharp where he puts his feet ; he does not look abroad in 
 all directions like a man going in a clear place. 
 
 Abatakati ba hamba ebusuku, abantu be lele, be funa 
 uku bulala abantu, be hamba nezilwane zabo ingwe. 
 Abanye ba ti, ba hamba nezimpaka kona ebusuku ; 
 abanye ba ti, ba tela ukufa ezinTeleni, ukuba lapo 
 umuntu e hambile kona ku leyo inTela, u ya tabata 
 ukufa enTeleni. Abanye ba ti, ku ya mbelwa em- 
 nyango ; abanye ba ti, ku ya mbelwa esangweni ; 
 abanye ba ti, ku ya mbelwa ensimini ukuba amabele 
 a fe. Abanye ba ti, ku ya bemiswa umuntu ema- 
 kaleni, ukuba a be nomjoto ekanda ; abanye ba ti, 
 ku ya telelwa umuntu ukuba a be iiwane, a be 
 isinga, a be ibuda, a be isiula ; omunye a be isitu- 
 twane, omunye a be isifumbu ; omunye ba m taba- 
 tele into emazinyweni, a yi 'lafunileyo, ukuba ama- 
 zinyo a be nokufa a m bulale ; 
 
 Wizards go in the night, the people being asleep, and seek to kill 
 people, associating with their wild beasts the leopard. Some 
 say, they go with wild cats there in the night; some say, they 
 pour out death in the highways, so that when a person goes
 
 354- SYNTAX. VERBS; TENSES. 
 
 there on that road, he takes death on the road. Some say, it 
 is buried in the door-way ; some say, it is buried in the gate- 
 way ; some say, it is buried in the garden that the corn may 
 die. Some say, it is given to be snuffed by a person in the nos- 
 trils, that he may become soft in the head love-cracked; some 
 say, it is poured out for a person that he may become crazy, or 
 become a rogue, or a dreamer, or a fool * that one may become 
 an epileptic, another a hump-back; for another, they put some- 
 thing in the teeth, which they chew, that the teeth may become 
 diseased and kill him. 
 
 561. X. B. Some of the forms, uses, and relations 
 of the Past -Tense : 
 
 Ukuzalwa.kwami, kambe, nga zalwa Emlalazi. Kwa 
 tike ngi se isikunTwane, ng' emukake, nga ya ekaya 
 komame ; nga fika kona innatsana ku linywayo, 
 nea ze nga li Ta i'lobo. Kwa fika ubusika ; kwa 
 buye kwa linywa, ngi sa lezi kona ; 
 
 As to my birth, of course, I was born on the Umlalazi. And then 
 when I was still a youth, I left, and went to the home of my 
 mother ; I arrived there just as they were digging a little, and 
 passed the summer. Winter came ; and again they dug, I still 
 remaining there. 
 
 A ngi banga ngi sa ya kona ; 
 
 I have never been there. 
 
 Ba ti, kwa bonwa ukuTa ku vutiwe em'langeni ; kwa 
 ti umuntu wa ka wa Ta, we zwa kumnandi, wa be 
 se u ye dzayela ; 
 
 They say, there was seen food ready among tfee reeds ; it happened 
 a man once ate, and found it sweet, and so became habituated. 
 
 Wa lunywa iriyoka ; 
 
 You were bitten by a snake, i.e., take care or you will be bitten. 
 
 Si be si ng' azi okoma u ya ku tanda (umbila), si ze 
 sa ya 'ku tenga ngawo ; 
 
 We did not know that you would want the maize, and therefore 
 went and sold it. 
 
 Nawo lona nga ze nga wona ndze, ngi ti umbila u 
 nawo ; ukuba nga be ng' azi okokuti ka nawo um- 
 bila, nga be ngi nga yi ku pange ngi wone ; 
 
 And so I went and sold this, thinking he has maize ; if I had 
 known that he has no maize, I should not have gone at once and 
 sold it.
 
 USE OF TENSES. FUTURE. .155 
 
 (Ihasi) li ke la baleka kambe; 
 
 It (the horse) ran somewhat away of course, i.e., made a slight 
 attempt to run away. (See 237., 2., c.) 
 
 Nga ti ngi nga ka c lali ekaya inyanga i se 'nye, wa 
 fika umuntu o se zo ku ngi tabata ; 
 
 And before I had been at home a single month, there came a man 
 who was about to take me away at once. 
 
 562. XI. C. Some of the forms, uses, and rela- 
 tions of the Future Tense: 
 
 Imbala ngi ya ku twala loku na ? 
 
 Verily shall I bear this ? 
 
 Futi, si y' esaba ukuba Umpande u ya ku tukutela, 
 a nlabe ku tengwe ezweni lake, uma e zwa oku 
 ndzalo ; 
 
 Moreover, we are afraid that Umpande will be angry, and forbid 
 trading in his country, if he hears of such things. 
 
 Uma si kutele, a si so ze sa fa yinTala ; 
 
 If we are industrious, we shall never die of famine. 
 
 Ndzalo 'labisisa pansi, u limisise, lapo amavila e sa 
 lele ; u ya ku ba nokuTa kvvokuba u tenge, nokwo- 
 kuba u Te ; 
 
 So, thrust in deep, and dig hard, while sluggards are still sleeping ; 
 and you shall have food, not only that you may sell, but also that 
 you may eat. 
 
 W azi ukuba ni ya ku tanda uku pila ku be nguna- 
 pakade, ngako wenzile izulu, lapo ni nga pila, na 
 lapo ni nga so za na fa, uma ni lungile ; 
 
 He knew that you would want to live forever, and so he has made 
 heaven, where you may live, and never die, if you are good. 
 
 Uma ni ya ku konza Utiiio, a be uyi c lo nesi'lobo senu, 
 ma ni penduke ; 
 
 If you will serve God, so that he may be your Father and Friend, 
 you must repent. 
 
 Ngokuba u ya lala umpefumlo wake, a nga be e sa 
 ba na 'srlobo ezulwini, a nga be e sa ba na 'si'lobo 
 'ndao ; okukulu, ukuba e nga sa yi ku ba na si'lobo ; 
 
 For he loses his soul, and has not a friend in heaven, nor anywhere 
 else ; and, what is more, he never will have a friend.
 
 356 SYNTAX. VERBS; TENSES. 
 
 Kwa iika isigidzimi, esi vela ku inkosi, esi zo ku biza 
 izinkomo ; 
 
 There arrived a messenger, which comes from the king, which is 
 about to demand cattle. 
 
 Narrfla a si tandi ; u nga bona, so tuma umfana ukuba 
 a ku tsele, ukuba se si ya tanda kakulu ; 
 
 To-day we are not willing ; you may see, we will send a boy that 
 he may tell you, when we are already quite willing. 
 
 Ba be si tsenile, okokuti, ni nga k' oni loko ; si ya 
 
 ku za si ku tumane ; 
 They had told us, saying, you must not yet dispose of that; we are 
 
 coming to get it. 
 
 563. XII. D. Some of the forms, uses, and rela- 
 tions of the Present Perfect Tense : 
 
 Ngi balile ngaso isineke ; 
 
 I have written about consideration. 
 
 Bekake, nangu wumbila ; se ngi wonile ; 
 
 See, here is the maize ; I have already sold it. 
 
 Sa c lala ya ze ya fa inyanga ; ku te nga semva kvvoba 
 i fe inyanga, sa pindelake ; 
 
 We remained until the month expired ; it came to pass after the 
 month had expired, we went back again. 
 
 Uma ku fikile ukufa, (umuntu) u ya tabata into a ye 
 enyangeni ; 
 
 When sickness has arrived, a person takes something and goes to 
 the doctor. 
 
 Inyanga be i si ya tula, i si tabata itongwane layo, 
 i bi si ti, wozani, si ye lapaya. Ni pete intoni na ? 
 Se be ti, O 'nkos', a si pete 'luto ; si pete, nansi 
 intwana ; 
 
 After a long silence, the doctor then takes his snuff-box, and says, 
 come, let us go yonder. What have you brought ? Then they 
 say, O king, we have not brought anything ; we have brought, 
 here is a trifle. 
 
 564. XIII. E. Some of the forms, uses, and rela- 
 tions of the Past Perfect Tense : 
 
 Be be se be fikile na ? la ; be be sa bekiwe ; 
 
 Had they already arrived ? No; they were still expected.
 
 USE OF TENSES. PAST PERFECT. 357 
 
 Kvva ti\va ekaya, izinkomo za Tiwa peseya, okoba 
 inkosi abantu ya be i ba nikile (zona) ; 
 
 At home, it was said, the cattle were eaten beyond (the river), be- 
 cause the king had given (them) to the people. 
 
 Yena wa ti, nokuba wa be botsiwe, a ka yekanga um- 
 sebenzi wake; 
 
 He indeed, even though he had been imprisoned, did not give up 
 his work. 
 
 Nga be ngi nge yi bone, uma lo 'muntu wa be e nga 
 ngi kombisanga ; kodwa nga yi bona ngaye yena a 
 ngi kombisayo ; 
 
 I should not have seen it, if that man had not directed me; but I 
 saw it by means of him who directed me. 
 
 Uma a be si pe ukuTa, sa be si ya ku in tanda ; 
 kodwa 'a si panga, a si yi ku m tandake ; si m 
 tandelani, loku e nga si piyo ukuTa, ukuba si Te 
 pela, si dzabule, izin'liziyo zetu zi tokoze na ? 
 
 If he had given us food, we should have loved him ; but he did not 
 give us, and so we shall not love him ; why should we love him, 
 since he does not give us food, that we may eat indeed, rejoice, 
 and our hearts be glad ? 
 
 Ba fika kusasa, ya be se i file ; 
 
 They arrived in the morning, after it had died. 
 
 Ubaba o tandekayo wa be se e file ; 
 
 My dear father had already died. 
 
 Nga tabanga, se nga ti ngi nga nika yonke imfuyo 
 yelizwe, ukuba ngi bize kakulu ukuba a ngi zwe, 
 ngi lele uyekelo Iwake ; kodwa nga be se ngi pu- 
 tile ; wa be se e setuneni iminyaka e yisumi na- 
 mbili ; 
 
 I said, I would give all the wealth of the world, if I might call so 
 loud that he would hear me, that I might ask his forgiveness ; 
 but I had already lost the opportunity ; he had been in the grave 
 now twelve years. 
 
 Nga ku be nami ngi sa 'lalele, ukuba wa be e tsilo, 
 
 ukuti, umbila u nga woni ; 
 I should have waited for (him) until now, if he had said, you must 
 
 not dispose of the maize. 
 
 
 
 565. XIV. F. Some of the forms, uses, and rela- 
 tions of the Future Perfect Tense :
 
 358 SYNTAX. VERBS; IDIOMS. 
 
 Wena naye no ba se ni gidzimile ; 
 
 You and he will have run. 
 
 lima a si tumanga umfana, a si yi ku ba si tandile 
 uku tenga ; si nga tuma ngomsumbuluko ; kodwa 
 uma si nga sa m tumanga, si ya ku be a si tan- 
 danga; 
 
 If we should not send a boy, we shall not have been willing to sell; 
 we may send on Monday ; but if we should still not have sent 
 him, we shall have been still unwilling (to sell). 
 
 Uma ngi nga buyi ngomjibelo, ngi ya ku ba ngi tan- 
 dile uku c lala etekwini ; kodwa uma ngi nga tanda- 
 nga, no ngi beka ngomjibelo; 
 
 If I do not return on Saturday, I shall have been willing to remain 
 at the Bay ; but if I should not be willing, ye shall Took for me 
 on Saturday. 
 
 (Inkosi) a i se yi ku ze ya be i sa ku nika 'luto, nawe 
 wo ze u suke ku lelo innivva, wake kwenye indao ; 
 ku ti uma u su sukile, u ya ku biza inyanga yemiti 
 i ku c lanzise ; ku se i ku ze wa lu bona uto olu 
 nikwa inkosi ; 
 
 He (the chief) shall never more again have given thee anything, 
 until thou shalt have departed from that building spot, and have 
 built in another place ; and when thou hast already departed, 
 thou shalt call an herb-doctor that he may cleanse thee ; then 
 shalt thou have seen something given thee by the chief. 
 
 SECT. 4. Idiomatic Verbs, Forms, and Uses. 
 
 566. There are certain idiomatic verbs ( 216.), or 
 certain idiomatic forms and uses of the verb, which claim 
 attention. 
 
 567. The use of uku ti, as an auxiliary, has been 
 specified. (See 211., 2., b. ; 215.) It is used also : 
 
 1. As a kind of expletive in the sense of and, now, so 
 it was, it came to pass, to introduce a new subject, or 
 sentence ; thus, 
 
 Nga zalwaJEmlalazi. Kwa tike ngi se isikunTwane, 
 ng' emukake, nga ya ekaya komame ; 
 
 I was born at the Umlalazi. And while I was still a youth, I left, 
 and went to the home of my mother.
 
 IDIOMATIC VERBS, FORMS, AND USES. . >. ">n 
 
 Kwa ti ukuba ngi wele, nga funyanisa utnkwenyana. 
 wetu ; 
 
 And when I had crossed over, I found our brother-in-law. 
 
 2. In the sense of and, now, then, but, to denote a 
 connection between the subsequent and preceding pro- 
 position, and introduce an inference, or an explanation ; 
 thus, 
 
 Noma e gula, a nga sa Ti ukuTa, ku ti aba lala naye 
 ba m nike ukuTa, a ku nlabeke; ba ti, yiTana, funa 
 u nga bi namanTa ; 
 
 Or if he is sick, and does not still eat food, then those who live 
 with him give him food, which he accordingly refuses ; and they 
 say, eat, lest you have no strength. 
 
 Ku te nga semva kwoba i fe inyanga, sa pindelake. 
 Si te si sa c lezi imozana, lapa inyanga yetwasayo, 
 kwa fika ukuti, Isanlu si ya bizwa; sa kupukake, sa 
 fika enkosini. Si te si sa fika enkosini, kwa tiwa, 
 ma yi butane yonke (impi) ; ya butanake ; 
 
 And after the moon had expired, we went back. And as we were 
 waiting a little, while the moon waxed, there came to say, the 
 Sanku division is summoned ; accordingly we went up, and 
 arrived at the capital. And just as we arrived at the capital, 
 the command was given, let the whole army assemble ; and it 
 assembled accordingly. 
 
 Wa tuma unwabu ku 'bantu, uku za 'ku ti, ku tiwa, 
 ma ni nga fi. Ku te enTeleni unwabu Iwa libala ; 
 
 He sent a chameleon to men, to come to say, it is said, yc shall not 
 die. But the chameleon lingered on the road. 
 
 3. In the sense of say, do, make, and, now, thus, 
 that, to introduce some subordinate word, or clause ; 
 thus, 
 
 A fike a m bone, ukuti ka biyi ka c le ; 
 
 He comes and sees him, that he does not make a good fence. 
 
 Nami nge zwa ukuti a se ng' a'lule (amanzi) ; 
 
 I also felt that it (the water) had already overcome me. 
 
 Ya funa, oku nga ti i nga si 'langanisa pakati ; 
 
 It (the army) sought, as it were, to enclose us withm (its wings). 
 
 Uma a si na 'kwazi, ma si yeke, si tule, si ti, du ! 
 
 If we are ignorant, let us stop, be silent, and say nothing.
 
 360 SYNTAX. VERBS ; IDIOMS. 
 
 Naye o nga vuki kusasa, u ya ku ti, nlunju! a nga \vu 
 fumanisi umsebenzi wake kusi'lwa ; 
 
 He that does not rise early, shall say, heigh-ho ! and not overtake 
 his work at night. 
 
 Ba buka, ba ti, keue ! 
 
 They looked, and said, wonderful ! 
 
 4. In the sense of to ivit, namely, for instance, some, 
 certain, particular, in order to designate or specify 
 some person, place, or thing ; thus, 
 
 A ti, ukufa ku sendaweni e tile ; 
 
 He says, the disease is in a certain place. 
 
 Uma i ti, a no m funelani umuti o tile, ba in funela 
 
 wona ; 
 
 If he says, you must get him a certain medicine, they get it for him 
 
 568. This verb, or verbal noun, uku ti, used in 
 one or another of the senses already specified, (as also 
 uku ba,) is often found in a state of regimen, and some- 
 times in the locative case. 
 
 1. In a state of regimen ; thus, 
 
 Ku te nga semva kwoba i fe inyanga ; 
 
 And after the month had ended, literally, it said in the event of 
 that the moon died. 
 
 Kwa ku tso yona inkosi okokuti, ka si Te (izinkomo) ; 
 
 'The king himself had said that we might eat (the cattle). 
 
 2. In the locative case ; thus, 
 
 Ba ti, yeti, 'mngani, wena wa sekutini ; 
 
 They say, hail, friend, thou of a certain (place, office, or character, 
 i.e., thou shade of our ancestors). 
 
 U kona yena o ba ledayo abantu ba sekutini ; 
 
 There is one who destroys the people of said (kraal). 
 
 569. The infinitive uku ba, to be, is used, some- 
 times in its simple form, either full or contracted, and 
 sometimes in regimen, to signify, that, so that, since, if, 
 for, because; thus, 
 
 Wa ti, ai, a zi se ko, ngokuba sa Ta, ukuba kwa ku 
 tso yona inkosi okokuti, ka si Te ; 
 
 He said, no, there are no longer any, for we ate (them), since the 
 king himself had said that we might eat (them)
 
 IDIOMATIC VERBS, FORMS, AND USES. 361 
 
 Ukuba amanzi a ye se kona nga pambili amaningi, 
 nga ngi nga se yi ku wela, ngokuba nga se ng* 
 a'lulekile ; 
 
 If the water had gone still on there further in abundance, I could 
 never have crossed, for I was already exhausted. 
 
 570. The infinitive uku ma, to stand, is used some- 
 times in full, sometimes contracted, and sometimes in 
 regimen, to signify if, when, whether, that, for, be- 
 cause ( 212., Rem. 2.) ; thus, 
 
 Kwa ti ukuma ng' aluleke, a tanda amanzi uku ngi 
 yisa pansi ; 
 
 And when I was exhausted, the water wished to take me to the 
 bottom. 
 
 Ka s' azi kochva ukuma wa ke wa 'langana ini naye 
 na ; 
 
 We do not know whether he ever met with him. 
 
 Ka ku lungile okwomane si c lale endawonye sonke 
 nezingane zetu ; 
 
 It is not good that we should all remain together with our children. 
 
 571. The form ukuze, from uku za, to come, is 
 used to signify until, that, so that, in order that ( 210., 
 4.) ; thus, 
 
 Jnyama ba yi ngenisa enTwini, ba yi valele kona, be 
 ti, ma ku Te oyise, ukuze ba bone ukuba be ku c la- 
 tselwe bona, ba si pe imfuyo eningi, ukuze ku sinde 
 izingane zetu na ti ; 
 
 They put the meat in a house, and shut it up there, saying, let the 
 fathers eat, that they may see that it was slaughtered for them, 
 and grant us much wealth, so that we and our children may 
 escape. 
 
 572. The verbs buya, return, and pinda, repeat, are 
 often used in the sense of again, and, also : 
 1. Buya; thus, 
 
 Nga fika kona imiatsana ku linywayo, nga ze nga li 
 Ta i'lobo; kwa fika ubusika; kvva buye kwa linywa, 
 ngi sa 'lezi kona ; 
 
 I arrived there just as they were beginning to dig, and there I passed 
 the summer ; winter came ; and again they dug, I still remaining 
 there. 
 
 2 T
 
 362 SYNTAX. VERBS; IDIOMS. 
 
 Nga huya nga pindela Uona pansi ; 
 
 Again I returned there to the bottom (of the river). 
 Nga buya nga iiunuma, nga banga pezulu ; 
 Again I sprung up, and made for the surface (of the water). 
 
 2. Pinda; thus, 
 
 Sa fika kwela kwa c langezwa, sa lima , futi sa pinda 
 sa lima ; sa pinda sa lima ; 
 
 We arrived at the district of Hlangezwa, and planted ; also again 
 we planted ; and again we planted. 
 
 Sa c lalake ku leyo indao, sa lirna ; sa pinda futi sa 
 lima ; 
 
 And so we remained in that place, and planted ; also again we 
 planted. 
 
 573. The root funa, want, to be destitute of, is 
 used in the sense of lest, that not, for fear that; thus, 
 
 Ba ti, yiTana, funa u nga bi namanTa ; 
 
 They say, eat, lest you have no strength. 
 
 Linda izinkomo, funa zi ngene ensimini ; 
 
 Watch the cattle, that they may not enter the garden. 
 
 Ba ti, woza lapa, zi yeke izinkomo, zi za ku zingenela 
 (esibayeni) ; a tike yena, funa zi nga ngeni ; 
 
 They say, come here, let the cattle alone, they are about to enter 
 (the fold) of themselves ; but he says, (not so,) lest they should 
 not enter. 
 
 Ngi biyela okoba funa zi fo'le ; 
 
 I am building up the fence, lest they should break through. 
 Ngi basa ukubane funa ngi nga bi namakaza ; 
 I kindle a fire in order that I may not be cold. 
 
 Ku sibekele kakulu, funa ku ze ku ti ku bonwe nga- 
 bantu ; 
 
 Cover it up well, lest it come to pass that it be seen by the people. 
 
 U papile kakulu, ukuba funa umtwana a nga bi na- 
 manTa okubona ; 
 
 She was very anxious, lest her child should not be able to see. 
 
 Ng' esaba, nga ti funa izinkabi zi hambe z' apule 
 
 irniti ; 
 I was afraid, lest the oxen might go and break the trees. 
 
 574. The verb \ala, begin, is often used in the sense 
 of the adverb first; thus, 
 
 Wa Jala wa ya nga kona ; 
 
 He first went there,
 
 IDIOMATIC VERBS, FORMS, AND USES. 363 
 
 575. The verb pela, cease, terminate, come to an 
 end, is used in the sense of the adverbs then, therefore, 
 of course , consequently; thus, 
 
 Hamba pela ; Ma si tenge pela ; 
 
 Go then. Then let us trade. 
 
 576. The form [ede, and sometimes \edana, from 
 , finish, end, is used in the sense of the adverbs as 
 soon as, ivhen, then, after; thus, 
 
 Wenze uku kanya ku kanye ezibukweni, name'lo oku- 
 bona jede ku ngene ; 
 
 He made the light to shine in at the windows, and eyes to see it after 
 
 it has entered. 
 
 Ukuba ni ku kulume emakaya jede ni goduke ; 
 That you may talk it over at home when ye return thither. 
 U se fike jede ka ba sa kulurni ngaye ; 
 As soon as he arrived they stopped talking about him. 
 
 Izindza zi ya in bona jede zi konkote ; 
 
 As soon as the dogs see him they bark. 
 
 U kona ini yena o za 'ku sumayela ku 'mantombazana, 
 o nga posa itse jede a nga be e sa ngena na ? 
 
 Would any one come to talk with the girls, and throw a stone, and 
 then not come in? 
 
 577. The'forms ponsa (posa), ponse, ponsu, from 
 ponsa (or posa), throw at ; and \itsa, \itse, litsu, from 
 litsa, sharpen, bring to a point, are used, generally with 
 the infinitive, in the sense of almost, well nigh, especially 
 when the idea of danger is involved : 
 
 1. Ponsa; thus, 
 Ngi ponse uku wa; 
 
 I nearly fell. 
 
 (Inkabi) i ya ku pose i fe nga semva kwami ; 
 The ox will nearly die after me, i.e., the danger is, the ox will 
 have died since I left home. 
 
 2. \itsa; thus, 
 
 Ni litse uku fa ; Ngi litse nga fa ; 
 
 Ye are in danger of perishing. I nearly died. 
 
 ^ 578. An idea of necessity, or obligation, is often de-
 
 364 SYNTAX. VERBS ; IDIOMS. 
 
 noted, in the one case negatively by musa, and in the 
 other affirmatively by ngapana. 
 
 1. The form musa (probably the causative of muka, 
 go away,) is used, with the infinitive expressed or under- 
 stood, to signify must not; thus, 
 
 Musa uku libala ; 
 
 You must not delay. 
 
 Musani uku tso loko ; 
 
 Ye must not say that. 
 
 Musa uku ngi buza ; 
 
 You must not question me. 
 
 2. The form ngapana, or ngapane, (nga, may, must, 
 and pana t reciprocal form of pa, grant,) is used in the 
 sense of should, must, must be, it is proper, necessary, 
 probable, of course, then; thus, 
 
 Uma i be i bizwe oyise, ngapane e nga se sindile ; 
 
 If it had been required by his paternal shades, then he ought to have 
 recovered. 
 
 Wa labanga, wa ti, ngapane i ya ku buya i zale ; 
 
 He thought, and said, probably it will have another calf or, it ought 
 to have another calf. 
 
 579. The forms sandu and kandu are used idioma- 
 tically: 
 
 1. Sandu (sa-andula, 216.) is used with the infini- 
 tive to signify just now, recently; thus, 
 
 Zi sandu ku fika ; Nga sandu ku yi tenga ; 
 
 They have just arrived. I have lately bought it. 
 
 2. Kandu (ka-andula, 216.), followed generally by 
 ukuma, is used to signify then, that, so that, in order 
 that; thus, 
 
 A ti, kandu kuma ku line, u nga biya ngama c la c la 
 
 alukuni ; 
 He says, in order that it may be firm, you must build with stiff 
 
 branches. 
 A fike a m bone, ukuti ka biyi ka c le, a tike, biya 
 
 ngamanTa, kandu kuma u z' a'lule ; 
 
 He comes and sees that he is not making a good fence, and accord- 
 ingly says, make it strong, in order that you may stop them (the 
 cattle).
 
 USE OF PARTICLES. 
 
 Kwo ze ku Tule leli 'sonda kandu kuina si hambe ; 
 
 When this week shall have passed then we must go. 
 
 Nawe u nga ya uku y\ tenga, kand' u be nayo ; 
 
 You also may go and buy it, and then you will have it or, vou 
 must go to buy it, in order that you may have it. 
 
 Ka i so ze ya be inkosi i sa ku nika 'Into, noma i ku 
 bona ; i si ya ku pa abanye ku be kupela. Kandu 
 ukuma i buye i ku pe, u ya ku suka ku leli 'lizwe, 
 u yo kwaka kwenye indao ; 
 
 The king will never more again give you anything, ven if he sees 
 you; he will continue to make presents to others only. In order 
 that he may show you favor again, you must leave this neighbor- 
 hood, and build in another place. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. 
 
 580. GENERAL REMARKS. The adverb, preposi- 
 tion, conjunction, and interjection, are often grouped, 
 as here, and put under the general head of particles. 
 In the signification and use of this class of words, the 
 interjection excepted, are involved some of the nicest 
 shades of meaning, and most important turns of thought. 
 
 In addition to what has been said of their nature and form, under the 
 head of Etymology, an indirect, though comparatively full illustration 
 of their use has been given in connection with other parts of Syntax, 
 especially in the discussion of propositions and sentences ( 392 430.) ; 
 in remarks upon the use of tie accusative after prepositions ( 450 
 457.); also upon the manner of denoting degrees ( 474 483.); and 
 upon the idiomatic use of verbs ( 566 579). After making a few 
 observations upon some of their more important peculiarities, in further 
 development of their use and construction, and also of the manner in 
 which their use is often dispensed with in the Isizulu, a series of 
 examples will be given, arranged in groups according to the several 
 kinds of propositions and sentences, and according to the discussion 
 already given in the first chapter of Syntax. 
 
 581. In the Isizulu, as in other languages, the dif- 
 ferent classes of particles often blend with each other in 
 their use. Hence
 
 366 SYNTAX. PARTICLES. 
 
 1. Adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions. 
 Of this class are katsana, kude, kanye. (See 329.) 
 
 2. Prepositions are sometimes used without a case, 
 as adverbs. Of this class are pansi, pakali, and some 
 others. 
 
 3. The same particle is sometimes used as an adverb, 
 and sometimes as a conjunction, or as a connective, and 
 as a non-connective, such as kodiva, ukuba, ukuma. 
 
 582. Both adverbs, and prepositions with their cases, 
 are often used substantively ; also, an adverb and a pre- 
 position governing it are sometimes written together as 
 a compound word : 
 
 1. Adverbs used as a noun ; thus, 
 
 Um'langa wa kona u fana nezinti zesiswebu, a wu fani 
 nowa lapa ; 
 
 The reed of there (i.e., of that country) resembles whip-sticks, it 
 does not resemble that of here (i.e., of this place). 
 
 2. A preposition and its case may be used sometimes 
 as a noun ; thus, usuku Iwa nam c la, this day, i.e., the 
 -day of to-day ; umsebenzi wa ngomso, the work of to- 
 morrow; abantu ba kwa Zulu, the people of Zululand. 
 
 3. An adverb and a preposition may be written to- 
 gether as a compound word ; thus, nakanye, at once, 
 never ; napakade, for ever. 
 
 A. THE ADVERB. 
 
 583. Adverbs modify sentences, phrases, and words, 
 particularly verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs; thus, 
 
 Ba kala kakulu, they complain greatly ; a ka na 'sineke nakanye, he 
 has no care at all ; wa funa abantu, nembala wa ba tola, he sought 
 people, and verily he found them ; abelungu banezibindi ezikulu kakulu, 
 white people have very great courage ; wa buya wa ya emva kakulu, he 
 turned and went far back. 
 
 B. THE PREPOSITION. 
 584. Prepositions are followed by nouns in the
 
 USE OF PARTICLES. 367 
 
 oblique cases, chiefly by the accusative, but sometimes 
 by the genitive, or the locative. 
 
 1. The genitive is governed by the preposition ka; or 
 by the genitive particle a, united with the preformative 
 of the governing noun ; and occasionally by some other 
 preposition. (See 439 448.) 
 
 2. The accusative is governed by prepositions of 
 various kinds. (See 450 457.) 
 
 3. The locative is sometimes found in regimen with a 
 preposition. (See 459., 460.) 
 
 585. A few of the prepositions, as fe, fea, kwa, 
 rta, and nga, may be used each alone, i.e., singly ; 
 thus, 
 
 Kuye, to him ; nayt, with him ; ka mina, of me. But in respect to 
 others, for the most part, each preposition requires a complement ; 
 thus, eAuze nabo, near to them ; emva kwabo, in rear of them ; malun- 
 gana nabo, opposite to them ; pezu kwabo, above them. 
 
 REM. (a.) Doubtless those prepositions which require a comple- 
 ment were first used as nouns ; some in the locative case, as, eduze, 
 emra, or emveni, &.c. ; and some in the accusative, and governed by 
 other prepositions, as, nganeno (nga and neno), pakati (pa and kaii, 
 umkali), pezulu (pa and izulu). 
 
 (b.) But those nouns, in passing from notional to relational words, 
 still retain the use of the preposition (as na, ku, wa, &c.,) which was 
 first used to show the relation of one noun to another ; thus, eduze 
 nentaba, in contiguity with a mountain, i.e., near a mountain ; emra, 
 kwomuti, or emveni wamuti, in the rear of a tree, i.e., behind a tree. And 
 these substantival prepositions, or prepositional substantives, are not 
 only followed by a complemental preposition, but also often preceded 
 or governed by a preposition ; thus, nga seduze nentaba, nga semva 
 fnoomuli. 
 
 (c.) The use of ngenna (nga and tniiaj, as itself a 
 preposition, together with the complement nga before a 
 noun in the locative, or the genitive particle a with the 
 preformative y of in\\a (i-a=ya), is a good illus- 
 tration of the transitional process above stated. The 
 noun miirt, in ngen\\a t is sometimes used as an abridged 
 form of the plural izinua; thus, we may have ngenua 
 yonke=on every side ; or ngenua zonke=on all sides. 
 And this word may be used either with the locative, 
 taking nga as a complement ; thus, ngen\\a nga semu-
 
 368 SYNTAX. PARTICLES. 
 
 /tni, round about the tree ; or with the genitive, taking 
 its pretbrmative y or z with a (=yu> or za) as a com- 
 plement ; thus, ngen\\a yami, on my account ; ngcn\\a 
 yezono, on account of sin. 
 
 C. THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 586. Conjunctions are used to connect propositions 
 and sentences ; thus, 
 
 Futi, si y' esaba ukuba Umpande u ya ku tukutela ; 
 
 Again, we are afraid that Umpande will be angry. 
 
 U bulala abantu nemizi yabo ; 
 
 It destroys people and their towns. 
 
 REM. The conjunction na often has the appearance of connecting 
 single words ; but a careful analysis will show that in such cases we 
 must either regard the construction as elliptical, or consider na as a 
 preposition=n//i ; thus, kwa Jika indoda nomfana, there came a man 
 and a boy, that is, there came a man, and there came a boy ; or 
 there came a man with a boy ; sa beka nga pambili na nga semva, we 
 looked before and behind, that is, we looked before, and we looked 
 behind. (See 550.) 
 
 D. THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 587. 1. Some of the interjections are usually ad- 
 dressed to a person, or a thing, and followed by the noun 
 in the vocative form ; thus, 
 
 Yeti, 'mngani ! hail, friend ! bayeti, 'nkosi ! hail, king ! E 'baba ! O 
 father ! halala, 'banlu! welcome, people ! 
 
 2. Some of the interjections are generally construed 
 with uku ti; thus, 
 
 Ba buka, ba ti, keiie ! 
 
 They looked, and said, wonderful ! 
 
 Ku te lu sa tso ndzalo, Iwa mbetsezwa intulo, uku ti, 
 iya ! 
 
 And as he was thus speaking, he received a slap in the face from 
 the lizard, saying, get thee gone ! 
 
 3. Interjections are sometimes used independent of 
 grammatical construction ; thus,
 
 SENTENCES. COPULATIVE ; ADVERSATIVE 369 
 
 Zi ko'lisa 'bani ? E ! u buza mina ? Nga sa buza 
 isigidi, ku lesu, 'mpakati, ha-ha, ku leso ; 
 
 Whom do they deceive ? oh ! do you ask me r A>k the sung. th;u 
 one, comrades, oh yes, that. 
 
 CHAPTER HI 
 SYNTAX OF S E N T E X C 
 
 588. The following examples are given, not only in 
 further illustration of the use of conjunctions, and of the 
 manner in which their use is often dispensed with, in Isi- 
 zulu ; but also in further illustration of the different kinds 
 of sentences, and of the remarks concerning them, as 
 already given in the first chapter of Syntax. 
 
 589. I. Co-ordinate Copulative Sentences 
 
 Izvve labo li c le, li nemiti ; 
 
 Their country is beautiful, and wooded. 
 
 Sa fika, sa c lala kwa za kwa linywa futi, sa ze sa wa 
 Ta lawa 'inabele ; 
 
 We arrived, and dwelt until they dug again, and then we ate that 
 grain. 
 
 590. II. Co-ordinate Adversative Sentences 
 
 Ba fika lapa abafundisi ; ba c lala ba lala iminyaka, ku 
 nga kolwa abantu ; noko a ba tsetsanga uku mka ; 
 
 Missionaries arrived here ; they remained many years, but nobody 
 believed ; yet did they not hasten to depart. 
 
 Inkosi ya ti, ni ya ku ze ni yo ku ba tabata, se be ku- 
 lile ; be njabake, ba ti, ai, 'nkosi, na ti si ya ku zi- 
 kulisela ; 
 
 The king said, ye shall go and bring them, when they are grown ; 
 but they declined, saying, not so, O king, but we will grow them 
 for ourselves. 
 
 Ku trvva, (inkomo) i bizwa uyise, kanti a i bizwanga 
 
 It is said, the cow was demanded by his paternal shade, whereas it 
 was not demanded. 
 
 2 u
 
 370 SYNTAX. SENTENCES. 
 
 Ukurna vva be ngi tsenile, nga ku be ku se kona ; se 
 nga ze nga kvvona ; 
 
 If he bad told me, it would have been here ; but 1 have been and 
 disposed of it. 
 
 Abantu ba bopa urnzimba vvodvva ; in'Iiziyo a ba yi 
 
 bopanga ; 
 Men bound the body only ; the heart they did not bind. 
 
 A n i zanga ni ba bone ; kanti ni y' azi ukuba ba be 
 kona, ngokuba ni ya bona aba kvvenzileyo ; 
 
 You never saw them ; and yet you know they were here, because 
 you see what they have done. 
 
 IVoko zimane, kodwa zi nesineke ; 
 
 Though they are small, yet have they wisdom. 
 
 591. III. Co-ordinate Disjunctive Sentences 
 
 Utino u ya si yaleza ukuba si lalele abazali betu, si 
 kulume iliniso ; lo 'mtwana a ku ko a kwenzayo ; 
 
 God commands us to obey our parents, and speak the truth ; but 
 this child did neither. 
 
 Inkuinbulo ya zizela kona na ? la ; ku ndzenga loku 
 le 'nTu i nga zizelanga ; 
 
 Did the mind come here by chance (literally, of, or for itself) ? 
 No ; no more than this house came here by chance. 
 
 Ngi ya linisa, a ngi kwambi, ndzenga loku ngi ng' 
 ambi ukuba lo 'mfana u name'lo amabili ; 
 
 I am sure I can no more doubt it than I can doubt this boy to have 
 
 two eyes. 
 
 U rni kubi ku nokuba a la'le ingalo neso ; yebo, u mi 
 kubi ku nokuba a la'le ukvvazi, a fakwe emlilweni ; 
 
 He is worse off than if he were to lose an arm or an eye ; yes, 
 worse off than if he were to lose his reason, or be put into the 
 fire. 
 
 A nga be e sa ba na 'si'lobo ezulwini, a nga be e sa 
 ba na 'si'lobo 'ndao ; okukulu ukuba e nga sa yi ku 
 ba na 'silobo ; 
 
 He has not a friend in heaven, nor any where else ; and, what is 
 more, he never will have a friend. 
 
 592. IV. Co-ordinate Causal Sentences 
 
 Inkosi ya ti, Wo! umuzi u ku fanele ridze na? ukuba 
 u sale, u tate abantu be ze kuwe, ba be ngabako na? 
 loku 'zinkomo ka zi se ko ria? 
 
 The king said, indeed ! would (not) a kraal just suit you ? so that 
 you could remain, arid receive people, who should come to you, 
 and be yours ? since there are no longer any caltle i
 
 SENTENCES. SUBORDINATE. 37 f 
 
 Loku ni ya bona ndze ba se 'zingane, ni ya ku ze ni 
 yo ku ba tabata, se be kulile ; 
 
 Since you just see they are yet children, you will go and bring 
 them, when they are grown. 
 
 Wa ti, ai, inkomo ka i nako ukutengeka kale, ngo- 
 kuba abantu se be tsaya umbila ; 
 
 He said, no, a cow does not pay well, because the people now set 
 a higher value on mai/e. 
 
 593. V. Subordinate Substantive Sentences 
 
 Kvva ti nga sernva kwelinye Hobo, kwa fika uku ti, 
 inkosi i ya wela ; 
 
 It came to pass after another summer, there came word that the 
 chief is crossing the river. 
 
 Kwa ti nga semva, kwa'laluka uku ti, Unongalaza u 
 bulewe ; 
 
 It came to pass afterwards, that news came, saying, Nongala/a has 
 been killed. 
 
 Ni ya bona ukuba ba se 'zingane ; 
 
 You see that they are still children. 
 
 Ka s' azi uku uta u ya ku zuza na ; 
 
 We do not know whether you will succeed. 
 
 Loko ku ya si bonisa isineke, ukuba si y' a'lula izinto 
 zonke ; 
 
 That shows us thought, how it excels all things. 
 
 A kwaziwa uma i ya ku pila noma i ya ku fa ; 
 
 It is not certain whether it will live or die. 
 
 Umfana u ya icla ku 'yise ukuba a m kwelise ebasini ; 
 
 The boy asks his father to put him on the horse. 
 
 594. VI. Subordinate Adjective Sentences 
 
 Ku te, se ku za ku linywa okunye, kwa 'lalukake isi- 
 
 pi c lika e si liteke ngaso ; 
 It came to pass, just as they were about to plant again, then there 
 
 broke out the war by which we were wasted. 
 
 S' onile na sovalweni Iwetu olu mi eduze, lu londa, lu 
 
 yala lapa s' onayo ; na ku yena Utino, o 'zimemezelo 
 
 zake si z' apula ; 
 We have sinned, both against our conscience which stands by, 
 
 watches, and reproves when we sin; and against God himself, 
 
 whose commandments we break. 
 
 Sa fika sa ku Ta loko 'kuYa e sa ku siyayo ku Ji- 
 nyiwe ; 
 
 We arrived and ate that food which we left planted.
 
 372 SYNTAX. SENTENCES. 
 
 Si jinisile ukuba zi kona izinto ezweni e si nga zanga 
 si zi bone na ? 
 
 Are we sure that there are things in the world which we have never 
 seen ? 
 
 595. VII. Subordinate Adverbial Sentences: 
 
 1. Of place 
 
 Ba zihambisa lapa be tanda kona ; 
 
 They betake themselves there where they please. 
 
 2. Of time- 
 
 Nga fika kvviti lapa ku linywayo ; 
 
 I reached home while they were planting. 
 
 Kwa ti nga semva inuatsana ku linywayo, ya fikake 
 inkosi ya buza ezimekwini ; 
 
 It came to pass just after they began to dig, the king came and in- 
 quired of the servants. 
 
 3. Of manner 
 
 Ku kona amasondzwana amaningana, so nga ti a kwe- 
 nzivvanga ngesanTa somuntu ; 
 
 There are very small wheels, so little as scarcely to be made by 
 the hand of man. 
 
 Umuntu o kolwayo u hamba ndzengomuntu e hamba 
 endaweni e nameva; ngokuba umuntu e hamba eme- 
 veni u ya bekisisa a beke izinyao ; a ka lalazeli ndze 
 ndzengomuntu e hamba ebaleni ; 
 
 A person who believes walks like a man walking in a thorny place ; 
 for a man walkjng among thorns looks carefully where he puts 
 his feet; he does not look abroad everywhere like one who 
 walks in a clear place. 
 
 Kwa nga ti ngi buyela emva esikatini sokububa 
 kwake ; 
 
 It was as if I had gone back to the time of his death. 
 
 4. Of causality; (a.) Conditional 
 
 Uma ku nga bonanga ku bonwa umuntu le 'mizi, ni 
 be ni ng' azi ukuba i kona imizi ndzalo na ? 
 
 Now suppose those kraals had never been seen by anybody, could 
 you know there were such kraals .? 
 
 (b.) Concessive
 
 SENTENCES. INCIDENTAL. 373 
 
 Noma li hamba lodvva li xajiwe izita ; 
 
 Although he goes alone he is surrounded by foes. 
 
 Nokuba be'lekisa ku yena, a ku ngenanga loko en'li- 
 ziy weni yake ; 
 
 Although they laughed at him, yet that did not enter into his 
 heart. 
 
 (c.) Telic- 
 
 Impela le inTu a yenzelwanga ukuba i lalwe ; 
 
 Of course this house was not made for a bed-room, literally, that 
 it be slept in. 
 
 Tandazani ukuba a ni linde ekwoneni ; 
 
 Pray that he may keep you from sinning. 
 
 596. VIII. Incidental Sentences 
 
 Sa suswa lapo, se si jutswa ngemikonto, ku tiwa sonke 
 si za ku landela Umawa ; sa ye s' aka kwela kwa 
 'langezwa ; 
 
 We were removed from thence, being driven with spears, it being 
 said we were all going to follow Mawa; and we built in the dis- 
 trict of Hlangezwa. 
 
 Kwa ti ngemva, inkosi ya ti, abantu bami, kwa be ku 
 'laliwa ngabo, ku tiwa ba za ku muka noMawa, 
 pindelani kona ezweni lenu, ni yo kwaka kona ; 
 
 And afterwards the king said, my people, they remained behind, 
 it being said they were about to depart with Mawa, return ye 
 to your own country, and build there. 
 
 Sa c lala kwa za kwa linywa futi, sa ze sa wa Ta lawa 
 'mabele, si sa e lezi kona emakaya ; 
 
 We remained till they dug again, and then we ate that grain, we 
 still remaining there at home. 
 
 (Impi) ya butanake, ya puma, i ya kwa Sikwata ; 
 
 It (the army) accordingly assembled, and went out, going to Si- 
 kwata. 
 
 Si te si sa 'lezi iniozana, lapa inyanga yetwasayo, kwa 
 fika uku ti, Isanlu si ya bizwa ; 
 
 And while we were waiting a little, until the moon waxed, there 
 came word that the Sanku regiment is called. 
 
 Loku si ya fika, si vela EmToti, si sa lima in'laba- 
 kanye ; 
 
 Since our arrival we come from the Umhloti we have as yet 
 planted only one season. 
 
 l\gi kala nga tsetsa nga suka kuye, kwa nga ti ngi 
 nga fa ; 
 
 Sobbing, I rushed from him, and thought I wished to die.
 
 374 SYNTAX. COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Kami kandzani ukuba ngi c labe inkomo yami, ku tiwa 
 i bizwe ngobaba, ngi nga ze nga sinda na ? 
 
 With me how is it that I offer my cow, it is said it was required 
 by my paternal shade, and yet I never recover. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
 
 597. In respect to the arrangement of words, we 
 know of no language which allows of greater freedom 
 than the Isizulu. The wonderfully Reflective character 
 of the language provides for the greatest, and most varied 
 inversion. But after the numerous direct, and incidental 
 remarks, which have been made upon the subject, in 
 various parts of the Grammar, it will not be necessary to 
 repeat, or add much in this place. A few general rules, 
 however, together with examples in illustration, may be 
 of service. 
 
 598. 1. The noun-subject may either precede or 
 follow the verb, though more frequently the former ; 
 'thus, 
 
 Abanlu ba kala, the people complain ; kwa Jika umuntu, there came 
 a person. 
 
 2. The verb and its pronominal subject often occupy 
 the first place ; and when the notional verb is required 
 in a subsequent part of the sentence, an affirmation is 
 often made at the beginning, by the use of uku ti; thus, 
 
 Ba tika lapa abafundisi ; 
 
 They came here teachers, that is, 'teachers came here. 
 
 Kwa ti kvvenye indao ya funyana abanye ; 
 
 It did at another place it found others. 
 
 Wa ti izinieku zenkosi zi ka 'Dingane e be zi zisile, 
 za ti se zi tnukile, wa leba iiebo ; 
 
 He did when the servants of Dingane, which brought them, when 
 they had departed,, he planned a plan.
 
 COLLOCATION OF WORDS?. 
 
 3. The object generally follows, but sometimes pre- 
 cedes the verb ; thus, 
 
 Abantu ba bopa umzimba wodwa ; irfliziyo a ba> yi 
 bopanga ; 
 
 The people bound the body only ; the heart they did not bind. 
 
 599. Sometimes both nouns, subject and object, 
 stand together before the verb, and sometimes together 
 after the verb, the subject preceding the object ; thus, 
 
 Usutu abantu lu ba jedile ; 
 
 The Sutu regiment has made an end of the people. 
 
 Induna umkumbu ya wu sondeza osebeni ; 
 
 The captain brought the ship to land. 
 
 Inkosi abantu ya be i ba nikile izinkomo ; 
 
 The king the people had given cattle, that is, the king had given 
 cattle to the people. 
 
 U gwazwa ndzalo Utsaka Udingane ; 
 
 Thus was Chaka killed by Dingane. 
 
 Sa ti si buyela kwa Sosengane wa se e in bulele Udin- 
 gane Utsaka ; 
 
 On our return from Soshengane (we found that) Dingane had 
 already killed Chaka. 
 
 ^ 600. 1. Modifiers usually follow the noun or verb 
 which they modify ; thus, 
 
 Umfana ivami, my boy ; uinuzi wabantu, village of the people ; 
 umuntu o lungileyo, a person who is good ; wa kala kakulu, he cried 
 hard ; bafika lapa, they arrived here. 
 
 2. But when prominence is to be given to the modifier 
 of a noun, the modifier is sometimes put before the 
 noun ; thus, 
 
 Owami u ml ana ; 
 
 My own boy. ( 511.) 
 
 Wo ! lukulu utando lu ka 'Tino, olu pezu kwetu ; 
 
 Oh, how great is the love of God, which is over us !
 
 APPENDIX: 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 SPECIMENS OF ZULU LITERATURE, 
 
 IN THE FORM OF 
 
 HISTORICAL EXTRACTS ; PERSONAL NARRATIVE ; A 
 SKETCH OF SUPERSTITIOUS CUSTOMS; A SAMPLE 
 OF PRAYERS TO THE SHADES OF THE DEAD: 
 AND A COLLECTION OF REGAL, HUNTING, AND 
 DOMESTIC SONGS; ALL TAKEN FROM THE NA- 
 TIVES, IN THEIR OWN TONGUE, AND ACCOMPANIED 
 WITH AN ENGLISH TRANSLATION. 
 
 I. HISTORICAL SKETCH OF CHAKA AND DINGANE. 
 
 Uyise ka 'Tsaka Usenzangakona ; uyise ka 'Senzanga- 
 kona Udzama; uyise ka 'Dzama Umbuzi; uyise wake a 
 ng' azi. Utsaka wa be e kwelinye ilizwe; wa be konzilc 
 yedwa ndze enkosini ya ku 'Mtetwa, Udingiswayo. 
 Kwa ti ukuba a kule a be indoda, we za ekufeni ku ka 
 'yise, ukuba 'abelwe endaweni ka 'yise, a be inkosi. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 The father of Chaka was Senzangakona ; the father of Senzanga- 
 kona was Jama ; the father of Jama, Umbuzi ; the father of him J 
 know not. Chaka was away in another country, serving alone, as it 
 were, the king of the Tetwas, Dingiswayo. When he was grown to 
 be a man, he came, after his father's death, to be crowned king in 
 
 2 v
 
 378 APPENDIX. 
 
 Wa c lala wa ba ngumbusi welizwe ; nezizwe zonke wa 
 z' a'lula ngamabanTa ake. Wa tuma impi yake ukuba 
 i bulale abantu namakosi onke a m zondayo ngobukosi 
 bake ; ngokuba wa ba namabuto a namanTa ; naye wa 
 tabata isi'langu sake wa hamba nayo impi yake. 
 ###*## 
 
 Wa hamba ilizwe lonke nganeno kwoTugela ; wa 
 hamba wa fika Emampondweni, ezizweni ezinye ezi nga 
 peseya kwoMzimkulu, na nga peseya kwoMzimvubu ; 
 wa hamba wa fika nganeno kwesizwe sAmanosa ; wa 
 buya, ngokuba be z' a'lulile. Ba buya ba buyela ekaya 
 naye Utsaka. Kodwa izulu la bulala inkosikazi, unina- 
 kazi ka 'Tsaka ; la duma la yi bulala leyo inkosikazi. 
 Ba buya ba ye 'kaya emuzini ka 'Tsaka, lapa ernfuleni 
 o bizwa uku ti Umvoti, lapo imizi ka 'Tsaka i be kona, 
 na nga peseya, na nganeno. 
 
 Nga semva wa pimisa impi yake, i hambela elizweni 
 eli katsana. Kwa ti impi i be i sa hambele, nga semva 
 kwa ti umne wake, nomunye umne wake ba c langana 
 nenieku ka 'Tsaka enkulu ; ba sumayela, be ti, si ya 
 funa ukuba si bulale Utsaka ; ngokuba si ya tanda natt 
 ukuba omunye a be inkosi, a lale endaweni yake Utsaka. 
 Nga semva ba funa umkonto, ba m gwaza ; ngokuba 
 amabuto ake a be e nge ko, a be 'lasele ezizweni ezinye. 
 
 place of his father. He became established as ruler of the land; and, 
 by means of his forces, he subdued all the tribes. He sent out his army 
 to destroy the people and all kings who hated him because of his glory ; 
 for he had mighty -soldiers ; he also took his shield and went with his 
 army. 
 
 * * * # * * 
 
 He went through all the country this side of the Tugela ; he went 
 as far as the Amampondo, other tribes beyond the Umzimkulu, and 
 beyond the Umzimvubu ; he went to this side of the Amakosa tribe ; 
 and returned when he had conquered them. They all returned and 
 went home, Chaka also among the rest. But the lightning killed the 
 queen, the renowned mother of Chaka ; it thundered and killed that 
 queen. They returned and went home to Chaka's kraal, here on the 
 river called Umvoti, there where Chaka's kraals were, both beyond 
 and on this side. 
 
 Afterwards he sent out his army to go to a distant country. And 
 while the army was still away on that expedition, a brother of his, and 
 another brother of his, conspired with a distinguished servant of 
 Chaka : they spoke, saying, we wish to kill Chaka ; for we also de-
 
 CHAKA AND DINGANE. 379 
 
 Kwa ti nga semva ukuba b' enze ndzalo, Udingane 
 wa tanda ukuba vena a be inkosi ; wa bulala omunye 
 umne wake o bizwa igama lake li ti Um c langana ndzalo. 
 Nga semva unina wa kala kakulu, ngokuba wa be dabu- 
 kile ngako ; naye wa tanda ukuba a fe nokufa ; ngokuba 
 wa be e dabukile, ngokuba umtwana wake wa bulawa 
 ndze e ng' onanga 'luto. Nga semva a fika amabuto, a 
 ku zwa e senTeleni loku ; amanye 'enanela, a tokoza, 
 ngokuba wa be bulala kakulu; abanye ba dabuka; aba- 
 riye ba tokoza kaliulu. 
 
 Kodwa Udingane wa Jala uku bulala noku c lupa. Wa 
 Jala wa bulala abanye bonke abakuluwa bake. Kodwa in- 
 duna yake umbusi o bizwa igama lake UnTela, wa it, 
 a ku se ko noyedwa ku 'bakuluwa bako; a ku se naye 
 umne wako, se u wedwa ndze enTwini ka 'yi c lo. Kodwa 
 mina ngi ti kuwe, " u rn yeke umne wako o bizwa igama 
 lake uku ti Umpande ; ngokuba a ku se naye umne 
 wako. Kubi kakulu ngokuba u bulele inzani ka 'yi'Jo 
 yonke." Ngako Udingane wa in yekela Umpande. 
 ****** 
 
 Kodwa Umpande wa baleka. Udingane wa tuma 
 izinkomo eziningi uku ko'lisa Umpande. Kodwa Um- 
 
 sire that another may be king and occupy Chaka's place. Afterwards 
 they sought a spear and stabbed him ; for his soldiers were not at 
 home, being out on an expedition against other tribes. 
 
 It came to pass after they had done thus, Dingane wished that h<- 
 might be king ; and so he killed another brother of his, named Um- 
 hlangana. Afterwards his mother wept bitterly, because of her griei' 
 thereat ; and she wished that she too might die, being grieved because 
 her son was wantonly slain when he had done no wrong. Afterwards 
 the soldiers came, having heard of this on the road ; some were glad 
 and rejoiced, because he had been a great destroyer ; others were 
 sorry ; others rejoiced greatly. 
 
 But Dingane began to kill and to persecute. He began by killing 
 all his elder brothers. But the king's captain, Unhlela by name, said, 
 'there is not one of thine elder brothers still living ; thou hast indeed 
 no brother ; just thou alone dost remain of thy father's house. But I 
 suggest to thee that thou shouldst suffer thy brother Umpande to live : 
 for thou hast no other brother. Wrong indeed would it be for thee to 
 cut off the last remnant of thy father." Wherefore Dingane suffereu 
 Umpande to live. 
 
 * * * * 
 
 But Umpande fled. Dingane sent many cattle to beguile Umpande
 
 380 APPENDIX. 
 
 pande wa in 'lakanipela ; w f azi ukuba lezi 'zinkomo zi 
 ya funa uku ko c lisa mina ; nga lezi 'zinkomo 'nam c la ngi 
 ngukufa. Wa ti izinieku zenkosi zi ka 'Dingane e be 
 zi zisile, za ti se zi mukile, wa leba iiebo ukuba a muke. 
 Wa tso wa tuma izinieku zake, wa ti, " hambani, ni 
 bikele isizwe sonke ukuba nga ye muka nam'la ; ngi za 
 ku vvela nga peseya kwoTugela ; ngi ya ku 'belungu, 
 ngi ya ku biza abelungu." Umuntu wa puma o ya 'ku 
 landela Udingane: "iii'lamvu i ya ku ngena nga sekanda 
 nga semva kwekanda lake, i zi pume ebusweni bake ; u 
 ya ku wa." Ngokuba Udingane amabuto ake wa be 
 w' a'lukanisele ; wa tuma amabuto ake elizweni elinye, 
 ukuba a tabate izinkomo zAmaswazi ; wa landeia ama- 
 buto ake, ngokuba we zwa ukuba Umpande wa funa 
 ukuba a m bulale. Ngako wa landela amabuto ake, wa 
 wa 'langabeza e se pendukile lapo a be e kona. 
 
 ****** 
 Kwa ti kwe zwakala ku tiwa, amabuto, noMpande, 
 n' Amabunu ba ye za ; ngako kwa fika ukwesaba oku- 
 kulu ku 'Dingane. Kodwa amabuto a ti, ma si wa <la- 
 ngabeze amabuto a ka 'Mpande. Kodwa Udingane wa 
 ti, impondombili, n' Amabunu namabuto a ka 'Mpande, 
 ni ya kwenza ndzani na ? Ma si dede ku le 'ndao, si 
 hainbe elizweni elinye. Kwa ti Udingane wa puma 
 
 But Umpande was too cunning for him; he knew that these cattle are 
 designed to beguile me; because of these cattle I am this day doomed 
 to death. And when the servants of the king Dingane, which brought 
 them, had departed, h,e formed a plan to flee. So he resolved and sent 
 his servants, saying, " go tell all the nation that I have fled this day ; 
 and that I am going to cross over beyond the Tugela, go to the white 
 men, and call on the white men for help." Some one went and told 
 Dingane : "a ball shall enter the hack of his head, and come out 
 through his face; he shall fall." For Dingane had divided his 
 forces ; and some of them he sent to another country, to take cattle 
 from the Amaswazi ; and he followed his soldiers, because he heard 
 that Umpande was seeking to kill him. Therefore he followed his 
 soldiers, and met them on their way back from whence they had been. 
 ****** 
 
 And report came, saying, the soldiers, with Umpande, and the 
 Dutchmen are coming ; wherefore great fear came upon Dingane. 
 But the soldiers said, let us go and meet Umpande 's forces. But Din- 
 gane said, two horns, the Dutchmen and Umpande's forces what 
 can you do ? Let us desert this place, and go to another country. And
 
 CHAKA AND DINGANE. 381 
 
 kwoku'lwa, wa hamba ebusuku, namabuto ake, nezi- 
 nkomo, nabantu bonke. Wa ti vva lala pezu kweMTo- 
 losi Emnyama. Kwa ti kusasa k\va vukvva Udingane 
 namabuto ake; wa hamba ngamanTa; a landcla amabuto 
 a ka 'Mpande. Kwa ti wa hamba ngamanTa Udingane; 
 wa fika Emagudu ; wa wela Umkuze ; wa hamba, wa 
 fika Embongobongweni, emuzini wenduna enkulu ya 
 sEmbelebeleni. Wa lala usuku la ba lunye, wa Tula ; 
 ngokuba kvve zwakala uku ti, amabuto a ka 'Mpande a 
 se kufupi. Wa hamba wa ya wa fika pezu kwoPon- 
 golo, umfula omkulu. 
 
 * * * * # 
 
 Kwa ti kwa fika isigidzimi ku 'Dingane, ku tiwa, 
 Dela nanfla ; amabuto a notsiwe nam'la ngAmabunu. 
 Ngako Udingane wa tabata izi'lalo zake, wa zi nika 
 kwizimeku, wa suka wa hamba, e baleka ; wa ya eli- 
 zweni lAmanyao ; vva c lala kona inyanga ya ba 'nye. 
 Kwa ti ngenyanga yesibili a fika amabuto a ka 'Maswazi 
 ebusuku, a 'langanisa lo 'muzi a be e kona ; ngokuba 
 wa be nge se nawo amabuto amaningi, a be iniozana. 
 Ngako wa puma wa ngena e c latini ; ba m c laba ngo- 
 mkonto etangeni. Wa ngena e'latini, wa c lala ; se li 
 pumile ilanga lapo le 'nsuku, wa fa ngayo. Kwa ba 
 knpela kwake. Kwa ti abanye bonke ba buya uku 
 
 Dingane departed in the evening, and traveled by night, together 
 with his soldiers, and cattle, and all his people. And he slept upon the 
 Black Folosi. And in the morning, Dingane with his soldiers rose, 
 and traveled hard ; and Umpande's soldiers followed them. And 
 Dingane journeyed on with all speed, reached the Magudu, crossed 
 the Umkuze, and went on till he reached Imbongobongo, a kraal of 
 -he great captain of Belebele. There he rested one day, and passed 
 on ; for report came, saying, the soldiers of Umpande are quite near. 
 He traveled on and reached the great river Pongolo. 
 
 ****** 
 
 And there came a runner to Dingane, saying, Yield to-day ; to-day 
 the army is routed by the Dutchmen. Therefore Dingane took his 
 luggage, gave it to his servants, arose and fled ; he went to the 
 Amanyao district, and remained there a month. And on the second 
 month there came soldiers from the Amaswazi by night, and surrounded 
 the kraal where he was; for he had not many soldiers, only a few So 
 he left and went into a jungle; but they stabbed him in the thigh. He 
 entered the jungle and remained ; and when the sun rose there that 
 day, he died. That was the end of him. All the people returned to 
 
 2 W
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 buyela ku 'Mpande, nazo izinkomo zomkuluwa wake. 
 Wa Ta ifa lomfo wabo ; ngokuba ku be ku nga se ko 
 omunye umfo wabo, ngokuba se yedwa Umpande. 
 
 SKETCH OF THE SAME BY ANOTHER. 
 
 Ba ti abadala Utsaka wa be inkosi e nolaka, e kuluma 
 ngokubulala ; wa ye bulala abantu ndze kodwa ; a ba 
 yeke aba ka 'yise; wa be bulala abanye bezizwe ezinye. 
 Wa bulawa Um c langana umne wake noDirigane. Ba 
 be be m zonda, ba banga ubukosi. Wa bulawa aba ka 
 'yise. Udingane wa ba yinkosi endaweni yake. Wa 
 bulala Um c langana umne wake ; e saba ngokuba e za 
 ku banga naye ubukosi. Udingane wa bulala bonke 
 abantu, naba ka 'yise; wafuna uku ba leda aba ka 'yise. 
 Kwaba ka 'yise wa sala Umpande. Wa be e za ku m 
 bulala Umpande ; w' ala UnTela, induna enkulu, e ti, 
 a ku fanele uku banga naye ubukosi. Udingane wa m 
 lalela UnTela, wa m yeka Umpande. 
 
 Nga semva Umpande wa vukela Udingane, wa tabata 
 abanye ba ka 'Dingane, wa buyela nganeno kwoTugela 
 Izizwe zonke ezinye zabantu ba ka 'Dingane za m Ian- 
 
 go to Umpande, together with the cattle of his elder brother. He in- 
 herited their brother's estate ; for there was no other of their brothers 
 alive, save Umpande alone. 
 
 - TRANSLATION. 
 
 The old people say that Chaka was a cruel king, always talking of 
 killing ; but he used to kill only the common people, and leave his 
 lather's children alive ; he used to kill those of other tribes. He 
 was killed by Umhlangana his brother and Dingane. They were 
 hating him, and had their eye on the sceptre. He was slain by his 
 father's sons. Dingane was king in his stead. He killed his brother 
 Umhlangana, fearing lest he should dispute the sovereignty with him. 
 .Dingane slew everybody, even his father's sons ; he wanted to make 
 an end of his father's sons. Of his father's sons there remained Um- 
 pande. He was about to kill Umpande; but his great captain Unhlela 
 objected, saying, it is not best to dispute the sovereignty with him 
 Dingane listened to Unhlela, and suffered Umpande to live. 
 
 Afterwards Umpande rose against Dingane, took some of Dingane 's 
 people, and withdrew to this side of the Tugela. All the other tribes
 
 PERSONAL NARRATIVE. 
 
 ciela. Nga semva Udingane we zwa ukuba Umpandt 
 vva baleka nabantu ; wa tuma impi uku tabata izinkomo 
 nabantu. Umpande wa njaba nabantu nenkomo, e ti, 
 ngi ya ku pumisa impi yami. Abantu be sa buyela ku 
 'Dingane, Umpande wa yi tuma impi yake uku Iwa nayo 
 impi ka 'Dingane. Udingane wa pumaekaya wa baleka 
 kude, vva ya kwAmanyao ; wa yi tuma impi yake uku 
 'langana nayo impi ka 'Mpande. Wa 'langana Ema- 
 lonjo. Udingane wa bona ukuba Umpande wa ba na- 
 inanTa ukwa'lula, wa bulala UnTela ; ngokuba e ti, 
 vvena u nlabile nave Umpande ukuba ngi m bulale ; u 
 se Iwa nami kaloku ; wa ti wena, "a ka yi ku Iwa nawe." 
 Wa in bulala ndzalo UnTela. Kodwa impi ka 'Mpande 
 ya iiotsa impi ka 'Dingane. Kodwa Udingane a ka bu- 
 lawanga uye ; wa bulawa Amaswazi, ngokuba Udin- 
 gane wa be e se yedwa. Abantu bonke ba ka 'Dingane 
 ba langana naye Umpande, ba konza kuye. Kwa ba 
 uye inkosi. 
 
 II. AUTOBIOGRAPHY. 
 
 Ukuzalwa kwami, kambe, nga zalwa Emlalazi. Kwa 
 tike, ngi se isikunTwane, ng' ernukake, nga ya ekaya ko- 
 
 of Dingane 's people followed him. Afterwards Dingane heard that 
 Umpande had fled with the people ; and he sent an army to take the 
 cattle and the people. Umpande refused to give up the people and 
 cattle, saying, I shall send out an army of my own. As the messen- 
 gers were returning to Dingane, Umpande sent his army to fight with 
 Dingane 's army. Dingane left his home and fled far away, and went 
 to the Amanyao; and then sent his forces to meet Umpande's army. 
 He met him at the Amakonko. Dingane saw that Umpande was able 
 to conquer, and killed Unhlela ; because, said he, you opposed my 
 killing Umpande ; and now he is fighting me ; you said, "he will not 
 fight with you." So he killed Unhlela. But Umpande's army routed 
 the army of Dingane. But Dingane was not killed by him ; he was 
 killed by the Amaswazi, for Dingane was now alone. All Dingane 's 
 people joined Umpande, and served him. He became king. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 la respect to my birth, of course, I was born on the Unilalazi. And 
 so it was. while 1 was still a child, I left and went to the home of my
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 mame. Nga fika kona innatsana ku linyvvayo ; nga ze 
 nga li Ta i'lobo ; kwa fika ubusika ; kwa buye kwa 
 linywa, ngi sa lezi kona. Kwa ti ngemva, lapa ku fika 
 ubusika, be za 'ku ngi tabata. Nga fika kwiti lapa ku 
 liny wayo. La Tivva i c lobo. Kwa ti nga semva kwelinye 
 i'lobo, kwa fika uku ti, inkosi i ya wela. Kwa welake. 
 Kwa ti nga semva kwa buywa. Sa fika sa ku Ta loko 
 'kuTa e sa ku Siyayo ku linyiwe ; kwa buye futi kwa 
 linywa ; sa ku Ta loku futi ukuTa. Kwa ti nga semva 
 ya fika inkosi, i tumile isigidzimi sokuza 'ku buza, uku ti, 
 izinkomo za ya ngapi na? Kwa tiwa ekaya, izinkomo 
 za Tiwa peseya, okoba inkosi abantu ya be i ba nikile. 
 Inkosi ya wu tabatake urnuzi wonke. Kwa ti abantu ba 
 lowo 'muzi wa kiti, b' esuka ba liteka. 
 
 Kwa tike tina sa sala kona kuzo izinkomo, sa hamba 
 nazo. Inkosi ya fike ya tabata amasumi amane. Sa 
 buyake, sa c lalake ku leyo indao. Sa lima ; sa pinda 
 futi sa lima ; sa pinda sa lima. Kwa ti nga semva, kwa 
 'laluka ukuti, Unongalaza u bulewe. S' esukake sonke 
 isizwe sa wela ukuwela ku ka 'Mawa. (Tina) sa suswa 
 lapo, se si jutswa ngemikonto, ku tiwa sonke si za ku 
 landela Umawa ; sa ye s' aka kwela kwa 'langezwa. Sa 
 fika kwela kwa 'langezwa ; sa lima ; futi sa pinda sa lima ; 
 
 mother. I arrived there just as they were planting ; and there I spent 
 the summer ; winter came ; and again they planted, I still remaining 
 there. It came to pass afterwards, when winter came, they came to 
 take me. I reached home while they were planting. The summer was 
 spent. And after another summer, there came word that the king is 
 crossing the river. He went over accordingly, and afterwards returned. 
 We arrived and ate that crop which we had left planted ; and again 
 they planted; and this crop we also consumed. It came to pass after- 
 wards that the king sent a messenger to come and inquire, saying, 
 where have the cattle gone to ? At home, the reply was, the cattle 
 were eaten on the other side of the river, because the king had given 
 them to the people. The king accordingly took the whole kraal. 
 And the people of that kraal of ours were now destroyed. 
 
 But then we ourselves remained there with the cattle, and went with 
 them. The king came and took forty head. We then returned, and 
 so dwelt at that place. We planted; again we planted; and still again. 
 It came to pass afterwards, there came report, saying, Nongalaza has 
 been killed. Accordingly the whole tribe now left and passed over, 
 which flight is known as that of Mawa. We ourselves were removed 
 thence, being driven by spears, it being said that we were all going to 
 follow Mawa. So we went and built in the district of Hlangezwa. We
 
 PERSONAL NARRATIVE. 38,5 
 
 sa pinda sa lima. Kwa ti ngetnva, inkosi ya ti, abantu 
 bami, kwa be ku 'laliwa ngabo, ku tiwa ba za ku muka 
 noMawa, pindelani kona ezweni lenu ; ni yo kwaka kona. 
 Kwa ye kwakiwake Elungoye, ku vela kwa Bulawayo. 
 S' emukake lapo, sa kupuka, sa ya ku 'lala kwomkulu 
 (umzi, kwa Tukusa). Kwa fika kwa ti izinieku, za ti, 
 a ku fanele ukuba ngi nga ya emapanTeni, ngi siya 
 itunga lenkosi li nga sa patwa 'muntu. 
 
 Kwa ti nga semva kwa linywake, a ze a Tiwa lawo 
 'mabele. Kwa ti nga semva, innatsana ku linywayo, ya 
 fikake inkosi ya buza ezimekwini, ya ti, abafana aba 
 patayo itunga abapi na ? Sa si tso izinieku sa ti, nga- 
 paya kwomuzi, batatu ; ngapa kwomuzi futi, bane. Kwa 
 linywake, i sa c lezi kona kwiti. Kwa ti nga semva, lapa 
 amabele ebomvu, ya ti kimina inkosikazi, 'a ku we'le 
 uku yo ku bona unyoko. Nga ti ngi nga ka 'lali ekaya 
 inyanga i se 'nye, wa fika umuntu o se zo ku ngi 
 tabata. Ng' emukake, nga fika kona. Kwa ti ngelinye 
 ilanga ya fika inkosi, i hambele kona kwa Tukusa ; ya 
 fikeke, ya 'lala izinsuku ezine ; ya si biza, ya ti, nonke 
 nina 'bafana aba pata itunga lami, ka ni yi ku za na 
 'buto ; kona se ni kulile, ngi ya ku tanda ukuba ngi ni 
 
 arrived at Hlangezwa, and planted ; and again we planted ; and so a 
 third time. It came to pass afterwards, the king said, my people, who 
 remained steadfast, when it was said they were about to leave with 
 Mawa, return ye to your own country, and build there. Accordingly 
 they went and built at Lungoye, coming from Bulawayo. Then 
 we departed thence, and went up to the king's, to dwell at the capital 
 (Tukusa). At length the servants came and said, it would not be 
 allowed me to go to the country kraals, and leave the king's milking 
 without a person to look after it. 
 
 It came to pass afterwards that they planted, and then that grain 
 was eaten. And then, soon after they had begun to plant, the king 
 came and inquired of the servants, and said, where are the boys 
 who have charge of the milking ? Then we servants answered and 
 said, at the kraal yonder there are three ; here again at this kraal, 
 four. The planting season found him still residing there with us. 
 Afterwards, when the corn was beginning to ripen, the queen said to 
 me, come, go down and see your mother. But before I had remained 
 at home a single month, there came a man to take me. Therefore 1 
 left, and went back there. And one day the king came, and sojourned 
 there at Tukusa ; he came, and dwelt four days ; he called us, and 
 said, all ye boys who have charge of my milking, ye shall be exempt 
 from common duty ; as soon as ye have grown to manhood, I shall- be 
 
 2 x
 
 386 APPENDIX. 
 
 tele kona lapa. Ya ti nga semva, butani abafana abanye 
 bemizi yonke, be ze 'ku lima. Sa ba butake ; ba fikake, 
 ba lala, ba lima izinyanga ezi yisitupa. La Tiwa lelo 
 i'lobo. Kwa ti nga semva, ya ti inkosikazi, ye'lanini, 
 ke tii ye emakaya enu. S' eukake, sa fika, sa c lala, kwa 
 za kwa tika uku linywa futi ; sa ze sa wa Ta lawa 'mabele, 
 si sa c lezi kona emakaya. Kwa ti nga sernva kwa lawa 
 'mabele, ya si biza inkosi, ya ti, hambani nonke, ni yo 
 kwaka ezansi etafeni Elukula. Sa fika Elukula. Si te 
 si sa Jala uku fika Elukula, sa tombake, sa babili ; s' 
 emukake, sa ya emapanTeni ; sa lalake, ya ze ya fa in- 
 yanga. Ku te nga semva kwoba i fe inyanga, sa pincLe- 
 lake. Si te si sa c lezi iniozana, lapa inyanga yetwasayo, 
 kwa fika uku ti, Isanlu si ya bizwa. Sa kupukake, sa 
 tika enkosini. Si te si sa fika enkosini, kwa tiwa, ma 
 yi butane yonke (impi) ; ya butanake ; ya puma, i ya 
 kwa Sikwata. Kwa ti ya buyake kwa Sikwata. Sa ti 
 si sa fika sa funyanisa ukuTa se ku 'lakulwa. Kwa ti 
 ku sa vunwa loko 'kuTa, ya butana, i si ya Eswazini. 
 Ya buyake Eswazini, ya fikake, ya c lala ; la Tula ilobo; 
 kwa pinda kwa linywa ; la Tula i c lobo. Ku te, se ku 
 za ku linywa okunye, kwa 'lalukake isipi'lika e si liteke 
 ngaso tina. 
 
 glad to station you here. He said, afterwards, assemble ye the other 
 boys of all the kraals, that they may come and dig the gardens. And 
 so we assembled them, and they came, remained, and dug for six 
 months. That summer was spent. And afterwards the queen said, 
 go ye down, and return to your homes. Therefore we went down, ar- 
 rived, and dwelt until the season for planting arrived again ; and then 
 we ate that grain, still remaining there at home. And after that grain 
 was spent, the king called us, and said, go, all of you, and build down 
 country, on the Kula plain. We went to Kula. And just as we arrived 
 at Kula, we became of age, two of us ; and so we left, and went to 
 the country kraals ; and there we remained till the end of the month. 
 And after the month had expired, we returned. And while we were 
 remaining a little, till the moon should wax, there came word that the 
 Sanku regiment is called. Therefore we went up, and arrived at the 
 king's. And just as we arrived at the king's, order was given for the 
 whole army to assemble. It assembled accordingly, left, and went 
 against Sikwata. Then it came back from Sikwata. And as we re- 
 turned we found the people weeding their gardens. As soon as that 
 crop was gathered in, the army assembled and went against the Ama- 
 swazi. Then it returned from the Amaswazi, arrived, and remained ; 
 the summer passed ; they planted again ; and the summer passed. And
 
 THE PRINCES AND THEIR BATTLE. 387 
 
 III THE PRINCES KECHWAYO AND UMBULAZI, AND 
 THE BATTLE BETWEEN THEM 
 
 Uietswayo nuMbulazi ukuzalwa kwabo intanga inye. 
 B' a c luke ngonina. Uietswayo wa zalwa kvva 'Njumbazi. 
 Umbulazi \va zalwa kwa 'Monasi. Kodwa ba 'langene 
 ngoyise ; uyise wabo munye. Uyise 'ka beka 'nkosi 
 pakati kwabo ; ngokuba ba be isinuku, be baningi. IT 
 te e se yi beka inkosi pakati kwabo, ba se be nako uku- 
 vukelana; ngokuba ba se be kulile bonke. Wa ti uyise 
 wa be e sa landa ukuvela ; ngokuba Umonasi wa be e 
 mnikiwe Utsaka; wa ti, ngi zalele, wena ka 'baba, naku 
 mina ngi nga zali; ngokuba ngi yinkosi, ngi busa izwe; 
 wena u ya zala. 
 
 Ukubanga kwabo ku vele ku leyo indao ; ngokubane 
 uyise u iandeokwa tsiwo ngUtsaka, wa ti, mina a ngi 
 nayo inkosi, ngokuba umzi u se ngo ka 'Tsaka ; nangu 
 Umbulazi, unmtwana ka 'Tsaka. Wena 'letswayo, 'ku 
 ko pakati kwomuzi wa kwa Zulu ; ngokuba emveni wo- 
 kuba ku fe Umbulazi, umuzi ngo ka 'Tsongweni, unit a 
 ka 'Dingane; k ti emveni kwoba ku fe Utsongweni, u 
 buseke wna 'letswayo. 
 
 just as they were about to plant again, there broke out the insurrection 
 by which we were destroyed. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 Kechwayo and Umbulazi were of equal age. They had different 
 mothers. Kechwayo was born of Nkumbazi ; Umbulazi was born of 
 Monasi. But they were related on their father's side, having both the 
 same father. Their father did not attempt to decide who of them should 
 be king; for there was a multitude of them. He knew that if he should 
 appoint one to the throne, there would be at once an insurrection among 
 them ; for they were all grown up. The father thought he would still 
 follow the custom ; for Monasi had been given to him by Chaka, say- 
 ing, thou son of my father, beget children for me, seeing I beget no 
 children ; for being myself king, my business is to rule the country ; 
 yours, to beget children. 
 
 Their struggle began in that way ; because the father adhered to the 
 instructions of Chaka, and said, " I have no king, for the kingdom 
 really belongs to Chaka ; here is Umbulazi, son of Chaka. Thou, 
 Kechwayo, hast no part in the Zulu sovereignty; for in case Umbulazi 
 should die, the kingdom would go to Chongweni, son of Dingane ; but 
 in case Chongweni should die, then thou, Kechwayo, wouldst rule."
 
 388 APPENDIX. 
 
 Umzi wonivva izo izinduna zi ka 'yise, ezi ya 'Jala nayc 
 Uietswayo ngapaya, nga sesita, uma uyise e nga boni. 
 Zi ti nokutso, u ya ko'liswa ; umzi ngowako. Ku kona ini 
 ukuti, be nga se ko lawo 'makosi na ? a sa fa na ? Ku 
 ti wena, uyi'lo e sa hamba, umuzi ku tiwe ngo vvaba nga 
 se na 'yise na ? Ku ti wena, uyi'lo e sa hamba, u ya 
 ko'liswa? uyi c lo a vvu pikelele, uku ti, umzi ngo ka 'Mbu- 
 lazi ? Mina a ngi naye umntwana, o nga busa umzi ka 
 'Tsaka, ngokuba li se kona itumbu lake. Mina owami 
 wa be e nga busa, kwa ku nge ko umntwana ka 'Tsaka ; 
 uma e kona umntwana ka 'Tsaka, mina ngi ti, owami u 
 ya ku ba induna yebuto kodwa ; ngokubane nami nga be 
 ngi ngumuntu ndze ; ngi balekile okwabane ngi bone 
 ukuti ngi za ku bulawa. Mina umzi ngi ye nga wu tata 
 ku 'belungu ; kandu ukuma nami ngi be inkosi. Kodwa 
 mina ngokwami a ngi tso okwokuti umuzi u nga buswa 
 ngowami umntwana ; ngokuba u se kona umniniwo umta 
 ka 'Tsaka. 
 
 Kwa ba konake ukutukutela ku 'letswayo; ka be e sa 
 'langana noyise. Kwa ze kwa ti ernveni kwa loku, Um- 
 pande wa zi buta izinduna ; za ti izinduna z' eniaba uku 
 kupuka 'ku ya 'ku bona inkosi. Kwa ze kwa ti ngemva 
 Umpande wa.mema injina, wa ti, ma i yo ku zingela in- 
 
 But the kingdom was disposed of by the father's captains, who lived 
 with Kechwayo there at a distance, out of sight; and that without the 
 father's knowledge ; for they said, thou art cheated; the kingdom is 
 thine. But is it really so thus argued Umpande and Umbulazi with 
 Kechwayo is it really so that those rightfol heirs to the throne are no 
 more ? are they really dead ? And while thine own father is still Hving, 
 is the kingdom said to belong to those who have no father ? And while 
 thy father is still alive, art thou cheated ? has not thy father contra- 
 dicted thee ? saying, 'the kingdom belongs to Umbulazi; I myself have 
 no child, who can rule the kingdom of Chaka, since there is an heir of 
 his still living. Mine own might rule, had Chaka no child. Since there 
 is a child of Chaka living, I appoint my own to be merely a military 
 captain ; for I also was just a common person ; and I fled because I 
 aw that I was about to be killed. I obtained what power I have from 
 the white people ; and it was by that means that I finally became king. 
 But for my own part I do not think that the kingdom should be ruled 
 by my own child, because there is an heir to it in the son of Chaka. r 
 
 Thus it was that Kechwayo became angry, and would no longer meet 
 his father. Then it came to pass after this, that Umpande assembled 
 the captains ; but the captains refused to go up to see the king. It 
 came to pass afterwards that Umpande appointed a hunt, and said, let
 
 THE PRINCES AND THEIR BATTLE. 
 
 yamazana; \va merna e ka 'letswayo ne ka 'Mbulazi. 
 Wa ti Uinbulazi w' enlaba; vva ti, mina a ngi tandi ; ngi 
 ya ku zirigela 'njina yani na ? loku umuzi a ngi \vu 
 bimbi BgaaianTa; umuzi ngo ka 'baba na ? nami umuzi 
 ngi wu nikwa nguye ubaba na ? Ngokwami nga ngi ya 
 ku ba rigumuntu ndze, ndzengaye ubaba ; naye wa be e 
 ngumuntu ndze. Mina a ngi ku tandi uku banga umuzi 
 ka 'baba, ubaba e se kona. 
 
 Kvva ze kwa ti ngemva, uyise wa m buyisa Uietswayo ; 
 wa ti, ke tnuke a ye ekaya lake. Kwa ti ngemva wa ba 
 biza bobabili. Wa ti Umbulazi w' e c la uku za ku 'yise; 
 wa ti Uietswayo w' enjaba, wa ti, a ngi yi ku za. Wa 
 ti uku pendula ku ka 'yise, wa ti, u nlabelani na? Se 
 ngi za ku ni nika izwe lenu, ku be ngulowo a zakele ka'le. 
 Ukubanga urna ni ya tanda, ni ya ku banga, ngi nga se 
 ko. Wa m nika elake Umbuiazi ; wa ti, ye'Ia, u yo 
 kwaka ku 'mfundisi Etsowe. 
 
 Kwa se ku 'laluka, se be c laba imikosi ku 'letswayo ; 
 ngokuba ba 'langene kakulu noletswayo ; ba ti, zi ye 
 niuka, zi ya esilungwini. Kwa se ku ba kona izin'lolt 
 zake. Kwa ze kwa ti sonke isizwe sa lengelelana uku 
 petela nga ku 'letswayo. Sa baleka sonke a wa be e m 
 zisa kuso uyise, sa ya nga ku 'letswayo. 
 
 them go and hunt game ; he invited Kechwayo's party, and also Umbu- 
 lazi's. But Umbulazi refused to go ; he said, I am not willing ; what 
 kind of a hunt should I have ? Neither do I seize the sceptre by 
 violence. Does it not belong to my father ? and is it not given to me 
 by my father ? For my own part I would be just a common man, as 
 my father was; for he was just a common man. This seizing upon Un- 
 throne of my father, while my father is yet alive, I cannot approve it. 
 
 It came to pass after a while, that his father sent Kechwayo back, 
 saying, come now go home. And afterwards he called them both. Um- 
 bulazi went down to the king ; but Kechwayo refused, saying, I shall 
 not go. But in reply the father said, why do you refuse ? I was about 
 to give you your country, that each might build and prosper for himself. 
 As to contending for the sceptre, if ye will do so, ye must do it when I 
 am no more. He gave Umbulazi his, and said, go down and build by 
 the missionary at Chowe. 
 
 Then the news broke out, that Kechwayo was marshalling the forces; 
 for the multitude sided with Kechwayo ; and they said, the cattle are 
 leaving, and going over to the white man. Now there were his spie^. 
 At length all the people moved each other to join Kechwayo. And all, 
 to whom his father had sent him, left Umbulazi, and went over to 
 Kechwavo. 
 
 2 Y
 
 390 APPENDIX. 
 
 Kwa ti ngemva kwa loku, kwa kona impi. Wa be e ya 
 ku kuluma okokuti, mina ngi ziswe ngubaba, uku ti, ka 
 ngi zo kwaka ku leli izwe eli sezansi. Kwa ba kona ku 
 'letswayo, uku ti, uyi'lo u ku nika izwe eli ngabelungu 
 ngani na? Wa ti yena uku pendula, wa ti, a ng' azi 
 mina ; leli ilizwe ngi li nikwe ngubaba kodwa. Wena, 
 'letswayo, i nga be ku kona o ku funayo kimina, u ngi 
 tsena. Yebo, mina ngi ya vuma, ngi 'lasele kuwe. Wa 
 ti Umbulazi, ai, mina, 'letswayo; a ngi nabo abantu bo- 
 ku'lasela mina ; nomuzi e ngi wakileyo ka siwo wami ; 
 ngo ka 'baba. Mina a ngi sa ku zwa loku kuwe ; mina 
 ngi 'lasela, e tso ndzalo Uietswayo. 
 
 W' euka Umbulazi uku za lapa ku 'mfundisi. U te e 
 sa fika, ya fika impi. Ba ti abantu bake, ba ti, Tula, u 
 ye pambili ; u ya bona loku na? ukuba Uietswayo u za 
 ku ku bulala na? Wa ti, yebo, ngi ya vuma ; ngi ya 
 ku Tula. Nakanye mina ka ngi so ze nga si dela isikala 
 e ngi si nikiwe ngubaba. Wa Tulake. U te e sa wela 
 Umatikulu, ya fika impi ngamanTa ; ya vela izintaba 
 zonke. Wa hambake, wa ze wa ye wa fika emzini ka 
 'Nongalaza. Ku te ku sa kusasa, wa yi Tula, e za ku 
 wela Utugela, e za ku 'Mantsonga. Za ti izinduna 
 zake, a ku fanele loku, wena umntwana, umuzi u c lale 
 
 It came to pass after this there was war. Umbulazi wished to reason, 
 and spoke to this effect : As for me, I was sent by my father, that I 
 should come and build in this low country. Then Kechwayo replied, 
 saying, why does your father give you a country contiguous to the white 
 men ? To this he replied, saying, I myself do not know ; I only know 
 that this country was given me by my father. You, Kechwayo, if there 
 is anything which you want of me, tell me. Yes, said he, I do tell you, 
 I want to fight with you. Umbuluzi replied, " not so I, Kechwayo; I 
 have no people for fighting ; and the kraal which I have labored to build 
 is not my own ; it belongs to my father." " I listen to this from thee 
 uo longer ; I am for war " so said Kechwayo. 
 
 Umbulazi went down to come here to the missionary. And just as he 
 arrived, the enemy also arrived. Then his people said, pass on, go 
 further ; do you see this ? that Kechwayo is about to kill you ? Yes, 
 said he, I consent ; I will pass on. But never, never, will I give up 
 the opening (district) which has been given to me by my father. So he 
 passed on. And as he was crossing the Matikulu, the enemy arrived in 
 great haste, coming down all the mountains. So he went on until he came 
 to the kraal of Nongalaza. And at early dawn, he passed on, designing 
 to cross the Tugela, and come (himself) to Manchonga. But his captains 
 said, this is not best, thou child (of the king), that the wealth of the state
 
 THF. PRINCES AND THF.IR BATTLE. 
 
 nawo ; noyi'lo umzi wa ya nawo ; ngokuba si ya bona 
 ukuba Uietswayo u se fikile. Ku'le ukuma ku hambe 
 nabantwana bonke, ba wele Utugela, kanye nezinkorno. 
 Wa ti yena uku ba pendula, a ngi tandi uku baleka ngi 
 balekele uvvetn. Ni ze ni ti, ma ngi wele nezinkomo na ? 
 nabantwana na ? Mina ngi ya ku fela nganeno kwo- 
 Tugela. Kodwa njobo ngi sa hamba ngi ye einakosini 
 e nga wa nikwayo ngubaba. Wa hambake, wa wela, wa 
 fika ku 'Mantsonga; wa lala ilanga la ba 'linye. Ku te 
 kusasa wa ye wela e fika namaviyo Amapoisa ematatu. 
 Kwa be se ku kona impi eningi ka 'letswayo. Kwa ti 
 intanibama kwa ba kona uku ti, ma i Iwe ; ngokubane 
 u kona Uietswayo a se e yi zisa impi. Ye suka e ka 
 'Mbulazi, ya yi c langabeza. Kwa ti e ka 'letswayo ya 
 buya ya kukula ; ya ti e ka 'Mbulazi ya buya ya buya. 
 Kwa ti ebusuku kwe zwakala imikosi yokuti, i si ngene 
 e ka 'letswayo. Za ti izinduna, ma yi sondele yonke 
 impi eduze kwezinjola, i zo ku linda Umbulazi. Ku te 
 kusasa kwa se ku vela nezinkomo se zi baleka nga sElu- 
 tugela; ngokuba ba hambile ebusuku impi ka 'letswayo 
 ba hamba, abantu ba ka 'Mbulazi be ba funyanisa be 
 lele. Ku te kusasa kwa tiwa, abantu ka 'Mbulazi i ba 
 ledile nga sElutugela ebusuku. Wa w' esusake Ama- 
 poisa, a funyanisa i luba izinkomo nezingane, e se be zi 
 
 remain behind ; and thy father went, state and all; for we see that Keeh- 
 wayo has already arrived. All the children ought to go, and cross the 
 Tugela, together with the cattle. In reply to them he said, I am not 
 disposed to run away and flee from one of our own people. Do you say, 
 then, that I must go over with the cattle ? and with the children ? As 
 for myself, I will die in defence on this side of the Tugela. But I am 
 now going in person to see the powers allotted to me by my father. So 
 he went, crossed over, and came to Manchonga; and spent one night 
 there. And in the morning he crossed over again, and came with three 
 companies of Amapoisa (police). The army of Kechwayo was already 
 there in large numbers. And in the afternoon word was given : we 
 must fight; for here is Kechwayo coming on at once with his army. 
 Umbulazi's force started and met it. But Kechwayo's turned and drew 
 off ; and Umbulazi's turned back. In the night a cry, to arms ! was 
 heard, saying, Kechwayo's force has entered the camp. The captains 
 said, let all our men draw near to the wagons, in order to guard Umbu- 
 lazi. It came to pass iu the morning that the cattle came fleeing from 
 the Tugela ; for Kechwayo's men went and found Umbulazi's men 
 asleep. And in the morning it was said, the enemy killed Umbulazi's 
 men by night on the Tugela. Therefore he sent the Amapoisa, who
 
 392 APPENDIX. 
 
 pangile. A te e sa fika Araapoiga, be za kuwo abanhi 
 ba ka 'lets way 6 ; ba ti be se za, Arnapoisa a ba tsaya 
 ngezibainu ; ba baleka kakulu, ba siya kvvonke neziri- 
 komo nezingane a ba be se be zi pangile ; ba baleka ba 
 ze ba iika empini ya kona enye e be sele ernva. A ba 
 yekake Ainapoisa, ukuba ba fike ernpini ya kubo eningi. 
 Kwa ti Umbulazi wa yi pakake, wa yisa kuyo e ka 
 'letswayo; ya ti e ka 'letswayo ya bona okokuti, nansi 
 impi, i si za, ya 'langabezanake. Wa fika wa susa 
 Amapoisa pambili ; kwa ngemva kwAmapoisa wa susa 
 Isipetu, ikanda, urnzi ka 'Tsongweni. Ye zake, ya 
 'langana ; ya buye ya yi uotsa e ka 'letswayo. Ba buye 
 futi Ombulazi, ba ba yeka ; ngokuba wa be e te ukutso 
 kvvake Umbulazi, ni nga ba notsi kakulu. Ba pinda futi 
 e ka 'letswayo, be zake ; e ka 'Mbulazi ya buya ya c la- 
 ngana ; ya baleka futi aba ka 'letswayo ; ba buya aba 
 ka 'Mbulazi, ba ba yeka ; ngokuba ba bamba loria 
 igama lelo li ka 'Mbulazi, lokuti, ni nga ba notsi kakulu. 
 Wa buya futi, wa yi zisa Uietswayo ; ya buya futi ya 
 'langana ; ba buya futi ba baleka aba ka 'letswayo. 
 
 Ku te ernveni kwa loko, e ka 'letswayo ya ze ya nga 
 ti i nga si ( langanisa pakati ; ngokuba ya be iningi ka- 
 
 ibund them driving off the cattle and children, which they had just now 
 plundered. As soon as the Amapoisa eame up, Kechwayo's people 
 came towards them ; and while they were drawing near, the Amapoisa 
 fired upon them ; they fled in haste, and left everything, both cattle and 
 children, which they had just now plundered ; nor did they cease their 
 flight till they came to another portion of the army which was remain- 
 ing there in the rear. % Therefore the Amapoisa left them, when they 
 reached their own great army. Then Umbulazi set his in array, and 
 sent it against Kechwayo's; and when Kechwayo's saw that their foe was 
 near, they came up and met them. Now Umbulazi had put the Ama- 
 poisa in front ; and behind the Amapoisa he placed the Isipetu, Chon- 
 gweni's regiment. Thus they came up and joined in combat; and agaii 
 they routed Kechwayo's party. And again Umbulazi and his men 
 turned and left them ; for Umbulazi had given orders, saying, ye must 
 not chase them too far. Again Kechwayo's men returned, and came up 
 as before; again Urnbulazi's joined with them; again Kechwayo's men 
 fled; and again Umbulazi 's turned and left them ; because they clung 
 to that same word of Umbulazi, which said, ye must not chase them too 
 far. Again Kechwayo turned and brought up his army; again they 
 were met; and again they fled. 
 
 After that it came to pass that Kechwayo's forces thought they would 
 try and surround u& ; for Kechwayo's forces were by far the most
 
 THE PRINCES AND THEIR BATTLE. 
 
 kulu e ka 'letswayo. I si tikile ya si notsake, izwe li 
 lungile, ya si pa c la pakati. Kwa ti ku loku, kwa se ku 
 bamba umzi ka 'Mbulazi, Umkvveyantaba, wa be u su 
 baleka ; ngokuba u ya bona, i si 'langaniswa pakati ; ya 
 balekake, i se i notswa. Ka sa be si sa pindela uku ya 
 'ku Iwa ; ngokuba abantu kwa be se ku kona ukubane 
 ba pela amanTa ; ngokuba kwa be se ku lubene nesi- 
 fazana. Kwa se ku ngulowo 'muntu e se hambe e funa 
 abantu bake lapa be baleke ba ya nga kona. I si fikile 
 e ka 'letswayo ya si pa'la, i zisa emanzini, umfula u zele ; 
 ya fika ya si tela kona emanzini. Kodwa ukufa kwa- 
 bantu ba fa ngendao yokwesaba amanzi ; ba bulawa. 
 Abanye abantu ba sinda ngokuziposa* kona emanzini ; 
 kodwa ukuvama kvvabantu be muka namanzi. 
 
 Abanye ba suka ba fa; abanye ba ye ba ziposa eman- 
 zini, ba bulawa ngavvo amanzi ; abanye ndzalo ba sinda 
 ba wela; abanye ba bulawa nabo, se be ba tolile abantu 
 babo ; abanye ba bulawa, be nga ka ba boni. Abanye 
 a ba be b' esaba na 'ku funa, ba se be baleka ngo- 
 kwabo ; ngokubane nabanye ba be ti uku tso kwabo, loku 
 
 numerous. Therefore they came and routed us, the country favoring, 
 and hemmed us in. It came to pass at this moment, as they were taking 
 Umbulazi's regiment, Umkweyantaba, it fled at once; for they saw that 
 they were now surrounded; therefore they fled, and were totally routed. 
 We never returned again to fight; for by this time it was found that 
 the men had lost all strength ; for now they were rushing along, 
 driving and driven with a crowd of women and children. Then every 
 man went in search of his own people whithersoever they had fled and 
 gone. And when Kechwayo's men came up they hemmed us in, and 
 brought us to the water, the river being full ; and there they came and 
 poured us into the water. But in respect to the death of the people, 
 they died through fear of the water, being slain. Some of them escaped 
 by throwing themselves at once into the water ; but the greater portion 
 of the people were carried away by the water. 
 
 [Here the heart and voice of the narrator failed, and he withdrew 
 until the next day, when he added the following:] 
 
 Some died at once ; some went and threw themselves into the water 
 and were killed by the water ; others escaped in that way, and crossed 
 over ; some also were slain after they had found their friends ; others 
 were slain before they saw them. Some there were who were afraid 
 even to hunt for their friends, and ran away at once by themselves ; for 
 
 2 z
 
 394 APPENDIX. 
 
 nansi impi, i si fikile, ngi nge be ngi sa bangela abantu 
 bami, ukuba ba bonwe impi ; ba sale be zibalekela, be 
 ti, kumbe ba ya ku buya ba ba bone ; kantike abanye ba 
 fe, ba nga be be sa ba nako uku ba bona. Abanye ba 
 buya ba hambe, se be funa ; abanye ba ba fumanisa, 
 se be gwaziwe impi ; abanye ba funyaniswa impi ndzalo 
 be latsile, i fike, i ba vuse ngemikonto. Kwa ti ndzalo 
 abanye ba sinda na kubo abantwana babo ; abanye ba 
 vuka se be file, ba vuswa iinvula ebusuku. 
 
 Nga ngi kona Emkweyantaba ; nami nga zingenela 
 ngokwami ; nga bona kodwa nami ukuba se ngi sinda. 
 
 i 
 
 IV. FLEEING FROM THE FOE AND SWIMMING THE 
 
 TUGELA. 
 
 Nga baleka kambe, nga ziposa emanzini, nga c lamba. 
 Kwa ti ukuma ng' a'luleke, a tanda amanzi uku ngi yisa 
 pansi ; nga ze nga vuma, nga hamba kona pansi. Kwa 
 nga sernva, nga we zwa uku ti, a se ng' a c lule, nga buya 
 nga iiuma, nga banga pezulu. Ngi te ngi sa kupuka 
 nga pezu kwamanzi, a ti a sesiswini nga wa c lanza ; 
 kwa buya kwa kona uku ba lula emzimbeni kimi. Nga 
 
 some of them thought to reason thus: since here is the enemy, already 
 on the spot, I can not show the least regard for my friends, lest they be 
 discovered by the foe; they delayed searching, and fled for their own 
 lives, thinking, perhaps they would return and find them ; whereas in- 
 deed some died, and never had an opportunity to see them again. Some 
 turned and went away, after searching ; some found them already stabbed 
 by the foe ; some, who had concealed themselves, were found by the 
 foe, which came up and roused them with spears. And so it was that 
 some escaped, including also their children ; some recovered from a 
 state of insensibility, being roused by the rain in the niglit. 
 
 I was there in the Kweyantaba regiment ; I also entered for and of 
 myself ; I also saw that I barely escaped. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 I fled, of course, threw myself into the water, and swam. It came 
 to pass when I was exhausted, the water wanted to plunge me to the 
 bottom; to which I then consented, and went there below. Afterwards, 
 when I found that I could endure it no longer, I struggled again, and 
 made for the surface. And as soon as I came to the top of the water, 
 I disgorged what there was in my stomach, and then I felt relieved again
 
 SWIMMING THE TUGELA. 395 
 
 ti ngi sa hatnba, kwa C la1uka umuntu nga sen c la kwami 
 kwa c laluka indoda ngerfla kwarni, i se i hambe i kala. 
 Ya fika ya ngi bamba ; ya ti i za ku ngi bamba enflana, 
 nga ti mina nga yi dedela, ngokuba nga yi bona i za ku 
 ngi iwilisa. Ngi te ngi ti ngi ya m dedela, wa se ngi 
 bambile ngemikonto nga be imikonto ngi yi pete emi- 
 tatu wa fika wa ngi bamba ngayo imikonto. Nga ti 
 okoba ngi zwe okwokuti u se yi bambile imikonto yami, 
 nga be ngi ya te ngi ya hamba ; wa donsa yena, nga ze 
 ifga yi yeka ; ngokuba nga bona imikonto i bi za ku ngi 
 sika. Wa hambake nayo wa ya emva. Kwa ze kwa 
 ti mina nga hamba, nga 'lamba. Ngi te ngi beka, nga 
 se ngi m bona, e se e bekise umlenzi pezulu, a se m 
 a c lule amanzi. Kodvva abantu ba be baningi aba be 
 muka namanzi. Nga hamba ; nami nge zwa uku ti a se 
 ng' a'lule. Nga buya nga pindela kona pansi ; nga 
 hamba kona pansi. Nga ngi ya te ngi vimbe amakala 
 ami ; nge zwa ukuma se ngi wa suti amanzi esiswini. 
 Nga buya nga iiunuma, nga banga pezulu. Ngi te ngi 
 sa puma nga pezu kwawo, a ti a sesiswini a puma, kwa 
 ba kona ubulula emzimbeni kimi. Nga buye futi nga 
 c lamba, ngi nga sa pete uluto, se ngi pete umsila wesi- 
 c langu ku kupela. A pinda a ng' a'lula futi, nge za nga 
 
 for a time in body. And as I was going on, all at once there appeared 
 a person in the river above me, a man, coming on, and crying as he 
 came. He came up and caught bold of me ; and as he was about to 
 seize me by the back, I determined to avoid him, for I saw that he 
 would plunge me under water. And as I was thinking I had shunned 
 him, behold he had caught me by the spears the three spears which I 
 was carrying in my hand he came up and caught me by these spears. 
 And when I found that he had really caught hold of my spears, I was 
 thinking I would go on ; but he dragged behind till I was obliged to let 
 go of them; for I saw that the spears were about to cut me. Therefore 
 he went off with them, and fell behind. Then I went on and swam. At 
 length I looked, and I saw him just now thrusting one limb above 
 w-ater, for the water had now overpowered him. But there were many 
 people who were going off (down stream) with the water. On I went ; 
 I also felt that it had now overpowered me. Again I turned and went 
 to the bottom, and went on there below. I thought I would keep my 
 nostrils closed ; now I found that my stomach was full of water. Again 
 I struggled and made for the surface. And as I came out above, the 
 water in my stomach was disgorged, and then my body felt relieved. 
 Again I swam, carrying with me nothing now, save the rod of a shield. 
 Again the water overpowered me, and then again I turned and went to
 
 396 APPENDIX. 
 
 buya nija piridela nga pansi ; kona punsi nga vimba ama- 
 kala, nge zvva ukuma se ngi vva suti esiswini. Nga 
 pinda futi, nga banga pezulu ; nga buya nga vva 'lanza ; 
 kwa kona futi ubulula kimi. Kwa ze kwa ti nga pa- 
 mbili, nga fika lapa amanzi a yiniozana, lapa se ngi tsona 
 ngi vele ngentarno ; kwa tike nga pambili nga wela. 
 Ukuba amanzi a ye se kona nga pambili amaningi, nga 
 ngi nga se yi ku wela, ngokuba nga se ng' a'lulekile ; 
 nami nga bona kodwa ukuba se ngi wela. 
 
 Kwa ti ukuba ngi wele, nga funyanisa umkwenyana 
 wetu. Sa hamba naye endawonye. Wa buza wa ti, 
 u welapi na? Nga ti, ngi wele kona emanzini lapa 
 ezansi esizibeni. Wa ti, mina ngi welile ngesikepe, ngi 
 bambile panTe kwaso. 
 
 V. ANOTHER'S ACCOUNT OF THE PRINCES' BATTLE 
 AT THE TUGELA. 
 
 I fike y' aka umkumbu ngako ka 'Nongalaza, esa- 
 ngweni. Wa paka Isipetu. Ku te nga pambili kwe- 
 Sipetu wa susa Amapoisa. Ku te ngemva kweSipetu 
 wa paka Iningizimu ka 'Mantandatsiya, umninawe ka 
 'Mbulazi. Kwa ti ngemva kweNingizimu wa paka 
 
 the bottom; and there below I stopped my nostrils, feeling that my 
 stomach was now full of water. Again I made for the surface, and 
 disgorged it; and now I felt relieved. Then it came to pass further on, 
 that I reached a place where the water was shallow, so that I sunk only 
 up to my neck; and accordingly I soon reached the shore. Had the 
 deep water extended still further, I could never have reached the shore, 
 for I was already quite exhausted ; I also barely saw that I was really 
 safe ashore. 
 
 It came to pass when I came to land, I saw my brother-in-law. We 
 walked along with him. He asked, saying, where did you cross ? I 
 replied, I crossed in the water, there below, where it is so deep. But, 
 said he, I crossed by means of a boat, holding on upon the outside of it. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 The forces came and arranged themselves at Nongalaza's, in the 
 gate. Umbulazi set the Isipetu in array. In front of the Isipetu he put 
 the Amapoisa. In rear of the Isipetu he put the Iningizimu, under 
 command of Mantandachiya, Umbulazi 's brother. In rear of the Inin-
 
 THE CONFLICT. JIT 
 
 Ii>moza. Kwa l\ ngemva kweSinoza wa paka l;mkwey&- 
 ntaba. Ku te ngesikati sokusuka, kwe zvvakala ukuma 
 Usutu ahantu lu ba ledile nga sEtugela ebusuku. Kwa 
 haniba Arnapoisa, a fike a yi tsaye ku le 'ndao a ze a 
 kupuka nayo, a yi tela endawonye yonke. Ya c langana 
 lapo ya \v' aka umkumbu yona e ka 'letswayo ; wa yi 
 zisa ngeukati e ngenwa kwebulakulesi, ya 'langana lapo 
 ya sondelelana eduzc, a yi bamba Amapoisa. Ku la la 
 kwa ti e sa tsayile Amapoisa, ye ska yona e ka 
 'letswayo. Kwa ti ngemva ya buya ya Mangana. A ti 
 e sa tsayile, sa ngena Jsipetu ; ba yi tabata ba yi tela 
 endawonye yonke, kanye neNgwekwe kanye neSanlu, 
 kanye futi naye Untaba ka Ombe. Kwa ti ngemva kwa 
 loko, ba yi yekelela, ba landa ukukuluma kwake yena 
 Umbulazi, owa ti nokutso, wa ti, ni nga yi notsi kakulu, 
 ka no ba yekani, ba c labe ipika. Kwa ti ngemva kwa 
 loku ukuba ba yi yeke, ya c luma ngezindao zonke. Kwa 
 ti upondo hvayo olu ngezansi Ivva fika Emkweyantaba ; 
 kwa ti ukuma lu fike Ivva tsayiwe Ibunu ; b' enlaba ba 
 ze ba fika eduze kwayo impi. Kwa ti ngemva Iwa yi 
 bamba u'langoti Iwa sEmkweyantaba. Kwa ti nga leso 
 'sikati hva baleka u'langoti Iwa sEmkweyantaba ; nga 
 leso 'sikati kwa kona ukubaleka kwayo yonke impi ka 
 'Mbulazi ; ya baleka yonke ya ze ya ngena pakati kwa- 
 
 gizimu he put the Isikoza. In rear of the Isikoza he put the Kweyan- 
 taba. It came to pass at the time of moving, a shout was given that 
 one of the enemy's regiments, Sutu, had annihilated the people on the 
 Tugela by night. Then the Amapoisa went, and fired upon them at the 
 place where they came up with them, and turned them all into confu- 
 sion. They rallied again there where Keehwayo's army had stationed 
 itself ; at breakfast-time he brought them out, and they closed in to 
 fight as soon as they came near, being received by the Amapoisa. At 
 first, as soon as the Amapoisa fired, Kechwayo's party left. Afterwards 
 they returned to the encounter. As soon as the Amapoisa fired, the 
 Isipetu came to their support ; they took the enemy, and threw them 
 all into confusion, both the Ingwekwe and the Sanku, together also 
 with Untaba ka Ombe. After that, they left them alone, following the 
 instructions of Umbulazi himself, who had given orders, saying, ye must 
 not chase them too hard, but leave them to take breath. It came to pass 
 after this, when they left them, that they rallied from every quarter. 
 Then their lower horn came upon the Kweyantaba regiment, and were 
 fired upon by a Boer ; but they persisted till they came close to their 
 opponent. Afterwards u wing of the Kweyantaba received them. And 
 then the (other , wing of Kweyantaba ran away ; by that time all of Um- 
 
 3 A
 
 398 APPENDIX. 
 
 bantwana bonke ; ngokuba ba se be ngene pakati kwa- 
 bantu babo. Ya baleka; ya yisa emanzini, i si yi fakile 
 pakati ; ba ba bulala abantu kakulu, kanye nazo izingane 
 eziniinyane; ka ba banga nako ukubane ingane i bele- 
 twa ; ba bulala kakulu. Kwaziswa futi ukuma nga 
 pambili ku kona amanzi ; kwa ti nawo amanzi a l\va 
 ngako okwawo. 
 
 Kwa ti aba welileyo ba wela be nga se 'bantu ba 
 'luto ; ngokubane kwa ku kona ukuma ku nga se ko 
 izinto zabo zonke, se ku kona uku binja ama c lamvu ezi- 
 ngalweni zabo. Kwa ti lapo kwa tiwa, ma yi butane 
 endawonye, ma ku nga bi ko 'muntu o Tulayo, a lande 
 imi'lobo yabo. Ba vindzelwa kakulu abantu, ka kwa ze 
 kwa ba ko 'muntu o hambayo a lande izi'lobo zake. 
 Kwa ti ku leso 'sikati i si c lezi endawonye, kwa fika 
 umuntu wa kona esilungwini, wa fika, wa gema ngo- 
 mkonto pakati kwetu. Kodwa tina sa suka sa baleka, 
 ngokuba ku nga se ko ubuntu kitina. 
 
 Sa ti ukwenza kwetu, sa lala ndzalo kona pezu kwa- 
 manzi, kwa ze kwa ti ukutsona kwelanga ; sa ze sa pe c la 
 uinlilo kona pezu kwamanzi. Ku ya sa kusasa se si 
 wela, se si ya ku funa kona kubo abantu aba fileyo, si ti, 
 ma si bone abane betu lapa be fela kona. Sa funa 
 
 bulazi's forces were on the flight ; and they all continued to flee till 
 they came among the whole company of children ; for they had now 
 come among their own people. They fled ; and the foe brought them 
 to the water, having already surrounded them ; there they killed very 
 many people, including also very small children ; nor did they care at 
 all if it were an infant in' the arms of its nurse ; they made a terrible 
 slaughter. It. was known also that there was the river before them ; and 
 the water also fought in its own way. 
 
 It caine to pass that those who crossed over the river, came out look- 
 ing like anything but people; for so it was that they were utterly desti- 
 tute of everything, even obliged to bind bushes about their loins. Then 
 command was given, let all assemble in one place, let not one pass on 
 nor follow their friends. They were altogether hindered by people, so 
 that there was not a person who went or followed their friends. And at 
 that time while they were remaining together, there came a person from 
 among the white people, who approached, and threatened us with his 
 spear. But we rose and ran away, for there was nothing of manly 
 courage about us. 
 
 Thus' we did, and remained there by the water until the sun went 
 down ; and then we kindled a fire there by the water. When the morn- 
 ing dawned, we crossed over the river, and went to search there among
 
 THE KING'S MANAGEMENT. 399 
 
 ndzalo ngamalanga onke si 'lezi ndzalo pezu kwoTugela. 
 Kwa ze kwa ti ngemva, kwa kona izwi lokuti, abantu ma 
 ba tatwe imi'lobo yabo ; ba ze ba pela abantu be tatwa 
 ngemi'lobo yabo ; kwa ze kwa ti tina se si sele iniozana, 
 kwa ze kwa tiwa, abantu ka be suke bonke, ba lande imi- 
 c ]obo yabo. Kwa ti emva kwa loku, kwe zvvakala uku 
 ti, abantu ba ya kwa Hulurnene. Kodwa ku leso 'sikati 
 iuva se ku kona ukuiitakaia kwabantu knkulu. 
 
 VI. UMPANDE'S INSTRUCTIONS TO HIS PEOPLE IN 
 RESPECT TO HIS SONS. 
 
 Umpande kambe ku 'bantu bake u {ale, be sa ti, ba 
 ya ku zingela, ba memezelana izinjina, wa ti Umpande 
 kwabake abantu, wa susa Ingwekwe, wa susa In'lon'lo; 
 Ava ti, hambani ; ni ti, i nga be ni ya bona ku lezo izi- 
 njina, i nga be ba za ku Iwa, ni ti i nga be aba ka 
 'Jetswayo ba ya notswa, ni c lale, ni bukele, i ze ba ba 
 gwaze, ba ba lede. W enjaba Umbulazi ; ka ya. Wa 
 .za wa buya noletswayo. 
 
 Kwa tike nga semva, ukuba ba itanelane, be zisane 
 nganeno lapa. Wa ti Umpande kwabake wa susa In- 
 
 the dead, saying, let us look at our brothers here where they died. And 
 so we searched every day while we remained thus by the Tugela. Then 
 it came to pass afterwards, that word came, saying, let the people be 
 taken by their friends; then all who had friends were received by them; 
 then there still remained a few of us, until word came for all the people 
 to leave, and go in search of their friends. After this, news came that 
 the people are to go to the Governor. But at that time there was a very 
 great destruction of people. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 Umpande, then, at first, in respect to his own people, while they were 
 saying they would go and hunt, and were calling on each other to make 
 out hunting parties, Umpande addressed himself to his own people, 
 furnished two companies, the Ingwekwe and Inhlonhlo ; and said, you 
 must go; and perhaps you will find among those parties, that there is to 
 be some fighting; and should Kechwayo's men be routed, you will sit 
 still, and look on, until they shall stab them to the last man. But Um- 
 bulazi refused to go; and Kechwayo returned home. 
 
 Then it came to pass afterwards, that both parties coveted the same
 
 400 APPENDIX. 
 
 gwekvve ; we susa Isanhi ; we susa Untaba ka Ombe ; 
 we susa Unodwengu ; we susa Umdumezulu, wa wa 
 susa a yisi'lanu ; wa ti, uma ni bona ukuba wa notswa 
 Umbulazi, ni ba ngene nga setnva, rii ba gvvaze (aba ka 
 'letswayo). Wa ti, kona ni nga yi boni e ka 'Mbulazi, 
 hambani ndze nayo e ka 'letswayo ; ku ya ku ze ku ti, 
 uma se be bonene, ni c laleke, ni bukele. Wa ti, hamba 
 nabo, 'Ntsingwayo. 
 
 Ku te nga semva, Untsingwayo walangana noletswayo, 
 uma i nga se ko ku 'Mpande, se be hamba ndzengo- 
 kutso ku ka 'Mpande oku ku ti, kona ni nga sa m boni 
 Umbulazi, hambani nabo aba ka 'letswayo, ni nga vuki 
 'manTa, ni hambe ndze, ku be ngabantu ba kini. Kwa 
 ti nga semva Untsingwayo wa 'langana noletswayo, wa 
 ti, ma ku suke izimeku eza be zi ngezi ka 'Mpande, zi 
 hambe, zi pindele emva; ba ye za se be dzuluka, ku nga 
 ti ba puma kona enkosini ; ba te be fika, ba be ti : inkosi 
 i te, ma ko ke ku bambe abarni, ku Jala loku ni ya bona 
 ukuba Umbulazi u za ku telelwa ngabelungu. Ba vu- 
 make, ba ti, ku linisiwe. 
 
 Ku te nga semva kwoba be zwe lapaya ku 'Mpande, 
 uma e se ba buza uku ti, Umbulazi u file na ? Ni be ni 
 
 thing; and each brought his people down this way. From among his 
 own men Umpande selected five regiments, the Ingwekwe, Sanku, Un- 
 taba ka Ombe, Nodwengu, and Dumezulu; and said, if you find that 
 Umbulazi is likely to be routed, you must come in behind, and stab his 
 foes. When you see nothing of Umbulazi's party, you must just fall in 
 and go with Kechwayo's ; but if it should ever happen that they come 
 up face to face, then sit ye still, and look on. He sent also Unchingwayo 
 with them. 
 
 It came to pass afterwards, that Unchingwayo fell in with Kechwayo, 
 as soon as they were fairly out of Umpande 's sight, going along just as 
 Umpande had said, to wit, when nothing is seen of Umbulazi you are to 
 go with Kechwayo's men, and make no disturbance, but simply walk 
 along as with your own people. [As remarked,] Unchingwayo fell in 
 with Kechwayo, and said, let certain of Umpande 's old servants fall 
 back for a time, and then come up all perspiring, just as if they had 
 come right from the king; and when they arrive, let them say : the king 
 says. " the moment you see that Umbulazi is about to derive assistance 
 from the white people, then lend your aid to my own." To this they 
 consented, and said, so be it. 
 
 It came to pass after it was all over with, when they heard from Um- 
 pande there at home, as he asked them, saying, is Umbulazi dead ' 
 What were you all about ? Did 1 not arrange you here ; and say. go,
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 401 
 
 ye ngapi na ? A ngi ti nga ni susa lapa na ? Nga ti 
 hambani ni yo ku bckela Umbulazi na? Ba ti, yebo, 
 'nkos' ; inkosi i si tsene kabili ; ngokuba si te si se 
 lapa ekaya, ya ti, ma si yo ku siza Umbulazi ; kwa ti 
 ku sentabeni sa buya se zwa ku ti, inkosi i te, ma si 
 size Uletswayo. Ya buza ya ti, ni zwe ngobani na ? 
 Si zwe ngoNtsingwayo. Umpande vva m bulala, oko- 
 kuti abantu bake u b' enzele amaiebo u ba tukisile. 
 
 VII. ON GOING TO INQUIRE OF THE JJVF^JVG^, OR 
 PRIEST, IN CASE OF SICKNESS. 
 
 Uma ku fikile ukufa, umuntu u ya tabata into, a 
 ye enyangeni, e ya ku bula ngokufa. A ti e fikile 
 enyangeni, a fike a c lale pansi, a kuleke, a ti, 'mngani, 
 izindaba ezin'le. Inyanga be i si ya tula, i si tabata 
 itongwane layo, i bi si ti, wozani, si ye lapaya. Ni 
 pete intoni na? Se be ti, O 'nkos', a si pete 'luto ; 
 si pete nansi intwana. I si lataza ugwai, i si bema, 
 i si ti, a ke ni tso si zwe, 'bangani bami ; tsaya, 
 tsayani, ngi zwe. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, 
 ukufa. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, tsayani futi. 
 
 look to the interests of Umbulazi ? They replied, true, O king ; but 
 then the king sent us a second word; for, while we were here at home, 
 he said, we must go and help Umbulazi; but after we had gone abroad 
 we again received word, saying, " the king says, ' we must help Kech- 
 wayo.' ' Then the king asked, saying, from whom did you hear this .' 
 " We heard it from Unchingwayo." Then Umpande killed him, be- 
 cause he had plotted against his people, and been the cause of their 
 destruction. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 When sickness comes, some one takes something, and goes to the 
 priest to inquire about the sickness. And when he arrives at the priest's, 
 he comes up, sits down, and pays his respects, saying, friend, good 
 news. The priest remains silent for a time, then takes his snuff-box, 
 and says, come on, let us go yonder. What have you brought ? Then 
 they say, O king, we have brought nothing of any value; we have 
 brought here is a trifle. Then he pours out his snuff, and snuffs, and 
 says, come my friends, speak that we may hear; smite, smite ye, that I 
 jmay hear. Then the people say, hear. And he says, sickness. Then 
 
 3 B
 
 402 APPENDIX. 
 
 I si ti, ku sesifubeni. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si 
 ti, ku sesiswini. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, ku 
 sekanda. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, u nekambi. 
 Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, tsayani futi. Abantu se 
 be ti, izwa. I si ti, u ne c lozi. Se be ti abantu, izwa. 
 I si ti, uyise u biza into. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si 
 ti, izituta za kubo. Se be ti abantu, izwa. Zi ti izituta 
 za kubo, ini ukuba a nga si nakekeli na ? Ka sa s' azi 
 ngani na? loku si m giinileyo ebuniinyaneni bake. Se 
 be ti abantu, izwa. Ka u se ze w' ak' umzi omkulu 
 ngatina? a sa s' azi ngani na? Se be ti abantu, mi, 
 mi. I si ti, zi ti, ini ukuba zi nga 'latselwa inkomo na? 
 Se be ti abantu, mi, mi, mi. I si ti, tsaya futi, 'mngani 
 wami, ngi zwe. Se be ti abantu, mi, mi, mi. I si ti, 
 uyise u tukutele naye. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, 
 u nokufa ; u ya gula ; se ba m biza abakubo. Se be ti 
 abantu, u bu tselwe obani? izwa. I si ti, tsayela futi, 
 umngani wami. 
 
 I si kipe itongwane layo, i si lataze ugwai, i si bema; 
 ba ye se ba tula abe be bula ; i si beme ugwai ; ba ye 
 se ba lela nabo ugwai ; i si beme, i lede ; i si ti, tsaya 
 
 the people say, hear. And he says, smite ye again. Then he says, it 
 is in the chest. And the people say, hear. Then he says, it is in the 
 belly. And the people say, hear. Then he says, it is in the head. 
 And the people say, hear. Then he says, he has the worms. And the 
 people say, hear. Then he says, smite ye again. Then the people say, 
 hear. And he says, he has a demon. And the people say, hear. He 
 says, his paternal shade wants something. And the people say, hear. 
 Then he says, it is the 'shades of his ancestors. And the people say, 
 hear. His ancestral shades say, why is it that he does not care for us ? 
 Why does he no longer recognize us ? since we have preserved him 
 from infancy. Then the people say, hear. Will he never build a large 
 kraal for our sake ? Why does he not still recognize us ? Then the 
 people say, there, that's it. And he says, they ask, why is it that no 
 offering is made to them by the slaying of an animal ? Then the 
 people say, there, that is just it. Then he says, smite again, my friend, 
 that I may hear. And the people say, there, there, he is coming nearer 
 and nearer to the seat of the difficulty. Then he says, his paternal shade 
 is angry with him. And the people say, hear. Then he says, he is 
 diseased, he is sick; the shades are calling him. Then the people say, 
 who told you ? hear. Then he says, smite on again, my friend. 
 
 Then he takes out his snuff-box, pours out some snuff, and takes it, 
 the people who were smiting being now silent; and when he has taken 
 some snuff, then they also go and ask for some; and he snuffs, and
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 
 
 futi, umngani wami. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, u 
 nesilumo. I si ti, u ya gula, u ya gula kakulu. Se be 
 ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, uma e 'latselwe inkomo u ya 
 ku sinda. Se be ti abantu, izwa. I si ti, u biza leyo 
 'nkomo e tile ya kwabo. 
 
 I be i si jedake, abantu ba yi nikeke into yabo, ba ye 
 se ba ya goduka. Se be fikile ekaya, se be ti abantu 
 aba sekaya, a ke ni tso si zweke arnazvvi enyanga, ukuba 
 i tizeni na? i bule enze ndzani na? Ba ye se be ti 
 abantu, Oh ! i bulile ndze inyanga ; i fike ya gidzima 
 ngonflola o kona ; i fike ya ti, u ya gula ; ya fika ya ti, 
 u nesifo ; ya fika ya ti, u bizwa uyise ; u m tsezisele, u 
 ti, ini ukuba a nga be e sa m azi na, ukuba kade e hambe 
 e m sindise ekufeni okukulu na? abanye abantu be fa 
 na? e m sindisa na sekubini okukulu na? Ini ukuba a 
 nga be e sa s' azi na? a si pe e si ku bizayo na? 
 
 A bu su ya vuraa umuntu o gulayo, u ze ti, Oh ! 
 uma se ku bizwe ibona ndzaio loku aba ku bizayo, ku 
 hga be ku se nlaba nobani na ? Ba ye se be ti abantu 
 bonke, Oh! yebo, u ti wena ku nga be ku se nlaba no- 
 bani na, se ku biziwe ibona ndzaio abaniniko na? Oh! 
 i bulile ndze inyanga, loku bala i gidzime ngom'lola 
 
 finishes; and then says, smite again, my friend. And the people say, 
 hear. Then he says, he has a biting pain in the bowels. Then he says, 
 he is sick, he is very sick. And the people say, hear. Then he says, 
 should an animal be offered he will recover. And the people say, hear. 
 Then he says, the shades require that particular cow of theirs. 
 
 And so when he has finished, the people give him the present which 
 they brought, and go home. Arriving at home, the people there at 
 home, say, come now, tell us, that we may hear the words of the priest. 
 What did he pretend to say ? How did he inquire and perform ? Oh ! 
 the priest performed thus; he came and followed the omen of the occa- 
 sion; he came and said, he is sick; he came and said, he hasadisonsr; 
 he came and said, he is called by the shades of his ancestors, who re- 
 proach him, saying, why is it that he acknowledges them no longer, 
 since long ago they went and delivered him from great suffering ? while 
 other people died ? and have they not delivered him from great evil ? 
 Why, then, does he not continue to acknowledge us ? and give us what 
 
 we require t 
 
 And now the sick man admits it all, and says, oh ! since that which 
 they require is thus required by themselves, who then can refuse it ? 
 Then the people all say, oh ! yes, as you say, who could refuse a thing 
 when it is thus demanded by the owners themselves ? How can the 
 priest be mistaken, since he has gone so evidently according to the
 
 4-04 APPENDIX. 
 
 ndzena na? Nina ka ni zvva ini na ukuba i gidzime 
 ngom'lola na? Ma ba nikwe pela inkomo yabo, leyo a 
 se be yi bizile ; so bona pela ukuba ukufa ku ya ku ngi 
 yeka na. Se be vumake bonke ; u se pumake umuntu 
 a be munye, u se pumela panTe, se be tulake bonke aba 
 sezinTwini, u se e zungeza umuzi, u'langoti hvomzi, u 
 ze ti, yeti, 'mngani, u se kuleka ku wona ama'lozi, ju se 
 ti : oku c le, ma ku vele oku'le pela, loku bala se ni bizile 
 inkomo yenu ; ma ku muke impela ukufa. Si ya yi 
 l laba ndze inkomo yenu. Si ti tina, ma ku pume yena 
 o gulayo, a pume, a nga sa guli, a 'labe inkomo yenu 
 pela, loku tina se si vumile ukuba a yi Te. Yet* um- 
 ngani, izindaba ezin'le ; ma si m bone e hamba pela, 
 ndzengabanye aba hambayo. Se si nikile pela e nu ku 
 funayo, rna si bone ngako, uma ku funwe ini na ukuba 
 a sinde, ku Tuleke ukufa. 
 
 A ti e pumile, e pete umkonto, a ngene esibayeni, a 
 suke a yi 'labe ; i kale inkomo, i ti, eye! u ti, ma yi 
 boTe inkomo yama'lozi ; oku'le pela, e nu ku bizileyo. 
 
 Ba yi 'linzake, ba yi Te, ba yi jede. Ukufa ku nga ka 
 peli, a buye a kulume nabanye abantu, uku ti: kumi 
 kandzani ukuba ngi c labe inkorno yami, ku tiwa i bizwe 
 
 omen ? Do not ye yourselves perceive that he has run according to 
 the omen ? Then let them have their cow, the very same which they 
 have demanded ; and then we will see whether sickness will leave me. 
 To this they all assent; and now some one person goes out, and when 
 he has come abroad without the kraal, all who are within their houses 
 keep silence, while he goes round the kraal, the outer enclosure of 
 the kraal, and says, "'honor to thee, lord," offering prayer to the 
 shades, he continues, " a blessing, let a blessing come, then, since 
 you have really demanded your cow; let sickness depart utterly. Thus 
 we offer your animal. And on our part we say, let the sick man come 
 out, come forth, be no longer sick, and slaughter your animal, then, 
 since we have now consented that he may have it for his own use. 
 Glory to thee, lord; good news; come then, let us see him going about 
 like other people. Now, then, we have given you what you want; let 
 us therefore see whether or not it was required in order that he might 
 recover, and that the sickness might pass by." 
 
 And then coming out, spear in hand, he enters the cattle-fold, comes 
 up, and stabs it; the cow cries, says y-e-h ! to which he replies, an 
 animal for the gods ought to show signs of distress; it is all right then, 
 just what you required. 
 
 Then they skin it, eat it, finish it. The disease still remaining, he 
 goes and talks with other people, and says : how is it with me that I
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 
 
 ngobaba, ngi nga ze nga sinda na? Ba Jala abaningi 
 abantu, uma e nga sindanga, uku ti, Oh! kwa ye ku ja- 
 ndzwa amanga ndze; ku ledwe izinkomo zornuntu ndze; 
 ku tiwa i bizwa uyise, kanti a i bizwanga leyo 'nkomo ; 
 ku landzwa ngomlomo ndze. Uma i be i bizwe oyise, 
 ngapane e nga se sindile na? u be e nga yi bizanga 
 ndze ; i se ya be i ya polelelwa ndze inkomo yomuntu, 
 oyise be nga yi bizanga. Ma sinde pela ; kade ukuba 
 si bone ukuba i be i bizwe. Ku ndzani ukuba a nga 
 sinde na? Leyo inyanga i bi Jamba amanga; a i kwazi 
 uku bula. Ma ku yiwe kwenye inyanga. 
 
 Ba vume; ba tabate into, ba ye kwenye inyanga. Ba 
 fike kwenye, ba kuleke, ba ti, E, 'mngani, izindaba ezin- 
 'le. I be i si ya buza, uku ti, ni pete 'ntoni na? Ba ti, 
 si pete into e tize. I ti, Oh! li y' ala i'lozi ; a li tandi 
 ukuba ngi bule nam'la ; li mukile. Ba goduke, ba ye 
 kwenye futi ; ba fike, ba kuleke, ba ti, E, 'mngani, izin- 
 daba ezin c le. I buze, ni pete intoni na? Si pete, nansi 
 into yetu. I bi i si c lale isikatsana ; i si i ba biza ; i si 
 ti, 'lalani lapa. I si kipe itongwane, i si bema ugwai, 
 i si kulume indaba ku ngenkatsana; se ku ba isikatsana, 
 i si m jede ugwai, i si ti, a ke ni tso, si zwe, 'bangani 
 
 have slaughtered my cow it was said to be required by my paternal 
 shades and yet I have never recovered ? And it' he should not recover, 
 most of the people begin to say, oh ! they just went and forged lies; 
 they would just take a man's last cow, and say it was required by the 
 shades, whereas that cow was not required; it was a mere device of the 
 lips. If it had been required by the shades, then why has he not 
 already recovered ? They never made any such request ; it was a mere 
 cheat to rob a man of his cow. The shades did not require it. If they 
 did, then let him get well ; it is now a long time since we saw that the 
 cow was required. How is it that he has not recovered ? That priest 
 has been fabricating a lie; he does not know how to inquire of the 
 oracle. Let us go to another priest. 
 
 They consent, take a present, and go to another priest. Comirtg to 
 the other, they salute him, and say, hail, friend, good news. And 
 then he would inquire, saying, what present have you brought ? And 
 they say, we have brought a present so and so. Says he, oh ! the 
 ghost (oracle, or divinity) refuses; he is not willing that I should in- 
 quire to-day; he is absent. They return home, and go to another, 
 arrive, pay their respects, and say, hail, friend, good news. He in- 
 quires, what present have you brought ? We have brought herf is 
 our present. Then after sitting a short time, he calls them, and says, 
 sit here. Then he takes out his snuff-box^ takes snuff, and talks the 
 
 3 c
 
 406 APPENDIX. 
 
 bami. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, tsaya, ngi zwe. Se be 
 ti, izwa. I si ti, ukufa ; u kwelwe ; umne wako u ya 
 gula ; tsaya, ngi zwe. Se be ti, izwa. U nokufa, 
 izwa, u gula esiswini; isisu sake sibi. Se be ti, izwa. 
 U nesilumo. Se be ti, izwa. Ukufa ku suka em'lana 
 ku ze ku fike okalweni. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, tsaya, 
 izwa, 'mngani wami. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, u nelozi ; 
 u bizwe uyise ; u ti, u m tukeleni ngokwenza oku ndze- 
 yana na? uyise u diniwe. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, 
 unyoko (ilozi) u ti, u kwenzeleni lokuya na, kuye na? u 
 tukutele nawe. Se be ti, izwa. I si beme ugwai ; i si 
 m jedile ugwai futi, i si ti, tsaya izwa futi, 'mngani 
 wami. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, uyi'Io u biza inkomo, u 
 ti, ma i c latselwe lezi 'zinkomo ezi ka 'bani. Se be ti, 
 izwa. I si ti, tsaya. Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, tsaya. 
 Se be ti, izwa. I si ti, tsaya. Se be ti, izwa. I si 
 ledake, se be yi nika into yayo, se be goduka ; se be 
 ilka ekaya, se be buza abantu aba be sekaya, uku ti, 
 I tizeni inyanga na? Se be ti, Oh! i bulile ndze yona 
 inyanga ; i tize, uyise i c lozi li biza inkomo leyo e tize, e 
 semeflweni na ku wena ; li ti, loku izinkomo ezami, u zi 
 pi we imina, a ngi sa latselelwa ndzengani na? Se be 
 
 news awhile; and after a little time, having finished the snuff, he says, 
 come now, nay friends, speak ye, that we may hear. And they say, hear. 
 Then he says, smite, that I may hear. And they say, hear. Then he 
 says, sickness; he is afflicted; thy brother is sick; smite, that I may 
 hear. And they say, hear. He is sick, hear, he is sick in the belly; 
 his belly is bad. And they say, hear. He has a biting pain. And they 
 say, hear. The pain extends from the back to the nip. They say, 
 hear. He says, smite, hear, my friend. And they say, hear. He 
 says, he has a ghost ; he is called by his deceased father, who says, 
 why does he abuse him by conducting in that manner ? His father is 
 weary. They say, hear. He says, the shade of thy mother says, what 
 art thou doing there yonder to her ? She is angry with thee. And they 
 say, hear. Then he takes snuff ; and having finished the snuff again, 
 he says, drive the hearing again, niy friend. And they say, hear. And 
 he says, thy father demands a cow, and says, of the cattle of so and so 
 let an offering be made by slaughtering. And they say, hear. He says, 
 smite. They say, hear. He says, smite. They say, hear. He 
 says, smite. They say, hear. And then, when k he has finished, they 
 give him his present, and go home ; and when they have arrived home, 
 the people at home inquire, saying, what did the priest pretend to say ? 
 And they say, oh ! thus performed that priest, and pretended to say, 
 the ancestral spirit requires that particular cow, thy favorite ; and says,
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 407 
 
 y.wake bonke, u se tike lo o gulayo, Oh! uma se ku tso 
 abaninizo ndzalo, po mina ngi se nokutini na? Ma ba 
 nikwe ndze. Ngo bona pela uku ti ngi ya ku sinda na. 
 Ma ngi sinde pela ; se ngi ba nikiie. 
 
 Urn'laumbe kwenziwe utswala, uku ti, ukona be ya ku 
 Ta inyama notswala. E se e pumake umuntu, e se e ku- 
 luma panTe ; se be tulake abantu, be lalele ukutso 
 kwake, u se ti: O nina, abapansi, ama'lozi, nina obaba 
 betu, nanso pela inkomo yenu ; si yi nikiie yona. Ma 
 sinde pela lowo wenu o gulayo ; ma ku muke ukufa ku 
 yena ; inkomo se ku ngeyenu. 
 
 U se u buyele enTwini, se ku tatwa umkonto, se ku 
 punywa nawo, i si 'latswa inkomo ; i si ti, ehe! u se ti, 
 ma i kale pela inkomo yenu, i pumese okubi oku kimina ; 
 ku zwakale pela, ukuba inkomo yenu e bizwe inina. I 
 si 'latswake, i si fileke, se zi pumeswake izinkomo, i si 
 sala, i fileke esibayeni, i si yekwake isikatsana ; se be 
 ngene enTwini, se be pumake, se be i 'linza, se be i je- 
 dileke, se be i c la c lela, se be i ngeniswa enTwini ; se i 
 tatwake inyongo yayo ; u se zitela ngayo, u se ti, yebo 
 pela, izindaba ezin'le ; ku pele kwonke okubi. Se i 
 ^alehveke inyama, ku tiwa, i Tiwa ngarna'lozi enTwini. 
 
 since the cattle are mine, being given to you by myself, why have you 
 never made me a decent offering ? And when all have heard, then the 
 sick man says, oh ! since the owners themselves decide thus, why, what 
 ran I say ? So then let them have an offering. And then I will see 
 whether or not I shall recover. Now, then, let me recover, since I 
 have made them an offering. 
 
 Perhaps beer was prepared, with the understanding that some might 
 like beef and beer. Then some one goes out, and there talks; and 
 accordingly all the people keep silence, and listen to what he says, to 
 wit: O ye dwellers below, shades, ye our fathers, there then is your 
 cow; we offer the same. Now, then, let this your sick one recover; let 
 disease depart from him ; the cow is already your own. 
 
 Then he goes back into the house, takes a spear, goes out with it, 
 and then the cow is slaughtered; and when she bellows, he says, let 
 your cow cry then, and bring out the evil which is in me; let it be 
 known abroad then, that it is your cow, which was required by your- 
 selves. Thus it is slaughtered, thus it dies, and the rest of the cattle 
 are put out to pasture, while this remains dead in the fold, and is left 
 alone for a time; then they go into the house, then come out and skin 
 it; and when they have finished, they cut it up, and carry it into the 
 house. And taking the gall, he pours it over himself, and says, yes, 
 then, good business this; let all evil come to an end Then the meat
 
 408 APPENDIX. 
 
 Ku nga be ku sa vula 'muntu, se ku tiwa, ama'lozi a yi 
 Ta inyama. Se u sakazwa umswani ezinTwini za lo 
 'muntu. Ku ti, intambama, ku vulvve enTwini, i pekwe 
 inyama, i Tivveke, i jedwe yonke. 
 
 Ngesikati sokugula kwabo ba laba izinkomo, be ti, 
 'baba, ngi beke, ukuba ku pele loku 'kufa ku mina. Ma 
 ngi hambe ka'Ie em'labeni, ngi be nesikati eside soku- 
 sinda Inyama ba yi ngenisa enTwini, ba yi valele kona, 
 be ti, ma ku Te oyise, ukuze ba bona ukuba be ku 'la- 
 tselwe bona, ba si pe imfuyo eningi, ukuze ku sinde izi- 
 ngane zetu nati. 
 
 Esibayeni ba kulume isikati eside, be bongele aina'Iozi ; 
 ba tabate umswani, ba wu sakaze esibayeni sonke ; futi 
 ba wu tabata, ba wu sakaze nga pakati kwezinTu, be ti, 
 yeti 'mngani, wena wa sekutini, u si pe oku'le, u bone 
 e si kwenzileyo. U ya bona loku 'kufa ; u ku suse, se 
 si ku nikile pela inkomo yetu. A s' azi o sa ku funayo, 
 ukuba u se u funa okupi na? 
 
 Ba ti, ma u si pe amabele, ukuba a be maningi, si Te 
 pela, si nga dingi uluto, se si nikile pela o ku funayo. 
 
 is shut up in the house, and is said to be eaten by the ancestral 
 shades in the house. No one ever opens the house while it is said the 
 shades are eating the beef. Then the contents of the stomach are strewn 
 upon the houses of the man himself. And it comes to pass, towards 
 evening, that they open the house, cook the meat, and then eat it, and 
 finish the whole. 
 
 When they are sick, they slaughter cattle to the shades, and say, 
 father, look on me, that this disease may cease from me. Let me 
 have health on the earth, and live a long time. They carry the meat 
 into the house, and shut it up there, saying, let the paternal shades eat, 
 so shall they know that the offering was made for them, and grant us 
 great wealth, so that both we and our children may prosper. 
 
 In the cattle-fold they talk a longtime, praising the ghosts; they take 
 the contents of the stomach, and strew it upon all the fold. Again they 
 take it, and strew it within the houses, saying, hail, friend ! thou of such 
 a place, grant us a blessing, beholding what we have done. You see 
 this distress; may you remove it, since we have given you our animal. 
 We know not what more you want, whether you still require anything 
 more or not. 
 
 They say, may you grant us grain, that it may be abundant, that we
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 409 
 
 Ba ti, yebo, isikati eside u ngi giinile ekuhambeni kvvann 
 kvvonke. Naku, u ya bona, se ngi ze ngi be nomuzi. 
 Umuzi lo wakiwe uwena, 'baba ; se ni vumelani pela 
 ukuba nu mitse umzi wenu na? W akeni ndzalo, u be 
 iimkulu, ukuba nenzalo yenu yande, e se kona nga pe- 
 zulu lapa, yanda ngokwazi nina ni pe amanTa amaningi. 
 Ngesinye isikati b' enza utswala, b' enzela wona ama- 
 'lozi, ba Siya imozana embizeni ; ba ti, ku ya ku Tiwa 
 arna c lozi ukuba a veze ukuTa okuningi futi, ukuba si nga 
 bi nenTala. Uma u litsa uku limazwa into, u ti, ngi 
 sindisvve i'lozi la kwetu, li se la ngi beka. Um'laumbi 
 a c labe imbuzi, e labela lona, a fake inyongo ekanda ; i 
 ti imbuzi lapa i kalayo i zwa ubulungu bokubulawa, 
 a ti, yebo pela, nanso inkomo yenu, ma i kale, ni zwe 
 nina abakiti e ni ngi sindisileyo ; mina ngi ya tanda uku 
 hamba ku'le ndzalo ngesikati eside lapa em'labeni ; se 
 ni ngi biza ndzengoneni na, loku ngi ti ngi ya lungisa 
 ndze mina ku nina na? Na lapa ngi hambayo, ng' 
 etcmba nina abakiti nokulu nobaba noiname. 
 
 VIII. ANOTHER'S ACCOUNT OF GOING TO THE 
 Ba iika ba kuleke ndze, ba ti, E, 'inngani, ngobulau 
 
 may eat, of course, and not be in need of anything, since now we 
 have given you what you want. They say, yes, for a long time have 
 you preserved me in all my going. Behold, you see, I have just come 
 to have a kraal. This kraal was built by yourself, father; and now why 
 do you consent to diminish your own kraal ? Build on as you have 
 begun, let it be large, that your offspring, still here above, may increase, 
 increasing in knowledge of you, whence cometh great power. 
 
 Sometimes they make beer for the ghosts, and leave a little in the 
 pot, saying, it will be eaten by the ghosts that they may grant an abun- 
 dant harvest again, that we may not have a famine. If one is on the 
 point of being injured by anything, he says, I was preserved by our 
 divinity, which was still watching over me. Perhaps he slaughters a 
 goat in honor of the same, and puts the gall on his head ; and when the 
 goat cries out for pain of being killed, he says, yes, then, there is your 
 animal, let it cry, that ye may hear, ye our gods who have preserved me; 
 I myself am desirous of living on thus a long time here on the earth ; 
 why, then, do you call me to account, since I think I am all right in 
 respect to you ? And while 1 live, 1 put my trust in you our paternal 
 jnd maternal "ods. 
 
 3 D
 
 4.10 APPENDIX 
 
 ba kwenu, owa bu nikwayo. I bi seke i si ya nabo nga 
 panTe kwomzi; i bi si ti, vumani. Ba tike, izwa. I ti, 
 ukuma be ze ngokufa, i ti, ni ze ngokufa. Ku ti ukuma 
 ku senganeni, i ti, ukufa ku ku 'mtwana, esiswini. Ku 
 ti, i nga be imitsumane; i ti, u nemitsumane, i mu c lezi 
 enanzini ; ni nga m funela inyanga e tile, e ya ku yi 
 pimisa. Kodwa ka yi ku fa, uma e yi pimisile imi- 
 tsumane. Ba yeke ku leyo inyanga e yelapa ngerniti. 
 Ku ti ukuma e yi pimisile a sinde. 
 
 Ukuti i nga be ba ye ngomuntu omdala, ba pinde 
 ndzalo ; ba kuleke, ba ti, E, 'mngani, ngobulau ba 
 kwenu. A ba tateke, a pume nabo nga panTe, a fike, 
 a ti, ma ba vume. Ba ti, izwa. A ti, ni ze ngomuntu 
 omdala. Ba vuma, ba ti, izwa. A ti, u kwelwe ngo- 
 kufa. Ku ti ukuma ku sekanda, a ti, ukufa ku sekanda. 
 Ba ti, izwa. A ti, a ke ni vume, 'bangani bami. Ba ti, 
 izwa. A ti, ka ngi zwe ukuma ku ukufa kuni na. Ba 
 vuma, ba ti, izwa. Ku ti i nga be u nomioboko ekanda ; 
 i ti, u nomioboko ekanda ; a nga pekelwa izimbiza ; u 
 ya kweula ekanda, u labuka na sezitweni. Ku ti omu- 
 nye i nga be u ya fa, a fe ukufa ku m kwele nga pakati. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 They arrive and pay their respects thus, saying, hail, friend, ac- 
 cording to the honor which belongeth to thee. Then presently he goes 
 with them outside of the kraal, and says, consent ye. Then they say, 
 hear. He says, if they have come because of sickness, he says, you 
 have come because of sickness. And if it be in an infant, he says, the 
 sickness is in a child, the belly. And should it be a case of worms, he 
 says, it is a case of worms ; they are in his stomach; you must seek a 
 certain medical man for him, who will dislodge them. But he will not 
 be sick, when he has dislodged them. Accordingly, they go to that 
 doctor who deals in herbs, and when he has dislodged them he recovers. 
 
 Perhaps they go for an old person, and proceed as before; they pay 
 their respects, and say, hail, friend, according to your office. And then 
 he takes them, and goes without with them, and arriving, says, let them 
 consent. They say, hear. He says, you have come in behalf of an 
 old person. They consent, and say, hear. He says, he is attacked 
 with disease. If it is in the head, he says, the disease is in the head. 
 They say, hear. He says, come now, consent, my friends. They say, 
 hear. He says, let me hear what the disease is. They consent, and 
 say, hear. And if he has disease ia the head, he says, he has disease 
 in the head; he must have a decoction of herbs prepared for him; and 
 it will descend from the head and break out in the lower limbs. And it
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 411 
 
 Ku ti katisimbe, zi ti, u nama'lozi ; ma ku 'latswe in- 
 komo e tile ; i latswe inkomo, a sinde. Ku ti omunye 
 u nama'lozi, kanti u bulawa ngabatakati. Ku ti omu- 
 nye, izinyanga zi nuke ukufa ndze oku nge ko kuye (o 
 gulayo) ; ku ze ku ti ezinye zi ku nuke loku ukufa, oku 
 ku lowo umuntu ; zi ti, ukwenza kwazo, zi rn tsene in- 
 yanga e ya ku m a'lula. Ku ti omunye wa Tisvva ; a nga 
 funelwa inyanga e ya ku m 'lanzisa. Omunye kanti u 
 nekunkulu. Omunye kanti u nabatakati. 
 
 Inkomo i fike pela, i 'latswa ekaya. Ku ti ba fika ba 
 teta nama e lozi ; ba ti, yiTanini, nina ba sekutini ; nanso 
 inkomo yenu; ni nga ze ni si bambe ngomuntu na? Ni 
 ti, ma ku fe umuntu na ? ni nga dine ni bize inkomo 
 yenu na? Ba ba bongeke ngamagama ababo ; ku ze 
 ba bonge noninakulu aba xola oyise. I 'latsweke in- 
 komo, ku ti umswani u litiwe nesibaya sonke, u bujwe 
 ngomluba ; ngokuba ku y' esatswa abatakati ; ku* ya 
 tiwa, ba za ku fika, ba lapune umswani, ukuba lo 
 'muntu o gulayo ku za ku buya ku lubekele ukufa 
 pambili ; u bujweke. Ku ti, uba i pele i ngeniswe en- 
 Twini yonke inyama, i c lale kona ; ku pekwe ububende ; 
 ku vale, ku nga ngeni umuntu. Ku ze ku ti kusi'lwa, 
 ku lale kona abafana abaminyane. Ku ti kusasa, i ki- 
 
 may be another is sick, having some internal disease. Or perhaps they 
 say, he has evil spirits; let a certain cow be slaughtered; the cow being 
 slaughtered, he tecovers. So another has evil spirits, though he is 
 killed by the witches. In respect to another, the priests smell after a 
 difficulty which is not in the sick man; and then others smell out this 
 disease which is in that man; and tell him of a doctor who will have 
 power over him. Another has had poison given him in his food; and 
 for him they must seek a doctor who will give him an emetic. Yet 
 another is suffering from enchantment; and yet another from witchery. 
 Then, of course, the animal comes, and is slaughtered at home. And 
 they come and address the spirits, and say, eat ye, ye so and so, there 
 is your animal. Why should you come and claim one of our people ? 
 and say, he must die ? Are ye not satisfied with demanding your cow ? 
 Thus they praise them with their songs; and then they praise their 
 grandmothers, who are in advance of their fathers. Then the cow is 
 slain, and the contents of the stomach are scattered about the whole 
 fold, being mixed with the contents of the yard; for they are afraid of 
 the witches, saying, they will come and take out the umswarii, and then 
 the sick man will have a relapse; therefore it is mingled. And when 
 the meat is ready, it is all carried into the house and left there. The 
 blood is cooked. The house is shut, that no one may enter At night,
 
 412 APPENDIX. 
 
 tswe i pekwe ; ku ze amabanTa emizi, uku za ku Ta in- 
 c loko. Ku te uma be jedile ukuTa, ba bonge, ba ti, li 
 ya bonga ibariTa, li ti, nga loku ku nga sale se ku sinda 
 umuntu ; n' aba sekutini bo be se b' eriza ubulima ; loku 
 inkorno yabo i si Tiwe, se nga sala ku sinda umuntu. 
 
 9 
 
 IX. ON THE AEATAKAT1, OR WIZARDS. 
 
 Uma ku kona ukufa ekaya, ku mukwe kwo bulwa en- 
 yangeni. Ku ye abantu abaningi uku bula um'la'lo. 
 I like i kokelwe inkorno uku butana abantu abaningi 
 uku bula unfla'lo. I fike i hayiye pakati kwabo, i ti, 
 tsayani, ngi zwe, abangani bami. Ba tso bonke abantu 
 aba leziyo pansi, ba ti, ha! du! I ti, tsayani, abangani 
 bami ; ba tso bonke ba ti, a! du! I m nukake umuntu 
 pakati kwabo ; i ti, mina ngi ti, ni jedwa ubani lo (i 
 kombe umuntu). Lo 'muntu a be nokupika okukulu, 
 uku ti, la, ngi nge ze nga bu pata ubuti ngezanTa zi ka 
 'baba lezi ; a ngi b' azi na kaminyane ; na kiti ba ye bu 
 ng' aziwa ubuti. A ke ngo zwelwa nami kwenye in- 
 yanga. Se be m vumele abakubo, uku ti, yebo, nati 
 
 the little boys sleep there. In the morning, it is brought out and cooked ; 
 and companies come from the kraals to eat the head. And when they 
 have finished eating, they render thanks, saying, the company is thank- 
 ful, and hopes, in view of this, that the man may recover and continue to 
 enjoy health ; though so and so (the ghosts) would nave done an evil 
 thing; but since their cow has been eaten, the man ought now to escape 
 and remain. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 When death occurs in a family, some one goes to inquire of the 
 priest. Many people go to form an investigating commission. An 
 animal is provided, in order to bring a multitude together upon the com- 
 mission. The priest comes and performs his incantations in the midst 
 of them, and says, smite ye, that I may hear, my friends. All the people 
 speak, as they are sitting down around him, and say, attention ! silence ! 
 He says, smite ye, my friends; they all speak and say, attention ! 
 silence ! And thus he smells out the person among them, and says, I 
 myself think you are wasted by this so and so (pointing out a person). 
 This man stoutly denies, saying, no, I never touched poison with these 
 hands of my father; neither have I the least knowledge of it; neither 
 was poison ever known among my people. Come, for I will appeal
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 11 - 
 
 nbani a si m azi ukuti u ya takata ndze. Be si ng f azi 
 uku ti u ya bu pata ubuti. Si ya Jabuka ndze ; a ke so 
 in zvvelake kwenye inyanga. 
 
 I nga fika i in tso futi ; si ya ku kolwa ukuba bala u 
 ya takata. Ba ye kwenye inyanga, be pete inkomo ; 
 ba yi nike. Ba butana abantu ku yona inyanga ; i 
 hayiye, i hayiye, i bule, i ti, a ke ni tso, ngi zwe, 'ban- 
 gani bami. Ba ti, ha! du ! I ti, ngi ya m pikela mina 
 lovvo; inyanga enye i tso yena; kodwa mina a ngi vumi. 
 Ngi ti, ka b' azi, ka zanga a bu pate ubuti na kaniinyane. 
 U kona yena o ba ledayo abantu ba sekutini ; nanguya 
 ow' ake endaweni enye ; ka si ye owa sekaya lomuntii. 
 Ba buyeke, i se i jedile. 
 
 Ku vela ukuiiabanake ku 'bantu bonke ba leso 'sizwe 
 t-s' akileyo, uku ti, enye inyanga a i vumanga ngani na? 
 ukuba u ya takata na? yaleleni na? ya tso otnunye 
 umuntu na ? Ku be ukuuabana okukuluke ku leso 
 isizwe. Ba museke umuntu o nukivveyo inyanga; ba ti, 
 hainba, u ye 'kvvaka kude ezizweni ezi kude ; u nga'lali 
 nati. E mukeke, a ye emi'lotseni yake e kude. 
 
 UnYlaumbi omunye ba m bulala. Um'laumbi otnunye 
 
 and be heard by another priest. Then his friends agree with him, 
 saying, yes, we too have no knowledge that so and so is thus guilty of 
 witchery; we never knew him to touch poison. We are utterly con- 
 founded. Come, then, let us appeal for him to be heard by another 
 priest. 
 
 Perhaps he, also, comes and condemns him, saying, we believe he is 
 really guilty of witchery. To another they go, taking a cow, which 
 they give him. The people assemble before that priest; he performs, 
 and goes through with his incantations, inquires, and says, my friends, 
 come now, speak, that I may hear. They say, attention ! silence ! He 
 says, I myself contend for this one; another priest says he is guilty; 
 but I do not consent. I think he has no knowledge of poison, and never 
 touched the least particle. There is one who destroys the people re- 
 ferred to; he lives far away in another place; he does not belong to the 
 home of this man. And so they return, when he has finished. 
 
 And then there arises a great dispute among all the people of that 
 tribe, saying, why did the other priest not admit that he is guilty of 
 witchcraft ? Why did he refuse, and say it was somebody else ? And 
 hence there is a great quarrel in that tribe. Therefore they banish the 
 man whom the priest condemned, saving, go. build far away among dis- 
 tant tribes; dwell not with u,s. And then he departs, and goes to residr 
 among his distant friend- 
 
 Another, perhaps, they kill Another, perhaps, they watch, and inst 
 
 3 E
 
 414 APPENDIX. 
 
 ba in bone, ba tule ndze; ku ti ngesinye isikati sobusuku 
 ba m bone e hamba ekaya, abantu se be lele, yena e 
 pumile emzini wake ; ba m bone e hamba ebusuku, nga 
 semva kwezinTu, a fune ukweja otangweni lomuzi, a 
 baleke, a baie. Kodwa um c laumbi ba m bambe e s' ela 
 otangweni ; ba m bope ebusuku, ba buze, u funani lapa 
 na? u ya funa ukuba u si bulale na? ba peke amanzi 
 a bile. Abanye ba litse izinti ; abanye ba tabate 
 amanzi a tsisayo, ba tabate upondo, ba mu te ngawo 
 esiswini sake ; ba tabate izinti ezi litsiweyo ; ba m tso- 
 tse (=ba m fake zona) ; ba z' apulele esiswini sake ; 
 ba m bambe ngezingalo ; ba m pelekezele ebusuku, ba 
 mu yise emuzini wake ; ba fike, ba m vulele iniozana 
 ndze ; a ngene ekaya lake, abanye abantu be lele, be 
 nga kwazi loku ; kodwa a ngene enTwini yake ebusuku ; 
 abanye ba buye esangweni, ba buyele emakaya abo. 
 
 Lo 'muntu a be nokugula okukulu ; be ze abe be 
 zele kusi'lwa uku za 'ku m bona ukuba u ndzani na ; u 
 ya gula na ; abanye abantu be ng' azi ukuba u letwe 
 ebusuku ibona labo abantu ; a feke, a xude igazi, ma 
 sinyane ku pume izinti esiswini sake. 
 
 ANOTHER'S ACCOUNT OF THE WIZARDS. 
 
 Ku ya ya 'ku bula unfla'lo lapo ku gula umuntu. I 
 fike inyanga, i ti, tsaya, ngi zwe ; ni ze ngom'la'lo. Ba 
 
 say nothing; and at another time, in the night, they see him walking 
 about their home, the people being asleep, he having come from his 
 own kraal ; they see him walking about in the night, behind their houses, 
 wishing to jump over the fence of the kraal, and flee, and hide. But 
 perhaps they catch him as he is jumping over the fence ; they bind him 
 in the night; they ask him, what do you want here ? Do you wish to 
 kill us ? They heat some water to the boiling point. Some sharpen 
 sticks; while others take the boiling water and a horn, [The rest of 
 this account is too inhuman, and otherwise unfit, to be translated. 
 Suffice it to say, that the man does not survive their cruelty.] 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 They go to inquire of the commission when one is sick. The priest 
 arrives, and says, smite, that I may hear; you have come on a case of
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES 415 
 
 ti abantu, izwa. I ti, tsaya, ngi zwe. Ba ti, izwa. Ni 
 ze ngomuntu omkulu ; u ya gula ; ukufa ku sendaweni 
 e tile. I ti, tsaya, ngi zwe. Ba ti, yizwa. A ti, u bu- 
 lawa ngumuntu. Ku ti, ukuma umuntu o bulalayo e 
 kona ekaya la lo 'muntu o gulayo, i ti, u bulawa ngu- 
 muntu, u sekaya. I ti, tsaya, ngi zwe ; nangu 'muntu 
 e'lezinaye. Ba ti, yizwa. A ti, tsaya, ngi zwe; ku 
 za ku ba kubi ; u ya kunkula ; u s' a c luke kvvabaningi ; 
 se ku yimpisi ; kepa se ngi ya in nuka ; ka (or ma) ye 
 ku bulawa ; ka bu lali ubutongo ; ku ti ku leliwe, a 
 hambe e kunkula abanye abantu ; ku beke se za ku 
 Tivva nezinkomo, ku pangvve kwonke namabele ake. 
 
 X. CAPTURING AND KILLING A WIZARD. 
 
 Urna ku zwakele uku ti, u kona umtakati, ku ya suka 
 umuntu o wake naye, uma e bulala umzi wake, a ku- 
 puke, a ye enkosini ; a fike, a suinayelake ezimekwini. 
 Zi ti izimeku zi yo ku tsena inkosi. Ku ti ukuba zi yi 
 tsene inkosi, ku ti nga semva i vuke kakulu, uku ti, 
 a nga ti e kona na umtakati na? a ze a bulale umzi 
 womunye umuntu na? Ku fanele naye ukuma a fe. 
 
 witchcraft. The people say, hear. He says, smite, that I may hear. 
 They say, hear. You have come concerning a great man; he is sick; 
 the disease is in a certain place. He says, smite, that I may hear. 
 They say, hear. He says, he is killed by somebody. And, if the person 
 who killed the other be at the home of the sick man, he says, he was 
 killed by a person at home. He says, smite, that I may hear; it is some 
 one who lives with him. They say, hear. He says, smite, that I may 
 hear; there is evil coming; he is given to witchcraft; he has left the 
 multitude, and become a wolf; but now I know him, and he shall be 
 killed; he does not sleep nights; but, in time of sleep, he goes about 
 bewitching other people; therefore he must be killed, his cattle confis- 
 cated, and possession be taken of his grain and every thing else. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 When it is reported that there is a wizard about, some one who built 
 with him, if he destroys his people, starts and goes up to the king; and 
 on arriving, he speaks with the servants; and the servants go and tell 
 the king. And when they have told the king, he shows great displeasure, 
 and says, can it be there is a wizard about ? and that he should destroy
 
 416 APPENDIX. 
 
 Hanibani, ni m bulale kona ^ati lesi. (Umpande) a be 
 u se yi pake (impi), i si ya ku m bulala ; i si hatnba 
 ubusuku. 
 
 Ku ti ukuma ku se be soridele nga kona ekaya, ba 
 ngene kwomunye umuzi, ba c lale kona. Ku ti lapa se 
 ku c lwile, ba wu 'langanise pakati umuzi wake, umta- 
 kati, ku te o nge na 'muzi. I fike emini, ku hambe 
 umuntu a be 'munye (o se tunyiwe empini), u yo ku 
 tsena yena umnumzana wake a c lezi kuye. Ku ti um- 
 numzana wake a ba bize bonke (abantu bake), uku ti, 
 yizani, ni zo ku zwa, nangu umuntu e vela enkosini. 
 Ku riga be ba ya buza, uku ti, u zo kwenzani? A ti 
 yena ukutso kwake, u zo ku ngi biza. Ku ti nga semva, 
 umnumzana a Iwebe omunye (wa kubo), a m kombisa 
 yena lo 'muntu o za ku bulawa. A ti yena o vela en- 
 kosini, a ti, ku fanele ukuba si yo ku sumayela nga 
 panTe. Ba purnake. Ku ti umnumzana a m bize yena 
 lo 'muntu o za ku bulawa, ba puma kulala naye um- 
 numzana. Ku ti o vele empini a k' a 'lale nabantu 
 abanye ba kona, a ba sumayeze, uku ti, ni nge tuki ; 
 ngi suka enkosini ; ni zo ku bulala lo 'muntu o puma no- 
 mnumzana ; ni mu 'lakanipele, a nga baleki ; ni m 
 bambe masinyane ; ngo ti ngi sa Jala uku kuluma, ngi 
 sa ti, inkosi i tile kuwe umnumzana lowo, ni be se ni m 
 bambake. 
 
 another man's kraal ? He himself deserves to die. Go ye, and kill 
 him this' very moment. >Then he (Umpande) fits out a military force, 
 which goes at once, and by night, to kill him. 
 
 And when they have nearly reached the place where he lives, they 
 enter a neighboring kraal and remain there. And when it is dark, 
 they assemble the kraal within, the kraal where the wizard resides, for 
 he has none of his own. Now the force having arrived that day, 
 some one of the company will have gone to inform the head man with 
 whom the wizard resides. Then the head man calls all his people to- 
 gether, saying, come ye, listen, here is a man who has come from the 
 king. Perhaps they ask what he has come for ? And he replies, saying, 
 he has come to call me, After a while, the head man makes a motion 
 to one of his people, and points out the individual who is to be killed. 
 Then the man who came from the king, says, let us go outside and have 
 a talk; and so they go out. And the master of the kraal calls the man 
 who is to be killed, and goes out with him first. Then the man who 
 came from the force remains with the rest of the people of the place, 
 and converse? with them, saying, you must not be frightened; 1 come
 
 SUPERSTITIOUS PRACTICES. 417 
 
 Ku ti (uiutakati) o namaclodana, inkosi i buze, uku ti, 
 amadodana ake a kona na? Ku ti ukubane ku tiwa, a 
 kona ; inkosi i ti, ma wa yo ku bizwa. A bizvveke, a 
 kupuke uku ya enkosini. Ku ti nga semva, ba sale, ba 
 m bulale uyise ; ngokuba ku y' esatswa ukubane ama- 
 dodana e za ku gvvaza abantu, uma ku bulawa uyise e 
 kona. 
 
 Ku ti abanye ba bulawa ngabo abanumuzana babo, 
 ku nga yiwa enkosini uku ya 'ku bika enkosini. Ku 
 bikwa abantu oku suke b' aziwa inkosi, i tukutele ka- 
 kulu. Ku ti i nga be i bulala yonke leyo 'mizi e bulelc 
 lo 'muntu o tandekayo enkosini ; i ti ukutso kwayo, ku 
 nga pumi nendza, ba bulaweke bonke labo 'bantu. 
 
 XI. ON BECOMING AN IJVYJVYGA, OR PRIEST. 
 
 Ku ti, u ya gula ku ze ku tsona unyaka ; a ze 'ela- 
 tswe, a 'lule izinyanga ez' azi ukwelapa. Ku ze ku ti, 
 ukubonakala kvvake a bonakale ngokutanda uku ngena 
 ezizibeni. U ya buya, u se mpofu umiako ; e se pete 
 
 from the king ; and you must kill the man who has gone out with the 
 master of the kraal ; look out for him, that he does not get away. Seize 
 him at once; just when I shall begin to talk, and say, the king has said 
 to thee, that head man, just then seize him at once. 
 
 Should he (the wizard) have sons, the king inquires, saying, has he 
 any sons there ? And if they answer, saying, there are, the king says, 
 let them be called. And accordingly they are called, and go up to gc 
 to the king. And when they get there, they remain till after their 
 father is killed; for there is fear of the sons, lest they may stab the 
 people, if their father should be killed in their presence. 
 
 Some wizards are killed by their own head men, without first going 
 to the king about it. The king, being informed by those who happen 
 to be on good terms with him, is exceedingly enraged. Perhaps he 
 kills all the people of those kraals who killed the king's favorite, his 
 order being, so let all those people be destroyed, nor let a dog escape. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 It comes to pass that he is sick till the end of the year; and then he 
 undergoes a course of medicine, that he may surpass those doctors 
 which practice medicine. And then, when he makes his appearance, he 
 appears with a wish to enter pools. He returns, covered with a whitish 
 clay, bringing snakes; and then they go to the priests. They say, my 
 
 3 F
 
 418 APPENDIX. 
 
 izinyoka ; ku ze ku ya yivva ezinyangeni. Zi ti, u >' 
 etwasa lowo, 'mngani wami. A ze a tatsatwe, e muswe, 
 a yiswe kwezi z' etvvasile. Ku ti ukuma a fike lapo, 
 zi m tabate, zi muke naye, zi yo ku m posa emanzini 
 elwanTe ; zi siye kona, zi m posile, li ze li tsone leli 
 'langa, e nga bonwa, ku ze ku buye ku tsone elinye 
 ilanga, e nga bonwa. Ku ti ngezinsuku ezinye, u ya 
 fika u se twasile. U se fika, u se sina ngarnagama ake 
 a fikele nawo ; a betelwe ngabantu ; a 'labe izimbuzi 
 nezinkomo; ku be imvu yodwa a nga yi 'labile, ngokuba 
 imvu ka i na 'kukala, uma i za ku latswa ; a tande oku 
 za ku kala lapa ku za ku c latswayo. Enze izinye nezin- 
 yongo i ze ku we'lezela ekanda lake. A ngene ezizibeni 
 ezi nezinyoka nezingwenya. A ti uma e bambile inyoka, 
 a be u nikwe yona (inyoka) ; a ti uma e bambile ingwe- 
 nya, a be yi nikwe yona ; a ti uma e bamba ingwe, a 
 bambe ingwe ; a ti uma e bamba in'lon'lo, a bambe in- 
 'lorflo ; ku tiwe e twasa ; a ti e twasa ngengwe, a bambe 
 ingwe ; a ti e twasa ngenyoka, a bambe inyoka. 
 
 XII. ISIBONGO SA 'SENZANGAKONA. 
 
 Igodi elimnyama la kwa Nobamba ! 
 Eli bambe li ba xila amalakala naba seziteni naba 
 sekaya ; 
 
 friend, that man is becoming a priest. And then he is taken, sent 
 away, and brought to those who have taken the priest's degree. And 
 when he arrives there, they take him, and go and throw him into the 
 waters of the sea; and having thrown him in, there they leave him; nor 
 is he seen again all that day, nor all of the next. After some days, he 
 arrives with his degree, ready to practice. Having arrived, he begins 
 to dance with the songs with which he returned; and the people clap 
 their hands for him. He slaughters goats, and cattle, everything save 
 sheep; and the reason these are left is because they never cry when 
 they are slain; he wants something which will cry when it is about to 
 be slaughtered. With the bladders and gall bags he covers his head, 
 till they hang about in all directions. He enters pools of water 
 abounding in serpents and alligators. And now if he catches a snake, 
 he has power over that ; or if he catches an alligator, he has power 
 over that; or if he catches a leopard, he has power over the leopard; 
 or if he catches a deadly poisonous serpent, he has power over the most 
 poisonous serpent. And thus he takes his degrees, the degree of 
 leopards, that he may catch leopards, and of serpents, that he may 
 catch serpents.
 
 SONGS 419 
 
 Inakazi emnyama ya kwa Zwa Ngendaba ; 
 Imamba ka 'Majanda noNsele ; 
 Unotswabadela izitvlubu namakasi ; 
 Upezipelile ka 'Menzi ; 
 Umtombo wa kwa Nobamba, e ng' u puze, 
 Nga gangaleka, nga tsona e'lozini la sEpungeni. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Thou dark grave of Nobamba ! 
 
 Ever noosing the ankles of foes at home and abroad. 
 
 Black spotted beast of Zwa Ngendaba ; 
 
 Thou deadly destroyer of Makanda and Unsele ; 
 
 Voracious consumer of the root and the branch ; 
 
 Descendant of Menzi ! plundering till plunder is gone; 
 
 Thou fount of Nobamba ! drinking of which, 
 
 I dropped down dead, and sunk into the shade of Punga. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ; AND NOTES ON THE FORE- 
 GOING SONG. 1. The isibongo, or song in honor of 
 the king, whether Chaka, Dingane, or some other royal 
 personage, generally opens with something like the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 Bayeti, 'mngani ! 'nkosi ! 'nkosi enkulu ! wena um- 
 
 nyama ; 
 Wena wa kula be libele ; u nga ngentaba. 
 
 Hail, lord ! king ! great king ! thou art black ; 
 
 Thou hast grown while others delayed; thou art like a mountain. 
 
 2. The songs here given are only a sample of what 
 are usually sung. Being unwritten, as sung by different 
 parties, and on different occasions, there is some varia- 
 tion and diversity among them, in respect to both the 
 length of the songs, and the order of the topics. 
 
 3. To give a correct, good translation, of these songs, 
 is by no means easy. The difficulty arises in part from 
 the great license which the composer has taken in the 
 construction of them, often departing from all the ordinary 
 laws and forms of the language. Another difficulty comes 
 from the exceedingly laconic style of the composition, and 
 often from our ignorance of the historical incidents on 
 which many parts of the song are based. Still another 
 difficulty arises from the figurative import, and idiomatic
 
 420 APPENDIX 
 
 use of many words and phrases ; and also from the not 
 unfrequent inability of the English to express fully 
 and briefly the hidden, and sometimes double meaning, 
 which lies couched in a word or phrase. Thus, in the 
 first line of Dingane's song Umdingi wa kwa 'Mpikazi, 
 &c., there is a significancy in the two proper names 
 which requires the names to be rendered, instead of 
 simply transferring them ; for there is a force in saying 
 the needy offspring of the hyena has an eye on the cattle 
 of men, which a mere transfer of the names does not 
 give. So the phrase nga tsona e^lozini la sEpungeni, as 
 in the foregoing song, is capable of a rendering different 
 from that which has been given; since flozi signifies 
 either a ghost, or a bush, a jungle, a dark shady place ; 
 and ipunga also signifies a bush or jungle, or it may be 
 taken as a proper name of either a place or a person. 
 
 Again, in the phrase Upezipelile ka 'Menzi, the word 
 'Menzi literally denotes Maker, and is one of the terms 
 often employed to denote God, as Maker of all things ; 
 while the phrase Upezipelile is an abridged form of 
 u peze se zi pelile (izinkomo), that is, he ceased to 
 plunder cattle only when there were no more cattle to 
 be plundered. 
 
 XIII. I. ISIBONGO SI KA TsAKA 
 
 U'laba lungu 'ba zo sumayezana, 
 
 Naba seziteni naba sekaya ; 
 
 U'laza olu nginyongo yembuzi ; 
 
 Uvemvane lu ka 'Punga, lu 'mabala a 'zizinge, 
 
 Nga ti a bekiwe umzizima o ngamatunzi ezmtaba, 
 
 Kona ku c lwa ku hambe abatakati. 
 
 Inlainlai ka 'Punga noMakeba, 
 
 E ngi buke nga ze nga yo dzayela ; 
 
 Umasengo ma c le ! inkonyana yenkomo ! 
 
 Kwa ngi naba ukukaba kwa le 'nkomo ; 
 
 Ya kaba o sengayo, ya dela umbambi. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Thou striker of poison into every conspirator, 
 As well those abroad as those who 're at home ;
 
 SON 
 
 Thou art green as the gall of the goat; 
 Butterfly of Punga, tinted with circling spots, 
 
 f made by the twilight from the shadows of mountains, 
 In the dusk of the evening, when the wizards are abroad, 
 Lynx-eyed descendant of Punga and Makeba. 
 With looking at whom I am ever entranced. 
 What beautiful parts ! a call' of the cow ! 
 The kicking of this cow confuses my brain. 
 Kicking the milker and accepting the holder. 
 
 NOTES ON THE FOREGOING SONG. 1. " Inlainlai " 
 Be tso, unflaumbi, ngokubeka kwake, e beka abantu 
 ab' esabayo, &c., that is, he was so called, perhaps, 
 from his searching out cowards. When an army re- 
 turned, he assembled the men, picked out the .(supposed) 
 cowards those who had killed nobody in battle, and 
 had them slain on the spot, requiring one person to 
 raise the arm of the so-called coward, and another to 
 give him a stab in the arm-pit. 
 
 2. " Umasengo," from amasengo=amatanga. Others, 
 however, say Umasango, from amasango, gates, and 
 refer the term to his well-set teeth. 
 
 3. " Inkonyana yenkomo," that is, Chaka and Sen- 
 zangakona worthy son of worthy sire true chip of the 
 old block. 
 
 4. " Kwa ngi naba," ngokuba inkosi kvva ku ti 
 oyena a yinieku, ku ya ba ngomso i si bulala yena ; in 
 gane kade e ng' a'lukani nenkosi. 
 
 5. " Umbambi," vicious cows, among the natives, 
 require one to hold them by the nose and horns, while 
 another milks. The milker and holder may represent 
 two of the king's domestics, as one who carried his mat 
 and chair, and one who carried the shield or umbrella 
 to shade his head, when he walked out. Or they may 
 represent two captains, one of whom, perhaps the most 
 honorable and faithful, might be slain at any moment ; 
 and the other, retained, and even promoted to higher 
 office and honor. 
 
 6. Instead of "ya kaba o sengayo, ya dela umbambi," 
 some say, " ya yeka o sengayo i kabe umbambi," that 
 is, leaving the milker and kicking the holder. The first 
 is the better form, though the sentiment is the same in 
 each case, as may be seen bv tlu- preceding (fifth) note. 
 
 3 G
 
 4>22 APPENDIX. 
 
 -2. ANOTHER SONG IN HONOR OF CHAKA. 
 
 [This song has been published before (though not without some 
 errors); see "Proceedings of the Commission," &.c., Part IV., p. 27 ; 
 also Introduction to Rev. Mr. Donne's Dictionary, p. ix.] 
 
 Wa jedajeda izizwe ; 
 U ya ku laselapi na? 
 E ! u ya ku laselapi na? 
 W a c lula amakosi ; 
 U 'laselapi na? 
 Wa Jedajeda izizwe, 
 U 'laselapi na? 
 E! E! E! 
 U 'laselapi na? 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Thou didst finish, finish the nations; 
 Where will you go to battle now ? 
 
 Hey ! where will you go to battle now '< 
 Thou didst conquer the kings, 
 
 Where do you go to battle now ? 
 Thou didst finish, finish the nations, 
 
 Where do you go to battle now ? 
 Hurrah ! hurrah ! hurrah ! 
 
 Where do you go to battle now ? 
 
 XIV. ISIBONGO SI KA 'DINGANE 
 
 Umdingi wa kwa 'Mpikazi, 
 
 Uso li 'nkonyeni zabantu ; 
 
 Inyoni ka 'Maube, umatsulubeza ; 
 
 Utsikila li m' va 'mi'le ; 
 
 Unkomo zi 'makekeba, 
 
 Ngokuhambe zi c lala. 
 
 U Te Umzilikazi ka 'Matsobana ; 
 
 Wa Ta Umswazi ka 'Sobuza ; 
 
 Wa Ta umlorno wezinlaba kwa 'Matsobana ; 
 
 Wa Ta Ugundane kwa 'Matsobana ; 
 
 Wa Ta Ugolela kwa 'Matsobana ; 
 
 WaTa Upuzukuyekela kwa 'Matsobana ; 
 
 Wa Ta Unzimazana Eludidini, 
 
 Idzaxa eli namanTa na semanTeni ; 
 
 Wa Ta Ungwati kwaba ka 'yise ; 
 
 Wa Ta Unomafu wenkosi ; 
 
 Izulu eli bete izi'lambi.
 
 SONGS, 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 Thou needy oflsprins of Umpikazi, 
 Hyer of the cattle of men; 
 Bird of Maube, fleet as a bullet; 
 Sleek, erect, of beautiful parts; 
 Thy cattle like the comb of the bees, 
 A herd too large, too huddled, to move 
 Devourer of Umzilikazi of Machobana; 
 Devourer of 'Swazi, son of Sobuza; 
 Breaker of the gates of Machobana; 
 Devourer of Gundane of Machobana ; 
 Devourer of Golela of Maohobana; 
 Devourer of Puzukuyekela of Machobana; 
 l>'\oiirer of Nzimazana of Ludidini, 
 A monster in size, of mighty power; 
 Devourer of Ungwati of an ancient race; 
 Devourer of the kingly Nomafu; 
 Like heaven above, raining and shining. 
 
 NOTES ON THE FOREGOING SONG. 1. " Umpikazi," 
 Mother of Dingane. The name signifies a she- wolf 
 or hyena. 
 
 2. " Uso li nkonyeni zabantu," -With an eye on the 
 cattle of men ; ngokuba a be ya bone izinkomo zabantu, 
 a ti, ma zi yo ku Tiwa. 
 
 3. " Umatsulubeza," uku tsulubeza=uku ti, tsu 
 like the whizzing of a bullet. Ukwendiza kwenyoni e 
 vikayo, noma umuntu e yi dzukudzela ; ngokuba wa ya 
 ku bulala Utsaka nga semva impi i pumile. 
 
 4. " Utsikila," uku tsikila=uku ma ka'le. 
 
 5. "Li m' va 'nai'le," itsikila li mi imiva; umva, 
 plural imiva, from uku va, root of emva, i.e., of beautiful 
 posteriors. 
 
 6. " Izulu eli bete izi'lambi," ba m fanisa nezulu ; 
 lona li de F enza isflarnbi, li buye li se ; li buye F enze 
 isi c lambi futi. Ngoba u ya lasela ku leso 'sizwe ; a 
 fike a zi Te izinkomo ; ku ti be sa buy a be ti ba y' aka, 
 a buye a fike a zi Te izinkomo, neza be zi latsile, a ze a 
 zi Jede zonke. Ku ti iikuma a zi jede, a ba yekele, ku 
 ti uma se be zuzile izinkomo, a zi yeke zi be ziningi, a 
 pinde a yo ku zi Ta. Kwa linganiswa nga loko, uku 
 ti izulu eli bete izflambi; ngokuba amakosi emikonto 
 abantu a ba nobisa nd.zalo.
 
 424 APPENDIX. 
 
 XV. ISIBONGO SI KA 'MPANDE 
 
 I Jnowel' einva \va wOtsaka ; 
 Inkondzane e dukele ezulvvini ; 
 Inkondzane e 'buxwanja bu sesiswini ; 
 
 'nkomo zi jibajiba ukuwela ; 
 Ngokujundeka lapa zi balekayo. 
 Umbabazi wendzuba u namanga ; 
 Nawe indzuba u yi bangile Emalonlo. 
 Intonga yetusi ka 'Ndabezita ; 
 
 1 salile kwezinye izinduku ; 
 
 Aba be z' apula ba yi siya emleni, 
 
 Be ti, ba ya ku yi basa J mu c la ku na izulu. 
 
 Inyarna yenkunzi ya sEnlakavini, 
 
 I zo ^abusa ndzalo na sekwoseni, 
 
 I zo ba duma ndzalo ekupekeni. 
 
 U ya dela umfazi wa sEmanjebeni, 
 
 U bonile izilo zi ka 'Dzama, 
 
 Zi bulalana pakati kwAmalonjo omabili. 
 
 O dabule pakati kweNtumeni ne'liza, 
 
 Izulu eli dumile pakati kwAmalonjo, 
 
 La rn tata Usilwana o be zalwa ngUnTovu ; 
 
 Le za noMamini kwaba ka 'Mpika ; 
 
 Le za noNozitsala ka 'Makoboza ; 
 
 Le za noNTela ka 'Sompisi ; 
 
 Le za noNonduvana ka 'Sompisi ; 
 
 Le za noBibi ka 'Sompisi ; 
 
 Le za noNjunjulu e be zalwa ngUmpika ; 
 
 Le za noSonsukwana o be zalwa ngUjwatsaza ; 
 
 Le za noMlomo o be zalwa ngUzwide ; 
 
 Le za noNlabeni o be zalwa ngUzwide ; 
 
 Le za noMasisinga o be zalwa Umtungwa ; 
 
 O 'nkomo zi nameva na setsobeni ; 
 
 We za noSiyetengu ka 'Sokwela Ezinyosini ; 
 
 Le za noMjwazi ka 'Makobosi Ezinyosini ; 
 
 Le za noNonkoba ka 'Pepelentsa Ezinyosini ; 
 
 We za noSilandzana ka 'Futelimamba Ezinyosini. 
 
 Ngi ya bonga, 'nkosi ! ka 'Mdzokwane ka 'Ndaba, 
 
 Ka sala ku tselwa ka sala ku nyenyezela. 
 
 Wena u yinTovu, wena u yinTovu, wena u yuiTovu ; 
 
 Bayeti ! 'nkosi ! wena umnyama.
 
 SONGS. 1J.' 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 Thou brother of the Chakas, considerate forder '. 
 A swallow which fled in the sky; 
 
 -wallow with a whiskered breast; 
 Whose cattle cross over in so huddled a crowd, 
 They stumble for room when they run. 
 Thou false adorer of the valor of another; 
 That valor thou tookest at the battle of Makonko. 
 Of the stock of Ndabazita, ram-rod of brass. 
 Survivor alone of all other rods; 
 Others they broke, and left this in the soot, 
 Thinking to burn it some rainy cold day. 
 Flesh of the bullock of Inkakavini ! 
 Always delicious, if only 'tis roasted, 
 'Twill always be tasteless, if boiled. 
 The woman from Mankebe 's delighted; 
 She has seen the leopards of Jama, 
 Fighting together between the Makonko. 
 He passed between the Intuma and Ihliza, 
 The celestial who thundered between the Makonko, 
 He took Usilwana, who was born of Unhlovu ; 
 He came with Mamini from the clan of Umpika; 
 He came with Nozichala of Makoboza; 
 He came with Unhlela, son of Sompisi; 
 He came with Nonduvana, son of Sompisi; 
 He came with Ubibi, son of Sompisi; 
 He came with Nunulu, who was born of Umpika ; 
 He came with Sonsukwana, who was born of Kwachaza; 
 He came with Umlomo, who was born of Uzwide; 
 He came with Nabeni, who was born of Uzwide; 
 He came with Masisinga, who was born of Umtungwa ; 
 Whose cattle have stings in the bush of their tails; 
 He came with Siyetengu of SokweF of the Bees; 
 He came with Umkwazi of Makobos' of the Bees; 
 He came with Nonkoba of Pepelench' of the Bees; 
 He came with Sikanjana of Futelimamb' of the Bees. 
 I praise thee, O king ! son of Jokwane, the son of Undaba, 
 The merciless opponent of every conspiracy. 
 Thou art an elephaat, an elephant, an elephant, 
 All glory to thee, thou Monarch who art black. 
 
 NOTES ON THE FOREGOING SONG. 1. *' Unovvel' 
 emva," Because he fled and forded the Tugela after 
 Dingane had sent off* his army against the Amasvvazi. 
 Others say UnoweV e mba, that is, he crossed over des- 
 titute and unknown, subsisting on such roots as he could 
 dig from the earth. 
 
 2. " Umbabazi vvendzuba u namanga." Wa baba/a 
 indzuba ku 'Dingane, wa ti, indzuba ku 'Dingane i y* 
 
 3 H
 
 ~> APPENDIX. 
 
 esabeka, iningi. Ba ti, indzuba nawe u sa yi bangilc, u 
 nendzuba enkulu. 
 
 3. " Intonga yetusi," a ba be c lo c la ngako isibuuiu. 
 
 4. " I salile kwezinve," ngokuba ba be nga se ko 
 bonke aba kunye naye Umpande: se ku tsiwoke nga loko 
 uku ti, "intonga yetusi ka 'Ndabezita i salile kweziriye." 
 
 5. " Ernleni," up in the roof of tbe house, over the 
 lire-place. 
 
 6. " Be ti, ba ya ku yi basa 'mu c la ku na izulu,"- 
 thinking they would kindle a fire with it some cold wet 
 day. When Dingane killed Chaka and other brothers, 
 he was persuaded to leave Umpande. As Umpande 
 grew up and saw the jealousy and evil design of Din- 
 gane, he fled to the west side of the Tugela, while 
 Dingane r s army was absent from home ; joined the 
 Boers, raised an army, and routed Dingane, killing 
 many of his great men, and taking their cattle, in the 
 famous battle of the Amakonko. 
 
 7. " Inyama yenkunzi," others say inyama nge ye- 
 nkunzi. 
 
 8. " I zo x*abusa," &c. This denotes the capricious 
 sovereignty of the monarch Umpande, his power to pro- 
 mote or destroy, according to freak and pleasure; just 
 as "ya kaba o sengayo, ya dela umbambi," denotes the 
 same thing in Chaka. 
 
 9. " Umfazi," the wife of Umpande is represented 
 as a delighted spectator of the bloody battle between 
 her husband and his brother, who are called two tigers, 
 "izilo" zentaba. ezi nga ze zi lale endawonye; ezi be 
 zi ya bonane, esinye si si uotsa emangweni waso. 
 
 XVI. AMAXUBO, IMIGUBO OR IZAJU, AND IMIIWAYO : 
 OR A VARIED COLLECTION ' OF PRAYERS AND 
 DITTIES, RELIGIOUS AND SECULAR. 
 
 1. Ixubo lapa ku Tiwe inyama ekaya, e tetiweyo:- 
 
 A u o yi ye ya ye ya 
 O u u u dzi yi yi 
 A a u dzi, dzi, dzi, 
 A a wu dzi, dzi, &c .,
 
 PRAYERS AND DITTIES. 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 A song on the occasion of eating meat at home, which has been 
 offered to the amahlozi; [a translation of which will hardly be exported. 
 The song is continued for some time, but contains nothing more than a 
 repeated rehearsal of the above;] after which they sav : 
 
 Bayeti ! worm pakati, \vena kn 'Zulu. 
 THAT is 
 
 Hail ! thoti within, thou descendant of Zulu. 
 
 [It may he added, that the above song is said to have been originated 
 by Senzangakona, and to have been kept up, and sung, as a e 
 national piece, by all his successors, Ofaaka, Dingane, and Umpandc.] 
 
 2. The following, which seems to he a compound of 
 praise and prayer, is said to be offered hy the kings, to 
 the shades of their royal ancestors : 
 
 Yizwake, 'nkosi, 'ndwendwe wa bade ; 
 'Si'lope si ka 'Ktimede Mandondo esi'le. 
 Ngi sa libele nga buza lapa sezibulweni : 
 Ma si pote igoda, 'Mandi ka 'Dzania, 
 Si ye ezulwini lapa nezituta zi nge yi ku fika, 
 Zo be zi ya kwela z' apuke amazwanyann. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Then hear, () king, thou tallest of the tall; 
 Son of Kumede Mandondo, splendid and fair 1 
 While I linger I would implore the first-born : 
 O great progenitor of Jama ! let us twist us a rope, 
 And ascend up to heaven where ghosts never come, 
 But break their tiny toes if to mount they try. 
 
 [Of the above address there are some half a dozen more lines; but 
 they contain sensual allusions and indelicate expressions, which preclude 
 their appearing in print.] 
 
 3. A tolerably full account of the ceremonies usually 
 observed by the common people, and a notice of the sacri- 
 fices, the prayers, and praise offered to the shades, in case 
 of sickness, have been already given in other parts of the 
 Appendix. As a sample of these prayers on such oc- 
 casions, another native has given the following : 
 
 YiTanini, nina 'bakwiti ; ukuhamba okukadekade; 
 umuntu a donse, a yepezulu, a hambe kade-em'labeni.
 
 428 APPENDIX. 
 
 Ukuba e kulekela uku puza uku fa, u tso ndzalo, u 
 tela inyongo emzimbeni wake : 
 
 YiTanini nabakiti ; ngi kulekela amabele nokuzala, 
 uba ngi zale, ngi siye induku yebanTa, ku ze uku ti 
 igama lami ka li se yi ku pela. Nanso inkomo ya kwetu. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 " Oh ! come, eat, ye shades of our clan; so shall life be greatly pro- 
 longed; and let a man hold on, rise, and go far on the earth." 
 
 If he prays for a delay of death, he says thus, at the same time 
 pouring the gall upon his body : 
 
 "Eat, ye shades of our clan; I ask for corn, and for increase, that 
 I may multiply, and leave a club for the company, so that my name 
 shall never be forgotten. There is our cow (an offering for you)." 
 
 4. The following is a specimen of a ivar-song : 
 
 A u, a u, a u, a u, a u, a u, a u, &c., &c. 
 
 5. The following is another specimen : 
 
 Dzi, dzi, dzi, dzi, dzi, dzi, dzi, &c., &c. 
 
 6. Another ixubo lempi, or war-song : 
 
 Kwi tsi, kwi tsi, i, xau, dzi, xau ; 
 U, i, zi, ye za injobo yamakosi ; 
 Ni ya yi njumela, kwi, tsi, au, dzi ; 
 A, o, i ye, zi, ye, za injobo yamakosi ; 
 Ne njumela, kwi, dzi, &c., &c. 
 
 repeating the same over and over, the substance of 
 which is : 
 
 I ye za injobo yamakosi ; 
 Ni ya yi njumela. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 The conqueror of kings is coming ; 
 Ye are intercepting his majesty. 
 
 7. Another ixubo lempi, a song of triumph : 
 
 Sa yi dunduze impi yetu, 
 Sa yi dunduze, e, ya, ya, ye! 
 Impi, e, ya, ya, ye ! sa yi dunduze, 
 Sa yi dunduze impi yetu, &c.
 
 PRAYERS AND DITTIES. 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 We hushed our foe, 
 
 \\c> hushed him, hurrah ! 
 
 The foe, hurrah ! we hushed him, 
 
 We hushed our foe, &c. 
 
 8. The natives are fond of humming some kind of a 
 song, a word, or phrase, couplet, or triplet. Some- 
 times a large company of females may be found en- 
 gaged in harvesting, walking with a measured step, with 
 baskets of rnaize on their heads, and, with a sing-song 
 tone, repeating, in concert, nothing more than the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 U tso, u tso, u tso, u tso, &c. 
 
 H saith, he saith, he saith, he saith, &c. 
 
 9. In hunting for a lost cow, or on any other occasion, 
 one might be heard singing as follows : 
 
 Ma i ze inkomo yetu, si ya yi biza ; 
 Si ti, ma i ze, ma i ze, ma i zeke ; 
 Ma i ze kumi, ma i zeke ; 
 Ma i ze inkomo yetu, si ya yi biza. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Our cow let her come, we are calling her; 
 
 We say, let her come, let her come, so let her come; 
 
 Let her come to me, then let her come; 
 
 Our cow let her come, we are calling her. 
 
 10. Several natives spent a rainy day, hard at work, 
 digging out and killing three or four porcupines, which 
 had made them trouble in their gardens ; and the next 
 morning one of them passed my door, singing the 
 following song, which, I was told, he indited for the 
 occasion; though the language would seem to indicate 
 that he was thinking quite as much of the Zulu people 
 as of porcupines and potatoes : 
 
 Oh ! imbala, bo ke ba fe, 
 
 Loku ku kwa Zulu b' emuka be nyenyeza ; 
 
 Ba ye za bonke abantu, ba ye za, 
 
 Loku ku kwa Zulu b' emuka be nyenyeza. 
 
 Oh ! imbala, &c.
 
 430 APPENDIX. 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 Truly, oh truly ! they'll perish anon, 
 The land of the Zulu so slyly they leave; 
 All the people they come, they come, 
 The land of the Zulu so slyly they leave. 
 Truly, oh truly ! &c. 
 
 11. A man selected a new building-spot, but was re- 
 fused permission to occupy it; whereupon he indited the 
 following : 
 
 Ngi bek' isanTa ku leli 'zwe ; 
 Se be li landula, he ya ye ! 
 
 THAT is 
 
 To this field I've applied my hand; 
 Now they take it away ; oh dear me ! 
 
 12. The following was sung on a buffalo-hunt : 
 
 I ye ya ye, e, i ye ya ye! 
 
 Isivunguvungu 'bevuia! 
 
 Ba dedele ba hambe ; 
 
 Be muke nazo ba buya nazo ; 
 
 Tina si *laba e vukayo, 
 
 Si yeke e nenueba. 
 
 E ye ya ye, &c. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Hurrah ! hurrah ! hurrah ! 
 A whirlwind ! the buffalo ! 
 Some leave and go home; 
 Softie pursue and obtain ; 
 We shoot the rising, 
 But leave the wounded. 
 Hurrah ! hurrah ! Sic. 
 
 13. The following is a specimen of their imigubo, or 
 izalu, a parting song at the close of a hunt : 
 
 Ngi yeke, Umtsengele ; 
 
 Ngi funa isalu senkomo zi ka Miaba. 
 
 O ka 'Maiina wa ya ngapi? 
 
 W emuka noMzingane ka 'Yabane; 
 
 Aike bo, aike bo, aike bo ! 
 
 JLeyo 'njina ku'le, si Jumbeni.
 
 PRAYERS AND DITTIES. 1,)| 
 
 THAT IS 
 
 Let me go, Unichengeh>; 
 
 I want a hunt lor the cattle of father 
 
 Where has the son of Masina gone ? 
 
 He went with Zingane sou of Yabane, 
 
 Oh never, oh never, oh never ! 
 
 That hunt was a good one, give us a fill. 
 
 14 In the following we have an um\wayo, a specimen 
 of a domestic song, or an evening hut-song : 
 
 Izizwe ma zi bone ukusa nokutsoria ilanga ; 
 
 Si zwe be ti, ba beke kwa Zulu ; 
 
 Ka b' azi uba ku kona Okula kwa Zulu ; 
 
 Ku kona Isanlu, 
 
 Si za ku yi wela yonke imifula. 
 
 Yeuka 'silo samakosi. 
 
 Izizwe ma zi bone, &c. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 Let peaceful tribes be undisturbed ; 
 We hear it said, there are foes at hand; 
 Little do they know of Kula kwa Zulu; 
 That the soldiers of Sanku are there, 
 Now waiting for orders all rivers to cross. 
 Come, show thyself, thou tiger of kings ! 
 Let peaceful tribes, &c. 
 
 [This song had reference to a threatened attack upon the Amazulu, 
 from an inland force, under command of Mangwana, son of Umzilikazi. 
 The men of Sanku, one of the royal military posts, call on their chief 
 Umpande, the tiger of kings, to come down, see their zeal, and send 
 them out to meet the foe.] 
 
 15. The following is another specimen of an um- 
 \wayOy or an evening hut- song : 
 
 Z' aluke esila'leni si ka 'Dzaxa, 
 
 Z' aluke, zi ya wela Impangeni ; 
 
 Zi ya baleka ; zi uotswa ini? 
 
 Zi uotswa ngAmapovela. 
 
 Ka ngi yi ku xaya 'gwidzi, ngi ng' azi ; 
 
 Ka ngi yi ku xaya 'gwidzi, ngi ng' azi ; 
 
 Ku sesikelekeleni esiyembeni, 
 
 Lapa ku 'langana kona imifula, 
 
 Ngi fike se be ngi pete Elukula
 
 432 APPENDIX. 
 
 Be ti, 'sipundu 'ku boni ; 
 Izindza zi ya c leka ; sa zi kuza. 
 Zi ko'lisa 'bani, E? 
 U buza mina? nga sa buza isigidi, 
 Ku leso, 'mpakati, ha-ha, ku leso. 
 Z' aluke esi c la c leni, &c. 
 
 THAT is 
 
 The cattle were feeding in the fields of Jaka, 
 
 Were feeding, and crossed the Pangeni; 
 
 Lo ! they flee; and why ? of what afraid ? 
 
 Afraid of the troops in trappings of white. 
 
 I shall not, can not, lead the dance; 
 
 I shall not, can not, lead the dance. 
 
 From the broad, alluring gates, 
 
 There where all the rivers meet, 
 
 To Kula I came, now talked about : 
 
 " From thee is hid the back of thy head; 
 
 The dogs, now fawning, were just now growling." 
 
 " Indeed ! they're not worth minding." 
 
 Do you want my thought ? Then go to the riddle ; 
 
 To that one, my lords, oh yes, to that. 
 
 The cattle were feeding, &c. 
 
 THE END.
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 9LAPR 
 ^~ci 
 
 Of JAN 2 3
 
 5' 
 
 Jf 1 
 
 ooo
 
 
 
 m